Fiber Service Platform 150GE11xPro

Provisioning and Operations

Product Release: 9.2

Document Issue: A
Document Number: 80000043332
Copyright © 2001-2017 ADVA Optical Networking SE

All rights reserved. Hardware and software mentioned in this document includes software developed by ADVA
Optical Networking SE ("ADVA Optical Networking"), the Apache Software Foundation
([Link] Teodor Danciu ([Link] and/or other open source
software. Some software was created using ORBacus for Java by Object-Oriented Concepts, Inc.

Trademarks

The terms ADVATM, FSP 3000®, EtherjackTM and the EtherjackTM logo are trademarks or registered
trademarks of ADVA Optical Networking in the United States, Germany and/or other countries. All other
company products or services mentioned in this document may be trademarks or service marks of ADVA
Optical Networking or their respective owner.

Patents

The content described in this document may be covered by patents or pending patent applications of ADVA
Optical Networking. The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents.

Disclaimers

Nothing in this document shall be construed as granting any license or rights with respect to its content or the
patents and trademarks mentioned above. The content of this document may include technical inaccuracies or
typographical errors, and is subject to change at any time without notice. Reliance on this content is at the
relying party's sole risk and will not create any liability or obligation for ADVA Optical Networking. Any
references in this document to publications and/or Internet sites that are not from ADVA Optical Networking are
provided for convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those publications and/or
Internet sites. The materials within those publications and/or Internet sites are not part of the materials for any
ADVA Optical Networking information, product, or service, and use of those publications and/or Internet sites is
at your own risk.

THE CONTENT OF THIS DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED ''AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL ADVA OPTICAL NETWORKING, ITS AFFILIATES, EMPLOYEES, OFFICERS OR ITS SUPPLIERS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND BASED ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
OUT OF THE USE OF THIS DOCUMENT, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
THE SAME APPLIES FOR ANY HARDWARE OR SOFTWARE COVERED BY THIS DOCUMENT,
UNLESS A SIGNED AGREEMENT WITH ADVA OPTICAL NETWORKING OR THE APPLICABLE
PRODUCT LIABILITY LAW EXPRESSLY STATES OTHERWISE.

ADVA Optical Networking SE

5755 Peachtree Industrial Blvd
Norcross, Georgia 30092
USA
Phone +1 678 728 8600
Fax +1 678 728 8788
[Link]

2 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Table of Contents
Overview 13

Common OAM Capabilities 14

Etherjack® 15
ConnectGuardTM 15
GE101Pro 16
GO102Pro(S) 17
GO102Pro(SP) 19
GE112Pro 21
GE112Pro (H) 22
GE112Pro (m) 23
GE114Pro 24
GE114Pro (C) 25
GE114Pro (SH) 26
GE114Pro (CSH) 27
GE114Pro (HE) 28
Document Overview 29
Audience 30
Related Documentation 30
Documentation Feedback 30
Obtaining Technical Assistance 31
Customer Login 31
FSP 150-GE11xPro Product Overview 32
Management Interfaces 32
Web-based Element Management System 32
Command Line Interface 32
Simple Network Management Protocol 33
NETCONF/YANG Interface 34
Alarm Generation and Monitoring 34
Management Features 35
User Management and Security 35
Local User Profile Management 35
SNMP User Management 35
ACL Management 36
Security Banner 36
RADIUS or TACACS+ 36
Provisioning 36
Communications Provisioning 36
Operations Provisioning 36
Provisioning System Options 36
Provisioning Network Elements 37
Provisioning Protection 37
Provisioning Secure Access 37
Provisioning Alarms 37
Provision Environmental Alarm Inputs - GE114Pro (HE) 37
Provisioning Cable Length Benchmarks 38
Provisioning Performance Monitoring 38
FSP 150GE11xPro Hardware Descriptions 39

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 3

 Connector and LED Descriptions 41
Front Panel Connector Descriptions 41
Environment Alarm Specific Connector 42
Clock Specific Connectors 42
Chassis Dimensions 45
Cable Tie Support (Integral) 46
Mounting Brackets 46
System LEDs 46
Local Management Port LEDs 47
Ethernet Port LEDs 49
GE112Pro and GE114Pro Ethernet Port LED Definition 49
GE101Pro and GO102Pro Ethernet Port LED Definition 50
Rear Panel Connector Description 50

Web-based Element Management System 55

Introduction 55
Minimum System Requirements 59
Logging On and Off 60
Logging On 60
Logging Off 67
User Session Timeout 68
Getting Familiar with the Web-based GUI 69
About the Workspace 70
Title Bar 70
Menu Bar 70
Tool Bar 71
Selection Tree 73
Details Pane 74
Operations and Provisioning Field Types 75
Command Buttons 75
Alarms Pane 76
Keyboard Navigation 77
Web-based GUI Applications 78
Configuration View 79
Maintenance View 83
Viewing Entities in Maintenance View 87
Editing Alarm Attributes 88
Loopbacks 89
Etherjack® Diagnostics 90
Performance Monitoring View 91
ESA and CFM 91
Precision Time Protocol 91
Sync Jack 91
Service Activation Test 91
Two-Way Active Measurement Protocol 91
Open Flow 91
ConnectGuard 91
IPFIX 91

4 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

Operations and Provisioning 93

Introduction 93
Upgrade Software 94
Provisioning the GE11xPro 103
Recommended Sequence of Steps for Initial Turn Up of a GE11xPro 104
Provision System Options 106
Configure System 106
Configure Logs 108
Configure ACL 110
Configure LLDP 111
Edit the Security Banner 112
Edit Time Zone 113
Edit System Time of Day 114
Configure Data Export 118
Provision NE-1 Common Units 120
Configure NE-1 120
Configure NTE11xPRO 122
Configure PSUs - GE112Pro (H)/GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)/GE114Pro (HE) 123
Provision PSE 125
Configure PSE Group 125
Configure PSE Port 126
Provision Secure Access 127
Configure Security Keys 127
Configure Security Policy 130
Configure Local Non-Crypto Users 131
Configure Local Crypto User - GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (CSH) 135
Configure Remote Authentication 141
Provision SNMP Access 143
Enable Software License 144
Configure Flexible Port (Ethernet Port II) 147
Provision Access Port Services 148
Ethernet Private Line Service Provisioning 149
Ethernet Virtual Private Line Service Provisioning 164
Provision Network Ports 181
Provision Network Ports without LAG or Protection Group 182
Provision Network Ports in a Protection Group 187
Provision Ports in a LAG Group 191
Provision Ports in a Split Horizon Group (SHG) 196
Provision Network Ports in an Ethernet Ring Protection Group 198
Provision Ethernet over Multiprotocol Label Switching (EoMPLS) 208
Provision GRE 217
Provision GRE IP Interface 217
Provision GRE Tunnel 218
Port Mirroring Provisioning 220
Provision ELP 233
Create ELP 233
Eidt ELP 234
Provision ConnectGuard - GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (CSH) 236
Provision Secure Traffic 237
Provision Crypto User’s Authorizations 256

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 5

 Provision Layer-3 Services 258
Provision Bidirectional Fault Detection (BFD) 289
Provision VXLAN 297
Enable VXLAN Software License 298
Configure VTEP 299
Configure VTEP IP Interface 300
Configure VXLAN Segment 302
Configure VXLAN IPv4 Route 304
Provision IPFIX 305
Enable IPFIX Software License 306
Configure IPFIX Exporter 307
Configure IPFIX Template 308
Configure IPFIX Metering Process 310
Configure IPFIX Observation Domain 311
Configure IPFIX Observation Point 312
Provision OpenFlow 313
Configure OpenFlow Controller 315
Configure Management Tunnels 316
Enable Software License for OpenFlow 317
Configure OpenFlow-Capable Switch 318
Configure OpenFlow Logical Switch 319
Enable Ethernet Ports for OpenFlow 320
Configure OpenFlow Queue 322
Enter OpenFlow Controller Information 324
Configure OpenFlow with OpenFlow Controller 326
Verify OpenFlow Configuration on Switch 328
View OpenFlow Statistics 330
View OpenFlow Queue Statistics 331
Provision Management Tunnel(s) 332
Provision AMP Server and Client 333
Provision Precision Time Protocol (PTP) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH) 339
Transparent Clock Provisioning Order 339
G.8265 Boundary Clock Provisioning Order 339
G.8265 Mini Grand Master Clock Provisioning Order 340
G.8265 Remote Slave Provisioning Order 340
G.8275 Mini Grand Master Clock Provisioning Order 340
G.8275 Boundary Clock Provisioning Order 341
Enable Software Licensing for PTP-MC/BC 343
Edit an Ethernet Port’s Delay Asymmetry Setting 344
Create a Transparent Clock 345
Create a Telecom Slave 349
Create a Boundary Clock 359
Edit the Time Clock 365
Add Time Clock Reference 366
Operate Time Clock Reference Switch 368
Create a G.8265 Mini Grand Master Clock 369
Create / Verify a G.8265 Static Remote Slave 375
Provision Boundary Clock / Master Clock to Accept a Static Remote Slave 376
Create / Verify a G.8265 Dynamic Remote Slave 379
Verify a Dynamic Remote Slave Connectivity 380

6 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Create a G.8275 Mini Grand Master Clock 383
Create / Verify a G.8275 Remote Slave 387
Verify a G.8275 Remote Slave Connectivity 392
Provision Synchronous Ethernet (Sync-E) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH) 394
Edit System Sync Domain 396
Edit BITS-IN 397
Edit BITS-OUT 398
Edit CLK Port 399
Edit PPS Port 400
Edit TOD Port 401
Edit GPS Port 402
Edit Sync-E on a Network Port or Access Port 403
Add a Sync Reference 404
Edit a Sync Reference 406
Delete a Sync Reference 407
Provision Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) 409
Provision Environmental Alarms - GE114Pro (HE) 413
Provision Performance Monitoring 414
Database and Configuration Files 415
ICF Configuration Files 415
Determine Database Configuration Status 415
Set a System Default Database 416
Create a Database Backup 422
Restore Database 426
Restore System Defaults 429
Restore Factory Defaults 430
CLI Configuration Files 432
CLI Configuration File Management 432
Transfer File 434
List 434
Restart-with-configfile 434
Load 435
Show 435
Description 436
Remove 436
Configuration File Procedures 436
CLI Configuration File Procedure 437
Configuration File Procedure - Using the web-based GUI 439
Default Settings Value File 445
Bulk Log Transfer 448
Diagnostics Files 451
Test the FSP 150-GE11xPro 455

Communications Provisioning 457

Provision Communications 458

Management Communication to the GE11xPro 459
Serial Connection 460
Set Up the GE11xPro DCN (eth0) Port Using the Serial Port 461
Set Up the USB Modem Using the Serial Port 466
Set up WiFi Connection via the Wifi Dongle 469

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 7

 Browser-based IP Connection 473
Edit DCN (eth0) Configuration 474
Configure Management Tunnel 478
Configure IPv6 over IPv4 Tunnel 487
Configure Source Address 489
Add/Delete Static Route 491
Add/Delete Static ARP Entry 493
Add/Delete IPv6 Static Route 494
Add/Delete IPv6 Static Neighbor Entry 496
Add/Delete IPv6 Static Proxy ND Entry 499
Configure Access Control List 501
Configure USB Modem Using the Web-based GUI 501
Sample Network - GNE to SNE over Management Tunnel 509

Etherjack/Syncjack Test Procedures and Performance Monitoring 515

Introduction 515
Loopbacks 516
Performing Loopbacks Using the Web-based GUI 517
Etherjack® Diagnostics 519
Transmission Media Analysis 519
Ethernet Fault Isolation and Diagnostics 520
Cable Length Benchmarks 522
Manually Entering / Editing Cable Length Benchmarks 523
Performance Monitoring 525
Overview 525
Etherjack® PM Features 526
Performance Parameters 527
Performance Parameter Attributes 528
Performance Parameter Counters 529
Bins and Bin Periods 529
Rollover Counter 529
Performance Parameter Thresholding 530
Optical Performance Parameter Thresholding 530
Threshold Crossing Alert Messages 531
Viewing PM Counts and Threshold Values 532
Viewing PMs for Network Port, Access Port, Flow or LAG 532
Viewing PMs for ESA Probes 542
Initializing PM and Distribution Registers 544
Initializing Network Port, Access Port, Flow and LAG Registers 544
Initializing ESA Probe PM Registers 545
Initializing ESA Probe Distribution Registers 546
Editing PM Thresholds 548
Edit Network Port, Access Port, Flow or LAG PM Thresholds 548
Edit ESA Probe PM Registers 549
ESA Provisioning and Operation 551
Provision a Layer-3 Probe 551
Provision a Y.1731 Probe 555
Provision a Reflector 561
Provision an ESA Schedule 564
CFM Provisioning and Operation 572

8 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Etherjack® Connection Performance Analyzer 586
Run Untagged ECPA Test on an Access Facility 589
Run VLAN ECPA Test on an Access Facility 591
Service Activation Testing 594
SyncJack Testing - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH) 609
Probing Feature 610
General Guideline for Reference Accuracy Used by the Probes 610
Clock Accuracy 610
Clock Analysis 610
PTP Network Analysis 610
MTIE Comparison 610
Raw Data Collection 610
Performing Clock Accuracy Testing 612
Performing Clock Analysis 625
Clock Analysis - Telecom Slave Score (for future) 635
Performing PTP Network Analysis 637
Provision Raw Data Collection 645
Raw Data File Format 647
Raw Data File Format – Header 647
Raw Data File Format – Measurement Results 647
Two-Way Active Measurement Protocol 649
Layer-2 TWAMP Provisioning Order 650
Layer-3 TWAMP Provisioning Order 651
Provision TWAMP on TWAMP IP Interface 652
Provision TWAMP on Traffic IP Interface 674

Alarms, Error Codes, and Events 675

Recommended Steps for Trouble Clearing 675

Obtaining Technical Assistance 677
Alarm Attributes, Probable Cause and Trouble Clearing 677
Alarm Profile Notification Codes 678
Alarms and Events 679
PTP Alarms - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH) 695
Network Port and Access Port Alarms 702
CFM Maintenance End Point Alarms 711
CFM QoS Shaper Alarms 715
LAG Alarms 716
SAT Responder Session Alarms 718
ELP Alrams 718
ERP Alarms 719
SyncJack Alarms - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH) 720
Open Flow Alarms 721
Secure Flow Alarms - GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (CSH) 722
Alarm Masking 723
Error Codes and System Responses 734

Provisioning Rules 765

Entity State Descriptions 766

Administration State 766

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 9

 Administration State Model Details 766
Operational State 769
Secondary State 769
User Authorization Privilege Levels 772
Configuration Settings, Rules and Dependencies 773
Factory Default Configuration Settings 774
Maximum Bandwidth 787
System Configuration Options and Rules 788
Pass-Through Flow Configuration Options and Rules 831
PSE Group Configuration Rules 835
PSE Port Rules 836
LAG Configuration Rules 837
Network Port Configuration Options and Rules 843
Access Port Configuration Options and Rules 849
Edit Access Port Configuration 850
EPL Service Provisioning Rules 850
EVPL Service Provisioning Rules 865
Default Priority Mapping Profile Tables 889
EoMPLS Configuration Options and Rules 891
Create/Edit EoMPLS PW 891
Specify an IP Address for Network Port (Physical or Logical) 893
EoMPLS Related Settings on Associated Flow 893
GRE Configuration and Rules 895
ELP Configuration and Rules 897
ConnectGuard Configuration Options and Rules - GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (CSH) 898
Create/Edit Key Exchange Profile 899
Create/Edit Secure Flow 900
Configure Secure Flow Attributes 902
Configure Crypto User’s Authorizations for System Operations 903
Layer-3 Services Configuration Options and Rules 904
Create/Edit L3 Flow Point 906
Create/Edit ACL Rule 910
Edit ACL Rule Priority 913
Create/Edit Traffic IP Interface 914
Add Static ARP Entry on Traffic IP Interface 916
Create/Edit VRF 918
Create/Edit Static Route for VRF 919
Create/Edit DHCP Relay Agent 920
BFD Configuration Options and Rules 921
Create/Edit BFD Session 921
VXLAN Configuration Option and Rules 923
IPFIX Configuration and Rules 925
OpenFlow Configuration Options and Rules 928
OpenFlow Instruction Supports 930
Management Tunnel Configuration Options and Rules 931
IPv6 over IPv4 Tunnel Configuration Options and Rules 937
CPD Filters Options and Rules 940
LLDP Configuration Settings 945
E-LMI Configuration Settings 947
Loopback Settings 948

10 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Environmental Alarms Settings - GE114Pro (HE) 952
Performance Monitoring Settings 953
EOMPLS Monitored Types 954
Ethernet Network Port Monitored Types 954
Ethernet Access Port Monitored Types 965
QoS Shaper Monitored Types 973
N2A Shaper Monitored Types 973
Port-based A2N and N2N Shaper Monitored Types 974
Flow-based Shapers Monitored Types 975
Flow Monitored Types 976
Flow QOS Policer Monitored Types (A2N, N2A and N2N) 981
Layer-three QOS Policer Monitored Types 982
layer-three QOS Shaper Monitored Types 983
ESA Probe Monitored Types 984
GRE IP Interface Monitor Types 996
GRE Tunnel Monitored Types 997
Network and Access Port PTP Flow Point Monitored Types 998
PTP MCI Monitored Types 1003
PTP Remote Slave Monitored Types 1004
SOOC Monitored Types 1006
PTP Clock Monitored Types 1009
PTP Port Monitored Types 1010
Pass-through Flow Monitored Types 1012
Layer-three Flow Point Monitored Types 1014
Traffic IP Interface Monitored Types 1015
Layer-three Traffic ACL Rule Monitored Types 1016
Layer-two A2N ACL Rule Monitored Types 1017
Layer-two N2A ACL Rule Monitored Types 1018
Mirror ACL Rule Monitor Types 1019
Secure Flow Monitored Types 1020
TX Secure Channel Monitored Types 1021
RX Secure Channel Monitored Types 1022
TX Secure Association Monitored Types 1023
RX Secure Association Monitored Types 1024
TWAMP Monitored Types 1025
VXLAN Segment Monitored Types 1030
Port Mirroring Configurations and Rules 1031
ESA Options and Rules 1035
Scheduled ESA Activity Settings 1041
CFM Configuration Options and Rules 1043
Configure System Default MD Parameters 1043
Configure Server MEP Parameters 1044
Configure CFM VLAN Table 1045
Configure Maintenance Domain 1045
Configure Maintenance Association Network 1046
Configure Maintenance Association Component 1048
Configure Maintenance End Point 1050
Initiate Loopback Message 1053
Initiate Link Trace Message 1054
PTP Configuration Options and Rules - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH) 1055

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 11

 Transparent Clock Provisioning Order 1055
G.8265 Boundary Clock Provisioning Order 1055
G.8265 Mini Grand Master Clock Provisioning Order 1056
G.8265 Remote Slave Provisioning Order 1056
G.8275 Mini Grand Master Clock Provisioning Order 1056
G.8275 Boundary Clock Provisioning Order 1056
Create / Edit a Transparent Clock 1057
Edit Ethernet Port’s Delay Asymmetry 1058
Create / Edit a Telecom Slave 1059
Create / Edit a Slave Only Ordinary Clock (SOOC) 1062
Create / Edit a PTP Flow Point 1065
Create / Edit an Ordinary Clock Slave (OCS) Port 1066
Create / Edit a Boundary Clock 1066
Create / Edit a Master Clock 1068
Create / Edit a Master Clock Interface 1069
Create / Edit a Master Virtual Port 1072
Create / Edit a Static Slave 1073
Edit / Delete a Dynamic Slave 1075
Create / Edit a PTP Clock 1076
Create / Edit a PTP Port 1079
SyncJack Configuration Options and Rules - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH) 1080
Clock Accuracy Parameters 1080
Create / Edit a Clock Probe 1080
Clock Analysis Parameters 1082
Create / Edit a PTP Clock Probe 1082
Edit Telecom Slave Analysis Parameters (for future) 1084
PTP Network Analysis Parameters 1085
Create / Edit a PTP Network Probe 1085
Scheduled SyncJack Activity Settings 1086
Result Analysis 1088
Configure MTIE Comparison Parameters 1088
Edit Raw Data Collection Parameters 1089
SAT Configuration Options and Rules 1090
Edit SAT Control 1090
Create/Edit SAT Test Stream 1091
Edit SAC Profile 1094
Create/Edit SAT Test Stream Wizard 1096
TWAMP Configuration Options and Rules 1098
Create /Edit TWAMP IP Interface 1098
TWAMP Control Client Operations 1099
Create / Edit Session Sender Operations 1100
TWAMP Server Operations 1103
Create/Edit/Delete TWAMP Session Reflector 1104

12 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

Overview
The ADVA Optical Networking FSP 150 family of Ethernet access products provides
devices for Ethernet demarcation, extension and aggregation to support delivery of
intelligent Ethernet services both in-region and out-of-region.

Optimized for wireless backhaul, the FSP 150GE11xPro enables delivery of Ethernet
services as well as highly accurate synchronization over a fiber-based access network in
a temperature-hardened platform ideal for remote cabinets.

The FSP 150GE11xPro is convection cooled (no fans or filters) and is designed for use in
a desktop or communications closet environment. A selection of wall-mount / rack-mount
kits may be ordered separately (see FSP 150-GE11xPro System Description document
for mounting kit details).

Multiple units may be stacked up to 4 rows high, depending on the operating environment.
(Refer to FSP 150GE11xPro R9.2 Installation and Commissioning Manual document for
air flow requirement details.) A detailed list of system features is provided in FSP
150GE11xPro R9.2 System Description document.

The GE101Pro product is 24.5mm high, 13.5mm wide, 113.5mm deep, which are
equipped with a back mounted barrel connectors for 12V AC/DC power adapters.

The GO102Pro(S) and GO102Pro(SP), 66 mm high, 160mm wide, 240mm deep, which
are equipped with either a single AC or -48VDC integrated power supply.

The GE112Pro (m) product is a 34.2 mm high (including heat sink), 144.8 mm wide
(including mounting bracket) and 152 mm deep chassis, which are equipped with two
back mounted barrel connectors for 12V AC/DC power adapters.

The GE112Pro/GE114Pro/GE114Pro (C) product is a 1U (44 mm) high, half-width

chassis, which may be ordered equipped with either a single AC or -48VDC integrated
power supply. The GE112Pro can also be powered by a 12V AC/DC power adapter.

The GE112 (H)/GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)/GE114Pro (HE) product is a 1U high,

full-width chassis, with redundant modular Power Supply Unit (PSU) slots (AC and/or
DC).

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 13

Common OAM Capabilities

Common OAM Capabilities

A rich set of remote OAM capabilities ensure that the equipment can be installed and the
services can be turned on without any on-site provisioning. Optional Network port
protection and temperature hardening ensure high service availability for mission critical
applications, while Service Level Agreement (SLA) verification can be ensured via
integrated SLA monitoring. Small Formfactor Pluggable (SFP) optical devices address a
wide range of optical fibers, reaches and wavelengths.

14 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Etherjack®

Etherjack®
ADVA Optical Networking’s patent-pending Etherjack technology allows a carrier to
deploy profitable Ethernet services by providing an intelligent Ethernet demarcation point
that includes an 802.1ag, Y.1731 and 802.3ah compliant Network Interface Device (NID)
for OAM functionality, plus a Metro Ethernet Forum (MEF) certified User Network
Interface (UNI) for providing advanced services definition. In addition to Y.1731, the
Network Interface Device (NID) supports Etherjack Service Assurance (ESA) for in-
service SLA monitoring critical for carrier-class Ethernet services. The Etherjack service
UNI provides service intelligence necessary for defining Committed Information Rate
(CIR), Excess Information Rate (EIR) and burst size of individual port flow, priorities or
VLANs. ADVA Optical Networking’s unique demarcation function enables carriers to
provide differentiated, profitable Ethernet services.

ConnectGuardTM
ConnectGuardTM is ADVA Optical Networking’s Trade Mark functionality that is
developed based on the Media Access Control (MAC) Security standard defined in IEEE
802.1AE-2006 and IEEE 802.1AEbn-2011. It allows authorized systems that attach to
and interconnect LANs in a network to maintain confidentiality of transmitted data and to
take measures against frames transmitted or modified by unauthorized devices.

With the advantage of ConnectGuard, the GE11xPro products which support this feature
can broaden the application range and benefit both the Customer Premise Equipment
(CPE) and the Service Provider.

• CPE based encryption: The traffic may be secured at the customer CPE with the Inner
VLAN encrypted and Outer VLAN tagged at the NID.
• Management service encryption: The encryption starts from the NID owned by the
Service Provider. The NID is able to filter the traffic based on the incoming VLAN ID
and entry the traffic based on the policy that is to be defined by the end user.
• The smaller overhead of implementing MAC security in an end to end manner makes
ConnectGuard - MAC encryption a good solution for Layer-2 based backhaul.

More information on ConnectGuard and the current implementation can be found in FSP
150-GE11xPro System Description.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 15

Etherjack®

GE101Pro
The GE101Pro has the following main features:

l No regular DCN Port.

l A Female Type-B Micro USB Port which works as a Serial Port.
l Picking up power from an Adapter connected in the rear.
l Easy to be fixed on the wall or place on desktop.
l A Reset button to cold-reboot the device or restore its database to Factory Default
status.
l One Network interface that operates in optical mode (100BaseFX or 1000BaseX) via
a Small Form factor Pluggable (SFP) transceiver or electrical (10/100/1000BaseT) via
RJ45 connector.
l One Access interfaces , configured as either electrical (10/100/1000BaseT) via RJ45
connector or optical (100BaseFX or 1000BaseX) via an SFP transceiver.
l Layer-3 Services Forwarding and ACL Filtering
l Etherjack Service Assurance (ESA) and Connectivity Fault Management (CFM)
l G.8032 Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP)
l Y.1564 Service Activation Testing (SAT)
l Two-Way Active Measurement Protocol (TWAMP)
l Open Flow (OF)

With two Ethernet copper/fiber combination ports, the GE101Pro device is capable of
supporting single customers or service configurations over a GbE or 100FX optical
connection. The Ethernet combination ports that may be configured for copper
(10/100/1000BASE-T) or optical (100BASE-FX/1000BASE-X). Port one is fixed and
always designated as a Network port. Port two is an Access ports. The GE101Pro is a
version of the product that does not include Synchronous Ethernet (Sync-E) capability
and ConnectGuard functionality. See Figure 1 for the front view of the GE101Pro.

Figure 1: GE101Pro Front Panel View

16 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Etherjack®

GO102Pro(S)
The GO102Pro has the following main features:

l No regular DCN Port.

l Unit Dimension 160 x 240x 66 mm (Width x Depth x Height )
l Two combo ports supporting RJ45(10/100/1000) and SFP 100/1000 for Access port,
on front panel.
l One Fiber port supporting SFP 100/1000 for Network port , on front panel
l One TOD/PPS Port for TOD/PPS input or output(Not used in GE11xPro 9.1).
l One power connector for external AC or DC power input, on front panel
l One Micro USB for RS-232 serial management
l One reset button for system reset in internal service area
l External LEDs for system status indication, and traffic ports (2 access ports and 1
network port)
l Operating temp in protected environment (e.g. street cabinet): -40C to +70C.
l Operating temp in unprotected environment (e.g. fully outdoors): -40C to +55C.
l Meets IP67-rated
l Support SynE.
l Powered by AC or DC (-48V or +24V).
l The DC variant can also work as a PD device (Pick up Power from Ethernet Cable
when connected to a POE Device with one of the Access Port).

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 17

Etherjack®

Figure 2: GO102Pro(S) Front View - Service Panel Remvoed

Figure 3: GO102Pro(S) Front View (AC) - Internal

Reset USB TOD/PPS ACC3 ACC2 NET

18 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Etherjack®

GO102Pro(SP)
The GO102Pro(SP) has all features supported by GO102Pro(S) while also supporting
Power over Ethernet(POE).

l No regular DCN Port.

l Unit Dimension 160 x 240x 66 mm (Width x Depth x Height )
l Two combo ports supporting RJ45(10/100/1000) and SFP 100/1000 for Access port,
on front panel.
l One Fiber port supporting SFP 100/1000 for Network port , on front panel
l One TOD/PPS Port for TOD/PPS input or output(Not used in GE11xPro 9.1).
l One power connector for external AC or DC power input, on front panel
l One Micro USB for RS-232 serial management
l One reset button for system reset in internal service area
l External LEDs for system status indication, and traffic ports (2 access ports and 1
network port)
l Operating temp in protected environment (e.g. street cabinet): -40C to +65 C
l Operating temp in unprotected environment (e.g. fully outdoors): -40C to +55C
l Meets IP67-rated
l Powered by AC or DC
l Support SynE.
l Both Access Ports can work as PSE Ports.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 19

Etherjack®

Figure 4: GO102Pro(SP) Front View - Maintenance Panel Removed

Figure 5: GO102Pro(SP) Front View (AC) - Internal

Reset USB TOD/PPS ACC3 ACC2 NET

20 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Etherjack®

GE112Pro
The GE112Pro has the following main features:
l One (Protected) Network interface that operates in optical mode (100BaseFX or
1000BaseX) via a Small Form factor Pluggable (SFP) transceiver or electrical
(10/100/1000BaseT) via RJ45 connector. Using both ports provides 1+1 protection.
Port 1 is dedicated as a Network port. Port 2 may be configured as either the Network
protection port or an Access port.
l Two Access interfaces (Three Optional - if Network protection is not
provisioned), configured as either electrical (10/100/1000BaseT) via RJ45 connector
or optical (100BaseFX or 1000BaseX) via an SFP transceiver.
l 802.1ad Provider Bridge C-Tag / S-Tag Mapping
l Layer-3 Services Forwarding and ACL Filtering
l Etherjack Service Assurance (ESA) and Connectivity Fault Management (CFM)
l G.8032 Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP)
l Y.1564 Service Activation Testing (SAT)
l Two-Way Active Measurement Protocol (TWAMP)
l Open Flow (OF)

With four Ethernet copper/fiber combination ports, the GE112Pro device is capable of
supporting multiple customers or service configurations over an optional protected GbE
or 100FX optical connection. The GE112Pro supports four Ethernet combination ports
that may be configured for copper (10/100/1000BASE-T) or optical (100BASE-
FX/1000BASE-X). Port 1 is fixed and always designated as a Network port. Port 2 (a
flexible port) may be configured for LAG or 1+1 Network protection, or as an Access port.
Ports 3 and 4 are dedicated Access ports. The GE112Pro is a version of the product that
does not include Synchronous Ethernet (Sync-E) capability and ConnectGuard
functionality. See Figure 6 for a front view of the GE112Pro -48VDC variant.

Figure 6: GE112Pro (-48VDC) Front Panel View

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 21

Etherjack®

GE112Pro (H)
The GE112Pro (H) has the following main features:
l One (Protected) Network interface that operates in optical mode (100BaseFX or
1000BaseX) via a Small Form factor Pluggable (SFP) transceiver or electrical
(10/100/1000BaseT) via RJ45 connector. Using both ports provides 1+1 protection.
Port 1 is dedicated as a Network port. Port 2 may be configured as either the Network
protection port or an Access port.
l Two Access interfaces (Three Optional - if Network protection is not
provisioned), configured as either electrical (10/100/1000BaseT) via RJ45 connector
or optical (100BaseFX or 1000BaseX) via an SFP transceiver.
l 802.1ad Provider Bridge C-Tag / S-Tag Mapping
l Layer-3 Services Forwarding and ACL Filtering
l Etherjack Service Assurance (ESA) and Connectivity Fault Management (CFM)
l G.8032 Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP)
l Y.1564 Service Activation Testing (SAT)
l Two-Way Active Measurement Protocol (TWAMP)
l Open Flow (OF)

With four Ethernet copper/fiber combination ports, the GE112Pro (H) device is capable of
supporting multiple customers or service configurations over an optional protected GbE
or 100FX optical connection. The GE112Pro (H) supports four Ethernet combination ports
that may be configured for copper (10/100/1000BASE-T) or optical (100BASE-
FX/1000BASE-X). Port 1 is fixed and always designated as a Network port. Port 2 (a
flexible port) may be configured for LAG or 1+1 Network protection, or as an Access port.
Ports 3 and 4 are dedicated Access ports.

The GE112Pro (H) is similar to the GE112Pro, except that it is a version of the product
that includes dual (redundant) pluggable Power Supply Units and is full width. The
GE112Pro (H) is a version of the product that does not include Synchronous Ethernet
(Sync-E) capability and ConnectGuard functionality.

The GE112Pro (H) product is a 1U high (44 mm), full-width (443 mm), and 218 mm deep
chassis, which may be supplied with dual AC, or -48VDC power supplies. See Figure 7
for a front view of the GE112Pro (H).

Figure 7: GE112Pro (H) Front Panel View

22 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Etherjack®

GE112Pro (m)
The GE112Pro (m) has the following main features:
l One (Protected) Network interface that operates in optical mode only (100BaseFX or
1000BaseX) via a Small Form factor Pluggable (SFP) transceiver. Using both ports
provides 1+1 protection. Port 1 is dedicated as a Network port. Port 2 may be
configured as either the Network protection port or an Access port.
l Two Access interfaces (Three Optional - if Network protection is not
provisioned) where Port 3 can be configured only as optical (100BaseFX or
1000BaseX) via an SFP transceiver and Port 4 can be configured as either electrical
(10/100/1000BaseT) via RJ45 connector or optical (100BaseFX or 1000BaseX) via an
SFP transceiver.
l 802.1ad Provider Bridge C-Tag / S-Tag Mapping
l Layer-3 Services Forwarding and ACL Filtering
l Etherjack Service Assurance (ESA) and Connectivity Fault Management (CFM)
l G.8032 Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP)
l Y.1564 Service Activation Testing (SAT)
l Two-Way Active Measurement Protocol (TWAMP)
l Open Flow (OF)

With four Ethernet fiber ports and one copper port, the GE112Pro (m) device is capable of
supporting multiple customers or service configurations over an optional protected GbE
or 100FX optical connection. The GE112Pro (m) supports four Ethernet ports that may be
configured for optical (100BASE-FX/1000BASE-X) and one Ethernet Port that may be
configured for copper (10/100/1000BASE-T) or optical (100BASE-FX/1000BASE-X). Port
1 is fixed and always designated as a Network port. Port 2 (a flexible port) may be
configured for LAG or 1+1 Network protection, or as an Access port. Ports 3 and 4 are
dedicated Access ports. The GE112Pro (m) is a version of the product that does not
include Synchronous Ethernet (Sync-E) capability and ConnectGuard functionality. See
Figure 8 for a front view of the GE112Pro (m).

Figure 8: GE112Pro (m) Front Panel View

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 23

Etherjack®

GE114Pro
The GE114Pro has the following main features:
l One (Protected) Network interface that operates in optical mode (100BaseFX or
1000BaseX) via an SFP transceiver or electrical (10/100/1000BaseT) via RJ45
connector. Using both ports provides 1+1 protection. Port 1 is dedicated as a Network
port. Port 2 may be configured as either the Network protection port or an Access port.
l Four Access interfaces (Five Optional - if Network protection is not
provisioned), configured as either electrical (10/100/1000BaseT) via RJ45 connector
or optical (100BaseFX or 1000BaseX) via an SFP transceiver.
l 802.1ad Provider Bridge C-Tag / S-Tag Mapping
l Layer-3 Services Forwarding and ACL Filtering
l Etherjack Service Assurance (ESA) and Connectivity Fault Management (CFM)
l G.8032 Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP)
l Y.1564 Service Activation Testing (SAT)
l Two-Way Active Measurement Protocol (TWAMP)
l Open Flow (OF)

With six Ethernet copper/fiber combination ports, the GE114Pro device is capable of
supporting multiple customers or service configurations over an optional protected GbE
or 100FX optical connection. The GE114Pro supports six Ethernet combination ports that
may be configured for copper (10/100/1000BASE-T) or optical (100BASE-FX/1000BASE-
X). Port 1 is fixed and always designated as a Network port. Port 2 (a flexible port) may
be configured for LAG or 1+1 Network protection, or as an Access port. Ports 3 through 6
are dedicated Access ports. The GE114Pro is a version of the product that does not
include Sync-E capability or ConnectGuard functionality. See the following figure for a
front view of the GE114Pro.

Figure 9: GE114Pro Front Panel View

24 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Etherjack®

GE114Pro (C)
The GE114Pro (C) has the following main features:
l One (Protected) Network interface that operates in optical mode (100BaseFX or
1000BaseX) via an SFP transceiver or electrical (10/100/1000BaseT) via RJ45
connector. Using both ports provides 1+1 protection. Port 1 is dedicated as a Network
port. Port 2 may be configured as either the Network protection port or an Access port.
l Four Access interfaces (Five Optional - if Network protection is not
provisioned), configured as either electrical (10/100/1000BaseT) via RJ45 connector
or optical (100BaseFX or 1000BaseX) via an SFP transceiver.
l 802.1ad Provider Bridge C-Tag / S-Tag Mapping
l Layer-3 Services Forwarding and ACL Filtering
l Etherjack Service Assurance (ESA) and Connectivity Fault Management (CFM)
l G.8032 Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP)
l Y.1564 Service Activation Testing (SAT)
l Two-Way Active Measurement Protocol (TWAMP)
l Open Flow (OF)
l ConnectGuard Functionality

GE114Pro (C) is similar to GE114Pro, except that it is a version of the product that also
supports ConnectGuard functionality. However, GE114Pro (C) is not a version of the
product that supports Sync-E capability. See the following figure for a front view of the
GE114Pro (C). Note that the front panel of GE114Pro (C) is very similar to GE114Pro,
except that there is a “blue key” symbol placed horizontally which is the logo of
ConnectGuard functionality.

Figure 10: GE114Pro (C) Front Panel View

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 25

Etherjack®

GE114Pro (SH)
The GE114Pro (SH) has the following main features:
l One (Protected) Network interface that operates in optical mode (100BaseFX or
1000BaseX) via an SFP transceiver or electrical (10/100/1000BaseT) via RJ45
connector. Using both ports provides 1+1 protection. Port 1 is dedicated as a Network
port. Port 2 may be configured as either the Network protection port or an Access port.
l Four Access interfaces (Five Optional - if Network protection is not
provisioned), configured as either electrical (10/100/1000BaseT) via RJ45 connector
or optical (100BaseFX or 1000BaseX) via an SFP transceiver.
l 802.1ad Provider Bridge C-Tag / S-Tag Mapping
l Layer-3 Services Forwarding and ACL Filtering
l Etherjack Service Assurance (ESA) and Connectivity Fault Management (CFM)
l G.8032 Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP)
l Precision Time Protocol (PTP)
l SyncJack (SJ)
l Y.1564 Service Activation Testing (SAT)
l Two-Way Active Measurement Protocol (TWAMP)
l Open Flow (OF)

The GE114Pro (SH) is similar to the GE114Pro, except that it is a version of the product
that includes dual (redundant) pluggable Power Supply Units (PSUs), and is full width.
The GE114Pro (SH) is a version of the product that supports Sync-E functionality and
has BITS IN and BITS OUT interfaces via a RJ48c connector for T1/E1 timing input and
output, one TOD interface via RJ45 connector, two Mini-SMB connectors for PPS IN and
PPS (Input/Output) respectively, one Mini-SMB connector for external 10MHz Clock
frequency output (CLK) and one additional front mounted SMA connector for external
GPS signal receiving. GE114Pro (SH) does not support ConnectGuard functionality. See
the following figure for a front view of the GE114Pro (SH).

The GE114Pro (SH) product is a 1U high (44 mm), full-width (443 mm), and 218 mm deep
chassis, which may be supplied with dual AC, or -48VDC power supplies.

Figure 11: GE114Pro (SH) Front Panel View

26 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Etherjack®

GE114Pro (CSH)
The GE114Pro (CSH) has the following main features:
l One (Protected) Network interface that operates in optical mode (100BaseFX or
1000BaseX) via an SFP transceiver or electrical (10/100/1000BaseT) via RJ45
connector. Using both ports provides 1+1 protection. Port 1 is dedicated as a Network
port. Port 2 may be configured as either the Network protection port or an Access port.
l Four Access interfaces (Five Optional - if Network protection is not
provisioned), configured as either electrical (10/100/1000BaseT) via RJ45 connector
or optical (100BaseFX or 1000BaseX) via an SFP transceiver.
l 802.1ad Provider Bridge C-Tag / S-Tag Mapping
l Layer-3 Services Forwarding and ACL Filtering
l Etherjack Service Assurance (ESA) and Connectivity Fault Management (CFM)
l G.8032 Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP)
l Precision Time Protocol (PTP)
l SyncJack (SJ)
l Y.1564 Service Activation Testing (SAT)
l Two-Way Active Measurement Protocol (TWAMP)
l Open Flow (OF)
l ConnectGuard Functionality

The GE114Pro (CSH) is similar to GE114Pro (SH), besides all the interfaces and
features supported in GE114Pro (SH), it is a version of the product that also supports
ConnectGuard functionality. See the following figure for a front view of the GE114Pro
(CSH).

The GE114Pro (CSH) product is a 1U high (44 mm), full-width (443 mm), and 218 mm
deep chassis, which may be supplied with dual AC or -48VDC power supplies.

Figure 12: GE114Pro (CSH) Front Panel View

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 27

Etherjack®

GE114Pro (HE)
The GE114Pro (HE) has the following main features:
l One (Protected) Network interface that operates in optical mode (100BaseFX or
1000BaseX) via an SFP transceiver or electrical (10/100/1000BaseT) via RJ45
connector. Using both ports provides 1+1 protection. Port 1 is dedicated as a Network
port. Port 2 may be configured as either the Network protection port or an Access port.
l Four Access interfaces (Five Optional - if Network protection is not
provisioned), configured as either electrical (10/100/1000BaseT) via RJ45 connector
or optical (100BaseFX or 1000BaseX) via an SFP transceiver.
l 802.1ad Provider Bridge C-Tag / S-Tag Mapping
l Layer-3 Services Forwarding and ACL Filtering
l Etherjack Service Assurance (ESA) and Connectivity Fault Management (CFM)
l G.8032 Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP)
l Y.1564 Service Activation Testing (SAT)
l Two-Way Active Measurement Protocol (TWAMP)
l Open Flow (OF)

The GE114Pro (HE) is similar to the GE114Pro (SH), except that it is a version of the
product that does not supports PTP related functions, Sync-E or SyncJack and does not
provide PTP related interfaces. GE114Pro (HE) supports Environmental Alarm inputs by
providing a Dry Contact RJ-45 connector in the front panel. Dual pluggable power supply
AC/-48VDC 24 Watts are supported. The front connectors are arranged differently.

The GE114Pro (HE) product is a 1U high (44 mm), full-width (443 mm), and 218 mm deep
chassis, which may be supplied with dual AC / DC power supplies. See the following
figure for a front view of the GE114Pro (HE).

Figure 13: GE114Pro (HE) Front Panel View

28 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Document Overview

Document Overview
This manual is provided to help you install, configure and operate the FSP 150GE11xPro.
This manual provides an introduction to the FSP 150GE11xPro, a description of its
operation, and a step by step walk-through of the provisioning process.

This version of the FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations Manual is applicable
to the FSP 150GE11xPro software release 9.2. For defect resolution and functional
additions please refer to the Release Notes.

Although this document focuses primarily on using the web-based Element Management
System (EMS) Graphical User Interface (GUI) for configuring and monitoring the FSP
150GE11xPro, equivalent CLI or SNMP commands may be used. For more information
regarding the CLI command structure, refer to the FSP 150GE11xPro Command Line
Interface Reference Guide. For more information regarding the SNMP command
structure, refer to the FSP 150GE11xPro SNMP User Guide.

Before installing and provisioning the FSP 150GE11xPro, familiarize yourself with the
FSP 150GE11xPro equipment, its functions and requirements. The following chapters
support the installation and operation of the FSP 150GE11xPro:

Chapter 1, Overview of the FSP 150GE11xPro contains a brief overview of the FSP 150-
GE11xPro equipment, this document and supporting documents in the document suite,
and how to obtain technical assistance.

Chapter 2, Web-based Element Management System contains an overview of web-

based GUI management tool workspace and contains procedures for logging in and
logging off.

Chapter 3, Operations Provisioning contains step by step operations and provisioning

procedures for the FSP 150GE11xPro system. It is organized in the recommended
workflow for new installations and can be applied to existing systems.

Chapter 4, Communications Provisioning contains step by step procedures for

provisioning the FSP 150GE11xPro communications interfaces. It is organized in the
recommended workflow for new installations and can be applied to existing systems.

Chapter 5, Etherjack®/Syncjack®Testing Procedures and Performance Monitoring

contains information on service loopbacks and step by step procedures for performing IP
connection tests (e.g., ping), Etherjack® Diagnostics, Cable Length Benchmarks, and
executing Etherjack Service Assurance, Connectivity Fault Management tests and
Service Activation Tests. This chapter also contains step by step procedures for viewing
PM counters, setting thresholds and initializing counters.

Chapter 6, Alarms, Events and Probable Causes contains listing of all alarms and events
generated by the system and includes the probable cause of each.

Chapter 7, Provisioning Rules contains configuration option setting information to be

used as a guide to plan, operate, configure and maintain the FSP 150GE11xPro. It
contains system default settings, configuration options and provisioning rules using the
web-based EMS GUI. High level descriptions and provisioning rules are provided for
each web-based GUI configuration option. Additional information for each option
description can be found in the FSP 150-GE11xPro System Description document and

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 29

Document Overview

Application Notes for specific features. For CLI option settings and rules, refer to the FSP
150GE11xPro Command Line Interface Reference Guide.

Audience
The reader must have sufficient knowledge of the following when using this document:

l Internet Protocol (IP) addressing

l Ethernet port facility provisioning requirements
l Power handling and connection procedures (if connecting DC power)
l IEEE 1588-2008 specification
l BITS and synchronization provisioning requirements
l relevant ITU-T specification (i.e.Y.1564, G.8032)
l MAC-based service provisioning requirements
l IP-based service provisioning requirements
l IEEE specification (i.e. 802.1ad, 802.1ae-2006, 802.1ag, 802,3, etc)
l Open Flow specification
l RFC 4656 TWAMP specification

Related Documentation
Refer to the following documents for additional information about the FSP 150GE11xPro:

l FSP 150GE11xPro R9.2 Installation and Commissioning Manuel

l FSP 150GE11xPro R9.2 System Description
l FSP 150GE11xPro R9.2 Command Line Interface Reference Guide
l FSP 150GE11xPro R9.2 Quick Start Guide
l FSP 150GE11xPro and XG116 R9.2 SNMP User Guide
l FSP 150GE11xPro and XG116 R9.2 NETCONF/YANG User Guide
l Safety Guide

Documentation Feedback
We want our manuals to be as helpful as possible. Feedback regarding the manuals are
therefore always welcome. You can e-mail your comments/suggestions to:

global-techdocu@[Link]

To submit your comments/suggestions by mail, use the following address:

ADVA Optical Networking SE

Technical Documentation
Märzenquelle 1-3
98617 Meiningen-Dreissigacker
Germany

We appreciate and value your comments/suggestions to improve the quality of our

manuals.

30 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Document Overview

Obtaining Technical Assistance

Product Maintenance Agreements and other customer assistance agreements are
available for our products through your ADVA Optical Networking distribution channel.
Technical support is available to warranty or maintenance contract customers who need
technical assistance with a product that is under warranty or covered by a maintenance
contract.

To contact ADVA Optical Networking’s Technical Services, go to the ADVA Optical

Networking “Contact Us” page at: [Link]
[Link]

and select “Support” as the department you wish to contact.

To contact ADVA Optical Networking’s Technical Services by email, use the fol- lowing
address:

support@[Link]

ADVA Optical Networking’s service options include:

l 24 X 7 telephone support
l Web-based support tools
l On-site support
l Technical training, both on-site and at company facilities in Germany, the UK and the
USA
l Expedited repair service
l Extended hardware warranty service

Customer Login ADVA Optical Networking’s customer login provides a suite of interactive, net- working
services that provide immediate access to information and resources at any time, from
anywhere in the world. This highly integrated Internet application is a powerful, easy-to-
use tool for doing business with us.

The customer login’s broad range of features and services help customers to streamline
business processes and improve productivity. Through your cus- tomer login, you will
find information tailored especially for you, including net- working solutions, services, and
programs. In addition, you can resolve technical issues with Online support services,
download and test software pack- ages, and order training materials.

Contact your local sales office for information on obtaining a customer login. Access your
customer login via the home page at [Link]

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 31

FSP 150-GE11xPro Product Overview

FSP 150-GE11xPro Product Overview

The GE11xPro is a small-volume powerful Ethernet service delivery assurance device
that brings the power of Syncjack to any network. In addition, the Layer-3 services
forwarding capability and Trade Mark function ConnectGuard for Layer-2 service security
enables full advantage of the most prevalent network technologies. A detailed list of
system features is provided in the FSP 150-GE11xPro System Description document.

Management Interfaces
The FSP 150 family of Ethernet access products support the following Management
Interfaces.

Web-based Element Management System

The FSP 150GE11xPro supports a web-based Element Management System (EMS)
Graphical User Interface (GUI) for Operation, Administration and Maintenance (OA&M)
functions. For more information on web-based EMS GUI operation, see Web-based
Element Management System.

Figure 14: Web-based GUI Management Tool

Command Line Interface

Although this document focuses on using the web-based EMS GUI for configuring and
monitoring the FSP 150GE11xPro, equivalent CLI commands may be used. The CLI

32 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Management Interfaces

command structure provides a text-based system for local configuration and

management of FSP 150GE11xPro functions. CLI access may be attained via RS-232
Serial Console Port direct connection, or telnet / ssh session. For more information
regarding the CLI command structure, refer to the FSP 150GE11xPro R9.2 Command
Line Interface Reference Guide.

Simple Network Management Protocol

Although this document focuses on using the web-based EMS GUI for configuring and
monitoring the FSP 150GE11xPro, equivalent SNMP commands may be used. The FSP
150GE11xPro SNMP MIB provides a system for remote configuration and management
of FSP 150GE11xPro functions. For more information regarding the SNMP command
structure, refer to the FSP 150GE11xPro R9.2 SNMP User Manual.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 33

Management Interfaces

NETCONF/YANG Interface
Although this document focuses on using the web-based EMS GUI for configuring and
monitoring the FSP 150GE11xPro, equivalent NETCONF commands may be used. The
NETCON/YANG models provide a text-based system for local configuration and
management of FSP 150GE11xPro functions. NETCONF access may be attained via
telnet / ssh session. For more information regarding the CLI command structure, refer to
the FSP 150GE11xPro R9.2 NETCONF/YANG Reference Guide.

Alarm Generation and Monitoring

Alarm status is displayed in the Alarms Pane located at the bottom of the web-based
EMS GUI screen. This provides constant visibility and access to current alarms,
enabling continuous alarm monitoring no matter what application is currently selected.

In the Alarms Pane, all alarms are color coded by severity: red (Critical), orange (Major)
and yellow (Minor).

For further information on the Alarms Pane, see Chapter 2 Web-based Element
Management System.

34 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Management Features

Management Features

User Management and Security

Security features include: user access security levels, Secure Sockets Layer (SSL)
support for security of Secure Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTPS), Secure Shell (SSH)
management protocols, RADIUS support, TACACS+, SNMP support, post login
security banner, and Access Control List (ACL) management.

Web access to the onboard Element Manager is via HTTP or HTTPS. Telnet, SSH,
HTTP, HTTPS, FTP, SFTP and SCP protocols may be enabled or disabled individually.
Serial port access may also be disabled. The serial port automatically logs the user off on
disconnect (provisionable).

Local User Profile Management

Up to 10 local user accounts are supported. A login inactivity time-out security feature
provides a provisionable login time-out for each user ID regardless of access type. Seven
privilege levels are supported: Superuser, Crypto, Provisioning, Maintenance, Test User,
NetConf and Retrieve (See User Authorization Privilege Levels).

Except in GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (CSH), three preconfigured user accounts are

provided as default: “root” (Superuser level), “netadmin” (Provisioning level), and “user”
(Maintenance level). Default passwords for preconfigured user accounts is
“ChgMeNOW.” Default login timeout is 15 minutes for each preconfigured user account.

In GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (CSH), a “crypto” (Crypto level) user account is also

provided as default besides the above three user accounts. Default login password for
“crypto” is “ChgMeNOW”. Default login timeout is 15 minutes.

A user account is locked for a period of 5 minutes after 3 unsuccessful login attempts (not
applicable when RADIUS authentication is used). The number of unsuccessful login
attempts are displayed in the user profile. The lockout period is not configurable.

“NetConf” users can only be created/deleted via the web-based Element Management
System (EMS) Graphical User Interface (GUI) and the Command Line Interface (CLI) by
a user with the “Superuser” privilege level. “NetConf” users have the provisioning
permission only in the NETCONF Interface. “NetConf” users may only be created or
deleted and cannot be edited or migrate to other privilege users. For complete information
regarding the provisioning and operations by “NetConf” users in NETCONF Interface,
refer to the FSP 150-GE11xPro NETCONF User Guide.

SNMP User Management

SNMP MD5/SHA1 authentication protocols and AES/DES privilege protocols are
supported.

Four preconfigured SNMP user accounts are provided as default: “ADMIN,” “MONITOR”,
“OPERATOR” and “PROVISION”. The “CRYPTO” user account is only available in
GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (CSH).

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 35

Management Features

ACL Management
Up to 10 system level ACL entries can be made, and each entry can be individually
enabled or disabled. Enabling ACL filtering will “permit” the corresponding management
traffic. Disabling the ACL filtering will “deny” the corresponding management traffic.
Enabled entries apply to all management interfaces and may be provisioned for specific
IP addresses, or an IP address range (subnetwork).

Security Banner
The security banner feature allows an operator to define a custom security banner which
is displayed whenever a user logs onto the system. This banner is displayed on CLI and
web browser logins. The system is shipped with a default security banner.

RADIUS or TACACS+
Up to three RADIUS or TACACS+ servers may be configured for remote authentication.
Both support accounting.

Provisioning
The GE11xPro provides provisioning options for the various NE functions. The following
provides a brief overview of provisioning options supported by the GE11xPro. For
detailed provisioning information, see Operations and Provisioning andProvisioning
Rules .

Communications Provisioning
The GE11xPro provides facilities to set up a management communication configuration
for a particular site or specific network configuration and supports several management
configurations and options.

Typical deployment scenarios are in common IP network configurations and within an IP

environment the GE11xPro can be connected in many different ways, e.g.:

l connected to a LAN through direct connections, a router, or an Ethernet switch

l static routes can be created to enable connections between a workstation and an
GE11xPro
l different IP functions can be used to achieve specific network goals, e.g., Proxy
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) enables one LAN-connected GE11xPro to serve
as a gateway for other equipment that is not connected to the LAN

Operations Provisioning
Provisioning System Options
Facilities are provided to provision system options, including:

l common system options, such as:

o System identity

o IP connectivity
o time

36 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Management Features

o access
o SNMP traps
l information logs, including Security, Alarm, Audit and System Logs
l system security, such as the configuration of users, Access Control List (ACL) and
the login security banner (see Facilities are provided to edit PM threshold levels and
initialize PM registers as a precursor to monitoring performance (see Performance
Monitoring).)
l the System Time of Day
l the Time Zone
l the LLLDP configurations
l data export

Provisioning Network Elements

Facilities are provided to provision NEs, including the following:

l a Network Element Identity

l Configuring Network/Access Interfaces, including:
o configuring Port Services (including Link Loss Forwarding)

o configuring an Access Port EVC (e.g., in EPL and EVPL modes)

o configuring Port EFM-OAM

Provisioning Protection
Facilities are provided to provision protection by adding a protection group for 1+1, Dual
Active Receive).

Facilities are provided to provision protection by adding a LAG group for 1:1 protection
(Network or Access interfaces).

Provisioning Secure Access

Facilities are provided to ensure that access to the FSP 150GE11xPro management
system is secure. This could entail configuring:

l SNMP details
l Users, including:
o Adding/Editing/Deleting Users

o Editing Passwords
o Editing GUI Login Time-outs
l Remote Authentication

Provisioning Alarms
Facilities are provided to modify alarm notification codes for given alarm condition types,
displayed in the Alarms Pane. The options available for notification codes are: Critical,
Major, Minor, Not Alarmed or Not Reported. For further information on Alarm Monitoring
see Alarm Generation and Monitoring.

Provision Environmental Alarm Inputs - GE114Pro (HE)

The GE114Pro (HE) provide 4 dry contact environmental alarm inputs which are
accessed via an RJ45 connector in the front of the unit. For each environmental input the

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 37

Management Features

following can be configured: Alarm Type, Notification Code, Alarm Description and Alarm
Input Mode (which indicates if the alarm input is enabled and if the monitored condition is
active when the contact is open or closed).

Provisioning Cable Length Benchmarks

Cable length benchmarks (up to 5 per Access Port) can be entered so that when future
Etherjack® Diagnostics are performed (see Etherjack® Diagnostics), a test operator can
quickly refine the fault location to a particular segment.

Provisioning Performance Monitoring

Facilities are provided to edit PM threshold levels and initialize PM registers as a
precursor to monitoring performance (see Performance Monitoring).

38 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 FSP 150GE11xPro Hardware Descriptions

FSP 150GE11xPro Hardware Descriptions

TheFSP 150GE11xPro is a 1U chassis system that comprises the following main
components:

l GE101Pro - One Network interfaces that may be configured for copper

(10/100/1000BASE-T) or optical (100BASE-FX /1000BASE-X). Port 1 is fixed and
always designated as a Network port. Port 2 is fixed as an Access port. The
GE101Pro also features a Reset to button. It can be used to cold-reboot or restore the
database to System Default status.
l GO102Pro(S)/GO102Pro(SP)- One Network interfaces that may be configured for
optical (100BASE-FX /1000BASE-X). Port 1 is fixed and always designated as a
Network port. Port 2 and Port 3 are fixed as Access ports. Both Access Ports can be
configured as Cooper (10/100/1000BASE-T) or Optical (100BASE-FX /1000BASE-X).
One TOD/PPS Port for TOD/PPS input or output.
l GE11xPro - Two Network interfaces that may be configured for copper
(10/100/1000BASE-T) or optical (100BASE-FX /1000BASE-X). Using both ports
provides 1+1 protection. Port 1 is fixed and always designated as a Network port. Port
2 may be configured for LAG or 1+1 Network protection, or as an Access port. For
GE112Pro (m), the two Network interfaces may only be configured for optical.
l GE112Pro (AC/DC/PD variants)/GE112Pro (H) - Two Access interfaces that may
be configured for copper (10/100/1000BASE-T) or optical (100BASE-FX/1000BASE-
X). Ports 3 and 4 are Access ports. Port 2 may be configured as an Access port if
Network protection is not provisioned. In addition to traffic service, the copper
interface of Port 3 in GE112Pro PD variant supports PoE which enables the PD variant
to be powered by an external PSE [Link] GE112Pro/GE112Pro (H) are
versions of the product that does not include Sync-E capability, PTP, SyncJackTM
and ConnectGuardTM functionalities.
l GE112Pro (m) - Two Fiber Access interfaces that may be configured for optical,
wherein Port 3 is optical only and Port 4 has separate interfaces for copper and
[Link] GE112Pro (m) is a version of the product that does not include Sync-E
capability, PTP, SyncJackTM and ConnectGuardTM functionalities.
l GE114Pro/GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)/GE114Pro (HE) - Four
Access interfaces that may be configured for copper (10/100/1000BASE-T) or optical
(100BASE-FX/ 1000BASE-X). Ports 3 through 6 are Access ports. Port 2 may be
configured as an Access port if Network protection is not provisioned. The
GE114Pro/GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (HE) are versions of the product that does not
include Sync-E capability, PTP and SyncJackTM functionalities. The GE114Pro
(SH)/GE114Pro (CSH) are versions of the product that supports Sync-E (ITU G.8262),
Precision Time Protocol (IEEE 1588 v2) and SyncJackTM functionalities. The
GE114Pro (C) and GE114Pro (CSH) are versions of the product that supports
ConnectGuardTM functionality.
l Local Management LAN Port (labeled MGMT LAN) - front mounted RJ-45
connector. For GE112Pro (m), it’s a back mounted RJ-45 connector. No Local
Management LAN Port for GE101Pro and GO102Pro.
l Local Serial Port (labeled RS-232) - front mounted RJ-45 connector. For GE112Pro
(m), it’s a back mounted RJ-45 connector. For GE101Pro and GO102Pro, there is no
regular Serial Port. Instead, a Micro USB port works as Serial Port.
l USB Port - high speed USB 3.0 port with type A receptacle supporting 3G/4G/LTE
management using a USB wireless adapter. For GE101Pro USB 2.0 Port is used. This
Port is not available on GO102Pro(S) or GO102Pro(SP).

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 39

FSP 150GE11xPro Hardware Descriptions

l Barrel Connector for Power Adapter - Output voltage: 12 - 13.5V; output current:
larger than 2A; 2.1mm * 5.5 mm, 7 - 11 mm length. Two back mounted barrel
connectors for GE112Pro (m). One back mounted barrel connector for GE112Pro.
l GE112Pro - Three variants available: two variants with a single integrated Power
Supply Unit (AC or -48VDC), and a third variant (PD) which can be powered by a
Power Sourcing Equipment (PSE, e.g. FSP 150CC-GE114PH) via Port 3 copper. All
the three variants may also be powered via an external adapter (+12V, AC or -48VDC,
ordered separately) connecting to the back mounted barrel connector.
l GE112Pro (m) - Two back mounted barrel connectors are equipped. GE112Pro (m)
may only be powered via the barrel connector by an AC/DC power adapter.
l GE114Pro/GE114Pro (C) - A single integrated Power Supply Unit (AC or -48VDC
variant) with integral Cable Tie support
l GE112Pro (H)/GE114Pro (SH)/GE114 (CSH)/GE114Pro (HE) - Two (redundant)
Power Supply Units (PSUs) with integral Cable Tie support (ordered separately). PSU
Blank Plates are not provided.
l GE114Pro (HE) - Environmental Alarm Input connector - front mounted RJ45
connector
l GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH) - BITS IN/BITS OUT Port - front mounted RJ-48c
T1/E1 timing input/output connector; TOD Port output connector - front mounted RJ45
connector, PPS IN /PPS (input/output) connectors- front mounted Mini-SMB
connectors, one CLK output connector - front mounted Mini-SMB connector
l GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH) - one front mounted SMA GPS connector
l Serial Console Adapter, RJ-45 to DB9, used to connect to a DB-9 RS-232 port on the
PC or Laptop.
l Rack/Wall Mounting Brackets (ordered separately)

For effective environmental protection from external objects of any

kind, the FSP 150GE11xPro is intended to be protected from dust and
particles with all covers complete. To ensure that all components are
adequately protected, do not operate the FSP 150GE11xPro for exten-
ded periods without supplying plugs for vacant electrical and optical
ports.

40 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 FSP 150GE11xPro Hardware Descriptions

Connector and LED Descriptions

Refer to the following for GE11xPro-GE11x connectors and LED descriptions when
performing the following procedures. They may be used as supporting technical
information for troubleshooting faults as well as connector and LED
location/identification. For connector pin designations, refer to “Connector Pin
Assignments” in FSP 150-GE11xPro Installation and Commissioning Manual document.

Refer to Alarm Attributes, Probable Cause and Trouble Clearing for a description of the
alarm condition, probable cause, suggested trouble clearing procedures, and associated
LED indication. To clear alarm conditions, it is suggested that you start by using the
trouble clearing procedure in Recommended Steps for Trouble Clearing, using the
associated web-based EMS GUI alarm condition.

Front Panel Connector Descriptions

All interface connections except the management connectors of GE112Pro (m) are
located at the GE11xPro front panel. The front panels of each GE11xPro are shown in
Figure 17, Figure 18, Figure 19, Figure 20, Figure 21,Figure 22, Figure 23 and Figure 24.

l GE101Pro - One Network interfaces that may be configured for copper

(10/100/1000BASE-T) or optical (100BASE-FX /1000BASE-X). Port 1 is fixed and
always designated as a Network port. Port 2 is fixed as an Access port.
l GO102Pro - One Network interfaces that may be configured for optical (100BASE-
FX /1000BASE-X). Port 1 is fixed and always designated as a Network port. Port 2
and Port 3 are fixed as Access ports. Both Access Ports can be configured as Cooper
(10/100/1000BASE-T) or Optical (100BASE-FX /1000BASE-X).
l GE11xPro - Two Network interfaces that may be configured for copper
(10/100/1000BASE-T) or optical (100BASE-FX /1000BASE-X). Using both ports
provides 1+1 protection. Port 1 is fixed and always designated as a Network port. Port
2 may be configured for LAG or 1+1 Network protection, or as an Access port. For
GE112Pro (m), the two Network interfaces may only be configured for optical.
l GE112Pro (AC/DC/PD variants)/GE112Pro (H) - Two Access interfaces that may
be configured for copper (10/100/1000BASE-T) or optical (100BASE-FX/1000BASE-
X). Ports 3 and 4 are Access ports. Port 2 may be configured as an Access port if
Network protection is not provisioned. In addition to traffic service, the copper
interface of Port 3 in GE112Pro PD variant supports PoE which enables the PD variant
powered by an external PSE equipment.
l GE112Pro (m) - Two Fiber Access interfaces that may be configured for optical,
wherein Port 3 is optical only and Port 4 has separate interfaces for copper and optical.
l GE114Pro/GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)/GE114Pro (HE) - Four
Access interfaces that may be configured for copper (10/100/1000BASE-T) or optical
(100BASE-FX/ 1000BASE-X). Ports 3 through 6 are Access ports. Port 2 may be
configured as an Access port if Network protection is not provisioned.

Common to FSP 150GE11xPro

l Local Management LAN Port (labeled MGMT LAN) - front mounted RJ-45
connector, 10/100 Base-T Management LAN port. For GE112Pro (m), it’s a back
mounted RJ-45 connector.
l Local Serial Port (labeled RS-232) - front mounted RJ-45 connector. For GE112Pro
(m), it’s a back mounted RJ-45 connector.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 41

FSP 150GE11xPro Hardware Descriptions

l USB Port - high speed USB 3.0 port with type A receptacle supporting 3G/4G/LTE
management using a USB wireless adapter. This Port is not available on GO102Pro(S)
or GO102Pro(SP).
l A single integrated Power Supply Unit (AC or -48VDC variant) with integral Cable Tie
support for GO102Pro(S)/GO102Pro(SP)/GE112Pro/GE114Pro/GE114Pro (C)
l Dual (redundant) pluggable Power Supply Unit (PSU) with integral Cable Tie support
(ordered separately) for GE112Pro (H)/GE114Pro (SH)/GE114 (CSH)/GE114Pro (HE).
One PSU Blank Plate is provided.

Environment Alarm Specific Connector

l Environmental Alarm Input connector - front mounted RJ45 connector for GE114Pro
(HE)

Clock Specific Connectors

l BITS IN/BITS OUT Port - front mounted RJ-48c T1/E1 timing input/output connector;
l TOD Port output connector - front mounted RJ45 connector;
l PPS IN /PPS (input/output) connectors- front mounted Mini-SMB connectors (50
Ohm);
l one CLK output connector - front mounted Mini-SMB connector (50 Ohm);
l one front mounted SMA GPS connector (50 Ohm);

For effective environmental protection from external objects of any kind,

theFSP 150GE11xPro is intended to be protected from dust and particles
with all covers complete. To ensure that all components are adequately pro-
tected, do not operate the FSP 150GE11xPro for extended periods without
supplying plugs for vacant electrical and optical ports.

Figure 15: GE101Pro Front Panel View

42 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 FSP 150GE11xPro Hardware Descriptions

Figure 16: GO102Pro(S) and GO102(SP) Front View (AC) - Internal

Reset USB TOD/PPS ACC3 ACC2 NET

Figure 17: GE112Pro (-48VDC) Front Panel View

Figure 18: GE112Pro (H) Front Panel View

Figure 19: GE112Pro (m) Front Panel View

Figure 20: GE114Pro Front Panel View

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 43

FSP 150GE11xPro Hardware Descriptions

Figure 21: GE114Pro (C) Front Panel View

Figure 22: GE114Pro (SH) Front Panel View

Figure 23: GE114Pro (CSH) Front Panel View

Figure 24: GE114Pro (HE) Front Panel View

44 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 FSP 150GE11xPro Hardware Descriptions

Table 1: Front Panel Connectors (Left to Right)

Section Connectors Description
PSU AC power AC power connector on AC power variant
-48 VDC power connector on DC power variant.
(Except for GE112Pro (m)) DC power
Connectors are labeled +, - and GND.
RJ-45 RS-232 Serial Console (maintenance)
Management port
(Except for GE112Pro (m)) RJ-45 10/100 Base-T Management LAN port
supports auto-MDIX capabilities
USB 3.0 port with type A receptacle supporting
USB USB 3G/4G/LTE interface for backup or DCN
access. On GE101Pro, a USB 2.0 Por it used.
Copper Ethernet Port - GE112Pro
4 10/100/1000 Base-T copper LAN port (RJ45)
(m)
Optical Ethernet Ports -
1-4 SFP optics
GE112Pro (m)
Copper Ethernet Ports -
1-4 10/100/1000 Base-T copper LAN ports (RJ45)
GE112Pro/GE112Pro (H)
Copper Ethernet Port - 10/100/1000 Base-T copper LAN port (RJ45)
3 that may connect to an external PSE equipment
GE112Pro (PD variant) to power the PD variant.
Optical Ethernet Ports -
1-4 SFP optics
GE112Pro/GE112Pro (H)
Copper Ethernet Ports -
GE114Pro/GE114Pro (C)/
1-6 10/100/1000 Base-T copper LAN ports (RJ45)
GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro
(CSH)/GE114Pro (HE)
Optical Ethernet Ports -
GE114Pro/GE114Pro (C)/
1-6 SFP optics
GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro
(CSH)/GE114Pro (HE)
Provides 4 dry contact environmental alarm
Environmental Alarm Input Port -
ALARM inputs which are accessed via an RJ45
GE114Pro (HE)
connector in the front of the unit.
BITS IN and BITS T1/E1 External Clock Input and Output, RJ-48c
Synchronization - OUT connectors (balanced 120 Ohm impedance)
GE114Pro (SH)/ TOD Time Of Day, RJ-45 connector
PPS IN Pulse Per Second connector (input)
GE114Pro (CSH) PPS Pulse Per Second connector (input/output)
CLK Clock (10MHz) connector (output only)
GPS GPS Antenna connector

Single fiber (bi-directional) and dual fiber and copper Small Form factor Pluggable (SFP)
transceivers are supported. ADVA Optical Networking strongly
encourages the use of ADVA Optical Networking sourced SFPs. For more information on
SFPs, see FSP 150-GE11xPro System Description document.
For information on connectors and LED descriptions, see Connector and LED
Descriptions. For details on connector pin assignments, see “Connection Pin
Assignments” in FSP 150-GE11xPro Installation and Commissioning Manual document.

Chassis
Dimensions The dimensions of the chassis are:

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 45

FSP 150GE11xPro Hardware Descriptions

l GE101Pro, 113.5mm wide, 113.5mm deep and 24.5mm high.

l GO102Pro(S) and GO102Pro(SP)160mm wide, 240mm deep and 66 mm high.
l GE112Pro/GE114Pro/GE114Pro (C) half width, without mounting brackets: 220 mm
l GE112Pro (H)/GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)/GE114Pro (HE) full width, without
mounting brackets: 443 mm
l Height, 1U: 44 mm
l Depth, without International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) and optical
connectors: 218 mm. The depth allows the chassis to fit into a 300 mm (11.81 in) deep
European Telecommunication Standardization Institute (ETSI) cabinet.
l GE112Pro (m) is a a 34.2 mm high (including heat sink), 144.8 mm wide (including
mounting bracket) and 152 mm deep chassis.

Cable Tie
Support
(Integral) Cable handling for the FSP 150GE11xPro is provided by means of an integral Cable Tie
Support. This is located on the mounting brackets which provides a means to tie down all
cables.

Mounting
Brackets The chassis may be positioned as a standalone unit or it may be rack mounted or wall
mounted. Adaptation to rack mounting is possible by using mounting brackets, which
may be ordered separately. Mounting kits are available for a variety of mounting
environments (see Equipment Part Number in FSP 150-GE11xPro System Description
document):

l Wall mounting (GE112Pro (m) provides an integrated mounting bracket on the outside
of the Left-Hand (LH) side panel)
l Standard 19-inch, 23-inch rack or ETSI mounting for a single unit or dual
GE112Pro/GE114Pro/GE114Pro (C) units, or for a single GE112Pro (H)/
GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)/GE114Pro (HE)
l 19-inch, 23-inch rack or ETSI Extended (recessed) mounting in order to ensure that
optical fiber bend radius is maintained when installed in some cabinets with doors.
Bracket configurations are provided for mounting for a single unit or dual
GE112Pro/GE114Pro/GE114Pro (C) units, or for a single GE112Pro (H)/GE114Pro
(SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)/GE114Pro (HE).

All brackets are designed to be screwed to the sides of the chassis and the screws
supplied have ETSI compatible threads.

System LEDs
The names and functions of each general system LED are described in the following
table.

46 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 FSP 150GE11xPro Hardware Descriptions

Table 2: System LEDs

LED Name Color Definition
PSU-n Status (GE112Pro Off No input power detected
(H)/
Input power present and PSU operating with normal lim-
GE114Pro (SH)/ Green
its
GE114Pro (CSH)/
GE114Pro (HE) Red PSU fail or input power out of spec
Off No Power detected
Green Normal operation
Equipment Initializing. The card is out of the boot loader
and into the kernel. Software image validation is taking
Flashing-Green
place and boot kernel, system kernel, system ini-
tialization, and system applications are all being started.
Equipment initializing. After power rails are within tol-
STA Yellow erance, the hardware sets this LED to solid yellow and it
stays yellow while the processor is initializing.
(Apply to all GE11xPro Equipment initializing.
products except
GE101Pro/GO102Pro(S) l The card is in the boot loader stage. Either MTPS is
and GO102Pro(SP)) Flashing Yellow being loaded and the self-diagnosis is running or the
KDI is validated and loaded.
l It also can indicate that software download or
database backup/restore operations are in progress.
Equipment Failure. Also, during boot-up, the Status LED
Red is momentarily lit Red until all card power rails are up and
within tolerance.
Flashing Red Equipment doesn't match provisioning.
Off No Power detected
STA Green Normal operation
Initial power on before self-test initiation; Power OK, but
GE101Pro/GO102Pro(S) Red
fault present
and GO102Pro(SP) only Orange Hardware self-test and configuration
Green Flashing Software initialization

Local Management Port LEDs

The names and functions of each local management LAN port LED are described in the
following table.

Table 3: Local Management Port LEDs

Connector LED Color Definition
RJ-45 (LAN) Off No link
Link/ Green Link
Activity Flashing-
Activity
Green
Off No link
Rate Yellow 10 Mbps operation
Green 100 Mbps operation

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 47

FSP 150GE11xPro Hardware Descriptions

The Local Management Port LED not apply to GE101Pro, GO102Pro(S)

or GO102Pro(SP) .

48 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 FSP 150GE11xPro Hardware Descriptions

Ethernet Port LEDs

On GE112Pro series and and GE114 series, the are two LEDs for each Network or
Access Port. One LED works for Optical Mode and the other works in Electrical Mode.

With GE101Pro/GO102Pro(S)/GO102Pro(SP), there is one Link/Facility LED for each

Network/Access Port

GE112Pro and GE114Pro Ethernet Port LED Definition

Port 1 is fixed as a Network port and Port 2 may be provisioned for Network protection, or
as an Access port - if protection is not used. Ports 3 through 6 are Access ports.

Each optical Ethernet port provides one LED (Link / Facility) as defined in the following
table.

Table 4: Optical Ethernet Link and Rate LEDs 1

Connector LED Color Definition
SFP Off Unassigned
Green Working (Link detected)
Link/ Flashing Green Traffic (TX or RX)
Facility (LK) Flashing Yellow Loopback
Yellow Remote Fault/Degraded
Red Link Down

Each RJ-45 electrical Ethernet port has two LEDs associated with the connector. The
definitions of the LEDs are shown in the following table. Connectors are rotated for the
upper electrical ports (Link/Facility on the left and Rate on the right).

Table 5: RJ-45 Electrical Port Connector LED Definitions 2

Connector LED Color Definition
RJ-45 l Off
Off
l 10 Mbps
Rate
Yellow 100 Mbps
Green 1000 Mbps
Off Unassigned
Green Link Detected
Flashing Green Activity
Link / Facility
Flashing Yellow Loopback
Yellow Remote Fault / Degraded
Red Link Fault / No Link

1This does not apply to GE101Pro/GO102Pro(S)/GO102Pro(SP)

2This does not apply to GE101Pro/GO102Pro(S)/GO102Pro(SP)

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 49

FSP 150GE11xPro Hardware Descriptions

GE101Pro and GO102Pro Ethernet Port LED Definition

With GE101Pro/GO102Pro(S)/GO102Pro(SP), there is one Link/Facility LED for each
Network/Access Port. This LED functions for both Optical and Electrical Mode and the
same LED definition apply to both mode. See "Link/Facility Definitation LED for
GE101Pro/GO102Pro" below

Table 6: Link/Facility Definitation LED for GE101Pro/GO102Pro

Connector LED Color Definition
Not provisioned or No SFP/No
SFP Off
Copper
Fiber Mode Green Link
Flashing Green Activity
/Electrical
Mode Flashing Yellow Loopback
Yellow Remote Fault/Degraded
Red Link Fault/No Link

Rear Panel Connector Description

The rear panel of the FSP 150GE11xPro includes earth terminal (frame ground) points
located on the rear of the unit.

In addition to one earth terminal point, the GE112Pro (m) rear panel also includes two
barrel connectors for AC/DC power adapters, one RS-232 (RJ-45) connector for serial
connection, one MGMT LAN (RJ-45) connector for local management LAN connection.
See Figure 26 on p. 51.

50 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 FSP 150GE11xPro Hardware Descriptions

Figure 25: GE101Pro Rear Panel Conectors

Barrel
Micro USB Power
Port Connector

Figure 26: GO102Pro Rear Panel Connectors

Earth
Point

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 51

FSP 150GE11xPro Hardware Descriptions

Figure 27: GE112Pro (m) Rear Panel Connectors

Besides the earth terminal points, the GE112Pro (including AC/DC/PD variants) rear
panel also includes one barrel connector for AC/DC power adapter. See Figure 28 on
p. 52.

Figure 28: GE112Pro Rear Panel Connectors

Figure 29: GE112Pro (H) Rear Panel Connectors

Figure 30: GE114Pro/GE114Pro (C) Rear Panel Connectors

52 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 FSP 150GE11xPro Hardware Descriptions

Figure 31: GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)/GE114Pro (HE) Rear Panel Connectors

For all GE11xPro products, the earth terminal point connection is required.
Except for GE112Pro (m), all the other GE11xPro products provide two earth
terminal points at the rear panel and thus user may choose to connect to
either one earth terminal point or two.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 53

FSP 150GE11xPro Hardware Descriptions

This page intentionally left blank.

54 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Introduction

Web-based Element Management

System

Introduction
The web-based Element Management System (EMS) management tool provides a
Graphical User Interface (GUI) for Operation, Administration and Maintenance (OAM)
functions. The web-based EMS GUI provides comprehensive support for fault,
configuration, performance and security functions from a web browser (see Minimum
System Requirements) on a computer connected to Data Communication Network
(DCN) port (see Figure 1).

This chapter describes the web-based EMS GUI and the features it provides to manage
the GE11xPro equipment. The chapter provides the following information:

l logging on and off

l getting familiar with the web-based EMS GUI
l web-based EMS GUI Applications descriptions

Figure 1: Web-based Element Management System (EMS)

To access the web-based EMS GUI, the GE11xPro must first be configured with an
Internet Protocol (IP) address and subnet mask. Details on how to do this are provided in
Provision Communications.

The web-based EMS GUI provides the user with the following major applications:

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 55

Introduction

Alarms Pane

The Alarms Pane provides quick visibility and access to current alarms. Alarms are color-
coded based on severity. The Alarms Pane is always displayed no matter what
application is currently selected, thereby providing continuous alarm monitoring.

Configuration

This provides the user with the ability to:

l view the current status of the GE11xPro system

l view the current configuration of the GE11xPro system
l provision the GE11xPro for operation.

See Configuration View for further details.

Maintenance

This provides the user with a single view from which to perform all testing and
maintenance related operations, such as:

l Etherjack Connection Performance Analysis (ECPA) Test Stream configuration and

test execution
l Etherjack® Diagnostics
l Cable Length Benchmarking
l Loopbacks
l Enable/Disable JDSU loopbacks response
l Protection Groups switch operation
l Sync reference switch
l Time Clock reference switch
l Ping, trace route, flush Address Routing Protocol (ARP) cache, flush Neighbor
Discovery Protocol (NDP) cache
l Edit alarm attributes
l Environment Alarm input configuration
l Restore to factory defaults or system defaults
l Software upgrade
l Database management
l CLI configuration file management
l Alarm/Audit/Security log transfer
l Diagnostic files management
l Software licensed feature management

See Maintenance View for further details.

Users and Security

Users and associated security levels can be viewed, entered and modified by the
Superuser, except that Crypto user account settings cannot be modified and are read-
only. Other users can view and modify their own user accounts. For more information,
see Configure Local Non-Crypto Users and Configure Local Crypto User - GE114Pro
(C)/GE114Pro (CSH).

56 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Introduction

Software Upgrade

Software may be easily updated to the current release level using the Browser
Management Tool provided by the GUI interface. For more information, see Upgrade
Software.

Database Configuration Management

Operations available for managing configuration data are: determining database

configuration status, restore system defaults, backup database and restore database,
modify the system default database, reset to system defaults, reset to factory defaults
and change the default value file. For more information, see Database and Configuration
Files, Restore Database or Restore System Defaults.

Software Licensable Feature Management

Feature management provides feature control where a feature can be enabled or disabled
irrespective of the presence of a license for a [Link] operations on feature specific
objects are denied when the feature is disabled. For more information, see Enable
Software License.

Performance Monitoring

This provides the user with the ability to:

l Configure PM interval
l Obtain Performance Monitoring (PM) reports and chart them
l View and configure Performance Parameter threshold values

See Performance Monitoring View for further details.

Etherjack® Service Assurance

The Etherjack Service Assurance (ESA) feature is a real-time monitoring tool to allow
Ethernet services to be subjectively measured for the basis of service level agreements
(SLA). ESA may be implemented when GE11xPro equipment is at both ends for round-
trip reporting via Probe and Reflector, or may be implemented with only one GE11xPro for
one-way trip reporting via Probe only. Up to 10 layer-3 Probes and 6 Reflectors are
supported and up to 32(GE112Pro series)/64 (GE114Pro series) layer-2 Probes are
supported. The user is allowed to “Delete All Port Related ESA Entities” at the NTE level
when the corresponding schedules have been deleted.

Standard reporting includes Round Trip Delay and Round Trip Packet Loss. Enhanced
reporting includes round trip and one-way packet delay, one-way packet loss, out-of-
sequence and late arrival packets, and inter-packet delay variation. In addition to
performing an ESA measurement on demand, ESAs may be scheduled for periodic
monitoring. For more information, see ESA Provisioning and Operation.

Connectivity Fault Management

The Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) feature provides the ability to detect, verify,
isolate and report connectivity faults on a service instance. For more information, see
CFM Provisioning and Operation.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 57

Introduction

Precision Time Protocol

The Precision Time Protocol (PTP) feature provides the ability to create and monitor End-
to-End (E2E) Transparent Clock (TC) functionality and Telecom Slave (TS) functionality
for use in high accuracy time and frequency synchronization applications. See Provision
Precision Time Protocol (PTP) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH).

Sync Jack

The Sync Jack (SJ) Testing is only included in GE114Pro (SH)/

GE114Pro (CSH) products. This functionality provides three types of probes for
measuring Clock Accuracy, performing PTP Clock Analysis and PTP Network Analysis.
To achieve the maximum number of probes, the SyncJack-Extended-Scale license must
be Enabled (see Enable Software License). For more information, see SyncJack Testing
- GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH).

Service Activation Testing

Supported in all FSP 150-GE11xPro products, the Service Activation Testing (SAT) is an
Ethernet service activation test methodology which is the only standard test
methodology that allows for complete validation of Ethernet service-level-agreements
(SLAs) in a single test. This methodology is built around two key sub-tests: the service
configuration test and the service performance test, which are performed in order. For
more information, see Service Activation Testing.

Two-Way Active Management Protocol

Supported in all FSP 150-GE11xPro products, the Two-Way Active Management

Protocol (TWAMP) provides two-way or round-trip measurement for IP traffic
performance among any two devices in a network that support the standard. For more
information, see Two-Way Active Measurement Protocol .

Open Flow

Supported in all FSP 150-GE11xPro products, Open Flow enables controllers to

determine the path of network paths through the network of switches. It allows more
sophisticated traffic management than using ACL and routing protocols. For more
information, see Provision OpenFlow.

ConnectGuard

The ConnectGuardTM is only supported by GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (CSH). This

functionality is developed based on the Media Access Control (MAC) Security standard
defined in IEEE 802.1AE-2006 and IEEE 802.1AEbn-2011. It allows authorized systems
that attach to and interconnect LANs in a network to maintain confidentiality of
transmitted data and to take measures against frames transmitted or modified by
unauthorized devices. Only the crypto user has the privilege to provision the
configurations of ConnectGuard.

This feature includes two major functions that must be performed by the crypto user. For
more information, see Provision ConnectGuard - GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (CSH).

58 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Introduction

Minimum System Requirements

Prior to running the web-based EMS GUI, ensure that the management system Personal
Computer (PC) meets the following minimum system requirements:

l 200Mhz processor
l supported Operating System (OS) versions: Microsoft Windows XP/Vista/7
l A browser, such as Internet Explorer(IE 11 recommended) or an up-to-date version of
Firefox or Chrome. Other browsers may suffice, but no specific browser is certified by
ADVA Optical Networking.
l 128 Mb of Random Access Memory (RAM)
l Adobe Acrobat Reader 5.0 or greater
l Recommended display: 1024 x 768 with 16+ color bits.

If using Internet Explorer 8, in order to view certain web-based GUI elements

correctly (namely data provided in Maintenance View - e.g., Restore factory
defaults, Restore system defaults, Restore database, New System Defaults
File), enable Compatibility View in IE by selecting Tools, Compatibility View
Settings and adding the GE11xPro IP address to the list of websites data
field.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 59

Logging On and Off

Logging On and Off

Logging On
Use the following procedure to log on to the GE11xPro web-based EMS GUI
management tool.

This procedure assumes that HTTP and HTTPS access are enabled (factory defaults).

1. Ensure that a DCN connection to the GE11xPro has been established, or the PC is
connected to the DCN port, as required.

2. Determine the next step:

Desired Activity? Then

Log on with non-crypto user Continue with the next step.
Log on with crypto user Go to 8.

3. Open up the appropriate Internet Browser and enter the following address if the login
user is non-crypto user:

[Link]

To ensure the secure connection and authentication between the nodes that
support ConnectGuard, the local user, with crypto privilege or non-crypto
privilege, must use HTTPS in the Internet Browser to access a GE114Pro
(C)/GE114Pro (CSH), i.e. [Link] where
[Link] is the IP address of the DCN that the GE114Pro
(C)/GE114Pro (CSH) is connected to.

where [Link] is the IP address of the DCN that the GE11xPro is

connected to. This will be the IP address that has been assigned to the DCN
port (eth0) during initial IP configuration, or if none has been set, the default
address of [Link].

Web-based GUI opens and the Login Screen is displayed, as shown

below

60 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Logging On and Off

Figure 2: System Login Screen

4. Enter a valid User ID and Password (default is root and ChgMeNOW, respectively).
See Provision Secure Access for additional login information.

5. Select Login.

The security banner displays, as shown below

Figure 3: Login Continue Screen

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 61

Logging On and Off

A login account will be locked for a period of 5 minutes after 3

unsuccessful login attempts.
A user with Superuser privilege can remove the lock for any user
account. See Configure Local Non-Crypto Users for more information.

6. Select Continue.

Web-based GUI displays, as shown below

Figure 4: Successful Login Screen

7. Resize the screen for viewing, as desired.

8. Open up the appropriate Internet Browser and enter the following address if the login
user is the crypto user:

[Link]

To ensure the secure connection and authentication between the nodes that
support ConnectGuard, the local user, with Crypto privilege or non-crypto
privilege, must use HTTPS in the Internet Browser to access a GE114Pro
(C)/GE114Pro (CSH), i.e. [Link] where
[Link] is the IP address of the DCN that the GE114Pro
(C)/GE114Pro (CSH) is connected to.

The crypto user is only available in GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (CSH).

For more information about the crypto user, see Configure Local Crypto User
- GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (CSH).
For more provisioning privilege information of the crypto user, see Provision
ConnectGuard - GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (CSH)

62 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Logging On and Off

where [Link] is the IP address of the DCN that the GE11xPro is

connected to. This will be the IP address that has been assigned to the DCN
port (eth0) during initial IP configuration, or if none has been set, the default
address of [Link].

The Internet Browser page indicates that website to visit has security
certificate problem

Figure 5: Internet Browser -- HTTPS Caution (Internet Explorer)

Different Internet Browsers may have different caution pages for the
HTTPS access. The differences will not be mentioned in detail in this
procedure.

9. Click on the option to trust the website to visit and continue with the connection.

Web-based GUI opens and the Login screen is displayed, as shown

below

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 63

Logging On and Off

Figure 6: System Login Screen (HTTPS)

10. Enter the Crypto User ID and Password (default login password is ChegMeNOW).
See Provision Secure Access for additional login information.

Click on Login.

A login account will be locked for a period of 5 minutes after 3

unsuccessful login attempts.
A user with Superuser privilege can remove the lock for any user
account. See Configure Local Crypto User - GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro
(CSH) for more information.

The user with Superuser privilege can change the login password of
the crypto user, which can cause the crypto user’s crypto password to
be cleared, so that the crypto user must reset new crypto password at
next login (See 12).
For more information about configuring the crypto user, see Configure
Local Crypto User - GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (CSH).

For a crypto user account, if it is the first-time login or the first-time re-
login after restoring DB or factory defaults or a tamper event reboot, it
is required that the crypto user reset the crypto password on the login
Fo page (See 12).

11. Determine the next step:

Current Status Then

First-time login with crypto user account? Continue with the next step.
Not first-time login with crypto user account? Go to 14.

64 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Logging On and Off

The “first-time login” mentioned in this procedure refers to the very first time
to use the web-based GUI or the first login after restoring factory defaults or
after a tamper event reboot.

12. Reset the crypto password and retype it.

Figure 7: Reset Crypto Password at First-Time Login

It is required that the crypto password of the crypto user conform to

the security policy of High strength (see Configure Security Policy for
security policy details).
It

If the entered new crypto password does not meet the crypto
password requirement, an error message will pop up indicating that the
user has no sufficient privilege to log on.

13. Click on Continue.

The security banner displays, as shown below

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 65

Logging On and Off

Figure 8: Security Banner View

14. Select Continue.

Web-based GUI displays, as shown in Figure 9 on p. 66

15. Resize the screen for viewing, as desired.

Figure 9: Successful Login Screen (Crypto User)

66 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Logging On and Off

Logging Off
To log out of the GE11xPro web-based EMS GUI management tool:

1. Select File, Logout from the Menu Bar.

Figure 10: System Log Out

2. Close the Internet browser.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 67

Logging On and Off

User Session Timeout

Each user is provisioned with a user inactivity timeout of 0 minutes (to disable timeout) to
99 minutes. Default is 15 minutes. Only a Superuser (see Table 29 on p. 772) may edit a
user GUI login timeout value. When a user session is inactive for the amount of time
provisioned in the GUI timeout, the user session is automatically logged off to ensure
system security. Once the user timeout has occurred and the user attempts to operate or
view the web-based GUI, an Authentication Failed screen is displayed.

Figure 11: Authentication Failure Screen

When this occurs, simply select here from the Authentication Failed screen to go to the
GE11xPro login screen, and continue with the logon sequence (see 4 of Logging On).

68 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Getting Familiar with the Web-based GUI

Getting Familiar with the Web-based GUI

The web-based GUI Element Management System provides a web based Graphical
User Interface (GUI) for Operation, Administration and Maintenance (OAM) functions.
The Element Management System workspace is arranged to allow you to focus on the
task you wish to perform while continually displaying alarm information. The Menu Bar,
Tool Bar and Selection Tree provide easy access to the desired workflow, e.g.,
provisioning an entity or performing maintenance functions.

The Details Pane provides a different set of viewing and editing options depending on the
application and entity selected. The Alarms pane provides continuous alarm monitoring
regardless of the application currently selected.

The Configuration Application displays when you first open the web-based GUI. The
GE11xPro system view (located in the Details Pane) provides a physical representation
of the GE11xPro, its current provisioning configuration and alarm status.

Figure 12: Element Management System Components

Alarm details are displayed in the Alarms Pane. Refer to Figure 12 for an example of a
system entity selected in Configuration view and each component of the web browser
window.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 69

Getting Familiar with the Web-based GUI

About the Workspace

The Web-based GUI workspace consists of the following components.

l Title Bar"Title Bar" below.

l Menu Bar"Menu Bar" below.
l Tool Bar"Tool Bar" on the facing page.
l Selection Tree Pane"Selection Tree" on page 73.
l Details Pane"Details Pane" on page 74.
l Alarms Pane"Alarms Pane" on page 76.

Title Bar
The Title Bar displays the current application that has been selected from the Menu Bar,
Application menu or the Tool Bar.

Menu Bar
Each item on the Menu Bar provides a pull-down menu which contain the menu options
available in web-based GUI. Menu options are selected by pointing and clicking with the
mouse in the File or Application drop down menu and then clicking the mouse on the
desired option.

The menus available on the Menu Bar are:

l File, which provides the following options:

o Logout

l Application, which provides the following options:

o Configuration

o Maintenance
o Performance Monitoring
o ESA
o CFM
o PTP (GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH) only)
o Sync Jack (GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH) only)
o SAT
o TWAMP
o OpenFlow
o ConnectGuard (GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (CSH) only)
o IPFIX

The selections available on the Application pull-down menu may also

be selected from the Tool Bar. See Tool Bar.

70 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Getting Familiar with the Web-based GUI

Tool Bar
The Tool Bar contains a set of tool buttons that can be selected for quick access to Web-
based GUI applications. The tool buttons available are:

Configuration, which accesses the Configuration application. It

allows you to perform provisioning functions, such as editing system,
equipment, facilities or users. Various views are provided when Con-
figuration is selected, depending on what entity is selected in the Selec-
tion Tree. When entering a right click on a folder or entity from the
Selection Tree, provisioning options become available in menu form.
Options available to the user are dependent upon the user access per-
mission level.

Maintenance, which accesses the Maintenance application. It allows

you to perform maintenance functions, such as loopbacks, dia-
gnostics, software upgrade, database backup and restore. When enter-
ing a right click on a folder or entity from the Selection Tree,
maintenance options become available in menu form. Various views
are provided, depending upon what folder or entity is selected in the
Selection Tree. Options available to the user are dependent upon the
user access permission level.

Performance Monitoring, which accesses the Performance Mon-

itoring application. It allows you to retrieve performance monitoring
counts in columnar or chart format. Performance monitoring thresholds
can be edited or displayed, and registers can be initialized (depending
on the user access permission level).

Etherjack Service Assurance (ESA) feature is a real-time monitoring

tool to allow Ethernet services to be subjectively measured for the
basis of service level agreements.

Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) provides the ability to detect,

verify, isolate and report connectivity faults on a service instance.

Precision Time Protocol (PTP) provides the provisioning and man-

agement for transparent clock, telecom slave, boundary clock and mas-
ter clock which are used as clock synchronization precision standard.
This feature is only applicable in GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)
products.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 71

Getting Familiar with the Web-based GUI

Sync Jack (SJ) provides the means to monitor and measure the per-
formance and accuracy of Clock, PTP Clock and PTP Network by cal-
culating the relevant metrics and allows a high level of sync assurance.
This feature is only applicable in GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)
products.

Service Activation Testing (SAT) provides the standard Ethernet ser-

vice test methodology that allows for complete validation of Ethernet
service-level-agreements (SLAs) by two sub-tests: service con-
figuration test and service performance test.

Two-Way Active Measurement Protocol (TWAMP) two-way or

round-trip measurement for IP traffic performance among any two
devices in a network that support the standard.

Open Flow (OF) enables controllers to determine the path of network

paths through the network of switches. It allows more sophisticated
traffic management than using ACL and routing protocols.

ConnectGuard (ConnectGuard) allows authorized systems that attach

to and interconnect LANs in a network to maintain confidentiality of
transmitted data and to take measures against frames transmitted or
modified by unauthorized devices. This feature is only applicable in
GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (CSH) products.

Internet Protocol Flow Information Export (IPFIX) provides a common,

universal standard of export for Internet Protocol flow information from
routers, probes and other devices that are used by mediation systems,
accounting/billing systems and network management systems to
facilitate services such as measurement, accounting and billing

The applications available on the Tool Bar, may also be selected from the
Application pull-down menu on the Menu Bar. See Menu Bar.

72 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Getting Familiar with the Web-based GUI

Selection Tree
The Selection Tree (located at the left of the screen) enables the user to select an entity
in order to:

l display a status pane related to that entity (shown in the Details Pane to the right)
l select menu options related to that entity

The Selection Tree provides a hierarchical tree of the entities that make up an GE11xPro
system and the entities related to that system. Each Selection Tree entity is
representative of a specific entity type (NE, PSU, Network Port, Access Port, protection
group, communications, SNMP, administration, etc.).

Entities are arranged in hierarchical order, e.g., to gain access to an Access Port, the
System, NE-1 and GE11xPro menus must first be opened. Selection Tree nested items
are opened or closed by clicking on the + or - symbol next to the entity, respectively.
Once an entity is opened, the entity item is expanded, displaying nested items.

A “pointing hand” cursor (displayed when hovering the cursor over an entity within the
selection tree) indicates there are menu selectable items available for that entity, and if a
right mouse click is entered on that entity, applicable menu selectable items appear. See
Figure 13 for an example of a Selection Tree with menu selected. Menu selectable items
are bold and non-selectable items are grey. If an I-beam cursor is displayed, it indicates
there are no menu selectable items for that entity within the currently selected
application.

When an entity is selected within the Selection Tree, the corresponding entity status is
displayed in the Details Pane. The status displayed in the Details Pane is dependent
upon which application is currently selected. For example, if Configuration application is
selected, and a Access Port facility is selected in the Selection Tree, facility status
information such as assigned state, operational state and EVC mode status will be
displayed. If the same Access Port facility is selected in the Selection Tree while in
Maintenance view, the Details Pane will display Etherjack® diagnostics results and
alarm attributes.

Figure 13: Selection Tree with Menu Selected

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 73

Getting Familiar with the Web-based GUI

Details Pane
When an item is selected from the Selection Tree with the left mouse button (see
Selection Tree), a status view related to that item is displayed in the Details Pane (to the
right of the Selection Tree). The details displayed are dependent upon the Application
currently selected.

If details are provided by more than one status pane, tabs are provided to toggle between
each pane. See Figure 14 for an example of tab selections in the Details Pane.

Figure 14: Tab Selections and Scroll Bars in the Details Pane

If data is too large to fit in the current Details Pane size, the browser window can be
resized or maximized to view a larger area, you can use the window resizing bars to open
the viewing area, or you can use the scroll bars located in the Details Pane to view the
remaining data (see Figure 14).

Right clicking on an entity in the Selection Tree Pane opens a window of available edits
for that entity selecting one of these yields an edit view in the Details Pane. See Figure
15 for an example of an Edit Access Port pane. Note that all valid provisioning options are
displayed in white and options that are not provisionable are grayed out (Media Type).

74 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Getting Familiar with the Web-based GUI

Figure 15: Edit Access Port Pane

The operations and provisioning options in a Details Pane are displayed in a series of
fields. The information provided in the Details Pane enables the user to gain information
on the operation of the GE11xPro and to input and/or select data that is required for the
desired operation.

Operations and Provisioning Field Types

The field types that may appear on a Details Pane are:

l Display only fields, which are provided to display status information. These fields are
grey and cannot be selected or changed.
l Provisionable fields, which have a white background, are used to indicate:
o a field that can be edited by direct data input

o a selectable drop down menu which provides context sensitive provisioning

options
o a check box (or toggle button)
o a right-click menu of options (configuration files only)

Command Buttons
Actions are selected via command buttons that are available at the bottom of the Details
Pane. The common Command Buttons available on a Details Pane are:

l OK, which accepts the information in a status pane and closes the pane.
l Cancel, which cancels any changes that have been made to the information in the
status pane and closes the pane.
l Refresh, which reads and displays the latest values of the fields in the status pane.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 75

Getting Familiar with the Web-based GUI

l Apply, which applies any changes made to the information in the status pane, without
closing the pane.
l Next>, which opens the next page (screen) of data.
l <Back, which opens the previous page (screen) of data.

Alarms Pane
The Alarms Pane provides quick visibility and access to current alarms.

All alarms are color coded by severity:

l red; Critical
l orange; Major
l yellow; Minor

Each alarm is listed as a separate line item, with the following details:

l Interface type
l Notification Code
l Description
l Date/Time stamp

76 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Getting Familiar with the Web-based GUI

Keyboard Navigation
It is usual for the mouse to be used to navigate the Workspace and select menu options.
However, a number of keys on the PC keyboard can be used to navigate around the
Menu Bar, the Selection Tree Pane and the Details Pane as outlined in the table below.

Key Function
In the Web-based GUI Workspace:
Move through Workspace areas. This key enables the user to
Tab move through the Menu Bar, the Tool Bar, the Selection Tree Pane
and the Details Pane.
In the Menu Bar:
Select. This key enables the user to display a pull down menu and
Return
select a menu option.
Right arrow Move. These keys enable the user to move through the options on
Left arrow the Menu Bar to highlight the one required.

Up arrow Move. These keys enable the user to move up and down (scroll)
through menu options on a pull down menu to highlight the one
Down arrow required.
In the Selection Tree Pane:
Select. This key enables the user to select a highlighted item or
Return
menu option and open the appropriate pane in the Details Pane.
Up arrow
Move. These keys enable the user to move up and down (scroll)
Down arrow
through items and menu options to highlight the one required.
Tab
Open. This key enables the user to view nested items. If nested
Right arrow items are available it is indicated by a plus sign (+) to the left of that
item.
Close. This key enables the user to close a nest of items. A minus
Left arrow sign (-) to the left of an item indicates that the item’s nested items
are open.
In the Details Pane:
Select. This key enables the user to select a highlighted field for
Return
information input or a highlighted command button.
Right arrow Move through status pane tabs. This key enables the user to nav-
Left arrow igate through tabs at the top of the Details Pane.

Move through editable fields. This key enables the user to move
Tab down through the editable fields and the command buttons on a
status pane.
Up arrow Move through the options of a drop down list. This key enables
Down Arrow the user to move up or down through the items of a drop down list.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 77

Web-based GUI Applications

Web-based GUI Applications

The Element Management System provides the user with the following major
applications:

l Configuration
l Maintenance
l Performance Monitoring
l Etherjack Service Assurance
l Connectivity Fault Management
l PTP (GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH) only)
l Sync Jack (GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH) only)
l SAT
l TWAMP
l OpenFlow
l ConnectGuard (GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (CSH) only)

Each of the Applications can be selected from the Menu Bar (see Menu Bar) or the Tool
Bar (see Tool Bar). The Title Bar displays the latest application that has been selected
(see Title Bar).

78 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Configuration View

Configuration View
Configuration view allows you to perform provisioning functions, and view provisioning
attributes of the entity that is selected in the Selection Tree or the entity Details Pane.
Left clicking an item in the Selection Tree displays current status and configuration in the
Details Pane. Right clicking an item in the Selection Tree displays a selection window for
editing configuration items for the selected entity. Selecting an editing option brings up an
edit view in the Details Pane. Alarm status is displayed in the Alarms Pane located at the
bottom of the screen, providing constant visibility and access to current alarms. Options
available are dependent upon the user access permission level and the current entity
status.

For procedures regarding provisioning of specific entities, refer to Chapter 3, Operations

and Provisioning.

The following configuration changes can be applied and current status can be viewed
within Configuration View:

System

System level settings can be viewed by selecting the System entity in the selection tree.
Additional system level settings may be viewed by selecting one of the following tabs:
Identification, Security Log, Alarm Log, Audit Log, Syslog, ACL (Access Control List),
LLDP (Link Layer Discovery Protocol), Banner, Time Zone, System Time of Day or Data
Export. You can edit system options by entering a right click on the System entity and
selecting the desired menu option. System Defaults may also be restored at this menu
level.

Network Element (NE)

NE level settings can be viewed by selecting the NE-1 entity in the selection tree.
Expanding the NE-1 entity reveals all equipment associated with the NE and the
provisionable features, i.e., VRF, DHCP Delay Agent, EoMPLS PW and BFD.

By expanding the NE-1 entity under the System entity, selecting the NTE11xPRO entity
and then selecting the Resources tab of the NTE11xPRO entity, all allocated and
available system traffic resources are displayed (see Figure 16).

Network Port, Access Port, DCN and PSU provisioning may be performed within the
NE-1 hierarchy in the selection tree.

See Figure 17 for an example of an Edit Network Port Configuration view.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 79

Configuration View

Figure 16: NTE11xPRO Resources Tab

Figure 17: Edit Network Port Configuration View

PT Flows

By expanding the Protection Groups entity and selecting the Flow entity, the
configuration of a specific PT flow can be viewed on the Details Pane by double-clicking

80 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Configuration View

on the row where it locates in the PT flow entity list. Entering a right click allows editing,
deleting and viewing configuration as well.

Protection Groups

By expanding the Protection Groups entity, the NE-1 entity and selecting the NTE11x
entity, the protection group configuration can be viewed, and entering a right click allows
adding, editing and deleting of a protection group.

Alternatively, by selecting the ERP entity under the NE-1 entity, the ERP instance
configuration can be viewed, and entering a right click allows editing, deleting of an
instance or clearing the statistics of an instance.

LAG

By expanding the LAG entity, entering a right click on the NE-1 entity allows LAG
creation. By expanding the LAG and NE-1 entities, and selecting the LAG entity identifier,
port configuration and aggregation port statistics can be viewed. Entering a right click on
the LAG entity allows editing LAG, LAG port, PCP, Priority Mapping configurations,
clearing statistics or LAG deletion selections.

By expanding the LAG, NE-1, LAG entity identifier and Members entities, and selecting a
LAG Member entity, the Member configuration, statistics and LACP debug information
can be viewed - and entering a right click allows editing of LAG member port configuration
or clearing LACP statistics.

SHG

By expanding the SHG entity and selecting the NE-1 entity, the configuration of a
specific SHG entity can be viewed, and entering a right click allows editing, deleting,
viewing configuration, flushing FDB and viewing FDB entities.

Synchronization (GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

By expanding the Synchronization entity, NE-1 entity, NTE114S entity and selecting the
SYNC-1-1-1-1/TIME CLOCK-1-1-1-1 entity, the configuration and status of the system
sync entity can be viewed. Entering a right click allows editing, adding/editing/deleting
sync reference. Expanding BITS-1 entity and selecting BITS-IN/BITS-OUT allows
viewing configuration; Entering a right click on either entity allows editing configuration.
Likewise, selecting CLK, PPS, TOD and GPS entities allows viewing configuration and
entering a right click on each entity allows editing configuration.

Profiles

By expanding Profiles and Priority Mapping Profile, a default priority mapping profile
PRIORITY MAP PROFILE-1 appears on the details pane. Entering a right click on the
map profile to view, edit or delete it. The system supports up to eight profiles. To add a
new profile, enter a right click on Priority Mapping Profile in the selection tree and select
Add Profile.

Communications

Static Routes, Static ARP Entries, IPv6 Static Routes, IPv6 Static Neighbor Entries,
IPv6 Static ProxyND Entries and Source Address Configuration are viewed by selecting
the Communications entity and selecting the associated tab. Static Routes, Static ARP,

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 81

Configuration View

IPv6 Static Routes, IPv6 Static Neighbor Entries and IPv6 Static ProxyND Entries may
be added or deleted, and Source Address Configuration may be edited by entering a right
click on the Communications entity.

The DCN entity is accessed by expanding the Communications entity, management

tunnels are accessed by expanding the Management Tunnels and NE-1 entities, and
IPv6 over IPv4 Tunnels are accessed by expanding the IPv6 over IPv4 Tunnels and NE-
1 entities. These entities are provisioned by expanding the Communications entity,
entering a right click on the desired entity in the selection tree and selecting the applicable
menu option.

SNMP

Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Communities, Target Addresses, Target

Parameters, USM User entries and SNMP Dying Gasp are viewed by selecting the
SNMP entity and selecting the associated tab in the Details Pane. These entities are
provisioned by entering a right click on SNMP in the selection tree and selecting the
applicable menu option.

Administration

Users, Remote Authentication, Security Policy and Key Generation are viewed by
expanding the Administration entity and selecting the entity in the selection tree. These
entities are provisioned by expanding the Administration entity, entering a right click on
the desired entity in the selection tree and selecting the applicable menu option.

82 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Maintenance View

Maintenance View
Maintenance View allows performing maintenance functions, such as diagnostics,
loopbacks, setting up and running ECPA tests, raising and clearing test alarms, setting
and retrieving alarm attributes, rebooting, upgrading software, database backup and
restore, configuration file management, licensable software feature management,
operating and releasing ERP protection switch, and operating reference switch on sync
entity and clock.

When entering a right click on an entity in the Selection Tree, maintenance options are
available in menu form. The options available are dependent upon the user access
permission level and current entity status. Alarm status is displayed in the Alarms Pane
at the bottom of the screen, providing constant visibility and access to current alarms.

For more information on Maintenance operations, refer to Chapter 3, Operations and

Provisioning and Chapter 5, Etherjack/Syncjack Test Procedures and Performance
Monitoring .

The current status is viewed and maintenance operations performed within Maintenance
View:

System

Selecting the System entity allows viewing of System Identification, Conditions List and
ECPA Streams. Entering a right click provides menu options for editing ECPA Streams.

Network Element (NE-1)

Selecting the NE entity allows viewing of the conditions list associated with the NE.
Expanding the NE entity reveals all equipment associated with the NE. Entering a right
click on the NE-1 entity provides a menu option for performing a lamp test. The following
maintenance functions may be viewed/performed for the following entities when the NE
is expanded in the selection tree:

l NTE11xPRO
o NTE11xPRO - displays ECPA results and first frame data. Entering a right click

provides menu options for configuring and running ECPA tests, raising and clearing
test alarm, and rebooting the NTE11xPRO.
o Network ports - view operations status, diagnostic results and cable benchmarks.
Entering a right click provides menu options for performing Etherjack® Diagnostic
Tests, editing Cable Length Benchmarks, performing Loopbacks and
raising/clearing a test alarm.
o Access port - view operations status, diagnostic results and cable benchmarks.
Entering a right click provides menu options for performing Etherjack® Diagnostic
Tests, editing Cable Length Benchmarks, raising and clearing test alarm, and
performing Loopbacks.

Protection Groups

By expanding the Protection Groups entity, the NE-1 entity and selecting the
NTE11xPRO entity, the protection group configuration and current status is displayed. If
a protection group is configured, entering a right click on the entity allows protection
switch operation and release functions. The operations available are:

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 83

Maintenance View

l Manual From Working

l Forced From Working
l Manual From Protect
l Forced From Protect
l Lockout From Protect

By selecting the ERP entities, the configuration is displayed. Entering a right click on an
ERP entity allows protection switch operation and release functions. The operations
available are:

l Forced
l Manual
l Ring Port 0
l Ring Port 1

LAG

By expanding the LAG entity and selecting the desired LAG entity identifier, the
operations status is displayed. If a LAG is configured, entering a right click on the entity
allows loopback operation and release functions.

Synchronization

Synchronization information is only displayed if the unit is equipped with

Sync-E functionality.

By expanding the Synchronization entity, the NE-1 entity and selecting the SYNC entity,
the Configuration and Status tabs for SYNC are displayed. Entering a right click on the
entity allows switching Sync references. The operations available are:

l Forced Switch
l Manual Switch
l Lock Out
l Clear Wait To Restore
l Clear Lock Out
l Clear Switch

Communications

Selecting the Communications entity allows viewing of the Routing Table, ARP Table,
IPv6 Routing Table, IPv6 NDP Table, the results of the last ping command, and the
results of the last trace route command. Ping, Trace Route, Flush ARP Cache and Flush
NDP Cache options are available when a right click is entered on the Communications
entity.

Environmental Alarms (GE114Pro (HE))

By expanding the Environmental Alarms entity, four dry contact environmental alarm
inputs may be viewed by selecting the desired entity or provisioned by entering a right

84 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Maintenance View

click on the environmental alarm entity and selecting Edit. The dry contact alarm inputs
are programmable to specify the monitored condition and whether the alarm shall be
raised on contact close or open.

Alarm Attributes

By expanding the Alarm Attributes and selecting a listed entity the current alarm attribute
settings for that entity are displayed. Entering a right click on the entity allows editing the
alarm severity of each listed condition. The NE entities available are:

l 10MHz (CLK) Port

l Access Port
l BFD Session
l BITS In Port
l BITS Out Port
l CFM MEP
l CFM QOS Shaper
l Clock Probe
l DCN Port
l DHCP Relay Agent
l ELP
l ERP Group
l EoMPLS PW
l GPS Port
l GRE Tunnel
l L3 VRF
l LAG
l MACSec Flow
l MOBILE MODEM
l Network Port
l NTE11xPro Card
l NTE11xPro Shelf
l Network Port
l OF Logical Switch
l Power Supply
l PTP Clock Probe
l PTP Clock
l PTP Network Probe
l PTP Port
l Pulse Per Second (PPS) Port
l SAT Responder Session
l Security Flow
l SOOC
l Synchronization
l System
l Telecom Slave
l Time Clock
l Time Of Day (TOD) Port

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 85

Maintenance View

l Traffic IP Interface
l WIFI DONGLE
l VXLAN Tunnel End Point
l VXLAN Segment

Administration

Expanding the Administration entity reveals the Software, Database and Configuration
Files entities. The following maintenance functions are available:

l Administration - Right clicking on the Administration entity allows selection of

Restore System Defaults or Restore Factory Defaults. See Restore System Defaults
and Restore Factory Defaults for explanations of these operations and the difference
between them.
l Upgrade - Selecting the Upgrade entity displays the current Active and Standby
software versions along with the File Services mode and status and the Validation
Timer status. Entering a right click on the Upgrade entity allows selection of Upgrade
(one-step), Transfer, Install, Activate and Validate options.
l Database - Selecting the Database entity displays the current Active and Standby
database versions along with the File Services mode and status. Entering a right click
on the Database entity allows selection of database backup and restore functions:
Backup Database, Copy to Remote, Copy from Remote, Restore Database and
Activate Database.
l Default Database - Entering a right click on the Default Database entity allows
selection of the Save (create a new default database), Copy to Remote, Copy from
Remote, and New (revert the default database back to factory defaults).
l Default Settings - Selecting the Default Settings entity allows the copying of a remote
default value file to the GE11xPro via Web, FTP, SCP or SFTP.
l Configuration Files - Selecting the Configuration Files entity displays the current list
and status of the configuration files resident on the unit. Entering a right click on the
Configuration File entity allows the user to Create a new configuration file, or Copy
from Remote. Entering a right click on a configuration file in the table in the details
pane yields a list of configuration file options including: Save, Edit Description, Copy
to Remote, Restart with File and Remove.
l Last Reset Cause - Selecting the Last Reset Cause entity displays the Last Reset
Type and Last Reset Cause information along with identifiers for up to three debug
files if any exist. Entering a right click on the Last Reset Cause entity allows the user
to Copy to Remote the debug file(s).
l Transfer Log - Entering a right click on the Transfer Log entity allows the user to
select the desired log (Alarm, Audit or Security) to transfer.
l Diagnostic Files - Selecting the Diagnostic Files entity displays the status and Mode
of diagnostic files.
l Software Licensing - Expanding the Software Licensing entity displays the Feature
Management entity. Entering a right click on the Feature Management entity allows the
user to Enable/Disable a list of Features.

86 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Maintenance View

Viewing Entities in Maintenance View

When selecting an entity in Maintenance View, Alarm Attributes views are available by
selecting the associated entity in the view area under the Alarm Attributes heading.
Selecting the entity displays the current Notification Code (NC) assigned to each Alarm
Attribute/Condition Type (see Figure 18).

Figure 18: Alarm Attributes View of Access Port

A Conditions List is also present for the NE-1 entity (see Figure 19).

Figure 19: Conditions List View of the NE-1 Entity

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 87

Maintenance View

Editing Alarm Attributes

An Edit Alarm Attributes pane is accessed in Maintenance view by entering a right click
on an entity under Alarms Attributes and selecting Edit Alarm Attributes (see Figure 20).
Notification Codes can be edited for a given Condition Type by selecting the desired
Notification Code in the drop down menu, selecting the desired Notification Code, then
selecting Apply or OK.

Notification Codes available for selection are:

l Critical (CR)
l Major (MJ)
l Minor (MN)
l Not Alarmed (NA)
l Not Reported (NR)

Figure 20: Edit Alarm Attributes Pane

88 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Maintenance View

Loopbacks
Entering a right click on a Network Port or Access Port under the NTE11xPRO entity, or
LAG entity under the LAG/NE-1 entity and selecting Loopbacks provides a Loopback
view. From this view, the Network Port, Access Port or LAG entity can be placed in the
Maintenance state, and a loopback can be performed.

See Figure 21 for an example of a loopback view. For loopback procedures, see Chapter
5, Etherjack/Syncjack Test Procedures and Performance Monitoring .

When using web-based GUI, to remove a loopback, click on the drop-down list for
Loopback Configuration and select “None”, then click on “OK”.

Figure 21: Loopback View

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 89

Maintenance View

Etherjack® Diagnostics
Etherjack® Diagnostics enable the user to perform tests on the Ethernet facility and the
attached cable for a copper (non-SFP) port, in order to detect and isolate faults on:

l the Ethernet port

l the connecting cable
l the far-end equipment

This feature is accessed by right clicking on a copper Access Port under the
NTE11xPRO entity and selecting “Diagnostic Test”.

See Figure 22 for an example of an Etherjack® Diagnostic Test Result view. For
Etherjack® diagnostic procedures, see Chapter 5,Etherjack/Syncjack Test Procedures
and Performance Monitoring .

Figure 22: Etherjack® Diagnostic Test Results View

The capabilities of the Ethernet Cable Test (performed as part of Etherjack® Diagnostics)
can be enhanced by using Cable Length Benchmarking. See Cable Length Benchmarks).

90 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Performance Monitoring View

Performance Monitoring View

See Etherjack/Syncjack Test Procedures and Performance Monitoring .

ESA and CFM

See ESA Provisioning and Operation and CFM Provisioning and Operation.

Precision Time Protocol

See Provision Precision Time Protocol (PTP) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH).

Sync Jack
See SyncJack Testing - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH).

Service Activation Test

See Service Activation Testing.

Two-Way Active Measurement Protocol

See Two-Way Active Measurement Protocol .

Open Flow
See Provision OpenFlow.

ConnectGuard
See Provision ConnectGuard - GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (CSH).

IPFIX
See Provision IPFIX.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 91

IPFIX

This page intentionally left blank.

92 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Introduction

Operations and Provisioning

Introduction
This chapter contains system provisioning details for the FSP 150GE11xPro and
provides a recommended work flow for new installations. The procedures can also be
used for incorporating provisioning changes to existing systems. Additionally, this
chapter includes links to technical information and procedures elsewhere in the document
that are needed or helpful in successfully completing the installation and original
provisioning process.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 93

Upgrade Software

Upgrade Software
Upgrading or changing the system software is a multi-step process:

l First, the new software is transferred from an external repository to a temporary

location on the NE. The NE supports transfer via HTTP (Web), HTTPS (Web), FTP,
SFTP and SCP protocols.
l Second, the new system software is installed, that is transferred to the standby side of
the NE.
l Third, the new software is activated, that is switched from standby to active. The FSP
150GE11xPro supports immediate or scheduled activation and can use a validation
timer, which allows the NE to revert to the previous software version if problems are
encountered during the software upgrade process.
o If scheduled activation is chosen, it is possible to cancel the activation any time

before the activation occurs.

o If validation timing is set, the user must accept the new load by the time set, or the
NE automatically reverts to the previous load.

However, performing software upgrade may be either a three-step operation or a one-step

operation.

l If the user wants to perform the individual actions on deployed systems at different
times, the three-step operation is the best choice because it allows a network upgrade
to be staged before taking effect.
l If the user's goal is to have the system running a new software load, the one-step
operation is the solution that combines transfer, installation and activation in one
operation.

Software upgrade operation must be done by a user with at least provisioning

privilege.

Before performing software upgrade in GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (CSH), the

“Software Install” operation must be approved and the “Software Version”
must be specified by the crypto user. See Provision Crypto User’s
Authorizations for more information.

It is recommended to perform a refresh of the browser after every SW

upgrade. Any resource that is cached by the browser may have to be
refreshed if that resource is different from one release to another.

Activation causes the NE to reset, which temporarily interrupts traffic and cancels all
active user sessions.

94 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Upgrade Software

During the software upgrade process, it is desirable to know the status of the
upgrade. The GE11xPro provides standing conditions to supply this need. By
default, these conditions are set with a Notification Code of Not Reported
and thus are only visible by selecting the Maintenance Application System
view and selecting the Conditions List tab in the Details Pane.

If the user wants to see the status conditions dynamically while using the
Upgrade or Database detail views, edit the Notification Codes for SWDL and
Data Base Condition Types to Not Alarmed. This causes the conditions to
display in the Alarm Pane at the bottom of the GUI window (See Figure 3).
See for Software Download (SWDL) condition types.

The upgrade operation data is kept as local events in the Audit Log, which is
viewable from the System Details Pane in the Configuration View. Below is a
sample of these messages - this example indicates the activation is
scheduled for January 17, 2012 at 12:10, with the validation timer set for 1
hour.

2012-01-16 [Link]root:EVT:2012-01-17 [Link]Software Activate

timer set
2012-01-16 [Link]root:EVT:2012-01-17 [Link]Software Validate
timer set

Software Download Condition Types

Condition Type Description

SWDL - File Transfer In Pro- Software is being copied from a remote source to tem-
gress porary memory
SWDL - Installation In Pro- Software is being written from temporary memory to
gress Standby
SWDL - Activation In Pro- Software is being activated or is scheduled for future
gress activation
Software has been activated and the validation timer
SWDL - Validation In Progress
was set and is running

The following procedure includes steps for performing the software upgrade process
using the web-based Element Management System (EMS). It is also possible to perform
this process using CLI. See the FSP 150GE11xPro Command Line Interface Reference
Guide for details. The following procedure also assumes that the user has configured the
NE with an IP address and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN. (See "Set Up the
GE11xPro DCN (eth0) Port Using the Serial Port " on page 461.)

1. Click on the Maintenance icon, or select “Maintenance” from the application drop-
down list.

2. Determine the next step.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 95

Upgrade Software

Desired Activity Then

Perform one-step software upgrade? Continue with the next step.
Perform three-step software upgrade? Go to 6.
Cancel scheduled activation? Go to 19.
Accept or reject upgrade during validation period? Go to 17.

3. Expand “System”, “Administration”, right click on “Upgrade” and select “Upgrade”.

The default Web file transfer view displays

Figure 1: One-Step Upgrade - Web Transfer View

4. Determine the File Transfer Method and enter the corresponding file transfer options
as required to access the proper image file (Web) or the file server (FTP/SCP/SFTP).
Then, select the activation mode (Activate Immediately or Schedule Activation). If
Schedule Activation is selected, enter the date and time activation should occur.
Enable Validation Timer and set the Time Out option if desired (see the same note and
warning below 14). See below figure.

Figure 2: One-Step Upgrade - SCP Transfer Scheduled Activation View

Click on OK.

96 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Upgrade Software

The Upgrade Progress begins, showing dynamically changed Mode,

Status and previous completed process.

Figure 3: One-Step Upgrade In Progress

5. Determine the next step.

Desired Activity Then

Proceed with activation (Immediate or Sched-
Go to 15.
uled)?
Cancel previous scheduled activation? Go to 19

User may change the activation schedule settings by canceling the previous
scheduled activation first.
However, immediate activation is not allowed to be canceled and must be
completed with no interruption.

6. Expand “System”, “Administration”, right click on “Upgrade” and select “Transfer”.

The default Web file transfer view displays

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 97

Upgrade Software

Figure 4: Three-Step Upgrade - Web Transfer View

7. Determine the next step.

Desired Activity Then

Continue with the next
Use Web Browser (HTTP) to transfer software?
step.
Use FTP, SFTP or SCP to transfer software? Go to 10

8. Enter the path to the proper image file (.img file extension) or use the “browse” button
to search for the file location and select it, then select “OK”.

The file transfer will begin, and a screen similar to Figure 6 displays.

9. Go to 12.

10. For “File Transfer Method” select FTP, SFTP or SCP from the drop-down list.

The display changes to the FTP, SFTP or SCP file transfer view, shown in the
following figure. (The figure shows the SCP view, the FTP and SFTP file
transfer view is identical.)

98 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Upgrade Software

Figure 5: Three-Step Upgrade - SCP Transfer View

11. Enter the data required in the screen to access the FTP or SCP server and begin the
file transfer process, and click on OK.

It is assumed that the user knows the IPv4/IPv6 address of the FTP, SFTP
or SCP server, has a valid user ID and password and knows the path and file
name of the software file to transfer.

The file transfer will begin and a screen similar to the following displays

Figure 6: File Transfer Progress Screen

12. When the “Status” changes from “In progress” to “Success”, right click on “Upgrade” in
the selection tree pane and select “Install”. The following screen displays:

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 99

Upgrade Software

Figure 7: Three-Step Upgrade - Software Install Query

Click OK, and the screen shows a progress bar similar to Figure 6.

13. When the install completes (when the “Status” changes from “In progress” to
“Success”), right click on “Upgrade” in the selection tree pane, then select “Activate”.
An Activate Upgrade screen displays, as shown in the following figure:

Figure 8: Three-Step Upgrade - Software Activate

14. Select the activation mode (Activate Now or Schedule Activation).

If Schedule Activation is selected, enter the date and time activation should
occur.

Enable and set the validation timer time out option if desired (see the following
note and warning).

100 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Upgrade Software

While the Schedule Activation timer is running, users are not allowed to
perform any saving, creating, downloading or transferring operations
regarding Database, Configuration Files, Logs, Diagnostics Files, etc. Users
must perform “Cancel Previous Scheduled Activation” and then do desired
file or database related operations.

Activation can be done immediately (Activate Now) or scheduled for some

date/time in the future (Schedule Activation). Either way, setting the
validation timer causes an automatic switch-back to the previous load if the
timer should expire. The validation timer should be set for a long enough
period to allow reconnection to the NE and verification that it is functioning
properly. Once this “sanity test” is done, the user accepts or cancels the
upgrade (see 18).

Failure to use the validation timer option can result in loss of contact with the
NE and interruption of customer traffic should the software or database
become corrupted during the upgrade process. The validation timer option
permits the NE to “roll back” to the previous software and database without
user intervention.

After selecting and setting the desired activation and validation settings, select
OK.

15. When activation occurs (now or when scheduled) the NE resets, and the web-based
GUI session is interrupted. After a few seconds the STA LED will begin to flash.

Wait for 2 or 3 minutes (or when the STA LED has finished flashing and
becomes solid green), then reconnect to the NE. Once logged back in, verify
that the NE is behaving normally.

If unable to login, the validation timer will eventually time out and the NE will
revert to the previous load, and after that NE reset, reconnection should be
possible. If the validation timer was not used, contact technical support.

16. Determine the next step.

Desired Activity Then

Accept or reject upgrade during validation period? Go to 17
Validation timer not set? Go to 21

17. Expand “Administration”, right click on “Upgrade” and select “Validate”.

The display is the Validate Upgrade view, shown in the following figure:

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 101

Upgrade Software

Figure 9: Validate Upgrade View

18. To accept the upgrade, ensure the radio button next to “Accept Upgrade” is selected.

To cancel the upgrade, ensure the radio button next to “Cancel Upgrade” is
selected.

Click on OK.

19. Click on “Upgrade” in the selection tree pane, then select “Activate”. An Activate
Upgrade screen displays, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 10: Software Activate

20. Select the “Cancel Previous Scheduled Activation” radio button and Click on OK.

102 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provisioning the GE11xPro

21. Click on “Upgrade” in the selection tree pane, then select “Activate”. An Activate
Upgrade screen displays

22. Select Enable Validation Timer and set Time Out time. Click on OK.

The validation timer settings can be changed only after a scheduled

activation is canceled (See 19).

Provisioning the GE11xPro

Once the chassis has been installed, cabled and powered (see “Physical Installation” in
FSP 150-GE11xPro Installation and Commissioning Manual document), it requires
provisioning and testing prior to carrying customer traffic. The procedures to accomplish
this are listed below in the suggested order that they be performed. The following
sections can also be used for incorporating provisioning changes to existing systems.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 103

Provisioning the GE11xPro

Recommended Sequence of Steps for Initial Turn Up of

a GE11xPro
The following sections in this chapter provide supporting information and procedures for
provisioning the GE11xPro:

l Serial Connection
l Set Up the GE11xPro DCN (eth0) Port Using the Serial Port or Set Up the USB
Modem Using the Serial Port (if no DCN) or Set up WiFi Connection via the Wifi
Dongle (if no DCN)
l Browser-based IP Connection
l Configure USB Modem Using the Web-based GUI
l Upgrade Software
l Provision System Options
l Provision NE-1 Common Units
l Provision Secure Access
l Provision SNMP Access
l Enable Software License
l Configure Flexible Port (Ethernet Port II)
l Provision Access Port Services
o Ethernet Private Line Service Provisioning

o Ethernet Virtual Private Line Service Provisioning

l Provision Network Ports
o Provision Network Ports without LAG or Protection Group

o Provision Network Ports in a Protection Group

o Provision Ports in a LAG Group
o Provision Ports in a Split Horizon Group (SHG)
o Provision Network Ports in an Ethernet Ring Protection Group
l Provision Ethernet over Multiprotocol Label Switching (EoMPLS)
l Provision ConnectGuard - GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (CSH)
l Provision Layer-3 Services
l Provision Bidirectional Fault Detection (BFD)
l Provision OpenFlow
l Provision Management Tunnel(s)
l Provision AMP Server and Client
l Provision Precision Time Protocol (PTP) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)
l Provision Synchronous Ethernet (Sync-E) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)
l Provision Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
l Provision Environmental Alarms - GE114Pro (HE)
l Provision Performance Monitoring
l Clear all alarms (see Recommended Steps for Trouble Clearing)
l Database and Configuration Files
l Test the FSP 150-GE11xPro:
o Loopbacks

o Etherjack® Diagnostics
o Cable Length Benchmarks

104 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provisioning the GE11xPro

o Etherjack/Syncjack Test Procedures and Performance Monitoring

o ESA Provisioning and Operation
o CFM Provisioning and Operation
o Service Activation Testing
o SyncJack Testing - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)
o Two-Way Active Measurement Protocol

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 105

Provision System Options

Provision System Options

Configure System
The following procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address
and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN (see Set Up the GE11xPro DCN (eth0) Port
Using the Serial Port ) and is logged on using the web-based GUI.

1. Right click on “System” in the selection tree pane and select Edit System and the
following screen displays:

Figure 11: Edit System

2. The user can change the system level CLI prompt prefix, set Provisioning Mode,
Management Traffic Bridging, Management Traffic Bridging Security, Proxy ARP,
Proxy NDP, IPv6 Forwarding, Date, Time, FTP, HTTP, HTTPS, SSL Cipher
Strength, SCP, Serial Port, Serial Port Auto Log Off, SFTP, SSH, Telnet,
Authentication Traps, CLI Security Prompt, DSCP, DSCP Value, Long IF Alias
Control, Reset Button and SNMP Engine ID. For information on these system options
see System Configuration.

The System identity information that is not available for editing on this screen
(Name, Description, Location, Contact), is the same identity information that
displays in the NE-1 view and is editable on the NE-1 “Edit Configuration”
display.

3. Check that the information entered in 2is what is desired and click on OK. The display
will change to reflect the entered data.

106 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision System Options

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 107

Provision System Options

Configure Logs
The following procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address
and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN (see Set Up the GE11xPro DCN (eth0) Port
Using the Serial Port ) and is logged on using the web-based GUI.

1. Right click on “System” in the selection tree pane and select Edit Security Log and the
following screen displays:

Figure 12: Edit Security Log View

2. Select “Enabled” to include Security Log messages in the Syslog or “Disabled” to not
include Security Log messages in the Syslog and click on OK.

3. Right click on “System” in the selection tree pane and select Edit Alarm Log and the
following screen displays:

Figure 13: Edit Alarm Log View

4. For Syslog, select “Enabled” to include Alarm Log messages in the Syslog or
“Disabled” to not include Alarm Log messages in the Syslog; for Local Logging, select
“Enabled” or “Disabled” to Enable or Disable sending Alarm messages to the local log
(Alarm Log tab) and click on OK.

5. Right click on “System” in the selection tree pane and select Edit Audit Log and the
following screen displays:

108 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision System Options

Figure 14: Edit Audit Log View

6. For Syslog, select “Enabled” to include Audit Log messages in the Syslog or
“Disabled” to not include Audit Log messages in the Syslog; for Local Logging, select
“Enabled” or “Disabled” to Enable or Disable sending Alarm messages to the local log
(Alarm Log tab) and click on OK.

7. Right click on “System” in the selection tree pane and select Edit Syslog and the
following screen displays:

Figure 15: Edit Syslog View

8. Select the desired Log Server Method - User Defined, or DHCP.

9. Enter Syslog Server information (IPv4/IPv6 Address and Port) for up to 3 servers (the
default port number is 514) if Log Server Method is User Defined.

Click on OK.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 109

Provision System Options

Configure ACL
The Access Control List (ACL) allows the user to limit access to the NE via the DCN or
management tunnels to specific IP addresses or IP address ranges (subnetworks). Up to
ten entries can be made, and each entry can be individually enabled or disabled.

Enabling ACL filtering will “permit” the corresponding management traffic. Disabling the
ACL filtering will “deny” the corresponding management traffic. Enabled entries apply to
all management interfaces and may be provisioned for specific IP addresses, or an IP
address range (subnetwork).

The following procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address
and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN (see Set Up the GE11xPro DCN (eth0) Port
Using the Serial Port ) and is logged on using the web-based GUI.

1. Right click on “System” in the selection tree pane and select Edit ACL and the
following screen displays:

Figure 16: Edit ACL

2. The Access Control List contains 10 entries. Each entry consists of IP version and
corresponding IP data options; an IPv4 Address and network Mask are configurable if
IP Version is IPv4; an IPv6 address and Prefix are configurable if IP Version is IPv6.
Edit the Control status to Enable/Disable each entry.

3. Click on OK. The display will change to reflect the entered data.

110 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision System Options

Configure LLDP
The following procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address
and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN (see Set Up the GE11xPro DCN (eth0) Port
Using the Serial Port ) and is logged on using the web-based GUI.

1. Right click on “System” in the selection tree pane and select Edit LLDP and the
following screen displays:

Figure 17: Edit LLDP at System Level

2. Enter the following data to configure system LLDP options (see Table 97 on p. 945 for
options and rules details):

Transmission Interval - 5 - 3600 seconds, default as 30

Hold Time Multiplier - 2 - 10, default as 4

Re-initialization Delay - 1 - 10 seconds, default as 2

Notification Interval - 5 - 3600 seconds, default as 30

Maximum Tx Credit - 1 - 100, default as 5

Message Fast Tx - 1 - 3600 seconds, default as 1

Tx Fast Init - 1 - 8, default as 4

Maximum Neighbors Action - automatically set to “Discard NEW”

Click on OK to save the settings.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 111

Provision System Options

Edit the Security Banner

The following procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address
and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN (see Set Up the GE11xPro DCN (eth0) Port
Using the Serial Port ) and is logged on using the web-based GUI.

1. Right click on “System” in the selection tree pane and select Edit Banner and the
following screen displays:

Figure 18: Edit Banner

2. The Banner is displayed for each CLI or GUI login. The banner can be edited to contain
a customized message of up to 1024 characters. The default banner message is “This
is a private system. Unauthorized access or use may lead to prosecution.”

Edit the Banner, then click on OK and the screen will update to display the edited
banner message.

112 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision System Options

Edit Time Zone

The following procedure provides instructions for editing the System Time Zone
configuration. It assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address and
connected the NE to a DCN or LAN (see Set Up the GE11xPro DCN (eth0) Port Using
the Serial Port ) and is logged on using the web-based GUI.

1. Right click on “System” in the selection tree pane and select Edit Time Zone.

The Edit Time Zone screen displays

Figure 19: Edit Time Zone

2. Enter/Edit the following settings as required:

Enter the UTC Offset

Enable/Disable DST Control

Select the DST Start Month (if DST Control is Enabled)

Enter the DST Start Day (if DST Control is Enabled)

Enter the DST Start Time (if DST Control is Enabled)

Enter the DST UTC Offset (if DST Control is Enabled)

Select the DST End Month (if DST Control is Enabled)

Enter the DST End Day (if DST Control is Enabled)

Enter the DST End Time (if DST Control is Enabled)

Click on OK

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 113

Provision System Options

Edit System Time of Day

The following procedure provides instructions for editing the System Time of Day using
Local, NTP or PTP configuration. It assumes that the user has configured the NE with an
IP address and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN (see Set Up the GE11xPro DCN
(eth0) Port Using the Serial Port ) and is logged on using the web-based GUI.

1. Right click on “System” in the selection tree pane and select Edit System Time of
Day.

The Edit System Time Of Day screen displays

Figure 20: Edit System Time Of Day

2. Determine the next step.

Current Status Then

Edit System Time Of Day via local entry? Continue with the next step.
Edit System Time Of Day via NTP? Go to 7.
Edit System Time Of Day via PTP Clock? Go to 9.
Edit System Time Of Day via Time Clock? Go to 11.

Only GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH) support PTP Clock/Time

Clock used as Source of System Time Of Day.(see Enable Software
License)

3. For System Time Of Day, select Local.

Local Time Of Day entry fields appear

4. Select the drop down calendar for the Date and select the appropriate year, month and
day.

114 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision System Options

Three years are displayed at a time. To progress through the years

beyond the displayed years, continue to click on the right most years
until the desired year is displayed. Then select the desired year. Then
select the desired month from the drop down list. Then select the
desired date.

Figure 21: Edit System Time Of Day - Local Method

5. Enter the appropriate time in (hh:mm:ss) and select OK.

6. Select the System Time Of Day tab to view the local entry.

7. For System Time Of Day, select NTP.

NTP entry fields appear

Figure 22:  Edit System Time Of Day - NTP Method

8. Select/enter the following NTP configuration settings:

a) The Polling Interval can be set to 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512 or 1024
seconds. The default is 16 seconds.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 115

Provision System Options

b) Select the desired NTP Server Method - User Defined or DHCP

c) Select the IP version and enter the corresponding IP address for Primary
Server and, if applicable, the Backup Server if NTP Server Method is User
Defined
d) If both a Primary and Backup Server are configured, either one can be
made Active by selecting the desired Active server.
Select OK.

The display updates to show the edited information

9. For System Time Of Day, select PTP Clock.

PTP entry fields appear

Figure 23: Edit System Time Of Day - PTP Clock Method

10. Select the desired Source TOD Clock.

Select OK.

The display updates to show the edited information

11. For System Time Of Day, select Time Clock.

Time Clock entry field appears

116 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision System Options

Figure 24: Edit System Time Of Day - Time Clock Method

12. System automatically provisions TIME CLOCK-1-1-1-1 as Source TOD Clock.

13. Click on OK to confirm.

The display updates to show the edited information

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 117

Provision System Options

Configure Data Export

The following procedure provides instructions for editing the System Time of Day using
Local, NTP or PTP configuration. It assumes that the user has configured the NE with an
IP address and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN (see Set Up the GE11xPro DCN
(eth0) Port Using the Serial Port ) and is logged on using the web-based GUI.

1. Determine the next step:

Desired Activity? Then

Edit Data Export settings? Continue with the next step.
Clear Data Export Statistics? Go to 5.

2. Right click on System on the selection tree pane, select Data Export and Edit.

An Edit Data Export window displays

Figure 25: Edit Data Export

3. Enter/Select the following options to configure the Data Export settings:

a) Select the desired IP version and enter the corresponding IP address.

b) Enter the User Name and select the User Password checkbox to enable
the entry of User Password and User Password Repeat.
c) Enter the desired Export Path.
d) Select the desired checkbox(es) by the Feature names to specify what
Data is to export.
4. Click on OK. The screen will update to show the entered information.

5. Right click on System on the selection tree pane, select Data Export and Clear
Statistics.

A Clear Statistics window displays

118 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision System Options

Figure 26: Clear Statistics (ESA, TWAMP)

6. Click OK to clear the statistics of ESA L3 PM and TWAMP PM.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 119

Provision NE-1 Common Units

Provision NE-1 Common Units

Configure NE-1
The following procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address
and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN (see Set Up the GE11xPro DCN (eth0) Port
Using the Serial Port ) and is logged on using the web-based GUI.

1. Expand the System entity, right click on “NE-1” in the selection tree pane and select
Edit Configuration. The following screen displays:

Figure 27: Edit NE-1

2. The Administrative State can be changed between IS (default value) and

Management. (See Entity State Descriptions).

NE Identity information can also be changed or entered; Name, Location,

Contact, CLI Prefix and BWP Mode.

After editing the NE information, click on OK. The display will update to show
the edited information.

The NE-1 identity information that is available for editing on this

screen except for CLI Prefix and BWP Mode, is the same identity
information that displays in the System view and is editable on the
“Edit System” display.

120 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision NE-1 Common Units

3. Right click on NE-1 and select Edit LLDP.

An LLDP Control edit screen displays

Figure 28: Edit LLDP Control on NE Level

4. Select desired LLDP Admin status from the drop-down list.

Click on OK.

The LLDP Admin Action on NE level is only a global execution rather

than a setting that can be saved. The LLDP Admin Action on NE level
will unify the LLDP Admin Status on port level. However, it’s still
allowed that user customize the LLDP Admin Status on specific port
(see Provision Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 121

Provision NE-1 Common Units

Configure NTE11xPRO
The following procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address
and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN (see Set Up the GE11xPro DCN (eth0) Port
Using the Serial Port ) and is logged on using the web-based GUI.

1. Select the Configuration Application on the tool bar or select Configuration from the
Application menu. Expand the system and NE-1 by clicking the “+” sign next to each
entity.

2. Right click on “NTE11xPRO” in the selection tree pane and select Edit Configuration.

An Edit Configuration screen displays

Figure 29: Edit NTE11xPRO

3. The Administrative State can be changed between IS (default value) and

Management. (See Entity State Descriptions)

An alias can be entered to permit easy identification of this particular

NTE11xPRO.

SNMP Dying Gasp can be Enabled. Default is Disabled.

After editing the NTE11x information, click on OK. The display will update to
show the edited information.

122 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision NE-1 Common Units

Configure PSUs - GE112Pro (H)/GE114Pro (SH)/

GE114Pro (CSH)/GE114Pro (HE)
The following procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address
and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN (see Set Up the GE11xPro DCN (eth0) Port
Using the Serial Port ) and is logged on using the web-based GUI.

The GE112Pro (H)/GE114Pro (HE) can be powered with 24W PSU(s)

and either slot may be populated with AC or -48VDCPSUs.
The GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH) can be powered with 40 W
PSU(s) and either slot may be populated with AC or -48VDC PSUs.
If 24W PSU(s) are installed in a GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH),
the system will prevent it from initializing and no alarm is raised.
To verify whether a particular PSU is a 24W or 40W unit, the part
number is printed on the PSU label and is retrievable via all user
interfaces. Part numbers and descriptions are found in FSP 150-
GE11xPro System Description document.

1. Select the Configuration Application on the tool bar or select Configuration from the
Application menu. Expand the system and NE-1 by clicking the “+” sign next to each
entity.

2. Right click on “PSU-1” in the selection tree pane and select Edit Configuration

An Edit Configuration screen displays

Figure 1:  Edit PSU

3. The Administrative State can be changed between IS (default value) and

Management. (See Entity State Descriptions.)

An alias can be entered to permit easy identification of the PSU.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 123

Provision NE-1 Common Units

After editing the PSU information, click on OK. The display updates.

4. Repeat 1 and 3 for PSU-2.

124 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision NE-1 Common Units

Provision PSE
Refer to the following for provisioning a PSE service on a GO102Pro (SP). Power-
Supplying Equipment (PSE) feature is configured on Group level and port level. The DC
variant of GO102Pro (S) can work as a PD device.

Configure PSE Group

Refer to PSE Group Configuration Rules to determine the default values, value ranges
and rules for each option in the following procedure. A GO102Pro (SP) can work as a
PSE device.

1. Select the Configuration Application on the tool bar or select Configuration from the
Application Menu. Expand System in the selection tree pane, by clicking on the “+”
signs next to it to expand the view.

2. Under System Right Click the PSE Node in the Selection tree, and select Edit
Configuration from the pop-up menu.

A Configuration Screen is displayed.

Figure 30: PSE Group Configuration

3. Enter Power Usage Threshold.

4. Select from the drop-down menu to Enable or Disable the Notification.

5. Select from the drop-down menu to Enable or Disable the Non-Standard Powered
Devices (PD).

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 125

Provision NE-1 Common Units

Configure PSE Port

Refer toPSE Port Rules to determine the default values, value ranges and rules for each
option in the following procedure.

1. Make sure the Access Port is in Copper mode. For more information about media
type, see Ethernet Private Line Service Provisioning.

2. Select the Configuration Application on the tool bar or select Configuration from the
Application Menu.

3. Expand System and PSE in the selection tree pane, by clicking on the “+” signs next
to it to expand the view.

4. Under PSE, right Click the desired Port in the tree and select Edit Configuration from
the pop-up menu.

An Edit Configuration screen is displayed.

Figure 31: PSE Port Configuration

5. Enter Administrative state for the Port.

6. Enter Power Pair configuration for the Port.

7. (Optional) Enter a description in the PSE Port Type text box. Usually, it is used to
indicate the type of Powered Device connected to this port.

8. Select an Power Level form on the Available Power Level Drop-down Menu.

126 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Secure Access

Provision Secure Access

Secure Access involves several different aspects:

l The GE11xPro accommodates various methods of access to the system including

serial port, telnet, SSH, HTTP, HTTPS, FTP, SFTP and SCP. These are viewable
and editable from the System and Edit System view respectively (see Configure
System).
l Access via SSH and SSL based protocols, uses certificates and keys that are user
configurable. (see Configure Security Keys).
l The local user access security policy can be configured for low, medium or high
security levels. (see Configure Security Policy).
l Access can be restricted by using the Access Control List (ACL) where only
designated IP addresses or subnetworks are permitted to access the system (see
Configure ACL).
l Access to the system can be limited by use of locally defined users including user ID,
password and access level (superuser, crypto, provisioning, maintenance or retrieve).
See Configure Local Non-Crypto Users and Configure Local Crypto User - GE114Pro
(C)/GE114Pro (CSH).
l Access to the system can be restricted by using remote authentication with an
externally defined and controlled user set. See Configure Remote Authentication.

Configure Security Keys

The following procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address
and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN (see Set Up the GE11xPro DCN (eth0) Port
Using the Serial Port ) and is logged on as a superuser using the web-based GUI.

Changing the security keys may interrupt any current secure sessions that
have used the existing keys for authentication.

From the Configuration view with the Administration tree expanded:

1. Left click on “Key Generation” in the selection tree pane and the following screen
displays to show the current SSL Certificate and SSH Key information:

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 127

Provision Secure Access

Figure 32: Display SSL Certificate and SSH Key

2. To regenerate the SSL Certificate or SSH Key, right click on “Key Generation” in the
selection tree pane and select Regenerate Keys and the following screen displays
(see Figure 34):

Figure 33: Regenerate Keys

3. To regenerate the SSL Certificate, select the “Regenerate SSL Certificate radio
button, click OK for the message pop-up and the following screen displays (see Figure
34):

When an SSL Certificate is generated, the HTTP server will be restarted and
web access will be unavailable during this time (approximately 15 seconds).

128 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Secure Access

Figure 34: Regenerate SSL Certificate

4. Edit the Certificate Data, then click on OK.

5. To regenerate the SSH Key, select the radio button next to “Regenerate SSH Key”,
click OK on the message pop-up and the following screen displays:

When an SSH Key is generated, all SSH users will be logged off.

Figure 35: Regenerate SSH Key

6. Click on OK.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 129

Provision Secure Access

Configure Security Policy

The following procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address
and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN (see Set Up the GE11xPro DCN (eth0) Port
Using the Serial Port ) and is logged on as a superuser using the web-based GUI.

From the Configuration view with the Administration tree expanded:

1. Right click on “Security Policy” in the selection tree pane and select Edit Policy, and
the following screen displays to show the current Policy Strength setting and a
description of the policy rules:

Figure 36: Edit Policy Strength

2. To change the Policy Strength, select the desired setting from the Strength drop-down
list, then click on OK.

130 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Secure Access

Configure Local Non-Crypto Users

The following procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address
and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN (see Set Up the GE11xPro DCN (eth0) Port
Using the Serial Port ) and is logged on using the web-based GUI.

The following procedure applies to the configuration of local non-crypto

users who are the users with Superuser, Provisioning, Maintenance or
Retrieve privilege.
See Configure Local Crypto User - GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (CSH)
for crypto user configuration.

1. Select Configuration icon or select Configuration from the Applications menu, then
expand the System, Administration, Users and Local entities, by clicking on the “+”
signs next to each entity.

2. Determine the next step.

Desired Activity? Then

Entering a new user? Continue with the next step.
Editing data other than the password for an exist-
Go to 5.
ing user?
Editing just the password for an existing user? Go to 7.
Deleting a user? Go to 9.
Remove a login lock-out? Go to 11.

Entering a new user can only be done by a user with superuser privilege.

3. Right click on “Local” in the selection tree pane and select Add User and the following
screen displays:

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 131

Provision Secure Access

Figure 37: Add User

4. Enter the required data to establish a new user. Details on the function and rules for
each data entry is located at Administration.

After editing the user information, click on OK. The display will update to show
the edited information.

Editing non-crypto user data other than the user’s own password can only be
done by a user with superuser privilege.

5. Right click on the user name to be edited in the selection tree pane and select Edit
User and the following screen displays:

Figure 38: Edit User

6. Edit the required data for this user. Details on the function and rules for each data entry
is located at Administration.

132 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Secure Access

After editing the user information, click on OK. The display will update to show
the edited information.

Editing the user password can be done by the user or a user with superuser
privilege.

7. Right click on the user name to be edited in the selection tree pane and select Edit
Password and the following screen displays:

Figure 39: Edit User Password

8. Edit the password for this user. Details on the function and rules for each data entry is
located at Administration.

After editing the password, click on OK. The display will update to show the
edited information.

Deleting a user requires superuser privilege.

9. Right click on the User Name to be deleted, select Delete User, and the following
screen displays:

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 133

Provision Secure Access

Figure 40: Delete User

10. Verify that the selected user is the one to be deleted. Click on OK. The display will
update to show the deleted information.

Removing a lock-out from a user requires superuser privilege.

11. Right click on the User Name that is locked, select Remove Lock, and the following
screen displays:

Figure 41: Remove Lock

12. Verify that the selected user is the one from whom the lock-out is to be removed. Click
on OK. The display updates.

134 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Secure Access

Configure Local Crypto User - GE114Pro (C)/

GE114Pro (CSH)
The following procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address
and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN (see Set Up the GE11xPro DCN (eth0) Port
Using the Serial Port ) and is logged on using the web-based GUI.

The following procedure applies to the configuration of the local crypto user
who is the user with Crypto privilege and is only available in GE114Pro
(C)/GE114Pro (CSH). Currently, only one crypto user is supported per
system.
For more provisioning privilege information of the crypto user, see Provision
ConnectGuard - GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (CSH).

1. Select Configuration icon or select Configuration from the Applications menu, then
expand the System, Administration, Users and Local entities, by clicking on the “+”
signs next to each entity.

2. Determine the next step:

Desired Activity? Then

Editing data other than the password for
Continue with the next step.
the crypto user?
Edit the login password for the crypto user? Go to 5.
Edit the crypto password for the crypto
Go to 7.
user?
Remove a login lock-out? Go to 11.

The crypto user cannot be deleted by any user.

Editing the crypto user data and login password can be done by a user with
either Superuser privilege or Crypto privilege.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 135

Provision Secure Access

The user logged on with the Crypto privilege can only see one local user
“crypto” (see on p. 136).
The crypto user can edit user information, login password and crypto
password.
Crypto user’s crypto password can only be edited by the crypto user.

Figure 42: Edit Crypto User (Login with Crypto Privilege)

3. Right click on “crypto” in the selection tree pane and select Edit User.

An Edit User screen displays

Figure 43: Edit Crypto User

4. Edit the required data for the crypto user. Details on function and rules for each data
entry is located at Administration.

After editing the user information, click on OK. The display will update to show
the edited information.

5. Right click on “crypto” in the selection tree pane and select Edit Password.

136 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Secure Access

An Edit Password screen displays

Figure 44: Edit Crypto User’s Password (Login with Superuser Privilege)

The user with Superuser privilege can change the login password of the
crypto user, which can cause the crypto user’s crypto password to be
cleared, so that the crypto user must reset new crypto password at next
login.
For more information about crypto user login, see Logging On.

Figure 45: Edit Crypto User’s Password (Login with Crypto Privilege)

6. Enter the old password and new password as required. Details on the function and
rules for each data entry is located at Administration.

If the login user is the crypto user, it is also required to enter the old login
password besides the new login password.

After editing the password, click on OK.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 137

Provision Secure Access

7. Right click on “crypto” in the selection tree pane and select Edit Crypto Password.

An Edit Crypto Password screen displays

Figure 46: Edit Crypto Password (Only Available to Crypto User)

8. Type New Crypto Password and Retype it.

The crypto user’s crypto password conform to the security policy of High
strength (see Configure Security Policy).
The crypto password is stored in SRAM. Every time after the provisioning
operation which must only be performed by the crypto user, the crypto user is
required to enter the crypto password to verify if the password input is the
same as the one stored in SRAM.
The crypto password input is required in ConnecGuard provisioning (see
Provision ConnectGuard - GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (CSH)).
The crypto password can be set at first-time login (see Logging On).

Crypto user’s crypto password can only be edited by the crypto user.

If the user is using Internet Explorer 10, an “eye” icon will show by the crypto
password entry allowing the user to click to display the password details.

9. Click on OK.

An Enter Crypto Password window pops up

138 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Secure Access

Figure 47: Crypto Password Input Required

10. Enter the new crypto password that was just set and click on OK.

Instead of hiding the crypto password using black dots, user may click on the
“Show password” checkbox as an option to make the password components
visible, e.g., gui_12345678#ADVA.

11. Right click on “crypto” in selection tree pane and select “Remove Lock”.

A Remove Lock inquiry screen displays

Figure 48: Remove Lock for Crypto User (Superuser Only)

Only the use with Superuser privilege can remove the lock for any user
account.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 139

Provision Secure Access

12. Click on OK. The display updates.

140 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Secure Access

Configure Remote Authentication

The following procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address
and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN (see Set Up the GE11xPro DCN (eth0) Port
Using the Serial Port ) and is logged on using the web-based GUI.

1. Expand the System and Administration entities in the selection tree pane, by clicking
on the “+” signs next to each entity to expand each view.

2. Right click on “Remote Authentication” in the selection tree pane and select Edit
Remote Authentication and the following screen displays:

Figure 49: Edit Remote Authentication

3. Enter the required data for the Remote Authentication Protocol System Level
Configuration including Authentication Protocol, Authentication Type, TACACS
Privilege Control, TACACS Default Privilege, NAS IP Address (RADIUS only),
Accounting, and Access Order. Details on the function and rules for each entry is
located at Administration and User Management and Security and in FSP 150-
GE11xPro System Description document.

4. Enter the required data for each Remote Authentication Server (1, 2 and 3) including
Server Status, Priority, IP Address, Server Secret, Port, Accounting Port, Timeout
and Retries. Details on the function and rules for each entry is located at
Administration and User Management and Security and in FSP 150-GE11xPro
System Description document.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 141

Provision Secure Access

If Remote Authentication is activated, local access will be authenticated

based on the selected Access Order. If Access Order is Local, the system
will perform the authentication in local first, then in the remote server if a user
does not exist in local; if Access Order is Remote, vice versa. For details,
see User Management and Security and in FSP 150-GE11xPro System
Description document.

5. Verify that all data is entered properly, then click on OK.

142 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision SNMP Access

Provision SNMP Access

SNMP information is contained in the FSP 150GE11xPro SNMP User Guide.

References for SNMP configuration settings may be found in SNMP and SNMP Support
in FSP 150-GE11xPro System Description document.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 143

Enable Software License

Enable Software License

The following software licensing options are available:

PTP - MC/BC, supported in GE114Pro (SH) and GE114Pro (CSH), enables/disables

G.8265/G.8275 Master Clock/Boundary Clock functionalities, where up to 5 remote
G.8265 slaves are supported, and the G.8265 Master Clock cannot coexist with a G.8265
Boundary Clock. By default, this license is Disabled.

PTP-Extended-Remote-Slaves, supported in GE114Pro (SH) and GE114Pro (CSH),

enables/disables the extended scalability for the maximum 16 remote slaves if all the
associated MCIs are configured with the Max Sync Message Rate and Max Delay
Response Message Rate equal to or lower than 32 Packets Per Second. This license
can be enabled only when the PTP - MC/BC license has been enabled. By default, this
license is Disabled.

SyncJack - Extended - Scale, supported in GE114Pro (SH) and GE114Pro (CSH),

enables/disables the maximum number of clock probes, PTP clock probes and PTP
Network [Link] disabled, the system only supports one probe for each kind of probe.
By default, this license is Disabled. (see FSP 150-GE11xPro System Description
document for SyncJack scalability)

OpenFlow, supported in all GE11xPro products, except GE101Pro and GO102Pro,

enables/disables the functionalities for Open Flow. By default, this license is Disabled.

IP-Services-and-ACL-Filtering, supported in all GE11xPro products, enables/disables

the Layer-3 IP service associated configurations and related ACL filtering configurations,
supporting up to 8 VRFs (see FSP 150-GE11xPro System Description document or
Provision Layer-3 Services for Layer-3 Service Scalability). By default, this license is
Disabled.

Extended-Scale-IP-Services, supported in all GE11xPro products, enables/disables the

extended scalability for Layer-3 service associated entities. If enabled, up to 16 VRFs are
supported (see FSP 150-GE11xPro System Description document or Provision Layer-3
Services for Layer-3 Service Scalability). By default, this license is Disabled.

EoMPLS, supported in all GE11xPro products except GE101Pro supported in all

GE11xPro products, enables/disables the MPLS encapsulation on Network Interface
(physical/logical) in A2N direction. If enabled, up to 32 EoMPLS PWs are supported per
GE112/GE112Pro (m)/GE112Pro (H) and up to 64 EoMPLS PWs are supported per
GE114Pro/GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)/GE114Pro (HE). By default,
this license is Disabled.

IPFIX, supported in all GE11xPro products except GE101Pro and GO102Pro,

enables/disables the Internet Protocol Flow Information Export Feature. When IPFIX is
enabled, IPFIX template, Observation Domain and Observation Points can be created to
export desired Traffic information. By default, this license is Disabled.

EoMPLSoGRE, supported in all GE11xPro products except GE101Pro and GO102Pro,

enable or disable the Ethernet over Multi-Protocol Label Switching (MPLS) over Generic
Routing Encapsulation (GRE) feature. This is to make sure that the MTU size of the IP
fragments does not exceed the MTU size in the DOCSIS network.

Vxlan, supported in all GE11xPro products, GE101Pro and GO102Pro, enable or disable
the Virtual eXtensible Local Area Network (VXLAN) feature. By default, this license is
Disabled.

144 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Enable Software License

PTP-Mediation supported in all GE114Pro(SH) and GE114Pro(CSH) products, enable or

disable the Precision Time Protocol Mediation (PTP-Mediation) feature. This feature
allows a Boundary clock to support different PTP profiles on different ports, e.g., G.8275
on its Slave Port and G.8265 on the Master Port. By default, this license is Disabled.

At factory default (with no license enabled), the system supports the

provisioning of up to 32 Transparent Clocks, 1 Telecom Slave (2 SOOCs) or
1 PTP Clock (6 PTP Ports). But the maximum of these entities cannot be
achieved at the same time because 64 PTP Flow Points are supported per
system at most.

1. Select the Maintenance Application on the tool bar or select Maintenance from the
Application Menu. Expand the System, Administration and Software Licensing
entities in the selection tree pane, by clicking on the “+” signs next to each entity to
expand each view.

2. Enter a right click on Feature Management and select Edit Feature.

An Edit Feature Management screen displays

Figure 50: Edit Feature Management

3. Select Enabled from the Status drop-down list associated with the desired feature.

A License Warning window appears

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 145

Enable Software License

Figure 51: License Warning Window

4. Select OK to close the warning window.

5. Select OK to confirm enabling the feature.

The Feature Management Status is displayed and indicates it is in the

Enabled state

Figure 52: Feature Management Status View

6. Repeat 2 through 5 for each additional desired feature.

146 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Configure Flexible Port (Ethernet Port II)

Configure Flexible Port (Ethernet Port II)

The Flexible Port (Ethernet Port two) can function as either a Network Port or an Access
Port. When switching from one to another, the port must not be associated with any of
the entities below:

o Protection group
o LAG
o Management tunnel
o Flow (When the port is in EVPL mode)
o ERP
o SHG

Switching Network Port 2 to function as an Access

Port (or switching back) will cause the system to drop
communications and traffic, and the traffic on other
ports may be influenced.

1. Ensure that no other entities are associated with Port 2 (1+1 protection, LAG,
management tunnel, flow, etc.), otherwise, delete them first.

2. Select Configuration view. Expand the System, NE-1, NTE entities in the Selection
Tree, by clicking on the “+” signs next to each entity.

3. Enter a right click on the Port 2 (E1000-N-2 or E1000-A-2) entity and select “Switch to
ACC” (or “Switch to NET”).

4. Select OK.

A confirmation window appears

5. Select OK.

A system warm reboot occurs

6. After approximately 2 minutes a login screen appears. Log back onto the system.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 147

Provision Access Port Services

Provision Access Port Services

Refer to the following procedures for provisioning and editing Access Port Services:

l Ethernet Private Line Service Provisioning

l Ethernet Virtual Private Line Service Provisioning

GE11xPro - Two Network interfaces that may be configured for copper

(10/100/1000BASE-T) or optical (100BASE-FX /1000BASE-X). Using both ports
provides 1+1 protection. Port 1 is fixed and always designated as a Network port. Port 2
may be configured for LAG or 1+1 Network protection, or as an Access port. For
GE112Pro (m), the two Network interfaces may only be configured for optical.

GE112Pro (AC/DC/PD variants)/GE112Pro (H) - Two Access interfaces that may be

configured for copper (10/100/1000BASE-T) or optical (100BASE-FX/1000BASE-X).
Ports 3 and 4 are Access ports. Port 2 may be configured as an Access port if Network
protection is not provisioned. In addition to traffic service, the copper interface of Port 3 in
GE112Pro PD variant supports PoE which enables the PD variant to be powered by an
external PSE [Link] GE112Pro/GE112Pro (H) are versions of the product that
does not include Sync-E capability, PTP, SyncJackTM and ConnectGuardTM
functionalities.

GE112Pro (m) - Two Fiber Access interfaces that may be configured for optical,
wherein Port 3 is optical only and Port 4 has separate interfaces for copper and
[Link] GE112Pro (m) is a version of the product that does not include Sync-E
capability, PTP, SyncJackTM and ConnectGuardTM functionalities.

GE114Pro/GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)/GE114Pro (HE) - Four

Access interfaces that may be configured for copper (10/100/1000BASE-T) or optical
(100BASE-FX/ 1000BASE-X). Ports 3 through 6 are Access ports. Port 2 may be
configured as an Access port if Network protection is not provisioned. The
GE114Pro/GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (HE) are versions of the product that does not
include Sync-E capability, PTP and SyncJackTM functionalities. The GE114Pro
(SH)/GE114Pro (CSH) are versions of the product that supports Sync-E (ITU G.8262),
Precision Time Protocol (IEEE 1588 v2) and SyncJackTM functionalities. The GE114Pro
(C) and GE114Pro (CSH) are versions of the product that supports ConnectGuardTM
functionality.

148 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Access Port Services

Ethernet Private Line Service Provisioning

Refer to the following for provisioning a port in Ethernet Private Line (EPL) Mode. It is
recommended that you pre-determine the provisioning details and ensure that they meet
the FSP 150-GE11xPro’s provisioning rules prior to making changes to an existing
service or placing an additional Access Port into service. Ensure that CIR, EIR, CBS,
EBS settings are compatible and C-Tag/S-Tag VLAN ID-Priority values will not conflict
with another Access Port/Flow that is in the Assigned state.

Refer to Access Port Configuration Options and Rules to determine the default values,
value ranges and rules for each option in the following procedure. For Control Data
Protocol provisioning, see CPD Filters Options and Rules.

1. Observe the current Service Type. The status will be used in the following steps.

a) Select Configuration view.

b) Expand the System, NE-1 and NTE entities in the Selection Tree, by
clicking on the “+” signs next to each entity.
c) Select the desired Access Port facility in the Selection Tree.
The Access Port facility status window is displayed and the
Configuration Tab is selected
d) Observe the current Service Type.

Changing Service Type on a facility will drop all traffic on the

port, including Management Tunnel connectivity and
Maintenance End Points.

2. Right click on the Access Port facility and select Edit Configuration.

An Edit Configuration window appears

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 149

Provision Access Port Services

Figure 53: Edit Access Port EPL Mode Configuration View

3. Determine the next step.

Current Status Then

Is the current Service Type set to EPL? Go to 6.
Is the Service Type set to EVPL? Continue with the next step.

4. If not already in the unassigned state, set the Administrative State to Unassigned and
click on Apply.

The screen will update

Set the Service Type to EPL

Changing Service Type on a facility will drop all traffic on the

port, including Management Tunnel connectivity and
Maintenance End Points.

Click on OK.

5. Enter a right click on the Access Port facility and select Edit Configuration.

An Edit Configuration window appears

150 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Access Port Services

Figure 54: Edit Access Port EPL Configuration View

6. Enter the Access Port facility changes:

Identification

a) Enter an Alias, as required

State

b) Leave the Administrative State “Unassigned”

Port

c) Select the desired Media Type. Port 2 is available if not used as a

Network Protection port.
d) Enter the desired MTU size
e) Select the Configured Speed option
f) Select the Port MDIX option (copper ports)
g) Enable/Disable OpenFlow
h) Enable/Disable Auto Diagnostic
i) Select the desired settings for Rx DEI Action, Rx DEI Outer Tag, Tx DEI
Action and Tx DEI Outer Tag
Service

j) Select the desired AFP option

k) Enable/Disable Q in Q EtherType Override
l) Edit the Q in Q Ethertype setting if desired (if Q in Q Override is set to
Enabled)
m) Enable/Disable 802.3 RX Pause

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 151

Provision Access Port Services

n) Enable/Disable 802.3 TX Pause

o) Enable/Disable Port Shaping
p) Enter the desired Port Shaped Speed (Setting cannot be lower than the
CIR setting for the flow) if Port Shaping is Enabled.
Link Loss Forwarding

q) Enable/Disable Port LLF Status

r) Enter the desired Delay value
s) Select the desired TX Action
t) Enter the desired Local Link ID
u) Select the desired Trigger Events
v) Select the desired Remote Link IDs
LLDP Destination MAC Address

w) Select the desired destination MAC address types. By default, the

Nearest Bridge is selected. System will create a separate tab in the Edit
LLDP Details Pane for the port
Click on OK.

7. Select the Flow entity under the Access Port.

A Flow entity configuration list displays

Figure 55: Flow Entity Configuration List

8. Enter a right click on the Flow EID and select Edit Configuration.

An Edit Configuration window appears

Figure 56: Select Edit Configuration from Flow Entity Configuration List

152 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Access Port Services

Figure 57: Edit Access Port EPL Flow Configuration View

9. Enter the EPL Flow facility changes: (see Access Port Configuration Options and
Rules for details and rules).

Connection

a) Edit the Circuit Name.

b) Select a Network Port Interface and an Access Interface.
c) Set Policing to Enabled or Disabled; if enabled, select the desired Policing
Control mode.
d) Set a desired mode of A2N shaping (Flow-based or Port-based).
e) Select the desired COS (Class Of Service).
f) Enable/Disable Independent N2A Rate Limiting (if Enabled is selected,
N2A Settings appear below the A2N Settings).
g) Set the desired Frame Loss Threshold Ratio percentage.
h) Set the desired Frame Loss Threshold.
i) Enable/Disable N2N Forwarding.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 153

Provision Access Port Services

j) Select/De-select the relevant check boxes for Broadcast Rate Limiting

and/or Multi-cast Rate Limiting, and if selected, enter the message rate in
bps.
k) Select/De-select the check box for Multicast & Broadcast Rate Limiting,
and if selected, enter the combined message rate in bps.

While Broadcast Rate Limiting or Multicast Rate Limiting is enabled,

Multicast & Broadcast Rate Limiting cannot be enabled at the same
time, and vice versa.

Learning Attributes

l) Set the Interface Learning Control, Protected Learning Control and Max
Forwarding Table Entries for Network Port and Access Port respectively.

If the Network Interface and Access Interface of a flow are both

common Ethernet ports rather than ERP or SHG, enabling MAC
Based Interface Learning may cause traffic congestion due to
insufficient buffer size for broadcasting frames.

m) Set the desired MAC Table Full Action.

n) Set the Aging Timer for the dynamic forwarding table entries.
Tag Management

o) Select the C-Tag Control.

p) Enter the C-Tag (if C-Tag Control is Push).
q) Select the S-Tag Control.
r) Enter the S-Tag (if S-Tag Control is Push).
A2N Settings

s) The following A2N Policer Settings are editable: CIR, EIR, CBS, EBS,
CM, CF. Information regarding each item (full name and entry type) is
available by placing the cursor on the item heading. Edit the desired items
by clicking in the box under the item name.
t) Enter A2N Shaper Settings: BS, SOAM-CIR and SOAM-EIR. If Port-
based A2N shaping is used, it is entered in the A2N Shaper page of the
selected Network Port. If Flow-based A2N shaping is used, it is entered in
the A2N Setting box of the flow. Enter A2N Shaper SOAM-CIR and
SOAM-EIR to allocate bandwidth resource to the SOAM service on this
flow. Enter the MIN Threshold %, MAX Threshold %, Maximum Drop
Probability % for WRED In-Profile and WRED Out of Profile traffic for the
Shaper.
u) If Independent N2A Rating Limiting is enabled, enter N2A Policer settings
(CIR, EIR, CBS, EBS, CM, CF) and N2A Shaper settings (BS).

154 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Access Port Services

When a flow is added or the CBS is increased, the system will ensure
that the N2A and A2N queue BS is at least as large as the sum of
CBSs for all flows’ policers towards that queue by automatically
adjusting the BS to the sum of CBS.
However, when a flow is deleted or the CBS is decreased, the system
will not decrease the BS value accordingly.

Click on OK.

10. Enter a right click on the Flow EID and select Add Forwarding Table Entry.

An Add Forwarding Table Entry window appears

Figure 58: Add Forwarding Table Entry (EPL Flow)

a) Specify the Destination Address and select a Destination Port from the
drop-down list.
b) Select the desired Learning Action.
Click on OK.

c) Enter a right click on the Flow EID and select View FDB Entries to view
the existing Forwarding Table Entries.

Figure 59: View FDB

d) Enter a right click on one FDB entry and select the desired operations
from the menu: View Configuration, Edit Configuration or Delete FDB
Entry.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 155

Provision Access Port Services

Figure 60: FDB Selection Menu

11. Enter a right click on the EPL Flow EID and select the desired operations from the
menu: Flush FDB, or Clear Blocked State.

12. Enter a right click on the EPL Flow EID and select Create A2N ACL Rule.

A Create ACL Rule window appears

Figure 61: Create A2N ACL Rule for Access Port Flow

13. Enter or select the following data to configure the ACL Rule:

Identification

a) Index - Edit the Index number. By default, it is automatically indexed.

b) Enter a desire Alias.
Rule Configuration

156 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Access Port Services

c) Select the desired Action type and COS override.

d) Enter the desired Rule Priority.
MAC Address

e) Select relevant check boxes for Src Addr and/or Dest Addr, and if
selected, enter the corresponding Address and Mask.

If Rule Action is set to Accept, the system will forbid the user to edit
the Destination Address.

EtherType

f) Select the check box for EtherType Control and if selected enter the
EtherType.
Outer VLAN Tag

g) Select the relevant check boxes for VLAN ID and/or PCP, and if selected,
enter the corresponding Low Limit and High Limit.
h) Select the check box for DEI and enter the DEI value.
Inner VLAN Tag

i) Select the relevant check boxes for VLAN ID and/or PCP, and if selected,
enter the corresponding Low Limit and High Limit.
IP

j) Select the Src Addr check box, and if selected, select the Dynamic check
box as desired or directly enter IP addresses for Low Limit and High Limit.
k) Similarly, select the relevant check boxes for Dest Addr and Priority, and
if selected, enter Low Limit and High Limit.
Protocol

l) Select the check box for Control and the Protocol Number will change to
align with the selected Protocol type. If CUSTOM is selected, enter a
custom number.

The selected Protocol cannot be enabled if EtherType Control check

box is not selected and EtherType value is not equal to 0x800.

m) Select the relevant check boxes for Src Port and/or Dst Port, and if
selected, enter Low Limit and High Limit.
n) Select the check box for TCP Flags Control, and if selected, enter TCP
Flags.
Click on OK.

14. Enter a right click on the EPL Flow EID and select Create N2A ACL Rule. The
provisioning options are same as “Create A2N ACL Rule”. Refer to 13.

15. Enter a right click on the EPL Flow EID and select View A2N ACL Rule or View N2A
ACL Rule.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 157

Provision Access Port Services

16. Enter a right click on the Access Port facility and select Edit CPD Filters.

An Edit CPD Filters window appears

Figure 62: Edit Access Port CPD Filters View

17. Enter the desired CPD settings:

a) Set the desired L2PT Tunnel MAC address as required.

b) Select Discard, Pass Thru, Pass Thru L2PT or Use MAC Setting for each
protocol or group as desired.

Only the ten L2PT function protocols ([Link], STP(BPDU), CDP, VTP,
UDLD, DTP, PVSTP+, LACP, LAMP and PAgP) support “Pass Thru L2PT”
disposition on Access Port CPD. Network Port, logical port and flows do not
support L2PT CPD.(See Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling in FSP 150-GE11xPro
System Description document.)

CPD settings can be done by individual protocol or by group. If the Group

setting is changed (Bridge Group, GARP Group, Cisco, LAN Bridges) all sub-
group protocols have a setting for “Use Group Setting” that forces the use of
the Group setting. Otherwise the CPD function is independent for each
protocol (see CPD Filters Options and Rules).

If LAG is used for the Network Ports, the Bridge Group LACP and LACP
Marker protocols for all Access Ports must be set to Discard. The default is
Pass Thru.

c) Click on OK.
18. Enter a right click on the Access Port facility and select Edit EFM-OAM.

An Edit EFM-OAM window appears

158 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Access Port Services

Figure 63: Edit Access Port EFM-OAM View

19. Enable or Disable EFM-OAM as required.

If Enabled, select the desired Local Configuration Mode.

Click on OK.

20. Enter a right click on the Access Port facility and select Edit N2A Shapers.

An Edit N2A Shapers window appears

Figure 64: Edit Access Port N2A Shapers View

21. Edit the N2A Shaper QID BS, SOAM-CIR, SOAM-EIR setting as desired.

When a flow is added or the CBS is increased, the system will ensure
that the N2A and A2N queue BS is at least as large as the sum of
CBSs for all flows’ policers towards that queue by automatically
adjusting the BS to the sum of CBS.
However, when a flow is deleted or the CBS is decreased, the system
will not decrease the BS value accordingly.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 159

Provision Access Port Services

Click on OK.

22. Enter a right click on the Access Port facility and select Edit E-LMI.

An Edit E-LMI Configuration window appears

Figure 65: Edit Access Port E-LMI

23. Edit the State and Configuration options as desired and select OK.

24. Select the E-LMI lab to view E-LMI configuration details and status.

If ELMI is enabled and working, the Messages and Statistics data should
indicate messages have been received and sent, and the EVC Status
should indicate that it is in the Active State

160 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Access Port Services

Figure 66: View E-LMI Status

25. Enter a right click on the Access Port facility and select Edit Configuration.

An Edit Configuration window appears

Figure 67: Edit Access Port EPL Configuration View

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 161

Provision Access Port Services

26. Select “IS” for the Administrative State.

Click on OK.

When setting the Service State to IS (In Service) and an error

message appears, the most likely problem is that the flow settings are
incompatible with each other, the port settings, or there is a conflict
with C-Tags or S-Tags assigned to other flows on other Access Ports.
Compare settings to the details and rules (see EPL Service
Provisioning Rules), resolve these issues, and repeat 26.

27. For PCP, PTP, Sync-E, LLDP, LAG and/or SHG provisioning, refer to the following
notes:

For configuration of PCP functionality, see Edit PCP Configuration.

For a description of PCP functionality, see the FSP 150-GE11xPro
System Description document.

For configuration of PTP functionality, see Provision Precision Time

Protocol (PTP) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH). For a description
of PTP functionality, see the FSP 150-GE11xPro System Description
document.
For configuration of Sync-E functionality, see Provision Synchronous
Ethernet (Sync-E) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH). For a
description of Synchronous Ethernet, see the FSP 150-GE11xPro
System Description document.
For configuration of LLDP functionality, see Provision Link Layer
Discovery Protocol (LLDP). For a description of LLDP functionality,
see the FSP 150-GE11xPro System Description document.

The GE11xPro supports LAG on Network Ports and Access Ports. Up

to 3 LAG Groups can be configured, including two Access Port LAG
Groups and one Network Port LAG Group. (The GE112 supports one
Access Port LAG Group.) For LAG Provisioning procedure on Access
Port, see Provision Ports in a LAG Group.

162 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Access Port Services

The GE11xPro supports SHG on Access Ports. SHG and LAG cannot
both be provisioned on the same Access Ports. Use the above steps
to provision the other Access Ports to be present on the SHG. For
SHG provisioning procedure, see Provision Ports in a Split Horizon
Group (SHG).

28. Repeat the above steps for EPL services on other Ethernet Ports on the system. Also
repeat these steps for creating the appropriate flow(s) supporting a Transparent Clock
or Telecom Slave, as required.

29. Configure all intermediate devices appropriately for carrying traffic from this GE11xPro
to the far end GE11xPro.

30. Repeat above steps for each EPL service to be created at the far end GE11xPro.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 163

Provision Access Port Services

Ethernet Virtual Private Line Service Provisioning

Refer to the following for provisioning an Ethernet Virtual Private Line (EVPL) service.

It is recommended that you pre-determine the provisioning details and ensure that they
meet the GE11xPro’s provisioning rules prior to making changes to an existing service or
placing an additional Access Port into service. Ensure that CIR, EIR and C-Tag/S-Tag
VLAN ID-Priority values will not conflict with another Access Port/Flow that is in the
Assigned state.

Refer to Access Port Configuration Options and Rules to determine the default values,
value ranges and rules for each option in the following procedure. For Control Data
Protocol provisioning, see CPD Filters Options and Rules.

1. Observe the current Service Type. The status will be used in the following steps.

a) Select Configuration view

b) Expand the System, NE-1, NTE and desired Access Port facility entities
in the Selection Tree.
The Access Port facility status window is displayed and the
Configuration Tab is selected
c) Observe the current Service Type.

Changing Service Type on a facility will drop all traffic

on the port, including Management Tunnel
connectivity and Maintenance End Points.

2. Enter a right click on the Access Port facility and select Edit Configuration.

An Edit Configuration window appears

164 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Access Port Services

Figure 68: Edit Access Port (EVPL) Configuration View

3. Determine the next step.

Current Status Then

Is the current Service Type set to EVPL? Go to 5.
Continue with the next
Is the Service Type set to EPL?
step.

4. If not already in the unassigned state, set the Administrative State to Unassigned and
click on Apply.

The screen will update

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 165

Provision Access Port Services

Set the Service Type to EVPL.

Changing Service Type on a facility will drop all traffic

on the port, including Management Tunnel
connectivity and Maintenance End Points.

Click on OK.

5. Enter a right click on the Access Port facility and select Edit Configuration.

An Edit Configuration window appears

Figure 69: Edit Access Port EVPL Configuration View

166 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Access Port Services

6. Enter the Access Port facility changes.

Identification

a) Enter an Alias, as required

State

b) Leave the Administrative State as “Unassigned” for now

Port

c) Select the desired Media Type. Port 2 is available if not used as a

Network Protection port.
d) Enter the desired MTU size
e) Select the Port Configured Speed option
f) Select the Port MDIX option (copper ports)
g) Enable/Disable OpenFlow option
h) Enable/Disable Auto Diagnostic
i) Select the desired settings for Rx DEI Action, Rx DEI Outer Tag, Tx DEI
Action and Tx DEI Outer Tag
Service

j) Select the desired AFP option

k) Edit the Q in Q Ethertype if desired (if Q in Q EtherType Override is
Enabled)
l) Enable/Disable Q in Q EtherType Override
m) Edit the Port VLAN ID if required
n) Select the desired Priority Mapping Profile
o) Enable/Disable A2N and N2A Swap Priority VID and enter the desired
Swap Priority VID
p) Enable/Disable Port Shaping
q) Enter the desired Port Shaped Speed (if Port Shaping is Enabled)
r) Enable/Disable N2A VLAN Trunking
s) Enable/Disable A2N Push Port VID
t) Enable/Disable N2A Pop Port VID
Link Loss Forwarding

u) Enable/Disable Port LLF Status

v) Enter the desired Delay value
w) Select the desired TX Action
x) Enter the desired Local Link ID
y) Select the desired Trigger Events
z) Select the desired Remote Link IDs
LLDP Destination MAC Address

aa) Select the desired destination MAC address types. By default, the
Nearest Bridge is selected. System will create a separate tab in the Edit
LLDP Details Pane for the port.
Click on OK.

7. Enter a right click on the Access Port facility and select Edit CPD Filters.

An Edit CPD Filters window appears

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 167

Provision Access Port Services

Figure 70: Edit Access Port CPD Filters View

8. Change the default Tunnel MAC as desired. Select Discard, Pass Thru, Pass Thru
L2PT or Use MAC Setting for each protocol or group as desired.

Only the ten L2PT function protocols (i.e. LLDP, STP(BPDU), CDP,
VTP, UDLD, DTP, PVSTP+, LACP, LAMP and PAgP) support “Pass
Thru L2PT” disposition on Access Port CPD. Network Port, logical
port and flows do not support L2PT CPD.(See Layer 2 Protocol
Tunneling in FSP 150-GE11xPro System Description document)

168 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Access Port Services

CPD settings can be done by individual protocol or by group. If the

Group setting is changed (Bridge Group, GARP Group, Cisco, LAN
Bridges) all sub-group protocols have a setting for “Use Group Setting”
that will force the use of the Group setting. Otherwise the CPD
function is independent for each protocol (see CPD options and rules
CPD Filters Options and Rules).

If LAG is used for the Network Ports, the Bridge Group LACP and
LACP Marker protocols must be set to Discard for all Access Ports.
The default is Pass Thru.

Click on OK.

9. Enter a right click on the Access Port facility and select Edit EFM-OAM.

An Edit EFM-OAM window appears

Figure 71: Edit Access Port EFM-OAM View

10. Enable or Disable EFM-OAM as required.

If Enabled, select the desired Local Configuration Mode.

Click on OK.

11. Select the Flow entity under the Access Port.

A Flow entity configuration list displays, showing a list of the existing flows

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 169

Provision Access Port Services

Figure 72: EVPL Flow Entity Configuration List

12. Right click on the Flow entity under the Access Port and select Create Flow.

A Create Flow window appears

Figure 73: Create Access Port EVPL Flow View

170 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Access Port Services

13. Enter the EVPL Flow attributes: (see EVPL Service Provisioning Rules for details and
rules)

Identification

a) Select the desired Flow ID from the drop-down list

Connection

b) Enter a Circuit Name

c) Select the EVC Type (Regular or Default)
d) Select desired Network Interface and Access Interface
e) Enable/Disable Policing and Set Policing Control if Policing is enabled
f) Select the desired COS (Class Of Service)
g) Enable/Disable Multi-COS (if Enabled is selected, the display changes -
see Figure 74 on p. 173
h) Select the N2A COS Priority (if Multi-COS is Enabled)
i) Enable/Disable Untagged Frames
j) Enable or diable Independent A2N Shaper BW.
k) Select a desired Priority Mapping Profile (if Multi-COS is Enabled)
l) Select the EoMPLS Encapsulation checkbox and select an EoMPLS PW
entity as desired from the dropdown list
m) Enable/Disable Inner Tag Priority Control
n) Enable/Disable Outer Tag Priority Control
o) Enable/Disable Independent N2A Rate Limiting (Default as Enabled if
Multi COS is Enabled. If Enabled is selected, N2A CIR/EIR appear below
the A2N Settings)
p) Set the desired Frame Loss Threshold Ratio
q) Select a desired A2N Shaping mode.
r) Enable/Disable N2N Forwarding.
s) Select/De-select the relevant check boxes for Broadcast Rate Limiting
and/or Multi-cast Rate Limiting, and if selected, enter the message rate in
bps.
t) Select/De-select the check box for Multicast & Broadcast Rate Limiting,
and if selected, enter the combined message rate in bps.

While Broadcast Rate Limiting or Multicast Rate Limiting is enabled,

Multicast & Broadcast Rate Limiting cannot be enabled at the same
time, and vice versa.

Secure Flow Attributes

u) Enable or disable Secure Block

Learning Attributes

v) Set the Interface Learning Control, Protected Learning Control and Max
Forwarding Table Entries for Network Port and Access Port respectively.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 171

Provision Access Port Services

If the Network Interface and Access Interface of a flow are both

common Ethernet ports rather than ERP or SHG, enabling MAC
Based Interface Learning may cause traffic congestion due to
insufficient buffer size for broadcasting frames.

w) Set the desired MAC Table Full Action.

x) Set the Aging Timer for the dynamic forwarding table entries.
Tag Management

y) Select the C-Tag Control

z) Enter the C-Tag (if C-Tag Control = Push, Pop, Push VID or Swap VID)
aa) Select the S-Tag Control
ab) Enter the S-Tag (if S-Tag Control = Push or Swap ID)
ac) Enable/Disable Preserve S-Tag Properties (if S-Tag Control = Swap VID)
ad) Enable/Disable N2A Outer Tag Priority (if C-Tag Control = Pop)
A2N Settings

ae) If Multi-COS is Disabled: The following A2N Policer Settings are editable:
CIR, EIR, CBS, EBS, AlGO,CM, CF, Envelope. Information regarding
each item (full name and entry type) is available by placing the cursor on
the item heading. Edit the desired items by clicking in the box under the
item name.
af) If Multi-COS is Enabled (see Figure 74): There are Policer and Shaper
entries for each COS. Select the COS values desired by clicking in the
“Active” box. For each box selected, the following A2N Policer Settings
are editable: CIR, EIR, CBS, EBS, CM, CF, Envelope, and QID.
Information regarding each item (full name and entry type) is available by
placing the cursor on the item heading. Edit the desired items by clicking
in the box under the item name.
ag) If Flow-based A2N Shaping, enter A2N Shaper settings: BS, SOAM-CIR,
SOAM-EIR. If A2N Shaping is set to Port-Based, these entires are
entered in the A2N Shaper page of the selected Network Port. If A2N
Shaping is set to Flow-Based, these entires are entered in the A2N
Setting box of the EVC. If Multi-COS is Enabled, the Shapers whose
QIDs match to the Active Policers are editable. Enter A2N Shaper SOAM-
CIR and SOAM-EIR to allocate bandwidth resource to the SOAM service
on this flow. Enter the MIN Threshold%, MAX Threshold%, Maximum
Drop Probability% for WRED In-Profile and WRED Out of Profile traffic
for Shaper. If Multi COS is Enabled, edit the above entries for each
desired COS and select/deselect the check box for Hierarchical COS
Settings. If Hierarchical COS Settings are selected, enter the Guaranteed
Bandwidth and Maximum Bandwidth.

A2N Shaper QID BS settings are editable if the QID of the associated
Policer ID is changed.

N2A Settings

ah) Enter N2A Policer settings (CIR, EIR, CBS, EBS, CM, CF) if N2A Rate
Limiting is Enabled. If Multi-COS is Enabled, select the desired Policers

172 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Access Port Services

by clicking the appropriate “active” boxes. Only “active” Policers are

editable. (N2A Shaper(s) are edited elsewhere and are covered later in this
procedure)
VLAN Members

ai) Enter a desired VLAN ID (or range) and Priority, then click on “Add”.
Repeat for each additional VLAN entry.
Click on OK.

Figure 74: EVPL Multi-COS Flow Options in Creating Mode

The Administrative State of a flow can only be changed when the port
is not in the Unassigned state.

14. Expand the Access Port facility entity and select the newly created flow to verify the
entry.

15. To enter additional Flows, repeat 11 to 14.

16. Enter a right click on an EVPL flow facility and select Add Forwarding Table Entry.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 173

Provision Access Port Services

An Add Forwarding Table Entry window appears

Figure 75: Add Forwarding Table Entry (EVPL Flow)

a) Specify the Destination Address and select a Destination Port from the
drop-down list.
b) Select the desired Learning Action.
Click on OK.

c) Select the FDB tab to view the existing Forwarding Table Entries.

Figure 76: View FDB

d) Enter a right click on one FDB entry and select the desired operations
from the menu: View Configuration, Edit Configuration or Delete FDB
Entry.

Figure 77: FDB Selection Menu

174 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Access Port Services

17. Enter a right click on the EVPL flow facility and select the desired operations from the
menu: Flush FDB, or Clear Blocked State.

18. Enter a right click on the EVPL Flow EID and select Create A2N ACL Rule.

A Create ACL Rule window appears

Figure 78: Create A2N ACL Rule for Access Port Flow

19. Enter or select the following data to configure the ACL Rule:

Identification

a) Index - Edit the Index number. By default, it is automatically indexed.

b) Enter a desire Alias.
Rule Configuration

c) Select the desired Action type and COS override.

d) Enter the desired Rule Priority.
MAC Address

e) Select relevant check boxes for Src Addr and/or Dest Addr, and if
selected, enter the corresponding Address and Mask.

If Rule Action is set to Accept, the system will forbid the user to edit
the Destination Address.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 175

Provision Access Port Services

EtherType

f)Select the check box for EtherType Control and if selected enter the
EtherType.
Outer VLAN Tag

g) Select the relevant check boxes for VLAN ID and/or PCP, and if selected,
enter the corresponding Low Limit and High Limit.
h) Select the check box for DEI and enter the DEI value.
Inner VLAN Tag

i) Select the relevant check boxes for VLAN ID and/or PCP, and if selected,
enter the corresponding Low Limit and High Limit.
IP

j)Select the Src Addr check box, and if selected, select the Dynamic check
box as desired or directly enter IP addresses for Low Limit and High Limit.
k) Similarly, select the relevant check boxes for Dest Addr and Priority, and
if selected, enter Low Limit and High Limit.
Protocol

l) Select the check box for Control and the Protocol Number will change to
align with the selected Protocol type. If CUSTOM is selected, enter a
custom number.

The selected Protocol cannot be enabled if EtherType Control check

box is not selected and EtherType value is not equal to 0x800.

m) Select the relevant check boxes for Src Port and/or Dst Port, and if
selected, enter Low Limit and High Limit.
n) Select the check box for TCP Flags Control, and if selected, enter TCP
Flags.
Click on OK.

20. Enter a right click on the EPL Flow EID and select Create N2A ACL Rule. The
provisioning options are same as “Create A2N ACL Rule”. Refer to 13.

21. Enter a right click on the EPL Flow EID and select View A2N ACL Rule or View N2A
ACL Rule.

22. Enter a right click on the Access Port facility and select Edit N2A Shapers.

An Edit N2A Shapers window appears

176 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Access Port Services

Figure 79: Edit EVPL Access Port N2A Shapers View

23. Edit each N2A Shaper QID BS, SOAM-CIR, SOAM-EIR setting as desired.

When a flow is added or the CBS is increased, the system will ensure
that the N2A and A2N queue BS is at least as large as the sum of
CBSs for all flows’ policers towards that queue by automatically
adjusting the BS to the sum of CBS.
However, when a flow is deleted or the CBS is decreased, the system
will not decrease the BS value accordingly.

Click on OK.

24. Enter a right click on the Access Port facility and select Edit E-LMI.

An Edit E-LMI Configuration window appears

Figure 80: Edit Access Port E-LMI

25. Edit the State and Configuration options as desired and select OK.

26. Select the E-LMI lab to view E-LMI configuration details and status.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 177

Provision Access Port Services

If ELMI is enabled and working, the Messages and Statistics data should
indicate messages have been received and sent, and the EVC Status
should indicate that it is in the Active State

Figure 81: View E-LMI Status

27. Enter a right click on the Access Port facility and select Edit Configuration.

An Edit Configuration window appears

178 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Access Port Services

Figure 82: Edit Access Port EVPL Configuration View

28. Select “IS” for the Administrative State.

Click on OK.

When setting the Service State to IS (In Service) and an error

message appears, the most likely problem is that the flow settings are
incompatible with each other, the port settings, or there is a conflict
with C-Tags or S-Tags assigned to other flows on other Access Ports.
Compare settings to the details and rules (see EVPL Service
Provisioning Rules), resolve these issues, and repeat 26

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 179

Provision Access Port Services

29. For PCP, PTP, Sync-E, LLDP, LAG and/or SHG provisioning, refer to the following
notes:

For configuration of PCP functionality, see Edit PCP Configuration.

For a description of PCP functionality, See the FSP 150-GE11xPro
System Description.

For configuration of PTP functionality, see Provision Precision Time

Protocol (PTP) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)
For configuration of Sync-E functionality, see Provision Synchronous
Ethernet (Sync-E) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)
For configuration of LLDP functionality, see Provision Link Layer
Discovery Protocol (LLDP)

The GE11xPro supports LAG on Network Ports and Access Ports. Up

to 3 LAG Groups can be configured, including two Access Port LAG
Groups and one Network Port LAG Group. (The GE112 supports one
Access Port LAG Group.) For LAG Provisioning procedure on Access
Port, see Provision Ports in a LAG Group.

The GE11xPro supports SHG on Access Ports. SHG and LAG cannot
both be provisioned on the same Access Ports. Use the above steps
to provision the other Access Ports to be present on the SHG. For
SHG provisioning procedure, see Provision Ports in a Split Horizon
Group (SHG).

30. Repeat the above steps for EVPL services on other Ethernet Ports on the system.
Also repeat these steps for creating the appropriate flow(s) supporting a Transparent
Clock or Telecom Slave, as required.

31. Configure all intermediate devices appropriately for carrying traffic from this GE11xPro
to the far end GE11xPro.

32. Repeat above steps for each EVPL service to be created at the far end GE11xPro.

180 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Network Ports

Provision Network Ports

The following procedures assume that the user has completed the physical installation
procedures in “Physical Installation” in FSP 150-GE11xPro Installation and
Commissioning Manual document, including installation of SFPs and connecting fiber
cables to the Network Ports. It is also assumed that the user has configured the NID with
an IP address and connected the NID to a DCN or LAN (see Set Up the GE11xPro DCN
(eth0) Port Using the Serial Port ) and has provisioned the Flexible Port for the desired
operation (see Configure Flexible Port (Ethernet Port II)).

It is also assumed that the user is logged on to the web-based GUI with the proper
privilege level for provisioning (see User Authorization Privilege Levels) and is in the
configuration view.

Use one of the following procedures for configuring the Network Port(s). A port cannot be
configured for both LAG and Protection Group.

Provision Network Ports without LAG or Protection Group

Provision Network Ports in a Protection Group

Provision Ports in a LAG Group

Provision Ports in a Split Horizon Group (SHG)

Provision Network Ports in an Ethernet Ring Protection Group

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 181

Provision Network Ports

Provision Network Ports without LAG or Protection

Group

1. Expand the System Name entity in the Selection Tree.

2. If a “+” sign appears next to NE-1 in the selection tree pane under “System”, click on it
to expand the NE view, then click on the “+” sign next to NTE11x to expand it.

3. Right click on E1000-N-1 interface in the selection tree pane and select Edit
Configuration and the following screen displays:

Figure 1:  Edit Network Interface 1

4. An alias can be entered to permit easy identification of this particular interface.

The Administrative State can be changed between IS (default value)

Maintenance, Management and Unassigned. See Entity State Descriptions for
details.

182 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Network Ports

Various Port, Service and LLF data can be edited. For details on each editable
item see Network Port Configuration Options and Rules.

The Priority Control option “Swap” in Priority Mapping Profile

configuration does not work on Network Port.

After editing the interface information, click on OK. The display will update to
show the edited information.

5. Right click on the E1000-N-1 interface and select “Edit EFM OAM” and the details
pane displays:

Figure 2:  Edit OAM-EFM Network Interface 1

6. The OAM State and Local Configuration Mode can be edited. After selecting the
desired settings, click on OK.

7. Right click on E1000-N-1 interface in the selection tree pane and select Edit CPD
Filters and the following screen displays:

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 183

Provision Network Ports

Figure 3:  Edit Network Port CPD Filters

8. If LAG is (or will be) also configured on Access Ports, then Bridge Group Protocols
“LACP” and “LACP Marker” must be set to “Discard” on the Network Port.

All other CPD Filter setting should be set as desired.

Click on OK.

9. Enter a right click on the Network Port facility and select Edit E-LMI.

An Edit E-LMI Configuration window appears

Figure 83: Edit Network Port E-LMI

10. Edit the State and Configuration options as desired and select OK.

11. Select the E-LMI lab to view E-LMI configuration details and status.

If ELMI is enabled and working, the Messages and Statistics data should
indicate messages have been received and sent, and the EVC Status
should indicate that it is in the Active State

184 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Network Ports

Figure 84: View E-LMI Status

12. For PCP, PTP, Sync-E, LLDP, LAG and/or SHG provisioning, refer to the following
notes:

For configuration of PCP functionality, see Edit PCP Configuration.

For a description of PCP functionality, see the FSP 150-GE11xPro
System Description document.

For configuration of PTP functionality, see Provision Precision Time

Protocol (PTP) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH). For a description
of PTP functionality, see the FSP 150-GE11xPro System Description
document.
For configuration of Sync-E functionality, see Provision Synchronous
Ethernet (Sync-E) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH). For a
description of Synchronous Ethernet, see the FSP 150-GE11xPro
System Description document.
For configuration of LLDP functionality, see Provision Link Layer
Discovery Protocol (LLDP). For a description of LLDP functionality,
see the FSP 150-GE11xPro System Description document.

The GE11xPro supports LAG on Network Ports and Access Ports. Up

to 3 LAG Groups can be configured, including two Access Port LAG
Groups and one Network Port LAG Group. (The GE112 supports one
Access Port LAG Group.) For LAG Provisioning procedure on Network
Port, see Provision Ports in a LAG Group.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 185

Provision Network Ports

The GE11xPro supports SHG on Network Ports. SHG and LAG

cannot both be provisioned on the same Network Ports. Use the
above steps to provision the Network Ports which are not in a LAG to
be present on the SHG. For SHG provisioning procedure, see
Provision Ports in a Split Horizon Group (SHG).

186 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Network Ports

Provision Network Ports in a Protection Group

1. Expand the System Name entity in the Selection Tree.

2. Scroll down the selection tree to “Protection Groups” and click on the “+” sign next to it
to expand it.

3. Select NE-1 and click on the “+” sign to expand it.

4. Right click on NTE11x and select “Add Protection Group” and the following screen
displays:

Figure 1:  Create Protection Group

5. Enter a User Label if desired or required.

Select the desired Protection Mode: 1+1 or Dual Active Receive.

Dual Active Receive is a special setting that requires an external

device that provides discrimination to present well behaved traffic
to the network ports. It does not permit doubling the Network
Port’s maximum bandwidth.

Click on OK.

The NE display will update.

The E1000-N-2 interface is placed in service (IS) - the LK and RT LEDs indicate
activity if the fiber is connected. (See Entity State Descriptions).l

6. If a “+” sign appears next to NE-1 in the selection tree pane under “System”, click on it
to expand the NE view, then click on the “+” sign next to NTE11x to expand it.

7. Right click on E1000-N-1 interface in the selection tree pane and select Edit
Configuration and the following screen displays:

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 187

Provision Network Ports

Figure 2:  Edit Network Interface 1

8. An alias can be entered to permit easy identification of this particular interface.

The Administrative State can be changed between IS (default value)

Maintenance, Management and Unassigned. See Entity State Descriptions for
details.

Various Port, Service and LLF data can be edited. For details on each editable
item, see Network Port Configuration Options and Rules.

It is recommended that Link Loss Forwarding Delay be provisioned

with a non-zero value on the protection group member ports, in case of
LLF vibration during the protection switching process.

After editing the interface information, click on OK. The display will update to
show the edited information.

188 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Network Ports

9. Right click on the E1000-N-1 interface and select “Edit EFM OAM” and the details
pane displays:

Figure 3:  Edit OAM-EFM Network Interface 1

10. The OAM State and Local Configuration Mode can be edited. After selecting the
desired settings, click on OK.

11. If 1+1 or Dual Active Receive protection has been configured, repeat 7 through 10 for
E1000-N-2.

12. Right click on E1000-N-1 interface in the selection tree pane and select Edit CPD
Filters and the following screen displays:

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 189

Provision Network Ports

Figure 4:  Edit CPD Filters

13. Set the desired CPD filter options.

If LAG is (or will be) configured on Access Ports, then Bridge Group Protocols
“LACP” and “LACP Marker” must be set to “Discard” on the Network Port. All
other CPD Filter setting should be set as desired.

Click on OK.

For configuration of PCP functionality, see Edit PCP Configuration.

For a description of PCP functionality, see the FSP 150-GE11xPro
System Description document.

190 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Network Ports

Provision Ports in a LAG Group

Use the following procedure for configuring Network or Access Ports in a LAG Group.
Refer to LAG Configuration Rules to determine the default values, value ranges and rules
for each option in the following procedure.

The GE11xPro supports LAG on Network Ports and Access Ports. Up

to 3 LAG Groups can be configured using any 2 Access Ports in each
group, with each Access Port being used only once. (The GE112
supports one Access Port LAG Group.)

1. Expand the System Name entity in the Selection Tree.

2. Select NE-1 and click on the “+” sign to expand it.

3. Select NTE11x and click on the “+” sign to expand it.

4. Right click on E1000-N-1 (or first Access Port) interface in the selection tree pane and
select Edit Configuration and the following screen displays:

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 191

Provision Network Ports

Figure 1:  Edit Network Interface 1

5. For successful LAG configuration:

Administrative State must be IS, Management or Maintenance

Configured Speed can not be “Auto” (any other option is acceptable)

Auto Diagnostic must be “Disabled”

All other options should be set as desired.

Click on OK.

6. Right click on the E1000-N-1 (or first Access Port) interface and select “Edit EFM
OAM” and the details pane displays:

192 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Network Ports

Figure 2:  Edit OAM-EFM Network Interface 1

7. The OAM State and Local Configuration Mode can be edited. After selecting the
desired settings, click on OK.

LAG traffic will be impacted on warm restart if EFM

OAM is enabled, therefore it is recommended to
disable EFM OAM on LAG ports.

8. Right click on E1000-N-1 (or an Access Port) interface in the selection tree pane and
select Edit CPD Filters and the following screen displays:

Figure 3:  Edit Network Port CPD Filters

9. Set the desired CPD filter options.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 193

Provision Network Ports

For Access Ports: If LAG is (or will be) also configured on Access Ports, then
Bridge Group Protocols “LACP” and “LACP Marker” must be set to “Discard” on
the Network Port. All other CPD Filter setting should be set as desired.

Click on OK.

10. Select LAG and click on the “+” sign to expand it.

11. Right click on NE-1 and select “Create LAG” and the following screen is displayed.

Figure 4:  Create LAG

12. Enter an Alias if desired

Select the desired Administrative State (should be “IS”)

Enable/Disable LAG Protocols (see note and warning)

Enable/Disable LACP Control (see note and warning)

For Load-Sharing LAG, select Frame Dist Algorithm

If the Frame Dist Algorithm is Field Hash, Select Fields to be used in Hash
calculation.

Enable/Disable CCM Defect Detection (Enable is denied if a properly configured

MEP does not exist on the port)

Edit System Priority if desired

Edit Collector Max Delay if desired

194 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Network Ports

Select “NETWORK PORT-1-1-1-1” (or first Access Port) for Members Entry and
click on “Add” (the first entry in the Network Port Members list must be Network
Port 1)

Select “NETWORK PORT-1-1-1-2” (or second Access Port) for Members Entry
and click on “Add”

Click on “OK”

LAG includes support for Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) that
is a control protocol that automatically detects links between two LACP-
enabled devices and configures the links into a LAG.

Enabled – systems determine Master and Slave assignment between

two LAG partners. Active link selection is controlled by LAG Master
based on provisionable priorities of LAG Member ports and status of
Signal Fail on a link.

Disabled – both LAG devices determine an active link independently

based on the highest priority port that does not detect a Signal Fail. LAG
partner systems must have port priorities provisioned identically

The LACP-Control parameter allows the selection process to

be independent of the LACP protocol for applications that
require a conversion from unprotected port to an active-
standby LAG. For configurations where LACP-Control is
disabled, the LACP protocol information may not align with the
actual selection state of the active-standby LAG. Collecting &
distributing information is derived from the LACP protocol.
Active/Standby status is derived from the port selection
process.
Active-standby LAG is expected to be a bidirectional protection
mechanism and relies on the LACP protocol for coordinating
the active link determination between 2 partner systems. For
configurations where LACP-Control is disabled, the 2 partner
systems could experience a mismatch of active and standby
ports causing traffic outage.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 195

Provision Network Ports

Provision Ports in a Split Horizon Group (SHG)

Use the following procedure for configuring Network or Access Ports in a SHG

Group. Refer to the table content SHG to determine the default values, value ranges and
rules for each option in the following procedure.

1. Expand the System and SHG entities in the Selection Tree.

2. Enter a right click on NE-1 and select Create SHG and the following screen displays:

Figure 85: Create SHG

3. Select the desired SHG index and enter the desired Alias.

4. Select the first Port Member entry and select Add. Repeat for other ports on the SHG.
(To delete a member from the list, select the entity in the Members list and select
Delete.)

Click on OK.

5. The new SHG appears in the SHG Configuration entity list of the Details Pane.

6. Enter a right click on the new SHG entity in the details pane and select View
Configuration to verify provisioning entry.

196 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Network Ports

Figure 86: SHG Entity Menu Options

7. To edit an SHG, enter a right click on a desired SHG entity in the Details Pane and
select Edit Configuration. To delete an existing SHG, enter a right click on the desired
SHG entity in the Details Pane and select Delete.

8. Repeat above steps at the far end node.

9. Verify end-to-end connectivity for the SHG services. To view Forwarding Database
entries, enter a right click on the desired SHG entity in the Details Pane and select
View FDB Entries. To flush all the FDB entries, enter a right click on the desired SHG
entity in the Details Pane and select Flush FDB.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 197

Provision Network Ports

Provision Network Ports in an Ethernet Ring Protection

Group
Refer to the table ERP-1--n (Create/Edit) to determine the default values, value ranges
and rules for each option in the following procedure.

Perform the following at Site A:

1. Expand System in the Selection Tree, scroll down the selection tree to “Protection
Grps” and click on the “+” sign next to it to expand it.

2. Select NE-1 and click on the “+” sign to expand it.

3. Right click on NE-1 and select “Create ERP” and the following screen displays:

Figure 87: Create Ethernet Ring Protection Group

4. Enter the ERP configuration details:

a) Enter the ERP Index and ERP Label.

b) Select the desired Administrative State.
c) Enter the ERP Group RAPS Node ID, RAPS Ring Id, RAPS VLAN Tag,
RAPS Tag Ethertype, RAPS MD Level, Guard Time, Wait-to-Restore
Time and Hold-off Time.
d) Enable/Disable Revertive option.
e) Enable/Disable Management Tunnel Protection.
f) Enable/Disable Sub-Ring without Virtual Channel.
g) Select Network Port for Ring Port 0 and Ring Port 1.
h) Select the Ring Port 0/1 RPL Role and MEP options, if MEPs have
already been created (they will be created later in this procedure). If no
MEPs have been created, then leave the option set to None.

198 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Network Ports

There can be only one RPL owner in a ring. A ring node configured
as the RPL-Owner link in a G.8032 Ring should be configured with
the largest Node ID of all the nodes in the ring. A non-owner node
configured as the highest priority ring node may result in
temporary ring segmentation for cases of simultaneous reboots of
multiple ring nodes. In this case, temporary ring segmentation
time is limited to the configured value of the RPL Owner Wait-to-
Restore.

Configuring CFM MEPs is optional, although recommended, for

fast failure detection and CFM monitoring in a ring environment.

i) Click on OK.
The ERP configuration displays

Figure 88: View ERP Configuration Details

5. Select the Configuration tab to verify ERP configuration details. If changes are
required, enter a right click on the ERP entity in the Selection Tree Pane and select
Edit.

6. Repeat the above steps for a second ERP instance, if required.

Configure Pass-Through flow(s) to allow ring management VLAN traffic:

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 199

Provision Network Ports

7. Expand the PT Flows entity in the Selection Tree Pane, enter a right click on Flow and
select Create Flow.

A Pass-through Flow Configuration screen appears

Figure 89: Pass-through Flow Configuration

8. Enter the Pass-through Flow details: (see Pass-Through Flow Configuration Options
and Rules for details and rules)

Identification

a) Select a desired Passthrough Flow EID from the drop-down list

b) Enter a Circuit Name
AdminState

c) Select the desired Administrative State

Connection

d) Select the desired EVC Type

e) Enable/disable Policing
f) Enable/disable Multi COS. (If enabled is selected, the display changes,
see Figure 90 on p. 201)
g) Select the COS (if Multi COS is disabled)
h) Enable/disable Untagged Frames
i) Select the desired Loop Avoidance (ERP instance for this pass-through
flow)
j) Select the desired Shaping Type
N2N Settings

k) Enable/disable Auto Bandwidth (if Multi COS is disabled)

200 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Network Ports

l) Enter the desired Auto CIR Bandwidth Percentage (if Auto Bandwidth is
enabled)
m) If Multi COS is Disabled: the following N2N Policer Settings are editable:
CIR, EIR, CBS, EBS, CM and CF; BS is editable for N2N Shaper
Settings (if Shaping Type is Flow Based). Information regarding each item
(full name and entry type) is available by placing the cursor on the item
heading. Edit the desired item by clicking in the box under the item name.

Figure 90: Create Pass-through Flow (Multi COS Enabled)

n) If Multi COS is Enabled: There are Policer and Shaper entries for each
COS. Select the desired COS by clicking in the Active box. For each box
selected, the following N2N Policer Settings are editable: CIR, EIR, CBS,
EBS, CM, TF and QID. Information regarding each item (full name and
entry type) is available by placing the cursor on the item heading. Edit the
desired items by clicking in the box under the item name.

In Multi-COS enabled RAPS PT flow, a shaper with the QID same as

the RAPS Tag Priority should be provisioned, so that the RAPS frame
can be injected; otherwise, the RAPS frame injection will fail.

o) Enter N2N Shaper settings (BS). If Multi-COS is Enabled, the Shapers

whose QIDs match to the Active Policers are editable.
VLAN Members

p) Enter a desired VLAN ID (or range) and Priority; then click on Add. Repeat
for each additional VLAN entry.
Click on OK.

9. Select the Flows entity (under PT Flow) in the Selection Tree.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 201

Provision Network Ports

The newly created Pass-through flow Entity ID appears in the Details

Pane.

10. Right click on the pass-through flow entity ID and select View Configuration.

Figure 91: Menu Selection to View Pass-through Flow

11. Verify the Pass-through flow entry. If changes are required, select the configuration
tab, enter a right click on the Pass-through Flow Entity ID and click Edit Configuration.

Figure 92: View Pass-through Flow Configuration Details

12. Repeat 7 through 11 for each additional Pass-through Flow for this node.

13. Configure Ethernet Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) maintenance endpoints

(MEPs). Perform the procedure CFM Provisioning and Operation.

202 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Network Ports

Configuring CFM MEPs for is optional, though recommended, for fast

failure detection and CFM monitoring in a ring environment. Set a ring
port to be Down MEP facing the neighbor unit. This way the CFM
connectivity is established by pairs of MEPs facing each other.

Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) and line status messages are

used to detect ring link and node failure. During the recovery phase,
when the failed link is restored, the nodes adjacent to the restored link
send Ring Automatic Protection Switching (R-APS) No Request
(RAPS NR) messages. On obtaining this message, the ring protection
link (RPL) owner blocks the RPL port and sends R-APS NR and R-
APS RPL (R-APS NR, RB) messages. These messages cause all
other nodes, other than the RPL owner in the ring, to unblock all
blocked ports. The Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) protocol works for
both unidirectional failure and multiple link failure scenarios in a ring
topology.

14. Enter a right click on the ERP entity in the Selection Tree Pane and select Edit. The
following screen displays.

Figure 93: Edit ERP Configuration

15. Select the desired MEP for Ring Port 0 and Ring Port1. Then click on OK.

The ERP configuration changes are displayed in the Details Pane.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 203

Provision Network Ports

Figure 94: View ERP Configuration Details

Perform the following at Sites B, C, etc.

16. Repeat the above steps at Sites B, C, etc.

Perform the following at Sites A, B, C, etc.

17. Expand the System, Protection Groups, NE-1 entities in the Selection Tree.

18. Select the ERP entity and the RAPS Status tab to view the RAPS status:

204 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Network Ports

Figure 95: ERP RAPS Status View

19. Observe the Node State. Refer to the following table describing the three Node
States.

The Node State should indicate Idle

Table 7: RAPS Status (Node State) Descriptions

Node State Definition
A failure occurred on the ring. For normal node, traffic is blocked on the ring port that
connects to the failing link and unblocked on working ring ports. For the RPL owner,
Protection
traffic is unblocked on both ring ports if they connect to non-failure links. Node with link
failure should show Rx/Tx stats.
No failure on the ring, the node is performing normally. For normal node, traffic is
Idle unblocked on both ring ports. For the RPL owner or neighbor, traffic is blocked on the ring
port that connects to the RPL and unblocked on the other ring port.
Pending Not a participant of a specific ring. Nodes with link recovery should show Rx/Tx stats.

20. If the Node State is not the expected result, troubleshoot and rectify the trouble
accordingly. Select the Statistics Tab to view ERP Statistics to observe transmission
and receive statistics. See the following figure and table:

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 205

Provision Network Ports

Figure 96: ERP Statistics View

Table 8: ERP Statistics

Node Role RAPS PDUs Comment
Always Transmitting, should not receive any
PDUs (When neighbor is configured). If RPL
Only One Owner is allowed in a
RPL Owner Neighbor does not exist then RAPS PDUs will be
Ring
received back and both Rx/Tx statistics will
indicate the number of PDUs.
RPL Neighbor Receives RAPS PDUs but does not forward to Adjacent link port of RPL
(Optional) Owner. Owner port.
Stats will only show received
Other Ring Nodes Always Receiving and a copy will be forwarded.
PDUs.

Perform the following at each node location:

21. Verify traffic connectivity between node sites.

22. Select the Maintenance application. Expand the Protection Groups and NE-1 entities
in the Selection Tree Pane. Enter a right click on the ERP entity and select Operate
Protection Switch.

An Operate Protection Switch window is displayed

206 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Network Ports

Figure 97: Operate ERP Protection Switch

23. Select Protection Switch Action of Manual and select the desired Blocking Ring Port.
Then select OK.

24. Verify that the protection switch action did not introduce any unwanted results.

25. Enter a right click on the ERP entity and select Release Protection Switch.

A Release Protection Switch window is displayed

Figure 1:  Release ERP Protection Switch

26. Select OK.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 207

Provision Ethernet over Multiprotocol Label Switching (EoMPLS)

Provision Ethernet over Multiprotocol Label

Switching (EoMPLS)
The Ethernet over Multiprotocol Label Switching (EoMPLS) encapsulation defined in
RFC 4448 is supported in A2N direction on Network port (physical and logical) in all
GE11xPro products. By prefixing the Ethernet frames with an MPLS header (containing
one or more labels), packet forwarding decisions are made solely on the contents of the
label, the Ethernet frames are able to transport across a third party network unaltered,
regardless of transport media and protocols, and L2CP frames are treated agnostically.
The use of EoMPLS eliminates the need for multiple layer-2 networks and reduces the
number of MAC addresses seen by the intervening network to effective one for each
FSP150 GE11xPro.

Prior to provisioning EoMPLS, the software license for EoMPLS must be enabled so the
GE11xPro system may support the following number of EoMPLS PWs:

l 32 EoMPLS PWs for GE112Pro/GE112Pro (m)/GE112Pro (H)

l 64 EoMPLS PWs for GE114Pro/GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro
(CSH)/GE114Pro (HE)

EoMPLS may be provisioned in the following order:

l Enable Software Licensing for EoMPLS

l Create/Edit an EoMPLS PW
l Specify an IPv4 address for the Network Port/LAG Port/Protection Group (Network
Port 1) as Source IP Address (Dynamic Discovery Type only)
l Associate a flow (associated with the Network Port/LAG/Protection Group mentioned
above) with an EoMPLS PW

More information and specifications on EoMPLS and the current implementation can be
found in FSP 150-GE11xPro System Description.

More information on EoMPLS use case details can be found in FSP 150-GE11xPro Quick
Start Guide.

The following procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address
and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN (see Set Up the GE11xPro DCN (eth0) Port
Using the Serial Port ) and is logged on with at least a Provisioning level user permission
using the web-based GUI.

The following procedure also assumes that services have been configured at
local end with flows to support MPLS encapsulated traffic and a connection exists
between the local end and the remote end. See Provision Access Port Services on p.
149.

Refer to EoMPLS Configuration Options and Rules to determine the default values, value
ranges and rules for each option in the following procedure.

208 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Ethernet over Multiprotocol Label Switching (EoMPLS)

Enable Software License for EoMPLS

1. Select the Maintenance Application on the tool bar or select Maintenance from the
Application menu. Expand the System, Administration and Software Licensing
entities in the selection tree pane, by clicking the “+” sign next to each entity.

2. Enter a right click on Feature Management and select Edit Feature.

An Edit Feature Management screen displays

Figure 98: Edit Feature Management

3. Select Enabled state for EoMPLS and select OK.

The Feature Management Status is displayed and indicates it is in

Enabled state

Create EoMPLS Pseudo Wire

4. Select the Configuration Application on the tool bar or select Configuration from the
Application menu. Expand System and NE-1 entities in the selection tree pane by
clicking the “+” sign next to each entity.

5. Enter a right click on EoMPLS PW and select Create EoMPLS PW.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 209

Provision Ethernet over Multiprotocol Label Switching (EoMPLS)

A Create EoMPLS PW window appears

Figure 99: Create EoMPLS PW

6. Enter or select the following data to configure the EoMPLS PW (see Create/Edit
EoMPLS PW for options and rules):

Identification

a) PW ID - automatically indexed

AdminState

b) Administrative - Select the desired administrative state

Configuration

c) Mode - select a desired mode for incoming traffic

d) Discovery Type - select a desired Discovery Type
e) Remote IP Address - enter a desired remote IP address if Discovery Type
is Dynamic
f) Remote MAC Address - enter a desired remote MAC address if Discovery
Type is Static
g) Outer Tag Priority Control - enable/disable Outer S-Tag priority mapping
for A2N traffic
h) Outer Label EXP Control - enable/disable Outer Label (MPLS label) EXP
mapping for A2N traffic
i) Inner Label EXP Control - enable/disable Inner Label (VC label) EXP
mapping for A2N traffic

If an EoMPLS PW is associated with a multi-cos flow, the EoMPLS priority

mapping can be configured in the Priority Mapping Profile specified in the
multi-cos EVPL flow associated with the EoMPLS PW. See Associate a
Flow with an EoMPLS PW for how to associate a flow with an EoMPLS PW.
See Default Priority Mapping Profile Tables and Priority Mapping Profile
(Create/Edit Priority Mapping Profile) for more information on EoMPLS
priority mapping.

j) Egress Interface - select a desired Network interface as egress interface

from the dropdown list

210 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Ethernet over Multiprotocol Label Switching (EoMPLS)

k) Control Word RX - selec to enable or disable RX Control Word

l) Control Word TX - selec to enable or disable TX Control Word

The Egress Interface can be the physical port, LAG or Protection

Group of Network Ports.

m) Outer VLAN- select the checkbox to enable or disable Outer VLAN.

n) If the Outer VLAN is enabled, enter the EthernetType and VLAN ID.
o) Rx MPLS - (checkbox cannot be deselected) specify a desired MPLS
Label for incoming packets
p) Tx MPLS - (checkbox cannot be deselected) specify a desired MPLS
Label for outgoing packets
q) Rx VC - select the checkbox to enable VC label in receiving direction and
specify a desired VC Label
r) Tx VC - select the checkbox to enable VC label in transmitting direction
and enter a desired VC Label
Click on OK.

7. To view an EoMPLS PW, select EoMPLS PW entity in the selection tree under
Configuration View to display the list of configured EoMPLS PW entities in the details
pane.

Figure 100: EoMPLS List and Operation Menu

8. Double click on the desired EoMPLS PW entity.

An EoMPLS PW view configuration window appears

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 211

Provision Ethernet over Multiprotocol Label Switching (EoMPLS)

Figure 101: EoMPLS PW - View Configuration

9. To close the EoMPLS PW view, click the “x” on the facility tab.

10. To edit an EoMPLS PW, select EoMPLS PW entity in the selection tree under
Configuration View to display the list of configured EoMPLS PW entities in the details
pane.

11. Enter a right click on the desired EoMPLS PW entity and select Edit EoMPLS PW.

An Edit EoMPLS PW window appears

Figure 102: EoMPLS PW - Edit Configuration

12. Edit the following data to configure the EoMPLS PW:

a) Select the desired Administrative State, Mode and Discovery Type

b) Enter Remote IP Address (Dynamic Mode) or Enter the Remote MAC
Address (Static Mode)

212 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Ethernet over Multiprotocol Label Switching (EoMPLS)

c) Change the settings of Outer S-Tag Priority Control, Outer Label EXP
Control, Inner Label EXP Control, Egress Interface, Outer Stag Vlan, Rx
VC Label, Tx VC Label, Rx MPLS Label and Tx MPLS Label as desired.
Click on OK.

13. To delete an EoMPLS PW, select EoMPLS PW entity in the selection tree under
Configuration View to display the list of configured EoMPLS PW entities in the details
pane.

14. Enter a right click on the desired EoMPLS PW and select Delete EoMPLS PW.

A Delete EoMPLS PW window appears

Figure 103: EoMPLS PW - Delete

15. Set the Administrative State to Management and click on OK.

Specify an IP Address for Network Interface

The operation of specifying an IP Address is only needed if the flow’s

associated EoMPLS PW works in Dynamic Discovery Type. See
Create/Edit EoMPLS PW and Specify an IP Address for Network Port
(Physical or Logical) for more option rules information.

16. Select the Configuration icon in the tool bar or select Configuration from the
Application menu, then expand the System, NE-1, NTE entities in the selection tree,
by clicking the “+” sign next to each entity.

17. Enter a right click on the desired Network Port and select Edit Configuration.

A Network Port Edit Configuration window appears

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 213

Provision Ethernet over Multiprotocol Label Switching (EoMPLS)

Figure 104: EoMPLS Encapsulation Related Setting on Network Interface

18. EoMPLS Source IP Address - enter a desired IPv4 Address in Network Port
Configuration.

Only the EoMPLS related Network Port setting is addressed in this

procedures. See Provision Network Ports for more Network Port
configurations.

If the Egress Interface of EoMPLS PW is Network Port Protection

Group, the EoMPLS Source IP Address should be specified on
Network Port 1.

If the Egress Interface of EoMPLS PW is LAG, expand System, LAG,

NE-1 entities under the Configuration view by clicking the “+” sign next
to each entity, then enter a right click on LAG entity and select Edit
Port Configuration. Enter a desired EoMPLS Source IP Address in
Port Configuration.

Click on OK.

19. To edit the EoMPLS Source Interface IP address, repeat 16 to 18.

Associate a Flow with an EoMPLS PW

To realize MPLS encapsulation on Network Port (Physical/Logical), a flow must

be associated with an EoMPLS PW. For multi-cos EVPL flow, the A2N priority

214 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Ethernet over Multiprotocol Label Switching (EoMPLS)

mapping should also take MPLS labels into consideration (see Default Priority
Mapping Profile Tables and Priority Mapping Profile (Create/Edit Priority Mapping Profile)
for more information on EoMPLS priority mapping).

An EoMPLS PW can only be associated with one Flow (EVC). The

only exceptional case is that the Flows in the same SHG must be
associated with the same EoMPLS PW.

20. Select Configuration icon or select Configuration from the Application menu, then
expand the System, NE-1, NTE and Access Port entities in the selection tree, by
clicking on the “+” sign next to each entity.

21. Select the Flow entity under Configuration view to display the list of configured Flows
in the facility configuration pane.

22. Enter a right click on the desired Flow and select Edit Configuration.

An Edit Flow Configuration window appears

Figure 105: Configure EoMPLS Related Settings on Flow (EVPL Flow, Multi COS Enabled)

23. Select the following data to configure EoMPLS settings on the flow:

Connection

a) Select the EoMPLS Encapsulation checkbox and then select a desired

EoMPLS PW from the drop-down list to associate with the flow.
b) Select a desired Priority Mapping Profile if the flow is multi-cos enabled.
(see Default Priority Mapping Profile Tables for more information on
EoMPLS Priority Mapping)
c) Select a desired N2A COS Priority option from the drop-down list if the
flow is multi-cos enabled.
Click on OK.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 215

Provision Ethernet over Multiprotocol Label Switching (EoMPLS)

View EoMPLS PW Statistics

If the TTL in any of the encapsulation labels equals to 0, the associated packets
will be dropped. The system supports a statistic counter for such dropped
packets.
24. Select Performance icon or select Performance from the Application menu, then
expand the System, NE-1 and NTE entities in the selection tree, by clicking on the “+”
sign next to each entity.

25. Select EoMPLS PW entity under Performance View to display the PM summery in the
details pane.

Figure 106: EoMPLS PW Statistic Counter (Summery View)

216 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision GRE

Provision GRE
The Generic Routing Encapsulation (GRE) is supported in A2N direction on Network port
(physical and logical) in all GE112Pro series products

Provisioning of GRE involves the follow\ing,

l Configure GRE Interface

l Configure GRE Tunnel.

Provision GRE IP Interface

This section provide Process of configure GRE IP Interface.

1. Select the Configuration Application on the tool bar or select Configuration from the
Application Menu. Expand System, NE-1 and GRE in the selection tree pane, by
clicking on the “+” signs next to it to expand the view.

2. Right-click GRE IP Interface and select Create GRE IP Interface in the Shortcut
Menu.

A Create GRE IP Interface screen displays

Figure 107: Create GRE IP Interface

3. Accept the GRE IP Interface ID. It must be 1 (Only one GRE IP Interface can be
created).

4. Select a proper AdminState (IS or Management)

5. Enter Configuration for the GRE IP Interface.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 217

Provision GRE

a) Select or clear Outer VLAN. If selected, enter appropriate EtherType and

VLAN.
Select or clear Inner VLAN. If selected, enter appropriate EtherType and
VLAN.
b) Select to enable or disable DHCP. If disabled, enter an IP address and
Net Mask for the IP Interface.
c) Select an Associate Port.
d) Enable for disable Fragmenting. If enabled, enter MTU.
e) Enter an IP address for the the Gateway.
6. Click OK.

Provision GRE Tunnel

This section provide Process of configure GRE Tunnel

1. Select the Configuration Application on the tool bar or select Configuration from the
Application Menu. Expand System, NE-1 and GRE in the selection tree pane, by
clicking on the “+” signs next to it to expand the view.

2. Right-click GRE Tunnel and select Create GRE Tunnel in the Shortcut Menu.

A Create GRE Tunnel screen displays

Figure 108: Create GRE Tunnel

3. Accept the GRE Tunnel ID. It must be 1 (Only one GRE IP Interface can be created).

4. Select a proper AdminState (IS or Management)

218 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision GRE

5. Enter Configuration for the GRE IP Interface.

a) Select or clear Outer VLAN. If selected, enter appropriate EtherType and

VLAN.
Select or clear Inner VLAN. If selected, enter appropriate EtherType and
VLAN.
b) Enter DSCP value.
c) Enter the IP address of the remote GRE IP Tunnel.
d) Select a GRE IP Interface to associate with the GRE Tunnel.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 219

Port Mirroring Provisioning

Port Mirroring Provisioning

A Port Mirror is used to mirror frames from a source port and direction to a monitor port.

The Port Mirror feature on the system has 2 Mirror Sessions on that can mirror frames
from a Source Port to a Monitor Entity. A single mirror session is required for each Source
Port and direction being mirrored. Multiple filters can be added for a Mirror Session to limit
the number of frames mirrored to the Monitor Port. Truncation and time-stamping can also
be enabled for each Mirror Session. Monitor Entity can be one traffic port, or one egress
Monitor Flow point. When egress Monitor Flow point is used, additional packet
procession can be applied, for example: Tag Push, bandwidth Control, tunnel and etc.

, the configuration of a Mirror Session involves two entities:

Mirror Resource concept is not applicable for has enough port resources
in FPGA. So user does not need specify Mirror Resource when creating
Mirror Session.

Enabling a mirror function consists of the following steps:

1. Determine the next step.

Desired Function Then

Configure Mirror Port? Continue with the next step
Configure Mirror Sessions? Go to 29.
Clear Mirror Session Statistics? Go to 29.
Mirror Session provisioning is completed? End of Procedure

2. Determine the next step.

Desired Function Then

Enable Mirror Port? Continue with the next step
Disable Mirror Port? Go to 7.
Edit Mirror Port? Go to

3. Perform the following to designate an unassigned Access Port as a Mirror Port

a) Select Configuration view.

b) Expand the System Name, NE-1, NTE and desired Access Port facility
entities in the Selection Tree, by clicking on the “+” signs next to each
entity.
c) Select the desired Access Port facility in the Selection Tree.

220 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Port Mirroring Provisioning

The Access Port facility status window is displayed and the

Configuration Tab is selected
4. Right click on the Access Port facility and select Edit Configuration.

An Edit Configuration window appears

Figure 109: Edit Access Port Configuration View

5. Ensure the Administrative State is currently Unassigned, and do not edit it

If port is being configured as a Mirror Port, set other physical port settings
as required for interfacing with the external device.
a) Select Enabled for Monitor Port if port is to be used to transport mirrored
frames

An Access Port configured as a Monitor Port in a Mirror Session cannot

be used for other functions.

b) Edit the Buffer Size as needed.

c) Click on OK

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 221

Port Mirroring Provisioning

6. To configure another Monitor Port, repeat 3 through 5

Otherwise go to 1

7. To change a port having Monitor Port from enabled to a disabled condition, the port
cannot be assigned to a Mirror Session. If it is assigned to a Mirror Session and it is
desired to change the port to an Unassigned state, the Mirror Session must first be
deleted (see 1 and follow the link for ‘Configure Mirror Sessions’).

If the port is not a participant in a Mirror Session, follow the directions in 4 and 5, then
select ‘Disabled’ for Monitor Port.

When a Monitor Port is disabled, the Access Port is automatically set to

the Unassigned state.

8. Click on OK

9. Go to 1

To edit settings for a Monitor Port , follow the directions in 4 and 5, then edit the desired
settings (limited to: Alias, Media Type, MTU, Configured Speed and Buffer Size.

10. Click on OK

11. Go to 1

12. Determine the next step.

Desired Function Then

Create an Egress Monitor FP? Continue with the next step
View an Egress Monitor FP? Go to 17.
Edit an Egress Monitor FP? Go to 19.
Delete an Egress Monitor FP? Go to 22.
View Statistics? Go to 25.
Clear Statistics? Go to 27.
Configuration of Sessions complete? Go to 1.

13. Perform the following to create a Egress Monitor Flowpoint:

a) Select Maintenance view.

b) Expand the System and Port Mirror entity in the Selection Tree, by
clicking on the “+” signs next to it.
c) Right click on the Mirror Session entity and select Create an Egress
Monitor FP.
A Create Egress Monitor FP window appears

222 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Port Mirroring Provisioning

Figure 110: Create Egress Monitor FP

14. The EID automatically indexes to the next available ID and does not normally require a
selection by the user.

a) Enter an Egress Monitor FP ID if desired.

b) Enter a Name for the Egress Monitor FP if desired.
c) Select a Traffic Interface for the Egress Monitor FP to associate with (An
Access port must be in EVPL mode to be associated with).
d) Select STag Control and CTag Control.
e) Enter STag Control or CTag VLAN if the corresponding Tag Control is
enabled.
f) Enter CIR/EIR/COS and Buffer Size for the Egress Monitor FP.
15. Click OK.

16. Go to 12

17. To view an Egress Monitor FP:

a) Left Click on the Port Mirror in the Selection Tree.

b) Right-click the desired Egress Monitor FP in the Details Pane and select
View Configuration.
AEgress Monitor FP View window appears

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 223

Port Mirroring Provisioning

Figure 111: View Egress Monitor FP

18. Go to 12

19. To edit an Egress Monitor FP:

a) Left Click on the Port Mirror in the Selection Tree.

b) Right-click the desired Egress Monitor FP in the Details Pane and select
Edit Configuration.
A Edit Egress Monitor FP window appears

Figure 112: Edit Egress Monitor FP

20. Edit the following setting as desired:

224 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Port Mirroring Provisioning

Name, STag, CTag, CIR/EIR/COS and Buffer Size.

21. Go to 12

22. To delete an Egress Monitor FP:

a) Left Click on the Port Mirror in the Selection Tree.

b) Right-click the desired Egress Monitor FP in the Details Pane and select
Delete Egress Monitor FP.
A Delete Egress Monitor FP window appears

Figure 113: Delete Egress Monitor FP

23. Click OK.

24. Go to 12

25. To view Egress Monitor FP statistics.

a) Left Click on the Port Mirror in the Selection Tree.

b) Right-click the desired Egress Monitor FP in the Details Pane and select
View Statis
AEgress Monitor FP Statistics View window appears

Figure 114: Egress Monitor FP Statistics View

26. Go to 12

27. To Reset Egress Monitor FP Statistics.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 225

Port Mirroring Provisioning

a) Left Click on the Port Mirror in the Selection Tree.

b) Right-click the desired Egress Monitor FP in the Details Pane and select
Clear Statis
A Clear Egress Monitor FP Statitstics window appears

Figure 115: Clear Egress Monitor FP statistics

c) Click OK.
28. Go to 12

29. Determine the next step.

Desired Function Then

Create a Port Mirror Session? Continue with the next step
View a Port Mirror Session? Go to 33.
Edit a Port Mirror Session? Go to 36.
Delete a Port Mirror Session? Go to 39.
Clear Statistics? Go to 30.
Configuration of Sessions complete? Go to 1.

30. Perform the following to create a Port Mirror Session:

a) Select Maintenance view.

b) Expand the System and Port Mirror entity in the Selection Tree, by
clicking on the “+” signs next to it.
c) Right click on the Mirror Session entity and select Create Port Mirror
Session.
A Port Mirror Session Create window appears

226 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Port Mirroring Provisioning

Figure 116: Port Mirror Session Create View

31. The EID automatically indexes to the next available ID and does not normally require a
selection by the user, but a drop-down box of available EIDs is provided.

Select the desired Source Port from the drop-down box. This is the port being
mirrored.

Select the desired Monitor Port from the drop-down box. One or more Access
Ports must already have been configured as a Monitor Port to appear in the drop-
down list.

An Access Port configured as a Monitor Port in a Mirror Session cannot

be used for other functions.

a) Select the ACL Miss Action

b) Select the Soruce Port
c) Select the Monitor Entity(An Egress Mirror FlowPoint or an Access Port
enabled to be Monitor Entity)
d) Select the desired Source Port Direction (Ingress or Egress).
e) Enable or Disable Timestamp Control.
f) Enable or Disable Truncation Control.
g) If Truncation Control is Enabled, set the Truncation Length.
h) Click OK.
32. To create another Port Mirror Session are required, repeat c and 31, otherwise go to
29.

33. To view a Port Mirror Session configuration:

a) Left Click on the Mirror facility in the Selection Tree.

b) Right Click on the desired Mirror Session in the Details Pane and select
View Configuration.
A Port Mirror Session View window appears

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 227

Port Mirroring Provisioning

Figure 117: Port Mirror Session View

34. The configuration and statistics are viewable.

To close the view, click on the ‘X’ in the tab for the session.

35. Go to 29

36. To edit a Port Mirror Session:

a) Left Click on the Mirror facility in the Selection Tree.

b) Right Click on the desired Mirror Session in the Details Pane and select
Edit Configuration.
An Edit Port Mirror Session window appears

Figure 118: Edit Port Mirror Session

37. ACL Miss Action, Timestamp Control, Truncation Control and Truncation Length can
be edited.

Click OK.

38. Go to 29

39. To delete a Port Mirror Session:

a) Left Click on the Mirror facility in the Selection Tree.

b) Right Click on the desired Mirror Session in the Details Pane and select
Delete Port Mirror Session.

228 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Port Mirroring Provisioning

A Delete Port Mirror Session window appears

Figure 119: Delete Port Mirror Session

c) Click OK
40. To clear statistics for a Port Mirror Session:

a) Left Click on the Mirror facility in the Selection Tree.

b) Right Click on the desired Mirror Session in the Details Pane and select
Clear Statistics.
A Delete Port Mirror Session window appears

Figure 120: Clear Statistics for a Port Mirror Session

c) Click on OK
41. Go to 29

42. Determine the next step.

Desired Function Then

Create a Mirror ACL Rule? Continue with the next step
View a Mirror ACL Rule? Go to 46.
Edit a Mirror ACL Rule? Go to 48.
Delete a Mirror ACL Rule? Go to 49.
Configuration of Sessions complete? Go to 1.

43. To create a Mirror ACL:

a) Select the Maintenance View

b) Left Click on the Mirror facility in the Selection Tree.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 229

Port Mirroring Provisioning

c) Right Click on the desired Mirror Session in the Details Pane and select
Create ACL Rule.
An Create ACL Rule window appears

Figure 121: Create Mirror ACL Rule

44. Enter or select the following data for the Mirror ACL Rule:

a) Identification
Index - Edit the Index number. By default, it is automatically indexed.
Enter a desire Alias.
b) State
Select the Administrative State.
c) Rule Configuration
Select the desired Action type.
Enter the desired Rule Priority.
d) MAC Address
Select relevant check boxes for Src Addr and/or Dest Addr, and if
selected, enter the corresponding Address and Mask.
e) EtherType
Select the check box for EtherType Control and if selected enter the
EtherType.
f) Outer VLAN Tag
Select the relevant check boxes for VLAN ID and/or PCP, and if selected,
enter the corresponding Low Limit and High Limit.
Select the check box for DEI and enter the DEI value.

230 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Port Mirroring Provisioning

g) Inner VLAN Tag

Select the relevant check boxes for VLAN ID and/or PCP, and if selected,
enter the corresponding Low Limit and High Limit.
h) IP
Select or unselect Src Addr, and if selected, select the Dynamic check
box as desired or directly enter IP addresses for Low Limit and High Limit.
Select or unselect Dest Addr and Priority, and if selected, enter Low Limit
and High Limit.

The IP configurationl cannot be enabled if EtherType Control check box is

not selected and EtherType value is not equal to 0x800.

i) Protocol
Select or unselect Control and Protocol. The Protocol Number updates
according to the selected Protocol type.

The Layer-four Protocols cannot be enabled if EtherType Control check box

is not selected and EtherType value is not equal to 0x800.

Select or unselect Src Port and/or Dst Port, and if selected, enter Low
Limit and High Limit.
Select or unselect TCP Flags Control, and if selected, enter TCP Flags.
j) Click on OK.
45. Go to 42.

46. To view the Configuration of an ACL rule.

a) Select the Maintenance View,

b) Left click the Mirror Session in the Selection Tree.
c) Right click on the desired Mirror Session in the Details Pane and select
View ACL Rule.
An ACL Rules window appears

d) Right click the desired ACL rule and select View Configuration.
An View ACL Rule window appears

47. Go to 42.

48. To edit an ACL rule

a) Left click the Mirror Session in the Selection Tree.

b) Right click the desired Mirror Session in the Details Pane and select View
ACL Rule.
An ACL Rules window appears
c) Right click the desired ACL rule and select Edit Configuration.
An Edit ACL Rule window appears

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 231

Port Mirroring Provisioning

Figure 122: Edit Mirror ACL Rule

d) Edit the ACL rule configuration including ACL priority as desired.

e) Click OK.
49. To delete an ACL rule

a) Left click Mirror Session in the Selection Tree.

b) Right click the desired Mirror Session in the Details Pane and select View
ACL Rule.
An ACL Rules window appears
c) Right click the desired ACL rule and select Delete.
An Confirmation window appears
d) Click OK.
50. Go to 42.

232 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision ELP

Provision ELP
The Ethernet Linear Protection (ELP) behavior and Automatic Protection Switching
(APS) protocol are specified in ITU-T Recommendation G.8031. The ELP functionality is
used to provide Ethernet network protection for end-to-end services over any topology.
The protection mechanism uses 2 point-to-point network connections; with 1 connection
providing a primary (working) path and the other providing a secondary (protect) path.

Create ELP
A Ethernet Linear Protection Group (ELP) is created on the Network ports.

1. Select the Configuration Application on the tool bar or select Configuration in the
Application Menu. Expand System, Protection Groups and NE-1 in the selection tree
pane, by clicking on the “+” signs next to them to expand the view.

2. Under NE-1, right-click ELP and select Create ELP in the shortcut menu.

A Create ELP screen displays

Figure 1:  Create ELP

Configure the ELP as desired

Identification,

3. Enter an Entity ID, User Label.

AdminState,

4. Select a Administrative State

Configuration

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 233

Provision ELP

5. Enable or disable Revertive Mode.

6. Select a Wait-to-Restore Time (WTR)

7. Enter a Hold Off Time

8. Select Working Member

9. Select Protecting Member

10. (Optionally), select Working MEP

11. (Optionally), select Protecting MEP

12. Click OK.

An ELP is created and displayed in the ELP list.

Eidt ELP
A Ethernet Linear Protection Group (ELP) is created on the Network ports.

1. Select the Configuration Application on the tool bar or select Configuration in the
Application Menu. Expand System, Protection Groups and NE-1 in the selection tree
pane, by clicking on the “+” signs next to them to expand the view.

2. Under NE-1, click ELP and select Create ELP in the shortcut menu.

A List of ELP screen displays

Figure 123: ELP List

3. In the ELP list, right-click the ELP to be edited, and select Edit ELP in the shortcut
menu.

A Edit ELP screen displays

234 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision ELP

Figure 124: Edit ELP

Edit the ELP as desired

Identification,

4. Enter or edit the User Label.

AdminState,

5. Select a Administrative State

Configuration

6. Enable or disable Revertive Mode.

7. Select a Wait-to-Restore Time (WTR)

8. Enter a Hold Off Time

9. Select Working MEP

10. Select Protecting MEP

11. Click OK.

The ELP is edited and the ELP list displays again

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 235

Provision ConnectGuard - GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Provision ConnectGuard - GE114Pro (C)/

GE114Pro (CSH)
ConnectGuardTM is ADVA Optical Networking’s Trade Mark functionality that is
developed based on the Media Access Control (MAC) Security standard defined in IEEE
802.1AE-2006 and IEEE 802.1AEbn-2011. It allows authorized systems that attach to
and interconnect LANs in a network to maintain confidentiality of transmitted data and to
take measures against frames transmitted or modified by unauthorized devices.

With the advantage of ConnectGuard, the GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (CSH) products

which support this feature can broaden the application range of the GE11xPro products
and benefit both the Customer Premise Equipment (CPE) and the Service Provider.

l CPE based encryption: The traffic may be secured at the customer CPE with the Inner
VLAN encrypted and Outer VLAN tagged at the NID.
l Management service encryption: The encryption starts from the NID owned by the
Service Provider. The NID is able to filter the traffic based on the incoming VLAN ID
and entry the traffic based on the policy that is to be defined by the end user.
l The smaller overhead of implementing MAC security in an end to end manner makes
ConnectGuard - MAC encryption a good solution for Layer-2 based backhaul.

The ConnectGuard application consists of four parts of sub-functional provisioning and

operations that must be performed only by the crypto user:

l Provision Key Exchange Profile Settings

l Provision Secure Flow
l Associate an Access Flow with a Secure Flow
l Provision crypto user’s Authorizations for system upgrade, factory defaults/Database
restoring and Configuration File loading.

More information on ConnectGuard and the current implementation can be found in FSP
150-GE11xPro System Description.

More information on ConnectGuard use case details can be found in FSP 150-GE11xPro
Quick Start Guide.

236 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision ConnectGuard - GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Provision Secure Traffic

This section will provide the procedure on how to provision the following configuration
settings by the crypto user:

l Provision Key Exchange Profile Settings

l Provision Secure Flow
l Associate an Access Flow with a Secure Flow

The following procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an
IP address and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN (see Set Up the GE11xPro DCN
(eth0) Port Using the Serial Port with at least a Provisioning level user permission and
then is logged on with a Crypto level user permission using the web-based GUI (See
User Authorization Privilege Levels).

To ensure the secure connection and authentication between the nodes that
support ConnectGuard, the local user, with crypto privilege or non-crypto
privilege, must use HTTPS in the Internet Browser to access a GE114Pro
(C)/GE114Pro (CSH), i.e. [Link] where
[Link] is the IP address of the DCN that the GE114Pro
(C)/GE114Pro (CSH) is connected to.

The following procedure also assumes that services have been configured at
both ends with flows to support encrypted P2P traffic and a connection exists between
the two sides. See Provision Access Port Services.

Refer to ConnectGuard Configuration Options and Rules - GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro

(CSH) for more information on ConnectGuard configuration options and rules.

Create Key Exchange Profile on Both Ends

1. Select the ConnectGuard icon or select ConnectGuard from the Applications menu,
then expand the System and Profiles entities in the Selection Tree, by clicking the “+”
signs next to each entity.

2. To create a Key Exchange Profile, right click on the Key Exchange entity and select
Add Key Exchange Profile.

A Create Key Exchange Profile window appears

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 237

Provision ConnectGuard - GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Figure 125: Create Key Exchange Profile

3. Enter or select the following data to configure the key exchange profile (See
Create/Edit Key Exchange Profile for options and rules):

Identification

a) Key Exchange Profile EID - select a desired profile entity identifier from
the drop-down list
b) Name - enter a desired name for this profile (optional)
Parameters

c) Diffie Hellman Length - select the desired keypair length for Diffie Hellman
mode
d) Authentication Password - enter a string of up to 10 - 32 alphanumeric and
special characters as the authentication password for Diffie Hellman
mode
e) Retype Authentication Password

User must make sure that the Key Exchange Profile settings on both ends of
the traffic for encryption and decryption match each other and the
Authentication Password must be same on both ends.

If the “Key Exchange Authentication Password Missing” alarm is raised, the

crypto user need check the Authentication Password of all the available Key
Exchange Profiles. If the Authentication Password entry shows blank, it
means that the associated Key Exchange Profile has lost the Authentication
Password and the related key exchange process will not start.
To clear this alarm, reset the Authentication Password for the Key Exchange
Profile.

Click on OK.

An Enter Crypto Password window pops up

238 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision ConnectGuard - GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Figure 126: Enter Crypto Password

4. Enter the crypto password that was last set (See Logging On and Configure Local
Crypto User - GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (CSH) for information on crypto password
setting.)

Instead of hiding the crypto password using black dots, user may click on the
“Show password” checkbox as an option to make the password components
visible, e.g., gui_12345678#ADVA.

Click on OK.

Every time after the provisioning operation, the crypto user is required to
enter the crypto password to verify if the password input is the same as the
crypto password stored in the SRAM.

It is required that the crypto password of the crypto user conform to the
security policy of High strength (see Configure Security Policy).
It

If the entered crypto password is different from the one stored in SRAM, an
error message will pop up indicating that the operation performed with
insufficient privilege level will be denied. (See Figure 127 on p. 240)

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 239

Provision ConnectGuard - GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Figure 127: Crypto Password Input Wrong - Insufficient Privilege

5. To View an Key Exchange Profile, select Key Exchange entity under ConnectGuard
view to display the list of configured Key Exchange Profile entities in the details pane.

Figure 128: ConnectGuard Key Exchange Profile List and Operation Menu

6. Enter a right click on the desired Key Exchange Profile entity and select View
Configuration.

An Key Exchange Profile view configuration window appears

Figure 129: Key Exchange Profile - View Configuration

7. To close the Key Exchange Profile view, click the “x” on the facility tab.

240 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision ConnectGuard - GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (CSH)

8. To edit an Key Exchange Profile, select Key Exchange entity under ConnectGuard
view to display the list of configured Key Exchange Profile entities in the details pane.

9. Enter a right click on the desired Key Exchange Profile entity and select Edit.

An Edit Key Exchange Profile window appears

Figure 130: Key Exchange Profile - Edit Configuration

10. Edit the following data to configure the Key Exchange Profile:

a) Enter a desired Name for the Key Exchange Profile.

b) Select the desired Diffie Hellman Length.
c) To change Authentication Password, select Enabled from Password
Changed drop-down list and then Reset the Authentication Password and
repeat the input. By default, Password Changed is Disable in edit mode.
Click on OK

An Enter Crypto Password window pops up (see Figure 126 on p. 239)

11. Enter the crypto password and click on OK.

12. To delete an Key Exchange Profile, select Key Exchange entity under ConnectGuard
view to display the list of configured Key Exchange Profile entities in the details pane.

13. Enter a right click on the desired Key Exchange Profile and select Delete.

A Delete Key Exchange Profile window appears

Figure 131: Key Exchange Profile - Delete

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 241

Provision ConnectGuard - GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Click on OK.

An Enter Crypto Password window pops up (see Figure 126 on p. 239)

14. Enter the crypto password and click on OK.

Create Secure Flow on Both Ends

15. Select the ConnectGuard icon or select ConnectGuard from the Applications menu,
then expand the System, NE-1, NTE114PRO CSH and Secure Flows entities in the
Selection Tree, by clicking the “+” signs next to each entity.

16. Enter a right click on the Flow entity and select Add Secure Flow.

A Create Secure Flow window appears

Figure 132: Create Secure Flow

17. Enter or select the following data to configure the Secure Flow (See Create/Edit
Secure Flow for options and rules):

Identification

a) Secure Flow - enter an ID ranged from 1 to 14 for the secure flow.

AdminState

b) Administrative - select the desired administrative state.

Secure Setting

c) Egress Interface - select the desired egress interface for encrypted traffic.
d) Cipher Suite - select the desired cipher suite from the drop-down list.

242 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision ConnectGuard - GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (CSH)

It is recommended that the same Cipher Suite setting is configured on both

sides of the traffic with key exchange.

e) Tags In Clear - select the desired number of frame tags to bypass the
security tag.
f) Replay Protection - enable/disable the replay protection for received
packets.
g) Replay Protection Window - enter the desired replay protection window
size when replay protection has been enabled.
Key Exchange Setting

h) Key Exchange Profile - select the desired Key Exchange Profile that has
been provisioned.
i) Key Exchange Tag Mode - select the desired key exchange frame’s tag
mode. Only “Manual” is supported in current release.
j) Key Exchange Interval - enter a desired Key Exchange Interval.
k) Remote MAC Address Enabled - enable/disable the Remote MAC
Address entry for a unicast MAC address.
l) Remote MAC Address - enter a desired unicast MAC address as the DA
when Remote MAC Address Enabled option has been enabled.
Key Exchange Tag Setting

m) Select the checkbox by Outer VLAN to enable Outer VLAN entry and
enter the Outer VLAN Tag, as desired.
n) Select the checkbox by Inner VLAN1 to enable Inner VLAN1 entry and
enter the Inner VLAN1 Tag, as desired.
Click on OK.

An Enter Crypto Password window pops up (see Figure 126 on p. 239)

18. Enter the crypto password and click on OK.

19. To View a Secure Flow, select the Flow entity under Secure Flows in ConnectGuard
view to display the list of configured Secure Flow entities in the details pane.

Figure 133: Secure Flow List and Operation Menu

20. Enter a right click on the desired Secure Flow and select View Configuration.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 243

Provision ConnectGuard - GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (CSH)

A View Secure Flow configuration window appears

Figure 134: Secure Flow - View Configuration

The Secure Flow configuration view window not only displays the
configuration settings, but also shows the instantaneous state of Secure
Channel (SC) and Security Association (SA).
Two SA are supported within each SC for the purpose of key exchange
without traffic interruption.

The SA statistic attribute “Protected Pkts” is not supported currently. The

attribute “Encrypted Pkts” will show data after key exchange succeeds if the
Secure Flow has been associated with an Access Flow (see Associate an
Access Flow with a Secure Flow).

244 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision ConnectGuard - GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (CSH)

The SC state provides a brief performance statistic view. For more detailed
SC statistics, see View Secure Flow Statistics on Both Ends.

If no mistakes were made in the Secure Flow configurations at both ends, the
key exchange process will succeed; otherwise a “Key Exchange Failed”
alarm associated with the secure flow will be raised.

21. To close the Secure Flow configuration view, click the “x” on the facility tab.

22. To edit a Secure Flow, select the Flow entity under Secure Flows in ConnectGuard
view to display the list of configured Secure Flow entities in the details pane.

23. Enter a right click on the desired Secure Flow and select Edit.

An Edit Secure Flow window appears

Figure 135: Secure Flow - Edit

24. Edit the following data to configure the Secure Flow:

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 245

Provision ConnectGuard - GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (CSH)

AdminState

a) Administrative - select the desired administrative state.

Secure Setting

b) Cipher Suite - select the desired cipher suite from the drop-down list.
c) Tags In Clear - select the desired number of frame tags to bypass the
security tag.
d) Replay Protection - enable/disable the replay protection for received
packets.
e) Replay Protection Window - enter the desired replay protection window
size when replay protection has been enabled.
Key Exchange Setting

f) Key Exchange Profile - select the desired Key Exchange Profile that has
been provisioned.
g) Key Exchange Tag Mode - select the desired key exchange frame’s tag
mode. Only “Manual” is supported in current release.
h) Key Exchange Interval - enter a desired Key Exchange Interval.
i) Remote MAC Address Enabled - enable/disable the Remote MAC
Address entry for a unicast MAC address.
j) Remote MAC Address - enter a desired unicast MAC address as the DA
when Remote MAC Address Enabled option has been enabled.
Key Exchange Tag Setting

k) Select the checkbox by Outer VLAN to enable Outer VLAN entry and
enter the Outer VLAN Tag, as desired.
l) Select the checkbox by Inner VLAN to enable Inner VLAN entry and enter
the Inner VLAN Tag, as desired.
Click on OK.

An Enter Crypto Password window pops up (see Figure 126 on p. 239)

25. Enter the crypto password and click on OK.

If key exchange process failed, it keeps trying restart key exchange process
until three consecutive failures, where the third key exchange will be delayed
for a period of “Key Exchange Interval” after the second failure.
After three consecutive key exchange failures, the crypto user may perform
“Restart Key Exchange” (see 26) operation after making appropriate changes
on the Secure Flow settings of both ends.

26. To restart key exchange for a Secure Flow, select the Flow entity under Secure Flows
in ConnectGuard view to display the list of configured Secure Flow entities in the
details pane.

27. Enter a right click on the desired Secure Flow and select Restart Key Exchange.

A Restart Key Exchange inquiry window appears

246 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision ConnectGuard - GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Figure 136: Restart Key Exchange

28. Click on OK.

An Enter Crypto Password window pops up (see Figure 126 on p. 239)

29. Enter the crypto password and click on OK.

30. To delete a Secure Flow, select the Flow entity under Secure Flows in ConnectGuard
view to display the list of configured Secure Flow entities in the details pane.

31. Enter a right click on the desired Secure Flow and select Delete.

A Secure Flow cannot be deleted if its administrative state is IS.

32. Click on OK.

An Enter Crypto Password window pops up (see Figure 126 on p. 239)

33. Enter the crypto password and click on OK.

Associate an Access Flow with a Secure Flow

To realize traffic encryption and decryption between the two ends, the
provisioned Access Flow s on both ends must be associated with a Secure Flow
and the Secure Flow settings on both ends must be the same.

By associating an Access Flow with a Secure Flow, the Access Flow will be
able to encrypt the outgoing traffic and decrypt the incoming traffic. To view
the Statistics of encrypted and decrypted packets on both ends, see View
Secure Flow Statistics on Both Ends.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 247

Provision ConnectGuard - GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (CSH)

The procedure below assumes that layer-2 services have been configured at
both ends with flows to support the ConnectGuard secure traffic frames
between the two ends for key exchange and a connection exists between the
two sides.

The procedure below also assumes that at least one Secure Flow has been
provisioned and the Key Exchange Frame Tag Setting in Manual mode (see
Create/Edit Secure Flow) matches the tags of the Flow that is to be
associated with the Secure Flow.

34. Select the ConnectGuard icon or select ConnectGuard from the Applications menu,
then expand the System, NE-1, NTE114PRO CSH and Secure Flows entities in the
Selection Tree, by clicking the “+” signs next to each entity.

35. Expand a desired Access Port entity in the selection tree and select the Flow entity
under the Access Port to display the list of configured flows in the details pane.

36. Enter a right click on the desired flow and select Edit Configuration.

Figure 137: Flow List and Operation Menu in ConnectGuard View

An Edit Flow window appears (see Figure 138 on p. 249)

248 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision ConnectGuard - GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Figure 138: Edit Flow Configuration in ConnectGuard View

37. Configure the following data to associate the Flow with an existing Secure Flow:

Connection

a) Secure Flow - select a desired Secure Flow from the drop-down list.
b) Secure Block - select Enabled or Disabled.

Before the editing the Secure Flow List, the user must set the Secure
Block to enabled and change the list to empty.

The Access Flow attributes “Secure Flow” and “Secure Block” are editable
only for the crypto user in ConnectGuard View and are ready-only for non-
crypto users.
Thus, the two attributes are not editable while a user with at least a
provisioning privilege level provisions Access Port Services (see Provision
Access Port Services).

Each Access Flow has a read-only attribute “Secure State” to indicate

whether this flow is associated with a Secure Flow, whether an active key is
available for packet encryption and decryption as well as what Secure Block
setting is provisioned (see Table 9 on p. 250 for more descriptions).

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 249

Provision ConnectGuard - GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (CSH)

To added more Access Flows to a Secure Flow which has been

associated to at least one Access Flow, it is required to take this
previously secured Flow to an UnsecureBlock state and then transit to
UnsecureNormal state, otherwise there is a tagging confilict between the
Access Flow and the Secure Flow in clear.

The user has to make a conscious decision doing this because security
can be undermined.

Table 9: Access Flow - Secure State Descriptions

Secure State Description
The Access Flow /Nework L3 Flowpoint is not associated with a Secure Flow and
Secure Block is Disabled.

In this state, the crypto user can only provision the following two settings for the
Unsecure Normal Access Flow :

l Secure Block
l Secure Flow
TheAccess Flow /Nework L3 Flowpoint is not associated with a Secure Flow and
Secure Block is Enabled.

In this state, the crypto user can provision the following settings for the Access Flow :

l Secure Block
l Secure Flow
Unsecure Blocked
l VLAN Members
l Tag Management
l Untagged Frame control

In this state, a user with at least the Provisioning privilege level can provision all the
settings in the Access Flow .
The Access Flow /Nework L3 Flowpoint is associated with a Secure Flow and the
Secure Flow has an active key to encrypt/decrypt packets.

In this state, the crypto user can provision the following settings for the Access Flow :

l Secure Block
l Secure Flow
Secure Normal
l VLAN Members
l Tag Management
l Untagged Frames control

In this state, a user with at least the Provisioning privilege level can provision the
settings other than above in the Access Flow .

250 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision ConnectGuard - GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Table 9: Access Flow - Secure State Descriptions

Secure State Description
The Access Flow /Nework L3 Flowpoint is associated with a Secure Flow and the
Secure Flow has no active key to encrypt/decrypt packets.

In this state, the crypto user can provision the following settings for the Access Flow :

l Secure Block
l Secure Flow;
Secure Blocked
l VLAN Members
l Tag Management
l Untagged Frames control

In this state, a user with at least the Provisioning privilege level can provision the
settings other than above in the Access Flow .

Click on OK.

An Enter Crypto Password window pops up (see Figure 126 on p. 239)

38. Enter the crypto password and click on OK.

The procedure below also assumes that at least one Secure Flow has been
provisioned and the Key Exchange Frame Tag Setting in Manual mode (see
Create/Edit Secure Flow) matches the tags of the Flowpoint that is to be
associated with the Secure Flow.

Configure L3 Flowpoint for ConnectGuard

39. Select the ConnectGuard icon or select ConnectGuard from the Applications menu,
then expand the System, NE-1, NTE and the desired Network Port in the Selection
Tree, by clicking the “+” signs next to each entity.

40. Under the Network Port, click L3 Flow Point. And a list of L3 Flow Point existing on
the Network Port is displayed.

41. Right-click the desired L3 Flow Point and select Edit Configuration.

42. An Edit L3 Flow Point Screen is displayed.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 251

Provision ConnectGuard - GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Figure 139: Edit Security Flow Attribute of a L3 Flow Point

43. Enter Secure Flow Attibute for the L3 Flow Point as desired.

a) Select the Secure Block control.

b) Select the Secure Flow

When a flow point associates with a secure flow, the Secure Block must
be disabled.

To change the Secure Flow, the user must set the Secure Block to
enabled and change the list to empty first.

View Secure Flow Statistics on Both Ends

If Key Exchange process is successful, the user can view the secure flow
statistics to monitor the performance of traffic encryption and decryption.
If the “Key Exchange Failed” alarm is raised, the SA and SC will not show
valid data.

44. Select the ConnectGuard icon or select ConnectGuard from the Applications menu,
then expand the System, NE-1, NTE114PRO CSH and Statistics entities in the
Selection Tree, by clicking the “+” signs next to each entity.

45. Click on Flow and select a desired Secure Flow in the details pane.

The SC statistic data appears

252 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision ConnectGuard - GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Figure 140: View Secure Flow SC Statistics

46. Alternatively, expand the System, NE-1, NTE114PRO CSH and Secure Flows
entities in the Selection Tree pane in ConnectGuard View. Select Flows entity to
display the list of configured Secure Flows.

47. Double click on the desired Secure Flow, or enter a right click on the desired Secure
Flow and select View Configuration.

A View Secure Flow Configuration window appears (see Figure 134 on

p. 244)

48. Scroll down the Secure Flow configuration page to observe SC State and SA State.

The SA statistic attribute “Protected Pkts” is not supported currently.

Two SA are supported within each SC for the purpose of key

exchange without traffic interruption. Every time after a successful
key exchange process, only one SA is used and the other SA is not
used (see Figure 141 on p. 254).

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 253

Provision ConnectGuard - GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Figure 141: SC State and SA State View in Secure Flow Configuration

49. While under the Statistics, enter a right click on the desired Secure Flow and select
the desired action from the menu: Init Registers, Edit Thresholds, Generate PM Data
File (see Figure 142 on p. 255).

Performing the “Init Registers” operation requires a non-crypto user with at

least the Maintenance privilege. Fore more information on Init Register
operation, see Initializing PM and Distribution Registers
Performing the “Edit Thresholds” and “Generate PM Data File” operations
requires a non-crypto user with at least the Provisioning privilege. For more
information on Edit Thresholds and Generate PM Data File, see Editing PM
Thresholds and Viewing PM Counts and Threshold Values.

254 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision ConnectGuard - GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Figure 142: Secure Flow - PM Operations (Non-Crypto User)

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 255

Provision ConnectGuard - GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Provision Crypto User’s Authorizations

This section will provide the procedure on how to provision the crypto user’s
Authorizations for:

l Software Install
l Software Version
l Restore Factory Defaults
l Restore Database
l Load Config File

The following procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an
IP address and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN (see Set Up the GE11xPro
DCN (eth0) Port Using the Serial Port on p. 322) with at least a Provisioning level user
permission and then is logged on with a Crypto level user permission using the web-
based GUI (See User Authorization Privilege Levels).

Refer to ConnectGuard Configuration Options and Rules - GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro

(CSH) for more information on ConnectGuard configuration options and rules.

1. Select the ConnectGuard icon or select ConnectGuard from the Applications menu,
then expand the System and Administration entities in the Selection Tree, by clicking
the “+” signs next to each entity.

2. Enter a right click on Authorizations and select Edit Operations Approved.

An Edit Authorizations window appears

Figure 143: Edit Crypto User’s Authorizations

By default, the “Software Install”, “Restore Factory Defaults”, “Restore

Database” and “Load Config File” operations are all “Disabled” and must be
approved (set to “Enabled”) by the crypto user before the user with the
appropriate privilege level performs the operation.

3. To approve software installation, set Software Install to Enabled and enter the
Software Version (e.g. 7.1.1-365). To approve the operations of Restore Factory

256 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision ConnectGuard - GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Defaults, Restore Database and/or Load Config File, select Enabled from the
corresponding drop-down list.

Click on OK.

An Enter Crypto Password window pops up (see Figure 126 on p. 239)

4. Enter the crypto password and click on OK.

For information on how to set/edit the Crypto Password, see Configure Local
Crypto User - GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (CSH) and Logging On.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 257

Provision Layer-3 Services

Provision Layer-3 Services

The Layer-3 (L3) Services provisioning enables the GE11xPro to function as a DHCP
Relay Agent and/or Virtual Routing & Forwarding (VRF) equipment, so a single
GE11xPro device can relay between DHCP Servers and DHCP Clients to assign IP
Addresses to DHCP Clients and serve as multiple virtual routers to perform static and
dynamic route forwarding for IP [Link] this way, the network paths can be
segmented without using multiple devices and the upstream switching/routing load can
be alleviated.

The GE11xPro family products support Layer-3 services (i.e. IP service forwarding)
functionalities, including:

l Provision Layer-3 Flow Point based on traffic port (physical/logical)

l Provision ACL Filter for Layer-3 Flow Point
l Provision Traffic IP Interface based on traffic interface
l Provision Static ARP Entry for IP Interface
l Provision Virtual Routing Forwarding (VRF)
l Provision Static Route based on VRF
l Provision DHCP Relay Agent

Prior to provisioning Layer-3 services, the software license for IP-Services-and-ACL-

Filtering must be enabled so the GE11xPro system may support the following number of
Layer-3 service entities:

l 8/4 VRFs per GE114Pro/GE112Pro

l 100/100 Static Routes per VRF for GE114Pro/GE112Pro
l 63/15 Active Static Routes per VRF for GE114Pro/GE112Pro
l 8/4 DHCP Relay Agents per GE114Pro/GE112Pro
l 64/32 Traffic IP Interfaces per GE114Pro/GE112Pro
l 64/32 Layer-3 Flow Points per GE114Pro/GE112Pro
l 127/63 ACL Rules per GE114Pro/GE112Pro
l 512/512 ARP Entries per GE114Pro/GE112Pro

By enabling Extended-Scale-IP-Services license, the GE11xPro system may support

the following number of layer-3 service entities:

l 16/8 VRFs per GE114Pro/GE112Pro

l 100/100 routes per VRF for GE114Pro/GE112Pro
l 63/15 Active Static Routes per VRF for GE114Pro/GE112Pro
l 8/4 DHCP Relay Agents per GE114Pro/GE112Pro
l 64/32 Traffic IP Interfaces per GE114Pro/GE112Pro
l 64/32 Layer-3 Flow points per GE114Pro/GE112Pro
l 127/63 ACL Rules per GE114Pro/GE112Pro
l 1024/1024 ARP Entries per GE114Pro/GE112Pro

258 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Layer-3 Services

The system supports up to 128/1024 ARP Entries for Traffic Interface

Routes per GE112Pro/GE114Pro.

Note that the GE114Pro mentioned above on license scalability refers

to GE1114Pro/GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro
(CSH)/GE114Pro (HE), and the GE112Pro refers to
GE112Pro/GE112Pro (m)/GE112Pro (H).

The Layer-3 Services may be provisioned in the following order:

l Enable Software License for IP-Services-and-ACL-Filtering, also Extended-Scale-IP-

Services if required
l Create Layer-3 Flow Point
l Create ACL Rule for Layer-3 Flow Point
l Edit ACL Rule Priority
l Create Traffic IP Interface on Layer-3 Flow Point
l Add Static ARP Entry for next hop on Traffic IP Interface

For Static Routing, perform the following steps:

l Create VRF to include desired Traffic IP Interfaces for static routing

l Add Static Route to VRF
l Ping/Trace Route to verify the connection

For Dynamic Routing, perform the following steps:

l Create DHCP Relay Agent to include desired Traffic IP Interfaces for dynamic routing
learning

More information and specifications on Layer-3 Services can be found in Overview

chapter and FSP 150-GE11xPro System Description manual.

In current system, the layer-3 probes (See Provision a Layer-3 Probe) do not
support the test of the layer-3 services provisioned under the NE.
However, TWAMP can support the test of the layer-3 services provisioned
under the NE.

Refer to Layer-3 Services Configuration Options and Rules to determine the default
values, value ranges and rules for each option in the following procedure.

The following procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address
and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN (see Set Up the GE11xPro DCN (eth0) Port
Using the Serial Port ) and is logged on with at least a Provisioning level user permission
using the web-based GUI.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 259

Provision Layer-3 Services

Enable Software License for IP-Services-and-ACL-Filtering and

Extended-Scale-IP-Services

1. Select the Maintenance Application on the tool bar or select Maintenance from the
Application menu. Expand the System, Administration and Software Licensing
entities in the selection tree pane, by clicking the “+” sign next to each entity.

2. Enter a right click on Feature Management and select Edit Feature.

An Edit Feature Management screen displays

Figure 144: Edit Feature Management

3. Select Enable state for IP-Services-and-ACL-Filtering and Extended-Scale-IP-

Services and select OK.

The Feature Management Status is displayed and indicates they are in

Enabled state

Provision Layer-3 Flow Point

4. To create an L3 Flow Point, select the Configuration Application on the tool bar or
select Configuration from the Application menu. Expand System, NE-1 and NTE
entities in the selection tree by clicking on the “+” sign next to each entity to expand
each view.

5. Expand the desired Network Port facility, Access Port facility or LAG in the selection
tree by clicking the “+” sign next to it.

6. Enter a right click on L3 Flow Point and select Create L3 Flow Point.

A Create L3 Flow Point window displays

260 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Layer-3 Services

Figure 145: Create L3 Flow Point

7. Enter the following L3 Flow Point options (See Create/Edit L3 Flow Point for options
and rules):

Identification

a) L3FP ID -- automatically indexed

b) Enter a desired Alias
Configuration

c) Set Multi COS to Enabled or Disabled

d) Select the desired COS if Multi COS is Disabled
e) Enable/Disable Fragmented Packets
f) Enable/Disable Policing
VLAN Configuration

g) Deselect the Untagged Membership check box if Outer Tag Membership

and/or Inner Tag Membership VLAN IDs need to be entered. Select the
desired Outer/Inner Tag Membership check box to allow VLAN ID entry,
then enter the desired VLAN ID.
Traffic Management Setting

h) Edit CIR, EIR, CBS, EBS, CM and CF for Policer. Edit CIR, EIR, BS,
and MIN Threshold %, MAX Threshold %, Maximum Drop Probability %
for WRED In-Profile and WRED Out of Profile traffic for Shaper. If Multi
COS is Enabled, edit the above entries for each desired COS and
select/deselect the check box for Hierarchical COS Settings. If
Hierarchical COS Settings are selected, enter the Guaranteed Bandwidth
and Maximum Bandwidth.
Click on OK.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 261

Provision Layer-3 Services

Only when the Service Type of an Access Port/LAG member ports is

EVPL can user create L3 Flow Point on the port/LAG.
User is not allowed to create L3 Flow Point on the Network Ports
which are the members of a Protection Group.

8. To edit an L3 Flow Point, select the L3 Flow Point entity in the selection tree to display
the list of configured L3 Flow Points in the facility configuration pane. Enter a right
click on the desired L3 Flow Point and select Edit L3 Flow Point.

An Edit L3 FLOW POINT window appears

Figure 146: Edit L3 Flow Point

9. Edit the following settings if desired:

Identification

a) Enter a desired Alias

Configuration

b) Enable/Disable Fragmented Packets

c) Enable/Disable Policing
Traffic Management Setting

d) Edit CIR, EIR, CBS, EBS, CM and CF for Policer. Edit CIR, EIR, BS,
and MIN Threshold %, MAX Threshold %, Maximum Drop Probability %
for WRED In-Profile and WRED Out of Profile for Shaper. If Multi COS is
Enabled, edit the above entries for each desired COS and select/deselect
the check box for HierarchicalCOS Settings. If Hierarchical COS Settings
are selected, enter the Guaranteed Bandwidth and Maximum Bandwidth
Click on OK.

262 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Layer-3 Services

10. To view an L3 Flow Point, select the L3 Flow Point entity in selection tree to display
the list of configured L3 Flow Points. Enter a right click on the desired L3 Flow Point
and select View Configuration, or double click on the desired L3 Flow Point directly.

An L3 FLOW POINT Configuration window displays

Figure 147: View L3 Flow Point

11. To close the L3 Flow Point Configuration view, click the “x” on the facility tab.

12. To delete an L3 Flow Point, select the L3 Flow Point entity in selection tree to display
the list of configured L3 Flow Points. Enter a right click on the desired L3 Flow Point
and select Delete L3 Flow Point.

Click on OK.

The Administrative State of the L3 Flow Point must be set to

Management prior to deletion.

Provision ACL Rules for L3 Flow Point

13. To create an ACL rule for an L3 Flow Point, select the L3 Flow Point entity in selection
tree to display the list of configured L3 Flow Points. Enter a right click on the desired
L3 Flow Point and select Create ACL Rule.

A Create ACL Rule L3 FLOW POINT window displays

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 263

Provision Layer-3 Services

Figure 148: Create ACL Rule for L3 Flow Point

14. Enter or select the following data to configure the ACL Rule (see Create/Edit ACL
Rule for options and rules):

Identification

a) Index - Edit the Index number. By default, it is automatically indexed.

b) Enter a desire Alias.
Rule Configuration

c) Select the desired Action type and COS override.

COS Override takes effect only on “Multi COS” enabled L3 Flow Point.
See 7 for more details on L3 Flow Point configurations.

d) Enter the desired Rule Priority.

MAC Address

e) Select relevant check boxes for Src Addr and/or Dest Addr, and if
selected, enter the corresponding Address and Mask.

264 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Layer-3 Services

If Rule Action is set to Accept, the system will forbid the user to edit
the Destination Address.

EtherType

f) Select the check box for EtherType Control and if selected enter the
EtherType.
Outer VLAN Tag

g) Select the relevant check boxes for VLAN ID and/or PCP, and if selected,
enter the corresponding Low Limit and High Limit.
h) Select the check box for DEI and enter the DEI value.
Inner VLAN Tag

i) Select the relevant check boxes for VLAN ID and/or PCP, and if selected,
enter the corresponding Low Limit and High Limit.
IP

j) Select the Src Addr check box, and if selected, select the Dynamic check
box as desired or directly enter IP addresses for Low Limit and High Limit.
k) Similarly, select the relevant check boxes for Dest Addr and Priority, and
if selected, enter Low Limit and High Limit.
Protocol

l) Select the check box for Control and the Protocol Number will change to
align with the selected Protocol type. If CUSTOM is selected, enter a
custom number.

The selected Protocol cannot be enabled if EtherType Control check

box is not selected and EtherType value is not equal to 0x800.

m) Select the relevant check boxes for Src Port and/or Dst Port, and if
selected, enter Low Limit and High Limit.

Src Port and Dst Port cannot be enabled if Protocol Control is not
enabled.

n) Select the check box for TCP Flags Control, and if selected, enter TCP
Flags.
Click on OK.

15. To view an ACL Rule, select the L3 Flow Point entity in selection tree to display the
list of configured L3 Flow Points. Enter a right click on the desired L3 Flow Point and
select View ACL Rules.

A list of configured ACL Rules displays by the Configuration tab

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 265

Provision Layer-3 Services

Figure 149: L3 ACL Rule List

16. To view the Configuration of a specific ACL Rule, enter a right click on the desired L3
ACL Rule in the list and select View Configuration.

An ACL Rule Configuration window displays

Figure 150: View L3 ACL Rule Configuration

17. To close the ACL Rule configuration view, click the “x” on the facility tab.

266 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Layer-3 Services

18. To edit an ACL Rule configuration, enter a right click on the desired L3 ACL Rule in the
list and select Edit Configuration.

An Edit L3 ACL Rule window displays

Figure 151: Edit L3 ACL Rule Configuration

19. Edit the following settings if desired:

Identification

a) Index - Edit the Index number. By default, it is automatically indexed.

b) Enter a desire Alias.
Rule Configuration

c) Select the desired Action type and COS override.

d) Enter the desired Rule Priority.
MAC Address

e) Select relevant check boxes for Src Addr and/or Dest Addr, and if
selected, enter the corresponding Address and Mask.

If Rule Action is set to Accept, the system will forbid the user to edit
the Destination Address and will only allow the MAC Address of the
traffic port associated with the L3 Flow Point.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 267

Provision Layer-3 Services

EtherType

f) Select the check box for EtherType Control and if selected enter the
EtherType.
Outer VLAN Tag

g) Select the relevant check boxes for VLAN ID and/or PCP, and if selected,
enter the corresponding Low Limit and High Limit.
h) Select the check box for DEI and enter the DEI value.
Inner VLAN Tag

i) Select the relevant check boxes for VLAN ID and/or PCP, and if selected,
enter the corresponding Low Limit and High Limit.
IP

j) Select the Src Addr check box, and if selected, select the Dynamic check
box as desired or directly enter IP addresses for Low Limit and High Limit.
k) Similarly, select the relevant check boxes for Dest Addr and Priority, and
if selected, enter Low Limit and High Limit.
Protocol

l) Select the check box for Control and the Protocol Number will change to
align with the selected Protocol type. If CUSTOM is selected, enter a
custom number.

The selected Protocol cannot be enabled if EtherType Control check

box is not selected and EtherType value is not equal to 0x800.

m) Select the relevant check boxes for Src Port and/or Dst Port, and if
selected, enter Low Limit and High Limit.
n) Select the check box for TCP Flags Control, and if selected, enter TCP
Flags.
Click on OK.

20. To edit the priority of an ACL Rule, enter a right click on the desired L3 ACL Rule in the
list and select Edit Rule Priority.

An Edit L3 ACL Rule Priority window displays

268 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Layer-3 Services

Figure 152: Edit ACL Rule Priority

21. Edit the Rule Priority. The priority is 0 by default. (see Edit ACL Rule Priority for
options and rules)

Click on OK

22. The updated Rule Priority will be displayed in the ACL Rule List (see the figure below).

Figure 153: Rule Priority Updated in L3 ACL Rule List

23. To delete an ACL Rule, enter a right click on the desired ACL Rule and select Delete.

A Delete L3 ACL Rule window displays

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 269

Provision Layer-3 Services

Figure 154: Delete L3 ACL Rule Configuration

24. Click on OK.

25. To add a new L3 ACL Rule, enter a right click on the L3 ACL Rule list and select Insert
ACL Rule.

An Edit L3 ACL Rule window displays

Figure 155: Insert a New L3 ACL Rule

26. Repeat 14 to add more L3 ACL Rule as desired.

270 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Layer-3 Services

Provision Traffic IP Interface

27. To create a Traffic IP Interface, select the Configuration Application on the tool bar or
select Configuration from the Application menu. Expand System, NE-1 and NTE
entities in the selection tree by clicking on the “+” sign next to each entity to expand
each view.

28. Expand the desired Network Port facility or Access Port facility in the selection tree by
clicking the “+” sign next to it.

29. Select the L3 Flow Point entity in selection tree to display the list of configured L3
Flow Points. Enter a right click on the desired L3 Flow Point and select Create IP
Interface.

A Create IP Interface window displays

Figure 156: Create Traffic IP Interface on L3 Flow Point

30. Enter the following data to configure the Traffic IP Interface (see Create/Edit Traffic IP
Interface for options and rules):

Identification

a) Edit the Entity ID as desired. The Entity ID is automatically indexed.

b) Enter a desired Interface Name.
IP Interface Configuration

c) Enable/Disable Proxy ARP.

d) Select the desired IP Address Source Type.
e) Enter the desired IP Address and Subnet Mask for this IP Interface if IP
Address Source Type is DHCP.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 271

Provision Layer-3 Services

The IP Address of any Client Side Traffic IP Interface cannot be in the

address pool of the DHCP server.

DHCP Configuration

f) Select the desired Role - only DHCP Client is supported.

g) Select the desired Client ID Control setting - Enabled/Disabled. If
Enabled, select the desired Client ID Type and if User Defined is
selected, then enter the desired Client ID.
h) Select the desired Class ID Control setting - Enabled/Disabled.
i) Select the desired Host Name Control setting. If Enabled is selected,
select the desired Host Name Type and if User Defined is selected, then
enter a desired Host Name.
DHCP Relay Parameters Configuration

j) Select the desired Vendor Opt 60 Control - Enabled/Disabled. If Enabled,

enter the desired Vendor Opt 60.
k) Select the desired Interface Side - whether this interface is connected
with DHCP Relay Client or DHCP Relay Server.
l) Select the desired Opt82 Sub1 Control - Enabled/Disabled and if Enabled
enter the desired Opt82 Sub1.
m) Select the desired Opt82 Sub2 Control - Enabled/Disabled and if Enabled
enter the desired Opt82 Sub2.
Click on OK.

31. To edit a Traffic IP Interface, select the Traffic IP Interface entity in selection tree to
display the list of configured Traffic IP Interface in the configuration pane. Enter a right
click on the desired Traffic IP Interface and select Edit IP Interface.

An Edit Traffic IP Interface window displays

272 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Layer-3 Services

Figure 157: Edit Traffic IP Interface Configuration

32. Edit the following settings if desired:

Identification

a) Edit the Entity ID as desired. The Entity ID is automatically indexed.

b) Enter a desired Interface Name.
IP Interface Configuration

c) Enable/Disable Proxy ARP.

d) Select the desired IP Address Source Type.
e) Enter the desired IP Address and Subnet Mask for this IP Interface if IP
Address Source Type is DHCP.
DHCP Configuration

f) Select the desired Role - only DHCP Client is supported.

g) Select the desired Client ID Control setting - Enabled/Disabled. If
Enabled, select the desired Client ID Type and if User Defined is
selected, then enter the desired Client ID.
h) Select the desired Class ID Control setting - Enabled/Disabled.
i) Select the desired Host Name Control setting. If Enabled is selected,
select the desired Host Name Type and if User Defined is selected, then
enter a desired Host Name.
DHCP Relay Parameters Configuration

j) Select the desired Vendor Opt 60 Control - Enabled/Disabled. If Enabled,

enter the desired Vendor Opt 60.
k) Select the desired Interface Side - whether this interface is connected
with DHCP Relay Client or DHCP Relay Server.
l) Select the desired Opt82 Sub1 Control - Enabled/Disabled and if Enabled
enter the desired Opt82 Sub1.
m) Select the desired Opt82 Sub2 Control - Enabled/Disabled and if Enabled
enter the desired Opt82 Sub2.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 273

Provision Layer-3 Services

Click on OK.

33. To view a Traffic IP Interface, expand L3 Flow Point entity by clicking the “+” sign and
select the Traffic IP Interface entity in the selection tree to display the list of
configured Traffic IP Interface.

34. Enter a right click on the desired Traffic IP Interface and select View Configuration, or
double click on the desired Traffic IP Interface directly.

A Traffic IP Interface configuration window displays

Figure 158: View Traffic IP Interface Configuration

35. To close the Traffic IP Interface view, click the “x” sign on the facility tab.

36. To delete a Traffic IP Interface, select the Traffic IP Interface entity in selection tree to
display the list of configured Traffic IP Interface in the configuration pane. Enter a right
click on the desired Traffic IP Interface and select Delete IP Interface.

A Delete Traffic IP Interface window displays

Figure 159: Delete Traffic IP Interface Configuration

37. Click on OK.

274 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Layer-3 Services

Provision Static ARP Entry for Traffic IP Interface

38. To add a Static ARP Entry to a Traffic IP Interface, select the Traffic IP Interface
entity in selection tree to display the list of configured Traffic IP Interface in the
configuration pane. Enter a right click on the desired Traffic IP Interface and select
Add Static ARP Entry.

An Add Static ARP Entry window displays

Figure 160: Add Static ARP Entry to Traffic IP Interface

39. Enter the following data to configure the Static ARP entry:

a) Enter a desired IP Address for the Static ARP entry.

b) Enter the corresponding MAC Address.
Click on OK.

When the system level alarm “Traffic ARP Table Full” is raised against
the Interface Route, user should not create more Interface Route
related static ARP entries, otherwise layer-3 traffic will be affect.

The system supports up to 128/1024 ARP Entries for Traffic Interface

Routes per GE112Pro/GE114Pro.

40. To view a Static ARP Entry, select the Traffic IP Interface entity in selection tree to
display the list of configured Traffic IP Interface in the configuration pane. Enter a right
click on the desired Traffic IP Interface and select View ARP Entry.

An ARP Entry Table window displays

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 275

Provision Layer-3 Services

Figure 161: View ARP Entry Table

41. To close the ARP Entry Table view, click the “x” on the facility tab.

42. To delete a Static ARP Entry, select the Traffic IP Interface entity in selection tree to
display the list of configured Traffic IP Interface in the configuration pane. Enter a right
click on the desired Traffic IP Interface and select Delete Static ARP Entry.

A Delete Static ARP Entry window displays

Figure 162: Delete Static ARP Entry

43. Select the radio button for the desired ARP Entry to delete, then the button displayed
is changed, select OK. (see the following figure)

Figure 163: Select Static ARP Entry to Delete

276 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Layer-3 Services

Provision VRF

44. To create a VRF, select the Configuration Application on the tool bar or select
Configuration from the Application menu. Expand System and NE-1 entities in the
selection tree by clicking on the “+” sign next to each entity to expand each view.

45. Enter a right click on VRF and select Create VRF.

A Create VRF window displays

Figure 164: Create VRF

46. Enter or select the following options to configure a VRF (see Create/Edit VRF for
options and rules):

Identification

a) Enter the desired VRF Index which is automatically index.

b) Enter a desired Alias.
State

c) Select the desired Administrative state.

Configuration

d) Select the desired DHCP Route Control setting - Enabled or Disabled.

When DHCP Route Control is Enabled, the dynamic routes learned by

a Traffic IP Interface based on DHCP Relay Agent can also be used
by the VRF if the Traffic IP Interface is also included in the VRF.

Traffic IP Interfaces

e) Select the check boxes for the desired Traffic IP Interfaces to include in
the VRF.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 277

Provision Layer-3 Services

A Traffic IP Interface cannot be shared by different VRFs. Each

Traffic IP Interface should only be used by one VRF.

The system does not allow removing a Traffic IP Interface from a VRF
if the VRF contains one or more Static Routes associated with this
Traffic IP Interface.

47. To Edit a VRF, expand System and NE-1 entities in the selection tree by clicking on
the “+” sign next to each entity to expand each view. Select VRF entity in the selection
tree to display the list of configured VRFs in the configuration pane.

48. Enter a right click on the desired VRF and select Edit VRF.

An Edit L3 VRF window displays

Figure 165: Edit VRF

49. Edit the following options as desired:

Identification

a) Enter the desired VRF Index which is automatically index.

b) Enter a desired Alias.
State

c) Select the desired Administrative state.

Traffic IP Interfaces

d) Select/Deselect the check boxes for the desired Traffic IP Interfaces to

include/exclude in the VRF.

278 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Layer-3 Services

The system does not allow Traffic IP Interface removal from the
Traffic IP Interface List if there is one or more static routes associated
with this Traffic IP Interface.

Click on OK.

50. To delete a VRF, expand System and NE-1 entities in the selection tree by clicking on
the “+” sign next to each entity to expand each view. Select VRF entity in the selection
tree to display the list of configured VRFs in the configuration pane.

51. Enter right click on the desired VRF and select Delete VRF.

A Delete L3 VRF window displays

Figure 166: Delete VRF

52. Click on OK.

The system will forbid the VRF deletion if the VRF to delete is in In-
Service state.

Once a VRF is deleted, all the routes of this VRF will also be deleted
automatically by the system.

53. To view a VRF, expand System and NE-1 entities in the selection tree by clicking on
the “+” sign next to each entity to expand each view. Select VRF entity in the selection
tree to display the list of configured VRFs in the configuration pane.

54. Double click on the desired VRF directly.

A L3 VRF configuration view displays

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 279

Provision Layer-3 Services

Figure 167: View VRF Configurations

Provision Static Routes

55. To add a static route to the VRF, select the Configuration Application on the tool bar or
select Configuration from the Application menu. Expand System and NE-1 entities in
the selection tree by clicking on the “+” sign next to each entity to expand each view.

56. Select the VRF entity in the selection tree to display the list of configured VRFs in the
configuration pane.

57. Enter a right click on the desired VRF and select Add Static Route.

An Add Static Route window displays

Figure 168: Add Static Route to VRF

58. Enter the following options to configure a static route (see Create/Edit Static Route for
VRF for options and rules):

a) Enter the desired Dest IP Address and corresponding Subnet Mask

b) Enter the desired Gateway IP Address
c) Select the Interface Name of the desired Traffic IP Interface
d) Enter the desired Metric value

280 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Layer-3 Services

In case some destination may be reached by more than one route

(either static or dynamic), the route with better metric (lower metric
value) will be installed in the FPGA IP Forwarding table. In the case
with two routes having the same metric, static route will take the
precedence.

e) Enable/Disable Source Forwarding

Click on OK.

59. To edit a static route, select the VRF entity in the selection tree to display the list of
configured VRFs in the configuration pane.

60. Enter a right click on the desired VRF and select Edit Static Route.

An Edit Static Route window displays

Figure 169: Edit Static Route

61. Select the radio buttons ahead of the desired Static Route and edit the corresponding
Metric and Forward options as desired. Click on OK. (see the figure below)

Figure 170: Select the Static Route to Edit

62. To delete a static route, select the VRF entity in the selection tree to display the list of
configured VRFs in the configuration pane.

63. Enter a right click on the desired VRF and select Delete Static Route.

A Delete Static Route window displays

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 281

Provision Layer-3 Services

Figure 171: Delete Static Route

64. Select the radio button ahead of the desired Static Route and select OK.

The system will automatically delete all the routes of a VRF if the VRF
is deleted by the user.

The system does not allow removing a Traffic IP Interface from a VRF
if the VRF contains one or more Static Routes associated with this
Traffic IP Interface.

65. To view the available Traffic Routes in a VRF, select the VRF entity in the selection
tree to display the list of configured VRFs in the configuration pane.

66. Enter a right click on the desired VRF and select View Traffic Routes.

A Routing Table window displays

Figure 172: View Traffic Routes

67. To close the traffic routes view, click the “x” on the facility tab.

VRF Ping/Trace Route

68. To ping a destination IP address using the VRF, select the Configuration Application
on the tool bar or select Configuration from the Application menu. Expand System and
NE-1 entities in the selection tree by clicking on the “+” sign next to each entity to
expand each view.

282 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Layer-3 Services

69. Select the VRF entity in the selection tree to display the list of configured VRFs in the
configuration pane.

70. Enter a right click on the desired VRF and select Ping.

A VRF Ping window displays

Figure 173: L3 VRF Ping Configuration

71. Enter the IPv4 Address as the destination to Ping.

Click on OK.

The Ping process will take a short while

72. To view the Ping status and statistics, enter a right click on the desired VRF that is
performing Ping and select View Last Ping.

A Last Ping window displays

Figure 174: VRF - View Last Ping (In Progress)

73. Click the Last Ping facility tab to update the Last Ping status until the windows shows
the Ping result. (see the figure below)

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 283

Provision Layer-3 Services

Figure 175: VRF - View Last Ping (Completed)

74. To close the Last Ping view, click the “x” on the facility tab.

75. To trace route a destination IP address using the VRF, select the Configuration
Application on the tool bar or select Configuration from the Application menu. Expand
System and NE-1 entities in the selection tree by clicking on the “+” sign next to each
entity to expand each view.

76. Select the VRF entity in the selection tree to display the list of configured VRFs in the
configuration pane.

77. Enter a right click on the desired VRF and select Trace Route.

A VRF Trace Route window displays

Figure 176: L3 VRF Trace Route Configuration

78. Enter the desired IPv4 Address ad the destination to execute Trace Route.

Click on OK.

The Trace Route process will take a short while

284 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Layer-3 Services

79. To view the Trace Route status and statistics, enter a right click on the desired VRF
that is performing Trace Route and select View Last Trace Route.

A Last Trace Route window displays

Figure 177: VRF - View Last Trace Route (In Progress)

80. Click the Last Trace Route facility tab to update the Last Trace Route status until the
windows shows the Trace Route result. (see the figure below)

Figure 178: VRF - View Last Trace Route (Completed)

81. To close the Last Ping view, click the “x” on the facility tab.

Provision DHCP Relay Agent

82. To create a DHCP Relay Agent, select the Configuration Application on the tool bar or
select Configuration from the Application menu. Expand System and NE-1 entities in
the selection tree by clicking on the “+” sign next to each entity to expand each view.

83. Enter a right click on the DHCP Relay Agent entity in the selection tree and select
Create DHCP Relay Agent.

A Create DHCP Relay Agent window displays

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 285

Provision Layer-3 Services

Figure 179: Create DHCP Relay Agent

84. Enter or select the following options to configure a DHCP Relay Agent (see
Create/Edit DHCP Relay Agent for options and rules):

Identification

a) Enter a desired DHCP Relay Agent. By default, the index is automatically

indexed.
b) Enter a desired Alias.
State

c) Select the desired Administrative state.

Traffic IP Interfaces

d) Select the check boxes for the desired Traffic IP Interfaces to include in
the DHCP Relay Agent.

Traffic IP Interfaces cannot be shared by different DHCP Relay

Agents. The Traffic IP Interfaces that have been selected in the Traffic
IP Interface List of another DHCP Relay Agent will not show up again
for selection.

Only a single Traffic IP Interface of DHCP Relay Server Interface

Side is allowed per DHCP Relay Agent.

DHCP Server IP Configuration

e) Enter the desired IPv4 Address for the DHCP Server.

Click on OK.

85. To edit a DHCP Relay Agent, select the DHCP Relay Agent entity in the selection
tree to display the list of configured DHCP Relay Agents in the configuration pane.

286 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Layer-3 Services

86. Enter a right click on the desired DHCP Relay Agent and select Edit DHCP Relay
Agent.

An Edit DHCP Relay Agent window displays

Figure 180: Edit DHCP Relay Agent

87. Edit the following options as desired:

Identification

a) Enter a desired DHCP Relay Agent. By default, the index is automatically

indexed.
b) Enter a desired Alias.
State

c) Select the desired Administrative state.

Traffic IP Interfaces

d) Select/Deselect the check boxes to change the desired Traffic IP

Interfaces to include in the DHCP Relay Agent.

If a Traffic IP Interface at DHCP Relay Client side is removed from

the Traffic IP Interface List, all the dynamic routes learned by the
DHCP Relay Agent from the Traffic IP Interface will be removed
automatically by the system.

Click on OK.

88. To delete a DHCP Relay Agent, select the DHCP Relay Agent entity in the selection
tree to display the list of configured DHCP Relay Agents in the configuration pane.

89. Enter a right click on the desired DHCP Relay Agent and select Delete DHCP Relay
Agent.

A Delete DHCP Relay Agent window displays

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 287

Provision Layer-3 Services

Figure 181: Delete DHCP Relay Agent

90. Click on OK.

Once a DHCP Relay Agent is deleted, all the dynamic routes learned
by the DHCP Relay Agent will be deleted automatically by the
system.

288 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Bidirectional Fault Detection (BFD)

Provision Bidirectional Fault Detection (BFD)

The Bidirectional Fault Detection (BFD) protocol is supported on all GE11xPro products
for fault detection between two forwarding engines connected by a link. It provides low-
overhead detection of faults even on physical media that don’t support failure detection of
any kind. BFD establishes a session between two endpoints over a particular link. If
more than one link exists between two systems, multiple BFD sessions may be
established to monitor each one of them. The session is established with a three-way
handshake and is torn down the same way. Currently, only the asynchronous operation
mode is supported, with both ends periodically sending Hello packets to each other after
the session is established.

In GE11xPro, BFD functions on the Traffic IP Interfaces of Network Ports. When BFD in
N1 Port detects the link failure and BFD in N2 Port detects a successful link, layer-3
traffic going through layer-3 routing table will be forwarded to the IP Interface on N2 Port
via default route; vice versa. Thus, BFD is a trigger to layer-3 routing table update and
protects layer-3 services in the meanwhile.

When BFD protection for layer-3 services is needed, user can create the association
between BFD session and Traffic IP Interface. For more information, see the procedure
below.

BFD may be provisioned in the following order:

l Provision necessary layer-3 services (L3 Flow Point, ACL, Traffic IP Interface, VRF,
Static Routes, etc), making sure all layer-3 routes between two ends are reachable
and resolvable (See Provision Layer-3 Services for more information on the procedure
and see FSP 150-GE11xPro Quick Start Guide for specific use case)
l Create/Edit BFD Session Entity

More information and specifications on BFD and the current implementation can be found
in FSP 150-GE11xPro System Description.

More information on BFD use case details can be found in FSP 150-GE11xPro Quick
Start Guide.

The following procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP Address
and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN (see Set Up the GE11xPro DCN (eth0) Port
Using the Serial Port ) and is logged on with at least a Provisioning level user permission
using the web-based GUI.

The following procedure also assumes that layer-3 services ((See Provision Layer-3
Services) have been configured at both ends and two link connections exist between the
two ends via network ports.

Refer to BFD Configuration Options and Rules to determine the default values, value
ranges and rules for each option in the following procedure.

Create BFD Session

1. Select the Configuration Application on the tool bar or select Configuration from the
Application Menu. Expand System and NE-1 entities in the selection tree by clicking
the “+” sign next to each entity.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 289

Provision Bidirectional Fault Detection (BFD)

2. Enter a right click on BFD and select Create BFD.

A Create BFD window appears

Figure 182: Create BFD (Network Port Traffic IP Interfaces prepared)

3. Enter or select the following data to configure the BFD Session:

Identification

a) BFD ID - automatically indexed

b) Alias - enter a string up to 64 characters, optional
State

c) Administrative - select the desired state

Configuration

d) Session Type - select Singhop or Multihop

e) Associated Port - select a desired Network Port
f) Source IP Address - enter the source IP address of BFD session
g) Destination IP Address - enter the destination IP address of BFD session
h) Gateway IP Address - enter the gateway IP address if Session Type is
Multihop
i) Session Control - select a desired control option
j) Specify the session IP Priority and Detection Time Multiplier
k) Select desired Desired Min Tx Interval and Required Min Rx Interval
l) Specify Outer Vlan and Inner Vlan as desired
m) Select the checkbox(es) by the desired Traffic IP Interfaces to associate
with the BFD session
Click on OK.

4. To view a BFD Session, select BFD entity in the selection tree under Configuration
View to display the list of configured BFD entities in the details pane.

290 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Bidirectional Fault Detection (BFD)

Figure 183: BFD List and Operation Menu (right-click menu)

5. Double click on the desired BFD Session entity.

A BFD Session view configuration window appears

Figure 184: BFD - View Configuration

6. To close the BFD Session view, click the “x” on the facility tab.

7. To edit a BFD Session, select BFD entity in the selection tree under Configuration
View to display the list of configured BFD entities in the details pane.

8. Enter a right click on the desired BFD Session entity and select Edit BFD.

An Edit BFD Session window appears

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 291

Provision Bidirectional Fault Detection (BFD)

Figure 185: BFD - Edit Configuration

9. Edit the following data to configure the BFD Session:

Identification

a) Alias - enter a string up to 64 characters, optional

State

b) Administrative - select the desired state

Configuration

c) Session Type - select Singhop or Multihop

d) Destination IP Address - enter the destination IP address of BFD session
e) Gateway IP Address - enter the gateway IP address if Session Type is
Multihop
f) Session Control - select a desired control option
g) Specify the session IP Priority and Detection Time Multiplier
h) Select desired Desired Min Tx Interval and Required Min Rx Interval
i) Specify Outer Vlan and Inner Vlan as desired
j) Select the checkbox(es) by the desired Traffic IP Interfaces to associate
with the BFD session
Click on OK.

10. To delete a BFD Session, select BFD entity in the selection tree under Configuration
View to display the list of configured BFD entities in the details pane.

11. Enter a right click on the desired BFD Session entity and select Delete BFD.

A Delete BFD Session window appears

292 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Bidirectional Fault Detection (BFD)

Figure 186: BFD - Delete

12. Change the Administrative state to non-IS state and click on OK.

View BFD Session Status

To view BFD Session Status, enable BFD Session by switching the

Session Control from “Admin Down” to “None” and BFD Session
negotiation will turn “Up”.
A “BFD Session Down” alarm will be raised before Session is
successfully negotiated or when the Session Control is in “Admin
Down” state or if the negotiation fails.

13. To view BFD Session Status, select BFD entity in the selection tree under
Configuration View to display the list of configured BFD entities in the details pane.

14. Enter a right click on the desired BFD Session entity and select View Status.

A View BFD Session Status window appears

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 293

Provision Bidirectional Fault Detection (BFD)

Figure 187: BFD Session Status - Up

15. Observe the layer-3 routes status.

Figure 188: BFD Session Up - Route Status

16. To verify if BFD protects layer-3 links when detecting link fault, manually set BFD
Session Control to “Admin Down”, then observe the corresponding BFD Session
Status and the layer-3 route status again.

When link down is detected, the associated BFD Session will be

Down and it will trigger fast layer-3 route switches. See below figures.

294 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Bidirectional Fault Detection (BFD)

Figure 189: BFD Session Status - Down

Figure 190: BFD Session Down - Route Status

17. To clear BFD Session performance statistics, select BFD entity in the selection tree
under Configuration View to display the list of configured BFD entities in the details
pane.

18. Enter a right click on the desired BFD Session entity and select Clear Stats.

A Clear BFD Session Stats window appears

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 295

Provision Bidirectional Fault Detection (BFD)

Figure 191: BFD Session - Clear Stats

Click on OK.

296 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision VXLAN

Provision VXLAN
Provisioning of VXLAN is a multi-step process, which involves doing the following.

l Enable VXLAN Software License

l Configure VXLAN Tunnel End Point.
l Configure VTEP IP Interface
l Configure VXLAN Segment
l Configure VTEP IPv4 Route

This section provides step-by-step procedures to configure VXLAN service.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 297

Provision VXLAN

Enable VXLAN Software License

The VXLAN Feature is disabled by factory defaults. The user must enable it to use
VXLAN function.

1. Select the Maintenance Application on the tool bar or select Maintenance from the
Application Menu. Expand System, Administration and Software Licensing entities in
the selection tree pane, by clicking the “+” signs next to each entity to expand each
view.

2. Right click Feature Management and select Edit Feature in the Shortcut Menu.

An Edit Feature Management screen displays

Figure 1:  Enable VXLAN Feature

3. Select Enabled from the Status drop-down list corresponding to VXLAN

A License Warning window appears

4. Select OK to close the warning window.

5. Select OK to confirm enabling the feature.

The Feature Management Status is displayed and indicates it is in

the Enabled state

298 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision VXLAN

Configure VTEP
VXLAN Tunnel End Point (VTEP) has to be created at first. See options and rules ).

1. Select the Configuration Application on the tool bar or select Configuration from the
Application Menu. Expand System, NE-1 and VXLAN in the selection tree pane, by
clicking on the “+” signs next to it to expand the view.

2. Right-click VTEP and select Create VTEP.

A Create OF Capable Switch screen displays

Figure 1:  Create VTEP

3. Enter appropriate configuration for the VTEP,

a) Identification
Accept the VTEP ID, whic is 1 (Only one VTEP can be created).
Enter a desirable Alias for the VTEP.
b) AdminState
Select a proper AdminState (IS or Management)
c) Configuration
Select or unselect Outer VLAN. If selected, enter appropriate EtherType
and VLAN.
Select or unselect Inner VLAN. If selected, enter appropriate EtherType
and VLAN.
Enter DSCP
Enter Destination UDP Port.
4. Click OK.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 299

Configure VTEP IP Interface

Configure VTEP IP Interface

1. Select the Configuration Application on the tool bar or select Configuration from the
Application Menu. Expand System, NE-1, VXLAN and VTEP in the selection tree
pane, by clicking on the “+” signs next to it to expand the view.

The existing VTEP is listed

2. In the Detail Panel, Right-click the VTEP instance and select Create VTEP IP
Interface.

A Create VTEP IP Interface screen displays

Figure 1:  Create VTEP IP Interface

3. Enter appropriate configuration for the VTEP IP Interface,

a) Identification
Enter VTEP IP IF ID, which can be 1 or 2.
Enter a desirable Name for the VTEP IP Interface.
b) AdminState
Select a proper AdminState (IS or Management)
c) Configuration
Select Unnumbered Control status (The first VTEP IP Interface must be
Numbered and the second one must be unnumbered).
For Numbered VTEP IP Interface, the Borrowed Interface filed is grayed
out; for Unnumbered VTEP IP Interface, the Borrowed Interface filed is
populated by the Interface name of the Numbered VTEP IP Interface.
Select to enable or disable DHCP control, if enabled, also enter IPv4
Address and IPv4 Mask

300 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Configure VTEP IP Interface

Select a Network Port from the drop-down list for the VTEP IP Interface to
associate with (A Network Port can only associated with one VTEP IP
Interface).

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 301

Configure VTEP IP Interface

Configure VXLAN Segment

When VTEP IP Interface is ready, VXLAN Segment can be created.

1. Select the Configuration Application on the tool bar or select Configuration from the
Application Menu. Expand System, NE-1, VXLAN and VTEP in the selection tree
pane, by clicking on the “+” signs next to it to expand the view.

The existing VTEP is listed

2. In the Detail Panel, Right-click the VTEP instance and select Create VXLAN
Segment.

A Create VXLAN Segment screen displays

Figure 1:  Create VXLAN Segment

3. Enter appropriate configuration for the VXLAN Segment,

a) Identification
Enter VXLAN Segment ID.
Enter a desirable Alias for the VXLAN Segment.
b) AdminState
Select a proper AdminState (IS or Management)
c) Configuration
Enter VNI
Select to enable or disable Outer Tag Priority Control.
Select to enable or disable Inner Tag Priority Control.
Selet to enable or disable DSCP Control.
Enter Max DMAC2DIP Entry
Enter DMAC2DIP Table Aging Time
Select DMAC2DIP Table Full Action

302 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Configure VTEP IP Interface

Select to enable ro disable stripping CE VLAN

Enter a Multicast Group.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 303

Configure VTEP IP Interface

Configure VXLAN IPv4 Route

The user need to configure IP route(s) to remote VTEP(s). It is used to to resolve outer
DMAC of next hop.

1. Select the Configuration Application on the tool bar or select Configuration from the
Application Menu. Expand System, NE-1, VXLAN and VTEP in the selection tree
pane, by clicking on the “+” signs next to it to expand the view.

The existing VTEP is listed

2. In the Detail Panel, Right-click the VTEP instance and select Create VTEP IPv4
Route.

A Create VTEP IPv4 Route screen displays

Figure 1:  Create VTEP IPv4 Route

3. Enter appropriate configuration for the VXLAN Segment,

a) Gateway
b) Metric
c) Interface
d) BED, if the VXLAN is work with a B

304 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision IPFIX

Provision IPFIX
Provisioning of lP Flow Information Export (IPFIX) is a multi-step process, which
involves doing the following.

l Enable IPFIX Software License

l Configure IPFIX Exporter
l Configure IPFIX Template
l Configure IPFIX Metering Process
l Configure IPFIX Observation Domain
l Configure IPFIX Observation Point

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 305

Provision IPFIX

Enable IPFIX Software License

The IPFIX Feature is disabled by factory defaults. The user must enable it to use IPFIX
function.

1. Select the Maintenance Application on the tool bar or select Maintenance from the
Application Menu. Expand System, Administration and Software Licensing in the
selection tree pane, by clicking the “+” signs next to each entity to expand each view.

2. Right click Feature Management and select Edit Feature in the Shortcut Menu.

An Edit Feature Management screen displays

Figure 1:  Enable IPFIX Feature

3. Select Enabled from the Status drop-down list corresponding to IPFIX

A License Warning window appears

4. Select OK to close the warning window.

5. Select OK to confirm enabling the feature.

The Feature Management Status is displayed and indicates it is in

the Enabled state

306 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision IPFIX

Configure IPFIX Exporter

1. Select the IPFIX Application on the tool bar or select IPFIX from the Application Menu.
Expand System, NE-1, IPFIX in the selection tree pane, by clicking on the “+” signs
next to it to expand the view.

2. In the Selection Tree Pane, right-click Exporter under IPFIX and select Create IPFIX
Exporter

A Create IPFIX Exporter screen displays

Figure 1:  Create IPFIX Exporter

3. Enter appropriate configuration for the IPFIX Exporter,

a) Identification
Enter IPFIX Exporter ID, which must be 1 (There can be one Exporter at
most.)
Optionally, enter an Alias for the IPFIX Exporter.
b) Configuration
Select the IP Version to reach Collector 1 and enter the IP address of the
Collector 1.
Enter the UDP port, where Collector 1 listens for IPFIX exporting.
Select the IP Version to reach Collector 2 and enter the IP address of the
Collector 2.
Enter the UDP port, where Collector 2 listens for IPFIX exporting.
4. Click OK.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 307

Provision IPFIX

Configure IPFIX Template

1. Select the IPFIX Application on the tool bar or select IPFIX from the Application Menu.
Expand System, NE-1, IPFIX in the selection tree pane, by clicking on the “+” signs
next to it to expand the view.

2. In the Selection Tree Pane, right-click Template and select Create IPFIX Template

A Create IPFIX Template screen displays

Figure 1:  Create IPFIX Template

3. Enter appropriate configuration for the IPFIX Template,

a) Identification
Enter IPFIX Exporter ID (Up to 32 IPFIX Templates can be supported.)
Optionally, enter an Alias for the IPFIX Exporter.
b) Configuration
Enter a Template Number,
Configure how the Traffic is matched. GE11xPro allows matching
monitored traffic with VID, SIP, SIP Prefix, DIP, DIP Prefix, Protocol,
TOS, TOS Range, TCP Flag, SrcPort, SrcPort Range, DstPort or DstPort
Range.
Configure the data to be collected by IPFIX, the data type can be enabled
or disabled including, Flow Start System Time, Flow End System Time,
Octet Delta Count Control, Packet Delta Count Control, Min TTL, Max
TTL, Min IP Total Length, Max IP Total.
4. Click OK.

308 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision IPFIX

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 309

Provision IPFIX

Configure IPFIX Metering Process

1. Select the IPFIX Application on the tool bar or select IPFIX from the Application Menu.
Expand System, NE-1, IPFIX in the selection tree pane, by clicking on the “+” signs
next to it to expand the view.

2. In the Selection Tree Pane, right-click Meter Process under IPFIX and select Create
IPFIX Meter Process

A Create IPFIX Meter Process screen displays

Figure 1:  Create IPFIX Meter Process

3. Enter appropriate configuration for the IPFIX Metering Process,

a) Identification
Enter IPFIX Exporter ID (Up to 2 IPFIX Metering Processes can be
supported.)
Optionally, enter an Alias for the IPFIX Metering Process.
b) Configuration
Select an IPFIX Template to be used for the Metering Process.
Select an IPFIX Exporter to be used for the Metering Process.
Enter a desired Active Timeout.
Enter a desired Inactive Timeout.
c) Sampling Configuration
Select Algorithm
Enter Size
Enter Population
4. Click OK.

310 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision IPFIX

Configure IPFIX Observation Domain

1. Select the IPFIX Application on the tool bar or select IPFIX from the Application Menu.
Expand System, NE-1, IPFIX in the selection tree pane, by clicking on the “+” signs
next to it to expand the view.

2. In the Selection Tree Pane, right-click Domain under IPFIX and select Create IPFIX
Observation Domain

A Create IPFIX Observation Domain screen displays

Figure 1:  Create IPFIX Observation Domain

3. Enter appropriate configuration for the IPFIX Observation Domain,

a) Identification
Enter IPFIX Exporter ID (Up to 32 IPFIX Observation Domains can be
supported.)
Optionally, enter an Alias for the IPFIX Observation Domain.
b) Configuration
Enter an ID for the Observation Domain.
Select a Domain Type for the Observation Domain.
4. Click OK.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 311

Provision IPFIX

Configure IPFIX Observation Point

An IPFIX Observation Point can only created when there are existing IPFIX Observation
Domain.

1. Select the IPFIX Application on the tool bar or select IPFIX from the Application Menu.
Expand System, NE-1, IPFIX in the selection tree pane, by clicking on the “+” signs
next to it to expand the view.

2. In the Selection Tree Pane, click Domain under IPFIX.

All Existing IPFIX Observation Domains are listed

3. In the Detail Panel, right-click the desired Observation Domain and select Create
IPFIX Observation Point.

Figure 1:  Create IPFIX Observation Point

4. Enter appropriate configuration for the IPFIX Observation Point,

a) Identification
Enter IPFIX Observation Point ID (Up to 128 IPFIX Observation Points
can be created in each Domain.)
Optionally, enter an Alias for the IPFIX Observation Point.
b) Configuration
Enter Observation Point ID
Select and Traffic Interface to associate with the Observation Point
(Select a Flow in Flow-based domain, an Access Port or Network Port in
Port-based Domain).
(For flow-based Observation Domain only), select a direction in which the
traffic is monitored.
Select a Meter Process to use.
5. Click OK.

312 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision OpenFlow

Provision OpenFlow
Provisioning of OpenFlow is a multi-step process, which involves doing the following.

l Configure OpenFlow Controller on the network

l Configure Management Tunnels
l Enable the OpenFlow Feature
l Configure OpenFlow Capable Switch
l Configure Logical OpenFlow Switch
l Enable OpenFlow on Network Port and (or) Access Port as desired.
l Configure OpenFlow Queues
l Enter access information about the OpenFlow Controller on the GE11xPro device so it
can communicate with Controller.
l Configure Flows on the controller and deliver to the Switch
l Verify OpenFlow Configuration
l View OpenFlow Service Statistics
l View OpenFlow Queue Statistics

This section provides step-by-step procedures to configure OpenFlow service similar to

Application Scenario One. The configuration is as shown in Figure 192 on p. 314.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 313

Provision OpenFlow

Figure 192: OpenFlow Configuration

314 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision OpenFlow

Configure OpenFlow Controller

At least one SDN Controller (OpenFlow Controller) must be connected and working
appropriately on the network. It is recommended to set up two OpenFlow Controller for
backup.

When there are redundant OpenFlow Controllers, roles can be configured. If they are
configured as Master / Slave, only the Master Controller can be used to configure the
OpenFlow Switches. The Slave Controller is used for monitoring purposes. If both
Controllers are configured as Equal, the user can modify OpenFlow Switch from either
one.

By default, the Master or Equal role controller receives Packet In messages, Port-Status
change and Flow-Remove messages. The Slave role only receives Port - status change
messages by default.

In this Example, one OpenFlow Controller is configured. It is at IP address: [Link].

OpenFlow service is offered at TCP port 6633.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 315

Provision OpenFlow

Configure Management Tunnels

The GE11xPro can connect to the SDN Controller with Management DCN or
Management Tunnel, while using Management Tunnel is a more typical approach.

On EG-X, configure two Management Tunnels. Management Tunnel one to connect with
GE11xPro One and Management Tunnel two to connect with GE11xPro Two. This is to
enable the user (with the PC) and the SDN Controller to communicate to both GE11xPro
devices in a network as shown in Figure 192 on p. 314.

Management Tunnel One to connect with GE11xPro One:

VLAN Based, C Tag VLAN = 100

DHCP = disabled
RIP V2 Packets = enabled
IP Address = [Link]
Subnet Mask = [Link]

Management Tunnel Two to connect with GE11xPro Two:

VLAN Based, C Tag VLAN = 200

DHCP = disabled
RIP V2 Packets = enabled
IP Address = [Link]
Subnet Mask = [Link]
port = eth_port-1-1-21-5

On GE11xPro one, one Management is created on the Network port One:

VLAN Based, C Tag VLAN = 100

DHCP = disabled
RIP V2 Packets = enabled
IP Address = [Link]
Subnet Mask = [Link]
port = net_port-1

On GE11xPro Two, one Management is created on the Network port One:

VLAN Based, C Tag VLAN = 200

DHCP = disabled
RIP V2 Packets = enabled
IP Address = [Link]
Subnet Mask = [Link]
port = net_port-1

After Management Tunnel is successfully configured, verify that the GE11xPro devices
can be reached from the PC.

316 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision OpenFlow

Enable Software License for OpenFlow

The OpenFlow Feature is disabled with factory defaults. The user must enable it to use
OpenFlow function.

1. Select the Maintenance Application on the tool bar or select Maintenance from the
Application Menu. Expand System, Administration and Software Licensing entities in
the selection tree pane, by clicking the “+” signs next to each entity to expand each
view.

2. Right click Feature Management and select Edit Feature in the Shortcut Menu.

An Edit Feature Management screen displays

Figure 1:  Enable OpenFlow Feature

3. Select Enabled from the Status drop-down list associated with the OpenFlow feature.

A License Warning window appears

4. Select OK to close the warning window.

5. Select OK to confirm enabling the feature.

The Feature Management Status is displayed and indicates it is in the

Enabled state

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 317

Provision OpenFlow

Configure OpenFlow-Capable Switch

OpenFlow-Capable Switch must be created. See OpenFlow options and rules OpenFlow
Configuration Options and Rules).

1. Select the OpenFlow Application on the tool bar or select OpenFlow in the Application
Menu. Expand System entity in the selection tree pane, by clicking on the “+” signs
next to each Note to expand the view.

2. Right-click the NE-1 and select Create OF Capable Switch.

A Create OF Capable Switch screen displays

Figure 1:  Create OF Capable Switch

3. Select OK.

A OF Capable Switch is created and displayed in the selection tree pane.

318 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision OpenFlow

Configure OpenFlow Logical Switch

An OpenFlow Logical Switch can only be created when there is an existing OF-Capable
Switch. See OpenFlow options and rules OpenFlow Configuration Options and Rules).

1. Select the OpenFlow Application on the tool bar or select OpenFlow from the
Application Menu. Expand System, NE-1 entities in the selection tree pane, by
clicking on the “+” signs next to each node to expand the views.

2. Enter a right click on OF Capable Switch-1 and select Create OF Logical Switch.

A Create Logical Switch screen displays

Figure 1:  Create OF Logical Switch

3. Enter an Appropriate Data Path Description.

4. Select Connect Lost Behavior Mode.

5. Select OK.

The OF Logical Switch is displayed in the selection tree pane.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 319

Provision OpenFlow

Enable Ethernet Ports for OpenFlow

The user must enable OpenFlow on Network ports and (or) Access Ports, before
OpenFlow can be configured. OpenFlow is supported on physical ports but not on LAG or
Protection Group or a member of LAG Physical or Protection group.

OpenFlow can be enabled on Ethernet Port 2, either when it is a Network Port or Access
Port. However, OpenFlow must be disabled to switch this Port from a Network port to an
Access port or in the other way around.

1. Select the Configuration Application on the tool bar or select Configuration from the
Application Menu. Expand System, NE-1, NTE entities in the selection tree pane, by
clicking on the “+” signs next to each entity to expand each view.

2. Enter a right click on an proper Network or Access port and select Edit Configuration.

An Edit Configuration screen displays

Figure 1:  Enable OpenFlow on an Ethernet Port

3. (On an Access Port), make sure that the Port is in EVPL Mode.

4. (On an Access Port), make sure that A2N Push Port VID is disabled.

5. Set the Configured Speed to anything other than Auto.

6. Set OpenFlow to Enabled.

7. Select OK.

OpenFlow is enabled

320 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision OpenFlow

8. Select the OpenFlow Application on the tool bar or select OpenFlow from the
Application Menu. Expand System, NE-1, OF Capable Switch entities in the selection
tree pane, by clicking on the “+” signs next to each entity to expand each view.

OF Port-1 is listed in the Selection Tree

The OF Port doe not show in the Selection Tree Pane until the OpenFlow
Logical Switch is appropriately configured.

9. Click the OF Port-1 entity to verify the configuration.

The OF Port Number is 0x5.

Figure 193: OF Port Configuration

There are some attributes significant and have an impact on the OpenFlow
Queues.
l OF Port Number; a number derived from the Physical port number. In
GE11xPro, Network Port one always gets OF Port Number 0x1, Port two
(No matter it is an Network port or access port) always gets OF Port
Number 0x2. Access Port three gets OF Port Number 0x3. So on and So
forth. In Figure 193, This port is listed in the selection tree as OF port-1 in
the Selection tree while the OF Port Number is shown as 0x5. The
OpenFlow Controller uses OF Port Number to identify OF ports.
l Current Rate, the Bandwidth on the physical port which is currently
available for services. It is measured in kbps.
l Maximum Rate, the Maximum Rate the port can offer. It is derived from
the maximum rate the physical speed. It is also measured in kbps. In
GE11xPro, the Maximum rate is fixed to 1,000,000 kbps.

See Figure 193 on p. 321 for more details about the attributes mentioned
above

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 321

Provision OpenFlow

Configure OpenFlow Queue

The OpenFlow Queue play an important role in the Qos management. It determine the
buffer size and output rate for a service output.

When the user enables OpenFlow on an Ethernet port, a default OpenFlow Queue is
automatically created and attached to the Port. The default Queue can be shared by all
OpenFlow service on the port when it is the only Queue on the port. To achieve an
improved performance, it is recommended to create additional Queues when in an
environment with multiple services.

See OpenFlow options and rules OpenFlow Configuration Options and Rules).

A default Queue is different from other Queues in two ways:

l It is not reported to SDN Controller.
l It is shared by all OpenFlow entries for which the SDN Controller assign
no Queue.

1. Select the OpenFlow Application on the tool bar or select OpenFlow from the
Application Menu. Expand System, NE-1 entities in the selection tree pane, by
clicking on the “+” signs next to each node to expand the views.

2. Enter a right click on OF Capable Switch-1 and select Create OF Queue.

A Create Queue screen displays

Figure 1:  Create OF Queue

3. Enter Index for the Queue.

4. Enter the Minimum Rate and Maximum Rate (allocated in 1/1000 of Current Rate of
the OpenFlow Port).

322 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision OpenFlow

The overall allocated Minimum Rate of queues must not exceed the Current
Rate of the OF Port.
It is OK for the overall allocated Maximum Rate to exceed the Maximum
Rate of the OF Port.

5. Enter a Buffersize.

6. Enter a Class of Service (COS) for the Queue.

7. Select OF Port Eid for the OpenFlow Queue to associated with.

8. Select OK.

The OF Queue is displayed in the selection tree pane.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 323

Provision OpenFlow

Enter OpenFlow Controller Information

As it is defined, in an OpenFlow-based Network, all OpenFlows are created and
maintained with the SDN Controller. The SDN Controller must be available on the
network. Access information about the Controller must be entered in the Switch so they
can communicate. On a GE11xPro device, up to two OpenFlow Controllers can be
entered.

See OpenFlow options and rules OpenFlow Configuration Options and Rules).

1. Select the OpenFlow Application on the tool bar or select OpenFlow from the
Application Menu. Expand System, NE-1, OF Capable Switch entities in the selection
tree pane, by clicking on the “+” signs next to each node to expand the views.

2. Enter a right click on OF Logical Switch-1 and select Create OF Controller.

A Create Controller screen displays

Figure 1:  Create OF Controller

3. Enter Index and Name for the Controller.

4. Enter the IPv4 Unicast address and Port number on the OF controller, where the
service is available. In the case, [Link] is entered and the Controller Transport
Port is configured to 6633.

5. Select a Management Interface Name (Management DCN or Management Tunnel)

where the OF controller can be reached. In this example, Management Tunnel is
selected.

6. Select a Transport Protocol for the connection.

7. Enter an Echo Request Interval.

8. Select OK.

The OF Controller is displayed in the selection tree pane.

9. Select the OpenFlow Application on the tool bar or select OpenFlow from the
Application Menu. Expand System, NE-1, OF Capable Switch and OF Logical Switch
entities in the selection tree pane, by clicking on the “+” signs next to each node to
expand the views.

10. Click the OF Controller

324 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision OpenFlow

An OF Controller Identification View is displayed.

Figure 194: OF Controller Identification

The Connect Status shows UP, if the OpenFlow Controller is

successfully connected.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 325

Provision OpenFlow

Configure OpenFlow with OpenFlow Controller

When the OpenFlow switch (GE11xPro device) and the OpenFlow Controller are
connected, the user can log in the Controller to configure OpenFlow Services. Before
Configuring individual OpenFlows, make sure:

l The OpenFlow Protocol V1.3 is active. The GE11xPro series supports only the V1.3 of
the OpenFlow Protocol.
l Packet-in message are appropriately configured. The information that is reported to the
SDN Controller as Packet-in message must be configured, including where they
should be sent. For each packet-in type, the user can configure sending it to either the
Master Controller, Slave controller or Equal. For different Controller roles, see
Configure OpenFlow Controller. There are three classes of Packet in message
supported: No-match, Action, Invalid TTL. By default, No-Match and Action packet-in
messages are sent to Master or Equal SDN Controller. Packet-in messages ARE
NOT sent to the Controller playing a Slave role by default.
l Switch Configuration has been retrieved to the Controller. This allow the Controller to
know the necessary information to configure flow, namely,
o Tables the switch supports

o Capacity of the tables

The user needs to do the following on the SDN Controller to create OpenFlow services -
each one needs to be configured for priority, timeout, match rules, instruction, Queue,
Meter, Overlapping Control and Byte Count Control.

l Assign a priority number. A larger number indicates a higher priority.

l Configure Hard Timeout. OpenFlow service with a hard timeout expires at specified
time. The user can choose to skip Hard timeout.
l Double tagged packets are typically first processed by the VLAN Flow Table to strip
outer tag, metadata will be used for correlation with the Main Flow Table. However, it
also provides the option to where the double-tagged packets are all handled in the Main
Flow Table.
l For other traffic, a Table-miss Flow is usually created. This Flow has priority 0, it does
not contain any matching criteria, and the instruction must be configured to goto table
10.
l Apply a Queue in the Main Flow Table using Write Action-Set Queue. A queue ID is
entered to apply a queue. A queue can be shared among OpenFlows. For Instructions
supported in GE11xPro, see FSP 150-GE11xPro System Description.
l Apply a Meter in the Main Flow Table using Meter action. Appropriate Traffic Rate
(bps) and Burstsize (KB) must be configured. For Instructions supported in GE11xPro,
see FSP 150-GE11xPro System Description.
l Enable Check Overlapping. It is called Flows Overlapping if a ingress packet meet the
match rules of two OpenFlows with the same priority in a Table. Checking Overlapping
requires any two OpenFlow entries with the same priority have at least one match field
are both not wildcard, and the values are different. The GE11xPro DOES NOT support
the creation of overlapping OpenFlow services. The user must enable Check
Overlapping, so when a GE11xPro receives the instruction from the SDN Controller to
create an OpenFlow service, it checks the corresponding Flow Table for overlapping
entries. A new entry is created when there is no overlapping. Otherwise, it returns an
error message.
l Disable Byte Counts. When the Byte Counts disabled, the switch does not need to
keep track of the Flow byte count. The GE11xPro DOES NOT support Byte Count.

326 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision OpenFlow

OpenFlows are also modified and deleted with the OpenFlow Controller.

After OpenFlows are configured on OpenFlow Controller, the configuration must be

delivered to the switch.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 327

Provision OpenFlow

Verify OpenFlow Configuration on Switch

After OpenFlow configuration are delivered from the OpenFlow Controller. The user can
verify the configuration on the GE11xPro devices.

1. Select the OpenFlow Application on the tool bar or select OpenFlow from the
Application Menu. Expand System, NE-1, OF Capable Switch-1, OF Logical Switch-
1, and OF Main Flow Table in the selection tree pane, by clicking on the “+” signs next
to each node to expand the views.

2. Click OF Flow under the OF Main Flow Table.

A List of Existing OpenFlows displays

3. Double Click the desired OpenFlow Entry.

An OpenFlow Configuration Pane is displayed.

4. In the lower-right part of the detail pane, find the ACL Rule Eid entry and Service
Eid attribute.

l If corresponding Entity Identifiers are displayed, the Flow is active (See Figure 1 on
p. 328).
l Otherwise, the Flow is not active and the configuration may need modification (See
Figure 2 on p. 329).

The ACL Rule Eid and Service Eid are only shown in the Main
Flow Table.
For Table Miss Flow in the Main Table, the Service Eid is
available when it is active but not the ACL Rule Eid.

Figure 1:  OpenFlow Active

328 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision OpenFlow

Figure 2:  OpenFlow Inactive

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 329

Provision OpenFlow

View OpenFlow Statistics

Statistics data is available for OpenFlow services in OF VLAN Table and OF Main Table.

1. Select the OpenFlow Application on the tool bar or select OpenFlow from the
Application Menu. Expand System, NE-1, OF Capable Switch-1, OF Logical Switch-
1, and OF Main Flow Table or OF VLAN Flow Table in the selection tree pane, by
clicking on the “+” signs next to each node to expand the views.

2. Click OF Flow under the OF VLAN Flow Table or OF Main Flow Table as Selected in
1.

A List of OpenFlows in the Corresponding Table displays

3. Right click the desired Flow and Select View Status in the shortcut menu.

An OpenFlow Status View displays

Figure 195: OpenFlow Status View

330 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision OpenFlow

View OpenFlow Queue Statistics

Statistics data is available for OpenFlow Queues.

1. Select the OpenFlow Application on the tool bar or select OpenFlow from the
Application Menu. Expand System, NE-1, OF Capable Switch-1 and OF Logical
Switch-1 in the selection tree pane, by clicking on the “+” signs next to each node to
expand the views.

2. Click OF Queue under the OF Logical Switch-1.

A List of OpenFlows Queue displays

3. Right-Click the desired OF Queue and Select View Status in the shortcut menu.

An OF Queue Status View Displays

Figure 196: OF Queue Status View

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 331

Provision Management Tunnel(s)

Provision Management Tunnel(s)

Configure management tunnels on desired Access and/or Network ports by performing
Configure Management Tunnel, as required.

If Low Touch Provisioning (LTP) is not used, delete the default LTP
management tunnel.

332 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision AMP Server and Client

Provision AMP Server and Client

Supported in all FSP 150-GE11xPro products, Automatic Management Provisioning
(AMP) is a solution to reduce operational costs and simplify inventory management by
eliminating the need for manual configuration of new devices and replacement of network
devices, e.g. GE11xPro. Devices are discovered and automatically provisioned and
managed by NMS. AMP provides a means to establish the connectivity for network
elements, the management tunnels and IP addresses of which are not configured.

AMP’s responsibility is to automatically configure a Sub-tending Network Element (SNE,

or remote system) system IP address/subnet/gateway/system name/management
tunnel based on the port it is connected to on the Gateway Network Element (GNE).
AMP may be configured as a Server or as a Client on any system which supports AMP
feature.

Use the following procedure if using AMP to provision a node as an AMP Server and the
required nodes as AMP Clients. Otherwise, skip this procedure.

For AMP Server/Client configuration details, see AMP Configuration.

For an AMP Configuration example, refer to the FSP 150-GE11xPro System Description
document.

If the AMP Server/Client management tunnels are on Network Port-1,

the default LTP Management Tunnel must be deleted prior to AMP
creation for the AMP Server/Client provisioning to function properly.

At the AMP Server node:

1. Ensure that the AMP Server node’s communications network is provisioned properly
for your network configuration, including System IP address, Gateway IP address,
Proxy ARP setting, static route, management tunnel, etc. Also ensure that EFM-OAM
is enabled on the AMP Server Port management tunnel.

2. Expand the Communications entity in the Selection Tree Pane. Enter a right click on
AMP Configuration and select Create Server. The Create AMP Configuration screen
displays:

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 333

Provision AMP Server and Client

Figure 197: Create AMP Server

3. Select/enter the desired AMP Server configuration options:

a) Select the desired AMP ID and Port EID.

b) Set Control to the Enabled state.
c) Enter the desired AMP Remote (Client node) configuration options.
4. Select OK.

The AMP Configuration entity appears in the details pane

5. Enter a right click on the AMP Server entity in the details pane and select View to
verify configuration entry.

Figure 198: Menu Selection to View AMP Server

334 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision AMP Server and Client

Figure 199: View AMP Server Configuration

When the Client node has been installed and configured as an AMP
Client, and when connectivity is sound (and EFM-OAM is enabled to
deliver AMP protocols at each node), the AMP Server node will
provision the remote configuration as entered above.

At the AMP Client node:

6. Perform the following for a Network Port if it is used for AMP protocols. Otherwise,
skip this step.

Go to Provision Network Ports to provision the AMP Client flow and set the port
to the In-Service state. Edit EFM-OAM to enable OAM Control.

Go to Configure Management Tunnel to delete the default LTP Management

Tunnel on Network Port 1, if not used for Low Touch Provisioning (LTP).

7. Perform the following for an Access Port if it is used for AMP protocols. Otherwise,
skip this step.

Go to Provision Access Port Services to provision the AMP Client flow and set it
to the In-Service state. (Ensure to edit EFM-OAM to enable OAM Control.)

8. Expand Communications in the selection tree pane. Right click on AMP Configuration
and select Create Client. The following screen displays:

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 335

Provision AMP Server and Client

Figure 200: Create AMP Client

9. Select the desired AMP ID and Port EID. Set Control to Enabled.

10. Select the AMP Configuration entity in the selection tree pane.

The AMP Client entity is present in the details pane.

11. Enter a right click on the AMP Client entity and select View.

Figure 201: Menu Selection to View AMP Client

12. Verify the AMP configuration details.

Observe the AMP Statistics - “Last Status Received” should indicate Provision,
and “Last Status Transmitted” should indicate Config Success (see following
figure).

336 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision AMP Server and Client

Figure 202: View AMP Client - AMP Statistics

13. Verify that a management tunnel associated with the AMP Client has been
automatically created, by expanding the Management Tunnels and NE-1 entities in the
selection tree pane, and selecting the management tunnel entity.

Figure 203: View AMP Client Management Tunnel

At the AMP Server node:

14. At the AMP Server node, enter a right click on the AMP Server entity in the Details
pane and select View to observe AMP Statistics.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 337

Provision AMP Server and Client

15. At the AMP Server node, expand the Communications entity and select the AMP
Configuration entity in the Selection Tree Pane. Then enter a right click on the AMP
Server entity in the detail pane and select View.

Observe the AMP Statistics - “Last Status Transmitted” should indicate

Provision, and “Last Status Received” should indicate Config Success (see
following figure).

Figure 204: View AMP Server - AMP Statistics

16. Repeat above steps for each AMP Server (and AMP Client node) as required.
Remaining Client node provisioning may be performed by local practices via Network
Manager.

338 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Precision Time Protocol (PTP) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Provision Precision Time Protocol (PTP) -

GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)
The GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH) support the following PTP functionalities and
related configurations, including:

l Transparent Clock (TC)

l Telecom Slave (TS)
l Boundary Clock (BC) - G.8265 (frequency) and G.8275 (frequency and phase)
l Mini Grand Master - G.8265 (frequency) and G.8275 (frequency and phase)
l Time Clock and add a Time Clock Reference
l Remote Slave (Static Slave or Dynamic Slave)

Refer to the following provisioning order on how to provision the PTP configurations for
your site.

Transparent Clock Provisioning Order

Up to 32 Transparent Clocks may be provisioned per system. Transparent Clocks are
created in the following order:

l Create a flow on the associated port (must be in-service)

l Create a Transparent Clock
l Edit an Ethernet Port’s Delay Asymmetry setting

G.8265 Boundary Clock Provisioning Order

PTP configuration options are created in the following order for Boundary Clock:

l Enable Software Licensing for PTP-MC/BC

l Ensure that the Port associated with the PTP Flow Point (for OCS Port and Master
Virtual Port) are provisioned and In Service
l Create a Telecom Slave
o Create a Slave Only Ordinary Clock (SOOC)

o Create a PTP Flow Point (PTP FP) for OC Slave

o Create an Ordinary Clock Slave (OCS) Port
l Edit an Ethernet Port’s Delay Asymmetry setting

The TS, once provisioned and Locked (the OCS Port State changes to Slave state),
may be:
o selected as a sync reference to the System Sync Domain (SYNC-1-1-1-1)

o selected as a Timing Source of Boundary Clock (These entities should be disabled

until the OC-S has achieved lock [OCS Port State = Slave].)
o selected as an output reference for the 10MHz Clock (CLK-1-1-1-1), PPS (PPS-1-
1-1-1), or Time of Day (TOD-1-1-1-1) output ports. (These outputs should be
disabled until the OC-S has achieved lock. The output should be disabled if the
OC-S state is not LOCKED or HOLD-OVER.)

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 339

Provision Precision Time Protocol (PTP) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

o selected as the Source TOD Clock of System Time of Day (ToD)

o selected as a Time Clock Reference
l Create a Boundary Clock -- using TS as Timing Source
o Create a Master Clock Interface

o Create a PTP Flow Point (PTPFP)

o Create a Master Virtual Port
l Create/verify a Static Remote Slave or Dynamic Remote Slave

G.8265 Mini Grand Master Clock Provisioning Order

PTP configuration options are created in the following order for Master Clock:

l Enable Software Licensing for PTP-MC/BC

l Ensure that the Port associated with the PTP Flow Point is provisioned and In Service
l Edit the Time Clock
o Add a Time Clock Reference

l Create a G.8265 Mini Grand Master Clock -- using Time Clock as Timing Source
o Create a Master Clock Interface

o Create a PTP Flow Point (PTPFP)

o Create a Master Virtual Port
l Create/verify a Static Remote Slave or Dynamic Remote Slave

G.8265 Remote Slave Provisioning Order

A single Telecom Slave may be created for the system. The Telecom Slave and
associated timing functions are created in the following order:

l Enable Software Licensing for PTP

l Ensure that the Port associated with the PTP Flow Point is provisioned and In Service
l Edit an Ethernet Port’s Delay Asymmetry setting
l Create a Telecom Slave
o Create a Slave Only Ordinary Clock (SOOC)

o Create a PTP Flow Point (PTPFP)

o Create an Ordinary Clock Slave (OCS) Port

(Optional)

l Edit the Time Clock

o Add TS as a Time Clock Reference

G.8275 Mini Grand Master Clock Provisioning Order

A single PTP Clock may be created for the system. PTP configuration options are
created in the following order for PTP Clock:

l Enable Software Licensing for PTP-MC/BC

l Ensure that the Port associated with the PTP Flow Point is provisioned and In Service

340 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Precision Time Protocol (PTP) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

l Edit an Ethernet Port’s Delay Asymmetry setting

l Edit GPS
l Edit the Time Clock
o Add GPS as a Time Clock Reference

l Create a PTP Clock

o Create a PTP Flow Point (PTPFP)

o Create a PTP Port

l Create/verify a Remote Slave

G.8275 Boundary Clock Provisioning Order

A single PTP Clock may be created for the system. PTP configuration options are
created in the following order for PTP Clock:

l Enable Software Licensing for PTP-MC/BC

l Ensure that the Port associated with the PTP Flow Point is provisioned and In Service
l Edit an Ethernet Port’s Delay Asymmetry setting
l Edit Sync Domain (SYNC-1-1-1-1) (optional)
l Create a PTP Clock
o Create a PTP Flow Point (PTPFP)

o Create a PTP Port

l Create/verify a Remote Slave

For more information on the scalability of PTP entities, see Enable Software License.

The provisioning steps described in this section are performed using the PTP application
(located on the tool bar or selected via the Application menu) once the licenses of this
feature has been turned on.

The following procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address
and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN (see Set Up the GE11xPro DCN (eth0) Port
Using the Serial Port ) and is logged on with at least a Provisioning level user permission
using the web-based GUI.

Refer to PTP Configuration Options and Rules - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH) to

determine the default values, value ranges and rules for each option in the following
procedure.

This procedure is written as a standalone operation for configuring

PTP, but is also called out a a part of the Synchronization procedure
(see Provision Synchronous Ethernet (Sync-E) - GE114Pro
(SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)).

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 341

Provision Precision Time Protocol (PTP) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

1. Determine the next step

Desired Function Then

Enable Software Licensing for PTP-MC/BC fea-
Go to Enable Software Licensing for PTP-MC/BC.
tures?
Go to Edit an Ethernet Port’s Delay Asymmetry Set-
Edit Ethernet Port’s Delay Asymmetry?
ting
Create a Transparent Clock? Go to Create a Transparent Clock.
Create a Telecom Slave? Go to Create a Telecom Slave.
Add a Telecom Slave to a Sync Reference? Go to Add a Sync Reference.
Go to Associate the Telecom Slave to the 10 MHz
Associate the Telecom Slave to the CLK Output?
Clock Output and Edit CLK Port.
Go to Associate the Telecom Slave to the Pulse Per
Associate the Telecom Slave to the PPS Output?
Second Output and Edit PPS Port.
Go to Associate the Telecom Slave to the TOD
Associate the Telecom Slave to the ToD Output?
Clock Output and Edit TOD Port.
Go to Associate the Telecom Slave to the System
Associate the Telecom Slave to the System ToD?
TOD and Edit System Time of Day .
Create a G.8265 Boundary Clock? Go to Create a Boundary Clock.
Edit the Time Clock? Go to Edit the Time Clock.
Add a Time Clock Reference? Go to Add Time Clock Reference.
Operate Reference Switch on Time Clock? Go to Operate Time Clock Reference Switch.
Create a G.8265 Mini Grand Master Clock? Go to Create a G.8265 Mini Grand Master Clock.
Create a G.8265 Static Remote Slave? Go to Create / Verify a G.8265 Static Remote Slave.
Go to Create / Verify a G.8265 Dynamic Remote
Create a G.8265 Dynamic Remote Slave?
Slave.
Create a G.8275 Mini Grand Master Clock? Go to Create a G.8275 Mini Grand Master Clock
Create a G.8275 Remote Slave? Go to Create / Verify a G.8275 Remote Slave
All PTP provisioning is completed? End of Procedure

342 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Precision Time Protocol (PTP) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Enable Software Licensing for PTP-MC/BC

1. Select the Maintenance Application on the tool bar or select Maintenance from the
Application menu. Expand the System, Administration and Software Licensing
entities in the selection tree pane, by clicking the “+” sign next to each entity.

2. Enter a right click on Feature Management and select Edit Feature.

An Edit Feature Management screen displays

Figure 205: Edit Feature Management

3. Select Enable Status by PTP-MC/BC and select OK.

The Feature Management Status is displayed and indicates they are in

Enabled state

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 343

Provision Precision Time Protocol (PTP) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Edit an Ethernet Port’s Delay Asymmetry Setting

1. Select the PTP Application on the tool bar or select PTP from the Application Menu.
Expand the system, NE-1 and NTE entities in the selection tree pane, by clicking on
the “+” signs next to each entity to expand each view.

2. Enter a right click on the Ethernet Port entity associated with the PTP Flow Point and
select Edit.

An Edit PTP Network or Access Port screen displays

Figure 206: Edit PTP Access Port Delay Asymmetry

3. Enter the desired Delay Asymmetry value in nanoseconds and select OK.

4. Go to 1.

344 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Precision Time Protocol (PTP) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Create a Transparent Clock

Prior to creating a Transparent Clock, the appropriate flow(s) for the Clock
source(s) must already have been created and In Service, and the Master
Clock device has been provisioned and tested.

1. Select the PTP Application on the tool bar or select PTP from the Application Menu.
Expand the System and NE-1 entities in the selection tree pane, by clicking on the “+”
signs next to each entity to expand each view.

2. Enter a right click on the NE-1 entity and select Create Transparent Clock.

A Create Transparent Clock window displays

Figure 207: Create Transparent Clock

3. Enter the following Transparent Clock options (see Create / Edit a Transparent Clock
for details and rules):

a) Enter a unique TC ID and the desired Alias

b) Select the desired Administrative State
c) Enter the desired Clock Entity
d) Select the Service Identifier associated with the clock source

Note that user need ensure that the PTP packets do not have more than two
layers of tags after transmitting out of the egress port, otherwise the PTP
packets will not be processed and the TC performance will be impacted.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 345

Provision Precision Time Protocol (PTP) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

e) Select the desired Delay Mechanism and enter the desired Access and
Network PTP Flow Point IDs.
Select OK.

4. Expand the newly created TC entity and select the TC entity and each TC port to view
configuration details and associated LAG, Network and/or Access port Flow Point
EIDs.

5. Expand the associated LAG, Ethernet Access and/or Network ports in the selection
tree pane.

A TC entity appears under the associated ports in the selection tree pane

Figure 208: Network and Access Port PTP Flow Point in Selection Tree Pane

6. Select the Configuration tab in the associated Transparent Clock Ports and PTP flow
points to view configuration details.

7. Select the Statistics and Summary tabs for the associated PTP flow points.

Current PTP statistics are displayed (see the next two figures)

346 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Precision Time Protocol (PTP) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Figure 209: Network Port PTP Flow Point Statistics

Figure 210: Access Port PTP Flow Point Statistics

8. Repeat Step 5 through Step 11 for each Transparent Clock to be created

9. Go to 1.

Delete a Transparent Clock

10. Select the PTP Application on the tool bar or select PTP from the Application Menu.
Expand the System, NE-1 and TC entities in the selection tree pane, by clicking on
the “+” signs next to each entity to expand each view.

11. Enter a right click on the TC-1-x entity and select Delete.

A Delete Transparent Clock window displays

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 347

Provision Precision Time Protocol (PTP) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Figure 211: Delete Transparent Clock

12. Set the Administrative State to Management and select OK.

13. Go to 1.

348 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Precision Time Protocol (PTP) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Create a Telecom Slave

Prior to creating a Telecom Slave, the appropriate flow(s) for the Clock
source(s) must already have been created and In Service, and the
Master Clock device has been provisioned and tested.

1. Select the PTP Application on the tool bar or select PTP from the Application Menu.
Expand the System and NE-1 entities in the selection tree pane, by clicking on the “+”
signs next to each entity to expand each view.

2. Enter a right click on the NE-1 entity and select Create Telecom Slave.

A Create Telecom Slave window displays

Figure 212: Create Telecom Slave

3. Enter the following Telecom Slave options (see Create / Edit a Telecom Slave for
details and rules):

a) Enter the desired Alias and Clock Identity

b) Select the desired Administrative State
c) Select the desired PTP Domain Number and Clock Recovery Mode
d) Select the desired Time Holdover Accuracy
e) Enter the desired WTR Time
f) Select the desired Sync Reference control (If set to Enabled, the TS port
is available as a possible reference for the system Sync object. If set to
Disabled, the TS port is not available as a possible reference for the
system Sync object (SYNC-1-1-1-1). The system Sync object may be
used to drive PTP if this option is disabled AND SYNC-1-1-1-1 is selected
in the Sync ID option.)
g) Select the desired QL Mode, Sync ID, Assumed QL and Expected QL
options

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 349

Provision Precision Time Protocol (PTP) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Select OK.

A TS entity appears under the Ethernet Ports in the selection tree pane

4. Select the TS entity to view configuration details.

Create a Slave Only Ordinary Clock

5. Enter a right click on the Telecom Slave (TS-1-1) entity and select Create SOOC.

A Create Slave Only Ordinary Clock window displays

Figure 213: Create Slave Only Ordinary Clock

6. Enter the following SOOC options (see Create / Edit a Slave Only Ordinary Clock
(SOOC) for details and rules):

a) Enter the SOOC ID (automatically indexed)

b) Enter the desired Alias
c) Select the desired Administrative State
d) Select the Identifier of the flow used for receiving PTP frames
e) Enter the Slave IP address and subnet mask
f) Enter an Interface Name (mandatory)
g) Enable/disable Unicast Message Negotiation
h) Enter the desired Unicast Timeout and Unicast Restart Timer
i) Select the desired Priority Mode and enter the desired Priority
j) Select the Master Delay Mechanism
k) Enter the Master Priority
l) Select the Master Protocol type and enter the Master Clock IP Address
m) Select the desired Master Clock Message Rates/Duration options
n) Enable/Disable Lockout Control
Select OK.

350 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Precision Time Protocol (PTP) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

An SOOC entity appears below the Telecom Slave entity in the selection
tree pane

7. Select the SOOC entity to view configuration details.

Create a PTP Flow Point

8. Enter a right click on the Ethernet Port associated with the Flow for the clock source
and select Create PTPFP.

A Create PTP Flow Point screen displays

PTPFP cannot be created unless the Flow on the associated port is

created and in In-service state. The Flow ID must be the same Flow
ID that was entered when creating a Slave Only Ordinary Clock.

Figure 214: Create PTP Flow Point

9. Enter/Select the following PTP Flow Point options (see Create / Edit a PTP Flow
Point for details and rules):

a) Enter the desired PTPFP ID (automatically indexed) and Alias

b) Select the desired PTP FlowPoint Type
c) Select the Flow Identifier associated with the clock source
d) Enter desired COS, CIR and Buffer Size for this PTP Flow Point
e) Deselect the Untagged frame check box if Inner and/or Outer VLAN tags
need to be entered. Select the desired Inner/Outer VLAN tag check box
(es) to allow tag entry, then enter the desired EtherType and VLAN Tag(s)
Select OK.

A PTP FLOW PT entity appears below the associated Ethernet Port entity
in the selection tree pane

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 351

Provision Precision Time Protocol (PTP) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

10. Select the PTP FLOW PT entity and the Configuration tab to view configuration
details.

Create an Ordinary Clock Slave Clock

11. Enter a right click on the SOOC entity and select Create OCS Port.

A Create Ordinary Clock Slave Port screen displays

Figure 215: Create Ordinary Clock Slave Port

12. Enter the following OCS Port options:

a) Enter the desired Alias

b) Select the PTP Flow Point associated with the clock source
Select OK.

An OCS PORT entity appears below the associated SOOC entity in the
selection tree pane

13. Select the OCS PORT entity to view configuration details and Port State.

The OC-S recovered clock will achieve lock to the selected Master
Clock within 25 minutes. If no messages have been received, the Port
State is Listening. Once messages have been received from the
Master Clock the Port State changes to Uncalibrated. When the
system determines it is able to calibrate time, then the Port State
changes to Slave (Locked).

352 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Precision Time Protocol (PTP) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Figure 216: OCS Port Configuration - Port State (Slave)

14. Select the PTP Flow Point entity and Statistics tab to view PM data. Ensure that
messages are being received, otherwise troubleshoot accordingly.

Figure 217: PTP Flow Point Statistics

15. Select the SOOC entity and Statistics tab to view PM data. If required, select the Raw
PTP Messages tab to view raw PTP messages. See the next two figures.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 353

Provision Precision Time Protocol (PTP) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Figure 218: SOOC Statistics Tab

Figure 219: SOOC Raw PTP Messages

16. Select the OCS PORT entity to view configuration details and Port State. Wait until
the Port Status changes to Slave (Locked) if it is in Uncalibrated state.

354 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Precision Time Protocol (PTP) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Figure 220: OCS Port Configuration Status (Slave)

17. Go to 1.

Associate the Telecom Slave to the 10 MHz Clock Output

When the Telecom Slave has been provisioned and is Locked to the Master Clock (the
OCS Port Status changes to Slave), then it can be associated with the 10 MHz Clock
Output.

18. Select the Configuration Application on the tool bar or select Configuration from the
Application Menu. Expand the System, NE-1, Synchronization, NE-1 and NTE114Sx
entities in the selection tree pane, by clicking on the “+” signs next to each entity to
expand each view.

19. Enter a right click on the CLK-1-1-1-1 entity and select Edit Configuration.

An Edit CLK-1-1-1-1 window displays

Figure 221: Edit CLK Interface Configuration

20. Enter the following 10MHz Clock options:

a) Enter the desired Alias and select the desired Administrative state
b) Select the desired Frequency Source EID
c) Select the desired Squelch Control and Squelch QL options

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 355

Provision Precision Time Protocol (PTP) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

d) Select OK
21. Select the CLK-1-1-1-1 entity to view configuration details.

22. Go to 1.

Associate the Telecom Slave to the Pulse Per Second Output

When the Telecom Slave has been provisioned and is Locked to the Master Clock (the
OCS Port Status changes to Slave), then it can be associated with the PPS Output.

23. Select the Configuration Application on the tool bar or select Configuration from the
Application Menu. Expand the System, NE-1, Synchronization, NE-1 and NTE20x
entities in the selection tree pane, by clicking on the “+” signs next to each entity to
expand each view.

24. Enter a right click on the PPS-1-1-1-1 entity and select Edit Configuration.

An Edit PPS-1-1-1-1 window displays

Figure 222: Edit PPS Interface Configuration

25. Enter the following PPS options:

a) Enter the desired Alias and select the desired Administrative state
b) Enter the desired Cable Delay Compensation
c) Select the desired Time of Day Source EID
d) Select the desired Squelch Control and Squelch QL options
e) Select OK

PPS-1-1-1-2 can only be used for SyncJack input (see Figure 223).
See SyncJack Testing - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH) for details.

356 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Precision Time Protocol (PTP) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Figure 223: Edit PPS-1-1-1-2

26. Select the PPS-1-1-1-1 entity to view configuration details.

27. Go to 1.

Associate the Telecom Slave to the TOD Clock Output

When the Telecom Slave has been provisioned and is Locked to the Master Clock (the
OCS Port Status changes to Slave), then it can be associated with the TOD Clock
Output.

28. Select the Configuration Application on the tool bar or select Configuration from the
Application Menu. Expand the System, NE-1, Synchronization, NE-1 and NTE114Sx
entities in the selection tree pane, by clicking on the “+” signs next to each entity to
expand each view.

29. Enter a right click on the TOD-1-1-1-1 entity and select Edit Configuration.

An Edit TOD-1-1-1-1 window displays

Figure 224: Edit Time of Day Interface Configuration

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 357

Provision Precision Time Protocol (PTP) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

30. Enter the following TOD options:

a) Enter the desired Alias and select the desired Administrative state
b) Select the desired Time of Day Source EID
c) Select the desired Squelch Control and Squelch QL options
d) Select OK

The Time-of-Day (TOD) output signal is capable of being sourced from

an active Telecom Slave’s recovered ToD. While the Telecom Slave
is working in one-way recovery mode, the accuracy of ToD timing
cannot be guaranteed.

31. Select the TOD-1-1-1-1 entity to view configuration details.

32. Go to 1.

Associate the Telecom Slave to the System TOD

When the Telecom Slave has been provisioned and is Locked to the Master Clock (the
OCS Port Status changes to Slave), then it can be associated with the System TOD.

33. Select the Configuration Application on the tool bar or select Configuration from the
Application Menu.

34. Enter a right click on the System entity and select Edit System Time of Day.

An Edit System Time of Day window displays

Figure 225: Edit System Time of Day (PTP Clock Method)

35. Enter the following System TOD options:

a) Select PTP Clock for System Time of Day

b) Select TS-1-1 for the Source Time of Day Clock
c) Select OK
36. Select the System Time of Day tab to view configuration details. Select the
Identification tab to view Date and Time.

37. Go to 1.

358 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Precision Time Protocol (PTP) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Create a Boundary Clock

When the Telecom Slave has been provisioned and is Locked to the Master Clock (the
OCS Port Status changes to Slave), it can serve as the timing source of the Boundary
Clock (BC).

Refer to the following example configuration for the provisioning procedure in this section.

Figure 226: Example Boundary Clock and Dynamic Remote Slave in G.8265 Topology

Perform the following steps for creating a Boundary Clock.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 359

Provision Precision Time Protocol (PTP) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Prior to creating a Boundary Clock, the PTP-MC/BC feature must be enabled

and a Telecom Slave must first be provisioned (links provided in the following
steps). When the Telecom Slave has been provisioned and is Locked to the
Master Clock (the OCS Port Status changes to Slave), it can serve as the
timing source of the Boundary Clock (BC).

Prior to creating a Boundary Clock, ensure that the following has been
completed:
a cable has been run from the GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH) to the
Ethernet port associated with the remote slave.

1. Enable the PTP-MC/BC feature by performing Enable Software Licensing for PTP-
MC/BC.

2. Edit the Network Port and Access Port (associated with the PTP Flow Point for
Master Virtual Port and for OCS Port) and place them In Service. See Provision
Access Port Services and Provision Network Ports.

3. Edit an Ethernet Port’s (associated with the PTP Flow Point for Master Virtual Port)
Delay Asymmetry Setting by performing Associate the Telecom Slave to the 10 MHz
Clock Output.

4. Create a Telecom Slave by performing Create a Telecom Slave.

5. Select PTP in the tool bar or select PTP from the application menu.

6. Expand the System entity and enter a right click on NE-1 entity, then select Create
Boundary Clock.

The Create Boundary Clock window displays

Figure 227: Create Boundary Clock

7. Enter/Select the following Boundary Clock configuration options:

a) Enter the desired Boundary Clock Index and Alias

b) Select/Unselect the checkbox by Use Selected Telecom Slave Clock
Identity
c) Edit the Clock Identity as required if Use Selected Telecom Slave Clock
Entity is not selected
d) Selected the desired Administrative state
e) Enable or disable PTP Mediation
f) Selected the desired TS Identifier as Timing Source
g) Enter the desired PTP Domain Number
h) Click on OK
The Boundary Clock entity displays below the NE entity in the Selection
Tree Pane

8. Select the Boundary Clock entity to verify entry details.

360 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Precision Time Protocol (PTP) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Figure 228: Boundary Clock Configuration

9. Enter a right click on the PTP BC-1-1 entity and select Edit to modify the configuration
of the BC as appropriate.

Create a Master Clock Interface

10. Enter a right click on the Boundary Clock entity and select Create Master Clock
Interface (MCI).

A Create Master Clock Interface window displays

Figure 229: Create Master Clock Interface (for Boundary Clock)

11. Enter/Select the following Master Clock Interface configuration options:

a) Enter a desired Alias for the Master Clock Interface

b) Select the desired Administrative state

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 361

Provision Precision Time Protocol (PTP) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

c) Select the IP Protocol and enter the corresponding IP Address, Subnet

Mask
d) Enter a desired Interface Name (mandatory)
e) Select a desired Priority Mode
f) Enter a desired Priority
g) Select Clock Class Profile
h) Select PTP Transport Method.
i) Enter an aprropriate Domain Number (Only entered if the Profile is IEEE-
1588 2008)
j) Select the desired Clock Type (Only the popular one-step can be
selected)
k) Select the desired Delay Mechanism
l) Enter the desired number of Max Slaves Supported
m) Enter the desired number of Max Static Slaves Supported (Only available
if the Transport method is UDP over IPv4)
n) Select the desired Rate for PTP frames and enter the Max Lease
Duration.
o) Enter Remote Slave Aging Timeout (Only entered if the Profile is IEEE
1588 2008, and Transport method is Ethernet).
p) Click on OK
A PTP MCI-1-1-1 entity followed by Static Slaves and Dynamic Slaves
entities below appears under the PTP BC-1-1 entity in the Selection Tree
Pane

12. Select the Master Clock Interface entity to verify entry details.

13. Enter a right click on the PTP MCI-1-1-1 entity and select Edit to modify the
configuration of the Master Clock Interface as necessary.

Create a PTP Flow Point

14. Expand the NTE114PRO CSH/SH entity. Enter a right click on the Network or
Access Port associated with the PTP Flow Point for the Master Clock Interface and
select Create PTPFP.

A Create PTP Flow Point window displays

362 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Precision Time Protocol (PTP) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Figure 230: Create PTP Flow Point

15. Enter the following PTP Flow Point options:

a) Enter the desired PTPFP ID and Alias

b) Select the desired Administrative State
c) Set the PTP FlowPoint Type to OC Master
d) Select the associated Flow ID from the dropdown list
e) Enter the desired COS, CIR and Buffer Size.
f) De-select the Untagged checkbox if Outer and/or Inner VLAN Tags need
to be entered. Select the desired Outer/Inner VLAN Tag checkbox(es) to
allow tag entry, then enter the desired Ethertype and VLAN Tag(s).
g) Click on OK.
A PTP Flow Point entity appears below the associated Ethernet Port entity
in the selection tree pane

16. Select the PTP FLOW PT entity and Configuration tab to view configuration details.

Create a Master Virtual Port

17. Enter a right click on the PTP MCI-1-1-1 entity and select Create Master Virtual Port.

A Create Master Virtual Port screen displays

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 363

Provision Precision Time Protocol (PTP) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Figure 231: Create Master Virtual Port

18. Enter the following Master Virtual Port options:

a) Enter a desired Master Virtual Port Index and Alias

b) Select the desired PTP Flow Point
c) Select OK
A MASTER VIRTUAL PORT entity appears below the associated MCI
entity in the Selection Tree Pane

19. Select the MASTER VIRTUAL PORT entity to view configuration details. Enter a right
click and select Edit to change the Alias as needed.

20. To provision the remote slave, perform one of the following procedures:

To provision / verify a Static Remote Slave node, go to Create / Verify a G.8265

Static Remote Slave.

To provision / verify a Dynamic Remote Slave node, go to Create / Verify a

G.8265 Dynamic Remote Slave,

If a Dynamic Slave node has been provisioned, expand Dynamic

Slaves in the selection tree pane and select the Dynamic Slave entity
to view configuration details.
If the following have been provisioned correctly, then the Dynamic
Slave entity should be present:
l The Remote Slave unit has been provisioned with Unicast
Message Negotiation Enabled (Dynamic Slave)
l The Master Clock Interface has been provisioned with the correct
number of Master Slaves Supported to accept the Dynamic Slave
(Maximum Slaves Supported = the maximum number of Dynamic
Slaves + the maximum number of Static Slaves)
l The Master Clock Interface has been provisioned for the correct
MAX PTP rates (Max Announce Message Rate, Max Sync
Message Rate and Max Delay Response Message Rate)
l The Master Clock Interface has been provisioned for the correct IP
address and PTP domain number

364 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Precision Time Protocol (PTP) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Edit the Time Clock

Prior to creating a Master Clock, a Time Clock must first be

provisioned and In Service. The Time Clock is used to acquire an
active time reference from the GPS signal input. Thus, it is required
that the Time Clock has GPS provisioned (see Edit GPS Port) before
all other associated provisioning.

1. Select the Configuration Application on the tool bar or select Configuration from the
Application Menu. Expand the System, Synchronization, NE-1 and NTE114SH
entities in the selection tree pane by clicking on the “+” signs next to each entity to
expand each view.

2. Enter a right click on the Time Clock entity and select Edit Time Clock.

An Edit Time Clock window appears

Figure 232: Edit Time Clock

3. Enter/Select the following Time Clock options:

a) Enter the desired Alias

b) Set the Administrative state to IS
c) Enter the desired WTR Time
d) Select the desired Selection Mode, Time Holdover Performance, Sync
Reference Candidate and Expected QL options
e) Click on OK
4. Select the Time Clock entity and select the Configuration tab to verify the
configuration entry.

5. Continue with next step to add a Time Clock reference. Otherwise, go to 1.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 365

Provision Precision Time Protocol (PTP) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Add Time Clock Reference

Perform the following steps for adding time clock reference(s) to the Time Clock.

A second priority Time Clock reference may be provisioned as a

backup in case the first priority reference is lost.

1. Select the Configuration Application on the tool bar or select Configuration from the
Application Menu. Expand the System, Synchronization, NE-1 and NTE114PRO
CSH/SH entities in the selection tree pane by clicking on the “+” signs next to each
entity to expand each view.

2. Enter a right click on the Time Clock entity and select Add Time Clock Reference.

An Add Time Clock Reference window appears

Figure 233: Add a Time Clock Reference

3. Enter/Select the following Time Clock Reference options:

a) Select the desired TimeREF Index number and enter the desired Alias
b) Select the desired Priority of this Time Clock Reference
c) Select the desired Time Clock Reference Source
d) Click on OK
4. Add a second Time Clock Reference, if required, by repeating 2 and 3.

5. Select the Time Clock entity and select the Status tab to verify reference configuration
and status. Wait a few minutes for alarms to clear and the Clock Mode changes to
“Locked”. Select the Time Clock entity again to observe progress. See the following
Note and figure.

The Clock Mode should indicate Locked and the Source Status should
indicate Reference OK

366 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Precision Time Protocol (PTP) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

The Time Clock will achieve lock to the reference within 5 minutes to
15 minutes, depending on visibility / conditions. When establishing
sync with the reference, the Clock Mode is Tracking. When the
system determines it is able to synchronize, then the Clock Mode
changes to Locked. If this does not occur, verify the above
provisioning steps and Time Clock interconnectivity to the selected
reference.

Figure 234: Time Clock Status

6. Go to 1.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 367

Provision Precision Time Protocol (PTP) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Operate Time Clock Reference Switch

1. Select the Maintenance application. Expand the System, Synchronization, NE-1 and
NTE114S/NET114SH entities in the Selection Tree pane. Enter a right click on the
TIME CLOCK-1-1-1-1 entity and select Operate Reference Switch.

An Operate Reference Switch screen displays

Figure 235: Operate Reference Switch on Time Clock Entity

2. Select the desired Request and Target for switch. Then click on OK.

3. Select the Status tab in the Detail pane to check the state associated with the Time
Ref Eid which is just switched.

Figure 236: Time Reference State after Switch

4. Go to 1

368 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Precision Time Protocol (PTP) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Create a G.8265 Mini Grand Master Clock

Refer to the following example configuration for the following provisioning procedure.

Figure 237: Example Mini GM Clock and Dynamic Remote Slave in G.8265 Topology

GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH) are the products in GE11xPro family that support
Master Clock (MC) in PTP. Perform the following steps for creating a Master Clock.

Prior to creating a Master Clock, ensure that the following has been
completed:
l the Network Port or Access Port associated with the PTP Flow
Port (for Master Virtual Port) is provisioned and In Service
l a cable has been run from the GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH) to
the Ethernet port associated with the remote slave.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 369

Provision Precision Time Protocol (PTP) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

It is recommended that the Time Clock is clocked before creating the

Master Clock.

1. Enable the PTP-MC/BC feature by performing Enable Software Licensing for PTP-
MC/BC.

2. Edit an Ethernet Port’s (associated with the PTP Flow Point for Master Virtual Port)
Delay Asymmetry Setting by performing Edit an Ethernet Port’s Delay Asymmetry
Setting.

3. Edit the GPS by performing Edit GPS Port.

4. Edit the Time Clock and add GPS as the first priority reference by performing Edit the
Time Clock and Add Time Clock Reference.

A second priority Time Clock reference may be provisioned as a

backup in case the first priority reference is lost.

5. Select PTP Application on the tool bar or select PTP from the application menu.
Expand the System entity, enter a right click on NE-1 entity and select Create Master
Clock.

A Create Master Clock window displays

Figure 238: Create Master Clock

6. Enter/select the following Master Clock options:

a) Enter a desired Master Clock Index and Alias.

b) Enter the Clock Identity or use the Clock Identity proposed by the node.
c) Select the desired Administrative State.
d) Enter the desired PTP Domain Number, Priority 1 and Priority 2 (based on
IEEE 1588v2)
e) Select the Timing Clock Eid.

370 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Precision Time Protocol (PTP) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

f) Select OK.
A PTP Master Clock entity displays below the NE entity in the Selection
Tree Pane

7. Select the PTP MASTER CLOCK-1-1 entity to verify entry details.

8. Enter a right click on the Master Clock entity and select Create Master Clock
Interface.

A Create Master Clock Interface window displays

Figure 239: Create Master Clock Interface (for Master Clock)

9. Enter or select the following Master Clock Interface options:

a) Enter the desired Master Clock Interface Index

b) Enter a desired Alias for the Master Clock Interface
c) Select the desired Administrative state
d) Select the IP Protocol and enter the corresponding IP Address, Subnet
Mask
e) Enter a desired Interface Name (mandatory)
f) Select a desired Priority Mode
g) Enter a desired Priority
h) Select Clock Class Profile
i) Select PTP Transport Method
j) Enter an aprropriate Domain Number (Only entered if the Profile is IEEE-
1588 2008)
k) Select the desired Clock Type (Only the popular one-step can be
selected)
l) Select the desired Delay Mechanism
m) Enter the desired number of Max Slaves Supported
n) Enter the desired number of Max Static Slaves Supported (Only available
if the Transport method is UDP over IPv4)
o) Select the desired Rate for PTP frames and enter the Max Lease
Duration.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 371

Provision Precision Time Protocol (PTP) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

p) Enter Remote Slave Aging Timeout (Only entered if the Profile is IEEE
1588 2008, and Transport method is Ethernet).
10. Expand the Master Clock entity in the selection tree.

The Master Clock Interface entity is present

11. Select the Master Clock Interface entity to verify entry details.

12. Enter a right click on the Network or Access Port associated with the PTP Flow Point
for the Master Clock Interface source and select Create PTPFP.

A Create PTP Flow Point window displays

Figure 240: Create PTP Flow Point

13. Enter the following PTP Flow Point options:

a) Enter the desired PTPFP ID and Alias

b) Select the desired Administrative State
c) Set the PTP FlowPoint Type to OC Master and select the desired Flow
ID, if required
d) Enter the desired COS, CIR and Buffer Size.
e) De-select the Untagged frame checkbox if Outer and/or Inner VLAN tags
need to be entered. Select the desired Outer/Inner VLAN tag checkbox
(es) to allow tag entry, then enter the desired EtherType and VLAN Tag(s).
f) Select OK.
A PTP FLOW PT entity appears below the associated Ethernet Port entity
in the selection tree pane

14. Select the PTP FLOW PT entity and Configuration tab to view configuration details.

15. Enter a right click on the Master Clock Interface entity and select Create Master
Virtual Port.

A Create Master Virtual Port window displays

372 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Precision Time Protocol (PTP) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Figure 241: Create Master Virtual Port

16. Enter the following Master Virtual Port options:

a) Enter the desired Master Virtual Port Index and Alias

b) Select the desired PTP Flow Point
c) Select OK
A Master Virtual Port entity appears below the associated Master Clock
Interface entity in the selection tree pane

17. Select the Master Virtual Port entity to view configuration details.

18. Determine the next step:

Desired Function Then

Create/verify a G.8265 Static Remote Go to Create / Verify a G.8265 Static
Slave? Remote Slave.
Create/verify a G.8265 Dynamic Go to Create / Verify a G.8265
Remote Slave? Dynamic Remote Slave.

19. To provision the remote slave, perform one of the following procedures:

To provision / verify a Static Remote Slave node, go to Create / Verify a G.8265

Static Remote Slave.

To provision / verify a Dynamic Remote Slave node, go to Create / Verify a

G.8265 Dynamic Remote Slave.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 373

Provision Precision Time Protocol (PTP) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

If a Dynamic Slave node has been provisioned, expand Dynamic Slaves and
select the Dynamic Slave entity in the selection tree pane to view
configuration details.
If the following have been provisioned correctly, then the Dynamic Slave
entity should be present:
l The Remote Slave unit has been provisioned with Unicast Message
Negotiation Enabled (Dynamic Slave)
l The Master Clock Interface has been provisioned with the correct
number of Master Slaves Supported to accept the Dynamic Slave
(Maximum Slaves Supported = the maximum number of Dynamic Slaves
+ the maximum number of Static Slaves)
l The Master Clock Interface has been provisioned for the correct MAX
PTP rates (Max Announce Message Rate, Max Sync Message Rate and
Max Delay Response Message Rate)
l The Master Clock Interface has been provisioned for the correct IP
address and PTP domain number

374 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Precision Time Protocol (PTP) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Create / Verify a G.8265 Static Remote Slave

Refer the following example configuration for the provisioning procedure in this section.

Figure 242: Example Static Slave Clock in G.8265 Topology

To create a remote slave as a Static Remote Slave, perform the following steps at the
GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH) remote slave location. If the remote slave has ready
been provisioned, go to 1 to provision the GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH) Master
Clock / Boundary Clock node to accept the Static Remote Slave.

If the Remote Slave is another type of unit (such as an OSA 541x), it

must already have a Telecom Slave provisioned. Go to 1 to provision
the GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH) Master Clock/Boundary Clock
node to accept the Static Remote Slave.

Perform the following steps at the GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH) Remote Slave site:

1. Ensure that the Ethernet port associated with the PTP Flow Point (for OCS Port) is
provisioned and In Service.

2. Ensure that a cable has been run from the GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH) to the
Ethernet port associated with the Master Clock / Boundary Clock node.

3. Edit the Ethernet Port (associated with the PTP Flow Point) Delay Asymmetry
setting. Perform Edit an Ethernet Port’s Delay Asymmetry Setting.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 375

Provision Precision Time Protocol (PTP) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

4. Create a Telecom Slave (ensure that the Slave Only Ordinary Clock [SOOC] is
provisioned for Unicast Message Negotiation: Disabled). Perform Create a Telecom
Slave.

5. Determine the next step:

Desired Activity Then

This Static Remote Slave will operate with a
GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH) Boundary Continue with the next step.
Clock / Master Clock node?
Provision the other node
This Static Remote Slave will operate with according to its doc-
another type of node (such as an OSA 541x)? umentation and verify con-
nectivity. Go to 1.

Provision Boundary Clock / Master Clock to Accept a

Static Remote Slave
Perform the following steps at the GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH) Boundary Clock /
Mater Clock site for this remote slave:

Prior to performing the following steps, ensure that the Boundary Clock /
Master Clock node has been provisioned to accept this Static Remote Slave.
Refer to Create a Boundary Clock or Create a G.8265 Mini Grand Master
Clock.

1. Enter a right click on the Static Slaves entity in the Selection tree and select Create
Static Slave.

A Create Static Remote Slave window displays

Figure 243: Create Static Remote Slave

2. Enter the following Static Remote Slave options:

a) Enter the desired Static Remote Slave Index and Alias

376 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Precision Time Protocol (PTP) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

b) Set the Administrative state to IS

c) Enter the IP address of the Static Remote Slave and enable or disable
Unicast Message Negotiation. If set to Disabled, then select the desired
message rates for each type (announce, sync and delay response)
d) Select OK
3. Expand the Static Slaves entity in the Selection Tree pane.

A Static Slave entity appears below the Static Slaves entity in the selection
tree pane

4. Select the Static Slave entity and select the Configuration tab to view configuration
details and status.

Figure 244: Static Slave Configuration and Status

5. Select the Static Slave Statistics tab to view Receive and Transmit statistics.

Figure 245: Static Slave Statistics Tab

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 377

Provision Precision Time Protocol (PTP) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

6. If statistics are not indicating message receive and transmit statistics as expected,
troubleshoot connectivity and provisioning.

Perform the following steps at the Remote Slave:

7. At the GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH) remote node, select the PTP Application on
the tool bar or select PTP from the Application menu. Expand the System and NE-1
entities in the selection tree pane, by clicking on the “+” signs next to each entity to
expand each view.

8. Select the OCS PORT entity to view configuration details and Port State. Wait until
the Port Status changes to Slave (Locked).

Figure 246: Slave OCS Port State

9. Select the SOOC entity and the Statistics tab to view the Receive Statistics.

Figure 247: Slave SOOC Statistics

10. If statistics are not indicating message receive statistics as expected, troubleshoot
connectivity and provisioning.

11. Go to 1.

378 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Precision Time Protocol (PTP) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Create / Verify a G.8265 Dynamic Remote Slave

Refer to the following example configuration for the provisioning procedure in this section.

Figure 248: Example Dynamic Slave Clock in G.8265 Topology

To create a remote slave as a Dynamic Remote Slave, perform the following steps at the
GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH) remote slave location. If the remote slave has already
been provisioned, go to

If the Remote Slave is another type of unit (such as an OSA 541x), it must
already have a Telecom Slave provisioned. Go to 1 to verity the Dynamic
Remote Slave.

Perform the following steps at the GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH) Remote Slave site:

1. Ensure that the Ethernet port associated with the PTP Flow Point (for OCS Port) is
provisioned and In Service.

2. Ensure that a cable has been run from the GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH) to the
Ethernet port associated with the Master Clock / Boundary Clock node.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 379

Provision Precision Time Protocol (PTP) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

3. Edit the Ethernet Port (associated with the PTP Flow Point) Delay Asymmetry
setting. Perform Edit an Ethernet Port’s Delay Asymmetry Setting.

4. Create a Telecom Slave. Perform Create a Telecom Slave.

5. Determine the next step.

Desired Activity Then

This G.8265 Dynamic Remote Slave will operate with an
FSP 150CC GE11x/GE11xPro Boundary Clock / Master Continue with the next step.
Clock node?
Provision the other node
This G.8265 Dynamic Remote Slave will operate with according to its doc-
another type of node (such as an OSA 541x)? umentation and verify con-
nectivity. Go to 1.

Verify a Dynamic Remote Slave Connectivity

Perform the following steps at the GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH) Boundary Clock /
Master Clock site for this remote slave:

Prior to performing the following steps, ensure that the Boundary

Clock / Master Clock node has been provisioned to accept this
Dynamic Remote Slave. Refer to Create a Boundary Clock or Create
a G.8265 Mini Grand Master Clock.
If the Remote Slave has already been provisioned as a Dynamic
Slave and the Master Clock entity has been provisioned correctly,
then the Dynamic Slave entity should be present.

1. Expand the Dynamic Slaves entity in the selection tree pane.

The Dynamic Remote Slave entity is present

If the following have been provisioned correctly, then the Dynamic

Slave entity should be present:
l The Remote Slave unit has been provisioned with Unicast
Message Negotiation Enabled (Dynamic Slave)
l The Master Clock Interface has been provisioned with the correct
number of Master Slaves Supported to accept the Dynamic Slave
(Maximum Slaves Supported = the maximum number of Dynamic
Slaves + the maximum number of Static Slaves)
l The Master Clock Interface has been provisioned for the correct
MAX PTP rates (Max Announce Message Rate, Max Sync
Message Rate and Max Delay Response Message Rate)
l The Master Clock Interface has been provisioned for the correct IP
address and PTP domain number

2. Select the Dynamic Slave entity and select the Configuration tab to view configuration
details and status. See the following figure.

380 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Precision Time Protocol (PTP) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

If the remote node is provisioned and connected correctly, the Dynamic Remote
Slave entity is present and Status results are displayed. If the Dynamic Slave
entity is not present as expected, troubleshoot connectivity and provisioning.

Figure 249: Verify Dynamic Remote Slave (Configuration Tab)

3. Enter a right click on the Dynamic Slave entity and select Edit.

An Edit Remote Slave screen displays

4. Set the Administrative State to IS (In Service) and select OK.

5. Select the Dynamic Slave Configuration tab to view the Administrative State changed
to IS.

6. Select the Dynamic Slave Statistics tab to view Receive and Transmit statistics.

Figure 250: Dynamic Slave Statistics Tab

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 381

Provision Precision Time Protocol (PTP) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

7. If the Dynamic Slave entity is not present or statistics are not indicating message
receive and transmit statistics as expected, troubleshoot connectivity and
provisioning.

The following steps are performed at the Remote Slave:

8. At the remote slave node, select the PTP Application on the tool bar or select PTP
from the Application Menu. Expand the System and NE-1 entities in the selection tree
pane, by clicking on the “+” signs next to each entity to expand each view.

9. Select the OCS PORT entity to view configuration details and Port State. Wait until
the Port Status changes to Slave (Locked).

Figure 251: Slave OCS Port State

10. Select the SOOC entity and the Statistics tab to view the Receive Statistics.

Figure 252: Slave SOOC Statistics

11. If statistics are not indicating message receive statistics as expected, troubleshoot
connectivity and provisioning.

12. Go to 1.

382 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Precision Time Protocol (PTP) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Create a G.8275 Mini Grand Master Clock

Refer to the following example configuration details for the following provisioning
procedure.

Figure 253: Example Mini GM Clock and Dynamic Remote Slave in G. 8275 Topology - No Backup

Perform the following steps for creating a G.8275 Mini GM Clock.

Prior to creating a PTP Clock, ensure that the following has been
completed:

l the Network Port or Access Port associated with the PTP Flow
Point (for PTP Port) is provisioned and In Service
l a cable has been run from the GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH) to
the Ethernet port(s) associated with the remote unit (Master Clock
or Remote Slave).
l the GPS/GNSS has been installed and cabled to the GE114Pro
(SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

1. Enable the PTP-MC/BC feature by performing Enable Software Licensing for PTP-
MC/BC.

2. Edit an Ethernet Port’s (associated with the PTP Flow Point for PTP Port) Delay
Asymmetry Setting by performing Edit an Ethernet Port’s Delay Asymmetry Setting.

3. Edit the GPS by performing Edit GPS Port.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 383

Provision Precision Time Protocol (PTP) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

4. Edit the Time Clock and add GPS as the first priority reference by performing Edit the
Time Clockand Add Time Clock Reference.

A second priority Time Clock reference may be provisioned as a

backup in case the first priority reference is lost.

5. Select the PTP Application on the tool bar or select PTP from the Application Menu.
Expand the System and NE-1 entities in the selection tree pane, by clicking on the “+”
signs next to each entity to expand each view.

6. Enter a right click on the NE-1 entity and select Create PTP Clock.

A Create PTP Clock window displays

Figure 254: Create PTP Clock

7. Enter the following PTP Clock options:

a) Enter the desired Alias and PTP Clock Index

b) Enter the Clock Identity or use the Clock Identity proposed by the node
c) Set the Administrative state to IS
d) Select PTP Clock Profile G8275_1
e) Select PTP Clock Type Master Only
f) Enter the desired PTP Domain Number
g) Enter the desired Priority 2 and Local Priority
h) Select OK
The PTP Clock entity displays below the network element entity in the
Selection Tree

8. Select the PTP Clock entity to verify entry details.

384 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Precision Time Protocol (PTP) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

9. Expand the NTE114PRO CSH/SH entity in the selection tree pane. Enter a right click
on the Ethernet Port (associated with the PTP Flow point for the PTP Clock Interface
source) and select Create PTPFP.

A Create PTP Flow Point screen displays

Figure 255: Create PTP Flow Point

10. Enter the following PTP Flow Point options:

a) Enter the desired PTPFP ID and Alias

b) Set Administrative State to IS (In Service)
c) Set the PTP Flow Point Type to Eth Multicast
d) The Flow ID is fixed to None
e) Enter the desired COS, CIR and Buffer Size
f) The VLAN Configuration is fixed to Untagged
g) Select OK.
A PTP FLOW PT entity appears below the associated Ethernet Port entity
in the selection tree pane

11. Select the PTP FLOW PT entity and Configuration tab to view configuration details.

12. Enter a right click on the PTP Clock entity and select Create PTP Port.

A Create PTP Port entry screen displays

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 385

Provision Precision Time Protocol (PTP) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Figure 256: Create PTP Port

13. Enter the following PTP Port options:

a) Enter the desired PTP Port Index and Alias

b) Set Administrative State to IS (In Service)
c) Set Not Slave to True
d) Enter the desired Local Priority
e) Select the newly created PTP Flow Point
f) Select the desired Destination MAC Address Type
g) Select/enter remaining PTP Clock Port Configuration options
h) Select OK
A PTP Port entity appears below the associated PTP Clock entity in the
selection tree pane

14. Expand the PTP Clock entity. Select the PTP Port entity to view configuration details.

15. A second PTP Port may be added to the PTP Clock. To do so, repeat 9through 14to
add the second PTP Port.

16. Go to 1.

386 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Precision Time Protocol (PTP) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Create / Verify a G.8275 Remote Slave

Refer to the following example configuration for the provisioning procedure in this section.

Figure 257: Example Dynamic Slave Clock in G.8275 Topology

To create a G.8275 Remote Slave, perform the following steps at the GE114Pro
(SH)/GE114Pro (CSH) remote slave location. If the remote slave has already been
provisioned, go to Verify a G.8275 Remote Slave Connectivity.

If the Remote Slave is another type of unit (such as an OSA 541x), it

must already be provisioned. Go to Verify a G.8275 Remote Slave
Connectivity to verify the G.8275 Remote Slave.

Perform the following steps at the GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH) Remote Slave site:

1. Enable the PTP-MC/BC feature by performing Enable Software Licensing for PTP-
MC/BC.

2. Ensure that the Ethernet port associated with the PTP Flow Point (for PTP Port) is
provisioned and In Service.

3. Ensure that a cable has been run from the GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH) to the
Ethernet port associated with the Master Clock node.

4. Edit the Ethernet Ports (associated with the PTP Flow Points) Delay Asymmetry
setting. Perform Edit an Ethernet Port’s Delay Asymmetry Setting.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 387

Provision Precision Time Protocol (PTP) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

5. Select the PTP Application on the tool bar or select PTP from the Application Menu.
Expand the System and NE-1 entities in the selection tree pane, by clicking on the “+”
signs next to each entity to expand each view.

6. Enter a right click on the NE-1 entity and select Create PTP Clock.

A Create PTP Clock window displays

Figure 258: Create PTP Clock

7. Enter the following PTP Clock options:

a) Enter the desired Alias and PTP Clock Index

b) Enter the Clock Identity or use the Clock Identity proposed by the node
c) Set the Administrative state to IS
d) Select PTP Clock Profile G8275_1
e) Select PTP Clock Type Boundary Clock
f) Enter the desired PTP Domain Number
g) Enter the desired Priority 2 and Local Priority
h) (for future) Enable or disable Sync Reference (If set to Enabled, the PTP
Clock is available as a possible reference for the system Sync object. If
set to Disabled, the PTP Clock is not available as a possible reference for
the system Sync object (SYNC-1-1-1-1). The system Sync object may be
used to drive PTP if this option is disabled AND SYNC-1-1-1-1 is selected
in the Sync ID option.)
i) Select the desired QL Mode, Sync ID and Expected QL options
j) Select OK
The PTP Clock entity displays below the network element entity in the
Selection Tree

8. Select the PTP Clock entity to verify entry details.

388 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Precision Time Protocol (PTP) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

9. Expand the NTE114PRO CSH/SH entity in the selection tree pane. Enter a right click
on the Ethernet Port (associated with the PTP Flow point for the PTP Clock Interface
source) and select Create PTPFP.

A Create PTP Flow Point screen displays

Figure 259: Create PTP Flow Point

10. Enter the following PTP Flow Point options:

a) Enter the desired PTPFP ID and Alias

b) Set Administrative State to IS (In Service)
c) Set the PTP Flow Point Type to Eth Multicast
d) The Flow ID is fixed to None
e) Enter the desired COS, CIR and Buffer Size.
f) The VLAN Configuration is fixed to Untagged
g) Select OK.
A PTP FLOW PT entity appears below the associated Ethernet Port entity
in the selection tree pane

11. Select the PTP FLOW PT entity and Configuration tab to view configuration details.

12. Enter a right click on the PTP Clock entity and select Create PTP Port.

A Create PTP Port entry screen displays

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 389

Provision Precision Time Protocol (PTP) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Figure 260: Create PTP Port

13. Enter the following PTP Port options:

a) Enter the desired PTP Port Index and Alias

b) Set Administrative State to IS (In Service)
c) Set Not Slave to False
d) Enter the desired Local Priority
e) Select the newly created PTP Flow Point
f) Select the desired Destination MAC Address Type
g) Select/enter remaining PTP Clock Port Configuration options
h) Select OK
A PTP Port entity appears below the associated PTP Clock entity in the
selection tree pane

14. Expand the PTP Clock entity. Select the PTP Port entity to view configuration details.

15. A second PTP Port may be added to the PTP Clock. To do so, repeat 18through 14 to
add the second PTP Port.

16. Expand the PTP Clock entity. Select the PTP Port entity to display the list of
configured PTP Ports. Enter a right click on the desired PTP Port and select View
Configuration to view configuration details and Port State. Wait a few minutes for
alarms to clear and the Port State changes to “Slave”. Select the Time Clock entity
again to observe progress. See the following Note and figure.

The PTP Port recovered clock will achieve lock to the selected Master
Clock within 5 minutes to 60 minutes, depending on network
conditions. If no messages have been received, the Port State is
Listening. Once messages have been received from the Master
Clock the Port State changes to Uncalibrated. When the system
determines it is able to calibrate time, then the Port State changes to
Slave when the PTP Port is locked to the Master (Locked). If this does
not occur, verify the above provisioning steps and interconnectivity to
the Master Clock node.

390 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Precision Time Protocol (PTP) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Figure 261: PTP Port Configuration Tab (Port State - Slave)

17. Click on the “x” to close the tab.

18. Select the PTP Flow Point entity and the Statistics tab to observe statistics data.

Figure 262: Network Port PTP Flow Point Statistics

19. Determine the next step.

Desired Activity Then

This Remote Slave will operate with an GE114Pro Continue with the next
(SH)/GE114Pro (CSH) G.8275 Master Clock node? step.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 391

Provision Precision Time Protocol (PTP) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Desired Activity Then

Provision the other node
according to its doc-
This Remote Slave will operate with another type of
umentation and verify
node (such as an OSA 541x)?
connectivity. Then go to
1.

Verify a G.8275 Remote Slave Connectivity

Perform the following steps at the GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH) Master Clock site
for this remote slave:

Prior to performing the following steps, ensure that the Master Clock
node has been provisioned to accept this Remote Slave. Refer to
Create a G.8275 Mini Grand Master Clock for G.8275 Master Clock
provisioning steps.

1. Select the PTP Application on the tool bar or select PTP from the Application Menu.
Expand the System, NE-1 and PTP Clock entity. Select the PTP Port entity to display
the list of configured PTP Ports. Enter a right click on the desired PTP Port and select
View [Link] the Configuration tab.

The Port State should indicate Master

Figure 263: PTP Port Configuration Tab (Port State - Master)

2. If the Port State is not indicating Master as expected, troubleshoot connectivity and
provisioning.

392 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Precision Time Protocol (PTP) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

3. To view PTP Port statistics, select the PTP Port entity to display the list of configured
PTP Ports. Enter a right click on the desired PTP Port and select View Statistics.

Figure 264: PTP Port Statistics

4. If the PTP Port statistics are not indicating statistics as expected, troubleshoot
connectivity and provisioning.

5. Go to 1.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 393

Provision Synchronous Ethernet (Sync-E) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Provision Synchronous Ethernet (Sync-E) -

GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)
The GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH) support Sync-E functionality, including the
Network Ports, Access Ports and BITS IN/OUT. The following procedure provides the
steps necessary to configure Sync-E on the GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH).

The unit supports both SDH (Option 1) and SONET (Option 2) synchronization capability.
The default is SDH (Option1). For both SDH and SONET, the BITS interfaces support
T1, E1 and 2048 kHz options. For Synchronization provisioning rules, see
Synchronization

While the BITS-IN and BITS-OUT interfaces can be individually enabled and configured,
they share basic configuration settings, so that changing the line type or code of one
simultaneously changes the same settings on the other.

Steps in provisioning Sync-E and PTP:

l Edit System Sync Domain

l Provision BITS-IN/OUT
l Provision Telecom Slave
l Provision and Enable Sync-E on associated Ethernet Ports
l Provision CLK, PPS, TOD and GPS
l Provision and associate Time Domain on associated facilities
l Associate Sync Reference Sources (Sync-E Enabled Network Ports/Access Ports,
Telecom Slave and/or BITS-IN) to System Sync Domain (SYNC-1-1-1-1) - Up to three
per system

When the Telecom Slave has been provided and is Locked to the Master Clock (the OCS
Port Status changes to Slave), then it can be associated with a Sync Reference.

Sync-E is enabled on a per Ethernet Port basis. The Sync-E mode attribute supports the
values of enabled or disabled (default for all ports is disabled). If a port working at a
specific Configured Speed and Media Type has Sync-E mode enabled, then it can be
selected as a reference source for the System Clock. If Sync-E mode is disabled for that
port, it is not shown in the drop-down list for the System Clock references.

SFP (PN: 1061705878-01 SFP/DPI/GBE/850I/MM/LC/TIN) and SFP

(PN: 1061705879-01 SFP/DPI/GBE/1310S/SM/LC/TIN) do not
support Sync-E functionality.

The following procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address
and configured the NE to a DCN or LAN (see Set Up the GE11xPro DCN (eth0) Port
Using the Serial Port ) and is logged on with at least a Provisioning level user permissions
using the web-based GUI.

All steps in the following procedure are performed in the Configuration Application based
on a GE114S product, which also applies to GE114Pro (SH) / GE114Pro (CSH).

Refer to Synchronization to determine the default values, value ranges and rules for each
option in the following procedure.

394 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Synchronous Ethernet (Sync-E) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

The Network Port or Access Port must be provisioned prior to using this
procedure. See Provision Access Port Services or Provision Network Ports.

1. Expand the System, Synchronization, NE-1 and NTE114S and BITS-1 entities in the
Selection Tree Pane, by clicking on the “+” sign next to each entity to expand each
view.

2. Determine the next step.

Desired Function Then

Configure System Sync Domain? Continue with the next step
Configure BITS-IN? Go to 1.
Configure BITS-OUT? Go to 1.
Configure the 10MHz Clock Port? Go to 1
Configure the PPS Port? Go to 1
Configure the TOD Port? Go to 1
Configure the GPS Port? Go to 1
Configure Sync-E for Network/Access Ports? Go to 1.
Add a Sync Reference? Go to 1.
Edit a Sync Reference? Go to 1.
Delete a Sync Reference? Go to 1.
Operate Reference Switch on System Sync Domain? Go to 4
All Synchronization provisioning is completed? End of Procedure

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 395

Provision Synchronous Ethernet (Sync-E) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Edit System Sync Domain

1. Right click on SYNC-1-1-1-1 and select “Edit Sync”. The following screen displays:

Figure 265: Edit System Sync

2. Enter/select the following options for system sync:

a) Edit the Alias as desired

b) Select the desired Administrative State
c) Select the desired Network Clock Type, enter desired WTR Time, and
select desired Selection Mode

Changing the Network Clock Type changes the options available for
Sync-E functions on BITS-IN, BITS-OUT, Access Ports and Network
Ports. If any of these interfaces were previously configured for Sync-E
functions, the Assumed QL, Expected QL and Squelch QL settings
revert to default values and have to be reconfigured.

When the System Sync Domain (SYNC-1-1-1-1) is configured QL

Mode as Selection Mode, the QL Mode control switch from Disabled
to Enabled for a Sync Reference will cause short reference fail due to
QL value initialization.

d) Select OK
3. Go to 1.

396 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Synchronous Ethernet (Sync-E) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Edit BITS-IN
1. Right click on BITS-IN and select Edit Configuration. The following screen display.

Figure 266: Edit BITS-IN

2. Enter/select the following BITS-IN options:

a) Enter a desired Alias

b) Select the desired Administrative State
c) Select the desired configuration setting, starting from Line Type, as the
Line Type option changes Line Code, Frame Formate, SA Bit and QL
mode.

Line type, line code, frame format and SA bit settings for BITS-IN and
BITS-OUT are shared. Changing one changes the other.
For SDH (Option-1), if QL Mode is Disabled, Assumed QL must be set
to a value other than None.
BITS will not show up as a potential synchronization reference if the
administration state is set to Unassigned

d) Click OK
3. Select the BITS-IN entity to view configuration details.

4. Go to 1.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 397

Provision Synchronous Ethernet (Sync-E) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Edit BITS-OUT
1. Right click on BITS-OUT and select Edit Configuration. The following screen
displays:

Figure 267: Edit BITS-OUT

2. Enter/select the following BITS-IN options:

a) Enter an Alias if desired.

b) Select the desired Administrative State.
c) Select the desired Configuration settings, starting with Line Type, as the
Line Type selection changes the options available for Line Code, Frame
Format, SA Bit, QL Mode and Line Build Out.

Line type, line code, frame format and SA bit settings for BITS-IN and
BITS-OUT are shared. Changing one changes the other.
Squelch QL setting means if the reference clock drops below this
setting, the BITS-OUT output will be suppressed.
Line Build Out is editable only when the Line Type is T1.
As part of the Ethernet port Sync-E reference set up, the
Administration State should not be set to Unassigned.

d) Click OK
3. Select the BITS-OUT entity to view configuration details.

4. Go to 1.

398 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Synchronous Ethernet (Sync-E) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Edit CLK Port

1. Right click on CLK and select Edit Configuration. The following screen displays.

Figure 268: Edit CLK Port

2. Enter or select the following CLK options:

a) Enter a desired Alias

b) Select the desired Administrative State
c) Select Signal Direction (Output only), Frequency Source Eid, Squelch
Control and Squelch QL (if Squelch QL is selected)
d) Click on OK
3. Select the CLK-1-1-1-1 entity to view configuration details.

4. Go to 1.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 399

Provision Synchronous Ethernet (Sync-E) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Edit PPS Port

1. Enter a right click on the PPS port and select Edit Configuration. The following screen
displays.

Figure 269: Edit PPS Port

2. Enter or select the following PPS options:

a) Enter a desired Alias

b) Select the desired Administrative State
c) Select Signal Direction (Output only), Source Eid, Squelch Control,
Squelch QL (if Squelch QL is selected), and enter Cable Delay
Compensation
d) Click on OK
3. Select the PPS-1-1-1-1 entity to view configuration details.

4. Go to 1.

400 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Synchronous Ethernet (Sync-E) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Edit TOD Port

1. Enter a right click on TOD port and select Edit Configuration. The following screen
displays.

Figure 270: Edit TOD Port

2. Enter or Select the following TOD options:

a) Enter a desired Alias

b) Select the desired Administrative State
c) Select the desired Time of Day Source Eid, Squelch Control and Squelch
QL (if Squelch QL is selected)
d) Click on OK
3. Select the TOD-1-1-1-1 entity to view configuration details.

4. Go to 1.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 401

Provision Synchronous Ethernet (Sync-E) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Edit GPS Port

1. Right click on GPS port and select Edit Configuration. The following screen displays.

Figure 271: Edit GPS Port

2. Enter or select the following GPS port options:

a) Enter a desired Alias

b) Select the desired Administrative State
c) Select PPS generation condition and Antenna Cable Length
d) Click on OK
3. Select the TOD-1-1-1-1 entity to view configuration details.

4. Go to 1.

402 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Synchronous Ethernet (Sync-E) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Edit Sync-E on a Network Port or Access Port

1. Expand the NTE114S entity in the selection tree pane by clicking the “+” next to it.
Right click on the desired Network or Access Port and select Edit Sync-E. The
following screen displays:

Figure 272: Edit Sync-E on Ethernet Port (Access Port)

2. Select the desired Configuration settings for Sync-E Mode, QL Mode, Assumed QL
and Expected QL.

If using SDH (Option-1), and QL Mode is disabled, an Assumed QL

other than None must be selected.

SFP (PN: 0061705890 SFP/GBE/ELECTRICAL/RJ45) connector

resident Ethernet ports do not support Sync-E functionality.

When the System Sync Domain (SYNC-1-1-1-1) is configured QL

Mode as Selection Mode, the QL Mode control switch from Disabled
to Enabled for a Sync Reference will cause short reference fail due to
QL value initialization.

3. Click on OK

4. Go to 1.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 403

Provision Synchronous Ethernet (Sync-E) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Add a Sync Reference

1. Expand the System, Synchronization, NE-1 and NTE114S entities in the selection
tree pane, by clicking on the “+” signs next to each entity to expand each view.

To associate Network Ports / Access Ports, Telecom Slave, BITS-IN with sync
reference source: Right click on the System Sync Domain (SYNC-1-1-1-1) and
select Add Sync Reference. The following screen displays:

Figure 273: Add Sync Reference

2. Enter/select the following options for sync reference:

a) Enter an Alias, if desired

b) Select the desired Priority value from the drop-down list.
c) Select the desired Sync Reference Source identifier from the drop-down
list

For Network and Access Ports to appear in the Sync Reference

Sources list they must be configured specific Configured Speed
corresponding to each Media Type. Sync-E cannot be enabled on
Copper 10 Full Mbps ports.
Management Ports cannot be used as Timing reference.
For any interface to appear in the Sync Reference Sources list, it must
have Sync-E Mode enabled and the interface must not be
Unassigned.

SFP (PN: 1061705878-01 SFP/DPI/GBE/850I/MM/LC/TIN) and SFP

(PN: 1061705879-01 SFP/DPI/GBE/1310S/SM/LC/TIN) cannot be
used as sync reference, or a Frequency Offset alarm will be raised.

Click on OK

3. Repeat 1 and 2 for each additional Sync entity.

404 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Synchronous Ethernet (Sync-E) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

4. For Network Ports / Access Ports, Telecom Slave, BITS-IN: Select the System Sync
Domain entity (SYNC-1-1-1-1) and the Status tab.

The Synchronization Reference List appears, showing the status of each

Sync Reference Eid

Figure 274: Sync Reference List

5. Go to 1.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 405

Provision Synchronous Ethernet (Sync-E) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Edit a Sync Reference

1. Expand the System, Synchronization, NE-1 and NTE114S entities in the selection
tree pane, by clicking on the “+” signs next to each entity to expand each view.

Right click on the System Sync Domain (SYNC-1-1-1-1) and select Edit Sync
Reference. The following screen displays:

Figure 275: Edit a Sync Reference

2. Select the radio button for the sync source to edit, then select the desired Priority from
the drop-down list and enter an Alias if desired.

Click on OK

3. Go to 1.

406 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Synchronous Ethernet (Sync-E) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Delete a Sync Reference

1. Expand the System, Synchronization, NE-1 and NTE114S entities in the selection
tree pane, by clicking on the “+” signs next to each entity to expand each view.

Right click on the System Sync Domain (SYNC-1-1-1-1) and select Delete Sync
Reference. The following screen displays:

Figure 276: Delete a Sync Reference

2. Select the Radio Button for the Source to delete.

Click on OK.

3. Go to 1.

4. Select the Maintenance application. Expand the System, Synchronization, NE-1 and
NTE114S/NET114SH entities in the Selection Tree pane. Enter a right click on the
SYNC-1-1-1-1 entity and select Operate Reference Switch.

An Operate Reference Switch screen displays

Figure 277: Operate Reference Switch on System Sync Entity

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 407

Provision Synchronous Ethernet (Sync-E) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

5. Select the desired Request and Target for switch. Then click on OK.

6. Select the Status tab in the Detail pane to check the state associated with the Sync
Ref Eid which is just switched.

Figure 278: Sync Reference State after Switch

408 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)

Provision Link Layer Discovery Protocol

(LLDP)
LLDP is supported in all the GE11xPro products and the provisioning includes:

l Provision System LLDP, including LLDP frame settings, Max Neighbors Action and
Destination Address Configuration
l Provision LLDP on Traffic Ports (Network Ports/Access Ports/LAG member ports),
including port LLDP control and SNMP notification control, LLDP frame TLV options
and Management Address configuration

Refer to LLDP Configuration Settings to determine the default values, value ranges and
rules for each option in the following procedure.

The following procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address
and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN (see Set Up the GE11xPro DCN (eth0) Port
Using the Serial Port ) and is logged on with at least a Provisioning level user permission
using the web-based GUI.

1. Select the Configuration Application on the tool bar or select Configuration via the
application menu.

Provision LLDP at System Level

2. See Configure LLDP

Once the system LLDP configuration is provisioned, go on next steps to

provision LLDP on traffic ports.

Provision LLDP at Ethernet Port Level

3. Expand System, NE-1 and NTE11x entities in the selection tree pane, by clicking the
“+” signs next to each entity to expand each view.

4. Enter a right click on the desired Ethernet port and select Edit LLDP.

5. Enter a right click on the Access Port facility and select Edit LLDP.

An Edit LLDP window appears

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 409

Provision Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)

Figure 279: Edit Access Port LLDP View

The number of tabs displayed in the Details Pane is depended on the

Destination MAC Address types selected in Port configuration
provisioning. If more than one LLDP Destination MAC Address types
have been selected, switching between different Destination MAC
tabs allows corresponding LLDP editing. The configuration options in
different tabs are same.

6. Enter/Select the following data to configure LLDP settings for this port:

Edit LLDP

a) Select the desired LLDP Admin Status for this port

The LLDP Admin Action on NE level will unify the LLDP Admin Status
on port level. However, it’s still allowed that user customize the LLDP
Admin Status on specific port (see Provision NE-1 Common Units for
LLDP Admin Action on NE level).

b) Enable/Disable SNMP Notification

c) Select desired Basic Optional TLVs
Management Address Transmitted

Enter a right click under the Management ADDR table title and select the
desired operation from the selection menu. (see Figure 280 on p. 411)

d) If add is selected, an ADD LLDP ACC PORT CONFIG tab will appear
next to the Management ADDR tab (see Figure 281 on p. 411)
• Select the desired Management Interface and Enable/Disable the
Control to transmit the select management address in LLDP frame.
• Click on OK.

410 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)

e) Right click on an existing Management Address and select Edit from the
selection menu. An Edit LLDP ACC PORT CONFIT tab will appear (see
Figure 281 on p. 411)
• Edit the Control option as desired.
• Click OK.

Figure 280: Provision Access Port LLDP Management Address View

Figure 281: Edit Access Port LLDP Management Address

f) To delete an existing management address, enter a right click on it and

Select Delete. Click on OK.
Click on OK to save the LLDP configuration for this Destination MAC Address.

7. Repeat 6 to configure the LLDP for more Destination Addresses.

8. Select the Ethernet Port in the selection tree pane, then in the Details Pane select
LLDP tab. Switch between Destination MAC tabs and corresponding data sub-tabs

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 411

Provision Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)

below to view Port Configuration, Local Data, Remote System Data, Remote
Management Address, Remote Organizationally Defined TLVs and Remote Unknown
TLVs.

Figure 282: Port LLDP Configuration View

412 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Environmental Alarms - GE114Pro (HE)

Provision Environmental Alarms - GE114Pro

(HE)
The GE114Pro (HE) provides 4 dry contact alarm inputs. These dry contact alarm inputs
are accessed via a RJ45 connector in the front of the unit. Up to 4 monitored devices can
be connected to the 4 dry contact alarm inputs. The dry contact alarm inputs are
programmable to specify the monitored condition and whether the alarm shall be raised
on contact closed or open.

The following procedure assumes that the user has completed the physical installation
procedures in “Physical Installation” in FSP 150-GE11xPro Installation and
Commissioning Manual document, including installation of the Environmental Alarm
cable to the appropriate relays in the GE114Pro (HE) environment. It is also assumed
that the external equipment these Environmental Alarm input pins are connected to are
provisioned and operating as expected. It is also assumed that the user is logged on to
the web-based GUI with the proper privilege level for provisioning (see User Authorization
Privilege Levels).

Refer to Configuration Settings, Rules and Dependencies to determine the default

values, value ranges and rules for each option in the following procedure.

1. Select Maintenance View. Expand the System and Environmental Alarms entities in
the Selection Tree pane.

2. Enter a right click on the desired Environmental Alarm input entity and select Edit. The
following screen displays.

Figure 1:  Edit Environmental Alarm Input

3. Select the desired options for: Alarm Type, Notification Code, Alarm Input Mode and
Alarm Hold Off

Enter the desired Alarm Description

4. Select OK

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 413

Provision Performance Monitoring

Provision Performance Monitoring

See Etherjack/Syncjack Test Procedures and Performance Monitoring .

414 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Database and Configuration Files

Database and Configuration Files

There are two different ways to manage database files on the FSP 150-GE11xPro:

l "ICF Configuration Files" below (binary) via the web-based GUI, SNMP and CLI
l "CLI Configuration Files" on page 432 (text based) via SNMP, CLI and the web-based
GUI

These two types of files can be used in a complimentary fashion, or they can be used
independently. Each type of file and its use is described under the headings "ICF
Configuration Files" below and "CLI Configuration Files" on page 432.

There is a third type of Database File supported by the GE11xPro called the Default
Settings File. This is an XML based file that changes the default settings applied when a
new entity (such as an EVPL Flow) is created. This file is downloaded and applied to the
unit if the factory default values are determined to be not applicable or unacceptable to
the user’s application. See Default Settings Value File.

If using Internet Explorer 8, in order to view certain the web-based GUI

elements correctly (namely data provided in Maintenance View - e.g.,
Restore factory defaults, Restore system defaults, Restore database, New
System Defaults File), enable Compatibility View in IE by selecting Tools,
Compatibility View Settings and adding the GE11xPro IP address to the list
of websites data field.

ICF Configuration Files

The ICF (Implementation Configuration File) database files are binary copies of the
complete database and are not user editable. While the binary database files can be
managed using CLI or SNMP commands, the GE11xPro provides an easy means to
manage the binary database files using the following configuration database
management functions via the web-based GUI Web Browser:

l "Create a Database Backup" on page 422

l "Restore Database" on page 426
l "Set a System Default Database" on the next page
l "Restore System Defaults" on page 429
l "Restore Factory Defaults" on page 430

Determine Database Configuration Status

When the database of the GE11xPro is modified, it stores the changes in non-volatile
memory. If a power loss / system reboot occurs, all configuration data is retained. There
are three versions of the database always resident on the system, plus a “standby” copy
of the current database. The three versions are the current running configuration, a
System Default that may be modified and saved by a user, and a Factory Default that
may not be modified. When first commissioned, these three database copies are
identical.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 415

Database and Configuration Files

As provisioning occurs, the current running configuration database is updated with each
change entered. At some point, the user may determine that the current copy should be
the default database for this unit, at which time the user should perform the "Set a
System Default Database" below procedure. Then, if required the database can be
restored to these settings by performing the "Restore System Defaults" on page 429
procedure.

The Factory Default Database never changes, and as a last resort troubleshooting tool,
or upon decommissioning, the current database can be reset to factory defaults by
performing the "Restore Factory Defaults" on page 430 procedure. The Default Database
can also be reset to Factory Defaults using the “New” option in the "Set a System Default
Database" below procedure. From a user’s perspective, there are some major
differences:

l Restore Factory Defaults delete all Configuration files; “New” option in the Set a
Default Database procedure doesn’t.
l Restore Factory Defaults deletes any Default-Value file created by the user. “New”
option in the Set a Default Database procedure doesn’t.
l Restore Factory Defaults erases all Log informations; “New” option in the Set a
Default Database procedure doesn’t.
l Restore Factory Defaults reset system time. “New” option in the Set a Default
Database procedure doesn’t.
l Restore Factory Defaults reset the data-structures in the database.

To view the configuration database information in the web-based GUI, select

Maintenance view, expand the Administration entity, and then select the Database
entity (see Figure 283 for an example of a default database configuration). The display
shows the current database version for both the active and standby partitions as well as
the status.

Figure 283: Database Status Display

Set a System Default Database

At the original commissioning of the unit, the Default Database and the Factory Default
Database are identical. At some point, it may be desirable to reset the current database
to something other than the Factory Defaults, especially if a specific and complex
management communications and/or remote access configuration has been provisioned.

The GE11xPro permits the user to designate the current configuration as the Default
Database or to reset the Default Database to factory defaults using this procedure.

416 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Database and Configuration Files

The following procedure includes steps for setting a Default Database using the web-
based GUI. It is also possible to perform this process using CLI. See the FSP
150GE11xPro Command Line Interface Reference Guide for details. The following
procedure also assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address and
connected the NE to a DCN or LAN (see Set Up the GE11xPro DCN (eth0) Port Using
the Serial Port ) and is logged on using the web-based GUI.

1. Click on the Maintenance icon, or select “Maintenance” from the application drop-
down list.

2. Determine the next step.

Desired Activity Then

Set the current database as the System Default
Continue with the next step.
Database?
Copy the System Default Database to a remote
Go to 5.
site?
Copy a Default Database from a remote site? Go to 10.
Reset the Default Database to Factory Defaults? Go to 15.

3. Expand “Administration”, right click on “Default Database” and select “Save”.

The display is the Save Configuration to System Defaults view, shown in the
figure below.

Figure 284: Save Configuration to System Defaults View

4. Click OK.

5. Expand “Administration”, right click on “Default Database” and select “Copy To

Remote”.

The display is the Copy To Remote, File Transmit Method view, shown in the
following figure.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 417

Database and Configuration Files

Figure 285: Copy System Default Database To Remote - Web View

6. Determine the next step.

Desired File Transfer Method Then

Web (HTTP)? Continue with the next step.
FTP, SFTP or SCP? Go to 8.

7. Click on “OK”, then click on the underlined “here” for HTTP File Transfer.

You are prompted to open or save the file. Select the save option to save the file.

The options presented for file saving are dependent on the browser
being used and the options the user has selected for browser
operation. For example, MS Internet Explorer will prompt for file name
and where the file should be saved, Firefox will save the file with the
default file name ([Link]) to the user’s download folder.
A browser with File Download Prompting enabled and pop-up blocking
enabled may not allow a transferred file to be successfully
downloaded to the system. With this configuration, the system logs
may indicate successful file download, when the browser has not
properly saved the file. The file may be successfully downloaded and
saved by either disabling configuration of File Download Prompting or
disabling pop-up blocking; or using the browser’s pop-up override
capability to allow the file save to complete.

8. For “File Transfer Method” select FTP, SFTP or SCP from the drop-down list.

The display changes to the FTP, SFTP or SCP file transfer view, shown in the
following figure. (The figure shows the SCP view, the FTP and SFTP views are
identical.)

418 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Database and Configuration Files

Figure 286: Copy Database To Remote - SCP View

9. Enter the data required in the screen to access the FTP, SFTP or SCP server and
begin the file transfer process, and click on OK.

It is assumed that the user knows the IP address of the FTP, SFTP or SCP
server, has a valid user ID and password and knows the path and file name
of the software file to transfer.

The file transfer will begin, and show a screen similar to the following displays.

Figure 287: Transfer Progress Screen

When the “Status” changes from “Progress” to “Success”, the file has been
transferred.

10. Expand “Administration”, right click on “Database” and select “Copy from Remote”

The display is the Copy From Remote view, shown in the following figure:

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 419

Database and Configuration Files

Figure 288: Copy Database From Remote - Web View

11. Determine the next step.

Desired File Transfer Method Then

Web (HTTP)? Continue with the next step.
FTP, SFTP or SCP? Go to 13.

12. Enter the path to the file to restore, or browse to the file location, then click on “OK”.

The file will be copied from the source location and the Detail Pane will indicate
when the file transfer is 100% complete.

13. For “File Transfer Method” select FTP, SFTP or SCP from the drop-down list.

The display changes to the FTP, SFTP or SCP file transfer view, shown in the
following figure: (The figure shows the SCP view, the FTP and SFTP views are
identical.)

Figure 289: Copy Database From Remote - SCP View

14. Enter the data required in the screen to access the FTP, SFTP or SCP server and
begin the file transfer process, and click on OK.

420 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Database and Configuration Files

It is assumed that the user knows the IP address of the FTP, SFTP or
SCP server, has a valid user ID and password and knows the path
and file name of the database file to transfer.

The file transfer will begin, and show a screen similar to the following.

Figure 290: File Transfer Progress Screen

The file will be copied from the source location and the Detail Pane will indicate
when the file transfer is 100% complete.

15. Expand “Administration”, right click on “Default Database” and select “New”.

The display is the Save Configuration to System Defaults view, shown in the
figure below.

Figure 291: New System Defaults View

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 421

Database and Configuration Files

Resetting the database to factory defaults will drop all traffic and erase
all communications and user settings, including the loss of the web-
based GUI connection to the NE. When using the “New” option
selection, any user uploaded “Default Settings” will be erased. This
operation should not be performed lightly. It may be advisable to
backup the current database so that it can be restored later.

16. Click OK.

The System resets the Default Database and Active Database to Factory
Defaults.

Create a Database Backup

Backing up the system database is a two step process:

l First, the database has to be created at a temporary location on the NE.

l Second, the database file is transferred to a remote repository. The NE supports
transfer via HTTPS (Web), FTP, SFTP and SCP protocols.

The following procedure includes steps for performing the database backup process
using the web-based GUI. It is also possible to perform this process using CLI. See the
FSP 150GE11xPro Command Line Interface Reference Guide for details. The following
procedure also assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address and
connected the NE to a DCN or LAN (see Set Up the GE11xPro DCN (eth0) Port Using
the Serial Port ) and is logged on using the web-based GUI.

1. Click on the maintenance icon, or select “Maintenance” from the application drop-
down list.

2. Expand “Administration”, right click on “Database” and select “Backup Database”.

The display is the Backup Database view, shown in the figure below.

422 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Database and Configuration Files

Figure 292: Backup Database View

3. Click on OK, wait a few seconds, then click on “Database” in the selection tree pane
and the Details Pane will show the results of the Back Up operation. See the following
figure:

Figure 293: Database Back Up Status View

4. Right click on “Database” and select “Copy to Remote”.

The display is the Copy to Remote, File Transmit Method view, shown in the
figure below.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 423

Database and Configuration Files

Figure 294: Copy Database To Remote - Web View

5. Determine the next step.

Desired File Transfer Method Then

Web (HTTP)? Continue with the next step.
FTP, SFTP or SCP? Go to 7.

6. Click on “OK”, then click on the underlined “here” for HTTP File Transfer.

You are prompted to open or save the file. Select the save option to save the file.

The options presented for file saving are dependent on the browser
being used and the options the user has selected for browser
operation. For example, MS Internet Explorer will prompt for file name
and where the file should be saved, Firefox will save the file with the
default file name ([Link]) to the computer desktop.
A browser with File Download Prompting enabled and pop-up blocking
enabled may not allow a transferred file to be successfully
downloaded to the system. With this configuration, the system logs
may indicate successful file download, when the browser has not
properly saved the file. The file may be successfully downloaded and
saved by either disabling configuration of File Download Prompting or
disabling pop-up blocking; or using the browser’s pop-up override
capability to allow the file save to complete.

7. For “File Transfer Method” select FTP, SFTP or SCP from the drop-down list.

The display changes to the FTP, SFTP or SCP file transfer view, shown in the
figure below. (The figure shows the SCP view, the FTP and SFTP views are
identical.)

424 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Database and Configuration Files

Figure 295: Copy Database to Remote - SCP View

8. Enter the data required in the screen to access the FTP, SFTP or SCP server and
begin the file transfer process, and click on OK.

It is assumed that the user knows the IP address of the FTP, SFTP or
SCP server, has a valid user ID and password and knows the path and
file name of the software file to transfer.

The file transfer will begin, and show a screen similar to the following displays.

Figure 296: File Transfer Progress Screen

9. When the “Status” changes from “In progress” to “Success”, the file has been
transferred.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 425

Database and Configuration Files

Restore Database
Restoring the database is a multi-step process:

l First, the database file has to be transferred from an external repository to a temporary
location on the NE. The NE supports transfer via HTTP (Web), FTP, SFTP and SCP
protocols.
l Second, the database file must be transferred to standby memory on the NE.
l Third, the database is activated, which causes the NE to reset and temporarily
interrupt traffic and cancel active user sessions.

The following procedure includes steps for performing the database restore process using
the web-based GUI. It is also possible to perform this process using CLI. See the FSP
150GE11xPro Command Line Interface Reference Guide for details. The following
procedure also assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address and
connected the NE to a DCN or LAN (see Set Up the GE11xPro DCN (eth0) Port Using
the Serial Port ) and is logged on using the web-based GUI.

1. Click on the Maintenance icon, or select “Maintenance” from the application drop-
down list.

2. Expand “Administration”, right click on “Database” and select “Copy from Remote”.

The display is the Copy From Remote view, shown in the following figure:

Figure 297: Copy Database From Remote - Web View

3. Determine the next step.

Desired File Transfer Method Then

Web (HTTP)? Continue with the next step.
FTP, SFTP or SCP? Go to 6.

4. Enter the path to the file to restore, or browse to the file location, then click on “OK”.

The file will be copied from the source location and the Detail Pane will indicate
when the file transfer is 100% complete.

5. Go to 8.

426 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Database and Configuration Files

6. For “File Transfer Method” select FTP, SFTP or SCP from the drop-down list.

The display changes to the FTP, SFTP or SCP file transfer view, shown in the
following figure. (The figure shows the SCP view, the FTP and SFTP views are
identical.)

Figure 298: Copy Database From Remote - SCP View

7. Enter the data required in the screen to access the FTP, SFTP or SCP server and
begin the file transfer process, and click on OK.

It is assumed that the user knows the IP address of the FTP, SFTP or SCP
server, has a valid user ID and password and knows the path and file name
of the database file to transfer.

The file transfer will begin, and show a screen similar to the following.

Figure 299: File Transfer Progress Screen

8. When the “Status” changes from “Progress” to “Success”, right click on “Database” in
the selection tree pane and select “Restore Database”. The following screen displays:

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 427

Database and Configuration Files

Figure 300: Restore Database Query

In GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (CSH), the “Restore Database” operation

must be approved by the crypto user before a user with at least the
Provisioning privilege performs the operation. See Provision Crypto
User’s Authorizations for more information.

9. Click OK, and the screen shows a progress bar. When the restore completes, right
click on “Database” in the selection tree pane, then select “Activate Database”. An
Activate Standby Database” screen displays, as shown in the following figure:

Figure 301: Activate Standby Database View

10. To accept the restored database, click on OK.

11. The NE will reboot.

If restoring a database taken from a different unit, (e.g. if replacing a failed

unit with another unit and restoring a database backup from the first unit) the
original unit’s SNMP engine ID (snmpEngineId) is preserved so the
configured USM auth and priv keys remain valid. If the snmpEngineId is
edited, the USM auth and priv keys automatically reset to “ChgMeNOW’ and
need to be edited.

428 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Database and Configuration Files

Restore System Defaults

There are two types of database resets available on the GE11xPro, Restore System
Defaults and Restore Factory Defaults. The difference between System Defaults and
Factory Defaults is explained in Determine Database Configuration Status.

Restore System Defaults may result in the loss of all Provisioning Data Base
settings including DCN, SNMP, Remote Access and User data. This is
normally done only when a system is decommissioned and moved to a new
location or when the software or database is corrupted. It is advisable to
backup the database before performing this procedure.

This procedure is NOT part of original Provisioning procedures.

The following procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address
and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN (see Set Up the GE11xPro DCN (eth0) Port
Using the Serial Port ) and is logged on using the web-based GUI in Configuration view.

1. Click on the Maintenance icon, or select “Maintenance” from the application drop-
down list. Right click on “Administration” in the selection tree pane and select “Restore
System Defaults” and the following screen displays:

Figure 302: Restore System Defaults

Resetting the database to system defaults may drop all traffic and erase all
communications and user settings, including the loss of the web-based GUI
connection to the NE. This operation should not be performed lightly. It may
be advisable to backup the current database so that it can be restored later.

2. To reset the current database to the system defaults, select OK.

A system warm reboot occurs.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 429

Database and Configuration Files

Restore Factory Defaults

There are two types of database resets available on the GE11xPro, Restore System
Defaults and Restore Factory Defaults. The difference between System Defaults and
Factory Defaults is explained in Determine Database Configuration Status.

Restore Factory Defaults results in the loss of all Provisioning Data Base
settings including DCN, SNMP, Remote Access and User data. This is
normally done only when a system is decommissioned and moved to a new
location or when the software or database is corrupted. It is advisable to
backup the database before performing this procedure.

This procedure is NOT part of original Provisioning procedures.

In GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (CSH), the “Restore Factory Defaults” operation

must be approved by the crypto user before a user with the Superuser
privilege performs the operation. See Provision Crypto User’s Authorizations
for more information.

On GE101Pro and GO102Pro, the user can restore factory default by a long-
press (5 second or longer) of the Reset button, if the button is enabled.

The following procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address
and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN (see Set Up the GE11xPro DCN (eth0) Port
Using the Serial Port ) and is logged on using the web-based GUI in Configuration view.

1. Click on the Maintenance icon, or select “Maintenance” from the application drop-
down list. Right click on “Administration” in the selection tree pane and select “Restore
Factory Defaults” and the following screen displays:

Figure 303: Restore Factory Defaults

430 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Database and Configuration Files

Resetting the database to factory defaults will drop all traffic and erase all
communications and user settings, including the loss of the web-based GUI
connection to the NE. This operation should not be performed lightly. It may
be advisable to backup the current database so that it can be restored later.

2. To reset the current database to the factory defaults, select OK.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 431

Database and Configuration Files

CLI Configuration Files

In addition to the ICF database files (see Database and Configuration Files), the system
also supports text based configuration files based on the output from the CLI command
“show running config” (see FSP 150GE11xPro Command Line Interface Reference Guide
and CLI Configuration File Management). Since they are text based, they can be viewed
and edited. The system supports keeping up to four CLI configuration files in persistent
memory. These files can be created, deleted, loaded, marked for execution after
rebooting the system or copied to and/or from a remote server using FTP, SFTP or SCP
(file transfer protocols). They are mentioned here because they persist in memory after a
“Restore System Defaults”.

A “Restore Factory Defaults” deletes all configurations file along with all user
configurations.

The CLI Configuration File contain most configurations, but there some exceptions.

l Loopback Configurations
l Local user and SNMP USM user Configurations
l ESA Schedule Configurations
l Secret information for the Remote Authentication Server

CLI configuration files, when executed (Load function), modify the active database one
line item at a time. These files are managed using CLI commands, web-based GUI or
SNMP. These, or edited versions of these files on an external server, are used to
configure newly installed systems to transition from an installation network to the traffic-
carrying network or to reprovision a system following a database reset to System or
Factory Defaults. The CLI commands for managing configuration files are:

l "Description" on page 436
l "List" on page 434
l "Load" on page 435
l "Remove" on page 436
l "Restart-with-configfile" on page 434
l Save
l "Show" on page 435
l "Transfer File" on page 434

These commands are detailed at CLI Configuration File Management.

CLI Configuration File Management

CLI configuration files are text files based on the CLI command “show running-config”.
These files reflect the delta between the system default and active database at the time
they are created, and can be used to reconfigure the system by running them manually or
load them upon system resets. The user can create and store up to four files on the
system. While these files can not be edited on the system, they can be exported, edited,

432 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Database and Configuration Files

then imported back onto the system. A file can be created, marked for execution upon
system reset, and files can be displayed and deleted.

The CLI Configuration files are kept in persistent memory and survive software upgrades
and ICF database file resets and restorals.

The following give some examples of and uses for the CLI configuration files. The full
syntax for each related CLI command can be found in the FSP 150GE11xPro Command
Line Interface Reference Guide. Included here is a procedure for dealing with CLI
configuration files: CLI Configuration File Procedure.

Below is a sample configuration file. The configuration file parser looks for the first
“remarks” line (lines starting with #) to identify that this is a configuration file and this line
should never be edited, or the file will not be run.

ADVA:config-file--> show configfile configfile4

File Name : configfile4
Description :
Context : below

# DO NOT EDIT THIS LINE. FILE_TYPE=CONFIGURATION_FILE

#
#CLI:ESA PROBE-1-1-1-1 Create
#
home
network-element ne-1
configure nte nte114-1-1-1
configure esa
add probe esa_probe-1-1-1-1 "probe1" icmp-echo
access-1-1-1-5 [Link] [Link] [Link]
10min 15 15min 24
configure probe esa_probe-1-1-1-1
vlan-control enabled
vlan-tag 3-4
priority-map dscp
priority 3
packet-per-sample 200
dead-interval 60
response-timeout 10

#
#CLI:ESA REFLECTOR-1-1-1-1 Create
#
home
network-element ne-1
configure nte nte114-1-1-1
configure esa
add reflector esa_reflector-1-1-1-1 "ref1"
access-1-1-1-5 [Link] [Link] dscp 1
#
#CLI:ESA REFLECTOR-1-1-1-2 Create
#
home
network-element ne-1
configure nte nte114-1-1-1
configure esa

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 433

Database and Configuration Files

add reflector esa_reflector-1-1-1-2 "ref2"

access-1-1-1-4 [Link] [Link] tos 4
#
#CLI:CFM N2A PORT SHAPER-1-1-1-4-1 Edit
#
home
configure cfm
configure cfm-n2a-port-shaper access-1-1-1-4 cfm_n2a_
port_shaper-1-1-1-4-1
cir 320000
buffersize 1

#end
home
admin config-file
ADVA:config-file-->

Transfer File
To export or import a configuration file, use the “transfer-file” command:

From the highest level prompt, all configuration file commands are accessed by entering
“admin config-file”. The configuration file “transfer-file” command under “config-file” is:

ADVA:config-file--> transfer-file <ftp,scp,sftp>

<get,put> <user-name> <password> <ipaddr> <filename>

This command uses the selected file transfer protocol to move a configuration file to (put)
or from (get) a remote server.

List
To list all configuration files, use the “list” command, as in:

ADVA:config-file--> list
|File Name |Description
|--------------------------------|----------------|
|configfile2 |psu and root
|configfile3 |
|configfile4 |
ADVA:config-file-->

The command response shows the filename and the description for the file. The
description can be edited using the “description” command.

Restart-with-configfile
The “restart-with-configfile” command is used to force an immediate system reset, then
execute the designated configfile against the system Default. The basic command is:

ADVA:config-file--> restart-with-configfile configfile4

yes
ADVA:config-file-->

U-Boot 2009.03-14408 (Jan 27 2012 - [Link]) MPC83XX

434 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Database and Configuration Files

The Restart-with-configfile command are similar to Load command but they

are different in the following aspects:
l The Restart-with-configfile command causes an NE [Link] Load
command doesn’t.
l The Restart-with-configfile command restores the NE to system default
database. The Load command doesn’t.
l The Restart-with-configfile command applies the configuration against
system-default setting. The Load command applies configuration against
current setting.

Load
To run a configuration file now, use the “load” command, as in:

ADVA:config-file--> load configfile4

ADVA:config-file-->

In GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (CSH), the “Load Config File” operation

must be approved by the crypto user before a user with at least the
provisioning privilege performs the operation. See Provision Crypto
User’s Authorizations for more information.

Show
To view the contents of a configuration file, use the “show ConfigFile” command, as in:

ADVA:config-file--> show configfile configfile4

File Name : configfile4
Description :
Context : below

# DO NOT EDIT THIS LINE. FILE_TYPE=CONFIGURATION_FILE

#
#CLI:ACCESS PORT-1-1-1-6 Edit
#
home
network-element ne-1
configure nte NTE114-1-1-1
configure access-port access-1-1-1-6
service-type evpl

#
#CLI:FLOW-1-1-1-6-1 Create
#
home
network-element ne-1
configure nte NTE114-1-1-1
configure access-port access-1-1-1-6
add flow flow-1-1-1-6-1 "testing123" regular-evc
disabled disabled disabled 0 disabled push 1-0 enabled
push 1-0 "2001-*" 1024000
0

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 435

Database and Configuration Files

#end
home
admin config-file
ADVA:config-file-->

Description
To enter or edit the description of a configuration file, use the “description” command, as
in:

description <configfile-name> <description>

The description can be up to 128 characters long, ASCII with no spaces (unless in
quotes) or question marks. Example:

ADVA:config-file--> description configfile4 "set

access6 to EVPL and create a flow"
ADVA:config-file--> list
|File Name |Description
|-------------------------|----------------------------
------|
|configfile2 |psu and root
|configfile3 |
|configfile4 |set access6 to EVPL and
create a flow
ADVA:config-file-->

Remove
To delete a configuration file, use the “remove” command, as in:

remove <configfile-name>
Example:

ADVA:config-file--> remove configfile2

ADVA:config-file--> list
|File Name |Description
|-------------------------|----------------------------
------|
|configfile3 |
|configfile4 |set access6 to EVPL and
create a flow
ADVA:config-file-->

Configuration File Procedures

Below are two procedures for working with Configuration Files. The first is based on
using CLI commands, which is the basis for Configuration Files. The second details how
to perform the same operations using the web-based GUI.

To support Fiber Service Platform Network Manager (FSPNM), GE11xPro also allows to
manage Configuration File with SNMP. For more information about manging
Configuration File, see FSP 150GE11xPro SNMP User Guide.

436 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Database and Configuration Files

CLI Configuration File Procedure

The user should be logged on to a CLI session as a superuser, then have entered “admin
config-file” at the user prompt. See FSP 150GE11xPro Command Line Interface
Reference Guidefor details on CLI interface operation and commands. Descriptions and
examples of the commands referenced in this procedure are given in CLI Configuration
File Management.

1. Determine the next step.

Desired Operation Then

Create a new configuration file Continue with the next step.
Update an existing configuration file Go to 4.
List/check status of the configuration files Go to 6.
Reboot the system and execute a configuration file Go to 8.
Import/export a configuration file Go to 10.
Run (Load) a configuration file now Go to 12.
View the contents of a configuration file Go to 14.
Edit the description of a configuration file Go to 16.
Delete a configuration file Go to 18.
Done working with configuration files Go to 20.

2. Enter the following command:

save <configfile-name>

Where “configfile-name” is 1 to 32 characters, no spaces or slashes (/).

The configfile will contain the delta between the default database and the current
active database.

3. Go to "Determine the next step. " above.

4. Enter the following command:

save <configfile-name>

Where “configfile-name” is an existing configfile.

The configfile will contain the delta between the default database and the current
active database and will overwrite the existing file.

5. Go to "Determine the next step. " above.

6. Enter the following command:

list

7. Go to "Determine the next step. " above.

8. Enter the following command:

restart-with-configfile <configfile-name> yes

Where “configfile-name” is the an existing configfile.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 437

Database and Configuration Files

This will result in an immediate reboot of the system followed by an execution of

the designated configfile.

9. Go to "Determine the next step. " on the previous page.

10. Enter the following command:

transfer-file <ftp,scp,sftp> <get,put> <user-name>

<password> <ipaddr> <filename>

This command uses the selected file transfer protocol to move a configuration
file to (put) or from (get) a remote server. The IP address of the server, a valid
username, password, and configfile-name are required for either get or put
operations.

11. Go to "Determine the next step. " on the previous page.

12. Enter the following command:

load <configfile-name>

Where “configfile-name” is the an existing configfile.

In GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (CSH), before performing the load operation,

ensure that the crypto user has approved the operation by the following
command.

ADVA:connectguard:authorizations--> load-configfile
enabled

13. Go to "Determine the next step. " on the previous page.

14. Enter the following command:

show <configfile-name>

Where “configfile-name” is an existing configfile.

15. Go to "Determine the next step. " on the previous page.

16. Enter the following command:

description <configfile-name> <description>

Where “configfile-name” is an existing configfile. The description can be up to

128 characters long, ASCII with no spaces or question marks (unless the text
string is in quotes).

17. Go to "Determine the next step. " on the previous page.

18. Enter the following command:

remove <configfile-name>

Where “configfile-name” is an existing configfile.

19. Go to "Determine the next step. " on the previous page.

438 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Database and Configuration Files

20. If configuration changes were implemented using this procedure, verify the changes,
then save the configuration using the Create a Database Backup procedure.

Configuration File Procedure - Using the web-based GUI

The following procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address
and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN (see Set Up the GE11xPro DCN (eth0) Port
Using the Serial Port ) and is logged on using the web-based GUI in Maintenance view.

1. Determine the next step.

Desired Operation Then

Create a new configuration file Continue with the next step.
Update an existing configuration file Go to 5.
List/check status of the configuration files Go to 8.
Edit the description of a configuration file Go to 10.
Reboot the system and execute a configuration file Go to 13.
Load (Run) the configuration file Go to 16.
Import a configuration file Go to 18.
Export a configuration file Go to 21.
Delete a configuration file Go to 24.
Done working with configuration files Go to 27.

2. Right click on “Configuration Files” and select “Create”. The following screen displays:

Figure 304: Configuration Files - Create

3. Enter the desired File Name, 1 to 32 characters, no spaces or slashes (/).

The configuration file will contain the delta between the default database and the
current active database.

4. Go to 1.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 439

Database and Configuration Files

5. Select “Configuration Files” then right click on the menu icon beside the desired
configuration file name in the table inside the details pane. The following screen
displays:

Figure 305: Configuration Files - Update

6. Select “Save”.

The configfile is updated and contains the delta between the default database
and the current active database and overwrites the existing file.

7. Go to 1.

8. Select “Configuration Files”. The following screen displays:

Figure 306: Configuration Files - Display Status

The details pane shows a table of the existing configuration files including the
file name and description (if any).

9. Go to 1.

10. Select “Configuration Files” then right click on the menu icon beside the desired
configuration file name in the table inside the details pane. The following screen
displays:

440 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Database and Configuration Files

Figure 307: Configuration Files - Edit Description

11. Select “Edit Description”.

A text editing window opens. Enter the desired description, up to 127 ASCII
characters and click on OK.

12. Go to 1.

13. Select “Configuration Files” then right click on the menu icon beside the desired
configuration file name in the table inside the details pane. The following screen
displays:

Figure 308: Configuration Files - Restart

14. Select “Restart with File”.

The NID is rebooted, then the selected configfile is run.

15. Go to 1.

16. Select “Configuration Files” then right click on the menu icon beside the desired
configuration file name in the table inside the details pane. The following screen
displays:

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 441

Database and Configuration Files

Figure 309: Configuration Files - Load

17. Select “Load”.

A Configuration File load status window appears and the load may take a while.
When the loading is completed, the NID will not restart.

In GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (CSH), the “Load Config File” operation

must be approved by the crypto user before a user with at least the
provisioning privilege performs the operation. See Provision Crypto
User’s Authorizations for more information.

18. Right click on “Configuration Files” and select “Copy From Remote”. The following
screen displays:

Figure 310: Configuration Files - Import

19. Select the desired protocol and enter the configuration file name:

442 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Database and Configuration Files

The selected file transfer protocol is used to move a configuration file from (get)
a remote server. The IP address of the server, a valid username, password, and
configfile-name are required if using FTP, SFTP or SCP protocols.

20. Go to 1.

21. Select “Configuration Files” then right click on the menu icon beside the desired
configuration file name in the table inside the details pane. The following screen
displays:

Figure 311: Configuration Files - Export

22. Select “Copy to Remote”.

Follow the instructions in the detail pane to move the selected configuration file
to the remote location using the selected transfer protocol.

23. Go to 1.

24. Select “Configuration Files” then right click on the menu icon beside the desired
configuration file name in the table inside the details pane. The following screen
displays:

Figure 312: Configuration Files - Remove

25. Select “Remove”.

The selected configuration file is deleted.

26. Go to 1.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 443

Database and Configuration Files

27. If configuration changes were implemented using this procedure, verify the changes,
then save the configuration using the procedure Create a Database Backup.

444 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Database and Configuration Files

Default Settings Value File

If the user has determined that the default value settings applied when a new entity is
created are not applicable or unacceptable, an XML file containing alternate settings can
be downloaded and applied to the GE11xPro using the following procedure.

Installing a Default Settings Value File changes the settings applied when a
new entity or object is created. The Factory Default settings were carefully
vetted to avoid potential serious conflicts in these settings. Changing them
may result in corruption of the database or inability to work with certain
created objects. This procedure should only be done by properly trained
personnel with a file that was tested in a lab to ensure proper operation.
Restore Factory Defaults will erase any user defined Default Settings file.

This procedure is NOT part of original Provisioning procedures.

The following procedure includes steps for performing applying a new Default Settings
file using the web-based GUI. It is also possible to perform this process using CLI. See
the FSP 150GE11xPro Command Line Interface Reference Guide for details. The
following procedure also assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address
and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN (see Set Up the GE11xPro DCN (eth0) Port
Using the Serial Port ) and is logged on using the web-based GUI.

1. Click on the maintenance icon, or select “Maintenance” from the application drop-
down list.

2. Expand “Administration” and select “Default Settings”

The display is the Copy System Default Settings From Remote view, shown in
the following figure:

Figure 313: Copy System Default Settings From Remote - Web View

3. Determine the next step.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 445

Database and Configuration Files

Desired File Transfer Method Then

Web (HTTP)? Continue with the next step.
FTP, SFTP or SCP? Go to 5.

4. Enter the path to the file to copy, or browse to the file location, then click on “OK”.

The file is copied from the source location and the Detail Pane indicates when
the file transfer is 100% complete.

5. For “File Transfer Method” select FTP, SFTP or SCP from the drop-down list.

The display changes to the FTP, SFTP or SCP file transfer view, shown in the
following figure: (The figure shows the SCP view, the FTP and SFTP views are
identical.)

Figure 314: Copy System Default Settings From Remote - SCP View

6. Enter the data required in the screen to access the FTP, SFTP or SCP server and
begin the file transfer process, and click on OK.

It is assumed that the user knows the IP address of the FTP, SFTP or SCP
server, has a valid user ID and password and knows the path and file name
of the database file to transfer.

The file transfer begins, and show a screen similar to the following displays:

446 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Database and Configuration Files

Figure 315: File Transfer Progress Screen

7. When the “Status” changes from “Progress” to “Success”.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 447

Database and Configuration Files

Bulk Log Transfer

The Audit Log, Alarm Log and Security Log can be bulk transferred to a remote repository.
The NE supports transfer via HTTPS (Web), FTP, SFTP and SCP protocols.
Transferring the Security Log requires the user to have Superuser access.

The following procedure includes steps for performing the bulk file transfer process using
the web-based GUI. It is also possible to perform this process using CLI. See the FSP
150GE11xPro Command Line Interface Reference Guide for details. The following
procedure also assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address and
connected the NE to a DCN or LAN (see Set Up the GE11xPro DCN (eth0) Port Using
the Serial Port ) and is logged on using the web-based GUI.

1. Click on the maintenance icon, or select “Maintenance” from the application drop-
down list.

2. Expand “Administration”, right click on “Transfer Log” and select the desired log file to
Transfer (Alarm Log, Audit Log, Security Log).

The display is the Transfer Log view, shown in the figure below. The examples
use the Alarm Log, all others are similar.

Figure 316: Transfer Log View

3. Determine the next step.

Desired File Transfer Method Then

Web (HTTP)? Continue with the next step.
FTP, SFTP or SCP? Go to 5.

4. Click on “OK”.

You are prompted to open or save the file. Select the save option to save the file.

448 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Database and Configuration Files

The options presented for file saving are dependent on the browser being
used and the options the user has selected for browser operation. For
example, MS Internet Explorer will prompt for file name and where the file
should be saved, Firefox will save the file with the default file name to the
computer desktop.
A browser with File Download Prompting enabled and pop-up blocking
enabled may not allow a transferred file to be successfully downloaded to the
system. With this configuration, the system logs may indicate successful file
download, when the browser has not properly saved the file. The file may be
successfully downloaded and saved by either disabling configuration of File
Download Prompting or disabling pop-up blocking; or using the browser’s
pop-up override capability to allow the file save to complete.

5. For “File Transfer Method” select FTP, SFTP or SCP from the drop-down list.

The display changes to the FTP, SFTP or SCP file transfer view, shown in the
figure below. (The figure shows the SCP view, the FTP and SFTP views are
identical.)

Figure 317: Bulk Log Transfer - SCP View

6. Enter the data required in the screen to access the FTP, SFTP or SCP server and
begin the file transfer process, and click on OK.

It is assumed that the user knows the IP address of the FTP, SFTP or SCP
server, has a valid user ID and password and knows the path and file name
of the software file to transfer.

The file transfer will begin, and show a screen similar to the following displays.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 449

Database and Configuration Files

Figure 318: File Transfer Progress Screen

7. When the “Status” changes from “In Progress” to “Success”, the file has been
transferred.

450 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Database and Configuration Files

Diagnostics Files
The diagnostics files, including all system inventory information, all system Field
Replaceable Units (including Power Supply Units), current versions of software,
hardware, FPGA and CPLD, running config file output, current database, current alarms
and conditions, alarm log, audit log and security log generated or preserved since system
initialization, can be saved as a ZIP file and copied to a remote repository. The NE
supports transferring the diagnostics files via HTTPS (Web), FTP, SFTP and SCP
protocols. Transferring the diagnostics files requires the user to have Superuser access.

The following procedure includes steps for performing saving the diagnostics files at a
specific time stamp and copying the saved diagnostics file to a remote repository using
the web-based GUI. It is also possible to perform this process using CLI. See the FSP
150GE11xPro Command Line Interface Reference Guide for details. The following
procedure also assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address and
connected the NE to a DCN or LAN (see Set Up the GE11xPro DCN (eth0) Port Using
the Serial Port ) and is logged on using the web-based GUI.

1. Click on the maintenance icon, or select Maintenance from the application drop-down
list.

2. Expand Administration, right click on Diagnostics Files and select Save in the
Selection Tree pane.

A Save Diagnostics Files screen displays

Figure 319: Save Diagnostics File

3. Click on OK.

A Transfer Diagnostics Files Progress screen displays, showing the

System Diagnostics File Save status

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 451

Database and Configuration Files

Figure 320: Diagnostics File Save in Progress

4. When the Diagnostics File is saved successfully (see 4),

Figure 321: Diagnostics File Save Success

5. Click Diagnostics Files in Selection Tree pane to view the Status and Date of Existing
Diagnostics Files in the Detail pane.

452 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Database and Configuration Files

Figure 322: View Diagnostics Files Status and Time Stamp

6. Enter a right click on Diagnostics Files in Selection Tree pane and select Copy to
Remote.

A Transfer Diagnostics Files screen displays

Figure 323: Copy Diagnostics Files to Remote

7. Determine the next step.

Desired File Transfer Method Then

Web (HTTP)? Continue with the next step.
FTP, SFTP or SCP? Go to 9.

8. Click on “OK”.

You are prompted to open or save the file. Select the save option to save the file.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 453

Database and Configuration Files

The options presented for file saving are dependent on the browser
being used and the options the user has selected for browser
operation. For example, MS Internet Explorer will prompt for file name
and where the file should be saved, Firefox will save the file with the
default file name to the computer desktop.
A browser with File Download Prompting enabled and pop-up blocking
enabled may not allow a transferred file to be successfully
downloaded to the system. With this configuration, the system logs
may indicate successful file download, when the browser has not
properly saved the file. The file may be successfully downloaded and
saved by either disabling configuration of File Download Prompting or
disabling pop-up blocking; or using the browser’s pop-up override
capability to allow the file save to complete.

9. For “File Transfer Method” select FTP, SFTP or SCP from the drop-down list.

The display changes to the FTP, SFTP or SCP file transfer view, shown in the
figure below. (The figure shows the SCP view, the FTP and SFTP views are
identical.)

Figure 324: Diagnostics File Transfer - SCP View

10. Enter the data required in the screen to access the FTP, SFTP or SCP server and
begin the file transfer process (See the following figure on how the required data for
SCP transfer are correctly provisioned.), and click on OK.

454 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Test the FSP 150-GE11xPro

Figure 325: Diagnostics File Transfer - SCP Option Filled

The file transfer will begin, and show a screen as below

Figure 326: Diagnostics File Transfer Progress Screen

11. When the “Status” changes from “In Progress” to “Success”, the file has been
transferred.

Test the FSP 150-GE11xPro

See Etherjack/Syncjack Test Procedures and Performance Monitoring .

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 455

Test the FSP 150-GE11xPro

This page intentionally left blank.

456 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

Communications Provisioning
Introduction

This Chapter contains communications provisioning information and procedures for the
FSP 150GE11xPro. An example scenario of GNE to SNE communications is provided
along with provisioning details. This section contains the following communications
procedures:

l Serial Connection
l Set Up the GE11xPro DCN (eth0) Port Using the Serial Port
l Set Up the USB Modem Using the Serial Port
l Set up WiFi Connection via the Wifi Dongle
l Browser-based IP Connection
l Edit DCN (eth0) Configuration
l Configure Management Tunnel
l Configure IPv6 over IPv4 Tunnel
l Configure Source Address
l Add/Delete Static Route
l Add/Delete Static ARP Entry
l Add/Delete IPv6 Static Route
l Add/Delete IPv6 Static Neighbor Entry
l Add/Delete IPv6 Static Proxy ND Entry
l Configure Access Control List
l Configure USB Modem Using the Web-based GUI
l Sample Network - GNE to SNE over Management Tunnel

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 457

Provision Communications

Provision Communications
The GE11xPro supports several management configurations and options. This section
does not provide typical deployment scenarios of the GE11xPro in common IP network
configurations as there are simply too many different network configurations in common
use as to be practical.

Additionally, most entities deploying the product have network administrators who either
do the provisioning or provide work orders with provisioning details. This section also
does not provide a comprehensive explanation of IP networking concepts.

The factory default settings for the GE11xPro provide for connecting the MGMT LAN
(DCN) RJ45 connector to the local/remote DCN. This interface (eth0) is preconfigured by
factory defaults with DHCP in client mode and the DHCP disabled.

The user can ascertain quickly the status of the DCN by using the RS-232 serial port to
query the NE for the DCN settings. This same interface can be used to enable DHCP or
set the IP address of the eth0 interface if DHCP is not used on the DCN.

The user has the option of deploying the unit with settings other than the factory defaults
and/or establishing a system default database (see Database and Configuration Files)
with user specified DCN settings or configuring a management tunnel on one or more
Network or Access Ports.

The system also supports Management Traffic Bridging, which implements an Ethernet
Bridge between the Management LAN (eth0) and all configured Management Tunnels.
This allows having only a single IP address for all management interfaces on the system
and eliminates the need for static routes, routing protocols or proxy ARP in an SNE/GNE
configuration. The Ethernet Bridge functionality supports MAC learning and flooding of
un-learned MAC addresses. If Management Traffic Bridging is Enabled (see Table 56 on
p. 788), management tunnels do not support provisioning for IP Address, Subnet Mask,
DHCP or RIP. Another system level option, Management Traffic Bridging Security, limits
acceptance of DCN packets to those with source MACs containing an ADVA Optical
Networking OUI. Management Traffic Bridging also facilitates the use of a Hot Sparing
configuration.

When bridging is disabled, existing http/https/telnet/ssh sessions are unre-

sponsive for up to 3 seconds

When bridging is enabled, existing http/https/telnet/ssh sessions are unre-

sponsive for up to 10 seconds

458 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Communications

Management Communication to the GE11xPro

A connection can be made between a PC or laptop and the GE11xPro management
interface using Command Line Interface (CLI) on a direct local serial link. However, to
connect to the GE11xPro from a remote DCN, connection can also be made via a DCN
network.

A valid IP address for the Management LAN Interface is required when connecting via the
DCN. Although the GE11xPro is shipped with a default IP address loaded ([Link] /
24), the default is the same for each unit. To ensure a reliable connection to the
GE11xPro, the IP address of the Management LAN Interface should first be configured to
a unique address compatible with the network it is on. This is usually performed
automatically by using DHCP or manually by making a serial connection to the
GE11xPro and performing IP Configuration during installation. See Serial Connection for
further details.

Regarding examples shown:

The use of a PC or Laptop running Microsoft (MS) Windows and the terminal
emulation program detailed in this section are used as illustrations only.
Other terminal emulation programs, run on a preferred platform may be used
instead. For more information contact ADVA Optical Networking Technical
Support using the contact details given in the Preface, Technical Support.

It is outside of the scope of this document to describe the use of any com-
puter operating system, terminal emulation program or Internet browser,
either recommended or otherwise. If further details are required on the use of
a particular program, please refer to the documentation supplied with it.

Regarding login user names and passwords:

The default password for access to the management interface is ChgMeNOW.

This password is used on first access to:

a. the root, netadmin or user account

b. an account which has been changed by an administrator

When logging in using the default password, a password change is enforced.

This minimizes possible exposure, restricts access to the system and
thereby increases system security. See "Configure Local Non-Crypto Users"
on page 131 for details on changing a password.

All account names and passwords are case sensitive.

When using the local password file for user authentication a login account is
locked for a period of 5 minutes after 3 unsuccessful login attempts.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 459

Provision Communications

Serial Connection
Information on using CLI commands utilizing the serial port are found in the FSP
150GE11xPro Command Line Interface Reference Guide.

To make a serial connection to the GE11xPro, perform the following steps:

1. Ensure that a physical serial connection from a PC or Laptop to the GE11xPro RS-232
connector (For GE101Pro and GO102Pro, the micro USB Port) has been established
(see “Serial Console Port Connection” in FSP 150GE11xPro Installation and
Commissioning Manual document).

When a GE101Pro or GO102Pro is connected to a PC, the driver software

is automatically installed and a new COM Port appears in the Device
Manger of the PC.

2. Start a serial terminal emulation program (e.g. Tera Term Web) to establish a
connection.

3. Select the outgoing communication port.

4. Set the communication settings of the terminal emulation program to the following:

l 9600 baud
l 8 data bits
l no parity bit
l 1 stop bit
l No flow control

This Serial Port setting applies to all GE11xPro products, including

GE101Pro and GO102Pro.

5. Save these settings for future use.

The following Login prompt should be displayed:

Login:

6. Login with the following details:

• Account name - root (or as appropriate, see Provision Secure Access)

• Password - ChgMeNOW (or as appropriate).

A Security Banner displays on the screen.

7. Enter “Y” to continue.

The following prompt is displayed:

ADVA-->

460 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Communications

Set Up the GE11xPro DCN (eth0) Port Using the Serial

Port
The following procedure assumes that the Ethernet cable connecting MGMT LAN to the
DCN network has not been installed yet. (If there is no DCN connected and only a USB
DCN will be provided for this GE11xPro, refer to Set Up the USB Modem Using the
Serial Port to provision the USB DCN port using CLI commands.)

This procedure does not apply to GE101Pro or GO102Pro, since there is

no regular DCN Port.

Perform the following procedure to set up the GE11xPro DCN (eth0) port (MGMT LAN)
using the RS-232 Serial Port on the GE11xPro (RS 232) and the CLI command structure.
(For more information on the CLI command structure, see the FSP 150GE11xPro
Command Line Interface Reference Guide.)

You will need the following items for this procedure:

l PC with a serial communications port (e.g., COM1 or COM2)

l 2 Category 5 LAN Cables (with RJ-45 connectors)
l DB-9 to RJ-45 converter (ADVA Optical Networking PN 2036904035-01 or
1036904035, see “Table 11 RJ-45 (RS-232 Serial Console Port) and DB9 Adapter Pin
Assignments” in GE11xPro Installation and Commissioning Manual document.
l A communications program, like TeraTerm Pro Web (a free software terminal emulator
for MS-Windows)
l An Internet browser [Internet Explorer(IE 11 recommended) or an up-to-date version of
Firefox or Chrome, etc.] This procedure is intended to be used during the
commissioning process or used as a stand-alone procedure.

This procedure is intended to be used during the commissioning process or used as a

stand-alone procedure.

The default DHCP setting for the GE11xPro DCN port is disabled and as a DHCP
client.

This procedure is offered as the best way to set up the GE11xPro IP address using the
CLI command structure by connecting to the RS-232 Serial Console Port (RS 232 on the
GE11x) and your PC. If a DHCP server is not available for the DCN port, then DHCP
must be disabled. Note that by default, DHCP is disabled on the DCN, and as a DHCP
client.

The IP addresses and Subnet Masks entries shown in these procedures are for example
purposes only. The information you enter should be determined from local sources.

1. Connect a serial cable between the GE11xPro RS-232 Serial Port and a PC and logon
using procedure: Serial Connection.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 461

Provision Communications

When a GE101Pro or GO102Pro is connected to a PC, the driver software

is automatically installed and a new COM Port appears in the Device
Manger of the PC.

2. Enter the show ip-interface eth0 command to view the current DHCP setting for the
DCN interface on the GE11xPro. See the following example:

ADVA--> show ip-interface eth0

Name : eth0
IP Address : [Link]
Netmask : [Link]
DHCP Role : dhcp-client
DHCP : enabled
DHCP Client ID : FSP150CC-GE114
RIPv2 : disabled
MTU (bytes) : 1500
MAC Address : [Link]
System Default Gateway : [Link]

3. Determine the next step.

Current Status Then

Is the eth0 port DHCP status set to the desired state
Go to 7.
of Disabled?
Is the eth0 port DHCP status set to the desired state
Go to 23.
of Enabled?
Does the eth0 port DHCP setting need to be Continue with the next
changed? step.

4. Enter the configure communication command. A next level prompt appears. Then
enter configure eth0 dhcp-control enabled or dhcp-control disabled to set the
desired DHCP state. For example:

ADVA--> configure communication

ADVA:comms--> configure eth0 dhcp-control enabled
ADVA:comms-->

5. Enter the show eth0 command to verify the changes.

6. Determine the next step.

Current Status Then

Is the eth0 port DHCP status set to the desired state
Go to 8.
of Disabled?
Is the eth0 port DHCP status set to the desired state
Go to 23.
of Enabled?

7. Enter the configure communication command. A next level prompt will appear. For
example:

ADVA--> configure communication

ADVA:comms-->

462 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Communications

Usually, the IP address and network mask information is supplied by

the network administrator.

8. Enter configure eth0 followed by a valid IP address, network mask and default
gateway for the DCN network the NE will be connected to. For example:

ADVA:comms--> configure eth0 ip-address [Link]

[Link] [Link]
ADVA:comms-->
9. Enter the show eth0 command to view the current IP address and network mask
setting for the DCN interface on the GE11x. See the following example:

ADVA:comms--> show eth0

Name : eth0
IP Address : [Link]
Netmask : [Link]
DHCP Role : dhcp-client
DHCP : disabled
DHCP Client ID : FSP150CC-GE114
RIPv2 : disabled
MTU (bytes) : 1500
Physical Address : [Link]
System Default Gateway : [Link]

10. Determine the next step.

Current Status Then

Is the IP address and mask wrong? Go to 8.
Is the IP address and mask correct? Proceed to the next step.

11. Enter the show system command and verify that HTTP and HTTPS are enabled.

12. Determine the next step.

Current Status Then

Are both HTTP and HTTPS enabled? Go to 15.
Is HTTP and/or HTTPS disabled? Proceed to the next step.

13. Enter the following highlighted CLI commands to enable both HTTP and HTTPS.

ADVA:comms--> home
ADVA--> configure system
ADVA:system--> http enabled
ADVA:system--> https enabled

14. Go to 11

15. Use an Ethernet cable to connect the MGMT LAN RJ-45 connector to the network
DCN.

16. Open a browser window and use the configured IP address to access the NE.

17. Determine the next step.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 463

Provision Communications

Current Status Then

Did a login screen display? Proceed to the next step.
Check that you entered the IP address
correctly, that the PC is connected to
the network DCN and has a valid IP
Did the connection to the NE fail? address itself, that the NE is connected
to the network DCN and that the NE’s IP
address is set correctly. If necessary,
return to 2.

18. Enter a valid login User ID and Password. The default login and password are ‘root’
and ‘ChgMeNOW,’ respectively. The security banner will then be displayed.

19. Click on the “Continue” button, and a display similar to the following will appear.

Figure 1: Web-based Element Management System GUI View

20. From the “File” menu, select “Logout”, and verify that the browser shows the Login
screen.

21. Return to the serial port session and logoff by entering quit. See the following example

ADVA:comms--> quit
Logged Out

Login:

22. Disconnect the serial cable from the RS 232 connector on the GE11xPro.

464 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Communications

23. Use an Ethernet cable to connect the MGMT LAN RJ-45 connector to the network
DCN.

24. Enter the show ip-interface eth0 command to view the current DHCP setting for the
DCN interface on the GE11xPro. See the following example:

ADVA--> show eth0

Name : eth0
IP Address : [Link]
Netmask : [Link]
DHCP Role : dhcp-client
DHCP : enabled
DHCP Client ID : FSP150CC-GE114
RIPv2 : disabled
MTU (bytes) : 1500
Physical Address : [Link]
System Default Gateway : [Link]

25. Determine the next step.

Current Status Then

Is the IP address something other than
Proceed to the next step.
[Link]?
Wait a one minute, then retry "Enter
the show ip-interface eth0 command
to view the current DHCP setting for
the DCN interface on the GE11xPro.
See the following example:" above.
Is the IP address still [Link]?
If after 4 attempts, the IP address
still does not appear, contact your
System Administrator. When an IP
address other than [Link] is
present, proceed to the next step.

26. Enter the show system command and verify that HTTP and HTTPS are enabled.

27. Determine the next step.

Current Status Then

Are both HTTP and HTTPS enabled? Go to 30.
Is HTTP and/or HTTPS disabled? Proceed to the next step.

28. Enter the following highlighted CLI commands to enable both HTTP and HTTPS.

ADVA:comms--> home
ADVA--> configure system
ADVA:system--> http enabled
ADVA:system--> https enabled

29. Go to 26

30. Open a browser window and use the configured IP address to access the NE.

31. Determine the next step.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 465

Provision Communications

Current Status Then

Did a login screen display? Proceed to the next step.
Check that you entered the IP address
correctly, that the PC is connected to the
network DCN and has a valid IP address
Did the connection to the NE fail?
itself, that the NE is connected to the net-
work DCN and that the NE’s IP address
is correct. If necessary, return to 24.

32. Enter a valid login User ID and Password. The default login and password are ‘root’
and ‘ChgMeNOW,’ respectively. The warning banner will then be displayed.

33. Click on the “Continue” button, and a display similar to Figure 1 appears.

34. From the “File” menu, select “Logout”, and verify that the browser shows the Login
screen.

35. Return to the serial port session and logoff by entering quit. See the following example

ADVA:comms--> quit
Logged Out

login:

36. Disconnect the serial cable from the RS 232 connector on the GE11xPro.

Set Up the USB Modem Using the Serial Port

The following procedure assumes that the USB modem has been installed, either directly
into the USB port or through a USB cable (if required). (Use this procedure for DCN
connection backup purpose when the DCN (eth0) port is disabled or the DCN connection
is unavailable, and when the system is not working in management traffic bridging mode.)

This process doesn't apply to GO102Pro(S) or GO102Pro(SP).

Perform the following procedure to set up the USB modem port using the RS-232 Serial
Port on the GE11xPro and the CLI command structure. (For more information on the CLI
command structure, see the FSP 150GE11xPro Command Line Interface Reference
Guide.)

You will need the following items for this procedure:

l PC with a serial communications port (e.g., COM1 or COM2)

l 2 Category 5 LAN Cables (with RJ-45 connectors)
l A Micro USB cable (For GE101Pro only)

466 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Communications

l DB-9 to RJ-45 converter (ADVA Optical Networking PN 2036904035-01 or

1036904035, see “Table 11 RJ-45 (RS-232 Serial Console Port) and DB9 Adapter Pin
Assignments” in GE11xPro Installation and Commissioning Manual document.
l A communications program, like TeraTerm Pro Web (a free software terminal emulator
for MS-Windows)
l An Internet browser [Internet Explorer(IE 11 recommended) or an up-to-date version of
Firefox or Chrome.] This procedure is intended to be used during the commissioning
process or used as a stand-alone procedure.
l An ADVA Optical Networking qualified 3G/4G/LTE USB modem, ZTEMT 119 or HW
E1750/Verizon USB551L

This procedure is intended to be used during the commissioning process or used as a

stand-alone procedure.

The default DHCP setting for the GE11xPro DCN port is disabled and as a DHCP
client.

The CLI entries shown in these procedures are for example purposes only. The
information you enter should be determined from local sources. At the finish of the
procedure, the USB modem gets into in-service state and connects itself to the local
wireless network with the credential provided. Please consult the FSP 150GE11xPro
Command Line Interface Reference Guide for the details for running each command.

1. Connect a serial cable between the GE11xPro RS-232 Serial Port and a PC and log in
using procedure: Serial Connection.

2. Navigate to the USB Modem Command Level.

ADVA--> network-element ne-1

ADVA-NE-1--> configure nte nte114-1-1-1
ADVA-NE-1:nte114-1-1-1--> configure usb
ADVA-NE-1:usb_dcn-1-1-1-1-->

3. Determine the next step.

Desired Operation Then

Set a wireless connection with a PIN-authentication
Continue with the next step.
enabled USB Modem
Set a wireless connection with a PIN-authentication dis-
Go to 5.
abled USB Modem
Enable PIN Authentication Go to 12.
Disable PIN Authentication Go to 14.
Unlock the SIM card Go to 16.
Change the PIN Go to 18.

4. Run pin-authenticaition command to get authenticated.

ADVA-NE-1:usb_dcn-1-1-1-1--> pin-authentication ****

5. Run dial-number command to enter the Wireless Access Number.

ADVA-NE-1:usb_dcn-1-1-1-1--> dial-number (650)2222222

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 467

Provision Communications

ADVA-NE-1:usb_dcn-1-1-1-1-->

6. Run user-name command to enter the user name for wireless connection.

ADVA-NE-1:usb_dcn-1-1-1-1--> user-name "tommy J"

ADVA-NE-1:usb_dcn-1-1-1-1-->

7. Run password command to enter the password for wireless connection.

ADVA-NE-1:usb_dcn-1-1-1-1-->password ***********
ADVA-NE-1:usb_dcn-1-1-1-1-->

8. Run admin-state command to provision the USB Modem to In-Service state.

ADVA-NE-1:usb_dcn-1-1-1-1--> admin-state in-service

ADVA-NE-1:usb_dcn-1-1-1-1-->

9. Navigate to the Communication level and run show usb-dcn command. If the USB
DCN port has obtained an IP address, the wireless connection is ready.

ADVA-NE-1:usb_dcn-1-1-1-1--> home
ADVA--> configure communication
ADVA:comms--> configure usb-dcn
ADVA:comms:usb-modem--> show usb-dcn

MTU : 1500
IP Address : [Link]
Subnet Mask : [Link]
Primary DNS : [Link]
Secondary DNS : [Link]

10. Connect to the device with the IP address on CLI, SNMP or GUI.

11. Go to 3.

12. Run enable-pin command to enable PIN Authentication. Once PIN Authentication
is enabled, user needs to run pin-aunthenticaion command to get the
authentication to access the USB Modem.

ADVA-NE-1:usb_dcn-1-1-1-1--> admin-state in-service

ADVA-NE-1:usb_dcn-1-1-1-1--> enable-pin ****

13. Go to 3.

14. Run disable-pin command to disable pin authentication. Once PIN authentication
is disabled, the user doesn’t need to run pin-aunthenticaion to access the USB
Modem.

ADVA-NE-1:usb_dcn-1-1-1-1--> admin-state in-service

ADVA-NE-1:usb_dcn-1-1-1-1--> disable-pin ****

Disabling PIN Authentication is normally performed after Pin Authentication

has been acquired, so that PIN authentication is not necessary for USB
modem access every time when the system reboots or the USB modem is
unplugged.

15. Go to 3.

468 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Communications

16. Run unlock-pin command to unlock the SIM and set a New PIN. This command
should only be run in the case where the PIN has been incorrectly entered 3 times.

ADVA-NE-1:usb_dcn-1-1-1-1--> unlock-pin ******* ****

****
ADVA-NE-1:usb_dcn-1-1-1-1-->

17. Go to 3.

18. Change the PIN

ADVA-NE-1:usb_dcn-1-1-1-1--> change-pin **** **** ****

Set up WiFi Connection via the Wifi Dongle

GE11xPro can be accessed in a WiFi network via an ADVA qualified WiFi Dongle (TP-
LINK TL-WN722N). The WiFi Dongle can be inserted into the GE11xPro’s USB Port
which has an embedded WiFi interface that works in DHCP Server mode. By connecting
the PC to the WiFi network provided via the WiFi Dongle, the PC DCN will be assigned
an IP Address in the same subnet with the GE11xPro’s USB DCN, which enables the
user to access the GE11xPro.

The following procedure assumes that the WiFi Dongle has been installed, either directly
into the USB port or through a USB cable (if required). (Use this procedure for DCN
connection backup purpose when the DCN (eth0) port is disabled or the DCN connection
is unavailable, and when the system is not working in management traffic bridging mode.)

WiFi Dongle IP Interface can coexist with the DCN (eth0) IP Interface. When
they are both in assigned state, their IP Addresses cannot be in the same
subnetwork.

Perform the following procedure to set up the WiFi Connection using the RS-232 Serial
Port on the GE11xPro and the CLI command structure. (For more information on the CLI
command structure, see the FSP 150GE11xPro Command Line Interface Reference
Guide.)

This process below does not apply to GO112Pro(S) or GO102Pro(SP).

You will need the following items for this procedure:

l PC with a serial communications port (e.g., COM1 or COM2)

l 2 Category 5 LAN Cables (with RJ-45 connectors)
l A Micro USB cable (For GE101Pro)

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 469

Provision Communications

l DB-9 to RJ-45 converter (ADVA Optical Networking PN 2036904035-01 or

1036904035, see “Table 11 RJ-45 (RS-232 Serial Console Port) and DB9 Adapter Pin
Assignments” in FSP 150-GE11xPro Installation and Commissioning Manual
document.
l A communications program, like TeraTerm Pro Web (a free software terminal emulator
for MS-Windows)
l An Internet browser [[Link] Explorer (IE 11 recommended) or an up-to-date
version of Firefox or Chrome.] This procedure is intended to be used during the
commissioning process or used as a stand-alone procedure.
l An ADVA Optical Networking qualified WiFi Dongle TP-LINK TL-WN722N

This procedure is intended to be used during the commissioning process or used as a

stand-alone procedure.

The default DHCP setting for the GE11xPro DCN port is disabled and as a DHCP
Client.

The CLI entries shown in these procedures are for example purposes only. The
information you enter should be determined from local sources. At the finish of the
procedure, the WiFi Dongle gets into in-service state and allows PC to connect to itself
via the free WiFi network with the credential provided. Please consult the FSP
150GE11xPro Command Line Interface Reference Guide for the details for running each
command.

1. Connect a serial cable between the GE11xPro RS-232 Serial Port and a PC and logon
using procedure Serial Connection.

When a GE101Pro or GO102Pro is connected to a PC, the driver software

is automatically installed and a new COM Port appears in the Device
Manger of the PC.

2. Navigate to the Configure USB Port command level.

ADVA--> network-element ne-1

ADVA-NE-1--> configure nte nte112pro_h-1-1-1
ADVA-NE-1:nte112pro_h-1-1-1--> configure usb
ADVA-NE-1:nte112pro_h-1-1-1:usb-->

3. Enter the delete mobile-modem command to delete the default mobile modem
entity.

ADVA-NE-1:nte112pro_h-1-1-1:usb--> delete mobile-modem

Since the WiFi Dongle has been plugged in the USB Port and a default
Mobile Modem entity exists under USB Port, a “Modem Mismatch” alarm will
be raised. The “Modem Mismatch” alarm can be cleared by deleting the
default Mobile Modem entity.

4. Enter the add wifi-dongle command to add a WiFi Dongle entity.

470 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Communications

ADVA-NE-1:nte112pro_h-1-1-1:usb--> add wifi-dongle

5. Enter the configure wifi-dongle command level.

ADVA-NE-1:nte112pro_h-1-1-1:usb--> configure wifi-

dongle

6. Edit the WiFi Dongle settings and set the admin-state to In-Service as desired.

ADVA-NE-1:nte112pro_h-1-1-1:wifi_dongle-1-1-1-1-->
admin-state in-service

If the WiFi Dongle is plugged out when the Administrative State has
been provisioned to In-Service, a “Modem Removed” alarm will be
raised. This alarm can be cleared by plugging the WiFi Dongle back
into the USB Port or changing the WiFi Dongle’s Administrative State
to Unassigned.

7. Enter the show wifi-dongle command to view the current settings for the WiFi
Dongle.

ADVA-NE-1:nte112pro_h-1-1-1:usb--> show wifi-dongle

Name : wlan0
Alias :
Admin State : in-service
Operational State : normal
Secondary States : act
SSID : iron's wifi
dongleioioioijju216
Encryption method : wpa-wpa2-psk
Password : ChgMeNOW

8. Enter the configure wifi-dongle command level under configure

communications.

ADVA--> configure communication

ADVA:comms--> configure wifi-dongle

9. Edit the WiFi Dongle settings as desired and enter the show wifi-dongle
command to view the settings.

ADVA:comms:wifi-dongle--> show wifi-dongle

Name : wlan0
IP Address : [Link]
Subnet Mask : [Link]
DHCP Role : dhcp-server
Allocated IP Address Start : [Link]
Allocated IP Address End : [Link]
Accessed Users : [Link]
[Link]*[Link] [Link]

10. Connect to the WiFi network named by WiFi Dongle’s SSID.

A Type the network security key window appears

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 471

Provision Communications

Figure 2: Security Key Required to Connect to the WiFi Network

11. Proceed to connect to the Wifi network by entering the Security Key as required.

The Security Key is the password set by the command ADVA-NE-

1:nte112pro_h-1-1-1:wifi_dongle-1-1-1-1--
>password.

12. Open a browser window and use the IP Address configured above to access the
GE11xPro.

Up to 5 clients can access the GE11xPro simultaneously via the WiFi

Dongle. The client information is shown by MAC Address and IP
Address (see Figure 3 on p. 472).

Figure 3: Wifi Dongle IP Interface Configuration and Accessed Users

472 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Communications

Browser-based IP Connection
This procedure details the steps used to access a web-accessible GE11xPro (HTTP
and/or HTTPS enabled) using a web browser on a PC with connectivity to the DCN or
USB modem the GE11xPro is connected to.

To ensure a reliable connection to a GE11xPro over an Ethernet DCN

network, the IP address of the GE11xPro’s Management Interface
should be configured to a unique address compatible with the network
it is to be present on.

To make an Ethernet DCN connection to the GE11xPro, perform the following steps:

1. Ensure that a unique IP address has been configured for the GE11xPro’s Management
Interface or USB modem, See Set Up the GE11xPro DCN (eth0) Port Using the Serial
Port or Set Up the USB Modem Using the Serial Port.

2. Ensure that a physical Ethernet connection from the DCN PC to the GE11xPro has
been established or the USB modem/Wifi Dongle is provisioned and operational.

3. Verify the user’s PC IP address and netmask match the values provided by the
Network Administrator, so that it has access to the network the GE11xPro is on.

4. Establish a connection to the GE11xPro Management Interface or USB modem via an

Internet browser (e.g. Internet Explorer (IE 11 recommended) or an up-to-date version
of Firefox or Chrome) by performing the following:

a) Open up the appropriate Internet browser and enter the following address:
[Link]
or
[Link]
where [Link] is the IP address of the GE11xPro to be
connected to. This will be the IP address that has been assigned to the
GE11xPro during initial IP configuration (if none has been set, the default
address is [Link]).
The Web Interface will open and the Login Screen will be displayed.
b) Login with the following details:
• Account name - root (or as appropriate, see "Provision Secure
Access" on page 127).
• Password - ChgMeNOW (or as appropriate).
Security details will also be displayed on the screen.
c) Press Continue.
The Web Interface GE11xPro Main Menu will be displayed, as described
in Chapter 3, Web-based Element Management System.

Commands from the Internet browser are authenticated by a ‘per-

session cookie’ (i.e., a cookie that is not stored permanently). If a login
to the Web Interface is not possible, check that the INTERNET
browser is configured to accept such cookies.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 473

Provision Communications

Edit DCN (eth0) Configuration

The Management LAN Interface, with IPv4 and IPv6 modes both supported, can be
configured as a DHCP Server, as a DHCP Client, or have DHCP functionality disabled
in either IP mode. If DHCP Client mode is not used, the IP Address and Netmask can be
edited. Additionally, RIPv2/RIPng functionality can be enabled or disabled. This
procedure covers editing the DCN options.

The factory default settings are with the DHCP (v4 & v6) disabled in the client role with
RIPv2/RIPng disabled.

The following procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address
and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN. (See Set Up the GE11xPro DCN (eth0) Port
Using the Serial Port ) and is logged on using the web-based GUI. For more information
on the configuration settings and rules, see DCN (eth0) (Edit Configuration).

From the Configuration view with the Communications tree expanded:

1. Right click on “DCN (eth0)” and select Edit Configuration. The following “Edit DCN
(eth0)” screen displays.

Figure 4: Edit DCN (eth0)

2. Select IP Mode - IPv4 only, IPv6 only or IPv4 and IPv6.

3. Determine the next step.

Desired Function Then

Set up DCN as a DHCP Server? Continue with the next step.
Configure DCN as a DHCP Client? Go to 7.
Disable DHCP functionality? Go to 10.

474 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Communications

Desired Function Then

Configure RIPv2/RIPng? Go to 13.
Manually Configure IP Address and Netmask? Go to 15.
Provisioning complete? End of Procedure

4. Perform the following settings if IPv4 is a selected IP Mode:

Select DHCP - Enabled

Select DHCP Role - DHCP Server

Enter the desired IP Address

Enter the desired Netmask

The range of the Netmask entered determines the number of IP Addresses

available for this server to assign.

Enable/Disable RIPv2

Click on OK

In order for the new IP Address and DHCP server function (IP Address
range) to become active, DHCP Control must be cycled.

5. Perform the following settings if IPv6 is a selected IP Mode:

Select DHCPv6 - Enabled

Select DHCPv6 Role - DHCP Server

Enter the desired IPv6 Unicast Address

Enable/Disable RIPng

Enable/Disable IPv6 RA Prefix Enabled

Enter the desired IPv6 RA Prefix if IPv6 RA Prefix Enabled is Enabled

Select the checkbox next to Edit System Default and Enter the Gateway IPv6
Address

Click on OK

6. Go to 3

7. Perform the following settings if IPv4 is a selected IP Mode:

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 475

Provision Communications

Select DHCP - Enabled

Select DHCP Role - DHCP Client

Enable/Disable RIPv2

Select/Enter the following DHCP options that are only applicable in IPv4 mode:

a) Enable/Disable DHCP Client ID Control

b) Select (if desired) DHCP Client ID Type (only available if DHCP Client ID
Control is Enabled)
c) Edit (if desired) DHCP Client ID (only available if DHCP Client ID Control
is Enabled and User Defined is selected as DHCP Client ID Type)
d) Enable/Disable DHCP Class ID Control
e) Enable/Disable DHCP Host Name Control
f) Select (if desired) DHCP Host Name Type (only available if DHCP Host
Name Control is Enabled)
g) Edit (if desired) DHCP Host Name (only available if DHCP Host Name
Control is Enabled)
h) Enable/Disable DHCP Vendor Information Control
i) Select a desired DHCP Vendor Information Type
j) Edit (if desired) DHCP Vendor Information if the selected DHCP Vendor
Information Type is User Defined.
k) Enable/Disable DHCP Log Server Control
l) Enable/Disable NTP Server Control
8. Perform the following settings if IPv6 is a selected IP Mode:

Select DHCPv6 - Enabled

Select DHCPv6 Role - DHCP Client

Enable/Disable Stateless Address Auto Configuration

Enable/Disable RIPng

Enable/Disable IPv6 RA Prefix (RA Prefix cannot be enabled while

Select the Edit System Default checkbox if desired, and enter the desired
Gateway IPv6 Address

Click on OK

476 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Communications

Figure 5: Edit DCN - DHCP Enabled Client Role

9. Go to 3

10. Select/Enter the following options if IPv4 is a selected IP Mode:

Select DHCP - Disabled

Enter the desired IPv4 Address

Enter the desired Netmask

Enable/Disable RIPv2

Select the Edit System Default Gateway checkbox if desired, and enter the
desired Gateway IPv4 Address

11. Select/Enter the following options if IPv6 is a selected IP mode:

Select DHCPv6 - Disabled

Enter the desired IPv6 Unicast Address if Stateless Address Auto Configuration
is Disabled

Enable/Disable RIPng

Enable/Disable IPv6 RA Prefix Enabled (System will automatically set it to

Disabled if Stateless Address Auto Configuration is Enabled).

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 477

Provision Communications

Enter a desired IPv6 RA Prefix (only editable when Stateless Address Auto
Configuration is Disabled)

Select the Edit System Default Gateway checkbox if desired, and enter the
desired Gateway IPv6 Address

Click on OK

12. Go to 3

13. Select the desired RIPv2/RIPng setting

Click on OK

14. Go to 3

15. Select DHCP - Disabled

Enter the desired IP Address for selected IP mode

Enter the desired Netmask if IPv4 is included in selected IP mode

Prior to entering an IPv6 Unicast Address, Stateless Address Auto

Configuration and DHCPv6 should both be Disabled.

Select the desired RIPv2/RIPng setting

Click on OK

16. Go to 3

Configure Management Tunnel

The GE11xPro supports the configuration of a single management tunnel on each
Network or Access interface port or LAG group, and up to 2 management tunnels are
supported at one time. The tunnel mode supported includes VLAN Based and MAC
Based. The GE11xPro supports management tunnels that use Ethernet or PPP
encapsulation. PPP can only be used with ADVA Optical Networking NIDs that are
directly connected and not using Management Traffic Bridging (implements an Ethernet
Bridge between the eth0 and all configured Management Tunnels, allowing a single IP
address for all management interfaces on the system and eliminates the need for static
routes, routing protocols or proxy ARP in an SNE/GNE configuration and supports MAC
learning and flooding of un-learned MAC addresses).

478 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Communications

The following procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address
and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN. (See Set Up the GE11xPro DCN (eth0) Port
Using the Serial Port ) and is logged on using the web-based GUI.

From the Configuration view with the Communications and Management Tunnels entities
expanded:

1. Determine the next step.

Management Traffic Bridging Enabled? Then

No Continue with the next step.
Yes Go to 9.

If Management Traffic Bridging is desired, it must first be enabled at

the System level. See Configure System.

2. Determine the next step.

Desired Function Then

Create a management tunnel? Continue with the next step.
Display a management tunnel? Go to 5.
Edit a management tunnel? Go to Figure 8.
Delete a management tunnel? Go to 8.
Provisioning complete? End of Procedure.

3. Right click on “NE-1” in the selection tree pane under “Management Tunnels”, select
Create Tunnel and the following screen displays:

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 479

Provision Communications

Figure 6: Create Management Tunnel

4. Enter/select the following data to configure the management tunnel:

(see Management Tunnel Configuration Options and Rules for details on each
item.)

Identification

Management Tunnel Index - integer from 1 to 255

Management Tunnel Name - 1 to 15 alphanumeric characters

Associated Port - select from drop-down list - only one tunnel per port

Interface

Encapsulation Type - Ethernet or PPP

IP Mode - IPv4 Only, IPv6 Only or IPv4 and IPv6

IPv4 Networking

DHCP - Enabled/Disabled - default is Disabled (not applicable for PPP)

Enable/Disable DHCP Log Server Control (not applicable for PPP)

Enable/Disable DHCP NTP Server Control (not applicable for PPP)

Enable/Disable DHCP Client ID Control (not applicable for PPP)

Select a desired Client ID Type (only available if DHCP Client ID Control is

Enabled) (not applicable for PPP)

480 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Communications

Edit (if desired) DHCP Client ID if the selected DHCP Client ID Type is User
Defined (only available if DHCP Client ID Control is Enabled) (not applicable for
PPP)

Enable/Disable DHCP Class ID Control (not applicable for PPP)

Enable/Disable DHCP Host Name Control (not applicable for PPP)

Select a desired DHCP Host Name Type (not applicable for PPP)

Edit (if desired) DHCP Host Name if the selected DHCP Host Name Type is
User Defined.

Enable/Disable DHCP Vendor Information Control (not applicable for PPP)

Select a desired DHCP Vendor Information Type (not applicable for PPP)

Edit (if desired) DHCP Vendor Information if the selected DHCP Vendor
Information Type is User Defined.

IP Address - valid IPV4 address if IP Mode is IPv4 Only or IPv4 and IPv6 and
when DHCP is Disabled (not applicable for PPP)

Subnet Mask - valid IPV4 mask if IP Mode is IPv4 Only or IPv4 and IPv6 and
when DHCP is Disabled (not applicable for PPP)

IPv4 System Default Gateway (not applicable for PPP)

Select the checkbox next to Edit System Default Gateway if DHCP is disabled.

Enter a desired Gateway IPv4 Address if Edit System Default Gateway is

checked.

IPv6 Networking

DHCPv6 - Enabled/Disabled - default is Disabled (not applicable for PPP)

Enable/Disable Stateless Address Auto Configuration (not applicable for PPP)

Enable/Disable IPv6 RA Prefix Enabled (not applicable for PPP)

Enter a desired IPv6 Unicast Address when DHCPv6 and Stateless Address
Auto Configuration are both Disabled (not applicable for PPP)

Enter a desired IPv6 RA Prefix for IPv6 Route Advertise when IPv6 RA Prefix
Enabled is Enabled (not applicable for PPP)

IPv6 System Default Gateway (not applicable for PPP)

Select the checkbox next to Edit System Default Gateway when either or both
of DHCPv6 and Stateless Address Auto Configuration is Disabled

Enter a desired Gateway IPv6 Address if Edit System Default Gateway is

checked.

Layer 2 Configuration

Tunnel Mode - Select from VLAN Based and MAC Based

C-TAG VLAN Enabled/Disabled

C-TAG VLAN Id - 1 to 4095 - default is 4095

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 481

Provision Communications

S-Tag VLAN - Enabled/Disabled - default is Disabled

S-Tag VLAN Id - 1 to 4095 - default is 4095 (only applicable if S-Tag VLAN is

Enabled)

IPv4 RIP

RIPv2 - Enabled/Disabled - default is Disabled (not applicable for PPP)

IPv6 RIP

RIPng - Enabled/Disabled - default is Disabled (not applicable for PPP)

Bandwidth

CIR - 64000 to 8000000 bps - default is 256000 bps (Max of 8 Mbps for all
management tunnels combined)

EIR - 0 to 80000000 bps - default is 768000 bps

Buffer Size - 32 to 15000 KB - default is 32 KB

COS - 0 to 7 - default is 7

Click on OK

CAUTION:When there is a MAC-based Management Tunnel, PTPoUDP

and TWAMP do not work properly on the same port. Also, Y.1731 Lose
Measurement (LM) on the same port cannot count the received ARP
packets for other application ( for instance, EoMPLS) correctly.

5. Expand the NE-1 entity under Management Tunnels, left click on the management
tunnel ID and verify the data entered. (see Figure 7 on p. 483)

6. If anything in the Configuration, RIP or Bandwidth data requires modification, right

click on the management tunnel ID and select Edit Configuration (see Figure 8 on
p. 484)

Edit the data as appropriate.

Click on OK.

7. Go to Step 1.

482 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Communications

Figure 7: Display Management Tunnel Configuration

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 483

Provision Communications

Figure 8: Edit Management Tunnel

8. To delete a management tunnel, right click on the management tunnel ID and select
Delete (see the following figure).

Click on OK.

Figure 9: Delete Management Tunnel

9. Determine the next step.

484 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Communications

Desired Function Then

Create a management tunnel? Continue with the next step.
Display a management tunnel? Go to 12.
Edit a management tunnel? Go to 13.
Delete a management tunnel? Go to 8.
Provisioning complete? End of Procedure.

10. Right click on “NE-1” in the selection tree pane under “Management Tunnels”, select
Create Tunnel and the following screen displays:

Figure 10: Create Management Tunnel - Bridging Enabled

11. Enter/select the following data to configure the management tunnel:

(see Management Tunnel Configuration Options and Rules for details on each
item.)

Identification

Management Tunnel Index - integer from 1 to 255

Management Tunnel Name - 1 to 15 alphanumeric characters

Associated Port - select from drop-down list - only one tunnel per port

Interface

Encapsulation Type - Ethernet

Layer 2 Configuration

Tunnel Mode - VLAN Based and MAC Based

C-TAG VLAN Enabled/Disabled

C-TAG VLAN ID - 1 to 4095 - default is 4095

VLAN Id - 1 to 4095 - default is 4095

S-Tag VLAN - Enabled/Disabled - default is Disabled

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 485

Provision Communications

S-Tag VLAN Id - 1 to 4095 - default is 4095 (only applicable if S-Tag VLAN is

Enabled)

Bandwidth

CIR - 64000 to 8000000 bps - default is 256000 bps (Max of 8 Mbps for all
management tunnels combined)

EIR - 0 to 80000000 bps - default is 768000 bps

Buffer Size - 32 to 15000 KB - default is 32 KB

COS - 0 to 7 - default is 7

Click on OK

12. Expand the NE-1 entity under Management Tunnels, left click on the management
tunnel ID and verify the data entered. (see figure below)

Figure 11: Display Management Tunnel Configuration - Bridging

13. If anything in the Configuration data requires modification, right click on the
management tunnel ID and select Edit Configuration (see the following figure):

Figure 12: Edit Management Tunnel - Bridging

486 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Communications

Edit the appropriate data.

Click on OK.

14. Go to Step 1.

Configure IPv6 over IPv4 Tunnel

The GE11x supports the configuration of one IPv6 over IPv4 tunnel per system. With an
IPv4 management interface as the tunnel entrance and with a specified destination IPv4
address as the tunnel exit, the IPv6 packets encapsulated in IPv4 packets can be
delivered across an IPv4 infrastructure. At the exit, the IPv6 packets are decapsulated
and forwarded to an IPv6 unicast address destination. By using the IPv6 over IPv4
tunnel, IPv6 hosts can access GE11x products in an IPv6 network without upgrading the
IPv4 infrastructure between them.

The following procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address
and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN, (See Set Up the GE11xPro DCN (eth0) Port
Using the Serial Port ) and is logged on using the web-based GUI.

From the Configuration view with the Communications and IPv6 over Tunnels entities
expanded:

1. Determine the next step:

Desired Function Then

Create an IPv6 over IPv4 tunnel? Continue with the next step.
Display an IPv6 over IPv4 tunnel? Go to 6.
Delete an IPv6 over IPv4 tunnel? Go to 7
Provisioning complete? End of Procedure.

2. Right click on “NE-1” in the selection tree pane under IPv6 over IPv4 Tunnels, select
“Create Tunnel” and the following screen displays:

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 487

Provision Communications

Figure 13: Create IPv6 over IPv4 Tunnel

3. Enter/Select the following data to configure the IPv6 over IPv4 tunnel:

(see IPv6 over IPv4 Tunnel Configuration Options and Rules for details on each
item.)

Identification

IPv6 over v4 Tunnel Index - 1, default and unique value.

IPv6 over v4 Tunnel Name - a string up to15 alphanumeric characters

Associated IPv4 Interface - select from drown-down list - one IPv4 management
interface

Tunnel

Mode - select a desired tunnel mode - Configured, Auto 6o4, IPv4 Compatible, or
ISATAP

Tunnel Address (options vary according to different Tunnel Mode)

Destination IPv4 Address - valid IPv4 destination address (applicable to

Configured Mode)

IPv4 Unicast Address - valid IPv6 unicast address (applicable to Configured

Tunnel Mode)

4. Potential Router - valid IPv4 address (applicable to ISATAP Tunnel Mode)

Click on OK.

5. Go to 1.

6. Expand the NE-1 entity under IPv6 over IPv4 Tunnels, click on the IPv6 over IPv4
Tunnel ID and verify the data entered.

488 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Communications

Figure 14: Display IPv6 over IPv4 Tunnel

7. To delete an IPv6 over IPv4 Tunnel, right click on the tunnel ID and select Delete.

Click on OK.

Figure 15: Delete an IPv6 over IPv4 Tunnel

Configure Source Address

The GE11xPro can have multiple IP addresses assigned when using management
tunnels in addition to or in place of the Management LAN interface (System IP Address).
When management conditions or messages are sent over another interface, it is often
desirable or even necessary that the message be traceable to the Management LAN IP
address rather than the address of the interface carrying the message. Setting the Source
Address ensures that this address will be used for all management functions for the unit.
For details on the settings and options for Source Address, see Source Address Config
(Edit Source Address Config)

The GE11xPro supports the configuration of a single management tunnel on each

Network/Access interface or LAG. Up to 2 management tunnels can be supported at one
time.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 489

Provision Communications

The following procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address
and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN, (See Set Up the GE11xPro DCN (eth0) Port
Using the Serial Port ) and is logged on using the web-based GUI.

From the Configuration view with the Communications tree expanded:

1. Right click on “Communications” in the selection tree pane, select Edit Source
Address Config and the following screen displays (see the following figure):

Figure 16: Edit Source Address Config

2. Enter/select the following data to configure Source Address:

Address Type - Select “System IP Address” or “Outgoing Interface IP”

Source Address Interface Name:

If Address Type is “System IP Address”, select the desired Source

Address Interface Name from the drop-down list.
If Address Type is “Outgoing Interface IP”, Source Address Interface
Name is fixed as “eth0” (Management LAN)
SNMP v1 Interface Name:

Select the desired interface name from the drop-down list.

Click on OK

Any management interface or tunnel interface configured with IPv4

address could be the candidates for Snmp v1 Interface Name, and
Source Address Interface Name. (for System IP Address Access
Type)

490 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Communications

Add/Delete Static Route

Static Routes may be displayed, created or deleted. To edit an existing static route,
delete it and add a new static route.

The following procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address
and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN. (See Set Up the GE11xPro DCN (eth0) Port
Using the Serial Port ) and is logged on using the web-based GUI.

From the Configuration view with the Communications tree expanded:

1. Determine the next step.

Desired Function Then

Add a Static Route? Continue with the next step.
Display Static Routes? Go to 5.
Delete Static Route? Go to 7.
Provisioning complete? End of Procedure.

2. Right click on “Communications” in the selection tree pane and select Add Static
Route and the following screen displays (see the following figure):

Figure 17: Add Static Route

3. Enter/select the following data to create a static route:

Destination IP Address - valid IPV4 address

Subnet Mask - valid IPV4 mask

Gateway IP Address - valid IPV4 address of Gateway

Interface Name - Select desired Interface Name from the drop-down list.

Metric - 0 to 65535

Advertise Route - select “Disabled or Enabled”

Click on OK

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 491

Provision Communications

If Management Traffic Bridging is enabled, only eth0 is allowed for Interface

Name. To enable Management Traffic Bridging, refer to Table 56 on p. 788.

4. Go to Step 1

5. Left click on “Communications” and select the “Static Routes” tab. (see Figure 18)

Figure 18: Display Static Routes

6. Go to Step1

7. To delete a Static Route, right click on Communications and select “Delete Static
Route” (see the following figure):

Figure 19: Delete Static Route

Click the radio button in the “Delete” column for each route to be deleted.

Click on OK.

8. Go to Step 1.

492 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Communications

Add/Delete Static ARP Entry

Static ARP Entries may be displayed, created or deleted. To edit an existing static ARP
entry, delete it and add a new static ARP entry.

The following procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address
and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN. (See Set Up the GE11xPro DCN (eth0) Port
Using the Serial Port ) and is logged on using the web-based GUI.

From the Configuration view with the Communications tree expanded:

1. Determine the next step.

Desired Function Then

Add a Static ARP Entry? Continue with the next step.
Display Static ARP Entries? Go to 5.
Delete Static ARP Entry? Go to 7.
Provisioning complete? End of Procedure.

2. Right click on “Communications” in the selection tree pane and select Add Static
Route and the following screen displays (see the following figure):

Figure 20: Add Static ARP Entry

3. Enter/select the following data to create a Static ARP Entry:

IP Address - valid IPV4 address

MAC Address

Interface Name - Select desired Interface Name from the drop-down list.

Click on OK.

If Management Traffic Bridging is enabled, only eth0 is allowed for Interface

Name. To enable Management Traffic Bridging, refer to Table 56 on p. 788.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 493

Provision Communications

4. Go to Step 1.

5. Left click on “Communications” and select the “Static ARP Entry” tab. (see the
following figure)

Figure 21: Display Static ARP Entries

6. Go to Step 1.

7. To delete a Static ARP Entry, right click on Communications and select “Delete Static
ARP Entry” (see the following figure):

Figure 22: Delete Static ARP Entry

Click the radio button in the “Delete” column for each ARP entry to be deleted.

Click on OK.

8. Go to Step 1.

Add/Delete IPv6 Static Route

IPv6 Static Routes may be displayed, created or deleted. To edit an existing IPv6 static
route, delete it and add a new static route.

The following procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address
and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN. (See Set Up the GE11xPro DCN (eth0) Port
Using the Serial Port ) and is logged on using the web-based GUI.

From the Configuration view with the Communications tree expanded:

494 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Communications

1. Determine the next step.

Desired Function Then

Add IPv6 Static Route? Continue with the next step.
Display IPv6 Static Routes? Go to 5.
Delete IPv6 Static Routes? Go to 7.
Provisioning complete? End of Procedure.

2. Right click on “Communications” in the selection tree pane and select Add IPv6 Static
Route and the following screen displays (see the following figure):

Figure 23: Add IPv6 Static Route

3. Enter/select the following data to create a static route: (see IPv6 Static Route (Add
IPv6 Static Route) for details on each item.)

Destination IPv6 Address - valid IPv6 unicast address

Gateway IP Address - valid IPv6 address of Gateway

Interface Name - Select desired Interface Name from the drop-down list, by
default the management interface in IPv6 mode will automatically appear for
selection.

Metric - 0 to 65535, default is 1

Advertise Route - select “Disabled or Enabled”

Click on OK

If Management Traffic Bridging is enabled, only eth0 configured with

IPv6 unicast address is allowed for Interface Name. To enable
Management Traffic Bridging, refer to Table 56 on p. 788.

4. Go to Step 1

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 495

Provision Communications

5. Left click on “Communications” and select the “IPv6 Static Routes” tab. (see Figure
24)

Figure 24: Display IPv6 Static Routes

6. Go to Step1

7. To delete an IPv6 Static Route, right click on Communications and select “Delete
IPv6 Static Route” (see the following figure):

Figure 25: Delete IPv6 Static Route

Click the radio button in the “Delete” column for each IPv6 route to be deleted.

Click on OK.

8. Go to Step 1.

Add/Delete IPv6 Static Neighbor Entry

IPv6 Static Neighbor Entries may be displayed, created or deleted. To edit an existing
IPv6 static neighbor entry, delete it and add a new IPv6 static neighbor entry.

496 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Communications

The following procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address
and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN. (See Set Up the GE11xPro DCN (eth0) Port
Using the Serial Port ) and is logged on using the web-based GUI.

From the Configuration view with the Communications tree expanded:

1. Determine the next step.

Desired Function Then

Add an IPv6 Static Neighbor Entry? Continue with the next step.
Display IPv6 Static Neighbor Entries? Go to 5.
Delete an IPv6 Static Neighbor Entry? Go to 7.
Provisioning complete? End of Procedure.

2. Right click on “Communications” in the selection tree pane and select Add IPv6 Static
Neighbor Entry and the following screen displays (see the following figure):

Figure 26: Add IPv6 Static Neighbor Entry

3. Enter/select the following data to create an IPv6 Static Neighbor Entry: (seeIPv6
Static Neighbor Entry (Add IPv6 Static Neighbor Entry) for details on each item.)

IP Address - valid IPv6 unicast address

MAC Address

Interface Name - Select desired Interface Name from the drop-down list. By
default, a management tunnel configured with IPv6 address will appear for
selection.

Click on OK.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 497

Provision Communications

If Management Traffic Bridging is enabled, only eth0 if configured with

IPv6 unicast address is allowed for Interface Name. To enable
Management Traffic Bridging, refer to Table 56 on p. 788.

4. Go to Step 1.

5. Left click on “Communications” and select the “IPv6 Static Neighbor Entry” tab. (see
the following figure)

Figure 27: Display IPv6 Static Neighbor Entries

6. Go to Step 1.

7. To delete an IPv6 Static Neighbor Entry, right click on Communications and select
“Delete IPv6 Static Neighbor Entry” (see the following figure):

Figure 28: Delete IPv6 Static Neighbor Entry

Click the radio button in the “Delete” column for each IPv6 static neighbor entry
to be deleted.

Click on OK.

498 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Communications

8. Go to Step 1.

Add/Delete IPv6 Static Proxy ND Entry

IPv6 Static Proxy ND Entries may be displayed, created or deleted. To edit an existing
IPv6 static Proxy ND entry, delete it and add a new IPv6 static proxy ND entry.

The following procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address
and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN. (See Set Up the GE11xPro DCN (eth0) Port
Using the Serial Port ) and is logged on using the web-based GUI.

From the Configuration view with the Communications tree expanded:

1. Determine the next step.

Desired Function Then

Add an IPv6 Static Proxy ND Entry? Continue with the next step.
Display IPv6 Static Proxy ND Entries? Go to 5.
Delete an IPv6 Static Proxy ND Entry? Go to 7.
Provisioning complete? End of Procedure.

2. Right click on “Communications” in the selection tree pane and select Add IPv6 Static
ProxyND Entry and the following screen displays (see the following figure):

Figure 29: Add IPv6 Static Proxy ND Entry

3. Enter/select the following data to create an IPv6 Static Proxy ND Entry: (see IPv6
Static Proxy ND Entry (Add IPv6 Static Proxy ND Entry) for details on each item.)

IP Address - valid IPv6 unicast address

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 499

Provision Communications

Interface Name - Select desired Interface Name from the drop-down list. By
default, a management tunnel configured with IPv6 address will appear for
selection.

Click on OK.

If Management Traffic Bridging is enabled, only eth0 if configured with

IPv6 unicast address is allowed for Interface Name. To enable
Management Traffic Bridging, refer to Table 56 on p. 788.

4. Go to Step 1.

5. Left click on “Communications” and select the “IPv6 Static ProxyND Entry” tab. (see
the following figure)

Figure 30: Display IPv6 Static Proxy ND Entries

6. Go to Step 1.

7. To delete an IPv6 Static Proxy ND Entry, right click on Communications and select
“Delete IPv6 Static ProxyND Entry” (see the following figure):

500 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Communications

Figure 31: Delete IPv6 Static Proxy ND Entry

Click the radio button in the “Delete” column for each IPv6 static proxy ND entry
to be deleted.

Click on OK.

8. Go to Step 1.

Configure Access Control List

See Configure ACL.

Configure USB Modem Using the Web-based GUI

The USB DCN port provides a wireless management port that can be accessed via a
3G/4G/LTE network, so that the user can connect to the GE11x without local DCN cable
connections, or it can work as a back-up management port when the DCN LAN port is
disconnected.

When the primary management connection is in service and working, and SNMP is
provisioned, GE11x reports its public IP address acquired from the 3G/4G/LTE service
provider to a Network manager via the primary management connection (DCN). If the
primary management connection fails, management communications may be made to
the GE11x via a public 3G/4G/LTE network.

The following is a procedure for provisioning a USB modem to enable the wireless
connection to a GE11x using the web-based GUI. If there is no DCN connected and only
a USB DCN is provided for this GE11x, refer to Set Up the USB Modem Using the Serial
Port to provision the USB DCN port using CLI commands.

Note that the terms “USB DCN” and “USB modem” will be used in the following
provisioning procedures, instead of repeatedly emphasizing the specific wireless network
type.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 501

Provision Communications

The process does not apply to GO102Pro(S) or GO102Pro(SP).

1. Select Configuration view. Expand the System Name, NE-1 and NTE11x entities in
the Selection Tree.

2. Determine the next step.

Desired Function Description Then

Edit USB modem con- Provision or edit USB Modem Con- Continue with the
figuration figuration. next step.
Observe current USB Observe current USB USB modem con-
modem configuration figuration and SIM status to determine Go to 5.
and SIM status appropriate action
Requires entry using a PIN. (Can be
applied if PIN/PUK status = Disabled.)
When the PIN is Enabled, if the USB
Enable PIN Go to 7.
Modem is unplugged or the system
reboots, the USB Modem SIM must be
unlocked by entering the PIN.
Allows access without entering a PIN.
Disable PIN Go to 10.
(Can be applied if PIN/PUK status = OK.)
Change existing PIN. (Can be applied if
Change PIN Go to 13.
PIN/PUK status = OK.)
Enter the PIN. (Can be applied if PIN/PUK
PIN authentication Go to 16.
status = Input PIN.)
If the PIN input fails for three times during
PIN Authentication, the USB Modem SIM
will be locked; therefore, the SIM needs to
Unlock with PUK Go to 19.
be unlocked by entering the PUK and new
PIN. (Can be applied if PIN/PUK status =
Input PUK.)
Observe Cellular Net- Observe the USB modem network inform-
Go to 21.
work information ation and IP address
Verify the cellular network connection by
Verify Cellular Network logging onto the GE11x via the IP address
Go to 23.
Connection acquired from the 3G/4G/LTE service pro-
vider
All desired provisioning options are com-
Provisioning Complete pleted and current 3G/4G/LTE status has End of Procedure
been verified

3. Right click on the USB Modem entity and select Edit Configuration. The following
screen displays.

502 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Communications

Figure 32: Edit USB Modem Configuration

4. Fill in the Alias as appropriate. Select “IS” for Administrative State. The Modem
information and Physical Configuration information will display automatically once the
USB modem is plugged in. Enter the Dial-Up Configuration. Click on OK.

5. Left click on “USB Modem” under NTE11x. Verify the data entered and observe the
SIM status by selecting the corresponding tab (see the following two figures). Refer to
Table 10 for SIM status result descriptions. The SIM status will be used in the next
step.

Figure 33: USB Modem Configuration Information

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 503

Provision Communications

Figure 34: USB Modem SIM Card Status

Table 10: SIM Card Status Description

SIM Status Type Result Description
OK Unlocked status
SIM Status Network reject Invalid SIM
Not inserted SIM not inserted
Disabled PIN protection is disabled
PIN protection is enabled and PIN code is
OK
correct.
Input PIN PIN authentication is required to unlock SIM
PIN/PUK Status
Pin protection is enabled and the PIN code
Input PUK is locked: 3 failed attempts to input PIN has
occurred. Unlock with PUK is required.
Locked SIM is locked, contact SIM provider
International Mobile Subscriber Identity of
IMSI code
IMSI the SIM card.
Not Available SIM is removed
Current Received Signal Strength Indicator.
High, Medium or
This value changes automatically according
Current RSSI Low
to the actual signal strength.
Not Available SIM is removed

6. Use the SIM status information from the previous step to determine the next step.

504 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Communications

Desired Function Then

Enable PIN?

(Can be applied if PIN/PUK status = Disabled.) When

the PIN is Enabled, if the USB Modem is unplugged or Continue with the next step.
the system reboots, the USB Modem SIM must be
unlocked by entering the PIN.
Disable PIN? Allows access without entering PIN
authentication. Once the PIN is disabled, operations
such as Change PIN, PIN Authentication, Unlock Go to 10.
with PUK are disabled. (Can be applied if PIN/PUK
status = OK.)
PIN authentication required (PIN/PUK status = input
Go to 16.
PIN)?
Unlock with PUK required (PIN/PUK status = Input
Go to 19.
PUK)?
Provisioning is complete - Verify cellular Networking
Go to 21.
Connection?

7. To enable USB Modem PIN, right click on the USB Modem entity and select “Enable
PIN”. The following screen displays.

Figure 35: Enable USB Modem PIN

8. Enter the PIN provided by wireless ISP. Click OK.

When the PIN is Enabled, if the USB Modem is unplugged or the system
reboots, the USB Modem SIM must be unlocked by entering the PIN upon
each occurrence.

9. Go to 5 to observe the current configuration and SIM status to determine the next step.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 505

Provision Communications

10. To disable USB Modem PIN, right click on the USB Modem entity and select “Disable
PIN”. The following screen displays.

Figure 36: Disable USB Modem PIN

11. Input PIN and click OK.

USB Modem SIM will not be locked if the PIN is disabled. Once the
PIN is disabled, the operations such as Change PIN, PIN
Authentication, Unlock with PUK are disabled.

12. Go to 5 to observe the current configuration and SIM status to determine the next step.

13. To change the USB Modem PIN, right click on the USB Modem entity and select
“Change PIN”. The following screen displays.

Figure 37: Change USB Modem PIN

506 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Communications

14. Enter the current PIN and the new PIN; then repeat the new PIN to confirm the input.
Click OK.

The new PIN setting takes effect at the next time when the user is required to
enter the PIN.

15. Go to 5 to observe the current configuration and SIM status to determine the next step.

16. To unlock the SIM by PIN authentication, right click on the USB Modem entity and
select “PIN Authentication”. The following screen displays. Note the number of
remaining (failed) attempts indicated.

Figure 38: USB Modem PIN Authentication

17. Input PIN and click OK.

If PIN is Enabled and the USB Modem is unplugged or the system reboots,
the USB Modem will be locked and the user will need to re-enter PIN
authentication. If the PIN input fails after three attempts to authenticate PIN,
the USB Modem SIM will still be locked - and the SIM will need to be
unlocked by entering PUK and a new PIN (19).

18. Go to 5 to observe the current configuration and SIM status to determine the next step.

19. If a user fails to unlock the SIM via PIN after three failed attempts, the SIM needs to
be unlocked with PUK. Enter a right click on the USB Modem entity and select
“Unlock with PUK”. The following screen displays.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 507

Provision Communications

Figure 39: Unlock USB Modem with PUK

20. Input PUK and the New PIN; then repeat the new PIN to confirm the input. Click OK.

If PUK input fails to unlock SIM after 10 attempts, contact the wireless ISP
to unlock the SIM.

21. Observe the cellular networking information by expanding the Communications entity
under System and selecting “USB DCN”.

Figure 40: Cellular Networking Information

22. To verify connection to the GE11x via the cellular networking IP address, continue
with the next step. Otherwise, go to 5 to observe the current configuration and SIM
status to determine the next step.

23. To verify the connection to the GE11x via the cellular Networking IP address, open a
new web browser window, enter the IP address in the address bar of your Web
browser and log onto the GE11x.

508 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Communications

Sample Network - GNE to SNE over Management Tunnel

This is an example of setting up communications between two GE11xPro’s using a
management tunnel in a laboratory or back-to-back small network configuration.

The Figure below shows an example of back-to-back GE11xPros where the the web-
based GUI workstation, Gateway NE (GNE) and Subtending NE (SNE) are on the same
subnet, and WAN connectivity between GE11xPros is via a management tunnel.
GE11xPro #1 and the Workstation reside on LAN Segment A. GE11xPro #2 has no
management LAN connection, and has a WAN management tunnel connection to
GE11xPro #1.

Figure 41: Workstation / GNE / SNE on Same Subnet

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 509

Provision Communications

For management tunnels where RIP is enabled, under a Denial of

Service attack scenario, RIP PDUs will likely be discarded, resulting
in all RIP learned routes being withdrawn from the routing table. On the
GNE, this will have the affect of losing the route to the SNE.

Perform the following steps at GE11xPro #2 (SNE):

1. At GE11xPro #2, perform the procedures (see “Connect Power Cables and Apply
Power” and “Serial Connection” in GE11x Installation and Commissioning Manual
document.

You should currently be logged onto the GE11xPro #2’s RS232 (serial port)
using CLI.

2. Provision the eth0 (system) IP address using the following CLI command entry

ADVA--> configure communication

ADVA:comms--> configure eth0 ip-address [Link]
[Link]
ADVA:comms-->

3. Provision the management tunnel using the following CLI command.

ADVA:comms--> add mgmttnl 1 phoenix1 ethernet vlan-based

100 disabled [Link] [Link] network-1-1-1-1

According to the example in Figure 41, the GE11xPro #2’s management

tunnel should be set to Ethernet Layer 2 Protocol, VLAN based with the
VLAN ID set to 100, DHCP disabled, the IP address should be set to
[Link] with a Subnet Mask of [Link], and RIPv2 should be set to
enabled.

4. To edit the management tunnel to enable RIPv2 packets, enter the following CLI
command.

ADVA:comms--> configure mgmttnl mgmt_tnl-1

ADVA:comms:mgmt_tnl-1--> rip2Pkts-control enabled

5. Set the Management LAN Port’s (eth0) Admin state to unassigned using the following
CLI command.

ADVA:comms:mgmt_tnl-1--> home

ADVA--> network-element ne-1

ADVA-NE-1--> configure nte nte114-1-1-1

ADVA-NE-1:NTE114-1-1-1--> configure dcn

510 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Communications

ADVA-NE-1:dcn-1-1-1-1--> admin-state unassigned

ADVA-NE-1:dcn-1-1-1-1--> home

6. Add a static route to point to the management tunnel on GE11xPro #1 using the
following CLI command

ADVA--> configure communication

ADVA:comms--> add ip-route nexthop [Link] [Link]

[Link] phoenix1 1 disabled

7. Enter a “show system” and verify that Proxy ARP is disabled. If Proxy ARP is
enabled, enter the following command, otherwise continue to the next step

ADVA:comms--> home

ADVA--> configure system

ADVA:system--> proxy-arp disabled

Ensure that the Proxy ARP option is set correctly for the GE11xPro. If
two or more ADVA Optical Networking NEs or GE11xPros are
connected via SDCC or Management Tunnel as well as connected to
the same LAN segment, then only one of the them should have the
Proxy ARP option enabled. Otherwise, there will be multiple ARP
responses for a single ARP request for a remote reachable IP address
from each NE/GE11xPro in the same LAN that has Proxy ARP
enabled.

8. Logoff the CLI session and remove any commissioning cables (Ethernet cable and/or
console cable) from the GE11xPro front panel connectors, as required.

9. Connect the optical cables to the GE11xPro Network Port front panel connectors if
they are not already connected.

Perform the following at GE11xPro #1 (GNE):

10. At GE11xPro #1, perform the procedures “Connect Power Cables and Apply Power”
and “Serial Connection” in GE11x Installation and Commissioning Manual document.

You should currently be logged onto the GE11xPro #1’s RS232 (serial
port) using CLI.

11. Provision a management tunnel using the following CLI command.

ADVA--> configure communication

ADVA:comms--> add mgmttnl 1 phoenix1 ethernet vlan-based
100 disabled [Link] [Link] network-1-1-1-1

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 511

Provision Communications

According to the example in Figure 41, the GE11xPro #1’s

management tunnel should be set to Ethernet Layer 2 Protocol, VLAN
based with the VLAN ID set to 100, DHCP disabled, the IP address
should be set to [Link] with a Subnet Mask of [Link], and
RIPv2 should be set to enabled.

12. Edit the management tunnel to enable RIPv2 packets.

ADVA:comms--> configure mgmttnl mgmt_tnl-1

ADVA:comms:mgmt_tnl-1--> rip2Pkts-control enabled

13. Provision the eth0 (system) IP address using the following CLI command entry

ADVA:comms:mgmt_tnl-1--> home

ADVA--> configure communication

ADVA:comms--> configure eth0 ip-address [Link]
[Link]
ADVA:comms-->home

14. Enable Proxy ARP by entering the following CLI command.

.ADVA:comms--> home

ADVA--> configure system

ADVA:system--> proxy-arp enabled

Ensure that the Proxy ARP option is set correctly for the GE11xPro. If
two or more ADVA Optical Networking NEs or GE11xPros are
connected via SDCC or Management Tunnel as well as connected to
the same LAN segment, then only one of the them should have the
Proxy ARP option enabled. Otherwise, there will be multiple ARP
responses for a single ARP request for a remote reachable IP address
from each NE/GE11xPro in the same LAN that has Proxy ARP
enabled.

15. Logoff the CLI session and remove any commissioning cables (Ethernet cable and/or
console cable) from the GE11xPro front panel connectors, as required.

16. Ensure the DCN connection for LAN Segment A is connected to the MGMT LAN
(eth0) port.

17. Connect the optical cables to the GE11xPro Network Port front panel connectors if
they are not already connected.

18. Observe the Network Port Net and Act LEDs on the front panel. They should be lit
green. If the LEDs are not lit green, then troubleshoot the connections between
GE11xPro #1 and GE11xPro #2.

19. Depending on your configuration, either set the web-based GUI workstation default
gateway to point to the GNE GE11xPro’s Management LAN port IP address, or create
a static route on the PC to communicate to the SNE (e.g., from Windows command

512 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Provision Communications

prompt, enter route add [Link] mask [Link] [Link] according

to the example in Figure 41). This will allow you to connect to the SNE.

20. Verify connectivity to GE11xPro #1 and GE11xPro #2 from the web-based GUI
Workstation. Open a web browser window (Internet Explorer(IE 11 recommended) or
an up-to-date version of Firefox or Chrome) and enter the IP address of GE11xPro #1
to access the GE11xPro web-based Element Management System. Logon using a
valid user name and password. The default login and password are ‘root’ and
‘ChgMeNOW,’ respectively. Repeat for GE11xPro #2.)

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 513

Provision Communications

This page intentionally left blank.

514 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Introduction

Etherjack/Syncjack Test Procedures

and Performance Monitoring

Introduction
This chapter contains information and procedures for the following Etherjack® and
Syncjack® testing features.

l Loopbacks
l Etherjack® Diagnostics
l Cable Length Benchmarks
l Performance Monitoring
l ESA Provisioning and Operation
l CFM Provisioning and Operation
l Etherjack® Connection Performance Analyzer
l Service Activation Testing
l SyncJack Testing - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)
l Two-Way Active Measurement Protocol

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 515

Loopbacks

Loopbacks
To assist with Ethernet service fault isolation and to support Service Level Agreement
(SLA) conformance verification, the system supports Port, VLAN, and EFM-OAM
message loopback modes on all Ethernet traffic carrying ports (see Note). The
Loopbacks allow the user to setup an Ethernet test set at a central location to inject traffic
into the network.

When CCM defect is used as a trigger for protection switching,

performing a loopback on port can cause undesired protection
switching.

As shown in the example in following figure, traffic is looped back into the network and
back to the test-set. The test-set can look for any anomalies such as frame loss or out-of-
sequence frames. The loopback eliminates the need to connect a test-set in the field or at
the customer premise to verify round-trip service.

Figure 1: CO Based Testing Using Ethernet Loopback

CO Based
Test Head

Loopback Loopback
Test Pattern 2 Test Pattern 1

FSP 150CC FSP 150CC

Customer Premise Central Office Customer Premise

Four basic types of loopback are available: Port, VLAN, and Ethernet First Mile (EFM)-
Operation, Administration and Maintenance (OAM). The following loopback functions are
available:

l EFM-OAM Remote
l EFM-OAM Remote Timed
l Facility Port
l Facility Port Timed
l Facility VLAN
l Terminal Port
l Terminal Port Timed
l Terminal VLAN

As a sub-function, JDSU loopback responder function is supported and managed on a

per-port basis, wherein the device only reacts and responds to a JDSU loopback control
request frame. There is no support for initializing request messages. Fore more
information on JDSU loopback, see FSP 150-GE11xPro System Description document.

516 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Loopbacks

Performing Loopbacks Using the Web-based GUI

From the Maintenance application, entering a right click on a Network Port or Access
Port and selecting Loopbacks provides a Loopback view. From this view, the Network
Port or Access Port can be placed in the Maintenance state, and a loopback can be
performed. However, the Administrative state is not necessary to be Maintenance for the
port to respond JDSU loopback.

From this view, the Network Port or Access Port facility can be placed in the
Maintenance state and a loopback or timed loopback can be performed at the terminal or
facility. If performing a terminal or facility VLAN loopback, up to three VLAN Loopbacks
may be created per entity. Port Loopbacks ignore traffic shaping, allowing use of the full
port bandwidth, while VLAN Loopbacks conform to configured shaping profiles.

MAC Address matching for Loopback extends existing port and VLAN loopbacks to
loopback only service frames from a specified source and/or with specified destination
MAC address. The existing loopback types will continue to be supported, and the MAC
Address filter option is only available for terminal loopback types on the GE11x
[Link] prevent service frames from interfering with loopback testing, service frames
matching the port/vlan of the loopback should be dropped (i.e., Blocked) or optionally
allowed to pass. As with Loopback attributes, the MAC Address Match configuration
cannot be modified on an active loopback.

Selecting the Swap SADA [Swapping the Source Address (SA) with the Destination
Address (DA)] option during the loopback directs the GE11xPro to look up the MAC
address of frames being received and swap out the Source Address with the Destination
Address, allowing the Layer 2 cloud to forward the frames.

A blocking mechanism is provided to prevent service frames from being forwarded, when
the service frame matches the signature of the loopback frames. This functionality will
continue to be provided as a configurable option: block or no-block.

Only one Terminal/Facility loopback may be performed per system, and multiple EFM-
OAM Loopbacks may be performed meanwhile for different remote terminals. Once a
VLAN and/or Swap SADA loopback has been operated, a second Swap SADA loopback
may not be performed on another entity.

If Facility Port Timed or Terminal Port Timed is selected, the Timer is set by the user for
10 to 300 seconds (the duration of the loopback).

Another option available is performing a Remote EFM-OAM loopback.

See the following figure for an example of a loopback view. For a description of the web-
based Element Management System GUI functions, see Chapter 2, Web-based Element
Management System. For a list of loopback setting options, rules, and associated default
settings, see Loopback Settings.

To remove a loopback, click on the drop-down list for Loopback Configuration and select
“None”, then click on “OK”.

For more information regarding loopback operation overview, see FSP 150-GE11xPro
System Description document.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 517

Loopbacks

Figure 2: Loopback View

518 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Etherjack® Diagnostics

Etherjack® Diagnostics

Transmission Media Analysis

This diagnostics feature provides a means of monitoring and diagnosing copper link
conditions using Time Domain Reflectometry (TDR) technology. TDR technology
operates by sending individual signal pulses down the transmission medium and
analyzing the return energy.

On a terminated cable, the energy of the signal pulse is absorbed by the terminating
device. Little or no energy is reflected back to the originating transceiver. This means the
length of a terminated cable cannot be determined.

However, if the cable is not terminated, when the signal pulse is transmitted the energy is
reflected back towards the transmitter from the point of the open circuit. By measuring
the phase variation between the transmitted and reflected pulses, the system can
determine the distance from the transmitter to the open circuit fault to within 1 meter.

Similarly, a short circuit between any of the wires in a loop can be detected. In this case,
it is also possible to measure the distance from the transmitter to the short circuit fault to
within 1 meter by analyzing phase delay characteristics.

Before starting Diagnostic Test at one end of a link, make sure Auto
Diagnostic is disabled at the other end. Otherwise the test results are
incorrect.

This test is not run on copper SFP interfaces.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 519

Etherjack® Diagnostics

Ethernet Fault Isolation and Diagnostics

Etherjack® Diagnostics enable the user to perform tests on the Ethernet facility and the
attached cable, in order to detect and isolate faults on:

l the Ethernet port

l the connecting cable
l the far-end equipment

Tests are started automatically on detection of a link fault, but they can also be started
manually using the web-based GUI. Refer to the following figure for an example
Etherjack® Diagnostic Test result using the web-based GUI.

Figure 3: Etherjack® Diagnostic Test Results View

The diagnostic operation consists of the following phases:

1. Ethernet Cable Test. Cable faults can be isolated to within +/- 1 meter resolution
along the cables length, for each cable pair. The test can detect the presence of:

o open circuits
o short circuits
o impedance mismatches

The capabilities of the Ethernet Cable Test can be enhanced by using Cable
Length Benchmarking. See Cable Length Benchmarks.

520 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Etherjack® Diagnostics

2. Ethernet Auto-Negotiation Test. During this phase, the speed and duplicity of the
Ethernet link is negotiated. This test also performs auto-MDIX for crossover detection
and adaptation.

3. Ethernet EFM Loopback Test. On this phase the far-end is placed on EFM loopback
mode to perform traffic testing over the link. As with the Ethernet Port loopback, test
packets are injected into the Tx data path and are monitored at the receiver. Missing or
faulty packets detected at the Rx monitor point, indicates a failure at the Tx output
driver or the receiver input.

The Etherjack® Diagnostics facility has the following capabilities:

l The user can select the port on which to run the tests. Tests are only valid for copper
media type Ethernet ports. A selected port must be assigned and removed from
service (i.e., placed in a ‘Maintenance’ state) before non-automatic tests can be
performed.
l The user may select to run all Ethernet tests or select individual tests manually.
l Manual diagnostics are not possible when automatic diagnostics are running.
l By default, Etherjack® diagnostics are automatically triggered when a fault has been
detected on an Ethernet port.
l Only the Ethernet cable Test and Ethernet Auto-negotiation is performed during
automatic diagnosis.
l By default, the EFM loopback test:
o is not performed when the user has selected to run all tests. The user must select

this test separately.

o is not included as part of the automatic tests performed when a link is down.
o is not performed if the far-end is not EFM capable
l If the cable tests do not pass, the auto-negotiation test is not performed. Auto-
negotiation test is not done unless the port is configured for auto-negotiation.
l Etherjack® Diagnostics are service affecting. This includes management traffic.
Therefore, during the testing, management connectivity may be lost.

The following test results are possible:

l Ethernet Port - Device FAIL. Through internal loopback testing, the Ethernet port has
been found to be faulty. This is an equipment fault.
l Ethernet Port - Device PASS. Through internal loopback testing, the Ethernet port
has been found to be good.
l No Cable Detected. A cable has not been detected on the Ethernet port.
l Un-Terminated Cable Detected Length: <n> meters. An open circuit condition was
detected on the cable at a distance of n meters from the physical port.
l Cable Short Circuit at <n> meters. a short circuit condition was detected on the
cable at a distance of n meters from the physical port.
l Impedance Mismatch. The terminating impedance is higher or lower than the line
impedance, causing a reflected signal that does not match either the open or shorted
conditions.
l EFM Communication Failure. EFM packets sent were not returned.
l Cable OK. A valid termination was detected on the cable.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 521

Cable Length Benchmarks

Cable Length Benchmarks

This additional feature enhances cable fault isolation by correlating fault points to
previously known cable points along the Ethernet cable. It also provides cable segment
identification, isolating faults to any of up to five cable segments. The user may store up
to five cable segment lengths during the installation process. Each cable segment
termination point can be named with a text string to describe the physical location of each
termination point. If a subsequent test detects an open circuit at one of the stored
segments, the system can highlight its location name.

Etherjack® Diagnostics is automatically triggered when a link failure is detected (on

copper media ports only).

The capabilities of the Ethernet Cable Test (performed as part of Etherjack® Diagnostics)
can be enhanced by using Cable Length Benchmarking. See the following figure.

Figure 4: Faulty Segment Identified Using Cable Length Benchmark

Cable Length Benchmarking provides the following features:

l the ability to associate a point on the Ethernet link with a name

l the ability to correlate the results of the Ethernet Cable Test to the nearest named
cable point

Points at various distances along the Ethernet cable can be given a name. Each cable
point can represent known locations on the Ethernet link, such as the location of a patch
panel connection, a wire closet or the end of the cable.

When an Ethernet Cable Test is run on a shorted, cut or unplugged cable, it gives the
distance from the port to the location of the open/short circuit. However, the results may
also be correlated to the nearest saved cable point or points, thus, providing more
accurate fault location.

522 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Cable Length Benchmarks

The location of each cable point can be specified in terms of distance from the port and by
a user defined description.

The first benchmark is created with only one span of cable, then the second cable is
connected and another cable test is run to determine the combined length of the cables.
This continues until finally the last span of cable (up to five total) is added to the total
distance of the cable.

By entering a right click on the Access Port and selecting Cable Benchmarks, an Edit
Cable Length Benchmarks pane appears (see the following figure). In the following figure,
three cable points have been defined at various locations along the Ethernet cable. If the
cable at Point 1 has been unplugged, in addition to reporting an open circuit at a distance
from the local port to Point 1, the Ethernet Cable Test result will also show that the
nearest named cable port is ‘1st floor cabinet’.

Figure 5: Edit Cable Length Benchmarks

The Cable Length Benchmarking facility has the following capabilities:

l When specifying a cable length, the maximum cable length allowed is 1000 meters.
l When labeling cable termination points, the string is limited to 64 ASCII characters.
l Cable benchmark termination points are displayed to the user as provisioned (i.e., they
are not sorted by cable length).

Manually Entering / Editing Cable Length Benchmarks

Cable length benchmarks can be manually entered or existing cable length benchmarks
may be edited as shown in Figure 5. Use the following procedure to enter cable length
benchmarks or edit existing cable length benchmarks manually. Up to 5 cable length
benchmarks can be saved per copper access port.

1. Enter or edit the cable benchmarks for the desired copper interface.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 523

Cable Length Benchmarks

Web-based GUI
Select Maintenance view

Right click on the desired access port in the selection tree

Select Edit Cable Benchmarks

An Edit Cable Benchmarks entry screen displays

Select Enabled for each Point for which data is to be entered

Enter the cable length (in meters) for each enabled Point, and a description name
for each enabled cable segment (up to 64 characters) in the Description field

Select Apply

An Operation Complete popup window appears

Select OK

524 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Performance Monitoring

Performance Monitoring

Overview
The Performance Monitoring (PM) feature enables in-service, non-intrusive system
monitoring to aid in diagnosing and isolating issues that may occur during operation. PM
enables users to detect and react to potential failures prior to a customer outage. In
addition to providing traditional SNMP MIB Etherstats, Etherjack® provides Performance
Parameters (PPs) and features similar to those found in traditional services. This allows
Etherjack Service Assurance to be integrated into a carrier’s existing service assurance
infrastructure.

Performance Monitoring view allows you to view performance monitoring counts and
view PM thresholds. Performance monitoring thresholds can be edited, and registers can
be initialized (for users with proper user access permission level).

This chapter contains the following step by step procedures:

l Viewing PM Counts and Threshold Values

l Initializing PM and Distribution Registers
l Editing PM Thresholds

For PM commands using CLI, refer to the FSP 150GE11xPro Command Line Interface
Reference Guide.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 525

Performance Monitoring

Etherjack® PM Features
The following features are provided:

l retrievable performance data for each managed entity, so the user can determine past
and current system operation. PM data collection is performed via a polling
mechanism, were primitives are gathered into accumulated counts. After a defined
interval, (e.g., 15 minutes or 1 day), the counts are binned and stored in a database.
l the checking of PM counts against a threshold to see if the threshold has been
crossed. If so, a Threshold Crossing Alert (TCA) is reported, so that corrective actions
can be taken.

Etherjack® PM supports:

l threshold setting and automatic TCA message generation

l Current and History PM bins provide a continuous record of service performance,
allowing for accurate SLA conformance statements.

PM counts can be displayed as a summary or in tabular format in the web-based GUI,

can be filtered and/or refreshed and allows exporting data as Excel spreadsheets.

526 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Performance Monitoring

Performance Parameters
There are several categories of Performance Parameters (PPs) that are collected, as
follows:

l equipment presence and type [e.g., Small Form Factor Pluggable (SFP) Interface type
and presence, module type and presence]
l physical Layer monitoring (e.g., optical power, temperature)
l Ethernet Statistics (e.g., the number of Ethernet packets received/transmitted)
l Protocol Statistics (e.g., the number of protocol dependent packets
received/transmitted)

The following entities are monitored for performance data which is accumulated into PPs:

l Ethernet Network ports

l Ethernet Access ports
l Ethernet Virtual Connections (EVCs)
l Quality of Service (QoS) Access to Network and Network to Access queues

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 527

Performance Monitoring

Performance Parameter Attributes

Each Performance Parameter (PP) can be defined by the attributes outlined in the
following table.

Table 11: Performance Parameter Attributes

Attribute Description
The name of the PP. This will be presented in mnemonic
Monitor Type
form (e.g. ESF (EtherStat Frames)).
Whether the PP is a Near-End or Far-End parameter. The
location is determined in relation to the monitored entity, in
that the PP has occurred:
Location
l Locally to the entity (or at the near end).
l Remotely to the entity (or at the far end).
Whether the PP is a Receive or Transmit parameter. The dir-
Direction
ection is in relation to the monitored entity.
The time period associated with the PP. i.e., 15-Minute, 1-
Time Period
Day or Rollover.
The time at which the PP was collected:

Monitor l The current time is used for Rollover and Current

Timestamp counters.
l The boundary crossing time is used for History counters
(stored as number of seconds since the Epoch).
Indicates a bin from the historical list of bins:

l For 15 Minute history bins, this number is 1 to 32 (1

History Index being the most recent).
l For 1 Day history bins, this number is 1.
l For current and Rollover bins, this number is 0.

528 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Performance Monitoring

Performance Parameter Counters

Each PP is grouped together for a monitored entity and accumulated into:

l Bins, associated with a predefined time period (i.e., 15-Minute or 1-Day) or

l Rollover Counters, for Ethernet managed entities only

The user can reset any individual or all PP counters to zero.

Bins and Bin

Periods The following performance bin periods will exist:

l 1 x Current 15-Minute Bin

l 1 x Current 1-Day (24-Hour) Bin
l 32 x Historical 15-Minute Bins
l 1 x Historical 1-Day (24-Hour) Bin

(1) The 32 Historical 15-Minute Bins provide the most recent 8 hours of per-
formance data.

(2) The Historical 1-Day Bin provides the performance data from the previous
day starting from 12:00am (i.e., midnight, 00:00).

Rollover
Counter For Ethernet managed entities only, a Rollover Counter is provided. This gives the
current performance data since monitoring began. The counter accumulates until it
reaches its maximum size (64 bits). When this happens the counter will ‘roll over’ to zero
and begin again.

Unlike Bins, the Rollover Counter is not related to the time of day, but to system uptime.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 529

Performance Monitoring

Performance Parameter Thresholding

Each PP has a threshold for each bin period which is configurable for each entity
instance. The PP count is compared to the configured threshold and if met or exceeded, a
Threshold Crossing Alert (TCA) is generated.

Provisioning a threshold to zero will disable threshold monitoring for that

entity.

Each Network Port, Access Port, Flow and ESA Probe entity type has default thresholds
for its PPs, which are used when an entity is provisioned. The default thresholds are
configurable.

A TCA is only reported once during a bins time period unless it is initialized and then is
crossed again.

Optical Performance Parameter Thresholding

Some optical PPs have a unique thresholding mechanism.

For the PPs Optical Power Transmit (OPT) and Optical Power Receive (OPR), a TCA is
raised if the PP count varies by the provisioned Optical Power Transmit Variance (OPT-
VAR) and Optical Power Received Variance (OPR-VAR) (higher or lower). The target
value and the acceptable variance is configurable by the user.

In other words, Optical Power Received / Transmit Variance (+/- dBm) represents the
variance from the configured OPR / OPT thresholds where the measured value will not
result in the generation of a TCA. For example: with an OPR threshold of -80 and an
OPR-VAR of 4, no TCA is generated if the measured OPR is -76 to -84.

530 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Performance Monitoring

Threshold Crossing Alert Messages

When a PP threshold has been met or exceeded, a TCA is generated. The following table
outlines the attributes that are specified in the TCA message.

Table 12: Threshold Crossing Alert Attributes

Attribute Description Values
Entity Identifier The monitored entity’s id Variable.
The name of the PP that has crossed its threshold. This will See Monitored Types and
Monitor Type be presented in mnemonic form (e.g. ESF (EtherStat Default TCA Settings for
Frames). Monitor Type mnemonics.
15-Minute
Time Period In which time period the threshold was crossed.
1-Day
Time The time the threshold was crossed. Timestamp
The location of the TCA generation. This is determined in rela-Near end
tion to the monitored entity, in that the PP has occurred:
Location Far end
l Locally to the entity (or at the near end)
l Remotely to the entity (or at the far end). None
Receive
Direction The direction in relation to the monitored entity.
Transmit
Monitored Value The value of the PP count when the threshold was crossed. Up to a 64-bit number
The configured threshold at the time the threshold was Up to a 64-bit number
Threshold Value
crossed.

Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings

Refer to "Performance Monitoring Settings" on page 953 for monitored types and default
Threshold Crossing Alert (TCA) settings.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 531

Performance Monitoring

Viewing PM Counts and Threshold Values

Descriptions and procedures are provided for the following entities/applications:

l Viewing PMs for Network Port, Access Port, Flow or LAG

l Viewing PMs for ESA Probes

Viewing PMs for Network Port, Access Port, Flow or

LAG
By selecting a Network Port, Access Port, Flow or LAG in the Selection Tree Pane, the
following tabs are provided in the Details Pane for each entity, each Ethernet Virtual
Connection (EVC) and each Quality of Service (QoS) queue:

l Summary, which displays a summary of both transmit and receive statistics. See
Figure 14 for an example view of an Access Port summary.
l 15 Minute/5 Minute, which displays the PM counts in the current 15 Minute/5 Minute
performance bin. To select 15 Minute or 5 Minute as the PM interval, right click on NE-
1 and select Edit; Select the desired PM Interval and click on Apply/OK. See Figure 17
for an example view of a Network Port 15 Minute PM counters. If the History checkbox
is selected the previous 32 periods are also displayed.
l 1 Day, which displays the PM counts in the current 1 Day performance bin. If the
History checkbox is selected the previous period is also displayed.
l Thresholds, which displays the details and the thresholds that have been set for each
PP. See for an example view of a Network Port Threshold values.

1. Select the Performance Monitoring icon or select Performance Monitoring from the
Applications menu, then expand the System entity in the Selection Tree.

2. Expand the Network Element and NTE entities. To view Flow PM counts, also
expand the Access Port entity in the Selection Tree. To view LAG entity counts,
expand the LAG and Network Element entities.

3. Enter a right click on the Network Element and select Edit.

The Edit PM Configuration pane appears

532 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Performance Monitoring

Figure 6: Edit PM Interval View

4. elect the desired PM Interval for the Network Element. Default is 15 Minutes. Click on
Apply or OK to save the setting.

Changing the PM Interval will clear all the PM history data.

5. Enter a right click on the Network Element and select Generate PM Data File.

The Save PM Data Files pane appears

Figure 7: Save PM Data Files View (NE Level)

The PM data files for Network Ports, Access Ports, PT Flows and LAGs can
also be saved by entering a right click on the desired entity and selecting
Generate PM Data File (See Figure 8).

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 533

Performance Monitoring

Figure 8: Save PM Data Files for Network Port

6. Click on OK to Save PM Data Files.

The PM Data Files saving progress will begin, showing a screen as below.

Figure 9: PM Data Files Saving Progress View

When the “status” changes from “In progress” to “Success”, the PM Data Files
have been saved successfully.

7. Expand the Administration entity, right click on PM Data Export and select Copy to
Remote.

The Transfer PM Data Files screen appears

534 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Performance Monitoring

Figure 10: Transfer PM Data Files -- Transfer Method Selection View

8. Determine the next step.

Desired File Transfer Method Then

Web (HTTP)? Continue with the next step.
FTP, SFTP or SCP? Go to 10.

9. Click on OK and you’ll be prompted to open or save the file. Select Save and Open.

Figure 11: PM Data File GUI Save Option View

10. For “File Transfer Method” selecting FTP, SFTP or SCP from the drop-down list, the
display changes to the FTP, SFTP or SCP file transfer view, shown in the following
figure. (The figure shows the SCP view. The FTP and SFTP views are identical.)

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 535

Performance Monitoring

Figure 12: PM Data File SCP Transfer View

11. Enter the data required in the screen to access the FTP, SFTP or SCP server and
begin the file transfer process, and click on OK.

It is assumed that the user knows the IP address of the FTP, SFTP or SCP
server, has a valid user ID and password and knows the path and file name
of the software file to transfer.

The file transfer will begin, showing a screen as the following figure

Figure 13: PM Data File SCP Transfer Progress View

536 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Performance Monitoring

When the “Status” changes from “In progress” to “Success”, the PM Data file
has been transferred.

12. Select the desired Network Port, Access Port, LAG, Flow or Probe ID in the Selection
Tree.

The PM Counts pane appears

Figure 14: Summary PM Counts View of a Network Port

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 537

Performance Monitoring

Figure 15: Summary PM Counts View of an Access Port

Figure 16: Summary PM Counts View of an Access Port Flow (Flow-Based A2N Shaping)

538 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Performance Monitoring

Figure 17: 15 Minute PM Counts View of an Access Port Flow (Flow-Based A2N Shaping)

Figure 18: PM Threshold View of a Network Port

13. Select the desired tab to view Summary, 15 Minute counters, 1 Day counters or
Threshold levels.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 539

Performance Monitoring

Summary tab: To refresh the data, enter the number of seconds and select the
Automatic Refresh Every box.

15 Minute/5 Minute tab, 1 Day tab: Move, resize windows or use sliding bars
to view data, as required. Windows may be filtered (See Figure 19) to display
only selected data by selecting the Filter button and selecting/de-selecting
individual Monitored Type, or by selecting the Select All or Deselect All buttons.
Then select OK. History data may be hidden or displayed by de-
selecting/selecting the History option. An asterisk in the Time column indicates
data that is suspect.

Thresholds tab: Thresholds are displayed by entity type.

Figure 19: 15 Minute PM Counts Filter View

14. If desired, 15 Minute/5 Minute and 1 Day counts can be exported to an Excel
spreadsheet by selecting the Export button.

An export file pane appears (see Figure 20).

540 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Performance Monitoring

Figure 20: Exporting 15 Minute PM Counts to Excel

15. Choose the desired application to open, or select the Save option (Save options vary
on different Web browsers). A filename associated with the entity and date is created
in the selected application (Excel is the default application - see Figure 21). Edit or
save the exported file as desired.

Figure 21: 15 Minute PM Counts Exported to Excel

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 541

Performance Monitoring

Viewing PMs for ESA Probes

For ESA Probes, each threshold value may be viewed by selecting the Probe ID in the
ESA application.

1. Select the ESA icon or select ESA from the Applications menu, then expand the
System, Network Element, NTE and Probes entities in the Selection Tree.

2. Select the desired Probe ID and the Thresholds tab.

The Thresholds data pane appears (see Figure 22)

542 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Performance Monitoring

Figure 22: Thresholds View of an ESA Probe

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 543

Performance Monitoring

Initializing PM and Distribution Registers

The following descriptions and procedures are provided for the following
entities/applications:

l Initializing Network Port, Access Port, Flow and LAG Registers

l Initializing ESA Probe PM Registers
l Initializing ESA Probe Distribution Registers

Initializing Network Port, Access Port, Flow and LAG

Registers
For Network Port, Access Port and flow entities, PM data is maintained in individual
monitored parameter bins for each interval. The system maintains bins for the following
time periods:

l Current 15-minute bin

l Current 24-hour (1-day) bin

Current intervals are indicated as “current” and older periods are assigned incremental
numbers. The index allows a user to identify the current, previous (Bin Index=1) or one of
the historical bins (Bin Index = 2 to 32), with 32 being the oldest bin.

1. Select the Performance Monitoring icon or select Performance Monitoring from the
Applications menu, then expand the System selection tree.

2. Expand the Network Element entity form the selection tree, then expand the NTE
entity. To access Flow PM counts, also expand the Access entity in the selection
tree. To access LAG entity counts, also expand the LAG and its Network Element
entity.

3. Enter a right click on the desired Network Port, Access Port, LAG or Flow in the
selection tree and select Init Registers.

An Initialize Registers pane appears (see Figure 23)

4. Select the desired Entity, Interval and Bin Index. Select OK.

The designated PM count registers are cleared

544 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Performance Monitoring

Figure 23: Initialize PM Registers Pane

Initializing ESA Probe PM Registers

For ESA Probes, each PM register may be initialized within the ESA application.

1. Select the ESA icon or select ESA from the Applications menu, then expand the
System, Network Element, NTE and Probes entities in the Selection Tree.

2. Enter a right click on the desired Probe ID and select Init. PM Registers.

The Initialize PM Registers pane appears (see Figure 24)

3. Select the desired bin: current, All History, or specific interval.

4. For a layer-2 probe, select the desired Destinations and CoS(s), Select All or Deselect
All.

5. Select OK.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 545

Performance Monitoring

Figure 24: Initialize ESA Probe PM Registers

Initializing ESA Probe Distribution Registers

For ESA Probes, each Distribution register may be initialized within the ESA application.

1. Select the ESA icon or select ESA from the Applications menu, then expand the
System, Network Element, NTE and Probes entities in the Selection Tree.

2. Enter a right click on the desired Probe ID and select Init. Dist. Registers.

The Initialize Distribution pane appears (see Figure 25)

3. Select the desired history distribution register: All History Data, or specific history
data.

4. For a layer-2 probe, select the desired Destinations and CoS(s), Select All or Deselect
All.

5. Select OK.

546 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Performance Monitoring

Figure 25: Initialize ESA Probe Distribution Registers

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 547

Performance Monitoring

Editing PM Thresholds
Each Network Port, Access Port, Flow, LAG and ESA Probe entity type has default
thresholds for its PPs. These thresholds are provisionable. The following procedures are
provided for the following entities/applications:

l Edit Network Port, Access Port, Flow or LAG PM Thresholds

l Edit ESA Probe PM Registers

Edit Network Port, Access Port, Flow or LAG PM

Thresholds
For Network Port, Access Port, Flow and LAG, each Performance Parameter (PP) has a
threshold for each bin period which is configurable for each entity instance. The PP count
is compared to the configured threshold and if met or exceeded, a Threshold Crossing
Alert (TCA) is generated.

Provisioning a threshold to zero disables threshold monitoring for that

entity.

1. Select the Performance Monitoring icon or select Performance Monitoring from the
Applications menu.

2. Expand the System, Network Element and NTE entities in the Selection Tree. To
access Flow PM counts, also expand the Access entity in the selection tree. To
access LAG entity counts, expand the LAG and the Network Element entity.

3. Enter a right click on the desired Network Port, Access Port, LAG or Flow in the
selection tree and select Edit Thresholds. Select the desired entity and select OK.

An Edit Thresholds pane appears (see Figure 26)

4. Edit the desired thresholds for the desired Monitored Type. Select OK.

548 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Performance Monitoring

Figure 26: Edit PM Threshold View of an Access Port Flow

Edit ESA Probe PM Registers

For ESA Probes, each PM register may be edited within the ESA application.

1. Select the ESA icon or select ESA from the Applications menu, then expand the
System, Network Element, NTE and Probes entities in the Selection Tree.

2. Enter a right click on the desired Probe ID and select Edit Thresholds.

The Edit Thresholds pane appears (see Figure 27)

3. Select the desired history distribution register: All History Data, or specific history
data.

4. Edit the desired thresholds for the desired Monitored Type. Select OK.

5. Select OK.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 549

Performance Monitoring

Figure 27: Edit PM Threshold View of an ESA Probe

550 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 ESA Provisioning and Operation

ESA Provisioning and Operation

Etherjack Service Assurance (ESA) provisioning and reporting is invoked by selecting
the ESA icon on the Tool Bar or selecting ESA from the Applications menu and
expanding the System, NE-1 and NTE11x entities in the Selection Tree.

Creating Reflectors and Probes are performed by entering a right click on one of the
entities and selecting Create Probe/Create Reflector. There are 2 types of Probes; Layer-
3 Probes and Layer-2(Y.1731) Probes. Up to 10 Layer-3 Probes, 6 Reflectors and up to
32 (for GE112Pro series)/64 (for GE114Pro series) Layer-2 Probes are supported. Once a
Layer-2 Probe or a Layer-3 Probe / Reflector Pair has been created, an ESA scheduled
activity may be initiated to control the activity (see Provision an ESA Schedule).

The following procedures are used for setting up ESA:

l Provision a Layer-3 Probe - or - Provision a Y.1731 Probe

l Provision a Reflector
l Provision an ESA Schedule

Provision a Layer-3 Probe

The first step in creating an ESA test is to establish a probe at one GE11xPro. This
procedure provides steps for creating a Layer-3 Probe. To edit an existing Probe, enter a
right click on the desired Probe entity and select Edit Probe.

The Service End Points and History Configuration items cannot be edited. If
they require modification, the probe must be deleted and re-entered.

To delete an existing Probe, enter a right click on the desired Probe entity and select
Delete Probe.

A Probe cannot be deleted if it is associated with a Scheduled ESA Activity.

To delete a Probe that is associated with a Scheduled ESA Activity, the
Scheduled ESA Activity must first be deleted (see Provision an ESA
Schedule).

In current system, the layer-3 probes do no support the test of the layer-3
services provisioned under the NE. For more information on the layer-3
services provisioning, see Provision Layer-3 Services.
T

Refer to ESA Options and Rules to determine the default values, value ranges and rules
for each option in the following procedure.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 551

ESA Provisioning and Operation

1. Select the ESA icon on the Tool Bar or select ESA from the Applications menu and
expand the System, NE-1 and NTE11x entities in the Selection Tree.

2. Ensure that services are created and In-Service for the Access Port that is targeted to
create the Layer-3 Probe.

3. Enter a right click on the Probes entity and select Create Probe.

A Create Probe pane appears

Figure 28: Create Probe View (ICMP Timestamp)

4. Enter the desired Probe options:

Identification

a) Probe Index – unique EID for the probe. Options available are 1 to 255.
b) Probe Name – a text identifier (up to 15 characters, no spaces and must
contain only alpha-numeric characters) for the probe (required).
c) Alias - enter the desired alias.
Probe Information

d) Protocol – the type of protocol to use (UDP Echo or ICMP Echo for
General and Round Trip Delay count reporting, ICMP Timestamp for
General, Round Trip Delay, One-Way Delay and Jitter count reporting.
e) Source Port – select the Access Port this probe is assigned to from the
drop-down list.
Service End Points

f) Probe IP Address and Mask – the IP address and subnet mask of the
probe to which echo replies will be sent.

552 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 ESA Provisioning and Operation

The IP address must not overlap with any non-ESA related subnet
provisioned within the GE11xPro.

If more than one Probe IP address resides on the same subnet, they must all
be associated with the same flow.

g) Reflector IP Address – the IP address of the reflector to which echo

replies (and optionally, timestamp) will be reflected back.

Traffic Parameters

h) Packet Type – specifies whether the service is VLAN Tagged or

Untagged. To test a specific FID on an existing Flow VLAN service, the
VLAN ID and Priority entry should be set to VLAN Tagged.
i) VLAN ID and Priority – the VLAN ID and Priority to be used for test
traffic frames. To test a specific FID on an existing Flow VLAN service,
the VLAN ID and Priority entry should be a member of that FID. Only
applicable if the Packet Type is VLAN Tagged.
j) Priority Map Mode and Priority – identifies the priority classification
mechanism for ESA traffic. To test a specific FID on an existing Flow
VLAN service, the Priority Map Mode should match the actual service.
k) Packet Size – the number of bytes for each test frame.
l) Packets Per Sample – the number of test packets to send in a sample
burst.
m) Packet Interval – the interval between packets in a sample burst in
milliseconds.
n) Dead Interval – the settling time to wait after a sample burst is complete
before starting the next sample in seconds.
o) Response Timeout – wait time for a response in seconds. Packets
received after this time-out are considered lost.

History Configuration

p) History Bins – the number of bins of history results to keep.

q) History Interval – the number of minutes in a single interval.
r) History Distribution Bins – the number of distribution history bins to
keep.
s) History Distribution Interval – the number of minutes in a distribution
history bin.
t) Round Trip Delay - set the minimum and maximum values and the
number of bins assigned.

Statistics and Distribution (If Protocol = ICMP Timestamp)

u) Round Trip Delay - set the minimum and maximum values and the
number of bins assigned.
v) One Way TX Delay - set the minimum and maximum values and the
number of bins assigned.
w) One Way RX Delay - set the minimum and maximum values and the
number of bins assigned.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 553

ESA Provisioning and Operation

x) One Way TX Jitter - set the minimum and maximum values and the
number of bins assigned.
y) One Way RX Jitter - set the minimum and maximum values and the
number of bins assigned.
5. Select OK.

6. Expand the Probes entity in the Selection Tree. Select the Probe Identifier and
Configuration and StatsConfig tabs to verify the entry.

7. To view / edit Probe Thresholds, see Viewing PM Counts and Threshold Values or
Editing PM Thresholds, respectively.

8. Go to Provision a Reflector to create Reflector(s).

554 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 ESA Provisioning and Operation

Provision a Y.1731 Probe

The first step in creating an ESA test is to establish a probe at one GE11xPro. This
procedure provides steps for creating a Y.17321 (Layer-2) Probe. Prior to creating a
Y.1731 Probe, a CFM MD, MANET, MACOMP and MEP for the desired port (see CFM
Provisioning and Operation) must be established.

Every GE11xPro product supports two types of Y.1731 probes which are
MEF 35/36 compliant.

To edit an existing Probe, enter a right click on the desired Probe entity and select Edit
Probe.

The Service End Points and History Configuration items cannot be edited. If
they require modification, the probe must be deleted and re-entered.

To delete an existing Probe, enter a right click on the desired Probe entity and select
Delete Probe.

A Probe cannot be deleted if it is associated with a Scheduled ESA Activity.

To delete a Probe that is associated with a Scheduled ESA Activity, the
Scheduled ESA Activity must first be deleted (see Provision an ESA
Schedule).

Refer to ESA Options and Rules to determine the default values, value ranges and rules
for each option in the following procedure.

1. Ensure that services are created and In-Service for the Access Ports that are targeted
for Layer-2 ESA testing.

2. Create a CFM MD, MANET, MACOMP and MEP for the desired ports at both NEs
(see CFM Provisioning and Operation).

3. Select the ESA icon on the Tool Bar or select ESA from the Applications menu and
expand the System, NE-1 and NTE11x entities in the Selection Tree.

4. Enter a right click on the Probes entity and select Create Probe.

A Layer-3 Create Probe pane (default) appears (see Figure 28)

5. Select Protocol type Y.1731 LM/DM or Y.1731 SLM/DMM from the drop down list.

A Layer-2 Create Probe pane appears (see Figure 31

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 555

ESA Provisioning and Operation

Y.1731 uses CFM MEPs as the end points and thus does not require a
reflector. This also means that the related MD, MANET, MACOMP and
MEPs must already exist on the same interface as this probe in CFM to
create a Y.1731 protocol probe. Additionally, since Y.1731 LM/DM only
supports point-to-point connections, the CFM MA MEP list can only have
two entries or an error message displays.

Figure 29: Create Probe View (Y.1731 SLM/DMM)

6. Enter/select the following Probe options (refer to ESA Probe Configuration Settings for
details and rules):

Identification

a) Probe Index – Unique EID for the probe. Options available are 1 to 255.
b) Probe Name – a text identifier (up to 15 characters, no spaces and must
contain only alpha-numeric characters) for the probe (required).
c) Alias - a customized name for this probe

Probe Information

d) Protocol – Select either Y.1731 LM/DM or Y.1731 SLM/DMM as desired.

e) Source Port – Select the desired physical Port or LAG entity this probe is
associated to from the drop-down list.

556 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 ESA Provisioning and Operation

If the two Network ports are configured “1+1” or “Dual Active Receive” PPG
and are provisioned with different speeds, the port configured with larger port
speed will output random larger SLM/DMM frames against the configuration.
Thus, it is recommended that the network ports be provisioned with same
speed. As such, for auto-negotiated speed, both ports are recommended to
be provisioned the same auto-negotiated speed, e.g. Auto 1000 Full;
however, “auto” is not recommended.

Service End Points

f) Multicast MAC - (Y.1731 SLM/DMM probe only) Enable or disable

multicast MAC on this probe.
g) Destination Type - (Y.1731 SLM/DMM probe only) Select the monitoring
type of SLM/DMM from this SEP node to the destination node(s). “Point to
Multipoint” will be automatically selected if Multicast MAC is Enabled.
h) Source MEP – select a desired MEP ID of the source port from the drop-
down list.
i) Destination MEP Type – Select the desired way to display the
destination MEP, by MAC address or MEP ID.

If MEP ID is selected as Destination MEP Type, and if the system detects a

peer MEP on a remote node, the destination MEP ID will be automatically
displayed next to Destination MEP Type.

j) Destination MAC Address – Enter the MAC address if Destination Type

is MAC Address.

If the user wants to change the configuration of a MEP associated with an

ESA entity, the recommended steps are: first stop or suspend the associated
ESA Schedule, then change the MEP configuration, and finally restart or
resume the schedule.

Destination MEP List (only available for Y.1731 SLM/DMM probe when
Multicast MAC is disabled and Destination Type is set to Point to Multipoint.)

k) Destination MEP Entry - MEP ID - Enter the destination MEP ID and

click on Add.
l) Destination MEP Entry - MAC Address - Enter the destination MEP
MAC address and click on Add.
m) Members - Showing a list of MEP members add in the form of MEP ID
and/or MAC Address (see Figure 30). Select an unwanted MEP entry and
click on Delete to remove it.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 557

ESA Provisioning and Operation

Figure 30: Multiple Destination MEP Members for Y.1731 SLM/DMM Service End Point

Service Parameters

n) Multi COS – If Multi-COS is disabled, only 1 COS can be selected; if

enabled, each COS can be individually selected as active using a check
box.
o) COS - If Multi COS is disabled, one COS can be selected from a drop-
down list; if Multi COS is enabled, the desired COS are selected by
clicking on the Active check box next to each COS and the frame size and
interval corresponding to each COS should be entered accordingly.
p) DM Frame Size - (Y.1731 LM/DM probe only) Enter the LM/DM packet
size in bytes. The default frame size is 128 bytes.
q) DM Interval – (Y.1731 LM/DM probe only) Select the desired frame
transmission interval. The default is 1 second.
r) SLM/DMM Frame Size - (Y.1731 SLM/DMM probe only) Enter the
SLM/DMM packet size in bytes. The default is 28 bytes.
s) SLM Interval - (Y.1731 SLM/DMM probe only) Select the desired frame
transmission interval. The default is 1 second.
t) DMM Interval - (Y.1731 SLM/DMM probe only) Select the desired frame
transmission interval. The default is 1 second.
u) Availability FLR Threshold - (Y.1731 probe only) Enter the desired
threshold in millipercent.
v) FLR Delta T (LM Intervals) - (Y.1731 probe only) Enter the desired delta
T.
w) Consecutive Delta Ts For Availability - Enter the desired value.

History Configuration

x) History Bins – the number of bins of history results to keep. The default
is 8.
y) History Interval – drop-down list - the number of minutes in a single
interval. The default is 15 minutes.
z) History Distribution Bins – the number of distribution history bins to
keep. The default is 8.
aa) History Distribution Interval – drop-down list - the number of minutes in
a distribution history bin. The default is 15 minutes.

558 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 ESA Provisioning and Operation

Statistics and Distribution

ab) Round Trip Delay - set the minimum and maximum values and the
number of bins assigned
ac) One Way TX Delay - set the minimum and maximum values and the
number of bins assigned
ad) One Way RX Delay - set the minimum and maximum values and the
number of bins assigned
ae) One Way TX Jitter - set the minimum and maximum values and the
number of bins assigned
af) One Way RX Jitter - set the minimum and maximum values and the
number of bins assigned
Select OK.

7. Expand the Probes entity in the Selection Tree. Select the Probe Identifier and
Configuration and StatsConfig tabs to verify the entry (see Figure 31 and Figure 32).

8. To view / edit Probe Thresholds, see Viewing PM Counts and Threshold Values or
Editing PM Thresholds, respectively.

9. Go to Provision an ESA Schedule.

Figure 31: Viewing a Probe Configuration Tab

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 559

ESA Provisioning and Operation

Figure 32: Viewing a Probe Distribution Statistics

Figure 33: Viewing a Probe Thresholds Tab

560 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 ESA Provisioning and Operation

Provision a Reflector
The next step in creating a Layer-3 ESA test is to establish a reflector at one GE11xPro.

Y.1731 protocol probes do not require a reflector.

To edit an existing Reflector, enter a right click on the desired Reflector entity and select
Edit Reflector. To delete an existing Reflector, enter a right click on the desired Reflector
entity and select Suspend Reflector, then enter a right click and select Delete Reflector.

Once a Reflector has been created, the Reflector identifier appears under the Reflector
identifier in the selection tree. You can view Reflector details and status by selecting the
specific Reflector entity.

Entering a right click on an existing Reflector identifier will provide menu selections for
the specific Reflector. Menu selections available for Reflector identifiers are:

l Edit Reflector - (only Priority Map Mode and Priority are editable)
l Delete Reflector - To delete a reflector.

A Reflector cannot be deleted if its status is Active. To delete a reflector, it

must be suspended first.

l Suspend Reflector - To change the reflector status from Active to Suspended.

l Resume Reflector - To resume the reflector status from Suspended to Active.

Refer to ESA Options and Rules to determine the default values, value ranges and rules
for each option in the following procedure.

1. Select the ESA icon on the Tool Bar or select ESA from the Applications menu.
Expand the System, NE-1 and NTE11x entities in the Selection Tree.

2. Ensure that services are created and In-Service for the Access Port that is targeted to
create the Reflector.

3. Enter a right click on the Reflectors entity and select Create Reflector.

A Create Reflector pane appears

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 561

ESA Provisioning and Operation

Figure 34: Create Reflector View

4. Enter the desired Reflector options:

Identification

a) Reflector Index – Unique EID for the probe. Options available are 1 to
255.
b) Reflector ID – a text identifier (up to 15 characters, no spaces and must
contain only alpha-numeric characters) for the reflector (required).

IP Information

c) Source Port - the port on which the reflector operates - select from drop-
down list

Reflector Information

d) Reflector IP Address, Mask – the IP address and subnet mask of the

reflector. (The IP address must not overlap with any non-ESA related
subnet provisioned within the GE11xPro.)
e) Priority Map Mode, Priority - select the priority map mode and priority
assigned to the associated reflector.

Although it is possible for a GE11xPro to contain both Reflectors and Probes,

it is not possible for a Probe-Reflector pair to be on the same GE11xPro. This
is determined by the subnet of the Probe and Reflector IP Address.

5. Select OK.

562 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 ESA Provisioning and Operation

6. Expand the Reflector entity in the Selection Tree. Select the Reflector Identifier and
Configuration tab to verify the entry.

7. Go to Provision an ESA Schedule.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 563

ESA Provisioning and Operation

Provision an ESA Schedule

The final step in creating an ESA test is creating an ESA schedule. A Scheduled ESA
may be provisioned as a:

l one-shot or periodic execution

l now or future execution
l forever (continuous) or fixed duration

One or more Probes may be scheduled using the same Entity ID and Activity ID, and
multiple Scheduled ESA activities may be created. Refer to ESA Options and Rules for
detailed information on Scheduled ESA configuration options and rules.

Once a Scheduled ESA has been created, options available when entering a right click on
the Activity ID in the Selection Tree are: Delete, Suspend, Resume and Edit. To
edit/delete a Scheduled ESA, you must first Suspend the activity. For the schedules in
Active status, user is allowed to edit the schedules by adding or removing probes. To
view the ESA Schedule status, expand the System, NE-1, NTE11x and Schedules
entities in the Selection Tree and select the desired Entity ID.

1. Select the ESA icon on the Tool Bar or select ESA from the Applications menu.

2. Expand the System, NE-1 and NTE11x entities in the Selection Tree. Enter a right
click on Schedules and select Create Schedule.

A Create Schedule pane appears

Figure 35: Create Schedule View

3. Enter the desired ESA Schedule options:

Identification

a) Schedule Index – Unique EID for the ESA Schedule. Options available
are 1 to 255.
b) Activity ID – a text identifier (up to 15 characters, no spaces and must
contain only alpha-numeric characters) for the ESA Schedule (required).
Schedule Parameters

564 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 ESA Provisioning and Operation

c) Schedule Type - Select either One Shot (continuous) or Periodic

(intervals).
d) Duration - If One Shot is selected: Select either Forever or Fixed. If
Periodic is selected: Only Fixed is applicable.
e) (secs) - If Fixed duration was selected: Enter the number of seconds for
the One Shot or Periodic test. If Schedule Type of One Shot is selected,
valid entries are 0 (continuous) through 9999 (seconds). If Schedule Type
of Periodic is selected, valid entries are 60 through 9999 (seconds).
f) Start Time - Select Now to execute an immediate ESA or select Future
for a scheduled ESA.
g) Start Time Entry Windows (yyyy-mm-dd) and (hh:mm:ss) - This option
is only applicable if Future start time is selected. When cursor is placed in
the yyyy-mm-dd data entry window and a mouse click is entered, a
calendar selection appears, allowing date selection. When cursor is
placed in data entry window and mouse click is entered, a start time drop
down selectable menu appears, in 15 minute segments. Entry selection
must be greater than the current time.
h) Periodic Interval - If Schedule Type of Periodic is selected, specify the
interval between subsequent runs (in seconds). Range is 1 to 2147483647
(seconds).

Schedule Probes

i) Select the checkbox next to the desired probes this schedule is assigned
to.
4. Select OK.

5. Expand the Schedules entity and select the Schedule identifier to verify entry.

6. To edit a Schedule entity, enter a right click on the desired entity and select Edit
Schedule.

An Edit Schedule window appears

Figure 36: Edit ESA Schedule (Active Status)

7. Select/Deselect the checkboxes by the probes you want to associate with this
schedule. Click on OK.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 565

ESA Provisioning and Operation

Only the schedules in “Active” status are allowed to be edited. The schedules
in “Completed” or “Initial” Status cannot be edited any more.

8. Once a scheduled ESA has been activated, status results may be displayed: If
required, expand the Probe entity in the Selection Tree. To display ESA test results,
select the desired active Probe and select the Statistics tab.

Counts available are dependant upon which Protocol type has been entered
when creating the Probe and which report Group has been selected from the
Groups selection list (see Table 13).

9. Select the desired display type of Table or Chart. See Figure 37 for an example of ESA
counts displayed in tabular format, and see Figure 38 and Figure 39 for examples of
ESA counts displayed in chart format.

10. Select the desired Counters to be displayed: General, Distribution, Delay or Jitter. If
Distribution is selected, also select the desired Distribution Type to be displayed.

Counters may also be filtered by selecting the Filter button (see Figure 40).
Select or de-select individual counter or click the Select All or Deselect All
button in respective counter types to filter the displayed [Link] click on the
Filter: OK button to confirm the selection.

Results may be refreshed by selecting the Statistics tab. History data may be
hidden or displayed by de-selecting/selecting the History option.

11. If desired, Statistics results can be exported to an Excel spreadsheet by selecting the
Export button.

An export file pane appears (see Figure 41).

12. Choose the desired application to open, or select the Save File option. A filename
associated with the entity and date is created in the selected application (Excel is the
default application - see Figure 42). Edit or save the exported file as desired.

13. If desired, edit ESA Probe thresholds or initialize PM/Distribution registers. To edit
ESA Probe thresholds, see Editing PM Thresholds. To initialize PM or Distribution
registers, see Initializing PM and Distribution Registers.

566 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 ESA Provisioning and Operation

Table 13: ESA Counts/Thresholds By Protocol Type and Report Group

Probe Protocol Type Report Group Count
Probe to Reflector Packets
Reflector to Probe Packets
Probe to Reflector Errored Packets
Reflector to Probe Errored Packets
Lost Packets
Late Packets
UDP Echo, General
Number of Gaps in Sequence Numbers
ICMP Echo, Out of Sequence Errors
Probe to Reflector Lost Packets
ICMP Timestamp Reflector to Probe Lost Packets
Y.1731 Probe to Reflector Sync Errors
Reflector to Probe Sync Errors
Minimum Round Trip Delay
Maximum Round Trip Delay
Round Trip Delay Average Round Trip Delay
Sum of Round Trip Delays
Sum of Square of Round Trip Delays
Y.1731 Probe to Reflector Data Frames
Y.1731 Reflector to Probe Data Frames
Y.1731 Y.1731
Y.1731 Probe to Reflector Negative Loss Occurrences
Y.1731 Reflector to Probe Negative Loss Occurrences

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 567

ESA Provisioning and Operation

Table 13: ESA Counts/Thresholds By Protocol Type and Report Group

Probe Protocol Type Report Group Count
Probe to Reflector Minimum One Way Delay
Probe to Reflector Maximum One Way Delay
Probe to Reflector Average One Way Delay
Probe to Reflector Sum of One Way Delay
Probe to Reflector Sum of Square of One Way Delays
One Way Delay
Reflector to Probe Minimum One Way Delay
Reflector to Probe Maximum One Way Delay
Reflector to Probe Average One Way Delay
Reflector to Probe Sum of One Way Delay
Reflector to Probe Sum of Square of One Way Delays
Probe to Reflector Minimum Positive Jitters
Probe to Reflector Maximum Positive Jitters
Probe to Reflector Number of Positive Jitters
Probe to Reflector Sum of Positive Jitters
ICMP Timestamp Probe to Reflector Sum of Square of Positive Jitters
Y.1731 Probe to Reflector Minimum Negative Jitters
Probe to Reflector Maximum Negative Jitters
Probe to Reflector Number of Negative Jitters
Probe to Reflector Sum of Negative Jitters
Probe to Reflector Sum of Square of Negative Jitters
Jitter
Reflector to Probe Minimum Positive Jitters
Reflector to Probe Maximum Positive Jitters
Reflector to Probe Number of Positive Jitters
Reflector to Probe Sum of Positive Jitters
Reflector to Probe Sum of Square of Positive Jitters
Reflector to Probe Minimum Negative Jitters
Reflector to Probe Maximum Negative Jitters
Reflector to Probe Number of Negative Jitters
Reflector to Probe Sum of Negative Jitters
Reflector to Probe Sum of Square of Negative Jitters

Figure 37: ESA Test Results in Tabular Format

568 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 ESA Provisioning and Operation

Figure 38: ESA Statistics Results in Chart Format

Figure 39: ESA Round Trip Delay Distributed Statistics Results in Chart Format

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 569

ESA Provisioning and Operation

Figure 40: Filtering ESA Probe Statistics

Figure 41: Exporting ESA Probe Statistics to Excel

570 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 ESA Provisioning and Operation

Figure 42: ESA Probe Statistics Exported to Excel

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 571

CFM Provisioning and Operation

CFM Provisioning and Operation

Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) is an emerging standard aimed at enhancing
Ethernet Service OAM capabilities. The main features provided by CFM include the
ability to detect, verify, isolate and report connectivity faults on a service instance. CFM
features include the ability to:

l Configure Maintenance Domains (MDs)

l Configure Maintenance Association Networks (MANETs)
l Configure and manage Maintenance Association Components (MACOMPs)
l Configure and manage Maintenance End Points (MEPs)
l Configure and manage Maintenance Intermediate Points (MIPs)
l Transmit and receive Continuity Check Messages (CCMs)
l Initiate Loop Back Messages or Link Trace Messages
l Detect and raise CFM-related alarms

The following procedure describes the CFM feature provisioning and operation process
for each node. Refer to CFM Configuration Options and Rules to determine the default
values, value ranges and rules for each option in the following procedure.

Configuration of a CFM MANET with 2 MEPs in its MEP list is

required to support the configuration of a Y.1731 ESA Probe.

1. Determine the CFM node locations to be provisioned, including their MAC addresses
and other associated options. Common elements for each end point include Primary
VLAN IDs, Maintenance End Point IDs and Continuity Check Message interval.

Edit the CFM System Level Parameters.

2. Select CFM from the Applications menu, expand the System and Maintenance
Domain entities in the selection tree.

3. Right click on the System entity in the selection tree and select Edit System Default
MD Level.

An Edit Configuration screen appears

572 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 CFM Provisioning and Operation

Figure 43: Edit System Default MD Level Window

4. Enter/select the following Default MD options (refer to Configure System Default MD

Parameters for details and rules):

Select the desired Default MD Level

Select the desired MIP Creation Control

5. Select OK.

6. Right click on the System entity in the selection tree and select Edit CFM Control.

An Edit Configuration screen appears

Figure 44: Edit System CFM Control Window

7. Select the desired Signal Fail Trigger by ticking the corresponding checkbox.

8. Select OK.

Create a Maintenance Domain (MD)

9. Right click on the Maintenance Domain entity in the selection tree and select Create
MD.

A Maintenance Domain creation screen displays

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 573

CFM Provisioning and Operation

Figure 45: Create Maintenance Domain Window

10. Enter/select the following MD options (refer to Configure Maintenance Domain for
details and rules):

Enter an MD Index number

Select the desired Format Type

Enter the MD Name contents (See Note 1)

Select the desired Level

Select the desired MIP Creation Control (See Note 2)

11. Select OK

If Format Type String or DNS Name is selected, allowed characters are: a-

z, A-Z, 0-9, and _@#$%^*-+=:;.?(){}[]|? Spaces are not allowed. If Format
Type MAC-Integer is selected, the entry must be Hexadecimal characters.

MIPs are not created explicitly via the web-based GUI. For information on
MIP rules see FSP 150-GE11xPro System Description document.

12. Expand the Maintenance Domain entity in the selection tree.

The new Maintenance Domain ID is present in the selection tree

13. Select the new Maintenance Domain ID and verify the entry.

14. Determine the next step.

Current Status Then

Enter a right click on the MD ID and
Are changes other than Level required to the MD? select Edit Configuration. Enter the
desired changes and select OK.

574 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 CFM Provisioning and Operation

Current Status Then

Enter a right click on the MD ID and
select Delete and then select OK.
Is a change to the Level required?
Then go to 10 and re-enter the appro-
priate MD ID options.
Is the MD information correct? Continue with the next step.

Create a Maintenance Association (MANET).

15. Right click on a Maintenance Domain ID in the selection tree and select Create
MANET.

A Create Maintenance Association - Network screen displays

Figure 46: Create Maintenance Association Window

16. Enter/select the following MANET options (see Configure Maintenance Association
Network for details and rules):

Enter the desired MANET Index

Select the desired name Format Type

Enter the MA Name contents (See Note)

Select the desired CCM Interval

Enter the Maintenance Association MEP list by entering the first ID number and
select Add. Enter additional ID members and select Add, as required. To delete
an ID member, select the ID member to be removed, and then select Delete.

17. Select OK

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 575

CFM Provisioning and Operation

If Format Type String or ICC Format is selected, allowed characters are: a-

z, A-Z, 0-9, and _@#$%^*-+=:;.?(){}[]|? Spaces are not allowed.

18. Expand the Maintenance Domain ID in the selection tree.

The new Maintenance Association ID is present in the selection tree

19. Select the new Maintenance Association ID and verify the entry.

20. If additional MANETs are required for the same Maintenance Domain ID, repeat 15
through 17.

21. Determine the next step.

Current Status Then

Enter a right click on the MA ID and
Are Format Type, MA Name, CCM Interval or select Edit Configuration and
MEP Member List changes required to the MA? make the required changes, then
select OK.
No changes are necessary Continue with the next step.

Create a Maintenance Association Component (MACOMP)

22. Expand the MD entity in the selection tree, right click on the associated MANET entity
in the selection tree and select Create MACOMP.

A Create Maintenance Association - Component screen displays

Figure 47: Create Maintenance Association - Component

23. Enter/select the following MACOMP options (refer to Configure Maintenance

Association Component for details and rules):

Select the desired Component Id

Enter the Primary VID number

576 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 CFM Provisioning and Operation

Select the desired MIP Creation Control

An Access Port Flow to be used as a Component ID must have a single

Push or PushVID Tag Control operation; A flow with no tag push or double
tags push cannot be identified as a MA Component ID.

If MACOMP Component ID is an Access Port Flow, the MIP Creation Con-

trol must be set to None; Otherwise, the system will deny the MACOMP cre-
ation or editing.

24. Select OK

Create a Maintenance End Point (MEP)

25. Expand the NE-1 and NTE entities in the selection tree.

26. Right click on the interface port identified by itself or its associated flow in the
MACOMP and select Create MEP.

If the MACOMP Component ID is an Access Port Flow, the flow EID will
appear as the Associated Port for the MEP to create.

A Create Maintenance End Point screen displays

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 577

CFM Provisioning and Operation

Figure 48: Create MEP Window

27. Enter/select the following MEP options (refer to Configure Maintenance End Point for
details and rules):

Identification

Select the desired MANET ID (see note)

Select the desired MEP Index

Although the MEP Index appears above the MANET ID in the GUI display,
the MANET ID determines what MEP Indexes are available, so the MANET
ID must be selected first.

State

Select the desired Administrative State

Configuration (General)

Select the desired Direction

The system currently only supports Up Direction if the MEP associated port
is an Access Port Flow.

578 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 CFM Provisioning and Operation

Enable/Disable CCM Generation

Select the desired VLAN Priority

Enter the desired VLAN Ethertype

Select the desired Fault Alarm Priority

Select the desired Primary VID

For a service Up MEP(MACOMP Component ID is an Access Port Flow),

the MEP Primary VID must be equal to or inherited from the MACOMP;
Otherwise, the system will deny the operation.

Select the desired LLF Triggers, if any

CFM LLF triggers only work if the ports associated with the MEP are
configured to support LLF. If using RDI as a trigger, ensure the Remote
MEP’s fault priority is set higher than MAC STATUS (default value) or the
port may not recover from an RDI triggered deactivation without intervention.

Configuration (AIS)

Enable/Disable AIS Generation

If the AIS Generation is “Enabled”, select the desired AIS Triggers,

Transmission Interval, Priority and Client MD Level.

Configuration (ESA)

Select the desired LM and DM settings for LM In-Profile Only, LM TX Count All
Priorities, Dual-ended Count All Priorities, LM RX Count All Priorities

Configuration (SAT)

Enable or disable SAT Responder Control

Select OK

28. Expand the associated Maintenance End Point entity interface in the selection tree.

The new MEP is present in the selection tree

29. Select the new MEP and verify the entry.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 579

CFM Provisioning and Operation

Figure 49: View MEP Configuration

30. Determine the next step.

Current Status Then

Enter a right click on the MEP and
Are changes other than MEP Direction required
select Edit. Select the desired
to the MEP?
changes and select OK.
Enter a right click on the MEP and
Are MEP Direction changes required to the select Delete and then select OK.
MEP? Then go to 27 and re-enter the appro-
priate MA ID options.
No changes are necessary. Continue with the next step.

31. Determine the next step.

Current Status Then

Is it desired to create VLAN Entries for the port
Continue with the next step.
associated with this MEP?
Otherwise Go to 35.

Create VLAN Entries.

32. Right click on the desired access/network port and select Create VLAN Entry.

A Create VLAN Entry screen displays

580 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 CFM Provisioning and Operation

Figure 50: Create VLAN Entries

33. Enter the following VLAN Entry options (see Configure CFM VLAN Table for details
and rules):

Enter the Primary VID number

Enter the VID Members List by entering the first VID ID number and select Add.
Enter additional VID ID members and select Add, as required. To delete a VID
ID member, select the VID ID member to be removed, and then select Delete.

34. Select OK.

If creating a VLAN entry on an access port with no MEP(s) assigned, a

Default MD is created. The Default MD has an MD level of -1, which
indicates an invalid MD. This MD level defaults to the System Default MD
Level unless it is edited to another level.
To edit the Default MD Level and/or the MIP Creation Control, right click on
the access port and select “Edit Default MD Level”, then select the desired
MD Level and/or MIP Creation Control settings from the drop-down lists and
select OK.

35. Select the access port associated with the VLAN entry in the selection tree.

The VLAN data is displayed

a) If the VLAN data requires editing, right click on the interface and select
Edit VLAN Entry, click the “Edit” radio button for the VLAN entry to edit
and edit the VLAN data, then select OK.
b) To delete the VLAN entry, right click on the interface and select Delete
VLAN Entry and then select the delete button for the desired entry and
select OK.
c) To display the Default MD Level, click on the Default MD Level tab. (see
note at step 18)

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 581

CFM Provisioning and Operation

The Default MD data is displayed

d) To edit the Default MD Level, right click on the access port and select Edit
Default MD Level, then select the desired MD Level and MIP Creation
Control setting and click on OK.
e) To display the CFM N2A Shaper data, click on the Shaper tab.
The CFM N2A Shaper data is displayed
f) To edit the Shaper data, right click on the access port and select Edit
Shaper, then enter the desired values for CIR and Buffer Size and click on
OK.
36. Determine the next step.

Current Status Then

Enter a right click on the MEP and
Are changes other than MEP Direction required to
select Edit. Select the desired
the MEP?
changes and select OK.
Enter a right click on the MEP and
select Delete and then select OK.
Are MEP Direction changes required to the MEP?
Then go to and re-enter the appro-
priate MA ID options.
No changes are necessary. Continue with the next step.

37. If additional MEPs are required for another Maintenance Association ID, repeat 25
through 36.

38. If additional Maintenance Domains, and their associated MD IDs and MEPs are
required, repeat 9 through 37.

39. Select the maintenance application, expand the tree to see the selections under the
Alarm Attributes tab. select CFM MEP and determine if Notification Code changes are
required. If Alarm notification code changes are required, enter a right click on a CFM
MEP and select Edit Alarm Attributes, select the desired Notification Code(s) and
then select OK. Repeat for CFM QOS Shaper.

40. Repeat 1 through 39 for each node to be set up for Connectivity Fault Management.

41. Determine the next step.

Current Status Then

Do you wish to initiate a Loop Back Mes-
Continue with the next step.
sage (LBM)?
Do you wish to initiate a Link Trace Mes-
Go to 47.
sage (LTM)?
Is no further action required at this time? End of Procedure

Initiate a Loop Back Message (LBM)

42. Expand the Maintenance End Point entity in the selection tree.

43. Right click on the associated MEP interface in the selection tree and select Loopback.

A Loopback screen displays

582 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 CFM Provisioning and Operation

Figure 51: Configure Loop Back Message

44. Enter/select the following options (refer to Initiate Loopback Message for details and
rules):

Select the desired Destination Type

Select the desired Destination ID

Enter the Number of LBMs to be transmitted

Enter the number of padding bytes in the Data TLV

Select the desired Data Pattern

Select the VLAN Priority

Enable/Disable VLAN Drop Eligible

45. Select Start Loopback.

Before running Loopback, ensure that the Administrative State of the MEP is
IS.

46. Go to 41

Initiate a Link Trace Message (LTM)

47. Expand the Maintenance End Point entity in the selection tree.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 583

CFM Provisioning and Operation

48. Right click on the associated MEP interface in the selection tree and select Linktrace

An Linktrace screen displays

Figure 52: Configure Link Trace Message

49. Enter/select the following options for Link Trace:

Select the desired Destination Type (Drop-down list)

Select the desired Destination ID (Drop-down list)

Enter the desired TTL

Enable/Disable Use FDB Only (Drop-down list)

Edit the Egress ID if desired

50. Select Start Linktrace.

Before running Linktrace, ensure that the Administrative State of the MEP is
IS.

51. Select the MEP Configuration tab and verify the status

For LTM, click on the LTR Database tab to view the Link Trace Reply database.

584 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 CFM Provisioning and Operation

Figure 53: MEP Display Configuration Window

52. Troubleshoot and edit any issues, as required.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 585

Etherjack® Connection Performance Analyzer

Etherjack® Connection Performance Analyzer

The Etherjack® Connection Performance Analyzer (ECPA) provides a subset of Ethernet
test equipment functions embedded directly into the port circuitry so that each individual
Access or Network port can act as its own “test equipment”. This provides a means to
test EVC connectivity and verify service conformance from a remote location without the
need for external test equipment.

ECPA upstream injection (e.g., network port as the source port and injecting
in the N2A direction) with the source port of a LAG Member Port is not
expected to function properly when injecting untagged frames and LAG
protocols enabled. The injection of untagged frames blocks LACP (because
they are untagged) and causes the removal of the port from the LAG function.
The removal of the port from the LAG also blocks all non-LACP frames from
being forwarded on that port.

Refer to the following procedures to initiate an Etherjack® Connection Performance

Analyzer (ECPA) routine on an Access facility:

l Run Untagged ECPA Test on an Access Facility

l Run VLAN ECPA Test on an Access Facility

From the Maintenance application, entering a right click on “System” in the selection tree
and selecting Edit ECPA Streams allows you to edit ECPA test stream details prior to
advancing through the ECPA test process. See the following figure.

Figure 54: Edit ECPA Test Streams Window

586 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Etherjack® Connection Performance Analyzer

ECPA setup and execution options are available by entering a right click on the NTE
entity and selecting Run ECPA. An ECPA test setup window walks you through the
steps for selecting ECPA setup and execution options, and performing ECPA
diagnostics. You can place a facility in the maintenance state, select the desired tests to
perform, execute diagnostics, view test results, and restore the facility from this window.
See Figure 55 for the ECPA test setup window provided after the facility has been placed
in the maintenance state.

The desired Source Port, Injector and Monitor direction, Test Type (and Duration or
Frames as appropriate) and ECPA test stream assignments are also selected and edited
from this window.

Figure 55: ECPA Set Configuration Window (Flow VLAN)

The next step in the ECPA Test Process is running the test, which is invoked by
selecting the Run button from the ECPA test setup window. The ECPA test results
window will appear, displaying the current ECPA test status and results. If multiple test
streams are run, scroll down to review each ECPA test stream. The screen refreshes
itself when the test completes or is stopped. The test can be canceled by selecting the
Stop Test button.

The first ECPA test frame can be viewed by selecting the ECPA First Frame buttons
located at the top of the ECPA view. See Figure 56 for the location of the ECPA First
Frame buttons. See Figure 57 for an example of ECPA First Frame results.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 587

Etherjack® Connection Performance Analyzer

Figure 56: ECPA Test Results Window

The ECPA First Frame windows provide first frame result details, including frame header,
packet details and raw frame content for each ECPA test stream. If more than one ECPA
test stream was run, use the tabs to view the ECPA First Frame for the desired ECPA
test stream. To toggle back to the ECPA Test Results window, select the ECPA Results
button located at the top of the ECPA First Frame results view. See Figure 57.

Figure 57: ECPA First Frame from ECPA Results Window

588 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Etherjack® Connection Performance Analyzer

Run Untagged ECPA Test on an Access Facility

The following procedure describes the ECPA Test feature.

Running an Untagged ECPA test on an Access facility is a Service Affecting

procedure. If customer traffic is present, ensure that the following procedure
is performed during a scheduled Maintenance Window. Creating a VLAN
loopback and running a VLAN ECPA test is not Service Affecting, as long as
the test rate does not exceed the available bandwidth for customer traffic,
and as long as the customer is not using the same VLAN.

1. Create a remote loopback at the far end of the facility to be tested or create a local
loopback if internal testing is desired.

2. Select Maintenance view, right click on “System” in the selection tree and select Edit
ECPA Streams.
An Edit ECPA Streams window appears

3. Select ECPA Stream-1.

Name

Edit the Name if desired

Configuration

Select the desired Payload Type

Enter the Frame Size (in Bytes)

Enter the desired Rate (in bps)

Enter the MAC Source Address

Enter the MAC Destination Address

Enable/Disable Use Source Port Source MAC

Select the desired IP Precedence

If IP Precedence is TOS or DSCP, select the desired IP Priority

Select the desired IP version

Enter the IP Source Address

Enter the IP Destination Address

VLAN Configuration

Leave the VLAN Configuration entries unselected

4. Select OK
The maintenance status window appears

5. Select the ECPA Streams tab to verify ECPA Stream entry.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 589

Etherjack® Connection Performance Analyzer

6. Place the Access facility in the Maintenance state.

7. Right click on the NTE entity (NTE11x) in the selection tree and select Run ECPA.
An ECPA Status window appears

8. Select the “Set Configuration” button.

An ECPA Set Configuration window appears

9. Select the desired Source Port

Select “Maintenance” for the Administrative State

Select the desired Injector Type

Select the desired Monitor Type

Select the desired Test Type

If applicable, verify or edit the Test Duration

If applicable, verify or edit the Test Frames

Select the desired Test Stream for Test Stream A (Stream-1 was configured in
step 2)

10. Select OK

An ECPA Status window appears

11. Verify the Administrative State of the facility is in the Maintenance state.

12. Select the “Start Test” button to start the ECPA test.
ECPA Test Status changes to “In Progress”

13. Observe the test status.

14. Select Stop Test when desired, or wait until the test has completed.

15. View completed ECPA test results

16. Select “Set Configuration” and select “IS” for the Administrative State.

Select Apply
The Administrative State changes to IS

17. Verify the restoration of the facility. Select OK

The ECPA status window appears

18. Review the ECPA test results.

19. If desired, retrieve the first frame received by selecting the desired ECPA First Frame
tab

The ECPA first frame received data is displayed

20. Remove the local or remote loopback.

590 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Etherjack® Connection Performance Analyzer

Run VLAN ECPA Test on an Access Facility

1. Create a remote loopback at the far end of the facility to be tested or create a local
loopback if internal testing is desired.

2. For Flow VLAN facility, create the appropriate VLAN member(s) that will be used
when creating ECPA test streams in the next step. (Defaults for all 12 streams are:
Outer VLAN, Inner VLAN1 and Inner VLAN2: EtherType = 8100 (hex), Tag = 4094-1)

3. Select Maintenance view, right click on “System” in the selection tree and select Edit
ECPA Streams.

An Edit Streams window appears

4. Select the desired ECPA Stream and enter/select the following configuration options:

Name

Edit the Name if desired

Configuration

Select the desired Payload Type

Enter the Frame Size (in Bytes)

Enter the desired Rate (in bps)

Enter the MAC Source Address

The rate should not exceed the facility/path rate, including overhead bytes.

If required, enter the MAC Destination address

The destination MAC address needs to be specified if the packets may be

traversing a network that has many switches, or if the configuration uses a
MAC-enabled management tunnel. In order to ensure that the packet reaches
the proper destination, the destination MAC address must be supplied here,
and destination/source address swapping must be requested as part of the
loopback at the other end.

Enable/Disable Use Source Port Source MAC

Select the desired IP Precedence

If IP Precedence is TOS or DSCP, select the desired IP Priority

Select the desired IP version

Enter the IP Source Address

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 591

Etherjack® Connection Performance Analyzer

Enter the IP Destination Address

VLAN Configuration

Select the desired VLAN Configuration options (Outer VLAN, InnerVLAN1, Inner
VLAN2) and edit the Ethertype and Tag information as needed.

5. Select OK.

The maintenance status window appears

6. Select the ECPA Streams tab and stream number tab to verify ECPA Stream entry.

7. Place the Access facility in the Maintenance state.

8. Right click on the NTE entity (NTE11x) in the selection tree and select Run ECPA.

An ECPA Status window appears

9. Select Set Configuration.

An ECPA Set Configuration window appears

10. Select “Access-1” for Source Port

Select “Maintenance” for Administrative state

Select the desired Injector and Monitor points

Select the desired Test Type (Duration, NumFrames or Continuous)

If Test Type is Duration, edit the Test Duration

If Test Type is NumFrames, edit the Test Frames

Select the desired Test Stream number (or “None”) for each Test Stream

11. Select OK

The Port Administrative State changes to the Maintenance state

12. Verify the Administrative State of the facility is in the Maintenance state. Select Start
Test.

The ECPA Test Status changes to “In Progress”

13. Observe the test status.

14. Select Stop when desired (if TestType is Continuous), or wait until the test has
completed.

15. View completed ECPA test results.

16. Select Set Configuration and select “IS” for the Administrative State.

17. Select Apply.

The Administrative State changes to IS

18. Verify the restoration of the facility and select OK.

The ECPA status window appears

19. Review the ECPA test results.

592 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Etherjack® Connection Performance Analyzer

20. If desired, retrieve the first frame(s) received.

21. Select the desired ECPA First Frame tab.

The ECPA first frame received data is displayed

22. Remove the local or remote loopback.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 593

Service Activation Testing

Service Activation Testing

Supported in all FSP150-GE11xPro products, the Service Activation Testing (SAT)
based on ITU Y.1564 is an Ethernet service activation test methodology which is the only
standard test methodology that allows for complete validation of Ethernet service-level-
agreements (SLAs) in a single test. This test includes two key sub-tests: the service
configuration test and the service performance test, which are performed in order.

The following procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address
and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN (see Set Up the GE11xPro DCN (eth0) Port
Using the Serial Port ) and is logged on with at least a Provisioning level user permission
using the web-based GUI.

The procedure also assumes that services have been configured at both ends with flows
and up/down MEPs to support SAT testing and that a connection exists between the two
sites. See Provision Access Port Services and ESA Provisioning and Operation.

The screenshots in the following procedure are presented for reference and do not reflect
the actual User Interface of a GE11xPro product.

Refer to SAT Configuration Options and Rules to determine the default values, value
ranges and rules for each option in the following procedure.

The SAT Test Stream will use local MEP’s MAC address as its source MAC
address. The local MEP is used to negotiate with the remote SAT Responder
and run delay measurement.

Make sure that the CFM settings at Site A and Site B match each other and
the Up/Down MEPs at two sites form a pair.

The destination MEP at Site B is created for the test stream and is
used to negotiate with the local MEP and run delay measurement.

Multiple simultaneous test streams are restricted to operating on a single

port; test streams cannot be applied to different ports at the same time.

Perform the following at Site A (SAT Control End):

Edit SAT Control

1. Select the Service Activation Testing Application on the tool bar or select Service
Activation Testing from the Application menu. Expand the System and NE-1 entities
in the selection tree pane by clicking the “+” sign.

2. Enter a right click on SAT Control and select Edit.

594 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Service Activation Testing

An Edit SAT Control window displays

Figure 58: Edit SAT Control

3. Select/Enter the following SAT Control options:

a) Enter a desired Name for the SAT Control

b) Select desired Test Procedures by ticking the associated checkboxes
c) Select the desired Test Mode

When SAT Control works in “One Way” mode, the SAT Responder Control
option must be Enabled (see Configure Maintenance End Point) on
destination MEP, so that the SAT Responder End is capable of exchanging
the control Protocol Data Unit (PDU) with the SAT Control End.

d) Enable/Disable FLPDU Tag Override

e) Enter desired values for Number of CIR Test Steps, CIR Test Step
Duration, Test Duration and Performance Test Duration.
Click on OK.

4. Expand the SAT Control entity in the Selection Tree and select the Configuration tab
in the Detail Pane to view the SAT Control settings.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 595

Service Activation Testing

Figure 59: SAT Control Configuration View

Edit SAC Profile

5. From the SAT application, expand the System and SAC Profile entities.

6. Right click on a SAT Profile ID and select Edit.

An Edit SAC Profile screen displays

Figure 60: Edit SAC Profile

7. Enter the following options:

a) Enter a desired Name

b) Enter desired Frame Loss Rate (FLR), Frame Transmission Delay (FTD)
and Frame Delay Variation (FDV).
Click on OK.

Create SAT Test Stream

8. Determine the next step.

Desired Action Then

Create a SAT Test Stream without Wizard? Go to 9.
Create a SAT Test with Wizard? Go to 12.

596 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Service Activation Testing

9. Enter a right click on SAT Control and select Create Test Stream.

A Create SAT Test Stream screen displays

Figure 61: Create SAT Test Stream

10. Enter/Select the following SAT Test Stream options (see Create/Edit SAT Test
Stream for option rules):

Identification

a) Enter a SAT Test Stream Index

b) Enter a desired Name as the alias of this test stream
Configuration

c) Select the Port that is associated with the flow provisioned

d) Select the Local MEP ID associated with the Port/Flow

SAT Test Stream supports service based Up MEP. If a SAT Test Stream is
associated with a service based Up MEP, the “FLPDU Tag Override” option
in associated SAT Control must be Enabled. The system only supports
customized VLAN tag (or untagged) on SAT Test Stream for service based
Up MEP.

The system allows running SAT tests on MEPs that are associated with
probes without having to delete the probes, given that the probes are not
included in any schedule (see Provision an ESA Schedule for how to edit an
ESA schedule).

e) Select Destination MEP Type

f) Enter Destination MEP ID if MEP id is selected
g) Enter Destination MEP’s MAC Address if MAC Address is selected
h) Select desired Direction for the test stream

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 597

Service Activation Testing

Only Forward direction is supported when SAT Control works in “Two Way”
Test Mode.

A “One-Way” SAT Control supports simultaneous Forward and Backward

tests on a same flow, given that the two test streams have same DMM
Frame Size and DMM Interval settings.

i) Enter DMM Priority

j) Enter desired DMM Frame Size
k) Select desired DMM Interval
l) Select a desired Service Acceptance Criteria Profile

FLPDU

m) Select the desired Mac Address Type for test stream’s FLPDU
n) Enter the Destination MAC Address if Mac Address Type is Multicast
o) Select desired Payload Type
p) Enter Custom Payload if Payload Type is CUSTOM
q) Enter desired Frame Size List or click on EMIX or EMIX Default to use a
fixed frame size list
Service

r) Select the desired Color Mode

s) Enable/Disable Use DEI option
t) Enter the same CIR, EIR, CBS and EBS as the flow to be tested
u) Enter Green PCP and Yellow PCP to be associated with the flow COS
v) Enter a desired value for MFactor for test result validation
w) Select the desired Inner/Outer VLAN tag check box(es) to allow tag entry,
then enter the desired EtherType and VLAN Tag(s)
Click on OK.

The SAT Test Stream Configuration displays

598 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Service Activation Testing

Figure 62: SAT Test Stream Configuration View

11. Go to 17.

12. Enter a right click on SAT Control and select Create SAT Test Stream Wizard.

The SAT Test Stream Creation Wizard - STEP1 pane appears

Figure 63: SAT Test Stream Creation Wizard - Step 1

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 599

Service Activation Testing

The wizard will automatically check and fill out the configuration settings if
valid associated settings have been provisioned.

The wizard does not support to create SAT Test Stream in Down direction.

13. Observe the settings wizard automatically provisions and make changes if needed,
then click on Next to proceed.

The SAT Test Stream Creation Wizard - STEP 2 pane appears

Figure 64: SAT Test Stream Creation Wizard - Step 2

14. Likewise, the wizard automatically provisions the settings in step 2. Click on Prev to
modify the settings in previous step, otherwise make changes as needed and click on
Next to proceed.

The SAT Test Stream Creation Wizard - STEP 3 pane appears

Figure 65: SAT Test Stream Creation Wizard - Step 3

15. If no changes are to make, click on Next to proceed.

600 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Service Activation Testing

The FINISH pane appears, showing SAT Test Streams are created
successfully

Figure 66: SAT Test Stream Creation Wizard - FINISH

16. Expand the selection tree and click on the newly created SAT test stream under SAT
Control.

17. Select the Configuration tab to verify Test Stream configuration details. If changes are
required, enter a right click on the test stream entity and select Edit.

Figure 67: Edit SAT Test Stream

The source port and local MEP settings cannot be edited after the creation of
a SAT Test Stream.

18. Repeat 8 and 17 for more SAT Test Streams, if required.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 601

Service Activation Testing

System supports up to four Test Streams running at the same time and the
running test streams may belong to different flows under a same port or
different COS (depending on VID and Priority) under a same flow.

One Local MEP and one Destination MEP can apply to all the four Test
Streams.

19. Initiate a Terminal Port/VLAN loopback on the port on Site B (SAT Responder End) if
SAT Control works in “Two Way” Test Mode.

For down direction test streams, initiate a facility Port/VLAN loopback on the
responder port if SAT Control works in “Two Way” Test Mode.

Run SAT Test

Before running SAT tests, make sure that the SAT Control End and the SAT
Responder end are synchronized (see Edit System Time of Day ), otherwise
test result will record the occurrences of out of synchronization error; if time
is not synchronized, FDV will be calculated as normal, but Min/Max/Avg
FTD will be counted only for valid samples (DMM).

If the transmitted FLPDU Priority at one end is different from the received
FLPDU priority at the other end, the SAT test will fail.

20. Determine the next step.

Desired Activity Then

Run all available SAT Test Streams?
Continue with the next step.

Run a specific SAT Test Stream? Go to 25.

21. Enter a right click on the SAT Control entity and select Run to start the tests of all
available streams.

602 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Service Activation Testing

Figure 68: Run SAT Control

When SAT Control works in “One Way” Test Mode, a “Remote Initiated SAT”
alarm will be raised at the Responder End after the test starts. This alarm
indicates a SAT Responder Session has been negotiated successfully and is
running on the Responder End.
This alarm will be cleared when user deletes the Responder Session or when
it is released by the remote SAT Control End.

22. Click on Start Test to run the test streams.

The Run SAT Control screen displays the general test status, progress
and overall result of each test stream

Figure 69: SAT Test In Progress (Run SAT Control)

23. If the test needs to be terminated, click on Stop Test.

24. Go to 28.

25. Right click on the SAT Test Stream ID and select Run to start the test of a single test
stream.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 603

Service Activation Testing

A Run SAT Test Stream screen displays

Figure 70: Run SAT Test Stream

26. Scroll down the page and click on Start Test to run the test stream, or click on Set
Configuration to change the test stream settings.

The Status / SAT Test Result in Run SAT Test Stream screen display the
test progress, details and result associated with the test stream (see Figure
71)

Figure 71: SAT Test In Progress (Run SAT Test Stream)

604 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Service Activation Testing

27. If the test needs to be terminated, click on Stop Test.

28. When the test is completed, scroll down to the bottom of page in Run SAT Test
Stream screen to view the SAT Test Result of a single test stream (see Figure 72).

Figure 72: SAT Test Result View

29. Alternatively, click on the test stream in selection tree and select the Test Result tab
in the Detail Pane (see Figure 73)

The SAT Test Result Tab not only displays the test result details, but
also presents Test Procedure and Pass Criteria in a cellular form so
user can adjust test stream configuration settings based on the
measurement and criteria.

Figure 73: View SAT Test Result Tab

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 605

Service Activation Testing

Only the test result of green packets will be compared against Service
Acceptance Criteria (SAC) parameters.

Frame Loss Ratio (FLR), Max Frame Transmission Delay (Max FTD) and
Max Frame Delay Variance (Max FDV) will be compared against the FLR,
FTD and FDV set in SAC Profile. If any one of these parameters do not
match with SAC criteria, the test fails.

30. If a test fails, troubleshoot the parameter settings in flows, test streams and CFM
entities or change the SAC parameters as appropriate.

It is possible that the FLR and FL Count for yellow packets show minus
values in EIR or Policing test result when Color Mode is set to Color Aware.
This is because the Responder end received more yellow packets than what
the Control end sent. User can troubleshoot this problem by balancing the
CIR settings in the test stream and the associated flow.

31. Expand the selection tree and select SAT Control, select the Configuration tab to view
SAT Control Configuration, SAT Control Status and SAT Stream Status. (see Figure
74)

Figure 74: SAT Control - Configuration View

32. Switch to Test Result tab for SAT Control.

The Test Result tab displays SAT Test Results based on user’s selection.

606 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Service Activation Testing

Figure 75: SAT Control - Test Result View

33. Scroll down to the bottom of the Test Result page, click on Export to save the test
result of a single test stream or all test streams as a .csv file to a specified directory.

A Copy SAT Test Result To Remote: SAT CONTROL-1-1 screen appears

Figure 76: SAT Test Result - Web Transfer Method

Figure 77: SAT Test Result - SCP Transfer Method

34. Select/Enter the following to configure the File Transfer settings:

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 607

Service Activation Testing

a) File Transfer Method - select the desired File Transfer Method

b) Server IP - select the desired IP version and enter the server IP Address
c) User ID - enter the server User ID
d) User Password - enter the server User Password
Select OK

The SAT Result Upload status displays on the detail pane

The FTP and SFTP transfer methods require identical File Transfer settings
as SCP (see Figure 77).

Figure 78: SAT Test Result Upload Progress - SCP Transfer Method

35. When the upload is completed, access the server to check the exported SAT test
result. If saving the result via Web, save the file to a specified directory (see Figure
79).

Figure 79: Export SAT Test Result

608 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 SyncJack Testing - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

SyncJack Testing - GE114Pro (SH)/

GE114Pro (CSH)
SyncJack provisioning and reporting is invoked by selecting the SyncJack icon on the
Tool Bar or selecting SyncJack from the Applications menu and expanding the system
folder in the Selection Tree.

Selecting the NE-1 entity in the Selection Tree provides the SyncJack Global Dashboard
View (see Figure 80). The Global status reflects a composite of 3 status meters: Clock
Accuracy, Clock Analysis and PTP Network Analysis. For the indicator bar, a horizontal
line indicates N/A, green indicates normal operation, yellow indicates some issue exists,
red indicates a significant problem.

Figure 80: SyncJack Network Element View

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 609

SyncJack Testing - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Probing Feature

General Guideline for Reference Accuracy Used by the

Probes
In order to measure meaningful results, the accuracy of the reference used by the probes
should be accurate by at least one order of magnitude compared to the signal under test;
i.e., when using GPS as a reference, the time error generated by the GPS/GNSS
receiver/PRTC can be up to 100 +/- nsec (according to G.8272) - therefore, the Time
Error (TE)/Time Interval Error (TIE)/Maximum Time Interval Error (MTIE) can be effected
by the GPS reference time error and wander.

Clock Accuracy
l Up to 2 Clock Probes:
o Calculate MTIE between physical source and reference signals

o Programmable source and reference signals

Only one Clock Probe can be created if Time Clock is configured with GPS
as Time Reference.

Clock Analysis
l Up to 4 PTP Clock Probes (all PTP Clock Probes must use the same reference)
o Calculate packet MTIE between physical reference signals and packet flow

o Probe Master to Slave or Slave to Master traffic

o Support parallel and tapping modes
l TS Score -- simple score of internal slave clock

PTP Network Analysis

l Up to 2 PTP Network Probes
o Delay and delay variation performance statistics

o Network usability statistics

o Packet loss statistics

MTIE Comparison
l Compare up to four MTIE results

Raw Data Collection

SyncJack probes allow a high level of sync monitoring and assurance. SyncJack
calculates the relevant metrics such as time error, TIE and MTIE on the [Link] TE/TIE of

610 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 SyncJack Testing - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

the last 100K seconds is displayed. In addition, MTIE is calculated over the entire
measurement.

In case additional analysis is required (e.g., Time Deviation (TDEV)) or longer TE/TIE
measurements are needed, the TE/TIE raw data can be collected by the device and sent
to an external server.

The amount of raw data which can be stored on the device (e.g., GE114Pro
(SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)) is limited; therefore the data is collected and sent every 5
minutes to the configured server.

The data can then be concatenated in the server (by NMS or any other user SW) and
imported to the relevant software tool for analysis.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 611

SyncJack Testing - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Performing Clock Accuracy Testing

GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH) Clock Accuracy testing uses a user selected
reference clock and a source clock and measures the difference between them. The
output of the measurement is expressed as:

TIE, where: TIE[n] = ref[n] - src[n]

and

MTIE: Constant difference between the clocks is rejected, so only the frequency
differences matter.

The following procedure for performing Clock Accuracy testing assumes that GE114Pro
(SH) is properly connected to the clock inputs to be measured and the appropriate
GE114Pro (SH) interfaces have been configured. See Provisioning the GE11xPro

The screenshots in the following procedure are presented for reference and do not reflect
the actual User Interface of a GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH) product.

Refer to Clock Accuracy Parameters to determine the default values, value ranges and
rules for each option in the following procedure.

1. Select the SyncJack icon or select SyncJack from the Applications drop-down list,
then expend the System folder in the selection tree.

2. Expand the Network Element entity from the selection tree, then expand the Clock
Accuracy entity.

3. Enter a right click on Clock Probes in the selection tree and select Create Clock
Probe.

A Create Clock Probe pane appears

Figure 81: Create Clock Probe View

4. Enter the following data to configure the Clock Probe:

a) Clock Probe Index -- EID for the probe. Enter a number from 1 to 2.
b) Name - a text identifier (up to 15 characters, no spaces or special
characters) for the probe. (Required entry)

612 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 SyncJack Testing - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

c) Reference - the signal reference for this Clock Probe. The available
references are populated in a drop-down list.
d) Reference Expected QL - clock quality level of the selected reference.
The available QLs are provided in a drop-down list.
e) Source - select the desired source (clock under test) from the drop-down
list.
f) Source Type - select either Frequency or Phase from the drop-down list.
g) MTIE Mask - select the desired MTIE Mask from the drop-down list.
h) Mask Margin - enter the desired Mask Margin as a percentage from 0 to 99
i) Raw Data Collection - If Raw Data Collection Server has been
provisioned: enable or disable raw data to be sent to a remote raw data
collection server.
j) Measurement Type - select the measurement type (Frequency or Phase)
Select OK.

5. Expand “Clock Probes” in the Selection Tree.

The newly created Clock Probe entity is displayed

6. Select the Clock Probe entity and Status tab to verify entry and connection status
(See Figure 82 on p. 614). If any Failures are indicated, troubleshoot and clear the
failure as necessary.

A Clock Probe can be edited after creation by right clicking on the entity
name and selecting ‘Edit Clock Probe’. All fields except the Clock Probe
Index can be edited. Once a probe is scheduled it cannot be modified or
deleted.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 613

SyncJack Testing - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Figure 82: Clock Probe Status Tab

7. Enter a right click on SyncJack Schedules in the Selection Tree and select Create
Schedule.

A Create Schedule pane appears

Figure 83: Create SyncJack Schedule

8. Enter the following data to configure the SyncJack Schedule:

614 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 SyncJack Testing - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

a) Schedule Index - EID for the schedule. Enter a number from 1 to 255.
b) Activity ID - a text identifier (up to 15 characters, no spaces or special
characters) for the probe.
c) Schedule Type - Select the desired type from the drop-down list (Only
“One Shot” is currently supported)
d) Duration - Select either the “Forever” or “Fixed” radio button. If “Fixed” is
selected, enter the desired duration in seconds.
e) Start Time - Select “Now” or “Future” radio button. If “Future” is selected,
enter the date and time for the test to start.
f) Schedule SJ Test Items - Select the desired Clock Probe(s) for this test
from the list provided by clicking the related check box(es).
Select OK.

9. Expand “”SyncJack Schedules” in the Selection Tree.

The newly created SyncJack Schedule entity is displayed

10. Select the SyncJack Schedule entity to verity entry.

11. Select the desired Clock Probe entity/entities in the Selection Tree and select the
Status tab to observe the SyncJack Schedule State and test process (State indicates
whether the test is Not Scheduled, Failed, Waiting [Scheduled - Future], Running or
Completed).

A Clock Probe Status pane displays

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 615

SyncJack Testing - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Figure 84: View Clock Probe State - Running

12. Click on the Clock Probe entity again to observe continued progress while the test is
running. Observe the Actual Test Duration (s) status to determine how long the test
has been running / how much time is left before completion (if a Fixed Duration was
scheduled).

13. Click on the Clock Probe entity again to observe when the test is completed (see the
following figure).

616 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 SyncJack Testing - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Figure 85: View Clock Probe State - Completed

14. Observe test result details by interval by viewing the Test Result table or hovering the
mouse over the interval marker in the graph (see the following figure).

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 617

SyncJack Testing - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Figure 86: Viewing Clock Probe Test Result Details

15. Test results may be exported to Microsoft Excel or other program by selecting the
Export button (see the next two figures).

Figure 87: Exporting Clock Probe Test Result to Excel

618 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 SyncJack Testing - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Figure 88: Clock Probe Test Result in Excel

16. After the test is completed, select the Tests tab to view test results in tabular format.
Scroll over to determine if any thresholds have been crossed.

Figure 89: Clock Probe Result Tests Tab

17. Select the TIE/TE Graph tab.

Test results are provided in a TIE Graph

Figure 90: Clock Probe Result in TIE Graph

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 619

SyncJack Testing - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

If a source or reference failure occurs and eventually recovers during the

Syncjack scheduled window, the failed region is indicated by a red shadowed
area of the TIE/TE graph (see example in the following figure).

Figure 91: Example Clock Probe TIE/TE Graph with Failed Region

18. If the test duration is longer than 2000 seconds, select the Recent TIE/TE Graph tab
to view the last 2000 seconds of test results (see the following figure).

The TIE/TE Graph may present the last 100,000 seconds of the
measurement since the start of Probe; while the Recent TIE/TE Graph may
present the last 2000 seconds of the measurements.

Figure 92: Clock Probe Result in Recent TIE/TE Graph

19. After the test is completed, a subset of the Clock Probe Status tab data are available
in a history entity. To view history results, expand the History Results entity under the
Clock Probe entity and select the desired Clock Probe Result(s) to view.

620 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 SyncJack Testing - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

A Clock Probe History Result pane displays

Figure 93: View Clock Probe History Result

20. History test results may be exported to Microsoft Excel or other program by selecting
the Export button.

21. Select the Clock Accuracy entity in the Selection Tree to view the Clock Accuracy
results via Dashboard meter. If two Clock Probes have been scheduled (as shown
below), the results of both Clock Probes are displayed.

The Clock Accuracy meter will display test results only if the associated
SyncJack schedule is present. Each probe is associated with a color coded
radio button according to its test result (green, yellow or red). If gray, this
indicates the SyncJack schedule has been deleted.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 621

SyncJack Testing - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Figure 94: View Clock Accuracy Result Meter (Two Clock Probes)

22. Select the Network Element entity in the Selection Tree to view the Clock Accuracy
and Global results via Dashboard meter.

Figure 95: View Global and Clock Accuracy Dashboard

23. To set up Raw Data Collection, perform the procedure Raw Data Collection.

24. To delete a SyncJack Schedule, right click on the desired schedule under “Syncjack
Schedules” and select Delete Schedule.

A Delete SyncJack Schedule pane appears

622 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 SyncJack Testing - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Figure 96: Deleting SyncJack Schedule

Select OK.

25. To delete a Clock Probe History Result, right click on the desired result under “History
Results” and select Delete History Result.

A Delete Test Result pane appears

Figure 97: Deleting Clock Probe History Result

Select OK.

26. To edit a Clock Probe History Result, right click on the desired result under “History
Results” and select “Edit History Result”.

An Edit Test Result Configuration pane appears

27. Edit the Alias as appropriate and select OK.

28. To edit a SyncJack Clock Probe, right click on the desired clock probe under “Clock
Accuracy” and select Edit Clock Probe.

29. Edit the data as appropriate if the Clock Probe is not associated with a present
SyncJack Schedule. Select OK to save the changes.

30. To delete a SyncJack Clock Probe, right click on the desired clock probe under “Clock
Accuracy” and select Delete Clock Probe.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 623

SyncJack Testing - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

A Delete Clock Probe pane appears

Select OK.

624 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 SyncJack Testing - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Performing Clock Analysis

SyncJack Clock Analysis measures the quality of timestamps generated by the clock
under test. The procedure for performing Clock Analysis assumes that a GE114Pro
(SH)/GE114Pro (CSH) is properly connected to the clock inputs to be measuredand the
appropriate GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH) interfaces have been configured. See
Provisioning the GE11xPro.

This procedure requires a PTP FlowPoint. To create one, see Provision

Precision Time Protocol (PTP) - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH).

Refer to Clock Analysis Parameters to determine the default values, value ranges and
rules for each option in the following procedure.

1. Select the SyncJack icon or select SyncJack from the Applications menu, then
expand the System folder in the selection tree.

2. Expand the Network Element entity from the selection tree, then expand the Clock
Analysis entity.

3. Enter a right click on PTP Clock Probes in the Selection Tree and select Create Clock
Probe.

A Create PTP Clock Probe pane appears

Figure 98: Create PTP Clock Probe View

4. Enter the following to configure the PTP Clock Probe:

a) PTP Clock Probe Index - EID for the PTP Clock Probe. Enter a number
from 1 to 4. (Create only)
b) Name - a text identifier (up to 15 characters, no spaces or special
characters) for the probe. (Required entry)
c) PTP Flowpoint - select the PTP Flowpoint from the drop-down list.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 625

SyncJack Testing - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

d) IP Version - select the desired IP version from the drop-down list. (Only
IPv4 is supported for the current release.)
e) Master IP Address - enter the IP address of the master clock (if the PTP
Flow Point Type is set to OC Slave, then the Slave IP Address must be
configured the same as the SOOC.)
f) Slave IP Address - enter the IP address of the slave clock (if the PTP
Flow Point Type is set to OC Slave, then the Slave IP Address must be
configured the same as the SOOC.)
g) Direction - select the desired Direction (Slave to Master or Master to
Slave). If the Flow Point Type of the associated PTP Flow Point is set to
OC Slave, then Slave to Master or Master to Slave may be selected. If the
Flow Point Type of the associated PTP Flow Point is set to OC Master,
then only Slave to Master selection is allowed.
h) Reference - the signal reference for this PTP Clock Probe. The available
references are populated in a drop-down list.
i) Reference Expected QL - clock quality level of the selected reference.
The available QLs are provided in a drop-down list.
j) MTIE Mask - select the desired MTIE Mask from the drop-down list.
k) Mask Margin - enter the desired Mask Margin as a percentage from 1 to 99
l) Raw Data Collection - If Raw Data Collection Server has been
provisioned: enable or disable raw data to be sent to a remote raw data
collection server.
m) Measurement Type - select the measurement type.
Select OK.

5. Expand the PTP Clock Probes in the Selection Tree.

The newly created PTP Clock Probe entity is present

6. Select the newly created PTP Clock Probe entity to verify entry and connection status
(see Figure 99 on p. 627). If any failures are indicated, troubleshoot and clear the
failure as necessary.

All PTP Clock Probes must use the same reference.

The Telecom Slave cannot be used in different PTP Clock Probes for
separate Frequency and Phase measurement under the same NE. The
“SJTEST Reference Fail” alarm will be raised if the user intends to create a
PTP Clock Probe using telecom slave for Frequency measurement while
another PTP Clock Probe using the same Telecom Slave for Phase
measurement already exists, and vice versa.

A PTP Clock Probe can be edited after creation by right clicking on the entity
name and selecting Edit PTP Clock Probe. All fields except the PTP Clock
Probe Index can be edited. Once a probe is scheduled, it cannot be modified
or deleted.

626 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 SyncJack Testing - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Figure 99: PTP Clock Probe Status Tab

7. Enter a right click on SyncJack Schedules in the Selection Tree and select Create
Schedule.

A Create Schedule pane appears

Figure 100: Create SyncJack Schedule

8. Enter the following to configure the SyncJack Schedule:

a) Schedule Index - EID for the schedule. Enter a number from 1 to 255.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 627

SyncJack Testing - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

b) Activity ID - a text identifier (up to 15 characters, no spaces or special

characters) for the probe.
c) Schedule Type - Select the desired type from the drop-down list (Only
“One Shot” is currently supported)
d) Duration - Select either the “Forever” or “Fixed” radio button. If “Fixed” is
selected, enter the desired duration in seconds.
e) Start Time - Select “Now” or “Future” radio button. If “Future” is selected,
enter the date and time for the test to start.
f) Schedule SJ Test Items - Select the desired PTP Clock Probe(s) for this
test from the list provided by clicking the related check box(es).
Select OK.

9. Expand SyncJack Schedules in the Selection Tree.

A newly SyncJack Schedule entity is present

10. Select the SyncJack Schedule entity to verify entry.

11. Select the desired PTP Clock Probe entity in the Selection Tree to observe the
SyncJack Schedule State and test progress (State indicates whether the test is Not
Scheduled, Failed, Waiting [Scheduled - Future], Running or Completed).

A PTP Clock Probe Status pane displays

Figure 101: PTP Clock Probe State - Running

12. Click on the PTP Clock Probe entity again to observe continued progress while the
test is running. Observe the Actual Test Duration (s) status to determine how long the

628 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 SyncJack Testing - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

test has been running / how much time is left before completion (if a Fixed Duration
was scheduled).

13. Click on the PTP Clock Probe entity again to observe when the test is completed (see
the following figure).

Figure 102: PTP Clock Probe Status - Completed

14. Observe test result details by interval by viewing the Test Result table or hovering the
mouse over the interval marker in the graph (see the following figure).

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 629

SyncJack Testing - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Figure 103: PTP Clock Probe Test Detail

15. Test results may be exported to Microsoft Excel or other program by selecting the
Export button (see the following figure).

Figure 104: Exporting PTP Clock Probe Test Result to Excel

16. After the test is completed, select the Tests tab to view test results in tabular format.
Scroll over to determine if any thresholds have been crossed.

17. Select the TIE Graph tab.

Test results are provided in a TIE Graph

SyncJack PTP Clock Probe Result in TIE Graph

630 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 SyncJack Testing - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

If a source or reference failure occurs and eventually recovers during

the SyncJack scheduled window, the failed region is indicated by a
red shadowed area of the TIE/TE graph (see Figure 91 on p. 620 for an
example.)

18. If the test duration is longer than 2000 seconds, select the Recent TIE Graph tab to
view the last 2000 seconds of test results.

The TIE/TE Graph may present the last 100,000 seconds of the
measurement since the start of Probe; while the Recent TIE/TE Graph
may present the last 2000 seconds of the measurements.

19. After the test is completed, a subset of the PTP Clock Probe Status Tab data are
available in a history entity. To view history results, expand the History Estimations
entity under the PTP Clock Probe entity and select the desired PTP Clock Probe
Result(s) to view.

A PTP Clock Probe History Result pane appears

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 631

SyncJack Testing - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Figure 105: View PTP Clock Probe History Result

20. Test results may be exported to Microsoft Excel or other program by selecting the
Export button.

21. Select the Clock Analysis entity in the Selection Tree to view the Clock Analysis
results via Dashboard meter. If four PTP Clock Probes have been scheduled, the
results of the four probes are displayed.

The Clock Analysis meter will display test results only if the
associated SyncJack schedule is present. Each result is associated
with a color coded radio button according to its Probe Score (green,
yellow or red). If gray, this indicates the SyncJack schedule has been
deleted or no score results are present.

632 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 SyncJack Testing - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Figure 106: View Clock Analysis Result Meter

22. Select the Network Element entity in the Selection Tree to view the Clock Analysis
and Global results via Dashboard meter.

Figure 107: View Global and Clock Analysis Dashboard

23. To set up Raw Data Collection, perform the procedure Raw Data Collection.

24. To delete a SyncJack Schedule, right click on the desired schedule under SyncJack
Schedules and select Delete Schedule.

A Delete SyncJack Schedule pane appears

Select OK.

25. To delete a PTP Clock Probe History Result, right click on the desired result under
History Estimations and select Delete History Estimation.

A confirmation screen appears

Select OK.

26. To delete a SyncJack PTP Clock Probe, right click on the desired probe and select
Delete PTP Clock Probe.

A Delete PTP Clock Probe pane appears

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 633

SyncJack Testing - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Select OK.

634 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 SyncJack Testing - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Clock Analysis - Telecom Slave Score (for future)

If a Telecom Slave is configured in the GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH) under PTP,
SyncJack can be used to test and score interval slave performance. Three scores are
provided for frequency and time recovery.

l 5 - High Score - High Performance

l 4 - Medium Score - Marginal Performance
l 3 - Low Score - Low Performance

This scoring is used to estimate the frequency and phase recovery of the internal
GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH) telecom slave. Unlike Network Usability, this is the
quality of the slave clock, not the network. The input is PTP packets, the output is a
frequency accuracy and a phase accuracy score of 3, 4 or 5 for each as PM.

The Telecom Slave current configuration and statistics can be viewed by selecting the
Telecom Slave (TS-1-1) under Clock Analysis. See Figure 108 on p. 635 for configuration
view and Figure 109 on p. 636 for statistics summary view.

The Telecom Slave score target values for frequency and phase can be configured by
right clicking on the Telecom Slave (TS-1-1) under Clock Analysis and selecting Edit
Telecom Slave Analysis, then selecting the desired values for Frequency Recovery
Target and Phase Recovery Target in the details pane and clicking on OK. See Figure
110 on p. 636.

To initialize the Telecom Slave PM registers, right click on the Telecom Slave (TS-1-1)
under Clock Analysis and select Edit Thresholds and follow the procedure in Initializing
PM and Distribution Registers.

To edit the Telecom Slave PM Thresholds, right click on the Telecom Slave (TS-1-1)
under Clock Analysis and select Edit Thresholds and follow the procedure in Editing PM
Thresholds.

Figure 108: Telecom Slave Configuration View

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 635

SyncJack Testing - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Figure 109: Telecom Slave Statistics Summary View

Figure 110: Edit Telecom Slave Analysis View

636 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 SyncJack Testing - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Performing PTP Network Analysis

SyncJack PTP Network Analysis measures the level of network interference - Packet
Delay Variation (PDV). The measurement is based on PDV either one-directional or two-
directional. The input is reference clock used as reference to the Master Clock. The
output is network statistics, path delay and network usability score.

The procedure for performing PTP Network Analysis assumes that GE114Pro
(SH)/GE114Pro (CSH) is properly connected to the clock inputs to be measured and the
appropriate GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH) interfaces have been configured. See
Provisioning the GE11xPro.

Refer to PTP Network Analysis Parameters to determine the default values, value
ranges and rules for each option in the following procedure.

1. Select the SyncJack icon or select SyncJack from the Applications menu, then
expand the System Selection Tree.

2. Expand the Network Element entity from the Selection Tree, then expand the PTP
Network Analysis entity.

3. Enter a right click on PTP Network Probes in the Selection Tree and select Create
PTP Network Probe.

A Create PTP Network Probe pane appears

Figure 111: Create PTP Network Probe View

4. Enter the following to configure the PTP Network Probe:

a) PTP Network Probe Index - EID for the probe. Enter a number from 1 to 2.
(Create only)
b) Name - a text identifier (up to 15 characters, no spaces or special
characters) for the probe. (Required entry)
c) PTP Flowpoint - select the desired PTP Flowpoint from the drop-down list.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 637

SyncJack Testing - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

The PTP Flow Point used for monitoring by PTP Network Probe must
be able to receive packets from two directions. If the PTP Flow Point
type is OC-Slave, the associated Telecom Slave must have Two-Way
Recovery Mode.

d) IP Version - select the desired IP version from the drop-down list. (Only
IPv4 is supported version for the current release.)
e) Master IP Address - enter the IP address of the master clock (for parallel
mode must be as configured for the PTP SOOC)
f) Slave IP Address - enter the IP address of the slave clock (for parallel
mode must be as configured for the PTP SOOC)
g) Reference - the signal reference for this probe. The available references
are populated in a drop-down list.
h) Reference Expected QL - clock quality level of the selected reference.
The available QLs are provided in a drop-down list.
i) RPDV fw Low (ns) - enter the desired Residual Path Delay Variation
(RPDV) forward, low in nanoseconds
j) RPDV fw Medium (ns) - enter the desired RPDV forward, medium in
nanoseconds
k) RPDV fw High (ns) - enter the desired RPDV forward, high in
nanoseconds
l) RPDV rev Low (ns) - enter the desired RPDV reverse, low in
nanoseconds
m) RPDV rev Medium (ns) - enter the desired RPDV reverse, medium in
nanoseconds
n) RPDV rev High (ns) - enter the desired RPDV reverse, high in
nanoseconds
o) PDV Cluster Range - Assured (ns) - enter the desired value in
nanoseconds
p) PDV Cluster Range - Satisfied (ns) - enter the desired value in
nanoseconds
Select OK.

5. Expand PTP Network Probes in the Selection Tree.

The newly created PTP Network Probe entity is present

6. Select the newly created PTP Network Probe entity to verify entry.

A PTP Network Probe can be edited after creation by right clicking on

the entity name and selecting Edit PTP Network Probe. All fields
except the PTP Network Probe Index can be edited. When a probe is
scheduled, it cannot be modified or deleted.

7. Enter a right click on SyncJack Schedules in the Selection Tree and select Create
Schedule.

A Create Schedule pane appears

638 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 SyncJack Testing - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Figure 112: Create SyncJack Schedule

8. Enter the following to configure the SyncJack Schedule:

a) Schedule Index - EID for the schedule. Enter a number from 1 to 255.
b) Activity ID - a text identifier (up to 15 characters, no spaces or special
characters) for the probe.
c) Schedule Type - Select the desired type from the drop-down list (Only
“One Shot” is currently supported)
d) Duration - Select either the “Forever” or “Fixed” radio button. If “Fixed” is
selected, enter the desired duration in seconds.
e) Start Time - Select “Now” or “Future” radio button. If “Future” is selected,
enter the date and time for the test to start.
f) Schedule SJ Test Items - Select the desired PTP Network Probe(s) for
this test from the list provided by clicking the related check box(es).
Select OK.

9. Select the PTP Network Probe entity and Configuration tab to view the SyncJack
Schedule State and test progress (State indicates whether the test is Failed, Waiting
(Scheduled), Running or Completed).

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 639

SyncJack Testing - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Figure 113: View SyncJack PTP Network Probe State - Running

10. Click on the PTP Network Probe entity again to observe when the test is completed.

11. During or after the test is completed, the results are available by selecting the desired
PTP Network Probe and selecting the Statistics tab.

A Summary pane appears. Switching between tabs to view history test

statistics.

640 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 SyncJack Testing - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Figure 114: View SyncJack PTP Network Probe Statistics (Summary Data)

Figure 115: View SyncJack PTP Network Probe Statistics (15-Minute PM Data)

12. Select the PTP Network Analysis entity in the Selection Tree to view the PTP
Network Analysis results via Dashboard meter (see Figure 116 on p. 642).

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 641

SyncJack Testing - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Figure 116: PTP Network Analysis Result Meter

13. Select the Network Element entity in the Selection Tree and View the PTP Network
Analysis and Global results via Dashboard meter.

The PTP Network Analysis meter will display test results only if the
associated SyncJack schedule is running and the current Forward
Score and Reverse Scores have been calculated. Each result is
associated with a color coded radio button according to its
Probe/Score (green, yellow or red). If grey, this indicates the
SyncJack schedule running has been completed or no score results
have been calculated.

The Forward/Reverse Score will be calculated in at least 292 seconds

after the start of schedule.

When the scheduled test is completed, the PTP Network Analysis

meter will resume grey. User may check the scores in 5-Minute or 1-
Day statistics table (See Figure 115 on p. 641) for history results.

642 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 SyncJack Testing - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Figure 117: View Global and PTP Network Analysis Dashboard

14. To initialize the PM registers, right click on the PTP Network Probe and select Init
Register and follow the procedure in Initializing PM and Distribution Registers.

15. To edit the PM Thresholds, right click on the PTP Network Probe and select Edit
Thresholds and follow the procedure in Editing PM Thresholds.

16. To delete a SyncJack Schedule, right click on the desired schedule under SyncJack
Schedules and select Delete Schedule.

A Delete SyncJack Schedule pane appears

Select OK.

17. To delete a SyncJack PTP Network Probe, right click on the desired probe and select
Delete PTP Network Probe.

A Delete PTP Network Probe pane appears

Select OK.

Performing MTIE Result Comparison

SyncJack MTIE Result Comparison provides a comparison chart of up to 4 Results.

18. Select the SyncJack icon or select SyncJack from the Applications menu, then
expand the System selection tree.

19. Expand the Network Element entity from the selection tree, then expand the Result
Analysis entity.

20. Enter a right click on the MTIE Comparison in the selection tree and select Configure.

A Configure MTIE Comparison pane appears

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 643

SyncJack Testing - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Figure 118: Configure MTIE Comparison

21. Enter the following to configure the MTIE Comparison:

a) Select the desired MTIE Mask.

b) Select the check box for each desired Probe Results (a maximum of four)
to include in the comparison.
22. Select the MTIE Comparison entity in the Selection Tree.

MTIE Comparison results are displayed

Figure 119: MTIE Comparison Results

644 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 SyncJack Testing - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Provision Raw Data Collection

Perform the following procedure if a raw data collection server is to be used for receiving
Clock Accuracy and/or Clock Analysis results for further calculations.

Enable Relevant File Transfer Protocol

1. Ensure that the relevant file transfer protocol is enabled. See Provision System
Options.

2. Select the SyncJack icon or select SyncJack from the Applications menu, then
expand the System folder in the selection tree.

Provision Raw Data Server

3. Enter a right click on Raw Data Collection in the selection tree and select Edit Raw
Data Server.

A Raw Data Collection pane appears

Figure 120: Edit Raw Data Server

4. Enter the following to configure the Raw Data Collection Server:

a) File Transfer Method - select the desired File Transfer Method

b) Server IP - enter the server IP Address
c) User ID - enter the server User ID
d) User Password - enter the server User Password
Select OK.

5. Select Raw Data Collection in the selection tree to very entry.

Enable Raw Data Collection on the Relevant Probe

6. Expand the Network Element entity from the selection tree, then expand the Clock
Accuracy / Clock Analysis entity.

7. Enter a right click on the relevant Clock Probe or PTP Clock Probe in the selection
tree and select Edit Clock Probe / Edit PTP Clock Probe.

An Edit Clock Probe / Edit PTP Clock Probe pane appears

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 645

SyncJack Testing - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Figure 121: Enable Raw Data Collection on the Relevant Probe

8. Enable Raw Data Collection and select OK.

9. Schedule the Probe (See Performing Clock Accuracy Testing or Performing Clock
Analysis).

10. Concatenate the relevant files on the server: e.g., the following script can be used in
Linux:

#!/bin/bash

if [ "$2" == "" ]; then

script_name=`basename $0`
echo "USAGE: $script_name <out-file> <file1> <file2>
... <fileN> "
exit 1
fi

out_file=$1
shift

header_lines=11
temp_file=[Link]

echo output file is $out_file

rm -f $temp_file
rm -f $out_file

while (( "$#" )); do

if [ ! -f $out_file ]; then
echo adding header
gzip -dc $1 | head -$header_lines > $out_file
fi

echo processing $1
head -n -1 $out_file > $temp_file
gzip -dc $1 | tail -n +$header_lines >> $temp_file
mv $temp_file $out_file

shift
done

646 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 SyncJack Testing - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

E.g., the following command will concatenate all files with CLOCK_PROBE-1-1
string to CLOCK_PROBE_ALL.txt output file:

adva_raw_data_unzip CLOCK_PROBE_ALL.txt `ls *CLOCK_

PROBE-1-1*.gz`

11. Load to the relevant SW for analysis.

Raw Data File Format

Raw Data File Format – Header
#Type: [Phase|Frequency]

#Start: [start time yyyy/mm/dd/ hh:mm]

#Frequency: [Reference frequency in Hz]

#TimeMultiplier: 1 [time stamp multiplier]

#Multiplier: 1 [result multiplier]

#Title: [string 64]

#Adva Device: [ipAddress]

#Adva Probe: [ClockProbe|PTPClockProbe]

#Adva Reference: [Reference type]

#Adva Source: [Source type|measured PTP clock IP]

#Adva Direction: [Forward|Reverse|Two-Way|NA]

Example Clock Probe:

#Type: Phase

#Start: 2014/05/04 [Link]

#Frequency: 10

#TimeMultiplier: 1

#Multiplier: 1

#Title: ClockProbe1

#Adva Probe: ClockProbe

#Adva Reference: 10-MHz

#Adva Source: TS

#Adva Direction: NA

Raw Data File Format – Measurement Results

Supported format is dual column: [time_from_start], [value]

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 647

SyncJack Testing - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Example:

2.3950001938E+03, 4.0000000000E-09
2.3951001938E+03, 4.0000000000E-09
2.3952001938E+03, 8.0000000000E-09
2.3953001938E+03, 4.0000000000E-09
2.3954001938E+03, 4.0000000000E-09
2.3955001938E+03, 4.0000000000E-09
2.3956001938E+03, 4.0000000000E-09
2.3957001938E+03, 4.0000000000E-09

648 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Two-Way Active Measurement Protocol

Two-Way Active Measurement Protocol

Two-Way Active Measurement Protocol (TWAMP) is defined in IETF RFC 5357 and it is
built on earlier standard OWAMP (One-Way Active Measurement Protocol) which is
defined in IETF RFC 4656. OWAMP was defined for one-way measurements that require
synchronization of clocks at both ends. TWAMP uses the methodology and architecture
defined in OWAMP to support two-way or round-trip measurements. Two-way
measurements have the following advantages:

l Clock synchronization is not required

l The reflector end is functionality simple, just echoing the measurement packets
l In some cases two-way may be the metric of interest

However, it is important to support one-way measurements since using two-way

measurement to derive one-way measurements may not be accurate due to:

l Path asymmetry
l Symmetric paths performance characteristics in each direction could be significantly
different due to asymmetric queuing and asymmetric OoS.
l Performance of a particular application may depend on one-way performance

TWAMP supports setting timestamps at the reflector end to enable greater accuracy of
two-way delay. This is intended to allow measurement of round-trip network delay by
accounting for the processing time at the reflector. The same timestamps at the reflector
end can be used for one-way measurements. If clocks are synchronized delay and delay
variation can be supported. If clocks are not synchronized, one-way cannot be supported
but one-way delay variation can still be supported. The intention is to support one-way
and two-way measurements using TWAMP.

Simple protocols like ICMP Echo (two-way), UDP Echo (two-way) and ICMP Timestamp
(two-way and one-way) may be used as supported by L3 ESA (Etherjack Service
Assurance). But because of some of the reasons these protocols may not work:

l ICMP Echo and UDP Echo cannot be used for one-way measurements
l ICMP is a protocol that is used to identify problems in IP networks like routing loops
(IP TTL reaching zero), used by higher layer protocols like TCP for various reasons like
destination-unreachability, etc. Even though ICMP as a protocol is necessary in IP
networks, use of ICMP for performance measurements may not work for the following
reasons:
o Certain types of ICMP messages like Echo, Timestamp etc could be blocked by

firewalls for security reasons such as DoS attacks.

o Measurement traffic such as ICMP is often treated differently in the routers than
the actual traffic. If routers treat measurement traffic differently than user traffic,
then the measurements do not reflect performance of the user traffic.

TWAMP is required on various products as it provides the following:

l A standard IP-based, inter-operable performance measurement protocol that can

determine performance between two end points in routed network
l Measurement protocol that is not handled differently than user traffic by the
intermediate routers gives accurate end-to-end performance measurements

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 649

Two-Way Active Measurement Protocol

Refer to the following provisioning order on how to provision the TWAMP configurations
for your sites:

Layer-2 TWAMP Provisioning Order

Configuring TWAMP at layer two requires set-up of:

l TWAMP IP Interfaces - Each Sender or Reflector has to point to an IP interface, and

an IP interface must be configured on any port (Network, Access or LAG) that is used
for a TWAMP test session. More than one IP Interface can be assigned to a single
port.
l Session Senders (roughly the same as an ESA L3 Probe) where the user configures
stats, thresholds, views and clears PM registers and Distribution registers.
l Session Reflectors
l Servers, which control the Session Reflectors
l Control Clients to control Session Senders and to start and stop test sessions

650 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Two-Way Active Measurement Protocol

Layer-3 TWAMP Provisioning Order

l Enable the license for “IP-Services-and-ACL-Filtering”
l Create Traffic IP Interfaces on TWAMP Session Sender/Reflector Port and
associated routing ports
l Create VRF to include the TWAMP associated Traffic IP Interfaces
l Add Static Route to VRF for TWAMP connection
l Create Session Sender and Session Reflector
l Create Control Client and Server to control the Session Sender and Reflector
separately

More information on TWAMP and the current implementation can be found in the FSP
150-GE11xPro System Description.

The TWAMP testing can support the test of the layer-3 services
provisioned under the NE. For more information on provisioning the
layer-3 services, see Provision Layer-3 Services and Provision
TWAMP on Traffic IP Interface.

Refer to TWAMP Configuration Options and Rules to determine the default values, value
ranges and rules for each option in the following procedure.

1. Determine the next step:

Desired Function Then

Provision TWAMP on TWAMP IP Interface? Go to Provision TWAMP on TWAMP IP Interface.
Provision TWAMP on Traffic IP Interface? Go to Provision TWAMP on Traffic IP Interface.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 651

Two-Way Active Measurement Protocol

Provision TWAMP on TWAMP IP Interface

The following procedure is based on layer-2 TWAMP configurations, where a GE112Pro
functions as the Session Sender and a GE114Pro functions as the Session Reflector.

The procedure below assumes that services have been configured at

both ends with flows to support TWAMP session packets between the
Sender and the Reflector and a connection exists between the two
sides. See Provision Access Port Services.

Create TWAMP IP Interfaces at Session Sender end and Session

Reflector end respectively

1. Select the TWAMP icon or select TWAMP from the Applications menu, then expand
the System, NE-1 and Communications entities in the Selection Tree, by clicking on
the “+” signs next to each entity.

2. To create a TWAMP IP Interface, right click on the TWAMP IP Interfaces entity and
select Create TWAMP IP Interface.

A Create TWAMP IP Interface configuration window appears

Figure 122: Create TWAMP IP Interface Configuration View

3. Enter the following data to configure the TWAMP IP Interface:

a) Enter a desired Name for the interface (15 characters max)

A unique name must be entered as each Session Sender and Session

Reflector configured on the system are respectively linked to a
TWAMP IP Interface by the “Name” entered here.

b) Select the desired Associated Port from the drop-down list of available
ports
c) Enter the desired IPv4 Address and IPv4 Mask
d) Enter the desired MTU size
Click on OK

652 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Two-Way Active Measurement Protocol

4. Likewise, repeat the steps above to create a TWAMP IP Interface at the Reflector
end.

Figure 123: Create TWAMP IP Interface at Reflector End

5. To view the TWAMP IP Interface, select TWAMP IP Interfaces entity under TWAMP
view to display the list of configured IP Interfaces in the facility configuration pane.

Figure 124: TWAMP IP Interface List and Operation Menu

6. Enter a right click on the desired IP Interface and select View Configuration.

A View TWAMP IP Interface Configuration window appears

Figure 125: View TWAMP IP Interface Configuration View

7. To close the IP Interface Configuration view, click the “x” on the facility tab.

8. To edit a TWAMP IP Interface, select TWAMP IP Interfaces entity under TWAMP

view to display the list of configured IP Interfaces in the facility configuration pane.

9. Enter a right click on the desired IP Interface and select Edit Configuration.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 653

Two-Way Active Measurement Protocol

An Edit TWAMP IP Interface Configuration view appears

Figure 126: Edit TWAMP IP Interface Configuration View

10. Edit the IPv4 Address, IPv4 Mask and/or MTU.

Click on OK.

11. To delete a TWAMP IP Interface, select TWAMP IP Interfaces entity under TWAMP
view to display the list of configured IP Interfaces in the facility configuration pane.

12. Enter a right click on the desired IP Interface and select Delete TWAMP IP Interface.

A Delete TWAMP IP Interface Configuration window appears

Figure 127: Delete TWAMP IP Interface Configuration View

13. Click on OK.

14. Likewise, perform the desired operations as above on the TWAMP IP Interface of the
Reflector end as necessary.

Create Control Client at Sender End

15. To create a Control Client, expand System and NE-1 entities under TWAMP
application view. Enter a right click on Control Clients and select Create Control
Client.

A Create TWAMP Control Client Configuration window appears

654 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Two-Way Active Measurement Protocol

Figure 128: Create TWAMP Control Client Configuration View

16. Enter or Select the following data to configure the Control Client:

a) Select the desired TWAMP Control Client ID.

b) Enter the desired Alias.
c) Select the desired Associated Port from the drop-down list of available
ports.
Click on OK.

17. To view a Control Client, select the Control Clients entity to display the list of
configured Control Clients in the facility configuration pane.

Figure 129: TWAMP Control Client List and Operation Menu

18. Right click on the desired Control Client and select View Configuration.

A View Control Client Configuration window appears

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 655

Two-Way Active Measurement Protocol

Figure 130: View Control Client Configuration

19. To close the Control Client view, click the “x” on the facility tab.

20. To edit a Control Client, select Control Clients to display the list of configured Control
Clients in the facility configuration pane.

21. Enter a right click on the desired Control Client and select Edit Configuration.

An Edit Control Client Configuration window appears

Figure 131: Edit Control Client Configuration View

22. Edit the alias if desired.

Click on OK.

23. To delete a Control Client, select the Control Clients entity to display the list of
configured Control Clients in the facility configuration pane.

24. Right click on the desired Control Client and select Delete Control Client.

A Delete Control Client window appears

656 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Two-Way Active Measurement Protocol

Figure 132: Delete Control Client View

25. Click on OK.

Create Session Sender

26. To create a Session Sender, expand System and NE-1 entities by clicking on the “+”
signs next to each entity under TWAMP application view.

27. Right click on the Session Sender entity and select Create Session Sender.

A Create Session Sender Configuration window appears

Figure 133: Create Session Sender Configuration View

28. Enter/Select the following data to configure the Session Sender:

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 657

Two-Way Active Measurement Protocol

Identification

a) Select the desired Session Sender ID

b) Enter the desired Alias
Configuration

c) Select the desired IP Interface name to associate with the Session

Sender
d) Enter the UDP Port for this Session Sender

It is recommended that user be cautious while choosing the well

known UDP Port inclusively between 1 and 1023 in case of possible
conflicts and drop the port range from 0xA000 to 0xDFFF.

e) Enter the IPv4 Address of the Session Sender

f) Enter the UDP Port of the Session Sender
g) Enter the DSCP value
h) Enter the Number of Packets to send
i) Enter the Packet Size of the packets to send
j) Enter the Packet Interval in milliseconds
k) Enter the Response Timeout in seconds
Schedule Information

l) Select the desired Start Time Type

m) Enter the Date and/or Time if appropriate for the selected type
VLAN Configuration

n) Select the relevant check boxes for Outer and/or Inner VLAN, and if
selected, enter the Ethertype and VLAN Tag information.
History Configuration

o) Edit the History Bins, Distribution Bins, Interval and/or Distribution

Interval as required.
Statistics and Distribution

p) Edit the Two Way Delay Min, Max and Bins as required
q) Edit the One Way S2R and R2S Delay settings as required
r) Edit the One Way S2R and R2S PDV settings as required
Click on OK.

29. To view a Session Sender Configuration, expand System and NE-1 entities by
clicking on the “+” signs next to each entity under TWAMP application view.

30. Right click on the desired Session Sender and select View Configuration.

A View Session Sender Configuration window appears

658 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Two-Way Active Measurement Protocol

Figure 134: View Session Sender Configuration View

31. To close the Session Sender Configuration view, click the “x” on the facility tab.

32. To view a Session Sender Configuration Statistics, expand System and NE-1 entities
by clicking on the “+” signs next to each entity under TWAMP application view.

33. Select the Session Sender entity to display the list of configured Session Sender in
the facility configuration pane. Right click on the desired Session Sender and select
View Config Statistics.

A View Session Sender Configuration Statistics window appears

Figure 135: View Session Sender Statistics Configuration

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 659

Two-Way Active Measurement Protocol

34. To close the Session Sender Statistics Configuration view, click the “x” on the facility
tab.

35. To view Session Sender Thresholds, expand System and NE-1 entities by clicking on
the “+” signs next to each entity under TWAMP application view.

36. Select the Session Sender entity to display the list of configured Session Sender in
the facility configuration pane. Right click on the desired Session Sender and select
View Thresholds.

A View Session Sender Thresholds window appears

Figure 136: View Session Sender Thresholds

37. To close the Session Sender Thresholds view, click the “x” on the facility tab.

38. To edit a Session Sender, expand System and NE-1 entities by clicking on the “+”
signs next to each entity under TWAMP application view.

39. Select the Session Sender entity to display the list of configured Session Sender in
the facility configuration pane. Right click on the desired Session Sender and select
Edit Configuration.

An Edit Session Sender Configuration window appears

660 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Two-Way Active Measurement Protocol

Figure 137: Edit Session Sender Configuration View

40. Edit the following settings if desired.

Identification

a) Edit the Alias

Configuration

b) Select the desired IP Interface name to associated with this Session

Sender
c) Edit the UDP Port for this Session Sender
d) Edit the IPv4 Address of the Session Reflector
e) Edit the UDP Port of the Session Reflector
f) Edit the DSCP Value
g) Edit the number of packets to send
h) Edit the packet size of the packets to send
i) Edit the packet interval in milliseconds
j) Edit the response timeout in seconds
Schedule Information

k) Edit the desired Start Time Type

l) Enter the Date and/or Time if appropriate for the selected type
VLAN Configuration

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 661

Two-Way Active Measurement Protocol

m) Select the relevant check boxes for Outer and/or Inner VLAN, and if
selected, enter the Ethertype and VLAN Tag information.
History Configuration

n) Edit the History Bins, Distribution Bins, Interval and/or Distribution

Interval as required.
Statistics and Distribution

o) Edit the Two Way Delay Min, Max and Bins as required
p) Edit the One Way S2R and R2S Delay settings as required
q) Edit the One Way S2R and R2S PDV settings as required
Click on OK.

41. To Edit Session Sender Thresholds, expand System and NE-1 entities by clicking on
the “+” signs next to each entity under TWAMP application view.

42. Select the Session Sender entity to display the list of configured Session Sender in
the facility configuration pane. Right click on the desired Session Sender and select
Edit Thresholds.

An Edit Thresholds window appears

662 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Two-Way Active Measurement Protocol

Figure 138: Edit Session Sender Thresholds

43. Edit the Thresholds as required.

Click on OK.

44. To delete a Session Sender, expand System and NE-1 entities by clicking on the “+”
signs next to each entity under TWAMP application view.

45. Select the Session Sender entity to display the list of configured Session Sender in
the facility configuration pane. Right click on the desired Session Sender and select
Delete Session Sender.

A Delete Session Sender window appears

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 663

Two-Way Active Measurement Protocol

Figure 139: Delete Session Sender

46. Click on OK.

Add Session Sender to Control Client

47. To add a Session Sender, expand System and NE-1 entities by clicking on the “+”
signs next to each entity under TWAMP application view.

48. Select the Control Clients entity to display the list of configured Control Clients in the
facility configuration pane. Right click on the desired Control Client and select Add a
Session Sender.

An Add Session Sender window appears

Figure 140: Add Session Sender View

It is recommended that Session Senders be provisioned before adding

them to the Control Clients (see 26).

49. Select the desired Session Sender ID.

Click on OK.

50. To remove a Session Sender, expand System and NE-1 entities by clicking on the “+”
signs next to each entity under TWAMP application view.

664 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Two-Way Active Measurement Protocol

51. Select the Control Clients entity to display the list of configured Control Clients in the
facility configuration pane. Right click on the desired Control Client and select
Remove a Session Sender.

A Remove Session Sender Configuration window appears

Figure 141: Remove Session Sender Configuration View

52. Select the desired Session Sender ID.

Click on OK.

Create Server at Reflector End

53. To create a server, expand System and NE-1 entities by clicking on the “+” signs next
to each entity under TWAMP application view.

54. Right click on the Servers entity in the selection tree and select Create Server.

A Create TWAMP Server Configuration window appears

Figure 142: Create Server Configuration

55. Enter or select the following data to configure the server:

a) Select the desired TWAMP Server ID

b) Enter the desired Alias
c) Select the desired Associated Port from the drop-down list of available
ports
d) Edit the Session Idle Timeout if required
e) Edit the Session Aging Timeout if required
Click on OK.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 665

Two-Way Active Measurement Protocol

56. To view a Server, expand System and NE-1 entities by clicking on the “+” signs next
to each entity under TWAMP application view.

57. Select the Servers entity to display the list of configured Servers in the facility
configuration pane. Right click on the desired Server and select View Configuration.

A View Server Configuration window appears

Figure 143: View Server Configuration

58. To close the Server Configuration view, click the “x” on the facility tab.

59. To edit a Server, expand System and NE-1 entities by clicking on the “+” signs next to
each entity under TWAMP application view.

60. Select the Servers entity to display the list of configured Servers in the facility
configuration pane. Right click on the desired Server and select Edit Configuration.

An Edit Server Configuration window appears

Figure 144: Edit Server Configuration View

666 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Two-Way Active Measurement Protocol

61. Edit the Session Idle Timeout if required

Edit the Session Aging Timeout if required

Click on OK.

62. To delete a Server, expand System and NE-1 entities by clicking on the “+” signs next
to each entity under TWAMP application view.

63. Select the Servers entity to display the list of configured Servers in the facility
configuration pane. Right click on the desired Server and select Delete Server.

A Delete Server Configuration window appears

Figure 145: Delete Server View

Create Session Reflector

64. To create Session Reflector, expand System and NE-1 entities by clicking on the “+”
signs next to each entity under TWAMP application view.

65. Right click on the Session Reflector entity and select Create Reflector.

A Create TWAMP Reflector Configuration window appears

Figure 146: Create Session Reflector View

66. Select the desired TWAMP Session Reflector ID

Enter the desired Alias

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 667

Two-Way Active Measurement Protocol

Select the desired Associated IP Interface name from the drop-down list of
available names

Enter the UDP Port number

The UDP Port number at Session Reflector end should match the
UDP Port at the Session Sender end.

It is recommended that user be cautious while choosing the well

known UDP Port inclusively between 1 and 1023 in case of possible
conflicts and drop the port range from 0xA000 to 0xDFFF.

Enable/Disable using Sender Sequence Number as required

Click on OK

67. To view a Session Reflector, expand System and NE-1 entities by clicking on the “+”
signs next to each entity under TWAMP application view.

68. Select the Session Reflectors entity to display the list of configured Session
Reflectors in the facility configuration pane. Right click on the desired Reflector and
select View Configuration.

A View Reflector Configuration window appears

Figure 147: View Session Reflector Configuration View

69. To close the Session Reflector Configuration view, click the ‘X’ on the facility tab.

70. To edit a Session Reflector, expand System and NE-1 entities by clicking on the “+”
signs next to each entity under TWAMP application view.

71. Select the Session Reflectors entity to display the list of configured Session
Reflectors in the facility configuration pane. Right click on the desired Reflector and
select Edit Configuration.

An Edit Reflector Configuration window appears

668 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Two-Way Active Measurement Protocol

Figure 148: Edit Session Reflector View

72. Edit the following if required:

Edit the Alias

Select the desired Associated IP Interface name from the drop-down list of
available names

Edit the UDP Port number

Enable/Disable Use Sender Sequence Number as required

Click on OK.

73. To delete a Session Reflector, expand System and NE-1 entities by clicking on the “+”
signs next to each entity under TWAMP application view.

74. Select the Session Reflectors entity to display the list of configured Session
Reflectors in the facility configuration pane. Right click on the desired Reflector and
select Delete Reflector.

Figure 149: Delete Session Reflector View

Add Session Reflector to Server

75. To add Session Reflector, expand System and NE-1 entities by clicking on the “+”
signs next to each entity under TWAMP application view.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 669

Two-Way Active Measurement Protocol

76. Select the Servers entity to display the list of configured Servers in the facility
configuration pane. Right click on the desired Server and select Add Session
Reflector.

An Add Session Reflector window appears

Figure 150: Add Session Reflector View

It is recommended that Session Reflectors be provisioned before

adding them to the Servers (see 64).

77. Select the desired Session Reflector ID.

Click on OK.

78. To remove Session Reflector, expand System and NE-1 entities by clicking on the “+”
signs next to each entity under TWAMP application view.

79. Select the Servers entity to display the list of configured Servers in the facility
configuration pane. Right click on the desired Server and select Remove Session
Reflector.

A Remove Session Reflector window appears

Figure 151: Remove Session Reflector View

80. Select the desired Session Reflector ID

Click on OK.

Perform the following operations for TWAMP Test Sessions

670 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Two-Way Active Measurement Protocol

Start Session

81. To Start a Session, expand System and NE-1 entities by clicking on the “+” signs next
to each entity under TWAMP application view.

82. Select the Control Clients entity to display the list of configured Control Clients in the
facility configuration pane. Right click on the desired Control Client and select Start
Sessions.

A Start Sessions window appears

Figure 152: Start Sessions View

83. Click on OK.

84. To view Session Sender Statistics, expand System and NE-1 entities by clicking on
the “+” signs next to each entity under TWAMP application view.

85. Select the Session Sender entity to display the list of configured Session Sender in
the facility configuration pane. Right click on the desired Session Sender and select
View Statistics.

A View Session Sender Statistics window appears

Figure 153: View Session Sender Statistics

86. Click the Stats facility tab to update the statistic data shown in the table while the
TWAMP sessions are in progress.

87. The Statistics display may be altered by selecting different display/counter/filter

options, and can be exported to an Excel spreadsheet as desired.

88. To close the Session Sender Statistics view, click the “x” on the facility tab.

Stop Session

89. To stop a session, expand System and NE-1 entities by clicking on the “+” signs next
to each entity under TWAMP application view.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 671

Two-Way Active Measurement Protocol

90. Select the Control Clients entity to display the list of configured Control Clients in the
facility configuration pane. Right click on the desired Control Client and select Stop
Sessions.

A Stop Sessions Configuration window appears

Figure 154: Stop Sessions View

91. Click on OK.

Clear PM Registers

92. To clear Session Sender PM registers, expand System and NE-1 entities by clicking
on the “+” signs next to each entity under TWAMP application view.

93. Select the Session Sender entity to display the list of configured Session Sender in
the facility configuration pane. Right click on the desired Session Sender and select
Clear PM Registers.

A Session Sender Clear PM Registers window appears

Figure 155: Session Sender Clear PM Registers

94. Select the desired registers to clear (current or All History).

Click on OK.

Clear Distribution Registers

95. To clear Session Sender distribution registers, expand System and NE-1 entities by
clicking on the “+” signs next to each entity under TWAMP application view.

96. Select the Session Sender entity to display the list of configured Session Sender in
the facility configuration pane. Right click on the desired Session Sender and select
Clear Dist. Registers.

672 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Two-Way Active Measurement Protocol

A Session Sender Clear Distribution Registers window appears

Figure 156: Session Sender Clear Distribution Registers

97. Select the desired registers to clear.

Click on OK.

98. If other Distribution registers require clearing, repeat 95.

99. Go to 1.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 673

Two-Way Active Measurement Protocol

Provision TWAMP on Traffic IP Interface

Refer to the following example configuration for the provisioning procedure in this section.

Figure 157: Example TWAMP Provisioned on Traffic IP Interface

For Traffic IP Interface and VRF related layer-3 provisioning, refer to

Provision Layer-3 Services. For a description of Layer-3 Service
Forwarding, see the FSP 150-GE11xPro System Description
document.

In order to function properly in TWAMP test mode, the user must

configure Host Routes for TWAMP associated IP Interfaces; Subnet
Interface Routes must not be used for TWAMP associated IP
Interface when performing TWAMP tests. Subnet Interface Routes
may be used on IP interfaces when not in TWAMP test mode.

1. After all necessary layer-3 provisioning is done, proceed with Session Sender, Control
Client, Session Reflector and Server provisioning. Go to 15 to 98.

2. Go to 1.

674 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Recommended Steps for Trouble Clearing

Alarms, Error Codes, and Events

Introduction

This chapter contains information supporting alarms and events generated by the
system, their meaning and suggested trouble clearing methods. This chapter contains
the following information:

l Recommended Steps for Trouble Clearing

l Obtaining Technical Assistance
l Alarm Attributes, Probable Cause and Trouble Clearing
l Alarm Masking
l Error Codes and System Responses

Recommended Steps for Trouble Clearing

In the event that alarms are raised after commissioning the FSP 150GE11xPro, this
procedure is provided to assist maintenance personnel in identifying the probable cause
and clearing the alarm.

The following procedure lists the steps to identify, isolate, and correct conditions that
cause alarms reported in the web-based GUI Alarm Window.

1. Ensure that an interface device, such as a craft interface, is connected to the network
and is operating correctly before continuing.

2. Establish a communication connection to the FSP 150CC(s) and log on. See Logging
On and Off.

3. Observe the Alarms Pane to view all current alarms, and record the alarm severity.
See Getting Familiar with the Web-based GUI for an overview of the web-based GUI
components and the location of the Alarm Window.

4. Determine which current alarm has the greatest service effect, and record the alarm.
Service-affecting (SA) critical alarms should be cleared first, followed by Major SA
alarms, and then Minor SA alarms. Then any remaining non-service-affecting (NSA)
major alarms should be cleared, followed by any minor alarms.

5. Locate the appropriate alarm indication description and suggested troubleshooting

techniques for the specific problem.

6. Refer to Alarm Attributes, Probable Cause and Trouble Clearing for identifying,
interpreting, and troubleshooting alarms.

7. Refer to Connector and LED Descriptions for descriptions of connectors and front-
panel LED indications.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 675

Recommended Steps for Trouble Clearing

8. After performing suggested trouble clearing actions, did the alarm or status condition
clear?

a) If YES:
Record the time the alarm was cleared, and continue with the next step.
b) If NO:
Obtain ADVA Optical Networking technical assistance (see below).

9. Repeat 5 and 6 for all alarms.

10. Observe the Alarms Pane to view all current alarms. Have all alarm conditions been
cleared?

a) If YES:
Go to the next step.
b) If NO:
Obtain ADVA Optical Networking technical assistance (see below).

11. Log off all FSP 150CCs when finished.

676 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Obtaining Technical Assistance

Obtaining Technical Assistance

Product Maintenance Agreements and other customer assistance agreements are
available for ADVA Optical Networking products through your ADVA Optical Networking
distribution channel. Technical support is available to warranty or maintenance contract
customers who need technical assistance with an ADVA Optical Networking product
that is under warranty or covered by a maintenance contract. For more information, see
Obtaining Technical Assistance.

Alarm Attributes, Probable Cause and Trouble

Clearing
All problems causing an alarm event are soaked for 2.5 seconds before the alarm
indication is raised. The problem causing the alarm event must clear for 10 seconds
before the alarm indication is cleared. All FSP 150CC System alarms and default
notification codes are shown in Table 15. For all FSP 150GE11xPro Access and Network
alarms, see Table 17. For Maintenance End Point (MEP) alarms, see Table 18 on p. 711.
Each of the following tables contain a description of the alarm condition, probable cause
and suggested trouble clearing procedure. To clear alarm conditions, it is suggested that
you start by using the trouble clearing procedure in Recommended Steps for Trouble
Clearing.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 677

Alarm Attributes, Probable Cause and Trouble Clearing

Alarm Profile Notification Codes

The user has the ability to retrieve and edit alarm profile Notification Codes. To modify
alarm Notification Codes for a given alarm condition type using the web-based GUI,
select Maintenance view, right click on the desired entity in the Selection Tree and select
Edit Alarm Attributes. The options available for notification codes are: Critical, Major,
Minor, Not Alarmed or Not Reported. For LED locations associated with an alarm
condition, refer to. Valid Notification Codes are provided in the following table.

Table 14: Alarm Profile Notification Codes

Notification
Description
Code
Critical - A severe, service-affecting condition has occurred and that
CR
immediate corrective action is imperative.
Major - A serious disruption of service or a malfunction or failure of an
MJ
important system function.
Minor - Trouble that does not have a serious effect on service to cus-
MN tomers or for trouble in functions that are not essential to the NE oper-
ation.
Not Alarmed - A condition that is reported only as an event and can be
NA
retrieved from the system.
Not Reported - A condition that is not reported but can be retrieved
NR
from the system.
Clear - This value can not be used in an alarm profile. Used with event
CL
reporting only.

678 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Alarm Attributes, Probable Cause and Trouble Clearing

Alarms and Events

Refer to the following table for system alarm conditions and their associated probable
cause, default Notification Code and suggested trouble clearing procedure. System
components include the following subsystems:

l System
l Network Element
o BFD Session

o DCN Port
o EoMPLS PW
o L3 VRF
o NTE11xPro Shelf
o NTE11xPro Card
o Power Supply (PSU) - GE112Pro (H)/GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)/GE114Pro
(HE)
o Traffic IP Interface
o Mobile Modem (Not Apply to GO102(S) or GO102(SP))
l Synchronization - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)
o 10MHz (CLK) Port/Pulse Per Second (PPS) Port/Time Of Day (TOD) Port

o BITS In Port
o BITS Out Port
o GPS
o SYNC-1-1-1-1
l Time Clock
l PTP Alarms - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)
o PTP Clock

o PTP Port
o SOOC
o Telecom Slave
l Network Port and Access Port Alarms
l CFM Maintenance End Point Alarms
l CFM QoS Shaper Alarms
l LAG Alarms
l SAT Responder Session Alarms
l ERP Alarms
l SyncJack Alarms - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)
l Open Flow Alarms
l Secure Flow Alarms - GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (CSH)

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 679

Alarm Attributes, Probable Cause and Trouble Clearing

Table 15: System Alarms and Events

Web-based EMS GUI Description / NSA Default SA Default LED
Trouble Clearing Procedure
Condition Type Probable Cause Notification Notification Indication

System
1) Verify that the IP address can be reached (respond to
Backup NTP Server Attempt to connect to the pings) by performing both a ping and a trace route from the
Failed Backup NTP Server failed. management tunnel’s IP address.
{Superscript}
2) Verify management communication configuration. Minor N/A N/A
a) Target IP address connectivity
a) Repair IP address connectivity or routing problem.
or routing problem.
b) No NTP server / NTP server
b) Switch to Primary NTP Server. Repair NTP server.
down.
Data Base - File Trans- Database file transfer is in pro-
No action required. Not Reported N/A N/A
fer In Progress gress.
1) Verify that the IP address can be reached (respond to
pings) by performing both a ping and a trace route from the
DataExport FTP Fail The Data Export via FTP failed. DCN IP address Minor N/A N/A
2) Very that the User Name, Password and Export Path
are correct.
Database Downgrade - imple- 1) Verify that this database contains the desired data.
DB Downgrade mentation of a database file 2) If required, obtain latest database file, otherwise - No Not Reported N/A N/A
below the current release level. Action Required.
File Transfer In Pro-
File transfer is in progress. No action required. Not Reported N/A N/A
gress
IP Address Conflict (declared
IP Address Conflict when a DHCP assigned address Verify management communication configuration. N/A CR N/A
overlaps with an existing subnet)

680 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Alarm Attributes, Probable Cause and Trouble Clearing

Table 15: System Alarms and Events

Web-based EMS GUI Description / NSA Default SA Default LED
Trouble Clearing Procedure
Condition Type Probable Cause Notification Notification Indication

IPv6 Address Conflict (declared

when a DHCPv6 assigned
IPv6 Address Conflict Verify management communication configuration N/A CR N/A
address overlaps with an existing
subnet)
Check access to installation network DHCP server, Boot
CFG file and/or next server information.
Low Touch Provisioning process
LTP Failed N/A MJ N/A
failed
If problem can not be resolved, user can provision the unit
manually.
Low Touch Provisioning is in pro-
LTP In Progress No action required. N/A N/A N/A
cess
Operation In Progress Operation is in progress. No action required. Not Reported N/A N/A
Password Missing
A key exchange profile’s authen-
Re-input the authentication password in the key
(GE114Pro (C)/ tication password is missing or N/A Major N/A
exchange password.
failed by checksum verification.
GE114Pro (CSH))

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 681

Alarm Attributes, Probable Cause and Trouble Clearing

Table 15: System Alarms and Events

Web-based EMS GUI Description / NSA Default SA Default LED
Trouble Clearing Procedure
Condition Type Probable Cause Notification Notification Indication

1) Verify that the IP address can be reached (respond to

Primary NTP Server pings) by performing both a ping and a trace route from the
Attempt to connect to the
Failed management tunnel’s IP address.
Primary NTP Server failed.1
2) Verify management communication configuration. Minor N/A N/A
a) Target IP address connectivity
a) Repair IP address connectivity or routing problem.
or routing problem.
b) No NTP server / NTP server
b) Switch to Backup NTP Server. Repair NTP server.
down.
SNMP Dying Gasp - Check database settings for SNMP Dying Gasp. If cor-
Database or Network issue. Minor N/A N/A
Host Unreachable rect, test network access - Ping the Host address.

1When using Ethernet encapsulated management tunnels, the source IP address of the ping used to validate reachability of the trap host is the IP address assigned to the
management tunnel, and not the system IP address.

682 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Alarm Attributes, Probable Cause and Trouble Clearing

Table 15: System Alarms and Events

Web-based EMS GUI Description / NSA Default SA Default LED
Trouble Clearing Procedure
Condition Type Probable Cause Notification Notification Indication

SNMP Dying Gasp is enabled on

multiple trap hosts and there is
reachability to these trap hosts
via the same interface. On a 1+1
Network Interface, there can only
be a single SNMP trap host with
SNMP Dying Gasp Enabled.
Enabling a second trap host for
SNMP dying gasp raises the
alarm.
SNMP Dying Gasp - Check database settings for SNMP Dying Gasp. Delete
Minor N/A N/A
Resource Busy extra port assignments.

OR -There are multiple man-

agement tunnels active (Network
side is unprotected with tunnel,
Access side also has tunnel). 2
SNMP trap hosts that resolve to
2 different interfaces are sup-
ported. Enabling SNMP Dying
Gasp on a third trap host raises
the alarm.
SWDL - Activation In Software Download activation is
No action required. Not Alarmed N/A N/A
Progress in progress.
SWDL - File Transfer Software Download file transfer
No action required. Not Reported N/A N/A
In Progress is in progress.
SWDL - Installation In Software Download installation
No action required. Not Reported N/A N/A
Progress is in progress.
SWDL - Validation In Software Download validation is
No action required. Not Alarmed N/A N/A
Progress in progress.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 683

Alarm Attributes, Probable Cause and Trouble Clearing

Table 15: System Alarms and Events

Web-based EMS GUI Description / NSA Default SA Default LED
Trouble Clearing Procedure
Condition Type Probable Cause Notification Notification Indication

The ARP Table is full for Inter- Delete old useless ARP entries or wait for ARP Entry to
Traffic ARP Table Full Minor N/A N/A
face Route. age out to clear this alarm, or no action required.
Network Element
BFD Session
1. Check physical connection.
BFD session is down mainly 2. Check the settings on nodes.
because the local node cannot
BFD Session Down receive BFD control packets for 3. Enlarge the local packet detection time and shorten the N/A Minor N/A
negotiating transmission interval local transmission interval for BFD control packets.
and packet detection time.
4. Switch Session Control from Admin Down to None or
set the administrative state to IS/Management.
DCN Port
Check physical cabling, MDIX is not supported on DCN
Cable disconnected, cable fault,
Link Down port. Check settings on system to match DCN network N/A Not Alarmed N/A
improper configuration.
requirements.
EoMPLS PW
The destination of EoMPLS tun-
nel cannot be resolved, i.e., the
remote MAC address cannot be
discovered because the local When ARP response is received, the MAC address entry
Destination Unre- node hasn’t begun to send ARP will be updated and the alarm will be cleared. The soaking
N/A Major N/A
solved request to or get ARP response time for this alarm is 2.5 seconds and the clear soaking
from the remote node for des- time is 10 seconds.
tination MAC address, or ARP
request is failed or because the
MAC entry is aged out.

684 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Alarm Attributes, Probable Cause and Trouble Clearing

Table 15: System Alarms and Events

Web-based EMS GUI Description / NSA Default SA Default LED
Trouble Clearing Procedure
Condition Type Probable Cause Notification Notification Indication

L3 VRF
Maximum number of VRF routes
supported by VRF has been Delete the existing route to add a new route or add the
No Route Resources N/A Major N/A
reached and new routes cannot route to another VRF.
be installed.
Mobile Modem (Not Apply to GO102(S) or GO102(SP))
Link Down is generated when a Perform an Etherjack Diagnostic test. Repair the port
Link Down physical connection is lost on the using test results. NA N/A N/A
port.
Unplug the USB modem, insert the SIM card into the
No SIM Card No SIM card is detected. NA N/A N/A
modem, and re-insert the USB modem into the USB port.
The modem is not qualified by Install an ADVA Optical Networking qualified USB
Modem is not qualified NA N/A N/A
ADVA Optical Networking. modem.
Modem is removed from the USB Re-insert ADVA Optical Networking qualified USB
Modem Removed NA N/A N/A
port. modem.
NTE11xPro Shelf
Check ambient temperature and adjust. Verify that airflow
Equipment has exceeded the
Over Temperature requirements are met. See Air Flow Requirement in FSP Minor N/A Status Red
temperature limit (>= 90 C).
150-GE11xPro System Description document.
System temperature has dropped
below the minimum temperature
Under Temperature Check ambient temperature and adjust. Minor N/A Status Red
threshold
(<= -50 C).
NTE11xPro Card
Communication Fail-
Communication Failure Equipment is malfunctioning. Repair or replace unit. Minor N/A N/A
ure

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 685

Alarm Attributes, Probable Cause and Trouble Clearing

Table 15: System Alarms and Events

Web-based EMS GUI Description / NSA Default SA Default LED
Trouble Clearing Procedure
Condition Type Probable Cause Notification Notification Indication

The ConnectGuard RAM is

cleared and so the crypto pass-
word and key exchange profile
authentication password are both
ConnecGuard RAM cleared. This alarm will suppress
Cleared the “Key Exchange Authentic-
ation Password Missing” alarm. Reset the crypto password at first login. N/A Major N/A
(GE114Pro (C)/
If the system detects SRAM is
GE114Pro (CSH) only) cleared, all ConnectGuard
secure flows will stop traffic and
wait for reconfiguration, and this
alarm will be raised on system
start-up.
Equipment Does Not Equipment does not match the Verify the provisioning against the equipment. Re-pro- Status
N/A Critical
Match Provisioning provisioning. vision as necessary. Blinking Red
Equipment Fault Equipment fault found. Equipment is malfunctioning. Repair or replace unit. N/A Critical Status Red
Equipment Pro- Equipment is provisioned but Replace equipment or place out of service.
N/A Critical N/A
visioned But Removed equipment is removed.

686 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Alarm Attributes, Probable Cause and Trouble Clearing

Table 15: System Alarms and Events

Web-based EMS GUI Description / NSA Default SA Default LED
Trouble Clearing Procedure
Condition Type Probable Cause Notification Notification Indication

If a key exchange profile’s

authentication password is miss-
ing or failed by checksum veri-
fication, a “Key Exchange
Authentication Password Miss-
ing” alarm will be raised.

The password missing happens

when tamper switch is opened
Key Exchange and system reboots or equipment Reset the authentication password in the provisioned key
Authentication Pass- is restored to factory defaults and exchange profiles. NA Major N/A
word Missing reboots, so the SRAM will be
cleared with the crypto password
and key exchange profile authen-
tication password both cleared.
But this alarm will be suppressed
by “ConnectGuard RAM Cleared”
alarm. When crypto password
has been reset, this alarm will be
raised.
Check the equipment carefully.
Equipment enclosure open or
If the enclosure cover is opened, close the cover to clear
tamper switch malfunction indic-
this alarm.
Tamper Switch Open ation. This alarm will suppress NA Critical N/A
the “ConnectGuard RAM If the cover is not opened, it’s probably due to the tamper
Cleared” alarm. switch malfunction and thus it is suggested that user
return this equipment to the vendor.
A test alarm is generated to
Test Alarm Ensure alarm propagates properly. Major N/A N/A
check alarm propagation.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 687

Alarm Attributes, Probable Cause and Trouble Clearing

Table 15: System Alarms and Events

Web-based EMS GUI Description / NSA Default SA Default LED
Trouble Clearing Procedure
Condition Type Probable Cause Notification Notification Indication

Power Supply (PSU) - GE112Pro (H)/GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)/GE114Pro (HE)

Communications malfunction between PSU and FSP
Communication Fail-
Communication failure. 150CC. Replace PSU. If that does not clear the problem, Minor N/A N/A
ure
call ADVA Optical Networking Technical Support.
Equipment Does Not Equipment does not match the Verify the provisioning against the equipment. Re-pro- Status
Minor N/A
Match Provisioning provisioning. vision as necessary. Blinking Red
Equipment Fault Power Supply Unit power failure. Equipment is malfunctioning. Repair or replace PSU. Minor N/A Status Red
Equipment Pro- Equipment is provisioned but
Replace equipment or place out of service. Minor N/A N/A
visioned But Removed equipment is removed.
Power: No Input or Power: No power input or unit Verify power supply input. Adjust power supply input to
Minor N/A Status Red
Unit Fault fault. acceptable level or replace PSU.
Traffic IP Interface
Traffic IP Interface is not oper- 1) Ensure the administrative state of the associated L3
ational. This alarm will be raised Flow Point is not Unassigned.
Traffic IP Interface
only if Traffic IP Interface is asso- N/A Major N/A
Outage
ciated with VRF or DHCP Relay 2) Ensure the operational state of the associated Traffic
Agent. Port is “Normal”.
WiFi Dongle (Not Apply to GO102Pro(S) or GO102(SP))
The USB Port is provisioned with
Delete the USB Modem entity under USB Port and create
USB Device Mismatch a USB Modem while the device NA N/A N/A
a WiFi Dongle.
plugged in is a WiFi dongle.
USB Device Is Not The Wifi Dongle inserted is not Use ADVA qualified USB WiFi Dongle (TP-LINK TL-
NA N/A N/A
Qualified ADVA qualified. WN722N).
The WiFi dongle is removed
Either provisioning the WiFi Dongle entity to Unassigned
USB Device Removed while the provisioned WiFi NA N/A N/A
or plugging it back to the USB port.
dongle entity is In Service.

688 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Alarm Attributes, Probable Cause and Trouble Clearing

Table 15: System Alarms and Events

Web-based EMS GUI Description / NSA Default SA Default LED
Trouble Clearing Procedure
Condition Type Probable Cause Notification Notification Indication

Synchronization - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

10MHz (CLK) Port/Pulse Per Second (PPS) Port/Time Of Day (TOD) Port
Quality Level Squelch. The port
is squelched due to the system's
QL being lower than the port's
configured Squelch QL attribute.
The port's QL Mode attribute Verify and troubleshoot clock reference. Make sure the
QL Squelch Minor N/A N/A
must be configured as enabled system’s QL is higher than the port QL.
and the Squelch QL attribute
must be configured as anything
besides None for this condition to
exist.
BITS In Port
Verify and troubleshoot clock reference. Verify and
troubleshoot possible signal mismatch. In order for proper
BITS-IN and BITS-OUT inter-operate with source equip-
ment/test sets, the user must manually match the FSP
150CC's Network Clock Type with the BITS line type.

Alarm Indication Signal BITS Alarm Indication Signal. Not Reported N/A N/A
If a T1 is the desired BITS Line Type, then Network Clock
Type should be set to "Option 2".

If a 2048kHz or E1 is the desired BITS Line Type, then

Network Clock Type should be set to "Option 1".

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 689

Alarm Attributes, Probable Cause and Trouble Clearing

Table 15: System Alarms and Events

Web-based EMS GUI Description / NSA Default SA Default LED
Trouble Clearing Procedure
Condition Type Probable Cause Notification Notification Indication

Frequency Offset. The

synchronization circuit detected
a frequency offset problem with
the BITS-IN port's recovered
Frequency Offset clock. The BITS-IN port must be Verify and troubleshoot clock reference. Minor N/A N/A
assigned and the BITS-IN port
must be a member of the system
clock selector list for this
condition to exist.
Verify and troubleshoot clock reference. Verify and
troubleshoot possible signal mismatch. In order for proper
BITS-IN and BITS-OUT inter-operate with source equip-
ment/ test sets, the user must manually match the FSP
150CC's Network Clock Type with the BITS line type.
Loss of Frame BITS Loss of Frame If a T1 is the desired BITS Line Type, then Network Clock Minor N/A N/A
Type should be set to “Option 2".

If a 2048kHz or E1 is the desired BITS Line Type, then

Network Clock Type should be set to “Option 1".
BITS Loss of Signal. BITS signal
Loss of Signal Verify and troubleshoot clock reference connection. Minor N/A N/A
is lost.
Synchronization Quality Level
Sync QL Invalid Verify and troubleshoot clock reference. Minor N/A N/A
Invalid.

690 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Alarm Attributes, Probable Cause and Trouble Clearing

Table 15: System Alarms and Events

Web-based EMS GUI Description / NSA Default SA Default LED
Trouble Clearing Procedure
Condition Type Probable Cause Notification Notification Indication

Synchronization Quality Level

Mismatch. The BITS-IN port
receives SSM messages whose
specified Quality Level is lower
than the Expected QL. The BITS-
Sync QL Mismatch Verify and troubleshoot clock reference. Minor N/A N/A
IN port's QL Mode attribute must
be configured as enabled and the
Expected QL attribute must be
configured as anything besides
None for this condition to exist.
Synchronization Referencing
Failed. The BITS-IN port has
failed in such a way that its clock
cannot be recovered, thus pre-
Sync Reference Failed venting it from being used as a Verify and troubleshoot clock reference. Minor N/A N/A
synchronization reference (e.g.,
LOS). The BITS-IN port must be
assigned for this condition prim-
itive to exist.
A forced switch operation has
Sync Reference Evaluate reason for forced switch operation and when
been performed on a Sync Refer- Minor N/A N/A
Forced Switch appropriate, remove the forced switch.
ence.
A Sync Reference has been
Sync Reference locked out. Usually due to failure, Test the Locked Out Sync Reference and remove lock
Minor N/A N/A
Locked Out configuration changes planned or out when reference is fully functional again.
maintenance operations.
A manual switch operation has Evaluate reason for the manual switch operation.
Sync Reference
been performed on a Sync Refer- Minor N/A N/A
Manual Switch
ence.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 691

Alarm Attributes, Probable Cause and Trouble Clearing

Table 15: System Alarms and Events

Web-based EMS GUI Description / NSA Default SA Default LED
Trouble Clearing Procedure
Condition Type Probable Cause Notification Notification Indication

Sync Reference Wait A Sync Reference has been

No Action Required. Minor N/A N/A
To Restore restored and is in WTR timing.
BITS Out Port
Quality Level Squelch. The
BITS-OUT port is squelched due
to the system's QL being lower
than the BITS-OUT port's con-
figured Squelch QL attribute. The
Verify and troubleshoot clock reference. Make sure the
QL Squelch BITS-OUT port's QL Mode attrib- Minor N/A N/A
system’s QL is higher than the BITS-OUT port QL.
ute must be configured as
enabled and the Squelch QL
attribute must be configured as
anything besides None for this
condition to exist.
GPS
GPS Antenna Fail. This condition
may be reported during normal
GPS Receiver operation when
Connect the GPS antenna with the cable directly or
GPS Antenna Fail active antenna draws less cur- Minor N/A N/A
shorten the cable length.
rent, in such cases like con-
nection with splitter or long
antenna cable.
Time Reference has been locked
Time Reference out. This alarm is reported only
Perform “clear lock out” command to clear this alarm. Minor N/A N/A
Locked Out due to the external command
“lock out”.
Time Reference
Time Reference is not available. Verify and troubleshoot time reference. Minor N/A N/A
Unavailable

692 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Alarm Attributes, Probable Cause and Trouble Clearing

Table 15: System Alarms and Events

Web-based EMS GUI Description / NSA Default SA Default LED
Trouble Clearing Procedure
Condition Type Probable Cause Notification Notification Indication

Time Reference is available and

Time Reference
enters Wait-to-Restore state No action necessary. Minor N/A N/A
Unavailable Wtr
before recovery.
SYNC-1-1-1-1
All synchronization references in
the system clock selector list
All Input Sync Refer- have failed. The system clock
Verify and troubleshoot clock reference. Major N/A N/A
ences Failed selector list must have at least
one member in order for this
condition primitive to exist.
Clock was not synced long
Average Holdover Fre-
enough to enter holdover and is No action necessary. Not Reported N/A N/A
quency Not Ready
now freerunning.
System Clock Mode - Fast
Acquisition Synchronization.
Sys Clock Mode - Fast
This indicates the clock selector No action necessary. Not Reported N/A N/A
Acquisition
is acquiring the phase of the
selected reference.
System Clock Mode - Free
Sys Clock Mode - Running Synchronization. This Verify synchronization provisioning to ensure option is set
Not Reported N/A N/A
Freerunning indicates the internal oscillator is correctly. Otherwise, no action is necessary.
the source of the system clock.
System Clock Mode - Holdover
Synchronization. This indicates
the selected reference is invalid
Sys Clock Mode - Hol-
and no other valid input reference Verify and troubleshoot clock reference. Not Reported N/A N/A
dover
is available and the system clock
has previously locked to the now
invalid reference.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 693

Alarm Attributes, Probable Cause and Trouble Clearing

Table 15: System Alarms and Events

Web-based EMS GUI Description / NSA Default SA Default LED
Trouble Clearing Procedure
Condition Type Probable Cause Notification Notification Indication

System Clock Mode - Loss of

Lock. This indicates the selected
reference had locked and is not
Sys Clock Mode - invalid and the lock has been
Verify and troubleshoot clock reference. Not Reported N/A N/A
Loss of Lock lost. While in this state, the clock
selector will be attempting to
acquire the phase of the selected
reference.
Time Clock
Time Clock Not
Time Reference Locked Out. No action necessary. Minor N/A N/A
Locked
Time Clock Time Traceability
Time Frequency Lock No action necessary. Minor N/A N/A
status is Time Frequency Lock.
Time Frequency Not Time Clock Frequency Trace-
No action necessary. Minor N/A N/A
Traceable ability status is Not Traceable.
Time Clock Time Traceability
Time Holdover No action necessary. Minor N/A N/A
status is Holdover.
Time Clock Time Traceability
Time Not Traceable No action necessary. Minor N/A N/A
status is Not Traceable.

694 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Alarm Attributes, Probable Cause and Trouble Clearing

PTP Alarms - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Refer to the following table for Precision Time Protocol (PTP) alarm conditions and their associated probable cause, default notification code and
suggested trouble clearing procedure.

Table 16: PTP Alarms

Description / NSA Default SA Default
Condition Type Trouble Clearing Procedure LED Indication
Probable Cause Notification Notification

PTP Clock
PTP Clock in Frequency Freerun. The recovered clock
PTP Clock in Fre- Verify and troubleshoot clock and ref-
is the same as the internal oscillator and the PTP Not Reported N/A N/A
quency Freerun erence and provisioning.
Clock is in freerun.
PTP Clock in Fre- Verify and troubleshoot clock and ref-
PTP Clock Frequency recovery is in Holdover. Not Reported N/A N/A
quency Holdover erence and provisioning.
PTP Clock in Time
PTP Clock is not locked to TOD. N/A Not Reported N/A N/A
Freerun
PTP Clock in Time
PTP Clock time recovery in Holdover. N/A Not Reported N/A N/A
Holdover
PTP Clock Fre-
Verify and troubleshoot clock and ref-
quency Not Trace- PTP Clock Frequency Not Traceable. Minor N/A N/A
erence and provisioning.
able
PTP Clock Time Not Verify and troubleshoot clock and ref-
PTP Clock Time Not Traceable. Major N/A N/A
Traceable erence and provisioning.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 695

Alarm Attributes, Probable Cause and Trouble Clearing

Table 16: PTP Alarms

Description / NSA Default SA Default
Condition Type Trouble Clearing Procedure LED Indication
Probable Cause Notification Notification
Synchronization Referencing Failed. The

PTP Clock has failed in such a way that its

Sync Reference Verify and troubleshoot clock
clock cannot be recovered, thus preventing
Failed Minor N/A N/A
(for future) it from being used as a synchronization reference.

reference. The PTP Clock must be assigned for this

condition primitive to exist.
Evaluate reason for forced
Sync Reference A forced switch operation has been switch operation and when
Forced Switch (for Minor N/A N/A
future) performed on a Sync Reference. appropriate, remove the forced

switch.
A Sync Reference has been locked out. Test the Locked Out Sync
Sync Reference
Usually due to failure, configuration changes planned Reference and remove lock
Locked Out Minor N/A N/A
or maintenance out when reference is fully
(for future)
operations. functional again.
Sync Reference A manual switch operation has been Evaluate reason for the
Manual Switch Minor N/A N/A
(for future) performed on a Sync Reference. manual switch operation.
Sync Reference Wait
A Sync Reference has been restored and is
To Restore No Action Required. Minor N/A N/A
in WTR timing.
(for future)

696 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Alarm Attributes, Probable Cause and Trouble Clearing

Table 16: PTP Alarms

Description / NSA Default SA Default
Condition Type Trouble Clearing Procedure LED Indication
Probable Cause Notification Notification
Synchronization Quality Level Mismatch.

The PTP Clock receives SSM messages

whose specified Quality Level is lower than

the Expected QL. The PTP Clock's QL Verify and troubleshoot clock
Sync QL Mismatch Minor N/A N/A
Mode attribute must be configured as reference.

enabled and the Expected QL attribute

must be configured as anything besides

None for this condition to exist.

Test Alarm A test alarm is generated to check alarm propagation. Ensure alarm propagates properly. Major N/A N/A
PTP Port
Announce Timeout alarm is asserted once Announce PTP Port has to receive at least one
Announce Timeout message wasn’t received at the Announce message. Verify and Minor N/A N/A
slave for a specified time period (configurable). troubleshoot network and provisioning.
Delay Response Timeout - alarm is asserted once
Delay Response Verify and troubleshoot network and
Delay response message wasn’t received at the slave Minor N/A N/A
Timeout provisioning.
for a specified time period (configurable).
Alarm is cleared when PTP

Multiple Peers - alarm is asserted if PTP Port received for 50 -70 sec

Multiple Peers Port received one Announce messages Announce messages from single PTP N/A Major N/A
Port. Verify and troubleshoot network
from more than one PTP Port. and

provisioning.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 697

Alarm Attributes, Probable Cause and Trouble Clearing

Table 16: PTP Alarms

Description / NSA Default SA Default
Condition Type Trouble Clearing Procedure LED Indication
Probable Cause Notification Notification
Sync Timeout - alarm is asserted once Sync message PTP Port has to receive at least one
Sync Timeout wasn’t received at the slave for a specified time period Sync message. Verify and troubleshoot Minor N/A N/A
(configurable). network and provisioning.
Test Alarm A test alarm is generated to check alarm propagation. Ensure alarm propagates properly. Major N/A N/A
Alarm is cleared if PTP Port
Wrong Domain - alarm is asserted if PTP
received for 50 - 70 sec
Port received Announce messages with
Announce message with a correct
Wrong Domain domain number that is not equal to the N/A Major N/A
domain number. Verify
domain number configured for the parent
and troubleshoot network and
PTP Clock.
provisioning.
SOOC
Packet Timing Signal Fail - Loss Announce. Announce
is not received before announceReceiptTimeout. Verify and troubleshoot clock ref-
PTSF - Loss erence.
A loopback on the port on which the PTP Flowpoint of Minor N/A N/A
Announce
the SOOC exists will result in a PTSF - Loss Release loopback.
Announce.

698 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Alarm Attributes, Probable Cause and Trouble Clearing

Table 16: PTP Alarms

Description / NSA Default SA Default
Condition Type Trouble Clearing Procedure LED Indication
Probable Cause Notification Notification
Verify and troubleshoot clock ref-
erence.
Packet Timing Signal Fail - Loss of Synchronization. A
Sync/Followup is not received before
syncReceiptTimeout or Delay Response is not
PTSF - Loss Sync received before delRespReceiptTimeout. Minor N/A N/A

A loopback on the port on which the PTP Flowpoint of

the SOOC exists will result in a PTSF - Loss of Sync. Release loopback.

Packet Timing Signal Fail - Unusable. The PTP

packet stream is not usable for clock recovery. For Verify and troubleshoot clock ref-
PTSF - Unusable Minor N/A N/A
example, unable to recover clock due to unacceptable erence.
PTP packet PDV.
Telecom Slave

All Slave-Only Ordinary Clocks (SOOC) failed. The Verify and troubleshoot clock ref-
All SOOCs Failed OC-S Virtual Port in a Faulty state or a PTSF Alarm erence. N/A Critical N/A
exists on the SOOC.

Frequency Offset. The synchronization circuit

detected a frequency offset problem with the TS's
Verify and troubleshoot clock ref-
Frequency Offset recovered clock. The TS must be assigned and the TS Minor N/A N/A
erence.
must be a member of the system clock selector list for
this condition to exist.
Verify and troubleshoot clock ref-
Recovered Clock Not Recovered Clock Not Holdover Quality. The erence. Not Reported N/A N/A
Holdover Quality recovered clock is yet to reach holdover quality

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 699

Alarm Attributes, Probable Cause and Trouble Clearing

Table 16: PTP Alarms

Description / NSA Default SA Default
Condition Type Trouble Clearing Procedure LED Indication
Probable Cause Notification Notification
SJ No Frequency SyncJack is not locked to a reference frequency Verify and troubleshoot clock reference
N/A Major N/A
Lock source. and provisioning.
Verify and troubleshoot clock reference
SJ No Time Lock SyncJack is not locked to a reference time source. N/A Major N/A
and provisioning.
Verify and troubleshoot clock ref-
Sync QL Invalid Synchronization Quality Level Invalid. Minor N/A N/A
erence.
Synchronization Quality Level Mismatch. The TS
receives SSM messages whose specified Quality
Level is lower than the Expected QL. The TS's QL Verify and troubleshoot clock ref-
Sync QL Mismatch Minor N/A N/A
Mode attribute must be configured as enabled and the erence.
Expected QL attribute must be configured as anything
besides None for this condition to exist.
Synchronization Referencing Failed. The TS has
failed in such a way that its clock cannot be
Sync Reference Verify and troubleshoot clock ref-
recovered, thus preventing it from being used as a syn- Minor N/A N/A
Failed erence.
chronization reference. The TS must be assigned for
this condition primitive to exist.
Evaluate reason for forced switch oper-
Sync Reference A forced switch operation has been performed on a
ation and when appropriate, remove the Minor N/A N/A
Forced Switch Sync Reference.
forced switch.
A Sync Reference has been locked out. Usually due Test the Locked Out Sync Reference
Sync Reference
to failure, configuration changes planned or main- and remove lock out when reference is Minor N/A N/A
Locked Out
tenance operations. fully functional again.
A manual switch operation has been performed on a Evaluate reason for the manual switch
Sync Reference Sync Reference. operation. Minor N/A N/A
Manual Switch

Sync Reference Wait A Sync Reference has been restored and is in WTR
No Action Required. Minor N/A N/A
To Restore timing.

700 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Alarm Attributes, Probable Cause and Trouble Clearing

Table 16: PTP Alarms

Description / NSA Default SA Default
Condition Type Trouble Clearing Procedure LED Indication
Probable Cause Notification Notification

Telecom Slave in Freerun. The recovered clock is the Verify and troubleshoot clock reference
Telecom Slave in
same as the internal oscillator and the Telecom Slave and provisioning. Not Reported N/A N/A
Freerun
is in freerun.

Telecom Slave in Holdover. The recovered clock is in Verify and troubleshoot clock reference
Telecom Slave in Hol- and provisioning.
holdover as there is no valid SOOC to support clock Not Reported N/A N/A
dover
recovery.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 701

Alarm Attributes, Probable Cause and Trouble Clearing

Network Port and Access Port Alarms

Refer to the following table for Network Port and Access Port alarm conditions and their associated probable cause, default notification code and
suggested trouble clearing procedure.

Table 17: Network Port and Access Port Alarms

Description / NSA Default SA Default
Condition Type Trouble Clearing Procedure LED Indication
Probable Cause Notification Notification
Received provisioning message is invalid or an
error occurred processing received provisioning,
including:

l Received provisioning message is invalid

A provisioning denied message is received Verify provisioning and adjust accord-
AMP Config Fail l
N/A Critical N/A
ingly.
l An error occurred processing received
provisioning
l A timeout has occurred waiting for a response
to a provisioning request. The number of
allowed retries are exceeded.
No available route to or an ADVA peer is not con- Verify route, restore or repair con-
AMP No Peer N/A Major N/A
nected on the port. nected equipment. Verify provisioning.
Client provisioning failure after sending pro-
visioning.

After sending provisioning when it fails either Verify provisioning and adjust accord-
AMP Provisioning Fail because it receives a message from the client Minor N/A N/A
ingly.
that it failed to apply provisioning or a timeout has
occurred waiting for a client to respond to a pro-
visioning message.
Bandwidth Exceeds
Verify provisioning and adjust accord-
Negotiated Speed Bandwidth Exceeds Negotiated Speed. Minor Major Facility Red
ingly.
(Access Port only)

702 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Alarm Attributes, Probable Cause and Trouble Clearing

Table 17: Network Port and Access Port Alarms

Description / NSA Default SA Default
Condition Type Trouble Clearing Procedure LED Indication
Probable Cause Notification Notification
Duplex mode of the connected equipment is
unknown. The unit determined it cannot conclude
Determine the expected port speed set-
Duplex Mode of Far End negotiation with remote end on the Ethernet port.
ting and ensure that both ends are con- Minor Major Facility Yellow
Device Unknown Although auto negotiation failure is a minor alarm,
figured to reflect that setting.
it is usually followed by a critical alarm due to link
down.
EFM OAM - Dying Gasp Restore or repair connected equip-
Received an EFM OAM Dying Gasp message. Minor Critical Facility Red
Received ment.
EFM OAM protocol discovery failure. This noti-
Verify that the IP address can be
fication is sent by the interface unit when it is
reached and verify far end equipment
unable to establish EFM based peering with a
EFM provisioning.
remote unit (per 802.3ah standard).
EFM OAM - Failure Minor Minor Facility Yellow
a) Far end does not support EFM-OAM (IEEE a) Set interface CPD to discard EFM-
802.3ah). OAM.
b) Communications problem. b) Repair communications problem.
c) EFM turned off (not set to Peer) at far end. c) Provision far end equipment.
Received an EFM OAM Critical Event indication.
EFM OAM - Remote Crit- This alarm is sent when a NID receives an OAM-
Clear critical condition at that far end. Minor Minor Facility Yellow
ical Event PDU from the remote end indicating a critical
event has occurred.
The Link Loss Forwarding (LLF) feature is At the far end, clear the fault on the
enabled and has been activated, and a Remote LAN port(s) that is causing the trans-
Link Down (RLD) EFM message has been mission of the RLD message.
EFM OAM - Remote
received for a specific interface. This message is Minor Minor Facility Yellow
Link Down
sent by the far end when an Access Port problem Alternatively, the fault propagation fea-
is detected. The alarm specifies the far end ture can be disabled at the near or far
Access Port(s) that is experiencing a problem. end.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 703

Alarm Attributes, Probable Cause and Trouble Clearing

Table 17: Network Port and Access Port Alarms

Description / NSA Default SA Default
Condition Type Trouble Clearing Procedure LED Indication
Probable Cause Notification Notification
EFM OAM - Remote Received an EFM OAM Remote Link Status Clear fault (Link Down or SFP) con-
Minor Minor Facility Yellow
Link Status Indication. dition at the far end.
Remote EFM OAM Loopback Failed. (EFM OAM
- Remote Loopback Failed alarm's provisionable
severity levels will never be declared. EFM OAM
EFM OAM - Remote
- Remote Loopback Failed alarm can only occur Verify remote end. Not Alarmed Minor Facility Yellow
Loopback Failed
when a port is in the Maintenance state, and the
Maintenance state forces an alarm to be declared
at NR regardless of provisioned security level.)
Mismatch between CE and PE ends. This will
ELMI Sequence Number
occur if 3 consecutive messages are mis- Disable and enable EMI. Minor N/A N/A
Mismatch
matched.
ELMI Not Operating Status inquiry not received. Verify provisioning at both ends. Minor N/A N/A
Synchronization Frequency Offset. The syn-
chronization circuit detected a frequency offset
problem with the Network Port or Access Port’s Verify synchronization network and pro-
Frequency Offset1 Minor N/A N/A
recovered clock. The port must be assigned and visioning.
the port must be a member of the system clock
selector list for this condition to exist.

1SFP (PN: 1061705878-01 SFP/DPI/GBE/850I/MM/LC/TIN) and SFP (PN: 1061705879-01 SFP/DPI/GBE/1310S/SM/LC/TIN) cannot be used as sync reference, or a
Frequency Offset alarm is raised for a sync reference when clock selector detects a frequency offset greater than +/- 4.6ppm. This specific behavior is an outcome of the
SFP doing a store and forward and using a low accuracy oscillator to generate signals.

704 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Alarm Attributes, Probable Cause and Trouble Clearing

Table 17: Network Port and Access Port Alarms

Description / NSA Default SA Default
Condition Type Trouble Clearing Procedure LED Indication
Probable Cause Notification Notification
Verify Network Port alarms at the far
end.

Link Control Protocol a) Clear the Network Port condition

Link control protocol (PPP) failed. Minor Critical N/A
Fail that caused the Link Loss Forwarding
feature to activate.

b) Disable fault propagation.

Link Control Protocol
Link control protocol detected loopback. Remove loopback to clear alarm. Minor Critical N/A
Loopback
Facility Red
Link Down is generated when a physical con-
Perform an Etherjack Diagnostic test.
Link Down nection is lost on a good link on the Ethernet inter- Minor Critical
Repair the port using test results.
face port (Access or Network).
Link/Rate Off
Link Down is generated when a physical con- Facility Red
nection is lost on a good link on the Ethernet inter-
Link Down - Auto-Nego-
face port (Access or Network). Auto negotiation Test and repair far end equipment. Minor Critical
tiation Failed
fault indicates the Far End is not advertising its
auto negotiation rate. Link/Rate Off
Link Down is generated when a physical con-
nection is lost on a good link on the Ethernet inter- Facility Red
face port (Access or Network). A Cable Fault Perform an Etherjack Diagnostic test.
Link Down - Cable Fault Minor Critical
notification is sent when it is determined that the Repair the cable using test results.
link is down due to a cable fault on a copper (RJ- Link/Rate Off
45) port.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 705

Alarm Attributes, Probable Cause and Trouble Clearing

Table 17: Network Port and Access Port Alarms

Description / NSA Default SA Default
Condition Type Trouble Clearing Procedure LED Indication
Probable Cause Notification Notification
Link Down is generated when a physical con-
nection is lost on a good link on the Ethernet inter- Facility Red
Link Down - Cable face port (Access or Network). A Cable Removed
Insert or repair cable. Minor Critical
Removed notification is sent when it is determined that the
link is down due to a cable being locally removed Link/Rate Off
from its RJ-45 port connection.
Link Down is generated when a physical con-
nection is lost on a good link on the Ethernet inter- Wait a few moments for the system to Facility Red
face port (Access or Network). Upon the loss of isolate the trouble and observe another
Link Down - Cause Not
connection on a given port, this is the first noti- Link Down condition on this interface. Minor Critical
Determined
fication being sent, before any specific cause is Troubleshoot according to the new con-
determined (such as cable fault or cable dition. Link/Rate Off
removed).
The Link Loss Forwarding (LLF) feature is Verify Network Port alarms at the far
enabled and has been activated, resulting in the end. Facility Red
deactivation of this Access port. Such alarm indic-
Link Down - De-activ- a) Clear the Network Port condition
ates that the port is down due to Link Loss For- Minor Critical
ated that caused the Link Loss Forwarding
warding on a corresponding remote port. The link
feature to activate. Link/Rate Off
deactivated message is useful in that it ensures
that the proper failed unit will be addressed. b) Disable fault propagation.
Link Down - Master Facility Red
Link Down Master Slave Configuration. Verify Master Slave configuration. Minor Critical
Slave Config Link/Rate Off
The system will raise a “Loopback Active” stand- Set the Loopback Configuration to
Loopback Active ing condition against an None for the entity and the alarm will be Not Alarmed N/A N/A
entity that has a loopback active on it. cleared.

706 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Alarm Attributes, Probable Cause and Trouble Clearing

Table 17: Network Port and Access Port Alarms

Description / NSA Default SA Default
Condition Type Trouble Clearing Procedure LED Indication
Probable Cause Notification Notification
The system will raise a “Loopback Requested”
Change the Loopback Configuration
Loopback Requested standing condition against an entity that has Not Alarmed N/A N/A
from EFM OAM Remote to None.
issued a remote loopback request on it.
Loss of Ethernet Synchronization Messaging Verify synchronization network and pro-
Loss of ESMC Minor N/A N/A
Channel (ESMC). visioning.
A forced protection switch on the Network Port
has occurred. A FORCED condition is raised
when a user has invoked a protection switch Is the reason for originally invoking a
Protection Switch -
away from the Port indicated in the event report. forced switch resolved? If so, release
Forced (Network Port Not Alarmed N/A N/A
This is normally done for a maintenance and/or the forced switch. Otherwise, no action
Only)
troubleshooting procedure. The FORCED con- is required at the local unit.
dition will clear when the user invokes a release
of the protection switch.
Is the reason for originally invoking a
Protection Switch Action - Lockout of Protect. A
Protection Switch - Lock- lockout resolved? If so, release the
user switch request is active against the spe- Not Alarmed N/A N/A
out (Network Port Only) lockout condition. Otherwise, no action
cified entity.
is required.
Verify the signal leaving the far end
The total number of packets received were longer
NID, through any inter- mediate equip-
than the MTU size, and had either a bad Frame
ment, and at the near end. Probable
Receiving Jabber Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number Minor Major Facility Red
Cause: Network problem, or possibly a
of octets (FCS Error), or a bad FCS with a non-
bad cable. Repair faulty equipment or
integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
cable.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 707

Alarm Attributes, Probable Cause and Trouble Clearing

Table 17: Network Port and Access Port Alarms

Description / NSA Default SA Default
Condition Type Trouble Clearing Procedure LED Indication
Probable Cause Notification Notification
Verify the signal leaving the local unit,
Remote Failure Indication received from remote
Remote Fault through any inter- mediate equipment,
equipment. Remote end has lost the signal ori- Minor Minor Facility Yellow
Indication1 and at the far end. Repair faulty equip-
ginating from the local unit.
ment or cable.
Remove SFP module and replace with
SFP is not qualified SFP is not qualified, but inventory information
an ADVA Optical Networking-approved Minor N/A N/A
(Fiber only) indicates that it may still work.
module for that interface type.
Small Form-factor Plug-able (SFP) optics module
mismatch. The installed SFP module does not
match the provisioned module type for the inter- Facility Red
Remove SFP module and replace with
SFP - Provisioning Mis- face. The system expects the SFP to conform to
an ADVA Optical Networking-approved Minor Critical
match (Fiber only) the MSA specification for inventory contents and
module for that interface type.
alarm will be raised if the SFP’s inventory data Link/Rate Off
does not reflect that the device supports the con-
figured speed.
Facility Red
SFP - Removed Small Form-factor Plug-able optics module is
Install SFP module. Minor Critical
(Fiber only) removed.
Link/Rate Off
SFP - Transmit Fault Small Form-factor Plug-able optics module fail-
Replace SFP module. Minor Critical Facility Red
(Fiber only) ure.

1If the Network Port RFI alarm notification code is set to Not Reported or Not Alarmed, then the Link Loss Forwarding feature will not activate for that alarm attribute.

708 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Alarm Attributes, Probable Cause and Trouble Clearing

Table 17: Network Port and Access Port Alarms

Description / NSA Default SA Default
Condition Type Trouble Clearing Procedure LED Indication
Probable Cause Notification Notification
Synchronization Quality Level Mismatch. The
Network Port or Access Port receives SSM mes-
sages whose specified Quality Level is lower
Verify synchronization network and pro-
Sync QL Mismatch than the Expected QL. The port's QL Mode attrib- Minor N/A N/A
visioning.
ute must be configured as enabled and the Expec-
ted QL attribute must be configured as anything
besides None for this condition to exist.
Synchronization Quality Level Invalid. The Eth-
ernet port receives Synchronization Status Mes-
saging (SSM) slow protocol messages whose Verify synchronization network and pro-
Sync QL Invalid Minor N/A N/A
specified Quality Level is invalid. The Ethernet visioning.
port's QL Mode attribute must be configured as
enabled for this condition primitive to exist.
Synchronization Referencing Failed. The Net-
work Port or Access Port has failed in such a way
that its clock cannot be recovered, thus pre- Verify synchronization network and pro-
Sync Reference Failed Minor N/A N/A
venting it from being used as a synchronization visioning.
reference (e.g., LOS). The port must be assigned
for this condition to exist.
Evaluate reason for forced switch oper-
Sync Reference Forced A forced switch operation has been performed on
ation and when appropriate, remove the Minor N/A N/A
Switch a Sync Reference.
forced switch.
A Sync Reference has been locked out. Usually Test the Locked Out Sync Reference
Sync Reference Locked
due to failure, configuration changes planned or and remove lock out when reference is Minor N/A N/A
Out
maintenance operations. fully functional again.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 709

Alarm Attributes, Probable Cause and Trouble Clearing

Table 17: Network Port and Access Port Alarms

Description / NSA Default SA Default
Condition Type Trouble Clearing Procedure LED Indication
Probable Cause Notification Notification
A manual switch operation has been performed Evaluate reason for the manual switch
Sync Reference Manual on a Sync Reference. operation. Minor N/A N/A
Switch

Sync Reference Wait To A Sync Reference has been restored and is in

No Action Required. Minor N/A N/A
Restore WTR timing.
A test alarm is generated to check alarm propaga-
Test Alarm Ensure alarm propagates properly. Major N/A N/A
tion.

710 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Alarm Attributes, Probable Cause and Trouble Clearing

CFM Maintenance End Point Alarms

Refer to the following table for Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) Maintenance End Point (MEP) alarm conditions and their associated
probable cause, default notification code and suggested trouble clearing procedure.

Table 18: Maintenance End Point Alarms

Description / NSA Default SA Default LED
Condition Type Trouble Clearing Procedure
Probable Cause Notification Notification Indication
Alarm Indication Sig-
CFM MEP Alarm Indication Signal. Verify and troubleshoot MEP. N/A Not Reported N/A
nal
Cross-connect Continuity Check Message (CCM)
defect is raised when one cross-connected CCM is
received. It is cleared when a cross- connected CCM
is not received for 3.5 times the provisioned CCM
1) Verify MA and VLAN configuration at
transmission interval of the last cross- connected
each end point throughout the network.
CCM.
2) Verify configuration of MA VLANs in
A CCM is considered cross-connected if MAID (48
the network.
byte entity consisting of MD name, MA name and
Cross Connect CCM MEP ID) does not match with the MAID of the receiv- N/A Minor N/A
ing MEP, or if MD Level is less than the receiving
MEP’s MD Level. Probable causes are:
a) Erroneous configuration of MA at the different end
a) Reconfigure MA configuration at
points of the MA. For example, if a different MA name
appropriate node(s).
is configured at different end points.
b) MD Level is less than the receiving MEP’s MD d) Reconfigure MD Level configuration
Level. at appropriate node(s).
c) Some other MA’s CCM can be received due to mis- c) Change MA and/or VLAN con-
configuration of VLANs in the network. figuration at appropriate node(s).

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 711

Alarm Attributes, Probable Cause and Trouble Clearing

Table 18: Maintenance End Point Alarms

Description / NSA Default SA Default LED
Condition Type Trouble Clearing Procedure
Probable Cause Notification Notification Indication
Erroneous Continuity Check Message (CCM) defect
is raised when one invalid CCM is received. It is
cleared when an invalid CCM is not received for 3.5
times the provisioned CCM transmission interval of
the last invalid CCM. A CCM is invalid if:
Verify MEP ID and CCM transmission
1. MEP ID in the received CCM is not configured in interval configuration at each end point
the receiving MEP’s MA. throughout the network.
2. MEP ID in the received CCM matches the receiving
MEP’s MEP ID.

Erroneous CCM 3. CCM interval does not match the interval configured N/A Minor N/A
for the receiving MEP’s MA.

Probable Causes are:

a) Mis-configuration of MA, where the MEP list is not a) Reconfigure MEP list at appropriate
consistent at all the end points. node(s).
b) Mis-configuration of MA, where the MA CCM trans-
b) Reconfigure MA CCM transmission
mission interval is different at one or more end points
interval at appropriate node(s).
of the MA.
c) Mis-configuration of MEP, where MEPs with same
c) Reconfigure MEP ID at appropriate
MEP ID is created at two or more end points of the
node(s).
MA.

712 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Alarm Attributes, Probable Cause and Trouble Clearing

Table 18: Maintenance End Point Alarms

Description / NSA Default SA Default LED
Condition Type Trouble Clearing Procedure
Probable Cause Notification Notification Indication
Some MAC Status defect exists on a MEP if:

1) At least one remote MEP’s interface is unavailable.

2) All MEPs on the same interface are reporting that Verify the Remote MEP LAN interface
the port is blocked (i.e., all remote MEPs’ Bridge Ports connection and configuration.
are not forwarding data).
Some MAC Status Troubleshoot and repair the Remote N/A Minor N/A
The problem lies at the starting point of the service MEP interface connection or recon-
instance (the Remote MEP) and probably not any- figure the interface.
where in the network used by the MA. In FSP
150GE11xPro CCMs generated do not have Port
Status or Interface Status TLVs, but the TLVs are
handled if CCMs are received containing them.
At least one of the Remote MEPs is sending CCMs
Observe MEP alarm conditions at the
with Remote Defect Indication (RDI) set.
remote node.
Some RDI RDI is present in the CCMs transmitted when any of N/A Minor N/A
Perform appropriate steps in this table
the other MEP alarm conditions (above) exist for a
to clear the condition at the far end.
Remote MEP.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 713

Alarm Attributes, Probable Cause and Trouble Clearing

Table 18: Maintenance End Point Alarms

Description / NSA Default SA Default LED
Condition Type Trouble Clearing Procedure
Probable Cause Notification Notification Indication
1) Observe if an Erroneous CCM or
A Remote Maintenance End Point (MEP) Continuity
Cross-connect CCM condition exists
Check Message (CCM) defect indicates that a CCM
on the remote MEP.
is not received from a Remote MEP for 3 consecutive
provisioned CCM transmission intervals. 2) Verify cable connections and con-
figuration at network equipment / inter-
Probable causes are:
mediate nodes.
Some Remote MEP a) If an Erroneous CCM or Cross-con-
CCM a) If MEPs in an MA are mis-configured, and as a res- nect CCM condition exists, refer to the N/A Minor N/A
ult there are Erroneous CCM or Crossconnect CCM appropriate steps to clear the Erro-
conditions, this alarm could be raised as a side-effect. neous CCM or Cross-connect CCM
condition.
b) A problem exists causing the CCM to be dropped
b) Troubleshoot and repair the physical
before it reaches the end point, such as a physical
network or reconfigure network equip-
problem with the network or mis-configuration of the
ment / intermediate nodes.
equipment in the network.

MEP alarm attributes are editable in CFM mode (by selecting Applications and then CFM or selecting the CFM icon).

714 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Alarm Attributes, Probable Cause and Trouble Clearing

CFM QoS Shaper Alarms

Refer to the following table for Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) Quality of Service (QoS) Shaper alarm conditions and their associated
probable cause, default notification code and suggested trouble clearing procedure.

Table 19: Qos Shaper Alarms

Description / NSA Default SA Default LED
Condition Type Trouble Clearing Procedure
Probable Cause Notification Notification Indication
Verify and troubleshoot MEP band-
Shaper Bytes Tail Dropped by the QoS queue. Insuf-
Shaper BTD width allocation. Re-provision with Minor Minor N/A
ficient bandwidth.
more bandwidth, if necessary.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 715

Alarm Attributes, Probable Cause and Trouble Clearing

LAG Alarms
Refer to the following table for LAG alarm conditions and their associated probable cause, default notification code and suggested trouble clearing
procedure.

Table 20: LAG Alarms

Description / NSA Default SA Default LED
Condition Type Trouble Clearing Procedure
Probable Cause Notification Notification Indication
Check the configuration of the lag-
based management tunnel (Encap-
Link Control Protocol
Link control protocol failed. sulation Type PPP) and ensure it func- N/A Critical N/A
Fail
tions well; or delete the management
tunnel.
Link Control Protocol
Link control protocol detected loopback. Remove loopback to clear alarm. N/A Critical N/A
Loopback
Facility Red
Link Down is generated when a physical connection Perform an Etherjack Diagnostic test.
Link Down N/A Critical
is lost on a good link on the LAG. Repair the port using test results.
Link/Rate Off
The Link Loss Forwarding (LLF) feature is enabled Verify Network Port alarms at the far
and has been activated, resulting in the deactivation end. Facility Red
of this LAG. Such alarm indicates that the port is
Link Down - De-activ- a) Clear the Network Port condition
down due to Link Loss Forwarding on a cor- Critical
ated that caused the Link Loss Forwarding
responding remote port. The link deactivated mes-
feature to activate. Link/Rate Off
sage is useful in that it ensures that the proper failed
unit will be addressed. b) Disable fault propagation.
No available route to or an ADVA peer is not con- Verify route, restore or repair con-
ampNoPeer N/A Major N/A
nected on the port. nected equipment. Verify provisioning.

716 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Alarm Attributes, Probable Cause and Trouble Clearing

Table 20: LAG Alarms

Description / NSA Default SA Default LED
Condition Type Trouble Clearing Procedure
Probable Cause Notification Notification Indication
Received provisioning message is invalid or an error
occurred processing received provisioning, including:

l Received provisioning message is invalid

l A provisioning denied message is received Verify provisioning and adjust accord-
ampCfgFail N/A Critical N/A
l An error occurred processing received ingly.
provisioning
l A timeout has occurred waiting for a response to
a provisioning request. The number of allowed
retries are exceeded.
Client provisioning failure after sending provisioning.

After sending provisioning when it fails either

ampProvFail because it receives a message from the client that it Verify provisioning and adjust accord- Minor N/A N/A
failed to apply provisioning or a timeout has occurred ingly.
waiting for a client to respond to a provisioning mes-
sage.
The system will raise a “Loopback Active” standing
loopbackActive condition against an NA N/A N/A
entity that has a loopback active on it.
The system will raise a “Loopback Requested” stand- Set the Loopback Configuration to
loopbackRequest ing condition against an entity that has issued a None for the entity and the alarm will NA N/A N/A
remote loopback request on it. be cleared.
Change the Loopback Configuration
bwexceedednegspeed Bandwidth Exceeds Negotiated Speed. NA NA N/A
from EFM OAM Remote to None.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 717

Alarm Attributes, Probable Cause and Trouble Clearing

SAT Responder Session Alarms

Refer to the following table for Service Activation Testing (SAT) Responder Session alarm conditions and their associated probable cause, default
notification code and suggested trouble clearing procedure.

Table 21: SAT Responder Session Alarms

Description / NSA Default SA Default LED
Condition Type Trouble Clearing Procedure
Probable Cause Notification Notification Indication
This alarm is reported when one responder session is
Remote Initiated SAT negotiated. Disappear when user deletes this session No action required. Minor N/A N/A
or it is released by remote SAT Control.

ELP Alrams
Refer to the following table for ELP alarm conditions and their associated probable cause, default notification code and suggested trouble clearing
procedure.

Table 22: ELP Alarms

Description / NSA Default SA Default LED
Condition Type Trouble Clearing Procedure
Probable Cause Notification Notification Indication
forced forced Remove Forced Condition N/A -- N/A
lockout lockout Remove Locked out Condition N/A -- N/A
freeze freeze Remove Freeze Condition N/A -- N/A

718 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Alarm Attributes, Probable Cause and Trouble Clearing

ERP Alarms
Refer to the following table for Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) alarm conditions and their associated probable cause, default notification code and
suggested trouble clearing procedure.

Table 23: ERP Alarms

Description / NSA Default SA Default LED
Condition Type Trouble Clearing Procedure
Probable Cause Notification Notification Indication
Failure of Protocol, Protocol Mismatch. The ERP
instance is provisioned as the RPL Owner; and
received a R-APS PDU containing the MEG Level,
Verify the ERP provisioning at each
Ring ID and VID for the ERP instance, an OAM
ERP FOP Mismatch node, change the node provisioning as N/A Major N/A
Opcode field of 40 (R-APS), a Request/Status value
required.
of NR (No Request), an RPL Blocked status of 1
(Blocked) and a Node ID different than the receiving
node.
Failure of Protocol, Timeout. The ERP Instance has
Check the RAPS Status and verify R-
not received a R-APS PDU containing the MEG Level,
ERP FOP Timeout APS VLAN provisioning to determine Minor N/A N/A
Ring ID and VID for the ERP instance for 15s; i.e., 3x
the cause, clear trouble as required.
the R-APS PDU transmission period.
ERP BlockPort 0/1 Investigate blocked side of the ring,
Blocking Ring Port 0/1 - Ring Protection Link. Not Reported N/A N/A
RPL verify CFM messages and repair link.
Verify the signal leaving the far end
ERP BlockPort 0/1 unit, through any inter-mediate equip-
Blocking Ring Port 1 - Signal Fail. N/A N/A N/A
SF ment, and at the near end. Repair faulty
equipment or cable.
ERP BlockPort 0/1 Evaluate reason for the manual switch
Blocking Ring Port 0/1 - Manual Switch. N/A N/A N/A
MS operation.
Evaluate reason for forced switch oper-
ERP BlockPort 0/1
Blocking Ring Port 0/1 - Forced Switch. ation and when appropriate, remove the N/A N/A N/A
FS
forced switch.
ERP BlockPort 0/1
Blocking Ring Port 0/1 - Wait-to-Restore. No Action Required. N/A N/A N/A
WTR

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 719

Alarm Attributes, Probable Cause and Trouble Clearing

SyncJack Alarms - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Refer to the following table for SyncJack - Clock Probe, PTP Clock Probe and PTP Network Probe - alarm conditions and their associated probable
cause, default notification code and suggested trouble clearing procedure.

Table 24: Syncjack Alarms

Description / NSA Default SA Default LED
Condition Type Trouble Clearing Procedure
Probable Cause Notification Notification Indication

Clock Probe
SJTEST Reference Probe Reference signal failed. May be caused by sig- For case of external signal, check
Minor N/A N/A
Fail nal loss or signal accuracy degradation detected. cable connection.
Probe source signal failed. May be caused by signal For case of external signal, check
SJTEST Source Fail Minor N/A N/A
loss or signal accuracy degradation detected. cable connection.
PTP Clock Probe
Validate PTP Clock Probe con-
SJTEST No Mes- PTP Clock Probe does not receive PTP event mes-
figuration, check connectivity to the Minor N/A N/A
sages sages from the clock under test.
clock under test.
SJTEST No PTP Clock Probe does not receive valid timestamps in Make sure PTP Clock under test event
Minor N/A N/A
Timestamp the PTP event messages. messages comprise valid timestamps.
SJTEST Reference Probe Reference signal failed. May be caused by sig- For case of external signal, check
Minor N/A N/A
Fail nal loss or signal accuracy degradation detected. cable connection.
PTP Network Probe
Validate PTP Network Probe con-
SJTEST No Mes- PTP Clock Probe does not receive PTP event mes-
figuration, check connectivity to the Minor N/A N/A
sages sages from the clock under test.
PTP network under test.
SJTEST Reference Probe Reference signal failed. May be caused by sig- For case of external signal, check
Minor N/A N/A
Fail nal loss or signal accuracy degradation detected. cable connection.

720 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Alarm Attributes, Probable Cause and Trouble Clearing

Open Flow Alarms

Refer to the following table for Open Flow alarm conditions and their associated probable cause, default notification code and suggested trouble
clearing procedure.

Table 25: Open Flow Logical Switch Alarms

Description / NSA Default SA Default LED
Condition Type Trouble Clearing Procedure
Probable Cause Notification Notification Indication
Ensure that the IP address and IP
Interface can connect the NE with a
The connection state of the Open Flow Logical Switch valid SDN Controller. When the NE
OF No Connection N/A Major N/A
for all provisioned Open Flow Controllers is “Down”. and the SDN Controller are con-
nected, the alarm will be cleared and
the Connect Status will be “Up”.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 721

Alarm Attributes, Probable Cause and Trouble Clearing

Secure Flow Alarms - GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (CSH)

Refer to the following table for Secure Flow alarm conditions and their associated probable cause, default notification code and suggested trouble
clearing procedure.

Table 26: Secure Flow Alarms

Description / NSA Default SA Default LED
Condition Type Trouble Clearing Procedure
Probable Cause Notification Notification Indication
Key exchange alarm is raised for the situations listed
below:

1) system reboot (warm/cold)

2) Authentication passwords on both sides are not

same

3) Remote MAC Addresses on both sides do not match

with each other. 1) Ensure that the two parties are
using the same authentication pass-
word.
Key exchange process will fail after three consecutive
2) Ensure that the link connection
Key Exchange Failed key exchange failures. When key exchange process N/A Major N/A
between two sides are normal.
fails, the key exchange process will stop till the crypto
user restarts the key exchange process or an Announce 3) Restart key exchange and make
message is received. The previous session will be used sure the new key exchange will suc-
for encryption/decryption until the Packet Number rolls ceed.
over. With this approach a manual restart need not be
coordinated on both sides and the key exchange restart
on one side should re-initiate the key exchange pro-
cess.

This alarm will be suppressed by “Tamper Switch

Open” alarm and “ConnectGuard RAM Cleared” alarm.

722 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Alarm Masking

Alarm Masking
Refer to the following tables for alarm masking, where certain alarms or conditions may
mask the raising of an underlying condition, and until the “masking” alarms are cleared,
the underlying alarms may not be seen.

System level alarms are not masked.

Table 27: Alarm Masking Rules

Condition Type
Web-based EMS GUI Alarm Rule
SNMP Alarm Name
Alarm Name
10MHz (CLK) Port / Pulse Per Second (PPS) Port / Time Of Day (TOD) Port
qlsqlch Output Squelch qlsqlch (no masking)
BFD Session
bfdSessionDown BFD Session Down bfdSessionDown (no masking)
BITS In Port
ais Alarm Indication Signal
ais and not los
freqoff Frequency Offset freqoff (no masking)
lof Loss of Frame lof and not los or ais
los Loss of Signal los (no masking)
qlinvalid Sync QL Invalid qlinvalid (no masking)
qlmismatch Sync QL Mismatch qlmismatch and not qlinvalid
syncref Sync Reference Failed syncref (no masking)
Sync Reference Forced syncreffrc (no masking)
syncreffrc
Switch
Sync Reference Locked
syncreflck syncreflck (no masking)
Out
Sync Reference Manual
syncrefman syncrefman (no masking)
Switch
Sync Reference Wait
syncrefwtr syncrefwtr (no masking)
To Restore
BITS Out
qlsqlch QL Squelch qlsqlch (no masking)
CFM MEP
ais Alarm Indication Signal ais (no masking)
erroneousccm Erroneous CCM erroneousccm and not crossconnectccm or ais
somemacstatus and not crossconnectccm or erro-
somemacstatus Some MAC Status
neousccm or someremotemepccm or ais
somerdi and not crossconnectccm or erroneousccm or
somerdi Some RDI
someremotemepccm or somemacstatus or ais
Some Remote MEP someremotemepccm and not crossconnectccm or erro-
someremotemepccm
CCM neousccm or ais
crossconnectccm Cross Connect CCM crossconnectccm and not ais
CFM QoS Shaper

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 723

Alarm Masking

Table 27: Alarm Masking Rules

Condition Type
Web-based EMS GUI Alarm Rule
SNMP Alarm Name
Alarm Name
shaperbtd Shaper BTD shaperbtd (no masking)
Clock Probe
sjtestreferencefail SJTEST Reference Fail sjtestreferencefail (no masking)
sjtestsourcefail SJTEST Source Fail sjtestsourcefail (no masking)
DCN Port
lnkdn Link Down no masking
DHCP Relay Agent
ipaddrconflict IP Address Conflict ipaddrconflict (no masking)
ELP
Protection Switch -
forced forced (no masking)
Forced
Protection Switch -
locked locked (no masking)
Lockout
freeze Freeze freeze (no masking)
EoMPLS PW
destinationUnresolved Destination Unresolved destinationUnresolved (no masking)
ERP
erpBlockPort0FS ERP BlockPort 0 FS erpBlockPort0FS (no masking)
erpBlockPort0MS ERP BlockPort 0 MS erpBlockPort0MS (no masking)
erpBlockPort0RPL ERP BlockPort 0 RPL erpBlockPort0RPL (no masking)
erpBlockPort0SF ERP BlockPort 0 SF erpBlockPort0SF (no masking)
erpBlockPort0WTR ERP BlockPort 0 WTR erpBlockPort0WTR (no masking)
erpBlockPort1FS ERP BlockPort 1 FS erpBlockPort0MS (no masking)
erpBlockPort1MS ERP BlockPort 1 MS erpBlockPort1MS (no masking)
erpBlockPort1RPL ERP BlockPort 1 RPL erpBlockPort1RPL (no masking)
erpBlockPort1SF ERP BlockPort 1 SF erpBlockPort1SF (no masking)
erpBlockPort1WTR ERP BlockPort 1 WTR erpBlockPort0FS (no masking)
erpFoPPM ERP FOP Mismatch erpFOPPM (no masking)
erpFoPTO ERP FOP Timeout erpFoPTO (no masking)
Ethernet Port (Access Port and Network Port)
ampcfgfail and not lnkdn or lnkdnunisolated or lnkdnlpbkflt
or lnkdncbltstflt or

ampCfgFail AMP Config Fail lnkdncblrmv or lnkdncblflt or lnkdnautonegflt or lnk-

dnmstrslvcfg or lnkdnmstrslvcfg

or sgeo or sfp or xfp, or efmfail or ampnopeer

ampnopper and not lnkdn or lnkdnunisolated or lnkdnlpbkflt
or lnkdncbltstlflt or

ampNoPeer AMP No Peer lnkdncblrmv or lnkcblflt or lnkdnautonegflt or lnk-

dnmstrslvcfg or sego or sfp or xfp

or efmfail

724 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Alarm Masking

Table 27: Alarm Masking Rules

Condition Type
Web-based EMS GUI Alarm Rule
SNMP Alarm Name
Alarm Name
ampprovfail and not lnkdn or lnkdnunisolated or lnk-
dnlpbkflt or lnkdncbltstflt or

ampProvFail AMP Provisioning Fail lnkdncblrmv or lnkdncblflt or lnkdnautonegflt or lnk-

dnmstrslvcfm or sego or sfp or

xfp or efmfail or ampnopeer

autonegunknown and not lnkdownunisolated or lnk-
downlpbkfault or lnkdowncableremoved or lnk-
Duplex Mode of Farend
autonegunknown downcablefault or lnkdownautonegfailed or lnkdeactivated
Device Unknown
or rxjabber or SGEO or sfpmismatch or sfpremoved or
sfptxfault or dyinggasp or lnkdownmasterslavecfg
Bandwidth Exceeds
bwexceedednegspeed bwexceedednegspeed (no masking)
Negotiated Speed
dyinggasp Dying Gasp Received dyinggasp (no masking)
efmfail and not lnkdownunisolated or lnkdownlpbkfault or
lnkdowncableremoved or lnkdowncablefault or lnk-
efmfail EFM OAM - Failure downautonegfailed or SGEO or sfpmismatch or sfpre-
moved or sfptxfault or dyinggasp or
lnkdownmasterslavecfg
efmrce and not lnkdownunisolated or lnkdownlpbkfault or
lnkdowncableremoved or lnkdowncablefault or lnk-
EFM OAM - Remote
efmrce downautonegfailed or SGEO or sfpmismatch or sfpre-
Critical Event
moved or sfptxfault or dyinggasp or
lnkdownmasterslavecfg
efmrld and not lnkdownunisolated or lnkdownlpbkfault or
lnkdowncableremoved or lnkdowncablefault or lnk-
EFM OAM - Remote
efmrld downautonegfailed or SGEO or sfpmismatch or sfpre-
Link Down
moved or sfptxfault or dyinggasp or
lnkdownmasterslavecfg
efmrls and not lnkdownunisolated or lnkdownlpbkfault or
lnkdowncableremoved or lnkdowncablefault or lnk-
EFM OAM - Remote
efmrls downautonegfailed or SGEO or sfpmismatch or sfpre-
Link Status
moved or sfptxfault or dyinggasp or
lnkdownmasterslavecfg
elminotoperational and not lnkdn or lnkdnunisolated or lnk-
dnlpbkflt or lnkdncbltstflt or lnkdncblrmv or lnkdncblflt or
elmi-notoper ELMI Not Operating
lnkdnautonegflt or lnkdnmstrslvcfg or sgeo or sfp or xfp
or dyinggasp
elmiseqmismatch and not lnkdn or lnkdnunisolatd or lnk-
ELMI Sequence Num- dnlpbkflt or lnkdncbltstflt or lnkdncblrmv or lnkdncblflt or
elmi-seqnummismatch
ber Mismatch lnkdnautonegflt or lnkdnmstrslvcfg or sgeo or sfp or xfp
or dyinggasp
esmcfail Loss of ESMC esmcfail (no masking)
Protection Switch -
forced (Network port only) forced (no masking)
Forced

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 725

Alarm Masking

Table 27: Alarm Masking Rules

Condition Type
Web-based EMS GUI Alarm Rule
SNMP Alarm Name
Alarm Name
lcpfail and not lnkdn or lnkdnunisolated or lnkdnlpbkfault
or lnkdncabletestfault or lnkdncableremoved or lnk-
Link Control Protocol dncablefault or lnkdnautonegfailed or lnk-
lcpfail
Fail dnmasterslavecfg or lnkdeactivated or sgeomea or
sgeoflt or sgeounplug or sfprmv or sfpinserted or sfptx-
fault or sfpmea or dgasp
lcploopback and not lcpfail or lnkdn or lnkdnunisolated or
lnkdnlpbkfault or lnkdncabletestfault or lnk-
Link Control Protocol dncableremoved or lnkdncablefault or lnkdnautonegfailed
lcploopback
Loopback or lnkdnmasterslavecfg or lnkdeactivated or sgeomea or
sgeoflt or sgeounplug or sfprmv or sfpinserted or sfptx-
fault or sfpmea or dgasp
Link Down - De-activ-
ated lnkdeactivated and not SGEO or sfpmismatch or sfpre-
lnkdeactivated
moved or sfptxfault or dyinggasp

lnkdn Link Down lnkdn and not lnkdeactivated

lnkdownautonegfailed and not SGEO or sfpmismatch or
Link Down - Auto-Nego-
lnkdownautonegfailed sfpremoved or sfptxfault or dyinggasp or lnkdeactivated
tiation Failed
or lnkdownmasterslavecfg
lnkdowncablefault and not SGEO or sfpmismatch or
lnkdowncablefault Link Down - Cable Fault sfpremoved or sfptxfault or dyinggasp or lnkdeactivated
or lnkdownmasterslavecfg
lnkdowncableremoved and not SGEO or sfpmismatch or
Link Down - Cable
lnkdowncableremoved sfpremoved or sfptxfault or dyinggasp or lnkdeactivated
Removed
or lnkdownmasterslavecfg
lnkdownmasterslavecfg and not SGEO or sfpmismatch
Link Down - Master
lnkdownmasterslavecfg or sfpremoved or sfptxfault or dyinggasp or lnk-
Slave Config
deactivated
lnkdownunisolated and not lnkdownlpbkfault or lnk-
downautonegfailed or lnkdowncablefault or lnk-
Link Down - Cause Not
lnkdownunisolated downcableremoved or lnkdeactivated or SGEO or
Determined
sfpmismatch or sfpremoved or sfptxfault or dyinggasp or
lnkdownmasterslavecfg
Protection Switch -
lockout (Network port only) lockout (no masking)
Lockout
qlinvalid Sync QL Invalid qlinvalid (no masking)
qlmismatch Sync QL Mismatch qlmismatch and not qlinvalid
rfi and not lnkdownunisolated or lnkdownlpbkfault or lnk-
downcableremoved or lnkdowncablefault or lnk-
rfi Remote Fault Indication downautonegfailed or lnkdeactivated or SGEO or
sfpmismatch or sfpremoved or sfptxfault or dyinggasp or
lnkdownmasterslavecfg

726 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Alarm Masking

Table 27: Alarm Masking Rules

Condition Type
Web-based EMS GUI Alarm Rule
SNMP Alarm Name
Alarm Name
rmtefmlpbkfail and not lnkdownunisolated or lnk-
downlpbkfault or lnkdowncableremoved or lnk-
EFM OAM - Remote
rmtefmlpbkfail downcablefault or lnkdownautonegfailed or SGEO or
Loopback Failed 1
sfpmismatch or sfpremoved or sfptxfault or dyinggasp or
lnkdownmasterslavecfg
rxjabber and not lnkdownunisolated or lnkdownlpbkfault
or lnkdowncableremoved or lnkdowncablefault or lnk-
rxjabber Receiving Jabber downautonegfailed or lnkdeactivated or SGEO or sfp-
mismatch or sfpremoved or sfptxfault or dyinggasp or
lnkdownmasterslavecfg
SFP - Provisioning Mis-
sfpmismatch sfpmismatch and not sfpremoved or SGEO
match
sfpnonqualified SFP is not qualified
sfpremoved SFP - Removed sfpremoved and not SGEO
sfptxfault and not sfpmismatch or sfpremoved or SGEO
sfptxfault SFP - Transmit Fault
or dyinggasp
syncref Sync Reference Failed syncref (no masking)
Sync Reference Forced syncreffrc (no masking)
syncreffrc
Switch
Sync Reference Locked
syncreflck syncreflck (no masking)
Out
Sync Reference Manual syncrefman (no masking)
syncrefman
Switch

Sync Reference Wait syncrefwtr (no masking)

syncrefwtr
To Restore
testalarm Test Alarm testalarm, (no masking)
GPS
gps-antenna-alarm-indic- GPS Antenna Alarm
(no masking)
ation Indication
Time Reference
timeref-degraded (no masking)
Degraded
Time Reference
timeref-degraded-wtr (no masking)
Degraded Wtr
Time Reference Forced
timeref-forced-switch (no masking)
Switch
Time Reference Locked
timeref-locked-out (no masking)
Out
Time Reference
timeref-unavailable (no masking)
Unavailable
Time Reference
timeref-unavailable-wtr (no masking)
Unavailable Wtr

1EFM OAM - Remote Loopback Failed alarm's provisionable severity levels are not declared. EFM OAM - Remote Loopback
Failed alarm only occurs when a port is in the Maintenance state, and the Maintenance state forces alarms to NR regardless of
the provisioned severity level.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 727

Alarm Masking

Table 27: Alarm Masking Rules

Condition Type
Web-based EMS GUI Alarm Rule
SNMP Alarm Name
Alarm Name
GRE Tunnel
GRE Remote
greRemoteUnreachable greRemoteUnreachable (no masking)
Unreachable
L3 VRF
noRouteResources No Route Resources noRouteResources (no masking)
ipaddrconflict IP Address Conflict ipaddrconflict (no masking)
LAG
ampNoPeer AMP No Peer ampNoPeer and not lnkdn or lnkdeactivated
ampCfgFail and not ampNoPeer or lnkdn or
ampCfgFail AMP Config Fail
lnkdeactivated
ampProvFail and not ampNoPeer or lnkdn or
ampProvFail AMP Provisioning Fail
lnkdeactivated
Link Control Protocol
lcpfail lcpfail and not lnkdn or lnkdeactivated
Fail
Link Control Protocol lcploopback and not lcpfail or lnkdn or lnkdeactivated
lcploopback
Loopback
Link Down - Deactiv-
lnkdeactivated lnkdeactivated (no masking)
ated
lnkdn Link Down lnkdn and not lnkdeactivated
A Loopback is active on
loopbackActive loopbackActive and not sgeo or dyinggasp
port
A request for EFM-OAM
loopbackRequest remote Loopback is loopbackRequest and not sgeo or dyinggasp
received.
MACSec Flow
keyExchangeFail Key Exchange Failed keyExchangeFail (no masking)
MOBILE MODEM (Not apply to GO102Pro(S) or GO102Pro(SP))
linkdn and not modemnonqualified or nosimcard or
lnkdn Link Down
modemremoved or modemmea
modemmea USB Device Mismatch modemmea and not modemremoved
MODEM Is Not Qual-
modemnonqualified Nonqualified and not Removed
ified
modemremoved MODEM Removed Removed (no masking)
nosimcard No Sim Card nosim andnot modemremoved
NTE11xPro Card
ctneqpt Communication Failure ctneqpt and not eqptremoved or mismatch
eqptflt Equipment Fault eqptflt and not eqptremoved or mismatch
Equipment Does Not
mismatch mismatch and not eqptremoved
Match Provisioning
Equipment Provisioned
eqptremoved eqptremoved (no masking)
But Removed
Key Exchange Pass-
keyxchgpwdmissing keyxchgpwdmissing and not connectguardramcleared
word Missing

728 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Alarm Masking

Table 27: Alarm Masking Rules

Condition Type
Web-based EMS GUI Alarm Rule
SNMP Alarm Name
Alarm Name
ConnectGuard RAM connectguardramcleared and not tamperswitchopen
connectguardramcleared
Cleared
tamperswitchopen Tamper Switch Open tamperswitchopen (no masking)
ram-cleared RAM Cleared ram-cleared (no masking)
testalarm Test Alarm testalarm, (no masking)
NTE11xPro Shelf
overtemp Over Temperature overtemp and not eqptremoved or mismatch
undertemp Under Temperature undertemp and not eqptremoved or mismatch
OF Logical Switch
of-no-connection OF No Connection of-no-connection (no masking)
PSE Port (GO102Pro(SP))
PSE PowerOff Over-
pse-poweroff-overcurrent pse-poweroff-overcurrent (no masking)
current
PSE PowerOff Over-
pse-poweroff-overvoltage pse-poweroff-overvoltage (no masking)
voltage
PSE PowerOff Over-
pse-poweroff-overload pse-poweroff-overload (no masking)
load
PSE PowerOff Over-
pse-poweroff-overtemp pse-poweroff-overtemp (no masking)
temp
pse-poweroff-short PSE PowerOff Short pse-poweroff-short (no masking)
Power Supply (PSU)
ctneqpt Communication Failure ctneqpt and not eqptremoved or mismatch
eqptflt Equipment Fault eqptflt and not eqptremoved or mismatch
Equipment Provisioned
eqptremoved No masking
But Removed
Equipment Does Not
mismatch mismatch and not eqptremoved
Match Provisioning
overtemp Over Temperature overtemp and not eqptremoved or mismatch or eqptflt
Protection Group
Protection Switch -
forced forced (no masking)
Forced
Protection Switch -
lockout lockout (no masking)
Lockout
PTP Clock
syncref Sync Reference Failed syncref (no masking)
qlmismatch Sync QL Mismatch qlmismatch (no masking)
Sync Reference Locked
syncreflck syncreflck (no masking)
Out
Sync Reference Forced
syncreffrc syncreffrc (no masking)
Switch
Sync Reference Manual
syncrefman syncrefman (no masking)
Switch
Sync Reference Wait
syncrefwtr syncrefwtr (no masking)
To Restore
testalarm Test Alarm testalarm (no masking)

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 729

Alarm Masking

Table 27: Alarm Masking Rules

Condition Type
Web-based EMS GUI Alarm Rule
SNMP Alarm Name
Alarm Name
PTP Clock in Fre-
ptpfreqfrun ptpfreqfrun (no masking)
quency Freerun
PTP Clock in Time
ptptimefrun ptptimefrun (no masking)
Freerun
PTP Clock in Fre-
ptpfreqhldovr ptpfreqhldovr (no masking)
quency Holdover
PTP Clock in Time Hol-
ptptimehldovr ptptimehldovr (no masking)
dover
PTP Clock Time Not
ptptimenottraceable ptptimenottraceable (no masking)
Traceable
PTP Clock Frequency
ptpfreqnottraceable ptpfreqnottraceable (no masking)
Not Traceable
PTP Clock Probe
sjtestnomessages SJTEST No Messages sjtestnomessages (no masking)
sjtestnotimestamp SJTEST No Timestamp sjtestnotimestamp (no masking)
sjtestreferencefail SJTEST Reference Fail sjtestreferencefail (no masking)
SJ Constant TE
sjConstTeThrshld sjConstTeThrshld (no masking)
Threshold Exceeded
SJ Instant TE
sjInstTeThrshld sjInstTeThrshld (no masking)
Threshold Exceeded
SJ Max TE Threshold
sjmaxtethrshld sjmaxtethrshld (no masking)
Exceeded
PTP Network Probe
sjtestnomessages SJTEST No Messages sjtestnomessages (no masking)
sjtestreferencefail SJTEST Reference Fail sjtestreferencefail (no masking)
PTP Port
announcetimeout Announce Timeout announcetimeout (no masking)
Delay Response
delayresptimeout delayresptimeout (no masking)
Timeout
multiplepeers Multiple Peers multiplepeers (no masking)
synctimeout Sync TimeOut synctimeout (no masking)
testalarm Test Alarm testalarm (no masking)
wrongdomain Wrong Domain wrongdomain (no masking)
SAT Responder Session
rmtInitSat Remote Initiated SAT rmtInitSat (no masking)
Secure Flow
key-xchg-failed Key Exchange Failed ram-cleared
SOOC
ptsflossofannounce PTSF - Loss Announce ptsflossofannounce (no masking)
ptsflossofsync PTSF - Loss Sync ptsflossofsync (no masking)
ptsfunusable PTSF - Unusable ptsfunusable (no masking)
Synchronization
All Input Sync Refer-
allsyncref allsyncref (no masking)
enced Failed

730 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Alarm Masking

Table 27: Alarm Masking Rules

Condition Type
Web-based EMS GUI Alarm Rule
SNMP Alarm Name
Alarm Name
Average Holdover Fre-
avghldovrfrqnotrdy avghldovrfrqnotrdy (no masking)
quency Not Ready
Sys Clock Mode - Fast
fstsync fstsync (no masking)
Acquisition
Sys Clock Mode -
frngsync frngsync (no masking)
Freerunning
Sys Clock Mode - Hol-
hldovrsync hldovrsync (no masking)
dover
Sys Clock Mode - Loss
losloc losloc (no masking)
of Lock
Time Reference
timeRefDegraded timeRefDegraded (no masking)
Degraded
Time Reference
timeRefDegradedWTR timeRefDegradedWTR (no masking)
Degraded Wtr
Time Reference Forced
timeRefFrc timeRefFrc (no masking)
Switch
Time Reference Locked
timeRefLock timeRefLock (no masking)
Out
Time Reference
timeRefUnavailable timeRefUnavailable (no masking)
Unavailable
Time Reference
timeRefUnavailableWTR timeRefUnavailableWTR (no masking)
Unavailable Wtr
System
Backup NTP Server
bckupntpsvrFailed bckupntpsvrFailed (no masking)
Failed
dataExportFtpFail DataExport FTP Fail dataExportFtpFail (no masking)
Database - File Transfer
db-ftip db-ftip (no masking)
In Progress
dbdowngradeip DB Downgrade dbdowngradeip (no masking)
File Transfer In Pro-
gen-filexfer-ip gen-filexfer-ip (no masking)
gress
gen-oper-ip Operation In Progress gen-oper-ip (no masking)
ipaddrconflict IP Address Conflict ipaddrconflict (no masking)
ipv6addrconflict IPv6 Address Conflict (no masking)
ltpFailure LTP failure ltpFailure(no masking)
ltpInprogress LTP In progress ltpInprogress(no masking)
passwordmissing Password Missing ram-cleared
Primary NTP Server
primntpsvrFailed primntpsvrFailed (no masking)
Failed
SNMP Dying Gasp -
snmpdghostresourcesbusy snmpdghostresourcesbusy (no masking)
Resource Busy
SNMP Dying Gasp -
snmpdghostunresolved snmpdghostunresolved (no masking)
Host Unreachable
SWDL - Activation In
swdl-actip swdl-actip (no masking)
Progress

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 731

Alarm Masking

Table 27: Alarm Masking Rules

Condition Type
Web-based EMS GUI Alarm Rule
SNMP Alarm Name
Alarm Name
SWDL - File Transfer In
swdl-ftip swdl-ftip (no masking)
Progress
SWDL - Installation In
swdl-instip swdl-instip (no masking)
Progress
SWDL - Validation In
swdl-valip swdl-valip (no masking)
Progress
trafficArpTableFull Traffic ARP Table Full trafficArpTableFull (no masking)
Telecom Slave
allsoocsfailed All SOOCs Failed allsoocsfailed (no masking)
freqoff Frequency Offset freqoff (no masking)
sjnofreqlock SJ No Frequency Lock sjnofreqlock (no masking)
sjnotimelock SJ No Time Lock sjnotimelock (no masking)
qlinvalid Sync QL Invalid qlinvalid (no masking)
qlmismatch Sync QL Mismatch qlmismatch and not qlinvalid
syncref Sync Reference Failed syncref (no masking)
Sync Reference Forced
syncreffrc syncreffrc (no masking)
Switch
Sync Reference Locked
syncreflck syncreflck (no masking)
Out
Sync Reference Manual
syncrefman syncrefman (no masking)
Switch
Sync Reference Wait
syncrefwtr syncrefwtr (no masking)
To Restore
Telecom Slave In
tsfreerun tsfreerun (no masking)
Freerun
Telecom Slave In
tsholdover tsholdover (no masking)
Holdover
Telecom Slave In Time
tsintimefreerun (no masking)
Freerun
Telecom Slave In Time
tsintimehldovr (no masking)
Holdover
Recovered Clock Not
tsholdoverfrqnotready tsholdoverfrqnotready (no masking)
Holdover Quality
Time Clock
freq-offset Frequency Offset freq-offset (no masking)
ql-mismatch Sync QL Mismatch ql-mismatch and not sync-ql-invalid
sync-ql-invalid Sync QL Invalid sync-ql-invalid (no masking)
syncref Sync Reference Failed syncref (no masking)
Sync Reference Forced
syncref-forced-switch syncref-forced-switch (no masking)
Switch
Sync Reference Locked
syncref-locked-out syncref-locked-out (no masking)
Out
Sync Reference Manual
syncref-manual-switch syncref-manual-switch (no masking)
Switch
Sync Reference Wait
syncref-wtr syncref-wtr (no masking)
To Restore

732 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Alarm Masking

Table 27: Alarm Masking Rules

Condition Type
Web-based EMS GUI Alarm Rule
SNMP Alarm Name
Alarm Name
Time Frequency Not
time-freq-not-traceable timeFreqNotTraceAble (no masking)
Traceable
time-holdover time Holdover timeHoldOver (no masking)
time-not-traceable Time Not Traceable timeNotTraceAble (no masking)
timeClockNotLocked Time Clock Not Locked timeClockNotLocked (no masking)
Traffic IP Interface
ipaddrconflict IP Address Conflict ipaddrconflict (no masking)
Traffic IP Interface
trafficipifoutage trafficipifoutage (no masking)
Outage
WiFi Dongle (Not Apply to GO102Pro(S) or GO102Pro(SP))
modemmea USB Device Mismatch modemmea, not modemremoved
USB Device Is Not
modemnonqualified modemnonqualified, not modemremoved
Qualified
modemremoved USB Device Removed modemremoved (no masking)
VXLAN Segment (GE11xPro series)
VXLAN DMAC2DIP
vxlanDMac2DIPTableFull vxlanDMac2DIPTableFull (no masking)
Table Full
VXLAN Tunnel End Point
noActiveRoute No Active Route noActiveRoute (no masking)

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 733

Error Codes and System Responses

Error Codes and System Responses

This table lists the error codes and the associated definitions or responses. The _why_
attribute is a response string that is defined by the system software. All possible _why_
responses are listed under the “Where Why is:” when an error code can have multiple
responses. Before the response is sent to the user the error codes are mapped based on
the message type. Each group of error codes is sorted by a system condition or type.
Error Codes and Definitions

Error Code Response

GENERAL SYSTEM CONDITIONS
0 Operation completed successfully.
1 Unknown error.
2 Mei application shutdown failed.
3 File _filename_ does not exist
4 No Response _from_
5 User _username_ is locked out.
6 User _username_ is not logged in.
7 User _username_ locked out - _loginnum_ unsuccessful login attempts.
8 User _username_ locked out.
Remote User Login failed: _why_

Where Why is:

9 Athentication failed

Radius setup failed

Invalid password
ENTITY CONDITIONS
256 Entity does not exist.
257 Entity already exists.
258 Next child entity does not exist.
259 Set operation is not supported.
260 Create operation is not supported.
261 Delete operation is not supported.
262 _actiontype_ operation is not supported.
263 Get variable objects operation is not supported.
264 Maximum (_maxnum_) number of _entityname_ entities has been reached.
265 Total _rsrc_ resource amount of _totalval_ exceeds max limit of _maxval_
Invalid EID: _why_

Where Why is:

266
Protection Group Id must be 1

Value (xxx) out of range

734 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Error Codes and System Responses

Error Code Response

IP address _ipaddr_/_mask_ of interface _if_ overlaps with address of interface _overlapif_

Invalid EID: _why_

Where Why is:

Id cannot be 0
267 Protection Group Id must be 1

Value (xxx) out of range

TrafficIpInterface does not exists

Traffic IP Interface number in Traffic IP Interface’s Eid should not exceed the maximum
number of Traffic IP Interface (xxx).
Operation denied: _why_

Create denied: _why_

Delete denied: _why_

Edit denied: _why_

268
Retrieve denied: _why_

Action denied: _why_

Where Why is:

System in Db Maintenance Mode

Operation denied: _why_

Create denied: _why_

Delete denied: _why_

Edit denied: _why_

269
Retrieve denied: _why_

Action denied: _why_

Where Why is:

Object is transient

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 735

Error Codes and System Responses

Error Code Response

Operation denied: _why_

Create denied: _why_

Delete denied: _why_

Edit denied: _why_

Retrieve denied: _why_

Action denied: _why_

Where Why is:

(EID) MD name causes MA ID length to exceed limit (xxx MIN... yyy MAX)

(EID) Probe's Source MEP(eid2) is in [xxx] state

(xxx) belongs to (yyy) but has different A2N Shaping Type

(xxx) belongs to (yyy) but has different EVC Type

(xxx) belongs to (yyy) but has different Multi COS Enabled

(xxx) belongs to (yyy) but has different Network Interfaces

(xxx) does not have enough tags for ConnectGuard Secure Flow

(xxx) does not bind with Clock

(xxx) Flow Points are allowed

271 - 275
(xxx) not supported on CP unit return

(xxx) is a lag member port

(xxx) is a member of (yyy) - VID

(xxx) is associated with (yyy)

(xxx) is associated with Management Address Entity of (yyy)

(xxx) is in the Synchronization Reference List, a port in the reference selector list cannot be
unassigned

(xxx) is not applicable for Port-Based EVC

(xxx) is not applicable for N2A COS Priority when ITAG control is not (yyy)

(xxx) is not applicable when C-Bit Parity is disabled

(xxx) is not applicable when frame format is (yyy)

(xxx) is not applicable when Management Tunnel is not on Network port

(xxx) is not Ethernet Traffic Port

(xxx) is not supported for UNTAGGED frames

(xxx) is used by IPV4 PROXY ARP ENTRY

(xxx) is used by IPV4 STATIC ARP ENTRY

736 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Error Codes and System Responses

Error Code Response

Where Why is:

(xxx) is used by IPV4 STATIC ROUTE

(xxx) has been set as Sync Reference Source

(xxx) has no members

(xxx) has no Remote MEP

(xxx) L3 Flow Points exist, exceed (yyy)

(xxx) state is not support on CP Unit

(xxx) static traffic routes per VRF are allowed

(xxx) Traffic ARP Entries exist, exceed (yyy)

(xxx) VRFs exist, exceed (yyy)

A member in the VID list (xxx) matches the primary vid of vlan entry [eid]

A MEP exists with associated component ID

Another PM Data File Uploading is in progress

An egress interface can only has (xxx) Secure Flows

An Ethernet port with speed configured as (xxx) cannot be added to the reference selector list

271 - 275 An Ethernet port with SyncE mode disabled cannot be added to the reference selector list

(Continued) AIS client MD level (xxx) must be greater than MEP MD level of (yyy)

AS generation cannot be enabled at MD level (xxx)

Antenna Cable Length may be set to value range: 0 ...100

A port can only be added to the reference selector list if its signal direction is input

A port can only be added to the reference selector list if it is assigned

A port in the reference selection list cannot be unassigned

ARP Entries for interfaces other than eth0 exist in the system

Associated MA COMP entity does not exist

Associated Service Flow does not exist (serviceEID)

At least 1 (xxx) must exist on a Flow

At least 1 Policer must exist on a Flow

At least 1 Shaper must exist on a Flow

At least 1 VLAN Member must exist

At least 1 pt_n1_policer must exist on a Flow

At least 1 pt_n2_policer must exist on a Flow

Authentication Protocol cannot be (xxx)

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 737

Error Codes and System Responses

Error Code Response

Where Why is:

Because there is a Y1731 probe (xxx)

Both Primary and Backup server have zero IP addresses

Build Shadow Tree failed

Cannot change authentication protocol when remote users exist

Cannot change BMAC when the port is in a LAG member port

Cannot create (xxx) flow with VLAN members

Cannot delete a scheduled probe

Cannot delete an active reflector

Cannot delete Dynamic ARP Entry

Cannot disable both Stag and Ctag for VLAN-based Tunnel

Cannot edit Network port 2

Cannot edit Protecting Port attributes

Cannot enable both Stag and Ctag for ITAG-based Tunnel

Cannot enable ITAG for Non ITAG BASED Tunnel

271 - 275 Cannot enable QL mode if Admin Sate is set to unassigned
(Continued) Cannot enable QL Mode unless SyncE Mode is also enabled

Cannot enable SyncE on a port with speed of 10Mbps

Cannot enable SyncE if any network port has speed of 10Mbps

Cannot have both Primary and Backup server's IP addresses set to zero

Cannot mix IPv4 and IPv6 streams

Cannot modify A2N shaping type if the flow is not in UNASSIGNED state

Cannot modify A2N shaping type if the flow is not port-based

Changing Service Type and Admin State is not allowed in one operation. Admin

Cannot not suspend an active reflector

Cannot resume a reflector that is not suspended

Cannot resume a schedule that is not suspended

Cannot start non-suspended schedule

Cannot stop non-active schedule

Cannot suspend non-active schedule

Cannot unassign a port if the port is provisioned as Ring Port 0 ""or Ring Port 1 of an ERP
instance

738 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Error Codes and System Responses

Error Code Response

Where Why is:

Can't reopen System Default Db

Can’t set DHCP option enable when DHCP is disable

Card (xxx) found in slot

Clock Probe belongs to an active schedule (xxx)

Destination MAC Control is not enabled

Flow Point’s VLAN parameters do not match (xxx)

Flow Point’s VLAN parameters do no match the associated service flow

Flow Point’s VLAN Priority cannot be set to wildcard

For (xxx) with SourceMACControl = Disabled, DestinationMACControl = Disabled and

SwapSADA = None, the block control should be enabled

FreqRecoveryTarget not in valid range

For (xxx), the block control should be enabled

If PPS is output state and source id is PTP Clock, it’s not allowed to delete the PTP Clock

If TOD Source id is PTP Clock, it’s not allowed to delete the PTP Clock

271 - 275 Incompatible (xxx) card for (yyy) slot

(Continued) Inner VLAN Tag enabled without Outer VLAN Tag enabled

Inner VLAN Tag cannot be enabled with Outer ITag enabled

Inserting AIS is done on (xxx)

Interface (name) cannot be set to (dhcprole) role when Management Traffic Bridging is enabled

Internal error - unable to allocate resource

Internal error - unable to allocate VLAN entry resources

Internal error - unable to release resource

Internal error - unable to release VLAN entry resources

Invalid hex number

Invalid MAC address

Invalid MAC-INTEGER format

Invalid name format: (xxx)

Invalid primary vid

Invalid priority for (xxx)

IP Address must be unique across all IP Interfaces in the system

Ipv6 RA Prefix Length range is 1 ... 64

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 739

Error Codes and System Responses

Error Code Response

Where Why is:

ITAG Control is not NONE on (xxx)

Invalid primary vid - must be 0, component primary vid or must be from the vlan table

Invalid Source MEP direction (xxx). Only UP MEPs allowed.

IP Interface starting with ppp is reserved for system functions

IP Management Tunnel is not allowed on Network Port 2 if it is not an independent Network

port

IP is all 0 for nexthop route

Ipv6 Forward can’t be set when Stateless Address Auto Configuration is enabled on any
interface

Ipv6 Forward can’t be set when ISATAP is created in any interface

ITAG is not allowed to coexist with CTAG or STAG

ITAG is not allowed when JDSU loopback is enabled on (xxx)

Management Traffic Bridging is enabled

(loopbacktype) is not available when a Management Tunnel is on (xxx) whose working path is
(yyy) and Management Traffic Bridging is enabled
271 - 275
ITAG is not allowed when JDSU loopback is enabled on (xxx)
(Continued)
ITAG is not allowed when Access Interface Learning Confront is enabled

ITAG is not allowed when Network Interface Learning Control is enabled

(itagctrltype) is not supported

ITAG ID of (xxx) conflicts with ITAG ID of (yyy)

ITAG ID (*) of (xxx) conflicts with ITAG ID (*) of (yyy)

JDSU Loopback Control cannot be enabled when the port is in (xxx)

JDSU Loopback Control is enabled on (xxx)

LAG member (xxx) does not belong to unit

LLF Trigger has duplicate values

LLF triggers are not supported on service based down MEP

Loopback already exists

Loopback is active on (xxx), both member ports of protection group cannot change media type

Loopback is active on Port

(loopbackconfig) is not available when a Management Tunnel is on the port and

MAC address is Broadcast

740 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Error Codes and System Responses

Error Code Response

Where Why is:

MAC address is NULL

MA COMP's (eid) Primary VID (xxx) cannot be in VID list

Management port (portid) (name) cannot be in (xx) state when Management Traffic Bridging is
enabled

Management Traffic Bridging must be enabled when Management Traffic

Management Traffic Bridging cannot be enabled when Proxy ARP is enabled

MA name is too long

MA NET Name should be set when changing the MA NET format

MA primary VID cannot be a VID member in VLAN table

Management prot (portid) (name) cannot have Fixed Speed and Half-Duplex mode (portspeed)
when Management Traffic Bridging Security is enabled

MA name causes MA ID length to exceed limit (xxx MIN... yyy MAX)

MA Name format cannot be set to (xxx) when MD Name format is set to (yyy)

MAC-Based Management Tunnel cannot be created when Management Traffic Bridging is

271 - 275 enabled

(Continued) Management Tunnel Buffer Size must be at least (xxx KB)

Management Tunnel cannot be created when Terminal Loopback is on the port and
Management Traffic Bridging is enabled

Max MEP count exceeded

Management Tunnel CIR must be at least (xxx) bps

Management Tunnels exist in the system

Management Tunnel with (encapsulationtype) encapsulation cannot exist when Management

Tunnel Bridging is enabled

MEP at level (xxx MAX) cannot generate AIS

MEP at this MD level already exists for the primary VID

MEP ID (xxx) is not in the MEP list of MA Network

MEP ID (xxx) not found in the list

Multicast DA is not CFM multicast

MultiCOS not allowed for port level Source MEP (xxx)

MANET Name cannot be empty

MANET Name should be set when changing the MANET format

Manual Etherjack Diagnostics currently in progress

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 741

Error Codes and System Responses

Error Code Response

Where Why is:

Master IP Address must not be MCI’s Master IP Address when PTP FlowPoint is Monitoring

Max MEP count exceeded for the primary VID

Max MEP count exceeded for the port

Maximum (xxx) L3 Flow Points are allowed

Maximum (xxx) VRFs are allowed

Maximum MA name length supported in (xxx) is (yyy)

Maximum management bandwidth (xxx bps) exceeded (yyy bps remaining)

Members List and Tag Control cannot be modified when EVC is associated with PTP Flow
Point, Transparent Clock or SOOC

MD Name cannot be empty

MD Name cannot be greater than (xxx MAX)

system

MD Name cannot be set when MD name format is NONE

MD Name format cannot be set to (xxx) when (eid) Name format is set to ICC format

MD Name is not set

(271-275)
MD Name should be set when changing the MD format
(Continued)
N2A Rate Limiting is disabled

N2N Forwarding can be enabled only if Network Interface is ERP

Neither CIR nor EIR provisioned

No available resources since there are (xxx) Clock Probes configured

Not allowed to enabled OpenFlow if the port is configured with EPL mode

Not allowed to enable OpenFlow if this port is a member of LAG

Not allowed to enable OpenFlow if this port is a member of protection group

Not allowed to enable OpenFlow if there is MAC based management tunnel associated with
this port

Network Interface cannot be a ERP when Itag Control is (xxx)

Network interface learning control is not one of NONE or MAC-BASED

Not allowed to disable Open Flow if any OFFlow is associated with this port as Ingress port or
Egress port

No VID based MEP can be created on network port 2

Not allowed to modify the Configured Speed when this port is OpenFlow enabled

Not allowed to configure the Configured Speed as Auto when this port is OpenFlow enabled

742 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Error Codes and System Responses

Error Code Response

Where Why is:

NE already accepted

Neither CIR nor EIR provisioned

Network clock type may be set onlty via Sync

Network Interface cannot be a SHG when PBB Frames is enabled

Network Interface cannot be a ERP when PBB Frames is enabled

Network Interface cannot be a SHG when Itag Control is (xxx)

Only 2 Management Tunnels at most can be active

Only COS_0 allowed for port level Source MEP (xxx)

Number of Max Static Slave supported is higher than number of total slaves

PBB Frames is enabled on (xxx)

PBB frame is not applicable to Regular EVC

Not allowed to remove member port when JDSU Loopback is enabled on the LAG

NTP client is enabled

One existing route has same destination and metric

(271-275)
Only COPPER port available
(Continued)
Only one MA COMP can be created under an MA Network

Only one MEP allowed under this MA Network

OAM is disabled on port

Only 1 (xxx) flow may exist on port

Only 1 (xxx) pass-through flow may exist on NE

Only 1 Probe with Packet Interval less than 100 ms is allowed

Only 2 Management Tunnels are most can be active

Only down MEP is allowed on network ports

Only one port based down MEP can be created on a port

Only fully provisioned Telecom Slave can be “Reference for SyncJack Probe”

Only fully provisioned Telecom Slave can be “Source for SyncJack Probe”

Only fully provisioned Telecom Slave can be “System Time Of Day PTP Clock”

Only fully provisioned Telecom Slave can be System Time of Day PTP Clock

Only init/suspended/completed schedule can be deleted

Only Telecom Slave can be PTP Clock

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 743

Error Codes and System Responses

Error Code Response

Where Why is:

Operation denied: FLOW-1-1-1-6-1 is the Component ID of CFM MACOMP-1-1-1 (xxx).

Operation not allowed in current state

Out of range. Enter a 2 byte integer

Please generate PM data file first

Port speed of 10 Mbps requires SyncE to be disabled on all network ports

Preserve STag properties is allowed only if STag Control is SWAPVID

Proxy ARP cannot be enabled when Management Traffic Bridging is enabled

PTP Flow Point Edit was not specified

Please point out which port should be switched

Port based Down MEP with more than 1 remote MEP is not supported

Port based Up MEP is now allowed on network ports

Port does not exist for (xxx)

Port is a FROM PORT of Network Element (xxx)

Port (xxx) is SHG member

(271-275)
Port (xxx) is provisioned as SYNCREF
(Continued)
Port OAM is enabled

Port QL Mode is enabled

Port Rx Pause is enabled

Port based Up MEP is not allowed on access ports

Port Level Up MEP and VID level Up MEP cannot exist together on the same port

PTP Clock (xxx) is provisioned as SYNCREF

PTP Clock (xxx) is provisioned as source or reference for clock probe

PTP Clock (xxx) is provisioned as reference for clock probe

PTP Clock Probe result is assigned to scheduler

Primary vid [xxx] found in the VID list of [eid]

Primary VID cannot be in the VID list

Primary VID MANET name is not same as MACOMP primary VID (xxx)

Probe is single-COS

Probe source IP and destination IP cannot be same

Probe source IP and destination IP must be in same subnet

744 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Error Codes and System Responses

Error Code Response

Where Why is:

Protecting port is in Sync Reference list

Protection Group does not exist for port

PTP Clock Eid must be set as Telecom Slave or Time Clock

PTP Clock Eid must be set as Telecom Slave when “System Time Of Day” is PTP CLOCK

PTP CLOCK Eid must be set as Time Clock when “System Time Of Day” Type is TIME
CLOCK

PtpFlowpointEid was not specified

Protection Switching is not supported in (xxx) mode

PTP Access Flow Point’s parent port must be the same as Service Flow’s parent

PTP Clock Eid must be set when System Time of Day is PTP Clock

PtpFlowpointEid not specified

PtpFlowpointEid does not exist

PTP Network Probe belongs to an active schedule (xxx)

Reference and Source inputs cannot be the same

(271-275) Reference must be the same for all PTP Clock Probes

(Continued) ReferenceEid must be the same for all PtpProbes

Reflector IP Address cannot overlap PTP IP Interfaces

Reflector IP Address cannot overlap TWAMP IP Interfaces

Regeneration currently in progress

Routes for interfaces other than eth0 exist in the system

Service Flow is associated with other PTP Flow Point

SFTP can not be set to enabled, when trying to disable SSH

Shaped speed greater than Configured speed

Shaped speed cannot be 0

Shaper is used by Policer (xxx)

Shaping Type should be PORT-BASED

Should not modify CTag/ITag/STag Control when the flow is associated with CFM MACOMP

Slave IP Address must not be SOOC’s Slave IP Address when PTP Flow Point is Monitoring

SOAM frame interval and DMM frame interval are both required to be set.

SOAM frame size and DMM frame size are both required to be set.

Source IP Address cannot overlap PTP IP Interfaces

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 745

Error Codes and System Responses

Error Code Response

Where Why is:

Source MAC Control is not enabled

Source MEP does not exist

Source MEP (yyy) does not belong to the Source Port (xxx)

Specified MAC address is invalid

Specified Source MEP is already used by (xxx)

SSH can not be set to disabled, when trying to enable SFTP

instance

Stateless address auto configuration is enabled, cannot set default gateway

Switch Action is not supported in (xxx) mode

Swap SA-DA must be (xxx) for EFM OAM Loopbacks

quotation marks, semicolon(;) and pound(#)

Same Source and Reference Eid (xxx)

SAT Test does not support the Port based Down MEP

(271-275) SAT Responder cannot be enabled when the MEP is associated with the probe

(Continued) Secret cannot contain spaces

Security level of the user (xxx) is (yyy)

Service Flow associated with PTP Flow Point must be In-Service

Slave IP Address must not be SOOC’s Slave IP Address when PTP Flow Point is Monitoring

Source IP Address cannot overlap with PTP IP Interface

Static Route exist on correlated IP Interface

Static route on the VRF associated with (xxx)

SW Version Not Approved

Swap SA-DA must be (xxx) for EFM OAM loopbacks

Sync Not Ready

System in Db Maintenance Mode

Target Address has already existed for IP (xxx) on (yyy)

TargetPhaseRecoverryAccuracy should be in range 1 - 100,000

Telecom Slave cannot be the system TOD Source if the clock recovery mode is one-way

The combination tags of Outer VLAN Tags and Inner VLAN Tags are not unique

The NE shall not allow deleting default OF Queue

746 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Error Codes and System Responses

Error Code Response

Where Why is:

The NE shall not allow OF Meter deletion if it is used by some OFFlow

The port should not be associated with AMP

The port should not be associated with SyncJack Probe

The port should not be the network interface of (xxx)

The port should not be the source port of the ECPA Test

The port should not have any L3 Flow Point

The port should not have any SYNC reference on port

The port should not have any TWAMP entity

The port should not have management tunnel on port

The file name must be 1-32 characters long, must have only a-z, A-Z, 0-9, (.), - and _, but can
not be (.) or (..)

The IP Mode cannot be changed after the Ipv6OverIpv4 Tunnel is created,

The mep is enabled for SAT responder, thus, cannot be referred by probe

The port should not be a lag member port

The port should not be a member port of a protection group

(271-275)
The port should not be a SHG member

The port should not be in loopback active state

The port should not be provisioned as Ring Port 0 or Ring Port 1 of an ERP

There are MEP entries for this MA

The user crypto cannot be removed

The source MEP is already used by SAT Stream

The source MEP is already used by SAT Responder

Telecom Slave cannot be a reference to Time Clock if it is not fully provisioned

Test not active

Test stream not active

The a2n shaping type is not flow-based

The combination of Outer Vlan Tags and Inner Vlan Tags is not unique

The default Priority Mapping Profile Entry cannot be deleted

The default Priority Mapping Profile Entry cannot be modified

The File description is invalid, length of string is 0-127 and can't contains double quotation
marks “ “, semicolon(;) and pound (#)

The Interface doesn’t support Ipv6

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 747

Error Codes and System Responses

Error Code Response

Where Why is:

The name of the Priority Mapping Profile should not be empty

The name of the Priority Mapping Profile should not be (xxx)

The name of the Priority Mapping Profile is same with (xxx)

The port should not have any CFM entity on it

The port should not have any ESM entity on it

The port should not have any esa object

The port should not have any evc

The port should not have any IP Management Tunnel on it

The port should not have any SYNC reference on port

The port should not have MGMT Tunnel on port

The PTP Flowpoint creation on the Network Port 2 is denied if it is not an independent
Network Port

There are MACOMP entries for this MA

There are MA Network entries for this MD

(271-275) There is a Y1731 probe (xxx)

There is already one Ipv6OverIpv4 Tunnel in the system

The Shaping Type of the flow is PORT-BASED

The static default route already exists

The Untagged flag must be Disabled, when Vlan is set

This entity has an active ESA Probe (xxx)

This MEP (xxx) is associated with a Y.1731 Probe (yyy).

This management tunnel cannot be deleted when an AMP client is enabled on

This will cause MIPs limit to exceed

This object cannot be deleted

Tunnel already exists on (xxx)

Tunnel index must be from 1 to 255

Tunnel IP address is being used as system source IP address

Tunnel IP address is being used by SNMP v1 trap PDU

Two vlan entries cannot have the same VID list for the same port

Unassigned Time Clock cannot be “System Time Of Day Time Clock”

748 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Error Codes and System Responses

Error Code Response

Where Why is:

VID list cannot be empty

VLAN member (xxx) already exists at position (xxx)

VLAN member (xxx) does not exist

VPN OUI out of range (0 .. 0xFFFFFF)

VID member (xxx)

VID member (xxx) is used by (yyy)

When A2N PBB Frames is enabled, th combination of CTAG control and STAG control are
just allowed (NONE, NONE) and (PUSH, PUSH)
(271-275)
When A2N PBB Frames is enabled, the Untagged Frames must be enabled.

When ITAG control is set, ITAG ID must be provisioned with a non-zero value.

When the Flow has pushed S-Tag, the Outer Vlan Ethertype must be 0x88a8When the Flow
has pushed C-Tag, the Outer Vlan Ethertype must be ox8100

Two vlan entries cannot have the same VID list for the same port

USM Security Name used by Target Parameter

Valid Until date is in the past

Valid Until date is out of range allowed

Value DEFER is not allowed for MD MHF Creation Control

VID list contains duplicate entries

VID list size exceeds the maximum of [MaxVlanMbrs] including the Primary VID
276 Attribute values are inconsistent
277 _entityname_ does not exist

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 749

Error Codes and System Responses

Error Code Response

Invalid Admin State: _why_

Where Why is:

(xxx) not valid for entity.

(xxx) state is not supported

A port in the reference selector list cannot be unassigned

Admin State is in (xxx) state

278
Admin State is not in (xxx) state

Cannot enable QL mode if AdminState is set to unassigned

Entity (xxx) is in (xxx) state

Parent state (xxx) higher than (yyy)

Port must (xxx) to change service type

Port state (xxx) higher than (yyy)

Invalid Loopback configuration: _why_

Where Why is:

(xxx) is currently active on this port

(xxx) Loopback cannot have Vlans enabled

279
(xxx) must have at least one Vlan enabled

Loopback config not supported for OAM passive mode.

OAM mode is (xxx)

Swap SA-DA must be (xxx) for EFM OAM Loopbacks

Invalid ECPA test configuration: _why_

Where Why is:

Mixed vlan and non-vlan streams in test configuration

280
More than one test stream set for non vlan tag test (xxx)

Total stream rate (xxx) exceeds port speed

Injector direction (xxx) and Monitor direction (yyy)

Data not available for _entityeid_: _why_

Where Why is:

281 Admin State is UNASSIGNED

PM Thresholds not supported

PM not monitored on CP Flow

750 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Error Codes and System Responses

Error Code Response

Port _entityeid_ is not eligible to be put in selector reference list: _why_

Where Why is:

A port can only be added to the reference selector list if it is assigned

282
An Ethernet port with speed configured as (xxx) cannot be added to the reference selector list

An Ethernet port with SyncE mode disabled cannot be added to the reference selector list

It is already present in the list

ATTRIBUTE SPECIFIC
Invalid value: _why_

Where Why is:

(xxx) already used by user (yyy)

(xxx) ARP route can be created

(xxx) can be set only for protocol belonging to protocol group

(xxx) cannot be set

(xxx) C-Tag Control option is not applicable when service type is (yyy)

(xxx) doesn’t have one of the following valid tag control configurations: 1.
STagControl=PUSH, CTagControl=NONE;[Link]=NONE, CTagControl=PUSH;
[Link]=NONE, CTagControl=PUSHVID (yyy)

(xxx) flow need to be MultiCOS enabled

(xxx) flow with UNTAGGED support need to have different COS level support

(xxx) has more than 1 Remote MEP

512
(xxx) has no Remote MEPs

(xxx) has non-zero EIR

(xxx) is already scheduled in (yyy)

(xxx) is already used by (yyy)

(xxx) is already in the member list of (yyy)

(xxx) is currently active on this port

(xxx) is different than USM user (yyy)

(xxx) is in a lag

(xxx) is not available, should be a traffic IP interface

(xxx) is not applicable to EPL port

(xxx) is not valid value

(xxx) is not valid when it is in a protection group

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 751

Error Codes and System Responses

Error Code Response

Where Why is:

(xxx) is the last Superuser

(xxx) not available

(xxx) not available for (yyy) speed

(xxx) not supported by (yyy)

(xxx) not supported for Service Mode (yyy) (IPort Mode)

(xxx) not supported for UNTAGGED frames

(xxx) not supported on CP unit

(xxx) Out Of Range (xxx MIN...yyy MAX)

(xxx) requires valid address/mask

(xxx) speed not supported on (yyy)

(xxx) state is not supported

A port in the reference selector list cannot be unassigned

A Reference entity must Access, Network or BitsIn port

512 Address cannot be broadcast, multicast, or begin with 0.

Address cannot be (xxx)

Address cannot be broadcast

Address cannot be broadcast, mutlicast or all 0's.

Address cannot be experimental address

Address cannot be Loopback

Address cannot be loopback, broadcast, multicast, or begin with 0

Address cannot be multicast

Address cannot begin with 0

Address is not a valid unicast address

An Access Port cannot have a combination of Access Port UP MEP and Service UP MEP.

An Ethernet port in the reference selector list cannot be configured as (xxx)

An Ethernet port with SyncE mode disabled cannot be added to the reference selector list

A port can only be added to the reference selector list if it is assigned

A port can only be added to the reference selector list if its signal direction is input

752 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Error Codes and System Responses

Error Code Response

Where Why is:

Attribute missing - authentication key

Attribute missing - authentication protocol

Because Service type is in (xxx) mode

Bin index = (xxx) not in range

Cannot be empty

Cannot configure (xxx) loopback type

Cannot create (xxx) flow

Cannot create (xxx) flow with VLAN members

Cannot enable QL Mode because the port configuration does not support SSM

Cannot enable QL Mode unless SyncE Mode is also enabled

Cannot enable SVlan on (xxx)

Cannot enable SyncE on a port with speed of 10Mbps

Cannot set Administrative State to Maintenance/Disabled

512 Cannot set name to empty string

(continued) Community (xxx) used by Target Parameter (yyy)

Component does not exist for (xxx)

Component ID - must be access port or network port

Crypto password accept alphabetic and numeric characters only, and case insensitive

Current Network Clock Type does not support this QL value

Data TLV exceeds the allowed maximum of (xxx MIN... yyy MAX)

Delay must be (xxx MIN... yyy MAX)

DHCP client is enabled on (xxx)

DHCP server already enabled on other interface

Disposition cannot be set to (xxx)

Distrubution History Bin index = (xxx) not in range

DMM Frame Size of (xxx) exceeds the MTU (yyy)

Domain number out of range, should be from 0 to 255

Duplicate VLAN member (xxx) at positions (yyy) and (zzz)

For traffic IP interface, DHCP Role can only be Client Type.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 753

Error Codes and System Responses

Error Code Response

Where Why is:

Dying Gasp is already enabled for IP (xxx) on Target Address (yyy)

Empty string

Ether type can only be (0X88a8) or (0X8100)

Filename is empty

Filename must begin with digit or alphabet letter

Flows with UNTAGGED support need to be MultiCOS enabled

For TOS should not be higher than (xxx MAX)

Gateway address is not a valid unicast address

Given IP address is not valid

Given IP mask is not valid

History Bin index = (xxx) not in valid range

ID (xxx) already used by (yyy)

ID must be 1

512 Illegal network mask (xxx)

(continued) In DHCP Server mode mask cannot be [Link] and [Link]

Ingress PUSH PVID change disallowed

Inner VLAN1 cannot be disabled because Inner VLAN2 is enabled

Inner VLAN2 cannot be enabled because Inner VLAN1 is disabled

Inner VLAN Tag enabled without Outer VLAN Tag enabled

Interface Name cannot be empty

Interface Name cannot start with ppp

Interface Name missing

Interface must be eth0 or management tunnel interface

Invalid character

Invalid first character

Invalid character (xxx) at position (yyy)

Invalid engine ID - contains non-hex characters

Invalid engine ID - must be 12 octets long (first bit is 0)

Invalid engine ID - must be 5 to 32 octets long (first bit is 1)

IP Addr Overlaps with other interface

754 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Error Codes and System Responses

Error Code Response

Where Why is:

IP Address already in use by other agent

Invalid engine ID - must be even number of octets

Invalid IP Address

Invalid port

Invalid Port Number

Invalid shelf state - state not supported

Invalid value: MHF Creation should be (xxx) when Component ID is a flow

IP is [Link] for nexthop route

ipaddr: port format required

ITag Control is enabled on (xxx)

It is not allowed that both corresponding flow entries under vlan table and main table are
configured as VLAN ID disabled

It is not allowed to create more than one flow table with the same table id

It is not allowed that OF port is associated to the other physical port except Network port and
Access port
512 It is not allowed that more than two Pop actions in the Action List
(continued) It is not allowed that there are two Pop actions in the Action List under main table apply-action
instruction except single connection

It is not allowed that there is one Pop action in the Action List under Vlan table write-action
instruction

It is not allowed that the specified vlan pcp of flow entry under main table is not equal to
corresponding flow entry under vlan table and the vlan table flow entry does not have specified
pop action but specified vlan pcp

It is not allowed to create unidirectional flow when the in-port between the flow entries under
vlan table and main table are different

Key invalid or not strong enough

Length exceeds limit - must be 1 to (xxx)

LTM Egress ID must be in hexadecimal format

LTM Egress ID must contain 8 octets

Mask must be all [Link] if the gateway is [Link]

Max value cannot be less than min value

Measurement Type may be set only when Source Type is TS

Message processing model (xxx)

Metric must be (0… xxx MAX)

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 755

Error Codes and System Responses

Error Code Response

Where Why is:

Min value exceeds max value

Mixed DOS and UNIX path

More than 1 enabled server has priority

Multicast MAC addresses are not allowed

Multi COS is disabled

Multi-COS flow must have N2A Rate Limiting enabled

Must be disabled for given Line Type

Must have only a-z, A-Z, 0-9, (.), - and _.

Name must be 1- (xxx) characters long and contain only alphanumeric characters

Name must be unique

Negative number

Network Port disposition is set to (xxx)

No upper case characters

512 No lowercase characters

(continued) Not a valid IP address

Not a valid IP mask

NTP is disabled

OF Action Type should be specified

OF Controller IPv4 address is invalid

OF Controller name should be set

OF Controller name is too long and should be 0-(xxx) characters long

OF Meter Flag cannot be (xxx)

OF Port (xxx) does not exist

Only (xxx) ARP entries can be created

Only (xxx) can be created

Only (xxx) IP route can be created

Only 1 (xxx) Flow may exist on Port

Only 1 is allowed as MA COMP index

Only 1 Probe with Packet Interval less than 100 ms is allowed

756 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Error Codes and System Responses

Error Code Response

Where Why is:

Only InService and Management states are valid

Only multicos flow can provision flow based priority mapping profile

Only Up MEP is available when (xxx) is associated with (yyy)

Only Up MEP is supported when CFM MACOMP-1-1-1 Component ID is an Access Port

FLOW-1-1-1-6-1 (xxx)

Option 82 Sub 1 must be Disabled if the interface side of the traffic IP interface is configured
as server

Option 82 Sub 2 must be Disabled if the interface side of the traffic IP interface is configured
as server

Outer VLAN cannot be disabled because Inner VLAN1 is enabled

Out of Range (0...7)

Out of Range (1...100)

Out of Range (xxx MAX)

Out of Range (xxx MIN... yyy MAX)

Password cannot be “password” or “passw0rd”

512 Password contains character sequence

(continued) Password same as username

Password too long

Password too short

Pathname is empty

Periodic schedule cannot have forever duration

Port belongs to different unit.

Port disposition is set to (xxx) or (yyy)

Port does not exist for (xxx)

Port must be Network Port 1

Port service type is (xxx)

Port shaping is disabled

Port speed of 10 Mbps requires SyncE to be disabled

Priority Control should be (xxx) or (yyy)

Priority Out Of Range (xxx MIN… yyy MAX)

Probe's Source MEP

Sample time cannot be more than (xxx) Duration time

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 757

Error Codes and System Responses

Error Code Response

Where Why is:

Protocol cannot be none

QL Mode is enabled; disable QL Mode first

Reference Ethernet Access Port (xxx) must be SyncE Enabled

ReferenceEid (xxx) does not exist

Remote System IP Address cannot be duplicated in any other AMP Configuration

Remote System IP Address cannot be equal to Remote Tunnel IP Address

Remote System IP Address cannot be the same as Remote Tunnel IP Address

ROLLOVER

Route to subnet/host (xxx) already exists

Sample time cannot be more than Duration time

Schedule list contains entity that is not a probe

Schedule list is empty

Schedule type conflicts with other attribute

Secret cannot contain spaces

512 Security Level of user (xxx) is (yyy)

(continued) Selected MEP destination type does not allow to specify ID

Selected MEP destination type does not allow to specify MAC address

Should be between (xxx MIN) and (yyy MAX) (inclusive)

Should be between (xxx MIN) and (yyy MAX) bytes (inclusive)

Should not be higher than (xxx MAX)

SLM/DM frame size is inclusively between 64 and 2000 bytes

Source MEP does not exist

Source cannot be Access/Network Port (xxx) if SyncE is Disabled

Source MEP should be an Up MEP

Source IP already used by a Probe

Source IP already in use by a Reflector

Source/Reference Port (xxx) signal direction cannot be output

Source Type = Frequency is not valid with Telecom Slave as SourceEid (xxx)

Specified IP address is already used by a Probe

Specified IP address is already used by another Reflector

Specified MAC address cannot be of all zeros, multicast or broadcast.

758 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Error Codes and System Responses

Error Code Response

Where Why is:

Specified MAC address is invalid

Specified MEP ID is already in use

Specified name is already in use (xxx) and (yyy)

Specified Source MEP is already used by (xxx)

Specified tag is invalid

Squelch Control can be NEVER, HOLDOVER, LOCK, SQELCH QL

Squelch QL can be edited only if Squelch Control is Squelch QL

Start Time in the past is not allowed

SyncE Mode cannot be disabled because this port is used in the reference selector list

SysLog is disabled

TACACS Default Privilege Level can be: retrieve, maintenance, provisioning, superuser.

Target Parameter (xxx) used by Target Address (yyy)

The Authentication Mode should be (xxx)

The COS of OF Queue conflicts with other OF Queues

512
The Egress Interface should be a network port, a network lag, an erp or a protection group
(continued)
The Interface Name is empty

The length must be 12 to 32

The maximum is 32

The meter ID is meter for controller connection

The minimum rate of OF Queue cannot exceed the maximum rate

The next table of VLAN table only allows going to main table

The next table of main table should be null

The number of Destination MEPs cannot exceed the number of Remote MEPs

The number of traffic IP interfaces in the list exceeds 64

The Queue number (xxx) is reserved for all queues in the port

The vid of the outer tag of (xxx) conflicts with (yyy)

The vid of the outer tag of (xxx) is different from the primary vid of the MACOMP

in MANET

The output port id is not equal to the port id of the Queue associated to the OF Flow

The output port of output action should be specified

The port number is reserved by OF Controller

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 759

Error Codes and System Responses

Error Code Response

Where Why is:

The queue id (xxx) does not exist

There are same traffic ip interface existing in the list

The supported table id is 1 or 10

The table id should be specified

The value cannot be 0x8100 or 0x88a8

Too few digits

To few special characters

Too many consecutively repeated chars

Total provisioned CIR (xxx) bps exceeds port speed (yyy) bps

Total provisioned EIR (xxx) bps exceeds (yyy) bps

Traffic IP Interface (xxx) is the second server configured over (yyy). Only single server is
allowed

Traffic Management cannot be disabled

TS phase signal configuration should be allowed only if TS is configured with Clock recovery
mode set to Two Way
512 Tunnel already exists on (xxx)
(continued) Tunnel index must be from 1 to 255

Unknown interval

Unknown MEP destination type

Unknown Network Clock Type

Unknown priority map mode (xxx)

Unknown protocol type

Unknown/unsupported

Unsupported for given Line Type

Untagged support with (xxx)

Untagged support with (xxx) is disallowed

Username too long

Username too short

USM Security Name (xxx) used by Target Parameter (xxx)

Value must be NONE or PUSH

Value (xxx) out of range

Value (xxx) out of range (xxx MIN… yyy MAX)

760 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Error Codes and System Responses

Error Code Response

Where Why is:

Value not supported for (xxx)

Vendor Class ID/opt60 must be Disabled if the interface side of the traffic IP

interface is configured as server

VLAN member cannot be specified as *-*

512
Vlan members are not supported for Service Mode (xxx)
(continued)
VLAN member range must be of the form m:n-*, where (xxx)

VLAN members must have a single wild card value (xxx)

VLAN Tag is off but tag is specified

Vlan Tags not unique

When the Secure State is (xxx), the flow must be associated with a Secure Flow

Wrong selection measurement type with reference eid (xxx)

513 Mandatory attribute missing.
514 Attribute cannot be set.
515 Attribute not supported
516 Attribute value (xxx) not supported
517 Invalid MAC address.
518 Invalid VLAN tag.
Invalid password: _why_

Where Why is:

519
Key invalid or not strong enough

Password is same as username

520 Invalid IP Address.
521 Invalid Network Mask.
522 Outer VLAN Tag Control must be enabled to enable Inner VLAN Tag Control.
523 _entityname_ does not exist.
Attribute cannot be set _why_

Where Why is:

524
Because maximum (xxx) number of MEP members has been reached

Because Service type is in (xxx) mode

SPECIAL CONDITIONS
768 Card _cardeid_ not present.
769 Request Failed - Higher priority switch outstanding.
770 Request Failed - requested switch already in operation.
771 Request Failed - no user switch in operation.
772 Request Failed - Protection Group creation in progress.
773 Invalid Loopback Configuration Type.
774 ECPA resource is busy.
775 Resource in Use by Loopback.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 761

Error Codes and System Responses

Error Code Response

776 Resource in Use by ECPA Test.
777 Resource in Use by Etherjack Diagnostics.
778 ECPA test is currently in progress.
779 Invalid stream number.
780 Timed loopback with Vlan tag enabled.
781 Non-Vlan loopback with Vlan tag enabled.
782 ECPA test Stop is currently in progress.
783 ECPA test is not active.
784 Loopback is not active.
785 Loopback already exists.
786 EFM OAM loopback exists.
787 Loopback Disabled on Remote Port EFMOAM configuration.
788 Port EFMOAM Administrative State Disabled.
789 Port EFMOAM Disposition Not in Peer.
790 Port EFMOAM mode Not Active.
791 Manual Etherjack Diagnostics currently in progress.
792 Automatic Etherjack Diagnostics currently in progress.
793 Etherjack Diagnostics Type Requested is not Valid.
794 Invalid test config.
795 Port Not in Auto Negotiation.
796 Linktrace is currently active
797 Loopback is currently active
798 Maximum active linktrace sessions reached
799 Maximum active loopback sessions reached
800 Port media is invalid.
801 Operation is not supported.
802 No Linktrace Reply found.
803 Interface not configured.
804 Route to Host/Subnetwork already exists.
805 Invalid Gateway IP Address.
806 Invalid Route Type.
807 Invalid SWDL message
808 Backup file is locked
809 Invalid backup type
810 Database has not been backed up
811 Backup directory is empty
812 Failed to archive files
813 Failed to unarchive files
814 Failed to read directory
815 Transfer in progress
816 Transfer not in progress
817 File Transfer Server Type not supported
818 User id not set
819 Remote host not set
820 Remote file not set
821 Local file not set
822 File Name not set
823 Protocol not set
824 Unsupported protocol

762 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Error Codes and System Responses

Error Code Response

825 Transfer protocol has been disabled
826 Invalid url
827 Transfer canceled
828 Unable to access local file
829 Transfer execute failed
830 Error string returned
831 Bad archive file
832 Error syncing with scu
833 Error processing topology change event
834 SCU push failed
835 Flash erase failed
836 Flash partition sync failed
837 Install Failed
838 Activate Failed
839 Cancel Activate Failed
840 Validate Failed
841 Revert Failed
842 Operation not allowed in current state
843 Invalid Validation Time
844 Invalid Reboot Time
845 Operation not allowed: Database upload in progress
846 Operation not allowed: Database download in progress
847 Operation not allowed: Database backup in progress
848 Operation not allowed: Database restore in progress
849 Operation not allowed: Software download in progress
850 Operation not allowed: Software install in progress
851 Operation not allowed: Software upgrade in progress
852 Operation not allowed: Software validate in progress
853 Operation not allowed: Software cancel-upgrade in progress
854 Operation not allowed: Software revert in progress
855 Operation not allowed: System rebooting
856 Operation not allowed: System software being upgraded
857 Software is incompatible for Network Element
858 Sysdefdb directory is empty
RESOURCE ERRORS
1024 Exhausted Total Number of Policers.
1025 Exhausted Total Number of Queues.
1026 Exhausted Total Number of Memory Segments.
1027 Exhausted Total Number of VLAN Lookups.
1028 Exhausted Total Number of EVC Lookups.
1029 Insufficient bandwidth for CIR/EIR settings.
1280 Rules check failed.
Rules check failed: (_errstr_).
1281 The sum of CIR, SOAM-CIR and SOAM-EIR of PORT N2A SHAPER-(xxx) cannot be greater
than the provisioned speed value 1000000000bps of NETWORK PORT-1-1-1-1
SOFTWARE RELATED
4096 Invalid message qualifier.
4097 Resource is busy.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 763

Error Codes and System Responses

Error Code Response

Database operation failed: _why_

Where Why is:

4098 Db State is not ok

Can't reopen System Default Db

Build Shadow Tree failed

4099 Loading data from database failed.
4100 User transaction does not exist.
4101 User transaction has not been validated.
4102 Request has been timed out.
4103 Transaction id is 0.
4104 Cannot get global system data.
4105 Invalid application event.
4106 No FROM port found for NE.
4107 Configfile operation failed.
Loading data from configfile failed: _why_

Where Why is:

Can't open configfile

4108
_configFileName_failed_command

Init load failed

Login failed
8192 Invalid message received
8193 Invalid user
8194 Unable to update profile
8195 Internal error
8196 Internal error
8197 Internal error - IPC
8198 Internal error
8199 Internal error - EP
8200 Invalid user name received
8201 insufficient privilege level
SNMP SPECIFIC
20480 Attribute is deprecated
20481 VLAN ID is not specified
20482 Invalid Data for Cable Length Benchmark, Required format [Link]

764 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

Provisioning Rules
This chapter provides provisioning rule information for the FSP 150GE11xPro serials.
The following is provided:

l Entity State Descriptions

l User Authorization Privilege Levels
l Configuration Settings, Rules and Dependencies

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 765

Entity State Descriptions

Entity State Descriptions

A state model is maintained for each entity in the system. The state of an entity is derived
from its Administrative State, its Operational State and its Secondary States.

Administration State
There are a number of rules related to the behavior of the Administrative state as it relates
to the parent/child relationship of objects. For example, there are certain states for a child
that are 'invalid' if the parent state is not already in that state. The administrative state
model consists of the following states:

l IS (in-service) - this is the 'normal' state for an entity that is configured to be fully
operational.
l Management - this is referred to as the “Out of Service” state. In this state, all alarms
for the entity will be squelched. Any Standing Alarm will be cleared and re-raised as a
non-alarmed (NA) condition. The intended use of this state is to squelch alarms that
the user is not interested in. In addition, for any 'traffic affecting' provisioning change,
the entity should be put into this state (although there is no enforcement of this
requirement). The additional characteristics associated with this state are that the user
data and management traffic will continue to flow.
l Maintenance - this is ALSO an “Out of Service” state (i.e., it inherits the properties
described above). The additional characteristic associated with this state is that
'maintenance' operations are allowed to be performed against an entity in this state
which may affect user data or management data. Maintenance state operations
include things like Loopback, Etherjack diagnostic, etc.
l Disabled - this is ALSO an “Out of Service” state (i.e., it inherits the properties
described above). The additional characteristic associated with an entity in this state
is that no user data traffic will pass. The intended use of this state is to allow the user
traffic to be 'disabled' while still preserving management connectivity with the entity.
l Unassigned - this state is essentially equivalent to an entity being 'deleted'. An entity
in this state is not factored into any of the rules checking and will not be alarmed or
carry traffic. The Administrative State must first be set to Unassigned state prior to
changing the Service Type of a Network Port or Access Port.

Administration State Model Details

It should be noted that the Management, Maintenance and Disabled states are ALL
members of the “Out-Of-Service” (OOS) state. An entity transitional between any of
these three states does not have any impact on it's Parent or Child entities.

l The equipment Administrative state model will only utilize the In-service and
Management states
l When in the Management or Maintenance state, all alarms against that entity will be
suppressed. The entity will otherwise function as normal.
l When in the Disabled state, user data traffic is suppressed.
l In order to perform maintenance actions on an entity (e.g., Loopback, Diagnostics,
etc.) the entity must first be put into the Maintenance state.
l An entity in the Disabled state will not pass user data traffic. Management traffic (i.e.
Management Tunnel traffic and EFM OAM) will continue to pass in this state.

766 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Entity State Descriptions

l The Operational State of an entity can be either:

o Normal

o Outage
l The facility Administrative state model will utilize all states described above. The
exception to this is the following: The Disabled State only applies to Access Ports.
Network Ports do not support the Disabled state. In regards to Network Ports, the
Unassigned State does not apply to the working Network port. The working Network
port cannot be Unassigned.
l The DCN facility Administrative state model is limited to the following states:
o In-service

o Management
o Unassigned
l EVC (Flows), Policers and Shapers support the following states:
o In-service

o Management
o Disabled
o Unassigned

EVC (Flows) - Admin state control between In-service and Management is supported.
Disabled and Unassigned is derived from the parent port. Policers and Shapers - Admin
state is read-only. State is ALWAYS derived from parent EVC.

Users may edit the state of the Equipment, Port and EVC (Flow). The Policer and Shaper
states are derived directly from the EVC (Flow) state. Editing the EVC state is allowed
according to the rules outlined below. It should be noted that the state of the individual
EVC can be overwritten by a subsequent edit of the parent Port object (see behavior rules
defined below).

Parent/Child rules for Equipment entities:

l If an Equipment entity is In-service, its child entities Port entities can be in any state
(supported by that entity).
l If an Equipment entity is Management, its child entities can be in any “Out of Service”
state or Unassigned.
l If an Equipment entity is Unassigned, its child entities must be unassigned.

Parent/Child rules for Port entities:

l If a Port Entity is in In-Service state, its child entities (EVCs) can be in In-Service,
Management or Unassigned state.
l If a Port Entity is in Management, Maintenance or Disabled state, its child entities can
be in Management or Unassigned state
l If a Port Entity is in Unassigned state, its child entities must be in Unassigned state.

Parent/Child rules for EVC (Flow) entities. Note that child entities of EVCs are not user
editable.

l If an EVC Entity is in In-Service state, its child entities (policers, shapers) will be in In-
Service.
l If an EVC Entity is in Management state, its child entities will be in Management.
l If an EVC Entity is in Unassigned state, its child entities will be in Unassigned state.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 767

Entity State Descriptions

Changing the Equipment entity state from In-Service to Management will have the side-
effect of changing the Port state from In-Service to Management. Any Port that was
already in an OOS state (i.e. Management, Maintenance or Disabled) will stay in that
state. Any Port that was already in the Unassigned state will stay in the Unassigned
state.

Changing an Equipment entity from Management to In-service will NOT have any side-
effect on the Port state. The Port state will remain as it was.

Due to the many-to-one relationship between Port entities and EVCs (Flows), the
following behaviors will be implemented:

l editing a Port entity from In-service to Management, Maintenance or Disabled will

result in ALL EVCs (Flows) that are children of that Port being changed from In-service
to Management. If an EVC was already Management or Unassigned prior to the edit of
the Port state, it will not change.
l editing a Port entity from In-service, Management, Maintenance or Disabled to
Unassigned will result in ALL EVCs (Flows) that are children of that Port being
changed to Unassigned.

This effect will also occur as a result of an edit of the Port's parent
entity. For example, if the Equipment entity state is edited in such a
way that it affects the Port's Administration state, the above rules will
apply such that the effect is propagated to the Port's child entities
also.

Due to the many-to-one relationship between Port entities and EVCs (Flows), the
following behaviors will be implemented:

l editing a Port entity from Management, Maintenance or Disabled to In-Service will

result in ALL EVCs (Flows) that are children of that Port being changed from
Management to In-Service. If an EVC was Unassigned prior to the edit of the Port
state, it will remain Unassigned.
l editing a Port entity from Unassigned to Management, Maintenance or Disabled will
result in ALL EVCs (Flows) that are children of that Port being changed to
Management.
l editing a Port entity from Unassigned to In-Service will result in ALL EVCs (Flows) that
are children of that Port being changed to In-Service.

This effect will also occur as a result of an edit of the EVC's parent
entity. For example, if the Port entity state is edited in such a way that
it affects the EVC's Admin state, the above rules will apply such that
the effect is propagated to the EVC's child entities also.

768 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Entity State Descriptions

Operational State
This attribute contains the current actual state of the entity. It is based on the provisioned
state plus the actual physical state of the entity.

Secondary State
This attribute refines or provides added information regarding the Operational State of the
entity.

Refer to the following table for state values and their definitions.

Table 28: State Codes and Descriptions

State Entity State Definition
User Traffic is not passed in this
state; management traffic is
Disabled
passed. Alarms are squelched in
this state.
Normal, in-service, traffic passing
IS
state of the entity.
Administration State - Mandatory state for initiating loop-
Equipment and Facil- Maintenance backs, Etherjack® Diagnosis.
ities Alarms are squelched in this state.
“Out-Of-Service” state of entity,
Management traffic is still passed, alarms are
squelched (i.e., not reported).
Traffic (user or management) not
Unassigned passed in this state. Alarms are not
monitored in this state.
Normal, in service, traffic passing
Normal
state of the entity.
The entity is not operational, due to
Operational State - Outage
alarm condition.
Equipment and Facil-
The CFM MEP can work normally
ities
even though the Operational State
Not Applicable
shows Not Applicable. This is due
to current system limitation.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 769

Entity State Descriptions

Table 28: State Codes and Descriptions

State Entity State Definition
ACT Entity is active.
AINS Automatic in-service.
DSBLD Disabled
FAF Facility failure.
FLT Fault detected.
LPBK Loopback state.
MAINT Maintenance state.
Secondary States -
MEA Mismatched equipment.
Equipment and Facil-
ities STBY Standby hot.
SGEO Supported entity outage.
UAS Unassigned.
UEQ Unequipped.
The CFM MEP can work normally
even though the Secondary State
Not Applicable
shows Not Applicable. This is due
to current system limitation.
OAM Administration Disabled Disabled.
State Enabled Enabled.
Active Send Local Active send local.
Fault Fault detected.
Passive Wait Passive wait.
OAM Discovery State
Send Any Send any.
Send Local/Remote Send local/remote.
Send Local/Remote OK Send local/remote OK.
Cannot revert Cannot revert.
Failure Failure.
File not found File not found.
In progress In progress.
Install failed Installation failed.
Invalid file type Invalid file type.
Login failed Login failed.
No backup database There is no backup database.
File Services Status No space left No disk space left.
No software to install There is no software to install.
Permission denied Permission denied.
Revert failed Revert failed.
Server unreachable Server unreachable.
Success Successful completion.
Software not installed Software not installed.
Upgrade failed Upgrade failed.
Validation timer not active Validation timer not active.

770 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Entity State Descriptions

Table 28: State Codes and Descriptions

State Entity State Definition
Database Backup Database backup.
Database Download Database download.
Database Restore Database restore.
Database Upload Database upload.
Idle Idle.
Database or Upgrade Rebooting Rebooting.
Current State Software Cancel Upgrade Software cancel upgrade.
Software Download Software download.
Software Install Software install.
Software Upgrade Software upgrade.
Software Validate Software validate.
Software Revert Software revert.
FORCED PROTECT Forced to Protect.
FORCED WORKING Forced to Working.
Protection Group Status LOCKOUT PROTECT Lockout to Protect.
MANUAL PROTECT Manual to Protect.
MANUAL WORKING Manual to Working.
NO OUTSTANDING REQUEST There is no outstanding request.
SD PROTECT Signal Degrade on Protect.
Protection Group Status SD WORKING Signal Degrade on Working.
(Continued) SF PROTECT Signal Failure on Protect.
SF WORKING Signal Failure on Working.
WAIT TO RESTORE Wait to restore.
Active Indicates this is the active unit.
Protection Unit State
Standby Indicates this is the standby unit.
Aborted Test has been aborted.
Completed Test has completed.
Test Status (Dia-
Initial Test is initiating.
gnostics)
In-progress Test is in-progress.
Stopped Test has been manually stopped.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 771

User Authorization Privilege Levels

User Authorization Privilege Levels

Refer to the following table for user authorization privilege levels.

Table 29: User Authorization Privilege Levels

User Level Description
Has access to all commands, including administration com-
Superuser
mands.
Has access to commands for provisioning ConnectGuard con-
Crypto1
figurations, “Retrieve” privilege included.
Has access to all commands with the exception of other user
Provisioning
administration options.
Has access to a limited set of commands which support main-
Maintenance
tenance actions, such as testing, loopbacks, diagnostics.
Has access to a limited set of commands which support partial
maintenance and provisioning actions, such as ECPA Stream
Test User modification, Start/Stop ECPA test, Operate/Release VLAN
loopbacks, as well as ESA L3 Probe/Reflector and Scheduler
operations.
Has access to commands for displaying configuration settings
Retrieve
and performance data.
Has access to a limited set of commands in NetConf/YANG
NetConf2
interface only.

1The Crypto privilege level is only available in GE114Pro (C) and GE114Pro (CSH) which support
ConnectGuard [Link] user with Crypto privilege is crypto user. By comparison, the other user privileges
are non-crypto and the corresponding users are non-crypto users.
2The NetConf privilege level is only applicable in NetConf/YANG interface. The user with NetConf privilege
can only be created on GUI/CLI by a user with Superuser privilege. Up to 3 simultaneous NetConf user
sessions are supported.

772 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Configuration Settings, Rules and Dependencies

Configuration Settings, Rules and

Dependencies
The following provides a summary of configuration default settings, configuration options,
provisioning rules and dependencies. For Entity EIDs, please refer to the FSP
150GE11xPro Command Line Interface Reference Guide.

The following configuration options and rules tables provide high level option descriptions
and valid entries using the web-based Element Management System (EMS) GUI. The
high level option descriptions provided here assume a good working knowledge of the use
of each option, and are intended to be used as a guide to operate, configure and maintain
the system. Additional information for each option description can be found in the FSP
150GE11xPro Command Line Interface Reference Guide and Application Notes for
specific features. For more information regarding navigating and using the web-based
GUI, see Web-based Element Management System.

This section provides the following configuration settings information:

l Factory Default Configuration Settings

l System Configuration Options and Rules
l Pass-Through Flow Configuration Options and Rules
l LAG Configuration Rules
l Network Port Configuration Options and Rules
l Access Port Configuration Options and Rules
l EoMPLS Configuration Options and Rules
l ConnectGuard Configuration Options and Rules - GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (CSH)
l Layer-3 Services Configuration Options and Rules
l BFD Configuration Options and Rules
l OpenFlow Configuration Options and Rules
l Management Tunnel Configuration Options and Rules
l IPv6 over IPv4 Tunnel Configuration Options and Rules
l CPD Filters Options and Rules
l LLDP Configuration Settings
l E-LMI Configuration Settings
l Loopback Settings
l Environmental Alarms Settings - GE114Pro (HE)
l "Performance Monitoring Settings" on page 953
l ESA Options and Rules
l Scheduled ESA Activity Settings
l CFM Configuration Options and Rules
l PTP Configuration Options and Rules - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)
l SyncJack Configuration Options and Rules - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)
l SAT Configuration Options and Rules
l TWAMP Configuration Options and Rules

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 773

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Factory Default Configuration Settings

When the database of the FSP 150CC is modified, it stores the changes in non-volatile
memory. If a power loss / system reboot occur, all configuration data is retained. There
are three versions of the database always resident on the system, plus a “standby” copy
of the current database. The three versions are the current running configuration, System
Default (a copy that may be modified raby a user) and Factory Default (a copy that cannot
be modified). When first commissioned, these three database versions are identical. As
provisioning occurs, the current running configuration database is updated with each
change entered.

Refer to the following table for factory default configuration settings and correlation from
SNMP parameters to FSP 150CC Web-based Browser GUI operation.

Table 30: Access Port Factory Default Configuration Settings

eVision Parameter SNMP Parameter Default Setting
Alias ifAlias (IF-MIB) (blank)
Administrative State cmEthernetAccPortAdminState Unassigned (5)
Media Type cmEthernetAccPortMediaType Fiber (2)
MTU Size cmEthernetAccPortMTU 9600
Copper = auto-mdix (2)
MDIX cmEthernetAccPortMDIXType
Fiber = Not applicable (1)
Configured Speed cmEthernetAccPortConfigSpeed Auto (7)
Loopback Status cmEthernetAccPortLoopbackStatus None (1)
Swap SA/DA cmEthernetAccPortLoopbackSwapSADA None (1)
OpenFlow <not supported> Disabled (2)
Auto Diagnostic cmEthernetAccPortAutoDiagEnabled ture (1)
Rx DEI Action cmEthernetAccPortRxDeiAction Use(2)
Rx DEI Outer Tag cmEthernetAccPortRxDeiOuterTagType ctagOrStag(2)
Tx DEI Action cmEthernetAccPortTxDeiAction stag(1)
Tx DEI Outer Tag cmEthernetAccPortTxDeiOuterTagType markColor(2)
Port Mode cmEthernetAccPortMode CO (Connection-Oriented) (1)
Service Type cmEthernetAccPortSvcType EPL (1)
AFP cmEthernetAccPortAfpType AFP ALL (3)
Q in Q cmEthernetAccPortQinQEtherType 0 (hex)
Port VLAN ID cmEthernetAccPortPortVlanId <port-num>-0
Priority Mapping Profile cmAccPortExtRefPrioMapProfile cmPrioMapV2ProfileAlias.1
802.3 Pause RX cmEthernetAccPortRxPauseEnabled Disabled (2)
802.3 Pause TX cmEthernetAccPortTxPauseEnabled Disabled (2)
Port Shaping cmEthernetAccPortShapingEnabled Disabled (2)
cmEthernetAccPortShapedSpeedLo / cmEth-
Port Shaped Speed 0
ernetAccPortShapedSpeedHi
Independent Port Shaper
Independent Port Shaper BW Disabled (2)
BW
N2A VLAN Trunking cmEthernetAccPortN2AVlanTrunkingEnabled True (1)
A2N Push Port VID cmEthernetAccPortA2nSwapPriorityVIDEnabled False(2)
N2A Pop Port VID cmEthernetAccPortN2APopPVIDEnabled False(2)
A2N Swap Priority VID : cmEthernetAccPortA2nSwapPriorityVIDEnabled True (1)
N2A Swap Priority VID cmEthernetAccPortN2aSwapPriorityVIDEnabled False(2)

774 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 30: Access Port Factory Default Configuration Settings

eVision Parameter SNMP Parameter Default Setting
Swap Priority VID cmEthernetAccPortSwapPriorityVID 1
Low Latency Queuing cmEthernetAccPortLowLatencyQueuingEnabled Disabled (2)
Link Loss Forwarding
cmEthernetAccPortLinkLossFwdEnabled Disabled (2)
Enable
Link Loss Forwarding
cmEthernetAccPortLinkLossFwdDelay 0
Delay
Link Loss Forwarding TX
cmEthernetAccPortLinkLossFwdTXActionType llf_tx_no_action (1)
Action
E1000-A-2=2

E1000-A-3=3
Link Loss Forwarding
cmEthernetAccPortLinkLossFwdLocalLinkId E1000-A-4=4
Local Link ID
E1000-A-5=5

E1000-A-6=6
Link Loss Forwarding
cmEthernetAccPortLinkLossFwdTriggerTypes None selected (Empty)
Trigger Events
Remote Link IDs cmEthernetAccPortLinkLossFwdRemoteLinkIds None selected (Empty)
Monitor Entity f3PortMirrorAccPortExtMonitorEnabled False(2)
Buffer Size f3PortMirrorAccPortExtBufferSize 128 KB
CPD Filters
Bridge Group 01-80-C2-
cmEthernetAccPortCpdV2Mac00DispType pass-thru(3)
00-00-00
pass-thru(3) (EPL)
Bridge Group BPDU cmEthernetAccPortCpdV2BPDUDispType
useMacSetting(8) (EVPL)
Bridge Group Cus- pass-thru(3) (EPL)
cmEthernetAccPortCpdV2CustomerLLDPDispType
tomerLLDP useMacSetting(8) (EVPL)
Bridge Group 01-80-C2-
cmEthernetAccPortCpdV2Mac01DispType pass-thru(3)
00-00-01
Bridge Group pass-thru(3) (EPL)
cmEthernetAccPortCpdV2PauseDispType
Pause useMacSetting(8) (EVPL)
Bridge Group
cmEthernetAccPortCpdV2Mac02DispType pass-thru(3)
01-80-C2-00-00-02
pass-thru(3) (EPL)
Bridge Group EFM-OAM cmEthernetAccPortCpdV2EfmOamDispType
discard(1) (EVPL)
Bridge Group pass-thru(3) (EPL)
cmEthernetAccPortCpdV2LACPDispType
LACP useMacSetting(8) (EVPL)
Bridge Group pass-thru(3) (EPL)
cmEthernetAccPortCpdV2LACPMarkerDispType
LACP Marker useMacSetting(8) (EVPL)
pass-thru(3) (EPL)
Bridge Group SSM cmEthernetAccPortCpdV2SSMDispType
discard(1) (EVPL)
Bridge Group
cmEthernetAccPortCpdV2Mac03DispType pass-thru(3)
01-80-C2-00-00-03

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 775

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 30: Access Port Factory Default Configuration Settings

eVision Parameter SNMP Parameter Default Setting
Bridge Group pass-thru(3) (EPL)
cmEthernetAccPortCpdV2PortAuthenDispType
Port Authentication useMacSetting(8) (EVPL)
Bridge Group pass-thru(3) (EPL)
cmEthernetAccPortCpdV2NonTpmrLLDPDispType
Non-TPMRLLDP useMacSetting(8) (EVPL)
Bridge Group
cmEthernetAccPortCpdV2Mac04DispType pass-thru(3)
01-80-C2-00-00-04
Bridge Group
cmEthernetAccPortCpdV2Mac05DispType pass-thru(3)
01-80-C2-00-00-05
Bridge Group
cmEthernetAccPortCpdV2Mac06DispType pass-thru(3)
01-80-C2-00-00-06
Bridge Group
cmEthernetAccPortCpdV2Mac07DispType pass-thru(3)
01-80-C2-00-00-07
Bridge Group pass-thru(3) (EPL)
cmEthernetAccPortCpdV2ELMIDispType
ELMI useMacSetting(8) (EVPL)
Bridge Group
cmEthernetAccPortCpdV2Mac08DispType pass-thru(3)
01-80-C2-00-00-08
Bridge Group
cmEthernetAccPortCpdV2Mac09DispType pass-thru(3)
01-80-C2-00-00-09
Bridge Group
cmEthernetAccPortCpdV2Mac0aDispType pass-thru(3)
01-80-C2-00-00-0a
Bridge Group
cmEthernetAccPortCpdV2Mac0bDispType pass-thru(3)
01-80-C2-00-00-0b
Bridge Group
cmEthernetAccPortCpdV2Mac0cDispType pass-thru(3)
01-80-C2-00-00-0c
Bridge Group
cmEthernetAccPortCpdV2Mac0dDispType pass-thru(3)
01-80-C2-00-00-0d
Bridge Group
cmEthernetAccPortCpdV2Mac0eDispType pass-thru(3)
01-80-C2-00-00-0e
Bridge Group
pass-thru(3) (EPL)
NearestLLDP cmEthernetAccPortCpdV2NearestLLDPDispType
useMacSetting(8) (EVPL)
Bridge Group pass-thru(3) (EPL)
cmEthernetAccPortCpdV2PtpUntaggedDispType
UntaggedPT useMacSetting(8) (EVPL)
Bridge Group pass-thru(3) (EPL)
cmEthernetAccPortCpdV2PtpTaggedDispType
TaggedPTP useMacSetting(8) (EVPL)
Bridge Group
cmEthernetAccPortCpdV2Mac0fDispType pass-thru(3)
01-80-C2-00-00-0f

776 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 30: Access Port Factory Default Configuration Settings

eVision Parameter SNMP Parameter Default Setting
GARP Group GVRP cmEthernetAccPortCpdV2GMRPDispType pass-thru(3)
GARP Group GMRP cmEthernetAccPortCpdV2GVRPDispType pass-thru(3)
GARP Group GARP cmEthernetAccPortCpdV2GARPDispType pass-thru(3)
Cisco ISL cmEthernetAccPortCpdV2IslDispType pass-thru(3)
Cisco PAgP cmEthernetAccPortCpdV2PagpDispType pass-thru(3)
Cisco UDLD cmEthernetAccPortCpdV2UdldDispType pass-thru(3)
Cisco CDP cmEthernetAccPortCpdV2CdpDispType pass-thru(3)
Cisco VTP cmEthernetAccPortCpdV2VtpDispType pass-thru(3)
Cisco DTP cmEthernetAccPortCpdV2DtpDispType pass-thru(3)
Cisco PVSTP+ cmEthernetAccPortCpdV2PvstpPlusDispType pass-thru(3)
Cisco Uplink Fast cmEthernetAccPortCpdV2UplinkFastDispType pass-thru(3)
Cisco VLAN Bridge cmEthernetAccPortCpdV2VlanBridgeDispType pass-thru(3)
Cisco L2PT cmEthernetAccPortCpdV2L2PTDispType pass-thru(3)
LAN Bridges cmEthernetAccPortCpdV2LANBridgesDispType pass-thru(3)
EFM-OAM
OAM Control cmEthernetAccPortOamEnabled Disabled (2)
Mode cmEthernetAccPortCpdFilterType OAM Active (1)
Sync-E (GE114Pro (SH) /GE114Pro (CSH))
Sync-E Mode cmEthernetAccPortSyncEEnabled false (2)
QL Mode cmEthernetAccPortQLModeEnabled false (2)
Expected QL cmEthernetAccPortExpectedQL ql-none (16)
Assumed QL cmEthernetAccPortAssumedQL ql-stu (26)
N2A Shaper
Port N2A Shapers
cmAccPortQosShaperBufferSize 0
Buffer Size
PCP Configuration
PCP DE Encoding Mode cmEthernetAccPortPcpDEEncType enc-none(1)
Edit LLDP (lldpV2MIB)
SNMP Notification lldpV2PortConfigNotificationEnable False (2)
Admin Status lldpV2PortConfigAdminStatus Disabled (4)
Port Description + System
Basic Optional TLVs lldpV2PortConfigTLVsTxEnable Name + System Description +
System Capabilities
Management Address <not created at Factory Defaults setting>
Edit ELMI (f3ElmiMIB)
ELMI Control f3AccPortElmiConfigEnabled False (2)
T392 Timeout f3AccPortElmiConfigT392PollVerificationTimer 15
N393 Count f3AccPortElmiConfigN393StatusCounter 4
Async Status f3AccPortElmiConfigAsyncStatusEnabled true (1)
Min Async Status
f3AccPortElmiConfigMinAsyncMessageInterval 1
Interval
L3F Flow Point
<not created by factory defaults> na
(f3L3MIB)

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 777

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 31: DCN (eth0) Factory Default Configuration Settings

eVision Parameter SNMP Parameter Default Setting
Alias ifAlias (IF-MIB) (blank)
Administrative State cmEthernetMgmtPortAdminState IS (1)
Configured Speed cmEthernetMgmtPortConfigSpeed Auto (7)
MDIX cmEthernetMgmtPortMDIXType Auto (2)

Table 32: USB Modem Factory Default Configuration Settings

eVision Parameter SNMP Parameter Default Setting
Alias entPhysicalAlias (blank)
Administrative State f3Usb3GDCNPortAdminState Unassigned(5)
APN f3Usb3GDCNPortAPN N/A
Dial # f3Usb3GDCNPortDailNumber N/A
Redial Timer f3Usb3GDCNPortRedialTimer 10
User Name f3Usb3GDCNPortUserName N/A
Password f3Usb3GDCNPortPassword N/A

Table 33: Pass-Thru Flow Factory Default Configuration Settings

eVision Parameter SNMP Parameter Default Setting
No Pass-through Flow at
<not created by factory defaults> na
Factory Default

Table 34: Ethernet Protection Ring Factory Default

Configuration Settings
eVision Parameter SNMP Parameter Default Setting
Ethernet Protection
Ring (No Ethernet Protection Ring
f3ErpGroupTable
created at factory default)
(f3ErpMIB)

Table 35: Protection Group Factory Default Configuration

Settings (cmProtectionMIB)
eVision Parameter SNMP Parameter Default Setting
PROT GROUP-1-1- (Protection Group not created at
cmFacProtGroupTable
1-1 factory default)

778 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 36: LAG Factory Default Configuration Settings

eVision Parameter SNMP Parameter Default Setting
LAG-1-1
(LAG Group not created at fact-
LAG-1-2 f3LagTable
ory default)
LAG-1-3

Table 37: Split Horizon Group Factory Default Configuration

Settings
eVision Parameter SNMP Parameter Default Setting
(SHG Group not created at fact-
SHG f3ShgTable
ory default)

Table 38: Synchronizaiton Factory Default Configuration Settings (f3SyncMIB)

eVision Parameter SNMP Parameter Default Setting
Alias f3SyncAlias chassis
Sync-1-1-1-1 Administrative State f3SyncAdminState in-service (1)
Network Clock Type f3SyncNetworkClockType option1 (1)
(f3SyncMIB) WTR Time f3SyncWaitToRestoreTime 5
Selection Mode f3SyncSelectionMode priority-mode (2)

Table 39: Time Clock Factory Default Configuration Settings

eVision Parameter SNMP Parameter Default Setting
Alias f3TimeClockAlias blank
Administrative State f3TimeClockAdminState unassigned(5)
WTR Time f3TimeClockWaitToRestoreTime 5
Selection Mode f3TimeClockSelectionMode priority-mode(2)
Time Holdover Per-
f3TimeClockTimeHoldoverPerformance time-5000ns(4)
formance (ns)
Sync Ref Candidate f3TimeClockSyncRefCandidate false(2)
Expected QL f3TimeClockExpectedQL ql-none(16)

Table 40: BITS-IN/BITS-OUT Ports Factory Default

Configuration Settings
eVision Parameter SNMP Parameter Default Setting
Alias ifAlias (IF-MIB) (blank)
Administrative State bitsPortAdminState unassigned (5)
Line Type bitsPortLineType e1 (2)
Line Code bitsPortLineCode e1-hdb3 (4)
Frame Format bitsPortFrameFormat e1-crc4 (5)

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 779

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 40: BITS-IN/BITS-OUT Ports Factory Default

Configuration Settings
eVision Parameter SNMP Parameter Default Setting
SA Bit bitsPortSaBitDesignation bit4 (2)
QL Mode bitsPortQLModeEnabled false (2)
Assumed QL (BIT IN
bitsPortAssumedQL ql-eec1 (2)
only)
Expected QL (BIT
bitsPortExpectedQL ql-none (16)
OUT only)
Squelch QL
bitsPortSquelchQL ql-none (16)
(BIT OUT only)
Line Build Out
bitsPortLineBuildOut 0-133 Ft
(BIT OUT only)

Table 41: Clock Port Factory Default Configuration Settings

eVision Parameter SNMP Parameter Default Setting
Alias ifAlias (IF-MIB) (blank)
Administrative gps10MHzPortAdminState unassigned(5)
Signal Direction gps10MHzPortSignalDirection output (1)
Frequency Source
gps10MHzPortFrequencySource (null-oid) zeroDotZero
Eid
Squelch Control gps10MHzPortSquelchControl never (1)
Squelch QL gps10MHzPortSquelchQL ql-none (16)

Table 42: PPS Port Factory Default Configuration Settings

eVision Parameter SNMP Parameter Default Setting
Alias ifAlias (IF-MIB) (blank)
Administrative State f3PulsePerSecondPortAdminState unassigned(5)
Signal Direction f3PulsePerSecondPortDirection output (2)
Cable Delay Com-
f3PulsePerSecondPortDelayCompensation 0
pensation
Time of Day Source Eid f3PulsePerSecondPortTODSource (null-oid) zeroDotZero
Squelch Control f3PulsePerSecondPortSquelchControl never (1)
Squelch QL f3PulsePerSecondPortSquelchQL ql-none (16)

Table 43: TOD Port Default Configuration Settings (cmFacilityMIB)

eVision Parameter SNMP Parameter Default Setting
Alias ifAlias (IF-MIB) (blank)
Administrative State f3TimeOfDayPortAdminState unassigned(5)
Time of Day Source Eid f3TimeOfDayPortTODSource (null-oid) zeroDotZero
Squelch Control f3TimeOfDayPortSquelchControl never (1)
Squelch QL f3TimeOfDayPortSquelchQL ql-none (16)

780 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 44: GPS Port Factory Default Configuration Settings (cmFacilityMIB)

eVision Parameter SNMP Parameter Default Setting
Alias ifAlias (IF-MIB) (blank)
Administrative State f3GPSReceiverPortAdminState unassigned(5)
PPS generation condition f3GPSReceiverPortPPSGenCondition tracked-3sat(2)
Antenna Cable Length f3GPSReceiverPortTable 5

Table 45: DCN(eth0) Factory Default Configuration Settings for Communication

eVision Parameter SNMP Parameter Default Setting
IP Version cmIpInterfaceIpMode ipv4-only(0)
IPv4 Address cmIpInterface [Link]
[Link].[Link].[Link].[Link]
IPV6 Address cmIpInterfaceIpv6Address
(hex)
Net Mask cmIpInterfaceMask [Link]
DHCP cmIpInterfaceDhcpEnabled false (2)
DHCP Role cmIpInterfaceDhcpRole DHCP Client (1)
DHCP Log Server
cmIpInterfaceDhcpLogServerEnabled false (2)
Control
DHCP NTP Server
cmIpInterfaceDhcpNTPServerEnabled false (2)
Control 
RIPv2 cmIpInterfaceRIPv2Enabled false (2)
DHCP Client ID Con-
cmIpInterfaceDHCPClientIdEnabled false (2)
trol
DHCP Client ID
cmIpInterfaceDhcpClientIdType macAddr(2)
Type
DHCP Client ID cmIpInterfaceDHCPClientId <DCN MAC address>
DHCP Class ID Con-
cmIpInterfaceDhcpClassIdEnabled true(1)
trol
DHCP Host Name
cmIpInterfaceDhcpHostNameEnabled true(1)
Control
DHCP Host Name
cmIpInterfaceDhcpHostNameType sysName(1)
Type
DHCP Host Name <sysName>
DHCP Vendor Info
cmIpInterfaceDhcpVendorInfoEnabled false(2)
Control
DHCP Vendor Info
cmIpInterfaceDhcpVendorInfoType systemName(2)
Type
FSP 150-GE101Pro/GO102Pro(S)/GO102ProPro
(SP)/GE112Pro/GE112Pro (H)/GE112Pro
DHCP Vendor Info cmIpInterfaceDhcpVendorInfo
(m)/GE114Pro/GE114Pro(C)/
GE114Pro(HE)/GE114Pro(SH)/GE114Pro(CSH)/

Table 46: AMP Factory Default Configuration Settings

eVision Parameter SNMP Parameter Default Setting
AMP Configuration
No AM configuration created at system default.
(f3AMPMIB)

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 781

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 47: Management Tunnel Factory Default Configuration Settings

eVision
SNMP Parameter Default Setting
Parameter
Entity ID ipManagementTunnelIndex MANAGEMENT TUNNEL-1
Tunnel Name ipManagementTunnelName LTP
Associated
ipManagementTunnelAssociatedPort Network Port 1
Port
Encap-
ipManagementTunnelEncapsulationType ethernet (1)
sulation Type
MTU ipManagementTunnelMTU 1500
IP Mode ipManagementTunnelIpMode IPv4 Only (10)
IPV4 Address ipManagementTunnelIpAddress [Link]
[Link].[Link].[Link].[Link]-
IPV6 Address ipManagementTunnelIpv6Address
0 (hex)
Subnet Mask ipManagementTunnelSubnetMask [Link]
DHCP ipManagementTunnelDhcpEnabled true (1)
DHCP Log
Server Con- ipManagementTunnelDhcpLogServerEnabled false (2)
trol
DHCP NTP
ipMan-
Server Con- false (2)
agementTunnelDhcpNTPServerEnabled
trol
DHCP Client
ipManagementTunnelDHCPClientIdEnabled false (2)
ID Control
DHCP Client
ipManagementTunnelDhcpClientIdType macAddr(2)
ID Type
DHCP Client
ipManagementTunnelDHCPClientId <Network Port-1 MAC address>
ID
DHCP Class
pManagementTunnelDhcpClassIdEnabled true(1)
ID Control
DHCP Host
ipManagementTunnelDhcpHostNameEnabled true(1)
Name Control
DHCP Host
ipManagementTunnelDhcpHostNameType sysName(1)
Name Type
DHCP Host
ipManagementTunnelDhcpHostName <sysName>
Name
DHCP Vendor
cmIpInterfaceDhcpVendorInfoEnabled false(2)
Info Control
DHCP Vendor
cmIpInterfaceDhcpVendorInfoType systemName(2)
Info Type
FSP 150-GE101Pro/GO102Pro(S)/GO102Pro
(SP)/GE112Pro/GE112Pro (H)/GE112Pro
DHCP Vendor
cmIpInterfaceDhcpVendorInfo (m)/GE114Pro/GE114Pro(C)/
Info
GE114Pro(HE)/GE114Pro(SH)/GE114Pro
(CSH)/
MAC Address ipManagementTunnelPhysicalAddress <Network Port-1 MAC address>
Tunnel Mode ipManagementTunnelType macbased (1)
C-TAG VLAN ipManagementTunnelCVlanEnabled true (1)

782 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 47: Management Tunnel Factory Default Configuration Settings

eVision
SNMP Parameter Default Setting
Parameter
C-TAG VLAN
ipManagementTunnelVlanId 4095
ID
S-TAG VLAN ipManagementTunnelSVlanEnabled false (2)
S-TAG VLAN
ipManagementTunnelSVlanId 4095
ID
RIPv2 ipManagementTunnelRip2PktsEnabled false (2)
CIR ipManagementTunnelCIR 256000
EIR ipManagementTunnelEIR 768000
Buffer Size ipManagementTunnelBufferSize 32
COS ipManagementTunnelCOS 7

Table 48: IPv6-over-IPv4 Tunnels Factory Default Configuration Settings

eVision Parameter SNMP Parameter Default Setting
No IPv6 over IPv4 Tunnel is created as
IPv6 over IPv4 Tunnels cmIpv6OverIpv4TunnelTable
factory default

Table 49: SNMP Commuities Factory Default Configuration Settings (SNMP-

[Link])
eVision Parameter SNMP Parameter Default Setting
Community Names snmpCommunityName public, private
read-only (public)
Access Type vacmAccessTable
read-write (private)
Target Parameter
No Target Parameter created at system default.
Target Address
No Target Address created at system default.

Table 50: USM Users Factory Default Configuration Settings (snmpUsmMIB)

eVision Parameter SNMP Parameter Default Setting
SNMP User ADMIN
User Name usmUserName (Index) ADMIN
Engine ID usmUserEngineID (Index) local
Security Name usmUserSecurityName ADMIN
Security Level N/A No Authentication
User Access Type N/A Read/Write
Authentication Protocol usmUserAuthProtocol None (1)
Privacy Protocol usmUserPrivProtocol None
SNMP User Crypto
User Name usmUserName (Index) crypto
Engine ID usmUserEngineID (Index) local

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 783

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 50: USM Users Factory Default Configuration Settings (snmpUsmMIB)

eVision Parameter SNMP Parameter Default Setting
Security Name usmUserSecurityName crypto
Security Level N/A Auth/Priv
User Access Type N/A Read/Write
Authentication Protocol usmUserAuthProtocol MD5
Privacy Protocol usmUserPrivProtocol AES
SNMP User MONITOR
User Name usmUserName (Index) MONITOR
Engine ID usmUserEngineID (Index) local
Security Name usmUserSecurityName MONITOR
Security Level N/A No Authentication
User Access Type N/A Read/Write
Authentication Protocol usmUserAuthProtocol None
Privacy Protocol usmUserPrivProtocol None
SNMP User OPERATOR
User Name usmUserName (Index) OPERATOR
Engine ID usmUserEngineID (Index) local
Security Name usmUserSecurityName OPERATOR
Security Level N/A No Authentication
User Access Type N/A Read/Write
Authentication Protocol usmUserAuthProtocol None
Privacy Protocol usmUserPrivProtocol None
SNMP User PROVISION
User Name usmUserName (Index) PROVISION
Engine ID usmUserEngineID (Index) local
Security Name usmUserSecurityName PROVISION
Security Level N/A No Authentication
User Access Type N/A Read/Write
Authentication Protocol usmUserAuthProtocol None
Privacy Protocol usmUserPrivProtocol None

Table 51: SNMP Dying Gasp Factory Default Configuration Settings

eVision Parameter SNMP Parameter Default Setting
(no target addresses are provisioned,
SNMP Dying Gasp f3SnmpTargetAddrExtDyingGaspEnabled
thus this option is disabled)

784 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 52: PSE Factory Default Configuration Settings

eVision Parameter
SNMP Parameter Default Setting

Power Usage
pethMainPseUsageThreshold 99
Threshold
PSE Group Notification Con-
pethNotificationControlEnable False (2)
(cmFacilityMIB) trol
Nonstandard PD
pethMainPseExtNonStandardPD Disabled (2)
Allowed
Administrative
pethPsePortAdminEnable False (2)
State
PSE Port Power Pairs pethPsePortPowerPairs Signal (1)
(ieee8023powerEthernetMIB) PSE Port Type pethPsePortType (zero-length)
Available Power
pethPsePortExtAvailablePowerLevel class4 (4)
Level

Table 53: Local User Factory Default Configuration Settings

eVision Parameter SNMP Parameter Default Setting
Local User crytpo
Login cmSecurityUserName crypto
Password cmSecurityUserPassword ChgMeNOW
Privilege cmSecurityUserPrivLevel crypto (8)
CLI Paging cmSecurityUserCliPagingEnable Enabled (1)
Comment cmSecurityUserComment Crypto User
Local User netadmin
Login cmSecurityUserName netadmin
Password cmSecurityUserPassword ChgMeNOW
Privilege cmSecurityUserPrivLevel Provisioning (3)
CLI Paging cmSecurityUserCliPagingEnable Enabled (1)
Comment cmSecurityUserComment Default User
Login Timeout cmSecurityUserLoginTimeout 15 (minutes)
Local User root
Login cmSecurityUserName root
Password cmSecurityUserPassword ChgMeNOW
Privilege cmSecurityUserPrivLevel Superuser (4)
CLI Paging cmSecurityUserCliPagingEnable Enabled (1)
Comment cmSecurityUserComment Default User
Login Timeout cmSecurityUserLoginTimeout 15 (minutes)
Local User user
Login cmSecurityUserName user
Password cmSecurityUserPassword ChgMeNOW
Privilege cmSecurityUserPrivLevel Maintenance (2)
CLI Paging cmSecurityUserCliPagingEnable Enabled (1)
Comment cmSecurityUserComment Default User
Login Timeout cmSecurityUserLoginTimeout 15 (minutes)
No remote user entries by
N/A N/A
default
Authentication Protocol cmAuthProtocol None (1)

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 785

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 53: Local User Factory Default Configuration Settings

eVision Parameter SNMP Parameter Default Setting
Authorization Type cmAuthType PAP (1)
NAS IP Address cmNASIpAddress [Link]
Access Order cmAccessOrder Local (1)
Remote Authentication
cmRemoteAuthServerEnabled Disabled (2)
Servers 1-3

Table 54: Security Policy Factory Default Configuration Settings

eVision Parameter SNMP Parameter Default Setting
Security Policy Strength eVision Parameter SNMP Parameter
Generate Certificate or Key eVision Parameter SNMP Parameter

786 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Maximum Bandwidth
Table 55: Maximum Network Port/Access Port Bandwidth
Associated EID Port Type Max. CIR Max. EIR
NETWORK PORT-1-1-1-1,
E1000 (Fiber SFP or Copper): 1000000000 (bps) No Limit.
NETWORK PORT-1-1-1-2
ACCESS PORT-1-1-1-3

ACCESS PORT-1-1-1-4
E1000 (Fiber SFP or Copper): 1000000000 (bps) No Limit.
ACCESS PORT-1-1-1-5

ACCESS PORT-1-1-1-6

All maximum values shown in the above table are indicative of a port without
a management tunnel, which utilizes a configurable amount of bandwidth. At
default configuration, a Low Touch Provisioning (LTP) management tunnel is
provisioned.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 787

Factory Default Configuration Settings

System Configuration Options and Rules

Refer to the following table for System configuration settings and associated rules when
using the web-based GUI. Default settings are identified in bold. The following editable
system settings are shown in order, as seen when using the web-based Element
Management System (EMS) GUI in Configuration mode.

System configuration options and rules consist of the following entities, which are
provided in Table 56:

l System Configuration
l Network Element (NE-1) Configuration
l NTE11x Configuration
l PT Flows
l Protection Groups (NE-1)
l LAG
l SHG
l Synchronization
l Profiles
l Communications
l SNMP
l Administration

Table 56: System Configuration Settings

Description /
Parameter Option Settings / Defaults
Applicable Rules
System Configuration
System (Edit System)
When using CLI, this string is displayed at the
highest level prompt after logon. This string can
CLI Prefix ADVA
be up to 64 printable ASCII characters long, but
cannot use the “space” character.
This option is used to enable the management
traffic bridging feature. When bridging is disabled, Disabled
Management
existing http, https, telnet, and ssh sessions are
Traffic
unresponsive for up to 3 seconds. When bridging
Bridging
is enabled, existing http, https, telnet, and ssh Enabled
sessions are unresponsive for up to 10 seconds.
This option limits acceptance of DCN packets to
those with an ADVA Optical Networking OUI in Disabled
Mgmt Traffic
the source MAC ([Link]XX:XX:XX,
Bridging
[Link]XX:XX:XX, or [Link]XX:XX:XX).
Security
This option is only available if Management Traffic Enabled
Bridging is enabled.

788 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 56: System Configuration Settings

Description /
Parameter Option Settings / Defaults
Applicable Rules
This option defines if the proxy ARP functionality

should be enabled. If two or more ADVA Optical Disabled

Networking FSP 150s are connected via Man-
Proxy ARP agement Tunnel as well as connected to the same
LAN, then only one of the NEs/NIDs should have
the PROXYARP option enabled. Otherwise, there Enabled
will be multiple ARP responses for a single ARP
request for a remote reachable IP Address.
If Enabled, the NE will act as a proxy to respond
remote Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP) Disabled
Proxy NDP request with the destination MAC or advertise the
prefix of the network. This option can be Enabled Enabled
only after IPv6 Forwarding is Enabled.
working mode for GE11xPro:

l Forwarding enabled: Router mode.

o In Router mode, system support router

forwarding functionality among DCN and Disabled

management tunnel interface.
o Any DCN or management tunnel interface
does not receive Router Advertisement
IPv6 For- (RA) message from link. Stateless
warding Address Auto-configuration must be
disabled. Also, Ipv6OverV4 tunnel with
type of ISATAP is not supported.
o If RA is configured on a DCN or
Enabled
Management Tunnel, it is capable of
dispatching IPv6 Router Advertisement
(RA) to external host connected.
l Forwarding Disable: Host mode.
Enables or disables File Transfer Protocol access Enabled
FTP to the system. If enabled, the FTP client on the
system can be used for file transfer. Disabled
Enables or disables Hypertext Transfer Protocol
access to the system. If enabled, the user can
access the GUI interface using HTTP. Note: Enabled
HTTP is an unsecured protocol. Using this pro-
HTTP tocol to access the system could compromise the
security of the system.
Disabled
HTTP Cannot be enabled on GE114Pro(C) or
GE114Pro(CSH).
Enables or disables Hypertext Transfer Protocol Enabled
HTTPS Secure access to the system. If enabled, the user
can access the GUI interface using HTTPS. Disabled

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 789

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 56: System Configuration Settings

Description /
Parameter Option Settings / Defaults
Applicable Rules
Sets the strength of the SSL cipher. Encryption
strength is measured in key length — number of
bits in the key. To decipher an SSL Low
communication, one needs to generate the correct
decoding key. Mathematically speaking, 2n
possible values exist for an n-bit key. Thus, 40-bit
SSL Cipher encryption (low) involves 240 possible values, 56- Medium
Strength bit encryption (medium) involves 256
combinations, and 128-bit encryption (high) 2128
possible combinations.

Changing the SSL strength setting results in dis- High

connecting all active web access users, requiring
them to re-login.
Enables or disables Secure Copy Protocol Enabled
SCP access to the system. If enabled, SCP can be
used for file transfer. Disabled
Enables or disables RS-232 serial port access to Enabled
Serial Port
the system. Disabled
If Enabled, causes Auto Logoff of the user ses- Enabled
Serial Port
sion on the serial port, when the serial port is dis-
Auto Log Off Disabled
connected.
Enables or disables Secure File Transfer Protocol Enabled
SFTP access to the system. If enabled, SFTP can be
used for file transfer. Disabled
Enables or disables Secure Shell (TCP/UDP port Enabled
SSH 22) access to the system. If enabled, the user can
access the system through an SSH connection. Disabled
Enables or disables Telnet (TCP port 23) access
to the system. If enabled, the user can access the Enabled
Telnet system through a telnet connection. Note: Telnet
is an insecure protocol. Use of this protocol can Disabled
have an impact on the security of the system.
Enables or disables SNMP Authentication Traps. Enabled
Authentic-
If enabled, SNMP Authentication traps will be
ation Traps Disabled
sent to the configured trap host.

790 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 56: System Configuration Settings

Description /
Parameter Option Settings / Defaults
Applicable Rules
Enables or disables the following CLI security
prompt:

Enabled
********************************************************-
*****
CLI Security
This is a private system. Unauthorized access or
Prompt
use may lead to prosecution.

********************************************************-
***** Disabled

Do you wish to continue [Y|N]-->

Enable/Disable DSCP value configuration
control. When Enabled, all the IPv4 packets
generated/replied locally or routed will use the Disabled
DSCP mode and use the value specified for
packet classification.
DSCP
When Disabled, the DSCP Value if configured,
will not take effect, and generated IPv4 packets
will use default DSCP Value 0; DSCP mode and Enabled
DSCP value of all the IPv4 packets routed will not
be modified.
Specify a DSCP value for management traffic
DSCP Value 0 - 63
classification.
Reset Button Enable or disable the Reset Button.
Enabled
(GE1010Pro When this button is enabled, a user can use this
and button to cold-reboot (single-press) the device or Disabled
GO102Pro ) restore it to Factory-default status (long-press).
SNMP Allows the user to edit the SNMP Engine ID
0xhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhh
Engine ID which consists of 22 Hexadecimal characters.
Security Log (Edit Security Log)
Enable or Disable logging of security related activ- Disabled
Syslog
ity to the Syslog server. Enabled
Alarm Log (Edit Alarm Log)
Enable or Disable logging of alarm activity to the Disabled
Syslog
Syslog server. Enabled
Enables or Disables sending Alarm messages to Enabled
Local Log-
the local log. If set to Enabled, view logs by select-
ging Disabled
ing the Alarm Log tab.
Audit Log (Edit Audit Log)
Enable or Disable logging of audit related activity Disabled
Syslog
to the Syslog server. Enable

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 791

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 56: System Configuration Settings

Description /
Parameter Option Settings / Defaults
Applicable Rules
Enables or Disables sending Audit messages to Enabled
Local Log-
the local log. If set to Enabled, view logs by select-
ging Disabled
ing the Audit Log tab.
Syslog (Edit Syslog)
IP Address of a Syslog Server. Entering an IP
address enables transmission of alarm inform-
ation to a Syslog Server. Up to three Syslog Serv-
IP Address ers can be configured. All syslog messages [Link]
generated by the unit are sent to all configured
Syslog Servers. Setting the IP Address to [Link]
will result in the server not being used.
The IP port of each registered Syslog Server. The
Port 514
default port number is 514.
Access Control List (Edit ACL for ACL ID 1 through 10)
IP Address of the user/subnet allowed to access
Network
the GE11xPro. Up to 10 user/subnetwork IP [Link]
Address
addresses can be entered (ACL ID 1-10).
Network Mask for the user/subnet IP address
Network allowed to access the GE11xPro. Up to 10 user-
[Link]
Mask /subnetwork IP address and Network Mask com-
binations can be entered (ACL ID 1-10).
Each Network Address/Network Mask com-
bination can be Enabled or Disabled. The default Enabled
Control is Disabled. Disabling the ACL filtering will “deny”
the corresponding management traffic. Enabled Disabled
entries apply to all management interfaces.
Security Banner (Edit Banner)
Defines a custom security banner (a text string of
up to 2000 characters in length) which is dis-
played when a user logs onto the system. This This is a private system. Unauthorized
Banner
banner is displayed on CLI and web browser access or use may lead to prosecution.
logins. Line breaks can be used to format the Ban-
ner.
Time Zone (Edit Time Zone)
-12 to +14 : 00 to 59
UTC Offset Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) offset value.
+00:00
Daylight Savings Control. Enable if daylight sav- Disabled
DST Control
ings is used. Enabled
DST Start Daylight Savings Start Month. Only effective if
March
Month DST Control is Enabled. Dropdown list of months.
Daylight Savings Start Day. Only effective if DST
DST Start Control is Enabled. Entered as the day of the
SUNDAY>=7
Day week (in all caps) day of month (1 to 31) or logical
function of both (>=,<=).

792 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 56: System Configuration Settings

Description /
Parameter Option Settings / Defaults
Applicable Rules
DST Start Daylight Savings Start Time. Only effective if
(00 to 23):(00 to 59)
Time DST Control is Enabled.
DST UTC Daylight Savings Time Coordinated Universal (-12 to +14): 00 to 59
Offset Time (UTC) Offset value +01:00
DST End Daylight Savings End Month. Only effective if
November
Month DST Control is Enabled. Dropdown list of months.
Daylight Savings End Day. Only effective if DST
DST End Control is Enabled. Entered as the day of the
SUNDAY<=8
Day week (in all caps) day of month (1 to 31) or logical
function of both (>=,<=).
System Time of Day (Edit System Time of Day)
Selects the desired system Time of Day mode.
Local
l Local: the Time of Day is based on the local
oscillator.
NTP
l NTP: the Time of Day is updated based on an
System Time external NTP server. PTP
of Day l PTP: the Time of Day is updated based on a
(GE114Pro (SH)/
fully provisioned Telecom Slave or a PTP
GE114Pro (CSH))
Clock (G. 8275 Mini GM or Boundary Clock).
Time Clock
l Time Clock: the Time of Day is updated
based on the provisioned Time Clock Sync (GE114Pro (SH)/
Reference list GE114Pro (CSH))
If System Time of Day is set to Local:
The date in format: yyyy-mm-dd and the time in
format hh:mm:ss. If Unicast is selected for NTP
Date/Time Mode and an NTP server has been linked, chan- (yyyy-mm-dd)
ging the date and time will be denied. If a date/-
time is entered that exceeds the provisioned user (hh:mm:ss)
GUI timeout value in respect to the current sys-
tem time, then the user session will time out.
If System Time of Day is set to NTP:
Define NTP Server to be specified by user or to User Defined
NTP Server
get from a DHCP server by sending a broadcast
Method DHCP
DHCP query requesting IP address information.
This option is used to configure the IP version and IPv4
the IP address of the primary NTP Server. Leav-
Primary IPv6
ing the IP addresses blank disables this server
Server [Link]
from being used. Only available when NTP Server
Method is User Defined. [Link]

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 793

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 56: System Configuration Settings

Description /
Parameter Option Settings / Defaults
Applicable Rules
This option is used to configure the IP version and IPv4
the IP address of the backup NTP Server. Leav-
Backup ing the IP address blank disables this server from IPv6
Server being used. Only available when NTP Server
Method is User Defined. [Link]

[Link]
Set the NTP polling interval in seconds. Allowed
Polling Inter- settings are from 16 to 1024 seconds as powers
16
val of 2 (16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024). Default is
16.
If both Primary and Backup Server IP Addresses Primary
Active Server are configured, the user may switch between
them using this setting. Backup
If System Time of Day is set to PTP Clock , the PTP Licensable Feature must have been Enabled and a
Telecom Slave has been fully provisioned: (GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH))
Selects the source TOD Clock (TS-1-1 or PTP
Clock if provisioned).
Source TOD (drop down list of available Telecom Slave
Clock entities)

Enable or disable the leap second offset to adjust Disabled

Leap Offset
the time of day. Enabled
If System Time of Day is set to Time Clock: (GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH))
Source TOD Selects the source TOD Clock (TIME CLOCK-1- (drop down list of available Time Clock
Clock 1-1-1) entities)
Enable or disable the leap second offset to adjust Disabled
Leap Offset
the time of day. Enabled
Restore System Defaults
Allows the user to reset the NE back to system
defaults. NOTE: This can cause the loss of all OK
traffic, user data and DCN communications set-
Restore Sys-
tings. This should only be done when re-con-
tem Defaults
figuring or relocating the NE, or as a last resort
when troubleshooting traffic or communications Cancel
problems.
Network Element (NE-1) Configuration

NE-1 (Edit)
This is a text string containing a meaningful
description of the NE. The NE Name must start
with a letter, end with a letter or digit, and have as up to 256 characters
Name
interior characters only letters, digits, and (e.g. FSP 150-GE114Pro (CSH))
hyphens. Maximum length is 256 characters.
Upper and lower case characters are allowed.

794 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 56: System Configuration Settings

Description /
Parameter Option Settings / Defaults
Applicable Rules
This is a text string entry that should specify
where the system is located with enough detail so up to 256 characters
Location
that operations personnel can easily locate the (blank)
device. Maximum length is 256 characters.
This is a text string entry that should specify the
name and contact information of the individual up to 256 characters
Contact
responsible for the administration of the system. (blank)
Maximum length is 256 characters.
When using CLI, this string is displayed when nav-
igating to the Network Element level menu. This up to 64 characters
CLI Prefix
string can be up to 64 printable ASCII characters NE-1
long, but cannot use the “space” character.
Select the desired Bandwidth profile (BWP). Linerate
Bwp Mode Changing the BWP mode is not allowed while
there are active SAT tests. Inforate
Admin- Defines the NE administrative state. IS is In Ser- IS
istrative vice and is the default value. See Entity State
State Descriptions. Management
LLDP (Edit)
Select a desired global action on LLDP. The value TX-ONLY
selected is the action executed on all ports rather
than a setting that can be saved. The selected RX-ONLY
LLDP Admin
global action will make all ports have the specified TX-AND-RX
setting on LLDP Admin Status. It’s allowed to cus-
tomize specific port LLDP Admin Status. Disabled
VRF (Create/Edit)
See Create/Edit VRF .
DHCP Relay Agent (Edit)
See Create/Edit DHCP Relay Agent.
EoMPLS PW (Create/Edit)
See EoMPLS Configuration Options and Rules.
BFD (Create/Edit)
See BFD Configuration Options and Rules.
NTE11x Configuration

GE11xPro (Edit)
A text and/or number string the user enters to
up to 64 characters
Alias uniquely identify this entity. This string can be up
(blank)
to 64 printable ASCII characters long.
Admin- Defines the GE11xPro administrative state. IS is IS
istrative In Service and is the default value. See Entity
State State Descriptions. Management

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 795

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 56: System Configuration Settings

Description /
Parameter Option Settings / Defaults
Applicable Rules
Enables or disables dying gasp message via Enabled
SNMP Dying
SNMP. When enabled, OAM dying gasp mes-
Gasp Disabled
sages are sent on EFM-enabled interfaces.
Network Ports and Access Ports
See Network Port Configuration Options and Rules and Access Port Configuration Options and Rules.
DCN (eth0) (Edit Configuration) (Not Apply to GE101Pro/GO102Pro/GO102Pro(SP))
A text and/or number string the user enters to
up to 64 characters
Alias uniquely identify this entity. This string can be up
(blank)
to 64 printable ASCII characters long.
Admin- Enables or disables the Data Communications IS
istrative Network. IS is In Service and is the default value. Management
State See Entity State Descriptions. Unassigned
Auto
Auto 100 Full
Auto 100 Half
Auto 10 Full
Configured Defines the line rate of the port and whether it is in
Auto 10 Half
Speed half duplex or full duplex mode.
100 Full
100 Half
10 Full
10 Half
Defines the Media Dependent Interface, Cros- Auto
sover function for copper interfaces. MDIX allows
MDIX Crossed
the interface to change cable signal assignments
to compensate for using the incorrect cable type. Uncrossed
USB Port - Mobile Modem (Edit Configuration) (Not Apply to GO102Pro or GO102Pro(SP))
A string of up to 255 characters to identify this
Alias (blank)
mobile modem.
Unassigned
Administrativ Select the desired administrative state for the
IS
e mobile modem.
Management
No need to fill in the Access Point Name (APN)
APN (blank)
as is provided in the SIM by the carrier.
Enter the user name provided with the SIM for
User Name identification verification. Up to 32 characters (blank)
allowed.
Enter the corresponding password provided with
Password the SIM for identification verification. Up to 32 (blank)
characters allowed.
Enter the number to dial provided by the carrier for
Dial # (blank)
Internet connection. Up to 32 characters allowed.
Set the redial interval between a dialing failure and 1 - 600
Redial Timer
the next dialing. 10 (Sec)
USB Port - WiFi Dongle (Edit Configuration)(Not Apply to GO102Pro(S)/GO102Pro(SP))

796 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 56: System Configuration Settings

Description /
Parameter Option Settings / Defaults
Applicable Rules
A string of up to 255 characters to identify this
Alias (blank)
mobile modem.
Unassigned
Administrativ Select the desired administrative state for the
IS
e mobile modem.
Management
WPA WPA2 PSK
Select the desired encryption method for traffic
Encryption WPA2 PSK
flow after connected to the WiFi network.
WPA PSK
A string of up to 32 characters to uniquely identify
SSID the Wireless LAN. At least 1 character should be (blank)
set.
Set the password for clients to access the
Password Wireless LAN. The password should be 8 - 32 ChgMeNOW
characters. Default is ChgMeNOW.
Power Supply Unit (PSU-1, PSU-2) - GE112Pro (H)/GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)/GE114Pro (HE)
(Edit Configuration)
A text and/or number string the user enters to
up to 64 characters
Alias uniquely identify this entity. This string can be up
(blank)
to 64 printable ASCII characters long.
Admin- Enables or disables PSU-1 and PSU-2. IS is In IS
istrative Service and is the default value. See Entity State
State Descriptions. Management
PT Flows

Flow

Create/Edit/Delete - See Pass-Through Flow Configuration Options and Rules

Protection Groups (NE-1)

NTE11x (Add Protection Group)

Note: To delete an existing Protection Group, enter a right click on the NTE11x entity and select Delete. A Pro-
tection Group with a Network Port in Loopback cannot be deleted. Deleting a protection group will not neces-
sarily be hitless.
User Label associated with the Facility Protection up to 64 characters
User Label
Group. Up to 64 characters are allowed. (blank)

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 797

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 56: System Configuration Settings

Description /
Parameter Option Settings / Defaults
Applicable Rules
Facility Protection Group's Protection Switch
Mode. 1+1 Protection or Dual Active Receive
mode. Dual Active Receive allows traffic received 1+1
on both Network ports to be forwarded to the
Access ports. Data traffic in the Access to Net-
Mode work (A2N) direction are bridged to both Network
ports (as per the 1+1 protection mode). Changing
the protection mode from 1+1 to/from Dual Active Dual Active Receive
Receive requires first deleting the existing pro-
tection group (see above Note) - it cannot be
edited from one protection group mode to another.
Working Network-1
Selects the Working facility port.
Member Network-2
ERP-1--n (Create/Edit)
Note 1: To create an ERP, enter a right click on NE-1 and select Create ERP. To Edit/Delete an existing ERP,
enter a right click on the ERP entity and select Edit/Delete.

Note 2: Up to 2 ERP instances may be created on a system.

ERP Index
Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) index (EID). 1-n
(Create only)
User Label associated with the ERP instance. Up up to 64 characters
User Label
to 64 characters are allowed. (blank)
Defines the ERP administrative state. IS is In Ser-
vice and is the default value. See Entity State
Descriptions. IS

IS is normal operation. Management suppresses

alarms. Disabled initiates blocking on ring port 0
Admin-
and stops all RAPS processing and forwarding.
istrative Management
State The ERP instance must be in the Management or
Disabled state when modifying the following ERP
instance attributes: RAPS VLAN Tag, Ring Port
0/1, Ring Port 0/1 RPL Role, RAPS Ring ID, Disabled
RAPS MD Level and Sub-Ring without Virtual
Channel.

798 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 56: System Configuration Settings

Description /
Parameter Option Settings / Defaults
Applicable Rules
Node ID of the local system for this ERP
instance. The value is used as the Node ID in the
RAPS PDU.
For each node in the ring, a unique node ID
identifies each node. The node ID is the node's
MAC address. You can configure this node ID
when configuring the ring on the node or
RAPS Node Default values:
automatically select an ID such as STP. In most
ID DCN (eth0) MAC address
cases, you will not configure this and the router
will select a node ID, like STP does. It should be
the manufacturing MAC address. The ring node
ID should not be changed, even if you change the
manufacturing MAC address. Any MAC address
can be used if you make sure each node in the
ring has a different node ID.
Ring ID of this ERP instance. The value is used in
the destination address of the RAPS PDU. The
Ring ID is the unique identification of the ring.
Each node on a ring should be configured with the
RAPS Ring same RAPS Ring ID. It is also embedded in the
1-255
ID R-APS control frame sent between units.

The ERP instance must be in the Management or

Disabled state when modifying this ERP instance
attribute.
The VID value of the VLAN tag for transmitted/
received RAPS PDUs for this ERP instance. 1-4095
For each ring port, a dedicated signaling control
channel with a dedicated VLAN ID must be 4094
RAPS VLAN configured. Each node on a ring should be
Tag configured with the same control channel VLAN
ID.
0-7
The ERP instance must be in the Management or
Disabled state when modifying this ERP instance 7
attribute.
The VID value of the VLAN tag for
RAPS Tag
transmitted/received RAPS PDUs for this ERP 0x8100-0x88a8
EtherType
instance.
The MD (or MEG) level of the
transmitted/received RAPS PDUs for this ERP
instance. It is recommended set it at higher level
RAPS MD or same MD level as the Down MEP to allow RPL 0-7
Level failure CCMs.
1
The ERP instance must be in the Management or
Disabled state when modifying this ERP instance
attribute.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 799

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 56: System Configuration Settings

Description /
Parameter Option Settings / Defaults
Applicable Rules
Management Enabled
Selects whether this ERP instance is protecting
Tunnel Pro-
management Tunnels on the ring ports. Disabled
tection
Revertive control for the ring. Only applicable on Enabled
Revertive
the RPL Owner node. Disabled
The Guard Time value for this ERP instance.
Used by all nodes when changing state; the guard 10-2000 (ms)
Guard Time timer blocks latent outdated messages from
causing unnecessary state changes. Settable 500
from 10-2000ms in steps of 10ms.
The Wait-to-Restore (WTR) time value for this
Wait-to- ERP instance. The WTR timer is used to verify 1-12 (minutes)
Restore Time that the signal failure is not intermittent. Settable 5
from 1-12 minutes in steps of 1 minute.
The Hold-off Time value for this ERP instance. It
is used by the underlying Ethernet layer to filter
out intermittent link faults. Faults are reported to
Hold-off Time 0-10000 (ms)
the ring protection mechanism only if this timer
expires. Settable from 0-10000ms in steps of
100ms.
Indicates whether R-APS channel forms a closed
loop around the ring.
Enabled
If Enabled: no RAPS Virtual Channel (i.e., open
Sub-Ring ring).
without Vir- If Disabled: RAPS forms a closed loop (major ring
tual Channel or sub-ring with virtual channel).

The ERP instance must be in the Management or Disabled

Disabled state when modifying this ERP instance
attribute.
The ID of Ring Ports for this ERP instance (Ring
Port 0= the ID of Ring Port 1, Ring Port 1= the ID
of Ring Port 2).
Ring Port 0/1 (drop down list of available Network Ports)
The ERP instance must be in the Management or
Disabled state when modifying this ERP instance
attribute.

800 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 56: System Configuration Settings

Description /
Parameter Option Settings / Defaults
Applicable Rules
The Ring Protection Link (RPL) Role of Ring
Ports (Ring Port 0= the ID of Ring Port 1, Ring
Port 1= the ID of Ring Port 2).
Owner
Owner – owner or ERP ring instance, responsible
for blocking traffic over the RPL so that no loops
are formed in the Ethernet traffic. There can be
only one RPL owner in a ring.

Ring Port 0/1 Neighbor – An Ethernet ring node adjacent to the

Neighbor
RPL Role RPL owner. It is responsible for blocking its end of
the RPL under normal conditions. This node type
is optional and prevents RPL usage when
protected.

None – Other members ports.

None
The ERP instance must be in the Management or
Disabled state when modifying this ERP instance
attribute.
The ID of MEP monitoring Ring Ports for this ERP
instance (Ring Port 0= the ID of Ring Port 1, Ring
Port 1= the ID of Ring Port 2). Allows a None
tagged/untagged MEP to be used for port
monitoring (do not always use the port MEP).
Ring Port 0/1
Must be a Down MEP and must be associated
MEP
with the Network port identified in the associated
Ring Port (ringPort0/ringPort1). Provides added
value when RAPS and service frames are passed (drop down list of provisioned MEPs)
through intermediated nodes that do not
participate in this ERP instance.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 801

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 56: System Configuration Settings

Description /
Parameter Option Settings / Defaults
Applicable Rules
LAG

Create/Edit/Delete - See LAG Configuration Rules

SHG
NE-1
Note 1: To create a Split Horizon Group (SHG), enter a right click on NE-1 in the Selection Tree and select
Create SHG. To view/edit /delete an existing SHG, select the NE-1 entity in the Selection Tree (an SHG list dis-
plays in the Details Pane), enter a right click on the desired SHG EID and select View Configuration/Edit Con-
figuration/Delete.

Note 2: To Flush all forwarding table entries, enter a right click on the desired SHG EID in the Details Pane and
select Flush FDB. To view forwarding table entries, enter a right click on the desired SHG EID in the Details
Pane and select View FDB Entries.

Note 3: All members of an SHG must have the same value of Service Type.

Note 4: All members of an SHG must have the same value of C-Tags and S-Tags.
SHG Index

(Created The Index number of this SHG instance. 1 - 128

Only)
A text and/or number the user enters to uniquely up to 256 characters
Alias identify this entity. This string can be up to 256
printable ASCII characters long. (blank)
Select the member ports to form a Split Horizon
Group (SHG).

List of Member Ports in the SHG entity. Members

are added by selecting from the ‘Port’ drop down
list and clicking on ‘Add’. Members are deleted by
selecting the Member to be deleted from the Mem-
bers List and clicking on ‘Delete’.
Members/
l A Member List with a combination of Network (drop down list of applicable Network Ports
Members and Access Ports
Ports and Access Ports is not allowed.
Entry
l A Member List with a combination of Network
Ports and Access Port LAG is not allowed.
l A Member List with a combination of Access
Ports and Network Port LAG is not allowed.
l The ports used in ERP instance and
Protection Group cannot be selected as SHG
members.

802 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 56: System Configuration Settings

Description /
Parameter Option Settings / Defaults
Applicable Rules
Synchronization

(GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH))

NE-1
NTE114PRO SH / NTE114PRO CSH
SYNC-1-1-1-1 (Edit Sync)
A text and/or number string the user enters to
up to 64 characters
Alias uniquely identify this entity. This string can be up
(blank)
to 64 printable ASCII characters long.
Admin- Defines the SYNC administrative state. IS is In IS
istrative Service and is the default value. See Entity State
State Descriptions. Management
Network Option 1-SDH Regional Clock
Select the desired Network Clock Type.
Clock Type Option 2-SONET Regional Clock
Defines the network clock type. If a 2048kHz or
E1 is the desired BITS Line Type, then Network
Clock Type should be set to “Option 1". If a T1 is Option 1-SDH Regional Clock
the desired BITS Line Type, then Network Clock
Network Type should be set to “Option 2". AIS or LOF will
Clock Type be detected at the BITS interface endpoints if mis-
matches of the FSP 150CC's
Option 2-SONET Regional Clock
Network Clock Type and the FSP 150CC's line-
type are provisioned.
Time delay in minutes from the recovery of a
0-12
WTR Time clock source to its restoral as usable in an active
5
state.
Selection Defines what system is used to select the active Priority Mode
Mode clock source. QL Mode
SYNC-1-1-1-1 (Add Sync Reference)
Note: A valid Sync Reference source must first be configured and In Service prior to adding a Sync Reference.
Unique identifier of a sync reference entity. While
the Syncref Index is automatically indexed as
SYNCREF 1-4
sync references are added, a dropdown list of
Index 1
available indexes is provided for the user to select
the desired one.
A text and/or number string the user enters to
up to 64 characters
Alias uniquely identify this entity. This string can be up
(blank)
to 64 printable ASCII characters long.
Sets the priority for a sync reference. If the Selec-
1-10
Priority tion Mode is set to ‘Priority Mode’ this setting is
1
used to determine the sync reference hierarchy.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 803

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 56: System Configuration Settings

Description /
Parameter Option Settings / Defaults
Applicable Rules
Dropdown list of available sync references. The
Sync Refer- Network Port, Access Port, Telecom Slave or (drop down list of provisioned Sync Reference
ence BITS-IN has to be configured for Sync-E oper- sources)
Sources ation and be in a proper administration state to
appear on the dropdown list.
SYNC-1-1-1-1 (Edit Sync Reference)
When BITS-IN, Telecom Slave, a Network Port or
Access Port has been added as a Sync
Select Ref Reference, their interface becomes available to (list of provisioned Sync Reference sources)
choose from the menu list by selecting its radio
button to edit Priority and/or Alias.
If a displayed Sync Ref Eid has its Select Ref
Priority radio button selected, the user can select a new 1-10
Priority from the dropdown list.
If a displayed Sync Ref Eid has its Select Ref
radio button selected, the user can edit the text
up to 64 characters
Alias and/or number string to uniquely identify this
(blank)
entity. This string can be up to 64 printable ASCII
characters long.
SYNC-1-1-1-1 (Delete Sync Reference)
When a Network Port, Access Port, Telecom
Slave or BITS-IN has been added as a Sync
Select Ref Reference, their interface becomes available to (list of provisioned Sync Reference sources)
delete from the reference list by selecting its radio
button.
TIME CLOCK-1-1-1-1 (Edit)
A text and/or number string the user enters to
up to 64 characters
Alias uniquely identify this entity. This string can be up
(blank)
to 64 printable ASCII characters long.
Defines the SYNC administrative state. IS is In Unassigned
Admin-
Service and is the default value. See Entity State IS
istrative
Descriptions. Management
Time delay in minutes from the recovery of a 0 - 12 (minutes)
WTR Time clock source to its restoral as usable in an active
state. 5
Selection
Specify Active time reference selection mode. Priority Mode
Mode
500
Time Hol-
1000
dover Per- Set required holdover performance of the Time
1500
formance Clock in nanoseconds.
5000
(ns)
10000
Specify whether Time Clock output can serve as
Disabled
Sync Ref a Sync reference of the Sync entity in order to
Candidate prevent timing loop. Currently, it can only be set to
Enabled
Disabled.

804 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 56: System Configuration Settings

Description /
Parameter Option Settings / Defaults
Applicable Rules
QL-NONE
QL-PRS
QL- STU
QL- ST2
Select the Expected Quality Level used when
Expected QL QL-TNC
Time Clock serves as Sync reference.
QL- ST3E
QL-EEC2
QL- SMC
QL- PROV
TIME CLOCK-1-1-1-1 (Add Time Clock Reference)
Note:

1. A valid Sync Reference source must first be configured and In Service prior to adding a Sync Reference.

2. The GPS input must first be configured and In Service prior to adding to a Sync Reference.

3. A Telecom Slave may also be added as a Sync Reference.

4. Up to 2 Sync References are supported at the same time.

Unique identifier of a time clock reference entity.
While the Syncref Index is automatically indexed
TIMEREF
as sync references are added, a dropdown list of 1
Index
available indexes is provided for the user to select
the desired one.
A text and/or number string the user enters to
up to 64 characters
Alias uniquely identify this entity. This string can be up
(blank)
to 64 printable ASCII characters long.
Sets the priority for a sync reference. If the Selec-
1-10
Priority tion Mode is set to ‘Priority Mode’ this setting is
1
used to determine the sync reference hierarchy.
Dropdown list of available sync references. GPS
Time Clock GPS-1-1-1-1
input, Telecom Slave or System Sync Domain
Reference
(SYNC-1-1-1-1) may serve as a Time Clock Sync
Sources
Reference.
TIME CLOCK-1-1-1-1 (Edit Time Clock Reference)
Select the radio button for the corresponding Time
Select Ref (list of provisioned Sync Reference sources)
Clock Reference to be edited.
Priority Set the priority for this Time Clock Reference. 1-10
A text and/or number string the user enters to
up to 64 characters
Alias uniquely identify this entity. This string can be up
(blank)
to 64 printable ASCII characters long.
TIME CLOCK-1-1-1-1 (Delete Time Clock Reference)
Select the radio button for the corresponding Time
Select Ref (list of provisioned Sync Reference sources)
Clock Reference to be deleted.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 805

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 56: System Configuration Settings

Description /
Parameter Option Settings / Defaults
Applicable Rules
BITS-1
BITS-IN (Edit Configuration)
A text and/or number string the user enters to
up to 64 characters
Alias uniquely identify this entity. This string can be up
(blank)
to 64 printable ASCII characters long.
Defines the SYNC administrative state. See Unassigned
Admin-
Entity State Descriptions. BITS will not show up
istrative IS
as a potential synchronization reference if the
State Management
administration state is set to Unassigned.
Sets the BITS line type. If a 2048kHz or E1 is the
desired BITS Line Type, then Network Clock E1
Type should be set to “Option 1". If a T1 is the
desired BITS Line Type, then Network Clock
Type should be set to “Option 2". AIS or LOF will
Line Type T1
be detected at the BITS interface endpoints if mis-
matches of the FSP 150CC's Network Clock
Type and the FSP 150CC's line-type are pro-
visioned. Line Type should be set prior to select- 2048 kHz
ing other BITS IN Configuration options.
Sets the BITS line code. If Line Type is set to E1, E1 HDB3
then the options available are E1 HDB3 and E1
E1 AMI
Line Code AMI. If Line Type is set to T1, then the options
available are T1 B8ZS and T1 AMI. If Line Type is T1 B8ZS
set to 2048 kHz, then this option is not applicable. T1 AMI
Sets the BITS Frame Format. If Line Type is set E1 Unframed
to E1, then the options available are E1
E1 CRC4
Unframed, E1 CRC4 and E1 DualFrame. If Line
Frame
Type is set to T1, then the options available are E1 DualFrame
Format
T1 SuperFrame and T1 Extended- SuperFrame. If
T1 SuperFrame
Line Type is set to 2048 kHz, then this option is
not applicable. T1 Extended- SuperFrame
None
Bit 4
Select the Signalling Associated (SA) Bit. SA Bit Bit 5
SA Bit
is only applicable if Line Type is set to E1. Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Set the Quality Level Mode. If Line Type is set to Disabled
QL Mode
2048 kHz, then this option is not applicable. Enabled
QL-NONE
QL-PRC
Assumed QL Set the Assumed Quality Level. QL-SSU-A
QL-SSU-B
QL-EEC1

806 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 56: System Configuration Settings

Description /
Parameter Option Settings / Defaults
Applicable Rules
QL-NONE
QL-PRC
Set the Expected Quality Level. If Line Type is set
Expected QL QL-SSU-A
to 2048 kHz, then this option is not applicable.
QL-SSU-B
QL-EEC1
BITS-OUT (Edit Configuration)
A text and/or number string the user enters to
up to 64 characters
Alias uniquely identify this entity. This string can be up
(blank)
to 64 printable ASCII characters long.
Admin- Unassigned
istrative Defines the BITS-Out administrative state. IS
State Management
Sets the BITS line type. If a 2048kHz or E1 is the
desired BITS Line Type, then Network Clock E1
Type should be set to “Option 1". If a T1 is the
desired BITS Line Type, then Network Clock
Type should be set to “Option 2". AIS or LOF will
Line Type T1
be detected at the BITS interface endpoints if mis-
matches of the FSP 150CC's Network Clock
Type and the FSP 150CC's line-type are pro-
visioned. Line Type should be set prior to select- 2048 kHz
ing other BITS OUT Configuration options.
Sets the BITS line code. If Line Type is set to E1, E1 HDB3
then the options available are E1 HDB3 and E1
E1 AMI
Line Code AMI. If Line Type is set to T1, then the options
available are T1 B8ZS and T1 AMI. If Line Type is T1 B8ZS
set to 2048 kHz, then this option is not applicable. T1 AMI
Sets the BITS Frame Format. If Line Type is set E1 CRC4
to E1, then the options available are E1
Unframed, E1 CRC4 and E1 DualFrame. If Line E1 DualFrame
Frame
Type is set to T1, then the options available are
Format
T1 SuperFrame and T1 Extended- SuperFrame. If T1 SuperFrame
Line Type is set to 2048 kHz, then this option is
not applicable. T1 Extended- SuperFrame
Bit 4
Bit 5
Select the Signaling Associated (SA) Bit. SA Bit Bit 6
SA Bit
is only applicable if Line Type is set to E1. Bit 7
Bit 8
Set the Quality Level Mode. If Line Type is set to Disabled
QL Mode
2048 kHz, then this option is not applicable. Enabled

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 807

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 56: System Configuration Settings

Description /
Parameter Option Settings / Defaults
Applicable Rules
Set the Squelch Quality Level. The Squelch QL QL-NONE
attribute is used to define the minimum QL that
QL-PRC
the system timing can accept. If the system tim-
ing QL drops below this selected value, the BITS- QL-SSU-A
Squelch QL
OUT is turned off (i.e., no BITS-OUT signal is QL-SSU-B
provided). QL-EEC1
QL-DNU
0-133 Ft
133-266 Ft
266-399 Ft
Line Build Option to set impedance for cable length or dB. 339-533 Ft
Out Only applicable if Line Type is “T1”. 533-655 Ft
7.5 dB
15 dB
22.5 dB
CLK-1-1-1-1 (Edit Configuration)
A text and/or number string the user enters to
up to 64 characters
Alias uniquely identify this entity. This string can be up
(blank)
to 64 printable ASCII characters long.
Unassigned
Admin-
Define the CLK Administrative State. IS
istrative
Management
Signal Dir-
Specify the signal direction on this port. Output
ection
Frequency Source Equipment Identifier. Drop
None
down list of available PTP reference sources. The
Frequency
Telecom Slave has to be configured for PTP oper-
Source EID (drop down list of available Frequency Source
ation and be in a proper admin state to appear on
EIDs)
the drop down list.
A hierarchy to be established for Squelch control
of the CLK timing interfaces. The hierarchy is as Never
follows:

l NEVER, where the output is never squelched Holdover

Squelch l HOLDOVER, where output is squelched only
Control in freerun state
Lock
l LOCK, where output is squelched in holdover
and freerun states
l Squelch QL, where output is squelched only Squelch QL
based on Squelch QL.

808 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 56: System Configuration Settings

Description /
Parameter Option Settings / Defaults
Applicable Rules
Set the Squelch Quality Level. The Squelch QL QL-NONE
attribute is used to define the minimum QL that QL-PRC
the system timing can accept. If the system QL-SSU-A
Squelch QL
timing QL drops below this selected value, the QL-SSU-B
CLK-1-1-1-1 is turned off (i.e., no output signal is QL-EEC1
provided). This option is only selectable when
Squelch Control is set to Squelch QL. QL-DNU
PPS-1-1-1-1 / PPS-1-1-1-2 (Edit Configuration)
A text and/or number string the user enters to
up to 64 characters
Alias uniquely identify this entity. This string can be up
(blank)
to 64 printable ASCII characters long.
Unassigned
Admin-
Define the PPS Administrative State. IS
istrative
Management
Specify the signal direction on this port. PPS-1-1- Output (PPS-1-1-1-1 only)
Signal Dir-
1-2 can only be used for input direction spe-
ection Input
cifically for SyncJack probe.
Configure the PPS port input delay compensation,
Cable Delay
which is used when PPS source does not allow
Com- 0 - 80 (nsec)
delay compensation configuration or PPS dis-
pensation
tribution equipment is used.
Select the clock source for the PPS output. Drop
down list of available PTP reference sources. The
Telecom Slave or Time Clock has to be con- (drop down list of available Source Eids)
Source Eid
figured for PTP operation and be in a proper admin
state to appear on the drop down list. This option
is only available for PPS-1-1-1-1.
A hierarchy to be established for Squelch control
of the PPS timing interfaces. The hierarchy is as Never
follows:

l NEVER, where the output is never squelched

Holdover
Squelch l HOLDOVER, where output is squelched only
Control in freerun state
l LOCK, where output is squelched in holdover Lock
and freerun states
l Squelch QL, where output is squelched only
based on Squelch QL. Squelch QL
l This option is only available for PPS-1-1-1-1.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 809

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 56: System Configuration Settings

Description /
Parameter Option Settings / Defaults
Applicable Rules
Set the Squelch Quality Level. The Squelch QL QL-NONE
attribute is used to define the minimum QL that QL-PRC
Squelch QL the system timing can accept. If the system tim- QL-SSU-A
ing QL drops below this selected value, the PPS- QL-SSU-B
1-1-1-1 is turned off (i.e., no output signal is QL-EEC1
provided). This option is only selectable when
Squelch Control is set to Squelch QL. This option QL-DNU
is only available for PPS-1-1-1-1.
TOD-1-1-1-1 (Edit Configuration)
A text and/or number string the user enters to
up to 64 characters
Alias uniquely identify this entity. This string can be up
(blank)
to 64 printable ASCII characters long.
Define the TOD Administrative State. Unassigned
Admin-
IS
istrative
Management
Time of Day Source Equipment Identifier. Drop
None
down list of available PTP reference sources. The
Time of Day
Telecom Slave or Time Clock has to be con-
Source Eid (drop down list of valid Time of Day Source
figured for PTP operation and be in a proper admin
EIDs)
state to appear on the drop down list.
A hierarchy to be established for Squelch control
of TOD timing interface. The hierarchy is as Never
follows:

l NEVER, where the output is never squelched Holdover

Squelch l HOLDOVER, where output is squelched only
Control in freerun state
Lock
l LOCK, where output is squelched in holdover
and freerun states
l Squelch QL, where output is squelched only Squelch QL
based on Squelch QL.
Set the Squelch Quality Level. The Squelch QL QL-NONE
attribute is used to define the minimum QL that QL-PRC
the system timing can accept. If the system tim- QL-SSU-A
Squelch QL
ing QL drops below this selected value, the CLK- QL-SSU-B
1-1-1-1 is turned off (i.e., no output signal is QL-EEC1
provided). QL-DNU
GPS-1-1-1-1 (Edit Configuration)
A text and/or number string the user enters to
up to 64 characters
Alias uniquely identify this entity. This string can be up
(blank)
to 64 printable ASCII characters long.
Unassigned
Admin-
Define the GPS Administrative State. IS
istrative
Management

810 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 56: System Configuration Settings

Description /
Parameter Option Settings / Defaults
Applicable Rules
PPS gen-
eration con- 3SATS
Define how many satellites should be detected
dition before PPS signal is generated.
1SAT

Antenna 0 - 100
Select the proper cable length attached to the
Cable
antenna. 5
Length, m
GPS Only
GNSS Sys-
Select the type of GNSS system used. GLONASS Only
tem
GPS And GLONASS
Installation Full Sky View
Defines the GNSS antenna type.
Type Limited Sky View
QL-SSU-A
Profiles
Priority Mapping Profile (Create/Edit Priority Mapping Profile)
Priority Mapping Profile identifier. The system
Priority Map
provides a default 802.1p mode priority mapping
Profile 1-8
profile as default. The system allows up to 8 pro-
(Create only)
files.
Enter an alias for this profile using 1 - 64 char-
acters. The profile name will show up in the EVPL
Name (blank)
port/flow Priority Mapping Profile drop-down list.
This option is mandatory.
802.1p
Priority Map Defines the Priority Map mode. It identifies the
IP-TOS
Mode lookup criteria for the priority mapping table.
IP-DSCP
Select the COS Mapping mode:
Ethernet
l if COS mapping is for Ethernet frames, only
COS Map Outer/Inner Tag Priority can be specified;
Mode
l if COS mapping is for EoMPLS packets, only
EoMPLS Outer Tag, Outer EXP and Inner EoMPLS
EXP can be specified.
Priority Map Index Selection. The following 0 to 7
ranges of Indexes are: 0...7 if Priority Map Mode (802.1p or IP-TOS)
In Priority
is set to 802.1p or IP-TOS; 0...63 if Priority Map
Mode is set to IP-DSCP. 0 to 63 (IP-DSCP)
X-Tag Priority Control. This parameter controls
the behavior of the Priority portion of the frame. If None
Priority Con- NONE is selected, the incoming priority bits are
trol left unchanged. If SWAP is selected, the incom-
ing priority bits are changed by the value specified Swap
in the X-Tag Priority parameter.
This parameter defines the new priority bits to be
New Priority 0 to 7
used. Valid only if Priority Control is set to Swap.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 811

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 56: System Configuration Settings

Description /
Parameter Option Settings / Defaults
Applicable Rules
Class Of Service (COS) Policer. Allows the
COS incoming traffic to be steered to the appropriate 0 to 7
EVC Ingress Policer.
Specifies whether the flow participates in Eth-
ernet inner-tag priority swap. The Priority Mapping
Inner Tag Pri- Table allows the A2N inner-tag priority to be spe-
0 to 7
ority cified based on incoming priority at the Access
Port (based on the priority mapping mode -
802.1P, TOS, DSCP).
Specifies whether the flow participates in Eth-
ernet outer-tag priority swap. The Priority Mapping
Outer Tag Pri- Table allows the A2N outer-tag priority to be spe-
0 to 7
ority cified based on incoming priority at the Access
Port (based on the priority mapping mode -
802.1P, TOS, DSCP).
Specifies whether the flow participate in EoMPLS
Outer S-Tag priority swap. The Priority Mapping
EoMPLS
Table allows the A2N EoMPLS Outer S-Tag pri-
Outer Tag Pri- 0 to 7
ority to be specified based on incoming priority at
ority
the Access Port (based on the priority mapping
mode - 802.1P, TOS, DSCP).
Specifies whether the flow participates the
EoMPLS Outer Label EXP swap. The Priority
Mapping Table allows the A2N EoMPLS outer
Outer EXP 0 to 7
label priority to be specified based on incoming pri-
ority at the Access Port (based on the priority map-
ping mode - 802.1P, TOS, DSCP).
Specifies whether the flow participates the
EoMPLS Inner Label EXP swap. The Priority Map-
ping Table allows the A2N EoMPLS inner label pri-
Inner EXP 0 to 7
ority to be specified based on incoming priority at
the Access Port (based on the priority mapping
mode - 802.1P, TOS, DSCP).
Communications

Static Route (Add Static Route) (see Note)

Defines the IP address of the destination. The
valid values are the IPv4 addresses. The IP
Dest IP
address of [Link] is reserved for default routes. [Link]
Address
You can only enter the static default route of
[Link] if the system default router is [Link].
Defines the subnet mask for the destination. The
valid values are IPv4 mask. If you set the IP
Subnet Mask [Link]
address to [Link], the only available choice for
subnet mask is [Link].

812 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 56: System Configuration Settings

Description /
Parameter Option Settings / Defaults
Applicable Rules
Defines the IP address of the next hop for remote
Gateway IP destinations. For the routes reachable directly
[Link]
Address from the specified interface, this value should be
[Link].
Interface eth0
Defines the interface to create a static route.
Name Configured Management Tunnel entries
Metric Metric of the route. 0 to 65,535
Defines whether the static route is to be advert-
Enabled
Advertise ised or not. When selected, the static route will be
Route advertised on every other interface that has RIP
Disabled
enabled.
Note: To view Static Routes, select the Static Routes tab. To delete an existing Static Route, enter a right click
on the Communication entity in the Selection Tree and select Delete Static Route, then select the desired static
route to delete, then select OK.
Static ARP Entry (Add Static ARP Entry) (see Note)
IP Address to be added to the Address Resolution
IP Address [Link]
Protocol entry.
Media Access Control Address to be added to the [Link]
MAC
ARP entry. MAC addresses are hard-coded at the
Address hh:hh:hh:hh:hh:hh
factory.
Interface eth0
Defines the interface to create the ARP entry.
Name Configured Management Tunnel entries
Note: To view Static ARP Entries, select the Static ARP Entries tab. To delete an existing Static ARP Entry,
enter a right click on the Communication entity in the Selection Tree and select Delete Static ARP Entry, then
select the desired static ARP entry to delete, then select OK.
IPv6 Static Route (Add IPv6 Static Route)
Enter a valid IPv6 unicast address for the des-
tination to be added. The IP address of
[Link]/64 [Link]
000
is reserved for default routes. You can only enter
Destination
the static default route of /64
[Link]

if the system default router is

[Link].
Define the IPv6 address for the Gateway of the
management interface. For the routes reachable
directly from the specified interface, this value
Gateway IP should be [Link]
Address [Link]. For 000
the routes unreachable directly from the specified
interface, this value is the IP address of the next
hop and should not be all zero.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 813

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 56: System Configuration Settings

Description /
Parameter Option Settings / Defaults
Applicable Rules
Define an IPv6 management interface to create a
static route. The management interfaces in IPv6
Interface mode will automatically appear in the drop-down (drop down list of valid IPv6 management
Name list for selection. If Management Traffic Bridging interface EIDs)
is enabled, only eth0 if configured with IPv6 uni-
cast address is allowed for Interface Name.
Specify the Metric as the priority for the route to 0 - 65535
Metric
be added. 1
Advertise Enable or Disable advertising the route to the next Disabled
Route hop. Enabled
Note: To view IPv6 Static Routes, select the IPv6 Static Routes tab. To delete an existing IPv6 Static Route,
enter a right click on the Communication entity in the Selection Tree and select Delete IPv6 Static Route, then
select the desired IPv6 static route to delete, then select OK.
IPv6 Static Neighbor Entry (Add IPv6 Static Neighbor Entry)
Enter a valid IPv6 unicast address for a target [Link]
IP Address
Neighbor to be added. 000
Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP) will resolve
MAC
the MAC address entered for the target IP [Link]
Address
address.
Select an IPv6 management interface to create a
neighbor entry. The management interfaces in
IPv6 mode will automatically appear in the drop-
Interface (drop down list of valid IPv6 management
down list for selection. If Management Traffic
Name interface EIDs)
Bridging is enabled, only eth0 if configured with
IPv6 unicast address is allowed for Interface
Name.
Note: To view IPv6 Static Neighbor Entry, select the IPv6 Static Neighbor Entry tab. To delete an existing IPv6
Static Neighbor Entry, enter a right click on the Communication entity in the Selection Tree and select Delete
IPv6 Static Neighbor Entry, then select the desired IPv6 static neighbor entry to delete, then select OK.
IPv6 Static Proxy ND Entry (Add IPv6 Static Proxy ND Entry)
[Link]
Enter a valid IPv6 unicast address for the static 000
IP Address
proxy to be added.
/128
Select an IPv6 management interface to create a
static proxy neighbor entry. The management
interfaces in IPv6 mode will automatically appear (drop down list of valid IPv6 management
Interface
in the drop-down list for selection. If Management interface EIDs)
Name
Traffic Bridging is enabled, only eth0 if configured
with IPv6 unicast address is allowed for Interface
Name.
Note: To view IPv6 Static Proxy ND Entry, select the IPv6 Static Proxy ND Entry tab. To delete an existing
IPv6 Static Proxy ND Entry, enter a right click on the Communication entity in the Selection Tree and select
Delete IPv6 Static Proxy ND Entry, then select the desired IPv6 static proxy ND entry to delete, then select
OK.

814 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 56: System Configuration Settings

Description /
Parameter Option Settings / Defaults
Applicable Rules
Source Address Config (Edit Source Address Config)
Specifies whether the System IP Address or the Outgoing Interface IP
Address
Outgoing IP Interface's Address should be used in
Type System IP Address
outgoing IP PDUs.
Specifies the IP interface name when Address
Source
Type is set to “System IP Address.” The IP
Address Inter-
Address associated with the IP interface name is
face Name Configured Management Tunnel entries
set as the source IP Address in outgoing PDUs.
Snmp v1 Specifies the IP interface name, which will be eth0
Interface used in the SNMPv1 TRAP PDUs as the Agent's
Name IP Address. Configured Management Tunnel entries
DCN (eth0) (Edit Configuration)
IPv4 Only
IP Mode Select the desired IP mode setting for DCN port. IPv6 Only
IPv4 and IPv6
IP Address for the Data Communications Net-
work. This option is not applicable if DHCP is set
IP Address [Link]
to Enabled and DHCP Role is set to DHCP Cli-
ent.
Defines the subnet mask for the Data Com-
munications Network. This option is not applic-
able if DHCP is set to Enabled and DHCP Role is
Netmask set to DHCP Client. If DHCP is Enabled and [Link]
DHCP Role is set to DHCP Server, the Netmask
determines the number of IP addresses available
for assignment.
Allows setting/disabling of Routing Information Enabled
RIPv2
Protocol V2 packets. Disabled
Defines whether Dynamic Host Configuration Pro-
tocol is enabled or disabled. If this interface is set Enabled
to Enabled and DHCP Role is set to DHCP Cli-
DHCP
ent, the GE11xPro sends a broadcast query
requesting IP address information from a DHCP Disabled
server.
Defines whether Dynamic Host Configuration Pro-
tocol Role is as a server or a client. Servers
assign IP addresses, Clients receive addresses. DHCP Server
This option is only applicable if DHCP is set to
DHCP Role Enabled.
If the DHCP Role is set to DHCP Server, the user
must Disable and then Enable DHCP for the ini- DHCP Client
tialization of the server function (IP Address
range) to take place.
Enable or Disable transmitting DHCP Client ID Disabled
DHCP Client
(DHCP Option 61) if configured in DHCP request
ID Control Enabled
to the DHCP server.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 815

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 56: System Configuration Settings

Description /
Parameter Option Settings / Defaults
Applicable Rules
Select a desired DHCP Client ID type when
DHCP Client ID Control is Enabled. If MAC MAC Address
Address is selected, the DCN MAC Address will
be used as DHCP Client ID automatically; if Sys-
DHCP Client
tem Name is selected, the System Name shown System Name
ID Type
in System Detail Pane will be used as DHCP Cli-
ent ID; if User Defined is selected, user is allowed
to enter a customized name as the DHCP Client User Defined
ID.
This option shows or allows the entry of DHCP
Client ID. If DHCP Client ID Type is MAC
Address or System Name, this option is not edit-
DHCP Client (Default as DCN MAC address or System
able, as a value corresponding to the selected Cli-
ID Name, dependent of last operation)
ent ID Type will be used automatically; if DHCP
Client ID Type is User Defined, user is allowed to
enter a customized string up to 254 characters.
Enable or Disable transmitting DHCP Class ID
(DHCP Option 60) if configured in DHCP request
Enabled
to the DHCP server. The Class ID is a non-user
DHCP Class definable string. The format is like: <vendor fixed
ID Control string><space><inventory product name>

e.g: “ADVA FSP150CC-GE112” for the GE112, Disabled

with the same format used for other products.
DHCP Host Enable or Disable transmitting DHCP Host Name Enabled
Name Con- (DHCP Option 12) if configured in DHCP request
trol to the DHCP server. Disabled
Select a desired DHCP Host Name Type when
DHCP Host Name Control is enabled. If System
System Name
Name is selected, the System Name shown in
DHCP Host gray (same as the System Name in System
Name Type Detail Pane) will be used as the DHCP Host
Name; if User Defined is selected, use is allowed
User Defined
to enter a customized name as the DHCP Host
Name.
This option shows or allows the entry of DHCP
Host Name. If DHCP Host Name Type is System FSP150-GE11xPro
DHCP Host Name, this option is not editable, as the System
Name Name will be used automatically; if DHCP Host
Name Type is User Defined, user is allowed to User-defined string
enter a customized string up to 254 characters.
DHCP
Enabled
Vendor Enable or disable sending Vendor information on a
Information Management Tunnel.
Disabled
Control

816 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 56: System Configuration Settings

Description /
Parameter Option Settings / Defaults
Applicable Rules
DHCP
The type of information to be transmitted as System Name
Vendor
Vendor information in Management Tunnel. The
Information
default is System Name. User Defined
Type
DHCP A custom Vendor Information to be sent out. The 0- 248 characters
Vendor default setting is the same as system name. Sys-
Information tem name is configured at Network Element level. <system name>
DHCP Log
Enable or Disable receiving the DHCP Log Server Disabled
Server Con-
(DHCP Option 7) list sent by the DHCP server. Enabled
trol
DHCP NTP Enable or Disable receiving the DHCP NTP Disabled
Server Con- Server (DHCP Option 42) list sent by the DHCP
trol server. Enabled
Edit System Selecting the checkbox allows editing the Gate-
Default Gate- way IP Address. Only applicable if DHCP is Dis- (checkbox, unselected)
way abled.
Gateway IP Enter a Gateway IP Address if the “Edit System
(grayed out)
Address Default Gateway” checkbox is selected.
Enter an IPv6 unicast address for the DCN port. [Link]
IPv6 Unicast 000
This option is only applicable when DHCPv6 is
Address
disabled and DHCPv6 Role is Client. /0
When the NE is working in router mode (IPv6 For-
Stateless Disabled
warding enabled), this option must be Disabled.
Address Auto
When the NE is working in host mode (IPv6 For-
Configuration Enabled
warding disabled), this option can be Enabled.
Defines whether Dynamic Host Configuration Pro-
tocol (DHCP) is enabled or disabled. If this inter- Disabled
face is set to Enabled and DHCP Role is set to
DHCPv6
DHCP Client, the GE11xPro sends a broadcast
query requesting IPv6 address information from a Enabled
DHCP server.
Defines whether Dynamic Host Configuration Pro-
tocol Role in IPv6 Network is as a server or a cli-
DHCP Client
ent. Servers assign IP addresses, Clients receive
DHCPv6 addresses. This option is only applicable if DHCP
Role is set to Enabled. If the DHCP Role is set to
DHCP Server, the user must Disable and then
DHCP Server
Enable DHCPv6 for the initialization of the server
function (IP Address range) to take place.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 817

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 56: System Configuration Settings

Description /
Parameter Option Settings / Defaults
Applicable Rules
Allows setting/disabling of Routing Information
Protocol next generation (RIPng) packets. When
RIPng is enabled on an IPv6 interface, the inter- Disabled
face receive the IPv6 route entry on the link and
RIPng update local route table. The interface also sends
local learned IPv6 route entry to the link via mul-
ticast Enabled

packets.
Whether to Advertise prefix to link in router mode.
Disabled
This is only applicable when IPv6 Forwarding is
IPv6 RA Pre- enabled on System level. This option and State-
fix Enabled less Address Auto Configuration are mutually
exclusive; they cannot be both Enabled at the Enabled
same time.
[Link]
IPv6 RA Pre- The IPv6 Prefix to be dispatched to link in Router 000
fix mode.
/0
Edit System
Selecting the checkbox allows editing the Gate-
Default Gate- (checkbox unselected)
way IPv6 Address.
way
Gateway Enter a Gateway IPv6 Address if the “Edit Sys-
(grayed out)
IPv6 Address tem Default Gateway” checkbox is selected.
USB DCN - Edit WiFi Dongle Inet Interface (Not apply to GO102Pro(S) or GO102Pro(SP))
Configure the IP Address for the WiFi Dongle
IP Address [Link]
(WiFi interface).
Network Configure the subnetwork mask for the WiFi
[Link]
Mask Dongle.
IP Address Configure the start IP address in the same subnet
(blank)
Pool From for the clients.
IP Address Configure the end IP address in the same subnet
(blank)
Pool To for the clients.
AMP Configuration

Create/Edit AMP Client

Note 1: To create an AMP Client, enter a right click on AMP Configuration in the Selection Tree and select
Create Client. To view/edit/delete an existing AMP Client Configuration, select AMP Configuration in the Selec-
tion Tree (an AMP EDI list displays in the Details Pane), enter a right click on the AMP Client EID and select
View/Edit/Delete.

Note 2: EFM-OAM must be enabled on the AMP Client management tunnel interface in order to send and
receive AMP protocol messages.
AMP Id Automatic Management Provisioning (AMP)
AMP-1 through AMP-255
(Create Only) entity identifier.

818 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 56: System Configuration Settings

Description /
Parameter Option Settings / Defaults
Applicable Rules
EID of the port this instance is associated with.
Port EID Network Ports in LAG or 1+1 protection group are
(dropdown list of provisioned Network Ports
treated as a single logical port. Access Ports in
(Create Only) LAG or protection group are denied for this con- and Access Ports)
figuration.
Enable or disable AMP Client’s sending AMP Disabled
Control
request to the AMP Server. Enabled
AMP Configure (Create Server)
Note 1: To create an AMP server, enter a right click on AMP Configuration in the Selection Tree and select
Create Server. To view/edit/delete an existing AMP Server configuration, select AMP Configuration in the Selec-
tion Tree (an AMP EID list displays in the Details Pane), enter a right click on the AMP Server EID and select
View/Edit/Delete. Select View to observe AMP Statistics.

Note 2: EMF-OAM must be enabled on the AMP Server management tunnel interface in order to send and
receive AMP protocol messages.
AMP Id Automatic Management Provisioning (AMP)
AMP-1 through AMP-255
(Create only) entity identifier.
EID of the port this instance is associated with.
Network Ports in LAG or 1+1 protection group are
Port EID (dropdown list of provisioned Network ports
treated as a single logical port. Access Ports in
(Create only) and Access Ports)
LAG or protection group are denied for this con-
figuration.
Enable or disable Server Automatic Management Disabled
Control
Provisioning. Enabled
Remote Sys- Remote system name, a string of 1 - 255 char-
(empty)
tem Name acters.
Remote Sys-
tem IP Remote system’s IPv4 Address. [Link]
Address
Remote Sys-
Remote system IP Mask. [Link]
tem IP Mask
Remote Sys-
tem Def Gate- Remote system default gateway. [Link]
way
Remote Tun-
Remote Tunnel Index. 1 - 255
nel Index
Remote Tun- Alphanumeric tunnel interface name of 1 - 15 char-
(empty)
nel Name acters.
Remote Tun- Identify whether the tunnel is VLAN based or VLAN Based
nel Type MAC based. MAC Based
Remote Tun-
nel IP Remote tunnel IP Address. 0.0,0.0
Address
Remote Tun-
Remote tunnel IP Mask. [Link]
nel IP Mask
Remote Tun-
Remote tunnel VLAN ID. 1 - 4095
nel VLAN ID

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 819

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 56: System Configuration Settings

Description /
Parameter Option Settings / Defaults
Applicable Rules
Remote Tun- Disabled
nel S-Vlan Enable or disable remote tunnel S-Tag VLAN.
Enabled Enabled
Remote tunnel S-Tag VLAN ID. This option is dis-
Remote Tun-
abled if Remote Tunnel S-Vlan Enabled option is 1 - 4095
nel S-Vlan ID
disabled.
Remote Tun- Disabled
nel Rip2Pkts Enable or disable remote tunnel RIPv2 Packets.
Enabled Enabled
Remote Tun-
Remote Tunnel COS. 0-7
nel COS
Remote Tun-
Remote tunnel CIR in bits-per-second. 256000
nel CIR
Remote Tun-
Remote tunnel EIR in bits-per-second. 768000
nel EIR
Remote Tun-
nel Buffer Remote tunnel Buffer Size in KiloBytes. 32
Size
Remote Tun-
Remote tunnel encapsulation type. Only Ethernet
nel Encap- Ethernet
is supported.
sulation Type
Create / Edit / Delete Management Tunnels (see Management Tunnel Configuration Options and Rules)
Create / Edit / Delete IPv6 over IPv4 Tunnels (see IPv6 over IPv4 Tunnel Configuration Options and Rules)
SNMP

Add / Delete Community (see Note)

Community public
Entry for the valid Community Name.
Name private
Read Only (public)
Access Type Defines the access type.
Read/Write (private)
Note: To delete an existing Community Name, enter a right click on the SNMP entity in the Selection Tree and
select Delete Community. Then select the desired Community Name from the selection list and select OK.
Add / Delete Target Address (see Note)
Target User defined text/number string used to identify
up to 32 characters
Address this target address. Entry can be up to 32 char-
(blank)
Name acters long.
Transport
IPv4 address [Link]
Address
Port of the SNMP trap receiver. User must make 1 - 65535
Port sure that the port to use is not being occupied by
other protocol. 162
Selectable list of user defined target parameter Selectable list of user defined target parameter
Target
names. The associated Target Parameters must names
Params
first be entered prior to selecting this option. See
Name (blank)
Add / Delete Target Parameters (see Note).

820 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 56: System Configuration Settings

Description /
Parameter Option Settings / Defaults
Applicable Rules
Timeout Length of time to wait before timeout occurs in
1500
[1/100 s] 1/100s of a second.
Retry Count How many times to retry. 3
Drop-down list to select the desired type of tag list
for this target address (manager). If trap is selec- info
ted, the manager will not send acknowledgment to
Tag List the agent upon receiving the trap message; if info
is selected, the manager will send acknow-
ledgment to the agent upon receiving the inform trap
message.
SNMP Dying Whether or not SNMP dying gasp is enabled on Enabled
Gasp the agent. Disabled
Note: Up to 10 Target addresses are supported. To delete an existing Target Address, right click the SNMP
entity in the Selection Tree, select Delete Target Address, select a Target Address from the selection list, and
click OK.
Add / Delete Target Parameters (see Note)
User defined text/number string used to identify up to 32 characters
Target Para-
this set of target parameters. Entry can be up to
meter Name (blank)
32 characters long.
SNMPv1
Security Drop-down list for selection of a security model for
SNMPv2c
Model this set of target parameters.
USM
Sets the security level for the new Target Para- No Authentication
Security
meter. Only applicable if Security Level USM is Auth/No Priv
Level
selected. Auth/Priv
Drop down list of available security names for private
SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c. public
Security ADMIN
Name Drop down list of available security names for MONITOR
USM. OPERATOR
PROVISION
Note: To delete an existing Target Parameter, right click the SNMP entity in the Selection Tree, select Delete
Target Parameter, select an Target Parameter from the selection list, and click OK.
Add / Edit /Delete USM User (see Note)
Entry for a valid user name. Valid entry contains
1 to 32 characters
User Name only 1 to 32 of the following characters are accep-
(blank)
ted: "a-z A-Z 0-9 ._-".

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 821

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 56: System Configuration Settings

Description /
Parameter Option Settings / Defaults
Applicable Rules
An SNMP engine's administratively-unique
identifier. Valid entry is 5 to 32 characters. In a
simple agent, this value is always that agent's
own snmpEngineID value of ‘local’. The value can
also take the value of the snmpEngineID of a
remote SNMP engine with which this user can
communicate. 5 to 32 characters
Engine ID
(blank)
Objects of this type are for identification, not for
addressing, even though it is possible that an
address has been used in the generation of a
specific value. The value for this object can not be
all zeros or all 'ff'H or the empty (zero length)
string.
Security Name. Valid entry contains only 1 to 256
Security of the following characters are accepted: "a-z A-Z 1 to 256 characters
Name 0-9 ._-". Mandatory entry. If no entry is provided, (blank)
User Name is substituted automatically.
Options are No Authentication, Authentication
No Authentication
with No Privacy key or Authentication with Pri-
Security vacy key.
Auth/No Priv
Level For the USM User “crypto” available in GE114Pro
(C)/GE114Pro (CSH), the default security level is
Auth/Priv
“Auth/Priv” and cannot be changed.
Specifies the user access type. Read Only
User Access For the USM User “crypto” available in GE114Pro
Read/Write
Type (C)/GE114Pro (CSH), the default User Access
Type is “Read/Write” and cannot be changed. Trap Only
Drop down list of established authentication pro-
tocols. This option is only available if the Security MD5
Auth. Pro- Level is other than No Authentication.
tocol For the USM User “crypto” available in GE114Pro
(C)/GE114Pro (CSH), the default Authentication None
Protocol is MD5 and cannot be changed.

822 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 56: System Configuration Settings

Description /
Parameter Option Settings / Defaults
Applicable Rules
Entry for an Authentication Key. This option is
only applicable if Auth/Priv or Auth/No Priv
Security Level is selected. A valid entry contains
the following:

1. Contains only alphanumeric and special

characters '# * %' and must not begin with '#'.

2. Length from 8 to 32 characters. 8 to 32 characters

Auth. Key
3. Contains a mix of upper and lower case alpha (blank)
characters, at least one special character (# * %)
and at least one digit.

4. No more than 2 letters or digits can be repeated

in consecutive character positions.

5. Does not contain a sequence of 3 consecutive

letters/digits in ascending/descending order.
Confirm Reenter the key entered in the Auth. Key box to 8 to 32 characters
Auth. Key confirm the key. (blank)
Drop down list of established privacy protocols. DES
Priv. Protocol This option is only available if the Security Level
is Auth/Priv. AES
Entry for a Privacy [Link] option is only
applicable if Auth/Priv Security Level is selected.
If a valid entry contains the following:

1. Contains only alphanumeric and special

characters '# * %' and must not begin with '#'.

2. Length from 8 to 32 characters.

8 to 32 characters
Priv. Key 3. Contains a mix of upper and lower case alpha (blank)
characters, at least one special character (# * %)
and at least one digit.

4. No more than 2 letters or digits can be repeated

in consecutive character positions.

5. Does not contain a sequence of 3 consecutive

letters/digits in ascending/descending order.
Confirm Priv. Re-enter the key entered in the Priv. Key box to 8 to 32 characters
Key confirm the key. (blank)
Note: [Link] delete an existing USM user, right click on the SNMP entity in the Selection Tree and select Delete
USM User Entry. Then in the Details Pane, select the USM User to delete from the selection box and click on
OK.

[Link] USM User “crypto” available in GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (CSH) cannot be deleted.

3. After every provisioning operations, the crypto user will be required to enter the crypto password.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 823

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 56: System Configuration Settings

Description /
Parameter Option Settings / Defaults
Applicable Rules
Edit Dying Gasp
Dropdown list for each configured Target Address
to Enable or Disable SNMP Dying Gasp on that
Target Address. At System Defaults, no Target
Addresses are configured.
On SNMP level, this command is used to enable
or disable sending the Dying Gasp trap to a target
address (Trap Host). When SNMP Dying Gasp is
enabled for a trap host: the EG-X periodically
SNMP Dying
(every 150 seconds) sends out UDP messages (No Target Addresses Exist)
Gasp
destined to the trap host multiple times with
different UDP ports. The destination UDP port
range is 10,000-10,063. It is up to the user to
configure the network (including the firewall) to
allow UDP frames from GE11x/GE11xPro to
reach the trap host (SNMP Manger).
A SNMP Dying Gaps-Host Unreachable alarm is
raised for unreached Target Addresses.
Administration

Users (Add User, Edit User or Edit Password)

User Identifier (log-in name). The new login name
for the user account. Must be at least 1 alpha-
numeric character long and no more than 32 alpha-
numeric characters. If the password security
strength is set to high, the minimum length of a
User ID is 6 characters. Spaces are not allowed.
The system supports three levels of username
and password security, and is dependent on the 1 to 32 characters
security policy setting. See Security Policy (Edit
User Name Policy)”. The default Superuser user ID is root.
Only a Superuser has the authority to create or
See Security Policy (Edit Policy)”
delete a user ID. This option is available when
selecting Add User or Edit Password.
(blank)
In GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (CSH), the crypto
user’s user name is crypto and cannot be edited
by any user. Currently, only one crypto user is
supported per system.

The NetConf user’s user name cannot be edited

by any user on GUI/CLI. Only Comment can be
edited by superuser.

824 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 56: System Configuration Settings

Description /
Parameter Option Settings / Defaults
Applicable Rules
This option is only available in GE114Pro 1 to 32 characters
(C)/GE114Pro (CSH) when the login user is the
Type Old crypto user. The crypto user can edit the user
Password information and login password for itself. See Security Policy (Edit Policy)”
By factory default, the crypto user’s login pass-
word is ChgMeNOW. (blank)
User login password. The system supports three
levels of password security, and is dependent on
1 to 32 characters
the security policy setting. See Security Policy
(Edit Policy)”. Only a Superuser may create a
Password /
password associated with a new User ID. A
Retype Pass- See Security Policy (Edit Policy)”
Superuser may edit any existing password. Any
word
user may edit their own password. This option is
available when selecting Add User or Edit Pass-
(blank)
word. The default Superuser password is
ChgMeNOW.
User comment text string (maximum 128 char-
acters in length). Only a Superuser may edit a up to 128 characters
Comment
user comment. This option is available when (blank)
selecting Add User or Edit User.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 825

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 56: System Configuration Settings

Description /
Parameter Option Settings / Defaults
Applicable Rules
User Security Level. The Superuser assigns
security levels for each user. Refer to User
Authorization Privilege Levels for more details. Superuser
Only a Superuser may edit a user privilege level.
This option is available when selecting Create
New User or Edit User. The default root user ID
privilege level is Super User.
Maintenance
Crypto privilege is only available in GE114Pro (C)
and GE114Pro (CSH) and a default crypto user is
created by default with the Crypto privilege. The
privilege of the Crypto user cannot be changed
and the crypto user cannot be deleted.
Provisioning
Test User has the following operation per-
missions:

Privilege l Operate/Release VLAN Loopbacks

l Modify Port/LAG Admin State (in Crypto
Maintenance View)
l Modify ECPA Streams
l Start/Stop ECAPA Tests
l Add/Modify/Delete L3 ESA Probe/Reflector
Test User
l Create/Delete Schedule for L3 ESA Probe
l Ping/Traceroute

“NetConf” users can only be created/deleted via

the web-based Element Management System NetConf
(EMS) Graphical User Interface (GUI) and the
Command Line Interface (CLI) by a user with the
“Superuser” privilege level. “NetConf” users have
the provisioning permission only in the NETCONF
Interface. “NetConf” users may only be created or Retrieve
deleted and cannot be edited or migrate to other
privilege users
Login timeout for the user ID (in minutes). Only a 0 (no logout timer) to
Login
Superuser may edit a user login timeout value. 99 (minutes)
Timeout
This option is available when selecting Add User
(mins) 15 (minutes)
or Edit User.
If the response to a CLI command fills more than Enabled
CLI Paging one screen, the response is divided into multiple
pages if this option is enabled. Disabled
Remote Authentication (Edit Remote Authentication)
Authentic- NONE
ation Pro- Sets the Remote Authentication Protocol type. RADIUS
tocol TACACS

826 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 56: System Configuration Settings

Description /
Parameter Option Settings / Defaults
Applicable Rules
Remote authentication type. Options available PAP
Authentic- are: Password Authentication Protocol (PAP) or
CHAP
ation Type Challenge- Handshake Authentication Protocol
(CHAP). ASCII
When Enabled, the system expects the User Priv-
ilege level to be returned from the TACACS+
Disabled
TACACS server.
Privilege Con- When Disabled, the system does not expect User
trol Privilege level information from the TACACS+
server, but uses the privilege level set in the Enabled
TACACS Default Privilege Level attribute.
When TACACS Privilege Level Control is Dis-
Retrieve
abled, this value is used as the user's privilege
level once authenticated by the TACACS+ Maintenance
TACACS server.
Default Priv- Provisioning
ilege
When TACACS Privilege Level Control is Superuser
Enabled, this value is automatically configured to
“Not Applicable”. Test User
The IP address of the Network Access Security
NAS IP
server. This option is only applicable if Authentic- [Link]
Address
ation Protocol is set to RADIUS.
Disabled
Accounting Enable or Disable the use of an accounting port.
Enabled
Set the RADIUS access order. If the Access
Order is set to Local First (the default), user login
is first authenticated using local user database. If
the local authentication fails, then the system will
use RADIUS (if so configured) to authenticate Local
with the remote server. If the Access Order is set
to Remote First and if the remote authenticate is
enabled, the first try is to authenticate using the
Access
remote server. If the remote server is reachable
Order
but the authentication failed, the system does not
authenticated with the local database and
declares authentication failure. If the remote
authentication is successful, the system declares Remote
the authentication successful. If the remote
authentication is not enabled or if the remote
server is unreachable, then the system uses the
local database to authenticate.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 827

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 56: System Configuration Settings

Description /
Parameter Option Settings / Defaults
Applicable Rules
Remote
Authentic- Disabled
ation Server Enables Server for operation.
(1 to 3) Enabled
Status
Defines the priority of the server in servicing
Remote First
requests. Multiple servers may have the same pri-
Authentic-
ority value. Random ordering will be chosen for
ation Server Second
those servers with equal priority values. Server 1
(1 to 3)
default is First, Server 2 default is Second and
Priority Third
Server 3 default is Third.
Remote
Authentic-
The IP address of the specified Remote Authentic-
ation Server
ation Server. [Link]
(1 to 3)
IP Address
Edit Server Check box that if selected allows the editing of
(deselected)
Secret the Server Secret.
Remote
Defines the shared secret used for authenticating
Authentic-
the GE11xPro with the Remote Authentication
ation Server up to 128 characters
server. Valid entry is a string of up to 128 non-
(1 to 3) (blank)
whitespace characters. To make an entry, select
Server
the Edit Server Secret checkbox.
Secret
Remote Defines the UDP port to use when com- 1 to 65535
Authentic- municating with the Remote Authentication
ation Server server. Default is 1812 if Authentication Protocol 1812 (RADIUS)
(1 to 3) is set to RADIUS or None, default is 49 if
Port Authentication Protocol is set to TACACS. 49 (TACACS)
Remote Defines the UDP port to use for accounting when
Authentic- communicating with the Remote Authentication 1 to 65535
ation Server server. Default is 1813 if Authentication Protocol
1813 (RADIUS)
(1 to 3) is set to RADIUS or None, default is 49 if
Accounting Authentication Protocol is set to TACACS. Only 49 (TACACS)
Port editable if Accounting is Enabled.
Remote
Defines the timeout in seconds after which com-
Authentic-
munication with this server fails. This option is 2 to 10
ation Server
only applicable if Authentication Protocol is set to
(1 to 3) 2
RADIUS.
Timeout
Remote
Authentic- The maximum number of tries that will be attemp-
ation Server ted with this server. 0 to 5
(1 to 3) 3
Retries

828 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 56: System Configuration Settings

Description /
Parameter Option Settings / Defaults
Applicable Rules
Security Policy (Edit Policy)
The system supports the following three levels of
security strength for local user passwords. This
setting is used for the basis of user name and
password entry.

High:

1. User Name must be 6 to 32 characters in High

length and no spaces allowed.
2. Password must be 12 to 32 characters in
length.
3. Password must contain only alphanumeric
and special characters '# * % - _ .' and must
not begin with '#'.
4. Password must contain upper and lower case
characters, at least 2 special characters and
at least 1 digit.
5. Password must not contain more than 2
letters or digits repeated consecutively.
Security 6. Password must contain upper and lower case
Medium
Policy characters, at least 1 special character and at
Strength least 1 digit.
7. Password must not contain more than 2
letters or digits repeated consecutively.
8. Password must not contain a sequence of 3
consecutive alphanumeric characters in
ascending or descending order.
9. Password must not be the same as the user
name.
10. Password must not be 'password/passw0rd'
in lower, upper or mixed case.

Low:

1. User Name must be 1 to 32 characters in Low

length and no spaces allowed.
2. Password must be 1 to 32 characters in
length.
3. Password must contain only alphanumeric
and special characters '# * % - _ .' and must
not begin with '#'.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 829

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 56: System Configuration Settings

Description /
Parameter Option Settings / Defaults
Applicable Rules
Key Generation (Regenerate Keys)
Radio button to create a new SSL certificate. If
selected, then Edit SSL Certificate Data options
Regenerate are applicable.
SSL Cer- (unselected)
tificate When an SSL Certificate is generated, the HTTP
server is restarted and web access is unavailable
during this time (approximately 15 seconds).
Radio button to create a new SSH certificate.

Regenerate
(unselected)
SSH Key
When an SSH Key is generated, all SSH users
are logged off.
Country Edit SSL Certificate Data - Country US
State Edit SSL Certificate Data - State Texas
Locality Edit SSL Certificate Data - Locality Richardson
Organization Edit SSL Certificate Data - Organization ADVA Optical Networking
Organization
Edit SSL Certificate Data - Organization Unit Ethernet Access
Unit
Name Edit SSL Certificate Data - Name ADVA
Email Edit SSL Certificate Data - Email support@[Link]
Valid Until Edit SSL Certificate Data - Valid Until (varies)

830 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Pass-Through Flow Configuration Options and Rules

Refer to the following table for Pass-Through flow configuration settings. Default settings
are identified in bold. The following Pass-Through flow settings are shown in order, as
seen when using the web-based Element Management System (EMS) GUI in
Configuration mode.

The flow is point-to-point and 2 Port attributes define the ingress and egress points of the
Flow. The Membership, Bandwidth Profile and Traffic Management provisioning
attributes are in effect for service frame forwarding from Port1-to-Port2 and Port2-to-Port1
(i.e., Provisioning is applied bidirectionally between ports).

Table 57: Configuration Settings for Pass-Through Flows

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults

PT Flows
Flow (Create/Edit Flow)
Passthrough Flow PT FLOW-1-1
EID The EID of this flow instance. through
(Create only) PT FLOW-1-128
Defines a circuit identifier for the Flow. Up to 256 characters up to 256 characters
Circuit Name
are allowed. (blank)
IS
Enables or disables the Pass-through Flow. IS is In Service
Administrative State Management
and is the default value. See Entity State Descriptions.
Disabled
Defines the EVC type.
Regular EVC
If Default EVC: N2N Flow Membership based on a frame
EVC Type received on a Network Port that does not match any other
flow membership (only 1 default flow is allowed per System).
If Regular EVC: N2N Flow Membership based on VLAN Default EVC
Member list.
Control of N2N policing function.

If Enabled: Bandwidth Profile is applied as a policing function Enabled

(CIR, EIR, CBS, EBS) and shaping function (CIR, EIR) for
Policing N2N frames.

If Disabled: Bandwidth Profile is applied as a shaping function

Disabled
(CIR, EIR) for A2N frames. A policing function is not applied
to N2N frames.
Enabled
Multi COS Enables N2N per-COS Bandwidth Profiles.
Disabled
Identifies the CoS for all N2N frames on a flow when Multi
COS 0-7
COS is Disabled.
Allows for untagged N2N frames to be included as Enabled
Untagged Frames
membership in the flow. Disabled

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 831

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 57: Configuration Settings for Pass-Through Flows

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
The protection entity for this flow:
None
Loop Avoidance NONE: no protection.
ERP-1-n
ERP EID: ERP instance controls blocking for this flow.
Flow Based

Shaping Type Specify the shaping type in N2N direction.

Port Based

Controls auto Bandwidth control for this flow.

If Enabled: the Bandwidth Profile values for this flow are Enabled
N2N Auto Band- determined dynamically and are read-only.
width If Disabled: the Bandwidth Profile of the flow is manually con-
trolled. Disabled
Not applicable when Multi COS = Enabled.
Percentage of available CIR on the Network ports assigned to
this flow. The flow guaranteed bandwidth is set to available
bandwidth multiplied by this value.
N2N Auto CIR Band-
0-100
width Percent The sum of N2N auto CIR bandwidth Percentage value for all
flows with N2N Auto Bandwidth = Enabled must be <= 100%.

Not applicable when Multi COS = Enabled.

0 to 1 Gbps (for 1
Defines the Policer Committed Information Rate (CIR) for this Gbps ports)
N2N Policer CIR
Policer, in bps. 0 to 10 Gbps (for 10
Gbps ports)
0 to 1 Gbps (for 1
Defines the Policer Excess Information Rate (EIR) for this Gbps ports)
N2N Policer EIR
Policer, in bps. 0 to 10 Gbps (for 10
Gbps ports)
Defines the Policer Committed Burst Size (CBS) for this
Policer, in Kilobytes. The minimum user configurable value for
CBS is MAX[MTU or CIR/(64,000*8)] and it can be pro-
N2N Policer CBS visioned in increments of 1KB. The maximum value for
CBS/EBS is 10*1024 = 10240 KB. All calculations for CBS
here are in bytes and for user provisioned values they need to
be converted to Kbytes and rounded to the nearest Kbyte.
Defines the Policer Excess Burst Size (EBS) for this policer,
N2N Policer EBS 0 to 1,024 (KB)
in Kilobytes.
N2N Policer Color Specifies the Policer Color Mode as 'Color Aware' or 'Color Color Aware
Marking Blind'. Color Blind

832 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 57: Configuration Settings for Pass-Through Flows

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Specifies the Policer Coupling Flag. When coupling is
enabled, tokens that would normally be added to the C-bucket
are passed to the E-bucket only once the CIR bucket has
reached its CBS level. Therefore under this condition the E-
bucket is being filled at the rate of CIR + EIR. Normally the Enabled
long term average of frames declared ˜yellow” is bounded by
the EIR. Coupling is a function to allow the long term average
of frames declared ˜yellow” to be bounded by CIR + EIR.
N2N Policer Color
Coupling Flag
This allows a higher volume of yellow frames to be
delivered/received if the arrival of green marked frames is low.
Tokens from the E-bucket do NOT get passed to the C-
bucket once the EBS level has been reached. Enabling coup- Disabled
ling in combination with a provisioned EIR of 0 allows for a
single rate three color marking (srTCM) algorithm to be estab-
lished. In this situation the E-bucket is filled at the CIR rate in
the case the C-bucket is filled to its CBS level.
N2N Shaper Buffer Represents the Buffer Size of the Shaper. Entered in kilo- 10 to 15,360 (KB)
Size bytes. 128 (KB)

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 833

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 57: Configuration Settings for Pass-Through Flows

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Defines the frames that belong to the flow. Frames are clas-
sified based on the VLAN tag and the membership is spe-
cified as a list of VLAN IDs. The VLAN member format is
VLAN ID-*, VLAN ID (range)-* or *-Priority. The valid values
for VLAN ID are 0 to 4095. Valid values for Priority are * or 0 to
7. A VLAN ID range is a contiguous block of VID values delin-
eated by a first member and a last member, inclusive (e.g.,
Range 100 - 199 shall consist of a all frames with VID values
{100, 101..... 198, 199}) including all PRI values for those
VIDs, and is entered using a colon, for example: 100:199. VLAN ID portion of
Range must list lower value on left and larger value on the VLAN ID-Priority:
right. Up to two range entries are allowed per port.
0 to 4095, or *

If the Priority value is not specified, all the priority values for
that VLAN ID belongs to the FID. A maximum of 64 members
can be defined for a given FID. If no value is supplied, this
FID becomes the default FID for the port, i.e., all the VLAN
IDs that don’t belong to any other FID on the port belongs to
this FID.

VLAN Members

(Regular EVC only) Regarding the use of the “wildcard” value * - The normal des-
ignation of a VLAN Member is X-Y, where X is the VLAN ID
and Y is the Priority. Supported wildcard forms are: X-*, where
* represents any priority value, i.e., flow is priority agnostic
and *-Y where * represents any VLAN ID, i.e., flow is VLAN
agnostic. The rules are: *-Y members can coexist with X-Y
members (same priority) within the same flow as well as
across all flows within the same access port, with the X-Y
member match taking precedence; Default flows (*-*) can
coexist with *-Y member flows with the *-Y member match Priority portion of
taking precedence; *-Y members cannot coexist with X-* VLAN ID-Priority:
members.
0 to 7, or *

To add a VLAN member, enter the valid VLAN ID-Priority num-

ber and select Add. To delete a VLAN member, select the
VLAN ID-Priority number and select Delete. If EVC Type is
set to Default EVC, no VLAN Member value can be supplied,
and this FID becomes the Default FID for the port, i.e., all the
VLAN IDs that don’t belong to any other FID on the port
belongs to this FID. If EVC Type is set to Regular EVC, then
individual VLAN Members can be entered.

834 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

PSE Group Configuration Rules

This section provides the rules for PSE Group Configuration.

Table 58: PSE Group Configuration Rules

Description / Option Settings
Parameter
Applicable Rules / Defaults
Power Usage This threshold expressed in percents for comparing the measured power and
1-99%
Threshold initiating an alarm if the threshold is exceeded
Notification Whether to initialize a Notification if the power consumed on this port exceed Enabled
Control the threshold. Disabled
NonStandard Enabled
Whether to allow Non-Standard Powered Devices to be connected.
PD Allowed Disabled

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 835

Factory Default Configuration Settings

PSE Port Rules

This section provides the rules for PSE Port Configuration.

Table 59: PSE Port Configuration Rules

Description / Option
Parameter Settings /
Applicable Rules Defaults
Unassigned: The interface acts as if there is no PSE function.
In Service: The interface acts as if there is no PSE function. Unassigned
Administrative State
Note: When port is working in fiber mode, this attribute must In Service
always be disabled.
Which pair in the Ethernet cable is used to carry power: Alternative
A
Power Pairs Alternative A: that the signal pairs (1/2 and 3/6) are used.
Alternative
Alternative B: The spare pairs (4/5 and 7/8) are used. B
A description about the PSE port, usually related to the type of up to 255
PSE Port Type (blank)
powered device that is connected to the port. characters
Class1
(4.00
Watts)
Class2
Which Power Level is allowed on this port. (7.00
Available Power Level Watts)
When the Power Level is exceeded, PSE alarm is raised. Class0&3
(15.40
Watts)
Class4 (30
Watts)

836 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

LAG Configuration Rules

Refer to the following table for LAG configuration rules. For GE112 series, up to 2 LAG
groups may be created. For GE114Pro series, up to 3 LAG groups may be created.

l For LAG descriptions and attributes, see Link Aggregation Group in FSP 150-
GE11xPro System Description document.
l For LAG configuration procedure, see Provision Ports in a LAG Group. Table 60 shows
the LAG Configuration Rules applying to GE11xPro. The attributes are arranged in the
same order as on the web-based GUI. Default settings are identified in bold.

Table 60: LAG Configuration Rules

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults

NE-1 / LAG Entity (e.g., LAG-1-1)

Note 1: A LAG and port protection cannot co-exist at the same port.

Note 2: A LAG can be created without any member port.

Note 3: Creating or editing a LAG is denied if:

o The Member Port list contains more than 2 member ports

o One or more members in the Member Port list are included in a different LAG
o The speed of any port in the Member Port list is configured as “AUTO”.
o All ports in the Member Port list are not configured with the same port speed
o Auto Diagnostics is enabled.

Note 4: When adding the first port to LAG, the Admin State must be INSERVICE, MAINTENANCE or
MANAGEMENT. The second port must have an Admin State of Unassigned.

Note 5: Deleting a LAG is denied if more than one port is in the Member Port List.

Note 6: The first Member Port added can have active loopback, but active loop on the second Member port is
not allowed.

Note 7: Deleting a LAG is denied if there is active loopback on the LAG or any member port.

Note 8: If the LAG is to be created with Network Ports. Network One must be added, and other Network ports
must be in Unassigned states.

Note 9: At the time a LAG is deleted, or the last member port is removed, the following entities existing on the
LAG are migrated to the member port which is deleted the last.

o Flow
o CFM entities (MIP, MEP, Server MEP)
o Management tunnel
o ESA entities

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 837

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 60: LAG Configuration Rules

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Note 10: A LAG can be created on the Network side or Access side. This is dictated by the first member port
added to the LAG.

Note 11: Regarding the Access LAG, the Service Mode of A LAG can be EVP of EVPL, this is dictated by the
Service Mode of the first Member Port added to the LAG. The Service Mode of the second port is automatically
converted to align to the first Port. Once the LAG is created, the Service Mode is not editable.

Note 12: If creating a LAG group on Access Ports: The Network Port Bridge Group Protocols “LACP” and
“LACP Marker” must be set to “Discard”. All other CPD Filter setting may be set as desired.
Create/Edit LAG Configuration
Unique LAG identifier,
LAG ID
o GE112Prox: LAG-1, LAG-2 LAG-1
(Create LAG only)
o GE114xProx: LAG-1. LAG-2, LAG-3

A text and/or number string the user enters to identify a LAG up to 255 characters
Alias entity. This string can be up to 255 printable ASCII characters (blank)
long. Unique strings across the NE are recommended.
LAG mode of Active-Standby creates 1:1 link protection.
Load Sharing
An Active-Stdby Protection mode means only 2 member ports
Mode are allowed in this LAG, one member is in Working role and the
other one is in Protect role.
Active-Standby
In a LoadSharing LAG , all member ports share the traffic load.
Defines the LAG facility administrative state. The admin-
istrative state controls the generation of alarms and event IS
Administrative State reports. When an entity is in the In-Service state, it is fully oper-
ational. For more information on Administrative States, see Management
Entity State Descriptions.
Option is used to enable LAG protocols. Disabled
LAG Protocols
See Footnote 1. Enabled
Option is used to enable LACP Control for the LAG entity. Disabled
LACP Control
See Footnote 1. Enabled
The algorithm used to distribute traffic load among the LAG Filed Hash
Frame Dist Algorithm
member ports. Service Assignment
The filed (factor) to be used in the Hash Algorithm. One or
Hashing Combination some of the following fileds can be selected:
Outer Vid
Field Inner Vid Src Mac Dest Mac Src Ip Dest Ip Ip Protocol Src
Port Dest Port
Option used to enable the use of CFM CCM to detect defects
Disabled
on the LAG entity. If CCM Defect Detection is desired, a
CCM Defect Detection
Down MEP with proper provisioning must preexist on the LAG
Enabled
Port.
Defines the LACP Actor System Priority. Minimum is 0; Max- 0 - 65535
System Priority
imum is 65535. 32768

838 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 60: LAG Configuration Rules

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
50 - 65535
Collector Max Delay Set the maximum delay allowed for collector response.

Port Member drop down

Members List of Member Ports in the LAG entity.
list
LAG-1-1
Edit Port Configuration
A text and/or number string the user enters to identify a LAG up to 64 characters
Alias entity. This string can be up to 64 printable ASCII characters (blank)
long. Unique strings across the NE are recommended.
Defines the Port facility administrative state. The admin- IS
istrative state controls the generation of alarms and event
reports. When an entity is in the In Service state, it is fully oper- Management
Administrative State ational. The Administrative State must be set to Maintenance
prior to initiating a loopback or an Etherjack Diagnostic. For Maintenance
more information on Administrative States, see Entity State
Descriptions. Disabled
Defines the Maximum Transmission Unit size. Minimum MTU
MTU 1518-9638
is 1518; Maximum is 9638.
Receive DEI Action.
Use
Rx DEI Action • Ignore - does not use DEI for color identification
• Use - uses DEI for color identification Ignore
Receive DEI Outer Tag Type. Applies only if the Receive DEI
Action is USE Ctag Or Stag

Rx DEI Outer Tag • Stag – DEI is used for color identification only if the outer tag
is S-Tag
• Ctag Or Stag – DEI is used for color identification if outer tag Stag
is C-Tag or S-Tag
Transmit DEI Action. Set to Zero
Tx DEI Action • Set to Zero - implies the DEI is always set to 0 Mark Color
• Mark Color - implies the declared color is set in the DEI
• No Change - implies the outer tag DEI is not modified No Change
Transmit DEI Outer Tag Type. Applies only if the Tx DEI
Action is “Set to Zero” and “Mark Color”. Ctag Or Stag
Tx DEI Outer Tag
• Stag – DEI is modified only if the outer tag is S-Tag Stag
• Ctag Or Stag – DEI is modified if outer tag is C-Tag or S-Tag
This option is only available in Network Port LAG. See Specify
EoMPLS Source IP
an IP Address for Network Port (Physical or Logical) for more [Link]
Address IP Address
information.
Traffic type allowed on the LAG. This parameter is only avail- AFP All
able in Access Port LAG - Port configurations. See Acceptable
AFP AFP tagged
Frame Policy in FSP 150-GE11xPro System Description
document. AFP Untagged

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 839

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 60: LAG Configuration Rules

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Q in Q EtherType Over-
Enables or disables editing the Q in Q EtherType. Enabled
ride
Defines the Stacked Ethertype to be used to interoperate with
Q in Q EtherType Q in Q frames with other vendors. Only editable if Q in Q Ether- 0 (hex.)
Type Override is enabled.
Selects a desired ingress priority mapping profile for the LAG
port. The Network Port LAG must be associated with a priority
mapping profile with 802.1P mode. The network port based pri-
Default_Priority_
Priority Mapping Profile ority mapping profile will take effect in N2A direction and only
Mapping_Profile
affect CTag-POP flows. Only Outer Tag Priority and COS
entry are valid. The Priority Control option “Swap” in Priority
Mapping Profile configuration does not work on Network Port.
Whether to enable configuring Bandwidth for Port Shaper
independently.
Enabled
When Independent Shaper Bandwidth is disabled, the port
Independent Port
Shaper CIR is a sum of Corresponding Policers.
Shaper BW
When Independent Shaper Bandwidth is enabled, the user can
Disabled
manually enter CIR and EIR setting for the port Shapers
setting.
Controls whether the selected (if any) LLF Trigger Events will Disabled
Port Link Loss For-
work. If no LLF Trigger Events are selected, it’s equivalent to
warding Status Enabled
setting LLF to Disabled.
Sets the Link Loss Enable Delay, in seconds, from the time
Link Loss Forwarding Link Loss is detected before Link Loss Forwarding takes
0-3600
Delay effect. If the loss clears during delay time, it is not propagated.
Only effective if LLF Status is Enabled.
Sets Link Loss Forwarding Transmit Signal Type. A facility No Action
Link Loss Forwarding port takes TX Action only after the other end of its associated
EFM Signal
TX Action flow get LLF events triggered. This option is not controlled by
Port LLF Status. Link Down
Check boxes to select trigger events to generate the Link Loss EFM
Link Loss Forwarding
Forwarding signal. Either EFM or Link Down may be selected,
Trigger Events Link Down
or both. In default, none are selected.
Link Loss Forwarding Defines the Local Link ID for the LAG port to indicate which
Local Link ID port is faulted. Applicable entries are 1 through 6. Default is the 1 to 6
first LAG member port ID. Local Link ID is only used for EFM (first member port ID)
Signal TX Action.
Allows selection of the Remote Link ID(s) to be used for match-Remote Link ID check
Link Loss Forwarding ing against the Link ID in the EFM RLD (Remote Link Down) boxes
Remote Link IDs message. The same Remote Link ID number may be set for
multiple Network ports, if desired. Default is no ports selected. (none selected)
Edit Port CPD Filters - see CPD Filters Options and Rules.
Clear Statistics
Edit A2N Shapers (for Network LAG only)
BS The buffer size of the shaper (in KB). 0-15360 (128)
Edit N2A Shapers (for Access LAG only)

840 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 60: LAG Configuration Rules

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
BS The buffer size of the shaper (in KB). 0-15360 (128)
Edit PCP Configuration
Standardized modes for editing PCP encoding are 7P1D,
6P2D and 5P3D which allow the user to edit 1, 2 or 3 PCP None
pairs, respectively.

Also provided is a ‘Custom’ mode that allows the user to edit

the PCP Encoding and Decoding Tables directly and ignore 7P1D
the normal rules regarding priority reuse and hierarchy. Any
use of PCP Encoding may affect existing traffic. The Custom
PCP DE Encoding mode has the potential for causing unexpected and unintended
6P2D
Mode disruption of normal traffic.

If ‘PCP DE Encoding Mode’ is set to ‘Custom’, a PCP

Encoding Table and PCP Decoding Table are provided for 5P3D
custom selections. The PCP Encoding Table allows user-
selectable Drop Ineligible and Drop Eligible priority values. The
PCP Decoding Table allows user-selectable Outgoing Tag
Priority and enabling or disabling whether the tag is Drop Custom
Eligible.
If ‘PCP DE Encoding Mode’ is set to ‘7P1D’, ‘6P2D’ or ‘5P3D’,
the user can edit 1, 2 or 3 PCP pairs, respectively. Each Drop Ineligible
priority can only be used once, and the lower priority of a pair 0-7
should always be the drop eligible one.
PCP Pair 1, 2, 3
Use the Update Table button to update the PCP Encoding and
Decoding Tables after editing PCP Pairs 1, 2 and/or 3. Drop Eligible
Use the Reset PCP Defaults button to reset the PCP 0-7
Encoding and Decoding Tables back to default values.
LAG MEMBER-1-1-1/
LAG MEMBER-1-1-2
Edit Member Port Configuration
LACP Force Out Of Used to forcibly remove a port from the port selection process Disabled
SYNC without deleting it as a member. Enable
Active
Administrative Activity Sets Actor LACP control value to the active or passive state.
Passive
Sets Actor LAG Port Actor LACP Timeout control value. Long
Long
timeout value is 30 seconds (where Link is declared dead after
Administrative Timeout
90 seconds [3x30 seconds]). Short timeout value is 1 second
Short
(where Link is declared dead after 3 seconds [1x3 seconds]).
Actor Port Priority is used to determine which of the ports par- 1
Port Priority ticipating in the LAG has higher priority. A lower value implies
higher priority. 0-65,535
Clear Statistics

1 TheLACP-Control parameter allows the selection process to be independent of the LACP protocol for
applications that require a conversion from unprotected port to an active-standby LAG. For configurations
where LACP-Control is disabled, the LACP protocol information may not align with the actual selection state

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 841

Factory Default Configuration Settings

of the active-standby LAG. Collecting & distributing information is derived from the LACP protocol.
Active/Standby status is derived from the port selection process.
0
Active-standby LAG is expected to be a bidirectional protection mechanism and relies on the LACP protocol
for coordinating the active link determination between 2 partner systems. For configurations where LACP-
Control is disabled, the 2 partner systems could experience a mismatch of active and standby ports causing
traffic outage.

The GE11xPro supports all LACP & LAMP interaction in software. A warm reboot of the system stops all LACP
processing (transmit and receive) and causes a LAG with ‘LAG Protocols enabled’ to initiate a link down,
affecting all service frames on the LAG logical port. For warm reboot during maintenance activity on back-to-
back ADVA Optical Networking systems, the LACP Control setting may be used to disable the link selection
based on LACP (i.e., LACP Control disabled) for the duration of the warm reboot.

842 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Network Port Configuration Options and Rules

Refer to the following table for Network Port configuration settings. Also see the following
associated options and rules: CPD Filters Options and Rules. Default settings are
identified in bold. The following Network Port settings are shown in order, as seen when
using the web-based GUI in Configuration mode.

Network Port 2 (if not associated with another entity) may be switched to operate as an
Access Port by entering a right click on Network Port 2, selecting “Switch to ACC” and
selecting OK. The associated entities that must not exist when switching from a Network
Port to an Access Port are:

l LAG group
l 1+1 Network protection
l MEPs
l MACOMPs
l ERP instance
l SHG group

Conversely, Access Port 2 (if not associated with another entity) may be switched back
to become Network Port 2 by entering a right click on Access Port 2, selecting “Switch to
NET” and selecting OK. The associated entities that must not exist when switching from
an Access Port to a Network Port are:

l LAG group
l Management tunnel
l MEPs
l MACOMPs
l SHG group
l ESA probes or reflectors
l Running ECPA test
l PTP related configurations - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

After the port type changes, the new port is in the unassigned state and all the attributes
use the system default values.

Switching Network Port 2 to function as an Access Port (or

switching back) will cause the system to reboot, dropping
communications and traffic.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 843

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 61: Network Port Configuration Settings (Edit Configuration)

Description / Option
Parameter Settings /
Applicable Rules Defaults
E1000-N-1/E1000-N-2

Edit Configuration
A text and/or number string the user enters to uniquely identify this up to 255
Alias Network Port. This string can be up to 64 printable ASCII characters characters
long. (blank)
Defines the Network Port facility administrative state. The admin-
istrative state controls the generation of alarms and event reports. IS
When an entity is in the In Service state, it is fully operational. The
Administrative State must be set to Maintenance prior to initiating a Management
Administrative
loopback or an Etherjack Diagnostic. When a protection group is con-
State
figured, and Network Port 2 is placed in service. Administrative Maintenance
State and Remote Link ID options are the only editable options on
Network Port 2. For more information on Administrative States, see
Unassigned
Entity State Descriptions.
Fiber
Media Type Defines the port media type.
Copper
Defines the Maximum Transmission Unit size in bytes. Minimum
MTU 1518-9638
MTU is 1518; Maximum is 9638.
Auto 1000
Configured Speed Sets the configured speed for the network interface. The user can Full
(Fiber) select auto negotiation or manual configuration. 1000 Full
100 Full
Auto
Auto 1000 Full
Auto 1000 Full
Master
Configured Speed Sets the configured speed for the network interface. The user can Auto 1000 Full
(Copper) select auto negotiation or manual configuration. Slave
Auto 100 Full
Auto 10 Full
100 Full
10 Full
Auto
If Media Type is Copper, MDIX can be edited. If Media Type is Fiber,
MDIX Crossed
MDIX is not applicable.
Uncrossed

844 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 61: Network Port Configuration Settings (Edit Configuration)

Description / Option
Parameter Settings /
Applicable Rules Defaults
Enable/Disable the support of Open Flow on this port.

l A Network Port is not allowed to support Open Flow if:

o the Network Port is a member of a Protection Group

o the Network Port is a member of LAG Disabled

o the configured speed is set to “Auto”
l Once this option is set to Enabled to support Open Flow on a
Network Port:
o Not allowed not add this port to a LAG or Protection Group
OpenFlow
o Not allowed to set the port Configured Speed to “Auto”
o Port-2 (flexible port) is not allowed to switched to Access
Port
o Not allowed to change the setting if at least one OF Flow is Enabled
associated with this port as part of Flow match or as Output
action
o It’s allowed to change the setting even if an OF Capable
Switch exists.
Specify an IPv4 address for the Network Port/LAG/PPG which will
be the Network Interface of the flow to be created and associated
with an EoMPLS PW, when the EoMPLS PW is in Dynamic Dis-
EoMPLS Source IP covery Type.
[Link]
Address
When the EoMPLS PW is in Dynamic mode, the IP address of asso-
ciated network port must be set before the EVC flow is associated
with the PW.
Enables or disables the automatic Cable Diagnostic tests when the Enabled
Auto Diagnostic cable is removed from the port. This option is Disable if Media Type
is Fiber. Disabled
Receive DEI Action.
Use
Rx DEI Action l Ignore - does not use DEI for color identification
l Use - uses DEI for color identification Ignore
Receive DEI Outer Tag Type. Applies only if the Receive DEI
Action is USE Ctag Or Stag

Rx DEI Outer Tag l Stag – DEI is used for color identification only if the outer tag is
S-Tag
l Ctag Or Stag – DEI is used for color identification if outer tag is Stag
C-Tag or S-Tag
Transmit DEI Action. Set to Zero

Tx DEI Action l Set to Zero - implies the DEI is always set to 0 Mark Color
l Mark Color - implies the declared color is set in the DEI
l No Change - implies the outer tag DEI is not modified No Change

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 845

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 61: Network Port Configuration Settings (Edit Configuration)

Description / Option
Parameter Settings /
Applicable Rules Defaults
Transmit DEI Outer Tag Type. Applies only if the Tx DEI Action is
“Set to Zero” and “Mark Color”. Ctag Or Stag
Tx DEI Outer Tag
l Stag – DEI is modified only if the outer tag is S-Tag
Stag
l Ctag Or Stag – DEI is modified if outer tag is C-Tag or S-Tag
Enables or Disables Network Port Shaping. Shaping is useful to limit
Enabled
the burst size of the traffic being offered to the network. Port rate
Port Shaping
shaping at the Network Port enables over-subscription of client ser-
Disabled
vices without exceeding a specified Network Port bandwidth.
Defines the maximum bandwidth on the Network Port (in bps).
Applicable when Port Shaping is Enabled. This allows a carrier to
force a virtual maximum bandwidth on a Network Port and allows
Access Port services (EIR) to compete for bandwidth allocation. Set- 0 to
Port Shaped Speed
ting can not be lower than the cumulative CIR setting for all Access 1,000,000,000
Ports. If Network Port 1 and Network Port 2 are part of LAG, this
attribute can be edited on Network Port 1 and will be replicated on
Network Port 2.
Defines the Stacked Ethertype to be used to interoperate with Q in Q
Q in Q EtherType frames with other vendors. Only editable if Q in Q EtherType Over- 0 (hex.)
ride is enabled.
Q in Q EtherType Enabled
Enables or disables editing the Q in Q EtherType.
Override Disabled
Selects a desired ingress priority mapping profile for network port.
The network port must be associated with a priority mapping profile
with 802.1P mode. The network port based priority mapping profile
will take effect in N2A direction and only affect CTag-POP flows. Default_
Priority Mapping Only Outer Tag Priority and COS entry are valid. The Priority Control Priority_
Profile option “Swap” in Priority Mapping Profile configuration does not work Mapping_
on Network Port. Profile

See Default Priority Mapping Profile Tables for default Priority Map
settings.
Whether to enable configuring Bandwidth for Port Shaper
independently. Enabled
Independent Port When Independent Shaper Bandwidth is disabled, the port Shaper
Shaper BW CIR is a sum of Corresponding Policers.

When Independent Shaper Bandwidth is enabled, the user can Disabled

manually enter CIR and EIR setting for the port Shapers setting.
Link Loss For- Controls whether the selected (if any) LLF Trigger Events will work. Disabled
warding Port LLF If no LLF Trigger Events are selected, it’s equivalent to setting LLF
Status to Disabled. Enabled
Sets the Link Loss Enable Delay, in seconds, from the time Link
Link Loss For- Loss is detected before Link Loss Forwarding takes effect. If the
0-3600
warding Delay loss clears during delay time, it is not propagated. Only effective if
LLF Status is Enabled.

846 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 61: Network Port Configuration Settings (Edit Configuration)

Description / Option
Parameter Settings /
Applicable Rules Defaults
Sets Link Loss Forwarding Transmit Signal Type. A facility port No Action
Link Loss For- takes TX Action only after the other end of its associated flow get
EFM Signal
warding TX Action LLF events triggered. This option is not controlled by Port LLF
Status. Link Down
Link Loss For- Check boxes to select trigger events to generate the Link Loss For- EFM
warding Trigger warding signal. Either EFM or Link Down may be selected, or both.
Events In default, none are selected. Link Down
Defines the Local Link ID for the Network port to indicate which port
Link Loss For-
is faulted. Applicable entries are 1 or 2. Default for Network port 1 is
warding Local Link 1 or 2
1 and the default for Network port 2 is 2. Local Link ID is only used
ID
for EFM Signal TX Action.
Allows selection of the Remote Link ID(s) to be used for matching
Link Loss For-
against the Link ID in the EFM RLD (Remote Link Down) message. check boxes
warding Remote
The same Remote Link ID number may be set for multiple Network for Link IDs
Link IDs
ports, if desired. Default is no ports selected.
If selected, the LLDP frame propagation scope will include a single
Nearest Bridge: LAN which limits the propagation of LLDP frames across a link, and Selected
([Link]) the MAC Address [Link] will be used as the destination /Unselected
address in LLDP frames.
If selected, the LLDP frame propagation scope will include the trans- Selected
Nearest non-TPMR mission of LLDP frames through Two-Port MAC Relays (TPMR)
Bridge between two C-VLAN/S-VLAN components or 802.1d bridges. and /Unselected
([Link]) the MAC Address [Link] will be used as the destination
address in LLDP frames,
If selected, the LLDP frame propagation scope will include the trans- Selected
Nearest Customer mission of LLDP frames through TPMRs and S-VLAN components
Bridge between C-VLAN components or 802.1d bridges, and the MAC /Unselected
([Link]) Address [Link] will be used as the destination address
in LLDP frames.
Edit CPD Filters - see CPD Filters Options and Rules.
Edit EFM-OAM
State Disabled
Manages the EFM OAM on the Ethernet Network Port.
OAM Control Enabled
Local Configuration Configures the OAM sub-layer entity in either Active or Passive OAM Active
Mode mode. OAM Passive
Edit Sync-E - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)
When Enabled, the port can be sourced as a reference source for the Disabled
Sync-E Mode System Clock; when Disabled, the port is not available in the pick-
list for System Clock references. Enabled
When Enabled, the port will receive and generate SSM quality level Disabled
QL Mode
according to G.8264. Enabled

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 847

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 61: Network Port Configuration Settings (Edit Configuration)

Description / Option
Parameter Settings /
Applicable Rules Defaults
QL-NONE
Select the forced QL value if the port is used as the sync reference QL-PRC
Assumed QL and there’s no failure on the recovered clock, the Assumed QL is QL-SSU-A
used as the QL for sync reference selection. QL-SSU-B
QL-EEC1
QL-NONE
This control allows the user to set a minimum expected QL for that
QL-PRC
port. If the QL falls below that value, the port should be considered
Expected QL QL-SSU-A
failed from a Sync Reference perspective and a QL Mismatch alarm
QL-SSU-B
will be raised.
QL-EEC1
Edit A2N Shapers
0-15360

Buffer Size 128 for

The buffer size of the shaper. E1000-N-1

N/A for
E1000-N-2
Edit PCP Configuration (Network Port 1 Only)
Standardized modes for editing PCP encoding are 7P1D, 6P2D and
5P3D which allow the user to edit 1, 2 or 3 PCP pairs respectively. None

Also provided is a ‘Custom’ mode that allows the user to edit the
PCP Encoding and Decoding Tables directly and ignore the normal
7P1D
rules regarding priority reuse and hierarchy. Any use of PCP
Encoding may affect existing traffic. The Custom mode has the
PCP DE Encoding potential for causing unexpected and unintended disruption of normal
Mode traffic. 6P2D

If ‘PCP DE Encoding Mode’ is set to ‘Custom’, a PCP Encoding

Table and PCP Decoding Table are provided for custom selections. 5P3D
The PCP Encoding Table allows user-selectable Drop Ineligible and
Drop Eligible priority values. The PCP Decoding Table allows user-
selectable Outgoing Tag Priority and enabling or disabling whether Custom
the tag is Drop Eligible.
If ‘PCP DE Encoding Mode’ is set to ‘7P1D’, ‘6P2D’ or ‘5P3D’, the
user can edit 1, 2 or 3 PCP pairs respectively. Each priority can only Drop Ineligible
be used once, and the lower priority of a pair should always be the 0-7
drop eligible one.
PCP Pair 1, 2, 3
Use the Update Table button to update the PCP Encoding and
Decoding Tables after editing PCP Pairs 1, 2 and/or 3. Drop Eligible
Use the Reset PCP Defaults button to reset the PCP Encoding and 0-7
Decoding Tables back to default values.
Edit LLDP - see LLDP Configuration Settings
Edit E-LMI - see E-LMI Configuration Settings

848 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Access Port Configuration Options and Rules

The following option descriptions are provided as a detailed reference for building
services. It provides entry range values, dependencies and identifies default data. For
general instructions on building services, see Provision Access Port Services. For
additional technical data, see Traffic Management in FSP 150-GE11xPro System
Description document.

The following Access Port settings are shown in order, as seen when using the web-
based GUI in Configuration mode.

To observe the current allocated and available traffic resources, expand the NE-1 entity
under the System entity, select the NTE11x entity and then select the Resources tab.

Network Port 2 (if not associated with another entity) may be switched to operate as an
Access Port by entering a right click on Network Port 2, selecting “Switch to ACC” and
selecting OK. The associated entities that must not exist when switching from a Network
Port to an Access Port are:

l LAG group
l 1+1 Network protection
l MEPs
l MACOMPs
l ERP instance
l SHG group

Conversely, Access Port 2 (if not associated with another entity) may be switched back
to become Network Port 2 by entering a right click on Access Port 2, selecting “Switch to
NET” and selecting OK. The associated entities that must not exist when switching from
an Access Port to a Network Port are:

l LAG group
l Management tunnel
l MEPs
l MACOMPs
l SHG group
l ESA probes or reflectors
l Running ECPA test
l PTP related configurations - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)

After the port type changes, the new port is in the unassigned state and all the attributes
use the system default values.

Switching Network Port 2 to function as an Access Port

(or switching back) will cause the system to reboot,
dropping communications and traffic.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 849

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Edit Access Port Configuration

One of two service types may be created for an Access Port: Ethernet Private Line (EPL)
service or Ethernet Virtual Private Line (EVPL) service. Refer to one of the following for
Access Port service configuration options and rules:

l EPL Service Provisioning Rules

l EVPL Service Provisioning Rules

EPL Service Provisioning Rules

Refer to the following for provisioning a port in Ethernet Private Line (EPL) Mode. It is
recommended that you review the following configuration options and rules and pre-
determine the desired provisioning details prior to making any provisioning changes to a
service. (Default settings are identified in bold.)

Changing the Service Type on a port will drop all traffic on the
port, including Management Tunnel connectivity and
Maintenance End Points.

Changing the Buffer Size is not hitless. Reducing CBS may

not be hitless.

Table 62: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Private Line Service

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults

Access Port (Edit Configuration)

A text and/or number string the user enters to uniquely identify up to 255 characters
Alias this Access Port. This string can be up to 64 printable ASCII (blank)
characters long.
Defines the Access Port facility administrative state. The IS
administrative state controls the generation of alarms and
event reports. When an entity is in the In Service state, it is Management
fully operational. The Administrative State must be set to Main-
Administrative State tenance prior to initiating a loopback or an Etherjack Dia- Maintenance
gnostic. The Administrative State must first be set to
Unassigned state prior to changing the Service Type. For more Disabled
information on Administrative States, see Entity State Descrip-
tions. Unassigned
Fiber
Media Type Defines the port media type.
Copper
Defines the Maximum Transmission Unit size. Minimum MTU 1518-9612
MTU
is 1518; Maximum is 9612. 9600
Defines the Media Dependent Interface, Crossover function Auto
MDIX for copper interfaces. MDIX allows the interface to change
Crossed
(copper) cable signal assignments to compensate for using the incor-
rect cable type. Uncrossed

850 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 62: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Private Line Service

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Enable/Disable the support of Open Flow on this port.

l An Access Port is not allowed to support Open Flow if:

o the Access Port is in EPL mode;

o the Access Port is a member of LAG\

Disabled
o the configured speed is set to “Auto”
l Once this option is set to Enabled to support Open Flow on
an Access Port:
o Not allowed to change Service Mode from EVPL to

OpenFlow EPL
o Not allowed not add this port to a LAG
o Not allowed to set the port Configured Speed to “Auto”
o Port-2 (flexible port) is not allowed to switched to
Network Port
o Not allowed to change the setting if at least one OF Enabled
Flow is associated with this port as part of Flow match
or as Output action
o It’s allowed to change the setting even if an OF
Capable Switch exists.
Auto
Auto 1000 Full
Auto 1000 Full Master
Configured Speed Sets the configured speed for the access interface. The user Auto 1000 Full Slave
(Copper) can select auto negotiation or manual configuration. Auto 100 Full
Auto 10 Full
100 Full
10 Full
Auto 1000 Full
Configured Speed Sets the configured speed for the access interface. The user
1000 Full
(Fiber) can select auto negotiation or manual configuration.
100 Full
Auto Diagnostic (cop- Enables or disables the automatic Cable Diagnostic tests Enabled
per) when the cable is removed from the port. Disabled
Receive DEI Action.
Use
Rx DEI Action l Ignore - does not use DEI for color identification
l Use - uses DEI for color identification Ignore
Receive DEI Outer Tag Type. Applies only if the Receive DEI
Action is USE Ctag Or Stag

Rx DEI Outer Tag l Stag – DEI is used for color identification only if the outer
tag is S-Tag
l Ctag Or Stag – DEI is used for color identification if outer Stag
tag is C-Tag or S-Tag

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 851

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 62: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Private Line Service

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Transmit DEI Action. Set to Zero

Tx DEI Action l Set to Zero - implies the DEI is always set to 0 Mark Color
l Mark Color - implies the declared color is set in the DEI
l No Change - implies the outer tag DEI is not modified No Change
Transmit DEI Outer Tag Type. Applies only if the Tx DEI
Action is “Set to Zero” and “Mark Color”. Ctag Or Stag
Tx DEI Outer Tag l Stag – DEI is modified only if the outer tag is S-Tag
l Ctag Or Stag – DEI is modified if outer tag is C-Tag or S- Stag
Tag
Defines the service type for this Access port - either Ethernet
Private Line (EPL) or Ethernet Virtual Private Line (EVPL). The EPL
Access Port Administrative State must first be set to
Service Type
Unassigned state prior to changing the Service Type. When
changing from Access Port Service Type EVPL to EPL, a new EVPL
Flow is automatically created in the Unassigned state.
AFP Tagged
Defines the Acceptable Frame Policy. See Acceptable Frame
AFP AFP Untagged
Policy in FSP 150-GE11xPro System Description document.
AFP All
Defines the Stacked Ethertype to be used to inter-operate with
Q in Q Ethertype Queue-in-Queue frames with other vendors. Only editable if Q 0 (hex)
in Q EtherType Override is enabled.
Q in Q EtherType Enabled
Enables or disables editing the Q in Q EtherType.
Override Disabled
Enabled
802.3 Pause RX Defines the receive flow control for the facility.
Disabled
Enabled
802.3 Pause TX Defines the transmit flow control for the facility.
Disabled
Enables or Disables Access Port Shaping. Port shaping limits
Enabled
the output traffic rate to a value below the pro-
Port Shaping
visioned/negotiated physical port speed. Shaping is useful to
Disabled
limit the burst size of the traffic being offered to the client.
Defines the maximum bandwidth on the Access Port (in bps).
Port Shaped Speed 0 to 1,000,000,000 (bps)
Applicable when Port Shaping is Enabled.
Controls whether the selected (if any) LLF Trigger Events will Disabled
Link Loss Forwarding
work. If no LLF Trigger Events are selected, it’s equivalent to
Port LLF Status Enabled
setting LLF to Disabled.
Sets the Link Loss Enable Delay, in seconds, from the time
Link Loss Forwarding Link Loss is detected before Link Loss Forwarding takes
0 -3600 (sec.)
Delay effect. If the loss clears during delay time, it is not propagated.
Only effective if LLF Status is Enabled.
Sets Link Loss Forwarding Transmit Signal Type. A facility No Action
Link Loss Forwarding port takes TX Action only after the other end of its associated
EFM Signal
TX Action flow get LLF events triggered. This option is not controlled by
Port LLF Status. Link Down

852 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 62: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Private Line Service

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Check boxes to select trigger events to generate the Link Loss EFM
Link Loss Forwarding
Forwarding signal. Either EFM or Link Down may be selected,
Trigger Events Link Down
or both. In default, none are selected.
Defines the Local Link ID for the Access port to indicate which 1 to 6
Link Loss Forwarding port is faulted. Applicable entries are 1 through 6. Default is the
Local Link ID current Access Port ID. Local Link ID is only used for EFM Sig-(Current Access Port
nal TX Action. ID)
Allows selection of the Remote Link ID(s) to be used for
matching against the Link ID in the EFM RLD (Remote Link 1 to 6
Link Loss Forwarding
Down) message. The same Remote Link ID number may be
Remote Link IDs N/A
set for multiple Network ports, if desired. Default is no ports
selected.
If selected, the LLDP frame propagation scope will include a
Nearest Bridge single LAN which limits the propagation of LLDP frames Selected
([Link]) across a link, and the MAC Address [Link] will be /Unselected
used as the destination address in LLDP frames.
If selected, the LLDP frame propagation scope will include the Selected
Nearest non-TPMR transmission of LLDP frames through Two-Port MAC Relays
Bridge (TPMR) between two C-VLAN/S-VLAN components or 802.1d /Unselected
([Link]) bridges. and the MAC Address [Link] will be used
as the destination address in LLDP frames,
If selected, the LLDP frame propagation scope will include the Selected
Nearest Customer transmission of LLDP frames through TPMRs and S-VLAN
Edge components between C-VLAN components or 802.1d bridges, /Unselected
([Link]) and the MAC Address [Link] will be used as the
destination address in LLDP frames.
Edit CPD Filters - see CPD Filters Options and Rules.
Edit EFM-OAM
State Disabled
Manages the EFM OAM on the Ethernet Network Port.
OAM Control Enabled
Local Configuration Configures the OAM sub-layer entity in either Active or OAM Active
Mode Passive mode. OAM Passive
Edit Sync-E - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)
Determines whether the Ethernet port operates in SyncE Disabled
Sync-E Mode Mode. Disabled means the port operates in non-Sync mode.
Enabled means the port operates in sync mode. Enabled
Determines whether the Ethernet port operates in Quality
Disabled
Level (QL) Mode. The QL Mode for an Ethernet port cannot be
QL Mode
set to Enabled unless the SyncE Mode attribute is also set to
Enabled
Enabled.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 853

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 62: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Private Line Service

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults

Specifies the assumed Quality Level (QL) on the

QL-NONE
Ethernet Port. Assumed QL is a QL value that is forced at a
receiving interface.

For QL mode disabled, the selected Assumed QL is a value QL-PRC

specified for the received recovered timing reference (if not in
the failed state).
Assumed QL QL-SSU-A
For QL mode enabled, the selected Assumed QL overrides
the received QL value if interface is not in the failed state and
if the Assumed QL value is not QL-NONE. When Assumed
QL-SSU-B
QL value is QL-NONE, the received QL represents the QL for
the interface.

Valid entry for SDH Network Clock: QL-PRC, QL-SSU-A. QL-EEC1

QL-SSU-B, QL-EEC1. Default is QL-EEC1.
Valid entry for SONET Network Clock: QL-STU. QL-STU
Set the Expected QL for the Ethernet port. When the Received QL-NONE
QL value is lower than the Expected QL value, the interface is QL-PRC
declared as failed and a Sync QL Mismatch alarm is declared QL-SSU-A
against the [Link] Expected QL only has meaning QL-SSU-B
when the QL Mode attribute is set to Enabled. QL-EEC1
QL-NONE
QL-PRS
Expected QL
QL-STU
Valid entry for SONET Network Clock: QL-NONE, QL-PRS, QL-ST2
QL-STU, QL-ST2, QL-TNC, QL-ST3E, QL-EEC2, QL-SMC, QL-TNC
QL-PROV. QL-ST3E
QL-EEC2
QL-SMC
QL-PROV
Edit N2A Shapers
Buffer Size The buffer size of the shaper (in KB). 0-15360
(allocated resource from
port shaper plus shaper
SOAM-CIR
Define the shaper CIR size for the SOAM service on this flow. CIR cannot exceed
1Gbps)

0
(allocated resource from
port shaper plus shaper
SOAM-EIR
Define the shaper EIR size for the SOAM service on this flow. CIR cannot exceed
1Gbps)

0
Shaper WRED In-Pro-
The minimum drop threshold for in-profile traffic. 0 - 100
file MIN Threshold %

854 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 62: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Private Line Service

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Shaper WRED In-Pro-
The maximum drop threshold for in-profile traffic. 0 - 100
file MAX Threshold %
Shaper WRED In-Pro-
file Maximum Drop The maximum drop probability for in-profile traffic. 0 - 100
Probability
Shaper WRED Out-of 0 - 100
Profile MIN Threshold The minimum drop threshold for out-of profile traffic.
% 75
Shaper WRED Out-of 0 - 100
Profile MAX Threshold The maximum drop threshold for out-of profile traffic.
% 75
Shaper WRED Out-of 0 - 100
Profile Maximum Drop The maximum drop probability for out-of profile traffic.
Probability 75
Edit PCP Configuration
Note 1: Update Table option is used to update the PCP Encoding and Decoding Tables after editing PCP Pairs
1, 2 and/or 3.

Note 2: Reset PCP Defaults option is used to reset the PCP Encoding and Decoding Tables back to default val-
ues.
Standardized modes for editing PCP encoding are 7P1D,
6P2D and 5P3D which allow the user to edit 1, 2 or 3 PCP None
pairs respectively.

Also provided is a ‘Custom’ mode that allows the user to edit

the PCP Encoding and Decoding Tables directly and ignore 7P1D
the normal rules regarding priority reuse and hierarchy. Any
use of PCP Encoding may affect existing traffic. The Custom
PCP DE Encoding mode has the potential for causing unexpected and unintended
6P2D
Mode disruption of normal traffic.

If ‘PCP DE Encoding Mode’ is set to ‘Custom’, a PCP

Encoding Table and PCP Decoding Table are provided for 5P3D
custom selections. The PCP Encoding Table allows user-
selectable Drop Ineligible and Drop Eligible priority values. The
PCP Decoding Table allows user-selectable Outgoing Tag
Priority and enabling or disabling whether the tag is Drop Custom
Eligible.
If ‘PCP DE Encoding Mode’ is set to ‘7P1D’, ‘6P2D’ or ‘5P3D’,
the user can edit 1, 2 or 3 PCP pairs respectively. Each priority Drop Ineligible
can only be used once, and the lower priority of a pair should 0-7
always be the drop eligible one.
PCP Pair 1, 2, 3
Use the Update Table button to update the PCP Encoding and
Decoding Tables after editing PCP Pairs 1, 2 and/or 3. Drop Eligible
Use the Reset PCP Defaults button to reset the PCP 0-7
Encoding and Decoding Tables back to default values.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 855

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 62: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Private Line Service

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Drop Ineligible
If ‘PCP DE Encoding Mode’ is set to ‘Custom’ for each ‘Incom-
0-7
PCP Encoding Table ing Tag Priority’ the user can select the desired Drop Ineligible
Drop Eligible
and Drop Eligible priority.
0-7
If ‘PCP DE Encoding Mode’ is set to ‘Custom’ for each ‘Incom- Outgoing Tag Priority
ing Tag Priority’ the user can select the desired Outgoing Tag 0-7
PCP Decoding Table Priority and enable or disable Drop Eligible.
Drop Eligible
Disabled/Enabled
Edit LLDP - see LLDP Configuration Settings
Edit E-LMI - see E-LMI Configuration Settings
Flow

(Edit Configuration)
Connection
Defines a circuit identifier for the Flow. Up to 256 characters up to 256 characters
Circuit Name
are allowed. (blank)
Select the Network Interface for this flow. Candidates include:
NETWORK PORT-1-
Network port, Network LAG, Network PPG (including 1+1,
1-1-1
Dual-Active, RP entity with network ring port,), and SHG
Network Interface
entity with network member port. Note that PPG, SHG and
NETWORK PORT-1-1-
LAG can not coexist; if any one type exists, the other two can-
1-2
not exist.
Select the Access Interface for this flow. Candidates include:
Access Interface the current Access port, LAG (if any) with current port as mem- Current Access Port
ber, and SHG (if any) entity with current port as member.
Enable/Disable the selected Policing Control. When the poli- Enabled
Policing cing is Disabled, the policer in the corresponding direction will
not work. Disabled
A2N_N2A
Policing Control Specify the policing direction of the flow. A2N
N2A
If Flow Based is selected, system will assign 8 independent
queues for this flow for A2N shaping; If Port Based is selec- Flow Based
A2N Shaping
ted, system will schedule this flow to use the queues of the
specified Network Interface according to the COS specified Port Based
for this flow.
EoMPLS Encap- Select the checkbox to associate the access port flow (checkbox
sulation (EPL/EVPL) with an EoMPLS PW. unselected)
Select a desired EoMPLS PW to associate with from the drop
EoMPLS PW (none by default)
down list.
Specify the COS (Class of Service) value for the Traffic Flow.
It identifies the internal COS applied to the all A2N frames
COS 0 to 7
received on the parent Access Port that match the Flow’s A2N
membership.
Independent N2A Rate Manages N2A rate limiting, independent of A2N rate limiting. Disabled
Limiting When not enabled, N2A specification is the same as A2N. Enabled

856 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 62: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Private Line Service

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Specifies the frame-loss ratio (%) per flow that starts counting
Frame Loss Threshold Severely Errored Seconds (SES) on the flow. This func- 0 to 100
Ratio tionality is applicable if the flow is monitored using the Y.1731 30
ESA functionality.
Specifies the number of frames lost per flow that starts count-
ing Errored Seconds (ES) on the flow. This functionality is 1 to 2147483647
Frame Loss Threshold
applicable if the flow is monitored using the Y.1731 ESA func- 1
tionality.
Enable/Disable Network to Network forwarding when the Net-
work Interface of this flow is an ERP ring port. If Enabled, the
Disabled
flow received on this access interface with the same VLAN ID
as this flow will be forwarded to the other ERP ring port in addi-
N2N Forwarding
tion to Access to Network forwarding and reach to the next
node in the ERP group; If Disabled, the flow with the same
Enabled
VLAN ID as this flow will not be forwarded to the next node,
but received by this flow.
Enable Broadcast Rate Limiting and enter the message rate. 0 - 1000000000 (bps)
A2N Broadcast Rate
By default, this option is not selected and therefore no limit is
Limiting (not selected)
set for the broadcast messages on this port
Enable Multicast Rate Limiting and enter the message rate. By 0 - 1000000000 (bps)
A2N Multicast Rate
default, this option is not selected and therefore no limit is set
Limiting (not selected)
for the multicast messages on this port
Enable Multicast & Broadcast Rate Limiting and enter the
A2N Multicast & 0 - 1000000000 (bps)
combined message rate. By default, this option is not selected
Broadcast Rate
and therefore no rate limit is set for the broadcast and (not selected)
Limiting
multicast messages on this port.
This option must be configured by a crypto user. See
Secure Flow N/A
Configure Secure Flow Attributes for details.
This option must be configured by a crypto user. See Disabled
Secure Block
Configure Secure Flow Attributes for details. Enabled
Learning Attributes
If set to None, the specified Network Interface will not learn
None
Network Interface the Source MAC Address of received frames; If set to MAC
Learning Control Based, the Network Interface will learn the Source MAC
MAC Based
Address of receiving frames.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 857

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 62: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Private Line Service

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Defines the Protected Network Learning Control.

If None: Learned entries for this flow with the parent

Network Port as a destination can be updated to a different None

Port.

If Discard: Learned entries for this flow with a Network

Protected Network Port as a destination cannot be updated to a different
Learning Control
Port; frames received that would update the learned

entry are discarded.

Discard
All flows that begin discarding frames due to this control shall
transition to a secondary state of BLCKD and a operational
state of outage. Transition out of this secondary state is by
user action.
Specify the maximum Forwarding Table Entries (MAC
learned) allowed by the Network Interface.

Note that each P2P flow will decrease the Max Forwarding 0 - 2048
Table Entries per system (2048 for GE112Pro series, 4096 for (GE112Pro series)
Max Network For- GE114Pro series) by 2, on condition of the following pre- or
warding Table Entries requisites:
0 - 4096
1) Network Interface Learning Control set to None
(GE114Pro series)
2) Access Interface Learning Control set to None

3) No static Forwarding Table Entry is provisioned.

Forward
MAC Table Full Action The action to take when the MAC table is full.
Block
If set to None, the specified Access Interface will not learn the
None
Access Interface Source MAC Address of received frames; If set to MAC
Learning Control Based, the Access Interface will learn the Source MAC
MAC Based
Address of receiving frames.

858 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 62: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Private Line Service

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Defines the Protected Access Learning Control.

If None: Learned entries for this flow with the parent

Access Port as a destination can be updated to a different

Port. None

If Discard: Learned entries for this flow with the parent

Access Port as a destination cannot be updated to a

different Port; frames received that would update the

learned entry are discarded.

If Blocked: Learned entries for this flow with the Physical or

Protected Access Logical Parent Access Port as a destination cannot be Discard
Learning Control updated to a different Port. After receiving a

frame that would update a learned entry, that frame is

discarded, the Flow adds a secondary state of BLCKD,

and all subsequent frames received on that port that

match the Flow membership shall be discarded until

the secondary state of BLCKD is cleared.

Block
All flows that begin discarding frames due to this control shall
transition to a secondary state of BLCKD and a operational
state of outage. Transition out of this secondary state is by
user action.
Specify the maximum Forwarding Table Entries (MAC
learned) allowed by the Access Interface.
0 - 2048
Note that each P2P flow will decrease the Max Forwarding (GE112Pro series)
Table Entries per system (2048 for GE112Pro series, 4096 for
or
Max Access For- GE114Pro series) by 2, on condition of the following pre-
warding Table Entries requisites: 0 - 4096
1) Network Interface Learning Control set to None (GE114Pro series)
2) Access Interface Learning Control set to None

3) No static Forwarding Table Entry is provisioned.

0 and

Aging Timer The aging time of the MAC address learned. 10 - 1,000,000

300

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 859

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 62: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Private Line Service

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults

Tag Management
Defines whether the C (Customer) Tag VLAN ID / VLAN Pri-
ority should be PUSHed or no action taken.
Push
If more than one Access port is to be used in the system, Push
C-Tag Control must be selected. If C-Tag Control is set to None, only one
LAN port may be used in the system.
None
If C-Tag Control is set to None, then C-Tag VLAN ID and C-
Tag VLAN Priority cannot be entered.
1 to 4095
Defines the C-Tag VLAN ID that will be PUSHed. This option E1000-A-2 (if
is only available if C-Tag Control is set to Push. provisioned)
default is 2
All C-Tag and S-Tag VLAN ID-Priority values must not conflict
on the Network port. (For example: A service with C-Tag E1000-A-3
PUSH 100-0, S-Tag PUSH 100-0 will conflict with another ser- default is 3
vice with the same C-Tag and S-Tag. A service with C-Tag E1000-A-4
PUSH 100-0, S-Tag None will conflict with another service default is 4
C-Tag
with C-Tag None, S-Tag PUSH 100-0. An EPL service with C- E1000-A-5
Tag PUSH 100-0, S-Tag NONE will conflict with a Flow with default is 5
VLAN Member 100-0, C-Tag NONE and S-Tag NONE.) E1000-A-6
default is 6
Defines the C-Tag VLAN Priority that will be PUSHed. This
option is only allowed if C-Tag Control is set to Push.
0 to 7
All C-Tag and S-Tag VLAN ID-Priority values must not conflict
on the Network port (see C-Tag VLAN ID).
Defines whether the S (Service) Tag VLAN ID / VLAN Priority
should be PUSHed or no action taken. Push
S-Tag Control
If S-Tag Control is set to None, S-Tag VLAN ID and C-Tag None
VLAN Priority cannot be entered.

860 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 62: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Private Line Service

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
1 to 4095
Defines the S-Tag VLAN ID that will be PUSHed. This option E1000-A-2 (if
is only applicable if S-Tag Control is set to Push. provisioned)
default is 2
All C-Tag and S-Tag VLAN ID-Priority values must not conflict
on the Network port. (For example: A service with C-Tag E1000-A-3
PUSH 100-0, S-Tag PUSH 100-0 will conflict with another ser- default is 3
vice with the same C-Tag and S-Tag. A service with C-Tag E1000-A-4
PUSH 100-0, S-Tag None will conflict with another service default is 4
S-Tag
with C-Tag None, S-Tag PUSH 100-0. An EPL service with C- E1000-A-5
Tag PUSH 100-0, S-Tag NONE will conflict with a Flow with default is 5
VLAN Member 100-0, C-Tag NONE and S-Tag NONE.) E1000-A-6
default is 6
Defines the S-Tag VLAN Priority that will be PUSHed. This
option is only applicable if S-Tag Control is set to Push.
0 to 7
All C-Tag and S-Tag VLAN ID-Priority values must not conflict
on the Network port (see S-Tag VLAN ID).
A2N Settings
Defines the Policer Committed Information Rate (CIR) for this
Policer, in bps. If Policer EIR is set to 0, then a Policer CIR
value of 64,000 bps or greater must be entered. Policer CIR
and Policer EIR cannot both be set to 0. A2N Policer values
are compared against the Network Port speed.

l If Network Port Shaping is Disabled: PIR (Peak

Information Rate) = CIR + EIR; must not exceed the
speed of the Network Port.
l If Network Port Shaping is Enabled: PIR must be less
than or equal to the Network Port Shaped Speed.
Policer CIR 0 to 1 Gbps
l If Access Port Shaping is Disabled: PIR (Peak
Information Rate) = CIR + EIR; must not exceed the
speed of the Access Port.
l If Access Port Shaping is Enabled: PIR must be less
than or equal to the Access Port Shaped Speed.

Entries are rounded up to the next 64,000 bps increment (e.g.,

if the value of 1 bps is entered, then the value will
automatically be rounded up to 64,000 bps; if the value of
5,000,000 bps is entered, then the value will automatically be
rounded up to 5,056,000 bps).

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 861

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 62: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Private Line Service

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Defines the Policer Excess Information Rate (EIR) for this
Policer, in bps. If Policer CIR is set to 0, then a Policer EIR
value of 64,000 bps or greater must be entered. Policer CIR
and Policer EIR cannot both be set to 0. A2N Policer values
are compared against the Network Port speed.

l If Network Port Shaping is Disabled: PIR (Peak

Information Rate) = CIR + EIR; must not exceed the
speed of the Network Port.
l If Network Port Shaping is Enabled: PIR must be less
Policer EIR than or equal to the Network Port Shaped Speed.
0 to 1,000,000,000 (bps)
l If Access Port Shaping is Disabled: PIR (Peak
Information Rate) = CIR + EIR; must not exceed the
speed of the Access Port.
l If Access Port Shaping is Enabled: PIR must be less
than or equal to the Access Port Shaped Speed.

Entries are rounded up to the next 64,000 bps increment (e.g.,

if the value of 1 bps is entered, then the value will
automatically be rounded up to 64,000 bps; if the value of
5,000,000 bps is entered, then the value will automatically be
rounded up to 5,056,000 bps).
Defines the Policer Committed Burst Size (CBS) for this
Policer, in Kilobytes. The minimum Policer CBS entry allowed
Policer CBS is based on the Policer CIR entry, see Table 64. For IP type 0 to 1,024 (KB)
traffic, see Table 65 for recommended CBS value, based on
CIR/EIR entry range.
Defines the Policer Excess Burst Size (EBS) for this Policer,
in Kilobytes. The minimum Policer EBS entry allowed is based
Policer EBS on the Policer EIR entry, see Table 64. For IP type traffic, see 0 to 1,024 (KB)
Table 65 for recommended EBS value, based on CIR/EIR
entry range.
Specifies the Color Mode as 'Color Aware' or 'Color Blind' for Color Aware
Policer Color Marking
the A2N Policer. Color Blind

862 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 62: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Private Line Service

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Enable/Disable Color Coupling Flag for the policer in A2N dir-
ection. When coupling is enabled, tokens that would normally
be added to the C-bucket are passed to the E-bucket only
once the CIR bucket has reached its CBS level. Therefore
under this condition the E-bucket is being filled at the rate of Enabled
CIR + EIR. Normally the long term average of frames declared
˜yellow” is bounded by the EIR. Coupling is a function to allow
the long term average of frames declared ˜yellow” to be
bounded by CIR + EIR.
Policer Color Coupling
Flag

This allows a higher volume of yellow frames to be

delivered/received if the arrival of green marked frames is low.
Tokens from the E-bucket do NOT get passed to the C-bucket
once the EBS level has been reached. Enabling coupling in Disabled
combination with a provisioned EIR of 0 allows for a single rate
three color marking (srTCM) algorithm to be established. In
this situation the E-bucket is filled at the CIR rate in the case
the C-bucket is filled to its CBS level.
2 - 15360 KB
Shaper Buffer Size Enter the Buffer Size of the shaper, in kilobytes.
128 KB
(allocated resource from
port shaper plus shaper
SOAM-CIR
Define the shaper CIR size for the SOAM service on this flow. CIR cannot exceed
1Gbps)

0
(allocated resource from
port shaper plus shaper
SOAM-EIR
Define the shaper EIR size for the SOAM service on this flow. CIR cannot exceed
1Gbps)

0
Shaper WRED In-Pro-
The minimum drop threshold for in-profile traffic. 0 - 100
file MIN Threshold %
Shaper WRED In-Pro-
The maximum drop threshold for in-profile traffic. 0 - 100
file MAX Threshold %
Shaper WRED In-Pro-
file Maximum Drop The maximum drop probability for in-profile traffic. 0 - 100
Probability
Shaper WRED Out-of 0 - 100
Profile MIN Threshold The minimum drop threshold for out-of profile traffic.
% 75
Shaper WRED Out-of 0 - 100
Profile MAX Threshold The maximum drop threshold for out-of profile traffic.
% 75

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 863

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 62: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Private Line Service

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Shaper WRED Out-of 0 - 100
Profile Maximum Drop The maximum drop probability for out-of profile traffic.
Probability 75
Edit CPD Filters - see CPD Filters Options and Rules.
Add Forwarding Table Entry
Add a specified static destination MAC address to the For-
Destination Address (blank)
warding table for this flow.
Access Interface of
Select the destination port where the input Destination this flow
Destination Port
Address is learned. Network Interface of
this flow
Select the action to take when this Destination Address is
learned. If set to Block, the learned address will be discarded Block
Learning Action and this flow will block the learning of this MAC address again;
if set to Forward, this flow will forward this learned Destination Forward
Address.

864 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

EVPL Service Provisioning Rules

Refer to the following for provisioning a Ethernet Virtual Private Line (EVPL) service. It is
recommended that you review the following configuration options and rules and pre-
determine the desired provisioning details prior to making any provisioning changes to a
service. Default settings are identified in bold.

Changing Service Type on a port will drop all traffic on the port,
including Management Tunnel connectivity and Maintenance
End Points.

Changing the Buffer Size is not hitless. Reducing CBS may

not be hitless.

Table 63: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Virtual Private Line Service
Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults

Access Port (Edit Configuration)

A text and/or number string the user enters to uniquely identify up to 255 characters
Alias this Access Port. This string can be up to 64 printable ASCII (blank)
characters long.
Defines the Access Port facility administrative state. The IS
administrative state controls the generation of alarms and
event reports. When an entity is in the In Service state, it is Management
fully operational. The Administrative State must be set to Main-
Administrative State tenance prior to initiating a loopback or an Etherjack Dia- Maintenance
gnostic. The Administrative State must first be set to
Unassigned state prior to changing the Service Type. For more Disabled
information on Administration States, see Entity State Descrip-
tions. Unassigned
Fiber
Media Type Defines the port media type.
Copper
Defines the Maximum Transmission Unit size. Minimum MTU 1518-9612
MTU
is 1518; Maximum is 9612. 9600
Defines the Media Dependent Interface, Crossover function for Auto
copper interfaces. MDIX allows the interface to change cable
MDIX (Copper) Crossed
signal assignments to compensate for using the incorrect cable
type. Uncrossed
Auto
Auto 1000 Full
Auto 1000 Full Master
Configured Speed (Cop- Sets the configured speed for the access interface. The user Auto 1000 Full Slave
per) can select auto negotiation or manual configuration. Auto 100 Full
Auto 10 Full
100 Full
10 Full

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 865

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 63: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Virtual Private Line Service
Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Auto 1000 Full
Configured Speed Sets the configured speed for the access interface. The user
1000 Full
(Fiber) can select auto negotiation or manual configuration.
100 Full
Enable/Disable the support of Open Flow on this port.

l An Access Port is not allowed to support Open Flow if:

o the Access Port is in EPL mode;

o the Access Port is a member of LAG\

Disabled
o the configured speed is set to “Auto”
l Once this option is set to Enabled to support Open Flow on
an Access Port:
o Not allowed to change Service Mode from EVPL to EPL
OpenFlow o Not allowed not add this port to a LAG
o Not allowed to set the port Configured Speed to “Auto”
o Port-2 (flexible port) is not allowed to switched to
Network Port
o Not allowed to change the setting if at least one OF Enabled
Flow is associated with this port as part of Flow match
or as Output action
o It’s allowed to change the setting even if an OF Capable
Switch exists.
Auto Diagnostic Enables or disables the automatic Cable Diagnostic tests Enabled
(Copper) when the cable is removed from the port. Disabled
Receive DEI Action.
Use
Rx DEI Action l Ignore - does not use DEI for color identification
l Use - uses DEI for color identification Ignore
Receive DEI Outer Tag Type. Applies only if the Receive DEI
Action is USE Ctag Or Stag

Rx DEI Outer Tag l Stag – DEI is used for color identification only if the outer
tag is S-Tag
l Ctag Or Stag – DEI is used for color identification if outer Stag
tag is C-Tag or S-Tag
Transmit DEI Action. Set to Zero

Tx DEI Action l Set to Zero - implies the DEI is always set to 0 Mark Color
l Mark Color - implies the declared color is set in the DEI
l No Change - implies the outer tag DEI is not modified No Change
Transmit DEI Outer Tag Type. Applies only if the Tx DEI
Action is “Set to Zero” and “Mark Color”. Ctag Or Stag
Tx DEI Outer Tag l Stag – DEI is modified only if the outer tag is S-Tag
l Ctag Or Stag – DEI is modified if outer tag is C-Tag or S- Stag
Tag

866 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 63: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Virtual Private Line Service
Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Defines the service type for this Access port - either Ethernet
EPL
Private Line (EPL) or Ethernet Virtual Private Line (EVPL). The
Service Type
Administrative State must first be set to Unassigned state prior
EVPL
to changing the Service Type.
AFP Tagged
Defines the Acceptable Frame Policy. See Acceptable Frame
AFP AFP Untagged
Policy in FSP 150-GE11xPro System Description document.
AFP All
Defines the Stacked Ethertype to be used to inter-operate with
Queue-in-Queue frames with other vendors. Only editable if Q
Q in Q Ethertype in Q EtherType Override is enabled. 0 (hex)

Q in Q EtherType Enabled
Enables or disables editing the Q in Q EtherType.
Override Disabled
1 to 4095-[0 to 7]
E1000-A-2 (if
provisioned)
VID default is 2
Defines the Port VLAN ID. The format is VID-PRIO. The valid
E1000-A-3
values for VID are 1 to 4095 and valid values for PRIO are 0 to
Port VID default is 3
7. If only the VID portion is entered, PRIO will default to 0. If
VLAN ID E1000-A-4
the VID portion is not entered, PRIO also cannot be specified.
VID default is 4
This option is only valid when Service Type is set to EVPL.
E1000-A-5
VID default is 5
E1000-A-6
VID default is 6
Selects a Priority Mapping Profile Identifier for Access Port
A2N ingress P-bit mapping while port Service Type is set to None
EVPL. If a specific profile is selected, the port-based priority
mapping will be based on the selected profile setting. The sys- Drop-down list of
Priority Mapping Profile tem supports up to 8/64 Ingress Priority Mapping Profile entit- available Priority
ies. Mapping Profile entity
See Default Priority Mapping Profile Tables for default Priority names
Map settings. This option is only valid when Service Type is
set to EVPL.
Enable/Disable swapping VID number in A2N direction using
the VID specified as the Swap Priority VID only when the Enabled
A2N Swap Priority VID incoming Outer VID equals 0. Used to change the A2N VID
without altering the priority of a tagged frame. This option is Disabled
only valid when Service Type is set to EVPL.
Enable/Disable swapping VID number in N2A direction to 0
only when the incoming Outer VID equals the VID specified as Enabled
N2A Swap Priority VID the Swap Priority VID. Used to change the N2A VID without
altering the priority of a tagged frame. This option is only valid Disabled
when Service Type is set to EVPL.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 867

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 63: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Virtual Private Line Service
Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
VID to be used for A2N and/or N2A Swap Priority VID when
Swap Priority VID either or both are enabled. This option is only valid when 1 - 4095
Service Type is set to EVPL.
Enabled
802.3 Pause RX Defines the receive flow control for the facility.
Disabled
Enabled
802.3 Pause TX Defines the transmit flow control for the facility.
Disabled
Enables or Disables Access Port Shaping. Port shaping limits
Enabled
the output traffic rate to a value below the pro-
Port Shaping
visioned/negotiated physical port speed. Shaping is useful to
Disabled
limit the burst size of the traffic being offered to the client.
Defines the maximum bandwidth on the Access Port (in bps) 0 to 1,000,000,000
Port Shaped Speed
toward the client. Applicable when Port Shaping is Enabled. (bps)
Whether to enable configuring Bandwidth for Port Shaper
independently.
Enabled
When Independent Shaper Bandwidth is disabled, the port
Independent Port
Shaper CIR is a sum of Corresponding Policers.
Shaper BW
When Independent Shaper Bandwidth is enabled, the user can
Disabled
manually enter CIR and EIR setting for the port Shapers
setting.
Enables or disables the Network to Access VLAN trunking on
Enabled
the Ethernet Access port. Disabling VLAN trunking removes all
N2A VLAN Trunking
VLAN tags before transmitting traffic out of the access port.
Disabled
This option is only valid when Service Type is set to EVPL.
Sets Push port VLAN ID in the Access to Network direction.
When Enabled, the Port VLAN ID is PUSHed onto the frame. Enabled
A2N Push Port VID When Disabled, no tags are PUSHEed onto the frame (i.e., it
stays untagged). This option is only valid when Service Type is Disabled
set to EVPL.
Sets Pop port VLAN ID on N2A frames. If Ingress PUSH Port
Enabled
VLAN ID is Enabled, it may be desired that the PVID may be
N2A Pop Port VID
POPed. This option is only valid when Service Type is set to
Disabled
EVPL.
Controls whether the selected (if any) LLF Trigger Events will Disabled
Link Loss Forwarding
work. If no LLF Trigger Events are selected, it’s equivalent to
Port LLF Status Enabled
setting LLF to Disabled.
Sets the Link Loss Enable Delay, in seconds, from the time
Link Loss Forwarding Link Loss is detected before Link Loss Forwarding takes effect.
0-3600 (sec.)
Delay If the loss clears during delay time, it is not propagated. Only
effective if LLF Status is Enabled.
Sets Link Loss Forwarding Transmit Signal Type. A facility port No Action
Link Loss Forwarding takes TX Action only after the other end of its associated flow
EFM Signal
TX Action get LLF events triggered. This option is not controlled by Port
LLF Status. Link Down

868 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 63: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Virtual Private Line Service
Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Check boxes to select trigger events to generate the Link Loss EFM
Link Loss Forwarding
Forwarding signal. Either EFM or Link Down may be selected,
Trigger Events Link Down
or both. In default, none are selected.
Defines the Local Link ID for the Access port to indicate which 1 to 6
Link Loss Forwarding port is faulted. Applicable entries are 1 through 6. Default is the
Local Link ID current Access Port ID. Local Link ID is only used for EFM Sig- (current Access Port
nal TX Action. ID)
Allows selection of the Remote Link ID(s) to be used for match-
Link Loss Forwarding ing against the Link ID in the EFM RLD (Remote Link Down) 1 to 6
Remote Link IDs message. The same Remote Link ID number may be set for N/A
multiple Network ports, if desired. Default is no ports selected.
If selected, the LLDP frame propagation scope will include a
Nearest Bridge single LAN which limits the propagation of LLDP frames across Selected
([Link]) a link, and the MAC Address [Link] will be used as /Unselected
the destination address in LLDP frames.
If selected, the LLDP frame propagation scope will include the Selected
Nearest non-TPMR transmission of LLDP frames through Two-Port MAC Relays
Bridge (TPMR) between two C-VLAN/S-VLAN components or 802.1d /Unselected
([Link]) bridges. and the MAC Address [Link] will be used
as the destination address in LLDP frames,
If selected, the LLDP frame propagation scope will include the Selected
Nearest Customer transmission of LLDP frames through TPMRs and S-VLAN
Edge components between C-VLAN components or 802.1d bridges, /Unselected
([Link]) and the MAC Address [Link] will be used as the
destination address in LLDP frames.
If port is to be used for mirroring another port, the port must be in
unassigned state, not in a LAG or ERP group, have no MEPs
Port Mirror Monitor Port Disabled / Enabled
present and no ECPA test stream assigned. Actual mirror
assignment is done in Maintenance View.
10 -15360KB
Port Mirror Buffer Size Specify the buffer size for the Port Mirror.
128
Edit CPD Filters - see CPD Filters Options and Rules.
Edit EFM-OAM
State Disabled
Manages the EFM OAM on the Ethernet Network Port.
OAM Control Enabled
Local Configuration Configures the OAM sub-layer entity in either Active or Passive OAM Active
Mode mode. OAM Passive
Edit Sync-E - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)
Determines whether the Ethernet port operates in SyncE Disabled
Sync-E Mode Mode. Disabled means the port operates in non-Sync mode.
Enabled means the port operates in sync mode. Enabled
Determines whether the Ethernet port operates in Quality Level
Disabled
(QL) Mode. The QL Mode for an Ethernet port cannot be set to
QL Mode
Enabled unless the SyncE Mode attribute is also set to
Enabled
Enabled.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 869

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 63: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Virtual Private Line Service
Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Specifies the assumed Quality Level (QL) on the
QL-NONE
Ethernet Port. Assumed QL is a QL value that is forced at a
receiving interface.

For QL mode disabled, the selected Assumed QL is a value QL-PRC

specified for the received recovered timing reference (if not in
the failed state).
Assumed QL QL-SSU-A
For QL mode enabled, the selected Assumed QL overrides the
received QL value if interface is not in the failed state and if the
Assumed QL value is not QL-NONE. When Assumed QL value
is QL-NONE, the received QL represents the QL for the inter- QL-SSU-B
face.

Valid entry for SDH Network Clock: QL-PRC, QL-SSU-A. QL- QL-EEC1
SSU-B, QL-EEC1. Default is QL-EEC1.
Valid entry for SONET Network Clock: QL-STU. QL-STU
Set the Expected QL for the Ethernet port. When the Received QL-NONE
QL value is lower than the Expected QL value, the interface is QL-PRC
declared as failed and a Sync QL Mismatch alarm is declared QL-SSU-A
against the [Link] Expected QL only has meaning when QL-SSU-B
the QL Mode attribute is set to Enabled. QL-EEC1
QL-NONE
QL-PRS
Expected QL
QL-STU
Valid entry for SONET Network Clock: QL-NONE, QL-PRS, QL-ST2
QL-STU, QL-ST2, QL-TNC, QL-ST3E, QL-EEC2, QL-SMC, QL-TNC
QL-PROV. QL-ST3E
QL-EEC2
QL-SMC
QL-PROV
Port N2A Shapers (Edit N2A Shapers)
10 to 15,360 (KB)
Buffer Size Represents the Buffer Size of the Shaper. Entered in kilobytes.
0 (KB)
(allocated resource

from port shaper

SOAM - CIR plus shaper CIR

Define the CIR size the shaper allocate for the SOAM service.
cannot exceed

1Gbps)

870 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 63: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Virtual Private Line Service
Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
(allocated resource

from port shaper

SOAM - EIR plus shaper CIR

Define the EIR size the shaper allocate for the SOAM service.
cannot exceed

1Gbps)

0
Edit PCP Configuration
Note 1: Update Table option is used to update the PCP Encoding and Decoding Tables after editing PCP Pairs
1, 2 and/or 3.

Note 2: Reset PCP Defaults option is used to reset the PCP Encoding and Decoding Tables back to default val-
ues.
Standardized modes for editing PCP encoding are 7P1D, 6P2D
and 5P3D which allow the user to edit 1, 2 or 3 PCP pairs None
respectively.

Also provided is a ‘Custom’ mode that allows the user to edit

the PCP Encoding and Decoding Tables directly and ignore the 7P1D
normal rules regarding priority reuse and hierarchy. Any use of
PCP Encoding may affect existing traffic. The Custom mode
PCP DE Encoding
has the potential for causing unexpected and unintended dis- 6P2D
Mode
ruption of normal traffic.

If ‘PCP DE Encoding Mode’ is set to ‘Custom’, a PCP Encod-

ing Table and PCP Decoding Table are provided for custom 5P3D
selections. The PCP Encoding Table allows user-selectable
Drop Ineligible and Drop Eligible priority values. The PCP
Decoding Table allows user-selectable Outgoing Tag Priority Custom
and enabling or disabling whether the tag is Drop Eligible.
If ‘PCP DE Encoding Mode’ is set to ‘7P1D’, ‘6P2D’ or ‘5P3D’,
the user can edit 1, 2 or 3 PCP pairs respectively. Each priority Drop Ineligible
can only be used once, and the lower priority of a pair should 0-7
always be the drop eligible one.
PCP Pair 1, 2, 3
Use the Update Table button to update the PCP Encoding and
Decoding Tables after editing PCP Pairs 1, 2 and/or 3. Drop Eligible
Use the Reset PCP Defaults button to reset the PCP Encoding 0-7
and Decoding Tables back to default values.
Edit LLDP - see LLDP Configuration Settings
Edit E-LMI - see E-LMI Configuration Settings
Flow (Create Flow or Edit Configuration)

Note: To delete a Flow, enter a right click on the desired flow and select Delete Flow. Then select OK.
Identification

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 871

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 63: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Virtual Private Line Service
Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
The flow identifier which is automatically indexed by default.
User may select the desired ID from the drop-down list. For FID-1 to FID-32 for
GE112Pro (m)/GE112Pro/GE112Pro (H), 32 flows are sup- GE112Prox
Flow ID
ported per system; For GE114Pro/GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro FID-1 to FID-64 for
(SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)/GE114Pro (HE), 64 flows are sup- GE114Prox
ported per system.
Connection
Assigns a circuit name to the flow. Up to 256 characters are up to 256 characters
Circuit Name
allowed. (blank)
Defines the flow type. If Default EVC is selected, no VLAN
Member value may be supplied, and this FID becomes the
Default FID for the port, i.e., all the VLAN IDs that don’t belong Default EVC
to any other FID on the port belongs to this FID. If Regular EVC
is selected, then individual VLAN Members may be added to
EVC Type the flow.
(Create Flow only)

Flow Type cannot be edited once a flow is created. To change Regular EVC
the Flow Type, the FID must be deleted and then re-created
with the new Flow Type.
Select the Network Interface for this flow. Candidates include:
Network port, Network LAG, Network PPG (including 1+1,
Dual-Active, RP entity with network ring port,), and SHG entity Select from Drop-
Network Interface with network member port, VXLAN Segment. Down list
Note that PPG, SHG and LAG can not coexist; if any one type
exists, the other two cannot exist.
ACCESS PORT-1-1-
Select the Access Interface for this flow. Candidates include: 1-N
Access Interface the current Access port, LAG (if any) with current port as mem- (N = 2 to 6
ber, and SHG (if any) entity with current port as member. respectively for
E1000-A-N)
Enable/Disable the selected Policing Control. When the poli- Enabled
Policing cing is Disabled, the policer in the corresponding direction will
not work. Disabled
A2N_N2A
Policing Control Specify the policing direction of the flow. A2N
N2A
Specifies the COS (Class of Service) value for the Traffic
Flow. This value is used at flow creation time to identify the
COS COS level of the A2N and N2A shaper. If MULTI COS is 0 to 7
Enabled, this option is not applicable when multiple policer-
s/shapers exist on the flow.

872 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 63: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Virtual Private Line Service
Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Enables or Disables Multi Class Of Service (COS). If set to the
Disabled, one N2A Policer and one A2N Policer are pro-
visionable. If set to the Enabled state, up to 8 N2A Policers and Enabled
8 A2N Policers may be provisioned. Multi COS can only be set
Multi COS to the Enabled state if Priority Map Mode is set to anything
other than None for the facility.
(Create Flow only)

This option is only available during Flow creation and cannot be Disabled
edited. If it is desired to edit an existing Flow, the Flow must be
deleted and then re-created with the Multi COS change.
Outer VLAN Tag
Inner VLAN Tag
Specifies what the flow uses for determining the COS (Class of N2A Priority Mapping
N2A COS Priority Service) in the N2A direction. This option is only applicable if VC Label
Multi COS is Enabled. MPLS Label
Encapsulation Outer
VLAN Tag
Enabled
Untagged Frames Specifies whether untagged traffic is supported on this flow.
Disabled
Whether to enable Independent Shaper Bandwidth in A2N
direciton.
Enabled
When Independent Shaper Bandwidth is disabled, the Shapers
Independent A2N
automatically inherit the CIR and EIR setting from the
Shaper BW
corresponding Policer.
Disabled
When Independent Shaper Bandwidth is enabled, the user can
manually configure CIR and EIR for the Shaper.
Default Priority
Selects a Priority Mapping Profile Identifier for EVPL flow A2N
A2N Priority Mapping ingress P-bit mapping while Multi COS is enabled. Slecting Mapping Profile
Profile (Drop-down list of
None to disable flow-based priority mapping; if a specific profile
available Priority
is selected for this flow, the flow-based priority mapping will
Mapping Profile entity
override related port-based setting.
names)
Selects a Priority Mapping Profile Identifier for EVPL flow N2A None
ingress P-bit mapping while Multi COS is enabled. Default is (Drop-down list of
N2A Priority Mapping
None which means flow-based priority mapping is disabled; if a available Priority
Profile
specific profile is selected for this flow, the flow-based priority Mapping Profile entity
mapping will override related port-based setting. names)
Select the checkbox to associate the access port flow (checkbox
EoMPLS Encapsulation
(EPL/EVPL) with an EoMPLS PW. unselected)
Select a desired EoMPLS PW to associate with from the drop
EoMPLS PW (none by default)
down list.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 873

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 63: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Virtual Private Line Service
Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Specifies whether the flow participates in inner-tag priority
swap. The Priority Mapping Profile - COS Mapping Table Enabled
Inner Tag Priority Con-
allows the A2N inner-tag priority to be specified based on
trol
incoming priority at Access Port (based on priority mapping Disabled
mode - 802.1p, IP-TOS, IP-DSCP).
Specifies whether the flow participates in outer-tag priority
swap. The Priority Mapping Table - COS Mapping Table allows Enabled
Outer Tag Priority Con-
the A2N outer-tag priority to be specified based on incoming pri-
trol
ority at Access Port (based on priority mapping mode - 802.1p, Disabled
IP-TOS, IP-DSCP).
Manages N2A rate limiting, independent of A2N rate limiting. Enabled
Independent N2A Rate
When not enabled, N2A specification is the same as A2N. This
Limiting Disabled
option is only applicable if Multi COS is Disabled.
Frame Loss Threshold 1-100%
A threshold for a flow to be considered as serious frame loss.
Ratio 30%
Shaping method used on A2N direction.

For a port-based flow, this can be edited after creation.

Flow Based
For a regular or default flow, this can only be set at the time of
A2N Shaping creation.

If Flow Based is selected, system will assign 8 independent

queues for this flow for A2N shaping; If Port Based is selected,
system will schedule this flow to use the queues of the spe- Port Based
cified Network Interface according to the COS specified for this
flow.
Enable/Disable Network to Network forwarding when the Net-
work Interface of this flow is an ERP ring port. If Enabled, the
Disabled
flow received on this access interface with the same VLAN ID
as this flow will be forwarded to the other ERP ring port in addi-
N2N Forwarding
tion to Access to Network forwarding and reach to the next
node in the ERP group; If Disabled, the flow with the same
Enabled
VLAN ID as this flow will not be forwarded to the next node, but
received by this flow.
Enable Broadcast Rate Limiting and enter the message rate. 0 - 1000000000 (bps)
A2N Broadcast Rate
By default, this option is not selected and therefore no limit is
Limiting (not selected)
set for the broadcast messages on this port
Enable Multicast Rate Limiting and enter the message rate. By 0 - 1000000000 (bps)
A2N Multicast Rate
default, this option is not selected and therefore no limit is set
Limiting (not selected)
for the multicast messages on this port
Enable Multicast & Broadcast Rate Limiting and enter the
A2N Multicast & 0 - 1000000000 (bps)
combined message rate. By default, this option is not selected
Broadcast Rate
and therefore no rate limit is set for the broadcast and multicast (not selected)
Limiting
messages on this port.
This option must be configured by a crypto user. See Configure
Secure Flow N/A
Secure Flow Attributes for details.

874 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 63: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Virtual Private Line Service
Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
This option must be configured by a crypto user or by a
Disabled
Superuser. But the Superuser can only configure this option in
Secure Block
flow creation process. See Configure Secure Flow Attributes
Enabled
for details.
Learning Attributes
If set to None, the specified Network Interface will not learn the
None
Network Interface Source MAC Address of received frames; If set to MAC
Learning Control Based, the Network Interface will learn the Source MAC
MAC Based
Address of receiving frames.
Defines the Protected Network Learning Control.

If None: Learned entries for this flow with the parent

Network Port as a destination can be updated to a different None

Port.

If Discard: Learned entries for this flow with a Network

Protected Network Port as a destination cannot be updated to a different
Learning Control
Port; frames received that would update the learned

entry are discarded.

Discard
All flows that begin discarding frames due to this control shall
transition to a secondary state of BLCKD and a operational
state of outage. Transition out of this secondary state is by
user action.
Specify the maximum Forwarding Table Entries (MAC learned)
allowed by the Network Interface.
0 - 2048
Note that each P2P flow will decrease the Max Forwarding (GE112Pro series)
Table Entries per system (2048 for GE112Pro series, 4096 for
or
Max Network For- GE114Pro series) by 2, on condition of the following pre-
warding Table Entries requisites: 0 - 4096
1) Network Interface Learning Control set to None (GE114Pro series)
2) Access Interface Learning Control set to None

3) No static Forwarding Table Entry is provisioned.

Forward
MAC Table Full Action The action to take when the MAC table is full.
Block
If set to None, the specified Access Interface will not learn the
None
Access Interface Learn- Source MAC Address of received frames; If set to MAC
ing Control Based, the Access Interface will learn the Source MAC
MAC Based
Address of receiving frames.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 875

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 63: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Virtual Private Line Service
Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Defines the Protected Access Learning Control.

If None: Learned entries for this flow with the parent

Access Port as a destination can be updated to a different Port.

None
If Discard: Learned entries for this flow with the parent

Access Port as a destination cannot be updated to a

different Port; frames received that would update the

learned entry are discarded.

If Blocked: Learned entries for this flow with the Physical or

Logical Parent Access Port as a destination cannot be updated
Protected Access to a different Port. After receiving a Discard
Learning Control
frame that would update a learned entry, that frame is

discarded, the Flow adds a secondary state of BLCKD,

and all subsequent frames received on that port that

match the Flow membership shall be discarded until

the secondary state of BLCKD is cleared.

All flows that begin discarding frames due to this control Block

shall transition to a secondary state of BLCKD and a

operational state of outage. Transition out of this secondary

state is by user action.
Specify the maximum Forwarding Table Entries (MAC learned)
allowed by the Access Interface.
0 - 2048
Note that each P2P flow will decrease the Max Forwarding (GE112Pro series)
Table Entries per system (2048 for GE112Pro series, 4096 for
or
Max Access For- GE114Pro series) by 2, on condition of the following pre-
warding Table Entries requisites: 0 - 4096
1) Network Interface Learning Control set to None (GE114Pro series)
2) Access Interface Learning Control set to None

3) No static Forwarding Table Entry is provisioned.

0 and

Aging Timer The aging time of the MAC address learned. 10 - 1,000,000

300

876 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 63: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Virtual Private Line Service
Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults

Tag Management
Defines whether the C (Customer) Tag VLAN ID / VLAN Pri-
ority should be Pushed, Swapped, Popped or no action taken.
Push
l If Push: A2N Push C-TAG containing C-Tag VLAN ID and
C-Tag VLAN Priority. If Push is selected, N2A Outer Tag
Priority Control cannot be selected.
l If Push VID: only the VLAN ID (12 bits) is PUSHed - the
Priority is copied from the incoming tag’s Priority. If Push Swap VID
VID is selected, C-Tag VLAN Priority cannot be entered,
Preserve S-Tag Properties cannot be selected and N2A
Outer Tag Priority Control cannot be selected.
C-Tag Control l If Swap VID: only the VLAN ID (12 bits) are swapped with Push VID
the specified C-Tag VLAN ID. If Swap VID is selected, C-
Tag VLAN Priority cannot be entered, Preserve S-Tag
Properties cannot be selected and N2A Outer Tag Priority
Control cannot be selected.
l If None: This selection provides no tag control action. If None
None is selected, C-Tag VLAN ID/Priority cannot be
entered, Preserve S-Tag Properties cannot be selected and
N2A Outer Tag Priority Control cannot be selected.
l If Pop: A2N Pop C-TAG containing the C-Tag VLAN ID. If Pop
Pop is selected, Preserve S-Tag Properties cannot be
selected and S-Tag Control is set to None.
Defines the C-Tag VLAN ID. If C-Tag Control is set to None,
then C-Tag VLAN ID cannot be entered.

All C-Tag and S-Tag VLAN ID-Priority values must not conflict
on the Network port. (For example: A service with C-Tag
PUSH 100-0, S-Tag PUSH 100-0 will conflict with another ser-
vice with the same C-Tag and S-Tag combination. A service 1 to 4095
with C-Tag PUSH 100-0, S-Tag None will conflict with another
C-Tag service with C-Tag None, S-Tag PUSH 100-0. A EPL service
with C-Tag PUSH 100-0, S-Tag NONE will conflict with an
EVPL service Flow with VLAN Member 100-0, C-Tag NONE
and S-Tag NONE.)
Defines the C-Tag VLAN Priority. If C-Tag Control is set to
None or Push VID, C-Tag VLAN Priority cannot be entered. All
0 to 7
C-Tag and S-Tag VLAN ID-Priority values must not conflict on
the Network port (see above).

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 877

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 63: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Virtual Private Line Service
Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Defines whether the S (Service) Tag VLAN ID / VLAN Priority
should be PUSHed, Swapped or no action taken.
Push
l If None, S-Tag VLAN ID and S-Tag VLAN Priority cannot
be entered.
l If Push, A2N Push S-TAG containing S-Tag VLAN ID and
S-Tag VLAN Priority. If Push is selected, Preserve S-Tag
S-Tag Control Properties cannot be selected and N2A Outer Tag Priority None
Control cannot be selected.
l If Swap VID, it is only available if C-Tag Control is set to
“None”. If Swap VID is selected, S-Tag VLAN Priority
cannot be entered, Preserve S-Tag Properties can be
selected and N2A Outer Tag Priority Control cannot be Swap VID
selected.
Defines the Transport VLAN ID. If S-Tag Control is set to
None, S-Tag VLAN ID cannot be entered. All C-Tag and S-Tag
VLAN ID-Priority values must not conflict on the Network port.
(For example: A service with C-Tag PUSH 100-0, S-Tag
PUSH 100-0 will conflict with another service with the same C-
1 to 4095
Tag and S-Tag combination. A service with C-Tag PUSH 100-
0, S-Tag None will conflict with another service with C-Tag
S-Tag None, S-Tag PUSH 100-0. An EPL service with C-Tag PUSH
100-0, S-Tag NONE will conflict with an EVPL service Flow
with VLAN Member 100-0, C-Tag NONE and S-Tag NONE.)
Defines the S-Tag VLAN Priority. If S-Tag Control is set to
None, S-Tag VLAN Priority cannot be entered.
0 to 7
All C-Tag and S-Tag VLAN ID-Priority values must not conflict
on the Network port (see above).
Preserve S-Tag Prop- Disabled
Preserve the S-Tag properties.
erties Enabled
Disabled
N2A Outer Tag Priority Enable/Disable N2A Outer Tag priority.
Enabled
A2N Settings
Whether to use Hierarchical COS Settings.

Only available for Multi-COS enabled Flow. Disabled

Hierarchical COS Set- Hierarchical COS Settings can be used by selecting the check-
tings box. Hierarchical COS settings allows managing bandwidth
profiles of schedule entities by bounding a group of traffic
classes (Multi COS group). The user can set values for the Enabled
guaranteed and maximum flow bandwidths bounding the whole
multi COS group.

878 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 63: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Virtual Private Line Service
Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Guaranteed bandwidth for the flow.

This option is only available if Multi COS is enabled and

the Hierarchical COS Settings is selected. This allows the
provisioning of guaranteed bandwidth of a flow. Guaranteed
Flow Bandwidth (GFB) must be less than or equal to the Max-
imum Flow Bandwidth. The sum of a Flow's A2N Shaper CIR
values must be less than or equal to the Guaranteed Flow Band-
width.

By default, GFB is set to the sum of all CIRs for the Multi COS
Guaranteed Flow Band- Group, and can not be set to a lower number. If set to a higher 0 to 1 Gbps
width number, the difference is termed “excess CIR” for the flow. N/A
Unused CIR and excess CIR from other COS levels within the
group are distributed based on the priority levels within the flow
first. Any unused CIR is then shared by other flows in the sys-
tem.

Entries are rounded up to the next 64,000 bps increment (e.g., if

the value of 1 bps is entered, then the value will automatically
be rounded up to 64,000 bps; if the value of 5,000,000 bps is
entered, then the value will automatically be rounded up to
5,056,000 bps).

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 879

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 63: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Virtual Private Line Service
Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Supports the Hierarchical Class of Service (HCOS) feature.
This option is only available if Multi COS is enabled and
the Hierarchical COS Settings is selected. This is the peak
limit of a flow. Maximum Flow Bandwidth (MFB) must be
greater than or equal to PIR (Peak Information Rate) = CIR +
EIR. The sum of a Flow's A2N Shaper PIR values must be
less than or equal to the oversubscribed Maximum Flow Band-
width value. Note: The oversubscribed Maximum Flow Band-
width value is equal to 8 times the Maximum Flow Bandwidth
value.

By default, MFB is set the greater of: the maximum PIR, or the
GFB for the Multi COS group.

If Access Port Port Shaping is disabled, then Maximum

Maximum Flow Band- Flow Bandwidth must be less than or equal to the Access Port 0 to 1 Gbps
width port speed.
N/A
If Access Port Port Shaping is enabled, then Maximum
Flow Bandwidth must be less than or equal to the Access Port
port shaped speed.

If Network Port Port Shaping is disabled, then Maximum

Flow Bandwidth must be less than or equal to the Network Port
port speed.

If Network Port Port Shaping is enabled, then Maximum

Flow Bandwidth must be less than or equal to the Network Port
port shaped speed.

Entries are rounded up to the next 64,000 bps increment (e.g., if

the value of 1 bps is entered, then the value will automatically
be rounded up to 64,000 bps; if the value of 5,000,000 bps is
entered, then the value will automatically be rounded up to
5,056,000 bps).
Checkbox for selecting the desired Active A2N Policers. This
Policer Active Check- Check boxes for
option is only available if Multi COS is enabled. To activ-
box Policers 0-7
ate Policer entry, select the desired Policer (0 to 7).

880 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 63: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Virtual Private Line Service
Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Defines the A2N Policer Committed Information Rate (CIR) for
this Policer, in bps. If Policer EIR is set to 0, then a Policer CIR
value of 64,000 bps or greater must be entered. Policer CIR
and Policer EIR cannot both be set to 0. A2N Policer values are
compared against the Network Port speed. CIR entry must not
exceed the speed of the Network Port. PIR (Peak Information
Rate) = CIR + EIR; must be less than or equal to the Maximum
Flow Bandwidth. The sum of a Flow's A2N Shaper PIR values
must be less than or equal to the oversubscribed Maximum
Flow Bandwidth value. Note: The oversubscribed Maximum
Flow Bandwidth value is equal to 8 times the Maximum Flow
Bandwidth value.

If Network Port Port Shaping is Disabled: PIR (Peak

Information Rate) = CIR + EIR; must not exceed the speed of
Policer CIR the Network Port.

If Network Port Port Shaping is Enabled: PIR must be less

than or equal to the Network Port Shaped Speed.

If Access Port Port Shaping is Disabled: PIR (Peak Inform-

ation Rate) = CIR + EIR; must not exceed the speed of the
Access Port.

If Access Port Port Shaping is Enabled: PIR must be less

than or equal to the Access Port Shaped Speed.

Entries are rounded up to the next 64,000 bps increment (e.g., if

the value of 1 bps is entered, then the value will automatically
be rounded up to 64,000 bps; if the value of 5,000,000 bps is
entered, then the value will automatically be rounded up to
5,056,000 bps).
This command is used to configure the Maximum CIR of a
Policer. When the Policer receives more tokens for green
packets than the CIR max. The extra token is shared to the
Yellow Packets in the same rank if coupling Flag is enabled or
Policer CIR Max share to the green packets in the immediately lower rank if 0-Port Speed
couple Flag is not for the current rank.

This configuration is valid when the Policer is added into an

Envelope.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 881

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 63: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Virtual Private Line Service
Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Defines the A2N Policer Excess Information Rate (EIR) for this
port, in bps. If Policer CIR is set to 0, then a Policer EIR value
of 64,000 bps or greater must be entered. Policer CIR and
Policer EIR cannot both be set to 0. A2N Policer values are
compared against the Network Port speed. PIR (Peak Inform-
ation Rate) = CIR + EIR; must be less than or equal to the Max-
imum Flow Bandwidth. The sum of a Flow's A2N Shaper PIR
values must be less than or equal to the oversubscribed Max-
imum Flow Bandwidth value. Note: The oversubscribed Max-
imum Flow Bandwidth value is equal to 8 times the Maximum
Flow Bandwidth value.

If Network Port Port Shaping is Disabled: PIR (Peak

Information Rate) = CIR + EIR; must not exceed the speed of
Policer EIR the Network Port.

If Network Port Port Shaping is Enabled: PIR must be less

than or equal to the Network Port Shaped Speed.

If Access Port Port Shaping is Disabled: PIR (Peak Inform-

ation Rate) = CIR + EIR; must not exceed the speed of the
Access Port.

If Access Port Port Shaping is Enabled: PIR must be less

than or equal to the Access Port Shaped Speed.

Entries are rounded up to the next 64,000 bps increment (e.g., if

the value of 1 bps is entered, then the value will automatically
be rounded up to 64,000 bps; if the value of 5,000,000 bps is
entered, then the value will automatically be rounded up to
5,056,000 bps).
When the Policer receives more tokens for Yellow packets
than the EIR max. The extra token is shared to the Yellow
Packets in the next rank-depending on the Coupling Flag
Policer EIR Max configuration of the next rank. 0-Port Speed

This configuration is valid when the Policer is added into an

Envelope.
Defines the A2N Policer Committed Burst Size (CBS) for this
port, in Kilobytes. The minimum A2N Policer CBS entry
Policer CBS allowed is based on the A2N Policer CIR entry, see Table 64. 0to 1,024 (KB)
For IP type traffic, see Table 65 for recommended CBS value,
based on CIR/EIR entry range.
Defines the A2N Policer Excess Burst Size (EBS) for this port,
in Kilobytes. The minimum A2N Policer EBS entry allowed is
Policer EBS based on the A2N Policer EIR entry, see Table 64. For IP type 0to 1,024 (KB)
traffic, see Table 65 for recommended EBS value, based on
CIR/EIR entry range.
Specifies the A2N Policer Color Mode as 'Color Aware' or Color Aware
Policer Color Marking
'Color Blind'. Color Blind

882 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 63: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Virtual Private Line Service
Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Specifies the A2N Policer Coupling Flag. When coupling is
enabled, tokens that would normally be added to the C-bucket
are passed to the E-bucket only once the CIR bucket has
reached its CBS level. Therefore under this condition the E-
Enabled
bucket is being filled at the rate of CIR + EIR. Normally the
long term average of frames declared ˜yellow” is bounded by
the EIR. Coupling is a function to allow the long term average
Policer Color Coupling of frames declared ˜yellow” to be bounded by CIR + EIR. This
Flag allows a higher volume of yellow frames to be delivered/re-
ceived if the arrival of green marked frames is low. Tokens from
the E-bucket do NOT get passed to the C-bucket once the EBS
level has been reached. Enabling coupling in combination with
Disabled
a provisioned EIR of 0 allows for a single rate three color mark-
ing (srTCM) algorithm to be established. In this situation the E-
bucket is filled at the CIR rate in the case the C-bucket is filled
to its CBS level.
Specifies the A2N Shaper Queue Identifier associated with this
Shaper Queue ID Policer. This option is only available if Multi COS is 0-7
enabled.
0-32(GE112Pro series)
The Policer Token-Sharing Envelop to be assigned to the
Envelope
Policer. Tokens are allocated among Policers in an Envelope. 0-64 (GE114Pro
series)
Priority assigned to a Policer when the Policer is in a Token-
Sharing Envelop. A larger number indicates a higher priority.

Policers in the same Envelope must have a unique Rank.

Rank When Independent A2N Shaper Bandwidth is enabled and the 1-8.
Policer is added into an Envelope. Tokens are allocated among
Policers in the same Envelope according to their ranks. In that
case, each Policer in the same Envelope must have a unique
rank number.
Represents the A2N Buffer Size of the Shaper. Entered in kilo- 2 to 15,360 (KB)
Shaper Buffer Size
bytes. 128
(allocated resource
from port shaper plus
SOAM-CIR
Define the shaper CIR size for the SOAM service on this flow. shaper CIR cannot
exceed 1Gbps)

0
(allocated resource
from port shaper plus
SOAM-EIR
Define the shaper EIR size for the SOAM service on this flow. shaper CIR cannot
exceed 1Gbps)

0
Shaper WRED In-Pro-
The minimum drop threshold for in-profile traffic. 0 - 100
file MIN Threshold %

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 883

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 63: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Virtual Private Line Service
Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Shaper WRED In-Pro-
The maximum drop threshold for in-profile traffic. 0 - 100
file MAX Threshold %
Shaper WRED In-Pro-
file Maximum Drop The maximum drop probability for in-profile traffic. 0 - 100
Probability
Shaper WRED Out-of 0 - 100
Profile MIN Threshold The minimum drop threshold for out-of profile traffic.
% 75
Shaper WRED Out-of 0 - 100
Profile MAX Threshold The maximum drop threshold for out-of profile traffic.
% 75
Shaper WRED Out-of 0 - 100
Profile Maximum Drop The maximum drop probability for out-of profile traffic.
Probability 75
N2A Settings
Checkbox for selecting the desired Active N2A Policers. This
Policer Active Check- option is only available if Multi COS is enabled. Box selec- Check boxes for
box tion must be made before Policer entry is allowed. At least one Policers 0-7
N2A Policer must exist on a Flow.
Defines the N2A Policer Committed Information Rate (CIR) for
this port, in bps. If Policer EIR is set to 0, then a Policer CIR
value of 64,000 bps or greater must be entered. An entry of 0
cannot be entered for both N2A Policer CIR and N2A Policer
EIR. N2A value is compared against the Access Port speed.

If Access Port Port Shaping is Disabled: PIR (Peak Inform-

ation Rate) = CIR + EIR; must not exceed the speed of the
Policer CIR Access Port.

If Access Port Port Shaping is Enabled: PIR must be less

than or equal to the Access Port Shaped Speed.

Entries are rounded up to the next 64,000 bps increment (e.g., if

the value of 1 bps is entered, then the value will automatically
be rounded up to 64,000 bps; if the value of 5,000,000 bps is
entered, then the value will automatically be rounded up to
5,056,000 bps).

884 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 63: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Virtual Private Line Service
Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Defines the Policer Excess Information Rate (EIR) for this port,
in bps. If Policer CIR is set to 0, then a Policer EIR value of
64,000 bps or greater must be entered. An entry of 0 cannot be
entered for both N2A Policer CIR and N2A Policer EIR. N2A
value is compared against the Access Port speed.

If Port Shaping is Disabled: PIR (Peak Information Rate) =

Policer EIR CIR + EIR; must not exceed the speed of the Access Port.

If Port Shaping is Enabled: PIR must be less than or equal

to the Access Port Shaped Speed.

Entries are rounded up to the next 64,000 bps increment (e.g., if

the value of 1 bps is entered, then the value will automatically
be rounded up to 64,000 bps; if the value of 5,000,000 bps is
entered, then the value will automatically be rounded up to
5,056,000 bps).
Defines the N2A Policer Committed Burst Size (CBS) for this
port, in Kilobytes. The minimum N2A Policer CBS entry
Policer CBS allowed is based on the N2A Policer CIR entry, see Table 64. 0to 1,024 (KB)
For IP type traffic, see Table 65 for recommended CBS value,
based on CIR/EIR entry range.
Defines the N2A Policer Excess Burst Size (EBS) for this port,
in Kilobytes. The minimum N2A Policer EBS entry allowed is
Policer EBS based on the N2A Policer EIR entry, see Table 64. For IP type 0to 1,024 (KB)
traffic, see Table 65 for recommended EBS value, based on
CIR/EIR entry range.
Specifies the N2A Policer Color Mode as 'Color Aware' or Color Aware
Policer Color Marking
'Color Blind'. Color Blind
Specifies the N2A Policer Coupling Flag. When coupling is
enabled, tokens that would normally be added to the C-bucket
are passed to the E-bucket only once the CIR bucket has
reached its CBS level. Therefore under this condition the E-
bucket is being filled at the rate of CIR + EIR. Normally the Enabled
long term average of frames declared ˜yellow” is bounded by
the EIR. Coupling is a function to allow the long term average
of frames declared ˜yellow” to be bounded by CIR + EIR.
Policer Color Coupling
Flag
This allows a higher volume of yellow frames to be delivered/re-
ceived if the arrival of green marked frames is low. Tokens from
the E-bucket do NOT get passed to the C-bucket once the EBS
level has been reached. Enabling coupling in combination with Disabled
a provisioned EIR of 0 allows for a single rate three color mark-
ing (srTCM) algorithm to be established. In this situation the E-
bucket is filled at the CIR rate in the case the C-bucket is filled
to its CBS level.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 885

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 63: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Virtual Private Line Service
Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Defines the frames that belong to the flow. Frames are clas-
sified based on the VLAN tag and the membership is specified
as a list of VLAN IDs. The VLAN member format is VLAN ID-*,
VLAN ID (range)-* or *-Priority. The valid values for VLAN ID
are 0 to 4095. Valid values for Priority are * or 0 to 7. A VLAN ID
range is a contiguous block of VID values delineated by a first
member and a last member, inclusive (e.g., Range 100 - 199
shall consist of all frames with VID values {100, 101..... 198,
199}) including all PRI values for those VIDs, and is entered
using a colon, for example: 100:199. Range must list lower VLAN ID portion of
value on left and larger value on the right. Up to 16 VLAN ID VLAN ID-Priority:
range entries are allowed per flow. 2 VLAN ID range entries are
allowed per flow on average. 0 to 4095, or *

If the Priority value is not specified, all the priority values for
that VLAN ID belongs to the FID. A maximum of 64 members
can be defined for a given FID. If no value is supplied, this FID
becomes the default FID for the port, i.e., all the VLAN IDs that
don’t belong to any other FID on the port belongs to this FID.
VLAN Members

(Regular EVC only) Regarding the use of the “wildcard” value * - The normal des-
ignation of a VLAN Member is X-Y, where X is the VLAN ID
and Y is the Priority. Supported wildcard forms are: X-*, where *
represents any priority value, i.e., flow is priority agnostic and *-
Y where * represents any VLAN ID, i.e., flow is VLAN
agnostic. The rules are: *-Y members can coexist with X-Y
members (same priority) within the same flow as well as
across all flows within the same access port, with the X-Y
member match taking precedence; Default flows (*-*) can coex- Priority portion of
ist with *-Y member flows with the *-Y member match taking VLAN ID-Priority:
precedence; *-Y members cannot coexist with X-* members.

0 to 7, or *

To add a VLAN member, enter the valid VLAN ID-Priority num-

ber and select Add. To delete a VLAN member, select the
VLAN ID-Priority number and select Delete. If EVC Type is set
to Default EVC, no VLAN Member value can be supplied, and
this FID becomes the Default FID for the port, i.e., all the
VLAN IDs that don’t belong to any other FID on the port
belongs to this FID. If EVC Type is set to Regular EVC, then
individual VLAN Members can be entered.
Edit CPD Filters - see CPD Filters Options and Rules.
Add Forwarding Table Entry

886 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 63: Configuration Settings for Ethernet Virtual Private Line Service
Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Add a specified static destination MAC address to the
Destination Address (blank)
Forwarding table for this flow.
Access Interface of
Select the destination port where the input Destination Address this flow
Destination Port
is learned. Network Interface of
this flow
Select the action to take when this Destination Address is
learned. If set to Block, the learned address will be discarded Block
Learning Action and this flow will block the learning of this MAC address again;
if set to Forward, this flow will forward this learned Destination Forward
Address.

When there is Load-Sharing LAG existing on Network Ports, it is up to the

user to provision the VTEP IP interface and VXLAN Flow with the same
LAG member port. Traffic can be blocked otherwise.

A VXLAN Flow is a Flow with a VXLAN Segment as Network Interface.

Table 64: Minimum CBS / EBS Entry - Depending on

CIR / EIR
Minimum CBS / EBS Value
Range
0 bps 0 KB
1 - 65,536,000
1 KB
bps
65,536,001 -
131,072,000 2 KB
bps
131,072,001 -
196,608,000 3 KB
bps
196,608,001 -
262,144,000 4 KB
bps
262,144,001 -
327,680,000 5 KB
bps
327,680,001 -
393,216,000 6 KB
bps

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 887

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 64: Minimum CBS / EBS Entry - Depending on

393,216,001 -
458,752,000 7 KB
bps
458,752,001 -
524,288,000 8 KB
bps
524,288,001 -
589,824,000 9 KB
bps
589,824,001 -
655,360,000 10 KB
bps
655,360,001 -
720,896,000 11 KB
bps
720,896,001 -
786,432,000 12 KB
bps
786,432,001 -
851,968,000 13 KB
bps
851,968,001 -
917,504,000 14 KB
bps
917,504,001 -
983,040,000 15 KB
bps
983,040,001 -
1,000,000,000 16 KB
bps

Table 65: Recommended CBS / EBS Entry - Depending on CIR /

EIR Range
CIR / EIR Range Recommended CBS / EBS Value
0 bps 0 KB
1 - 960,000 bps 16 KB
960,001 - 9,984,000 bps 32 KB
9,984,001 - 99,968,000 bps 64 KB
99,968,001 - 249,984,000 bps 128 KB
249,984,001 - 499,968,000 bps 256 KB
499,968,001 - 749,952,000 bps 512 KB
749,952,001 - 1,000,000,000 bps 1024 KB

888 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Default Priority Mapping Profile Tables

The system supports up to 8 Priority Mapping Profiles and provides a 802.1p mode
Priority Mapping Profile as default. A Priority Mapping Profile consists of two tables:
Priority Mapping Table and COS Mapping Table.

The Priority Mapping Table defines how the A2N/N2A ingress outer tag P-bit (Priority)
swapping and COS mapping will be implemented.

Table 66 and Table 67 identify the default Priority Mapping Tables for 802.1P, IP-TOS
and IP-DSCP.

Table 66: 8021P or IP-TOS Default Priority Mapping Table

In Priority Priority Control New Priority COS
0 None N/A 0
1 None N/A 1
2 None N/A 2
3 None N/A 3
4 None N/A 4
5 None N/A 5
6 None N/A 6
7 None N/A 7

Table 67: IP-DSCP Default Priority Mapping Table

In Priority Priority Control New Priority COS
0-7 None N/A 0
8 - 15 None N/A 1
16 - 23 None N/A 2
24 - 31 None N/A 3
32 - 39 None N/A 4
40 - 47 None N/A 5
48 - 55 None N/A 6
56 - 63 None N/A 7

The COS Mapping Table defines how Tag Priority mapping will be implemented for each
COS.

Table 68 identifies the default COS Mapping Tables for 802.1P, IP-TOS and IP-DSCP in
Ethernet Mode.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 889

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 68: 802.1P/IP-TOS/IP-DSCP Default COS Mapping Table

(Ethernet Mode)
COS Outer Tag Priority Inner Tag Priority
0 0 0
1 1 1
2 2 2
3 3 3
4 4 4
5 5 5
6 6 6
7 7 7

Table 69 identifies the default COS Mapping Tables for 802.1P, IP-TOS and IP-DSCP in
EoMPLS Mode.

Table 69: 802.1P/IP-TOS/IP-DSCP Default COS Mapping Table

(EoMPLS Mode)
COS EoMPLS Outer Tag Priority Outer EXP Inner EXP
0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7

The system default Priority Mapping Profile “PRIORITY MAP PROFILE-1”

cannot be modified or deleted.

890 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

EoMPLS Configuration Options and Rules

The Ethernet over Multiprotocol Label Switching (EoMPLS) encapsulation defined in
RFC 4448 is supported in A2N direction on Network port (physical and logical) in all
GE11xPro products.

EoMPLS may be provisioned in the following order:

l Enable Software Licensing for EoMPLS

l Create/Edit an EoMPLS PW
l Specify an IPv4 address for the Network Port/LAG Port/Protection Group (Network
Port 1) as Source IP Address (Dynamic Discovery Type only)
l Associate a flow (associated with the Network Port/LAG/Protection Group mentioned
above) with an EoMPLS PW

Refer to the following tables for EoMPLS configuration settings. Default settings are
identified in bold. For details on EoMPLS provisioning, see Provision Ethernet over
Multiprotocol Label Switching (EoMPLS).

Create/Edit EoMPLS PW
Table 70: Create/Edit EoMPLS PW
Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
The entity ID of the EoMPLS Pseudo Wire (PW). The ID range varies 1 - 34
PW ID with GE112Pro series and GE114Pro series. The association between
PW and EVC is 1 to 1 mapping. For GE112Pro series, the system sup- or
(Create only) ports up to 32 PWs; for GE114Pro series, the system supports up to
64 PWs. 1 - 66
Administrative IS
The Administrative State of the EoMPLS Pseudo Wire (PW).
State Mangement
In Raw mode, for EPL flow, there is no operation performed on incom-
ing tags; for EVPL flow, only single membership is allowed and this Tagged
membership VID will be popped in A2N direction and pushed in N2A
Mode direction; untagged is also taken as a VID member.

In Tagged mode, for EPL flow, an inner Stag/Ctag must be applied; for Raw
EVPL flow, there is no operation performed on incoming tags.
Encapsulation Ethernet
The Encapsulation method for the EoMPLS to use
Type GRE
none
Encapsulation The entity employed for Encapsulation. This is configured only when
GRE Tunnels from
Entity the Encapsulation Type is set to GRE.
drop down list
Enabled
Service Delimiting Whether to enable Service Delimiting
Disabled

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 891

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 70: Create/Edit EoMPLS PW

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Select the type the NE uses to discover the destination MAC address.
For static type, user must manually specify the destination MAC
Static
address to be used for the EoMPLS PW. For dynamic type, user must
specify the destination IP address so that the corresponding MAC
Discovery Type
address can be retrieved by ARP packets. Note that the dynamically
discovered MAC address will be aged out using the same mechanism
Dynamic
defined for ARP cache entries. If MAC address is aged out, the related
service will keep sending to get new MAC entry.
Remote IP Enter the remote destination IP address if Discovery Type is
[Link].
Address Dynamic. This option is not configurable if Discovery Type is Static.
Remote MAC Enter the remote destination MAC address if Discovery Type is Static.
[Link]
Address This option is not configurable if Discovery Type is Dynamic.
Encapsulation Enabled
Enable/disable Encapsulation Outer Tag for the PW
Outer Tag Control Disabled
Specify whether the associated flow participates in Outer MPLS Label
EXP swap. The Priority Mapping Profile - COS Mapping Table allows
the A2N Outer Label EXP to be specified based on incoming priority at
Access Port (based on priority mapping mode - 802.1p, IP-TOS, IP- enabled
DSCP).
Outer Label EXP But the value cannot be modified in “Default Priority Mapping Profile”.
Control
If set to Disabled, the Outer Label EXP value setting in selected Pri-
ority Mapping Profile will not take effect.
disabled
To enable Outer Label EXP swap on a flow, the EoMPLS Encap-
sulation checkbox must be selected and Multi COS must be Enabled
in flow configurations.
Specify whether the associated flow participates in Inner VC Label
EXP swap. The Priority Mapping Profile - COS Mapping Table allows
the A2N Inner Label EXP to be specified based on incoming priority at
Access Port (based on priority mapping mode - 802.1p, IP-TOS, IP- Disabled
DSCP).
Inner Label EXP But the value cannot be modified in “Default Priority Mapping Profile”.
Control
If set to Disabled, the Inner Label EXP value setting in selected Pri-
ority Mapping Profile will not take effect.
Enabled
To enable Inner Label EXP swap on a flow, the EoMPLS Encap-
sulation checkbox must be selected and Multi COS must be Enabled
in flow configurations.
Encapsulation Disabled
Configure Encapsulation DSCP Mapping Control for the PW
DSCP Control Enabled
Egress Interface The Engress Interface for the EoMPLS Pseudo Wire. Network Port
Enabled
Control Word RX Enable or disable RX control words.
Disabled
Enabled
Control Word TX Enable or disable TX control words.
Disabled

892 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 70: Create/Edit EoMPLS PW

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Select the checkbox to enable Outer S-Tag VLAN stack in A2N encap- (checkbox
Outer S-Tag
sulated packets. unselected)
Enter the Outer S-Tag VLAN in the format of “VID - Priority”. VID = 1 -
Outer S-Tag VLAN 4095 - 0
4095, Priority = 0 - 7.
Select the checkbox to allow user to specify the Virtual Circuit (VC)
Label in received packets. (checkbox
Rx VC
unselected)
Can configured only when Encapsulation Type is ethernet
Rx VC Label Specify the VC Label in received packets. Label = 16 - 1048575. 16 - 1048575
Select the checkbox to allow the user to configure the VC Label in the
packets to transmit. (checkbox
Tx VC
unselected)
Can configured only when Encapsulation Type is ethernet
Specify the VC Label in transmitted packets in the format of “Label -
Tx VC Label 16 - 0 - 2
EXP - TTL”. Label = 16 - 1048575, EXP = 0 - 7, TTL = 1 - 255.
The checkbox to enable the MPLS Label in received packets. This (checkbox
Rx MPLS
checkbox is selected by default and cannot be deselected. selected)
Rx MPLS Label Specify the MPLS Label in received packets. Label = 16 - 1048575. 16 - 1048575
The checkbox to enable the MPLS Label in the packets to transmit. (checkbox
Tx MPLS
This checkbox is selected by default and cannot be deselected. selected)
Specify the MPLS Label in transmitted packets in the format of “Label -
Tx MPLS Label 16 - 0 - 2
EXP - TTL”. Label = 16 - 1048575, EXP = 0 - 7, TTL = 1 - 255.

Specify an IP Address for Network Port (Physical or

Logical)
Table 71: Specify an IP address for Network Port (Physical or Logical)
Parameter Description / Application Rules Option Settings / Defaults
Specify an IPv4 address for the Network Port/LAG/PPG
which will be the Network Interface of the flow to be created
and associated with an EoMPLS PW, when the EoMPLS
EoMPLS Source IP PW is in Dynamic Discovery Type. [Link]
Address
When the EoMPLS PW is in Dynamic mode, the IP address
of associated network port must be set before the EVC flow
is associated with the PW.

EoMPLS Related Settings on Associated Flow

Table 72: EoMPLS Settings on Access Port Flow
Parameter Description / Application Rules Option Settings / Defaults
EoMPLS Encap- Select the checkbox to associate the access port flow
(checkbox unselected)
sulation (EPL/EVPL) with an EoMPLS PW.
Select a desired EoMPLS PW to associate with from the
EoMPLS PW (none by default)
drop down list.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 893

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 72: EoMPLS Settings on Access Port Flow

Parameter Description / Application Rules Option Settings / Defaults
Specifies what the flow uses for determining the COS Outer VLAN Tag
(Class of Service) in the N2A direction. This option is only Inner VLAN Tag
applicable when Multi COS is Enabled.
N2A Priority Mapping
N2A COS Priority The VC Label option, MPLS Label option and Encapsulation VC Label
Outer VLAN Tag option are valid only when the multi-cos MPLS Label
flow is associated with an EoMPLS PW and the Label/Tag Encapsulation Outer VLAN
is pushed on the PW. Tag

894 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

GRE Configuration and Rules

Table 73: Create / Edit GRE IP Interface
Description /
Parameter Option Settings / Defaults
Applicable Rules
ID
The ID of the GRE IP Interface to be created.. 1
(Create only)
A mandatory text string to represent the IP Interface.
up to 15 characters
Name It must be unique among all IP Interface names system (blank)
wide.
Administrative State IS
Administrative State of the GRE IP Interface.
(Create Tunnel only) Mangement
Outer VLAN Whether to enable or disable Outer VLAN on the GRE IP Selected
Interface. Cleared
EtherType The Ethertype of the Outer VLAN, if the Outer VLAN is 0x88a8
(Outer VLAN) enabled. 0x8100
VLAN VLAN Tag of the Outer VLAN. Frmat: VID-Prio. The VID is
1-0
(Outer VLAN) 1-4095. Prio range is 0-7.
Inner VLAN Whether to enable or disable Inner VLAN on the GRE IP Selected
Interface. Cleared
EtherType The Ethertype of the Inner VLAN, if the Inner VLAN is 0x88a8
(Inner VLAN) enabled. 0x8100
VLAN VLAN Tag of the Inner VLAN. Frmat: VID-Prio. The VID is 1-
1-0
(Inner VLAN) 4095. Prio range is 0-7.
Associated Port The Network Port for the GRE IP Interface to associate Select from drop-down list
(Create Tunnel only) with. Network Port -1-1-1-1
enabled
Fragment Control Enable or disable Fragmenting on a GRE IP Interface.
disabled
The maximum IP packet size allowed. IP packets 64-9638 Byte
Fragment MTU
exceeding this size are fragmented. 1500
The gateway through which the destination IP can be
Gateway reached. [Link]
The Valid IPv4 IP address of the configured gateway

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 895

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 74: Create / Edit GRE Tunnel

Description /
Parameter Option Settings / Defaults
Applicable Rules
GRE Tunnel ID
The ID of the GRE IP Interface to be created.. 1
(Create only)
Alias An Optional Name for the GRE Tunnel 0-255 characers
A mandatory text string to represent the IP Interface.
up to 15 characters
Name It must be unique among all IP Interface names system (blank)
wide.
Administrative State IS
Administrative State of the GRE IP Interface.
(Create Tunnel only) Mangement
Outer VLAN Whether to enable or disable Outer VLAN on the GRE Selected
Tunnel. Cleared
EtherType The Ethertype of the Outer VLAN, if the Outer VLAN is 0x88a8
(Outer VLAN) enabled. 0x8100
VLAN VLAN Tag of the Outer VLAN. Frmat: VID-Prio. The VID is
1-0
(Outer VLAN) 1-4095. Prio range is 0-7.
Inner VLAN Whether to enable or disable Inner VLAN on the GRE Selected
Tunnel. Cleared
EtherType The Ethertype of the Inner VLAN, if the Inner VLAN is 0x88a8
(Inner VLAN) enabled. 0x8100
VLAN VLAN Tag of the Inner VLAN. Frmat: VID-Prio. The VID is 1-
1-0
(Inner VLAN) 4095. Prio range is 0-7.
DSCP The DSCP number to be assigned to the VTEP or GRE. 0-63
The Entity Identifier of the GRE IP Interface to associate enabled
GRE IP Interface
with the GRE Tunnel. disabled
The maximum IP packet size allowed. IP packets 64-9638 Byte
Fragment MTU
exceeding this size are fragmented. 1500
The gateway through which the destination IP can be
Gateway reached. [Link]
The Valid IPv4 IP address of the configured gateway

896 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

ELP Configuration and Rules

Table 75: Create / Edit ELP Group
Description /
Parameter Option Settings / Defaults
Applicable Rules
Entity ID
The ID of the ELP Group to be created. 1
(Create only)
A character string to describe or represent this protection
User label up to 64 characters.
group. Spaces can be included.
IS
Administrative State Administrative State of the GRE IP Interface.
Mangement
In revertive operation, normal traffic signal is restored to the
working transport entity after the condition(s) causing a Enabled
Revertive switch has cleared.

In non-revertive operation, normal traffic signal is allowed to

remain on the protection transport entity even after a switch Disabled
reason has cleared.
In revertive mode of operation, to prevent frequent operation
of the protection switch due to an intermittent defect, a failed
working transport entity must become fault free. After the
WTR 5-12 (min)
failed working transport entity meets this criterion, a fixed
period of time shall elapse before a normal traffic signal uses
it again.
The Network Port to be used as working member in the ELP
Working Member Available Network Port
group.
The Network Port to be used as protecting member in the
Protecting Member Available Network Port
ELP group.
The MEP associated with the Protection port in an Ethernet
Line Protection Group (ELP). MEP is used to monitor each
path endpoint for loss-of-continuity as a protection trigger.

Protecting MEP l The ELP must be in Mangement state. A valid MEP number

l The MEP must be a VLAN based Down MEP. 
l The CCM Interval of the MEP is 3.3 ms.
l The MEP is on the Working port.
The MEP associated with the Working port in an Ethernet
Line Protection Group (ELP). MEP is used to monitor each
path endpoint for loss-of-continuity as a protection trigger.

Working pogMEP l The ELP must be in Mangement state. A valid MEP numberr

l The MEP must be a VLAN based Down MEP. 
l The CCM Interval of the MEP is 3.3 ms.
l The MEP is on the Working port.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 897

Factory Default Configuration Settings

ConnectGuard Configuration Options and Rules -

GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (CSH)
ConnectGuardTM is ADVA Optical Networking’s Trade Mark functionality that is
developed based on the Media Access Control (MAC) Security standard defined in IEEE
802.1AE-2006 and IEEE 802.1AEbn-2011. It allows authorized systems that attach to
and interconnect LANs in a network to maintain confidentiality of transmitted data and to
take measures against frames transmitted or modified by unauthorized devices.

The provisioning of ConnectGuard includes:

l Create/Edit Key Exchange Profile (up to 16 Key Exchange Profiles per system)
l Create/Edit Secure Flow
l Associate an Access Flow with a Secure Flow
l Configure crypto user’s authorizations for system operations

Only crypto user has the authority to provision ConnectGuard

configurations.
No

If the crypto password is cleared, the crypto user must reset the
crypto password immediately.

A crypto user cannot be switched to non-crypto user and vice versa.

A

898 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Create/Edit Key Exchange Profile

Table 76: Create/Edit Key Exchange Profile
Parameter Description / Application Rules Option Settings / Defaults
Identification
Key Exchange Profile EID The entity identifier of Key Exchange Profile. KEY EXCHANGE
Select a desired EID from the drop-down list. The
(create only) PROFILE-1
system supports up to 16 Key Exchange Profiles.
Enter a desired name to uniquely identify this Key
Name Exchange Profile using up to 64 characters. (blank)
Default is blank. This entry is optional.
Parameters
Key exchange mode which is the algorithm used
Mode for generating a secret key from the Authentic-
Diffie Hellman
(read-only) ation Password. Currently, only Diffie Hellman
mode is supported.
The length (in bits) of the Diffie-Hellman key pair
2048
Diffie Hellman Length generated by both ends. only applicable when
Mode is Diffile-Hellman. 4096
Password Changed Select Enabled from the drop-down list if user Disabled
wants to edit the authentication password; oth-
(edit only) erwise, leave it Disabled as default. Enabled
Enter a password consisting of up to 10 - 32 case-
sensitive alphanumeric characters and special
characters (‘#, *,%, -, _,.,’ and must not begin with
'#'.). The authentication password is used for the
Diffie-Hellman algorithm to prevent “the man in
the middle attack”. The crypto user’s authen-
Authentication Password tication password is stored in a SRAM with bat- (blank)
tery backup which can be non-volatitle for 8
hours. If the authentication password is missing
or failed by checksum verification, a

“Password Missing” alarm will be raised at the

system level.
Retype Authentication
Retype the authentication password. (blank)
Password

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 899

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Create/Edit Secure Flow

Table 77: Create/Edit Secure Flow
Parameter Description / Application Rules Option Settings / Defaults
Identification
Secure Flow Enter a number in range of 1 to 14 as secure flow
entity identifier. The system supports up to 14 secure 1 - 14
(create only) flows in total.
Enter a text and/or number string to uniquely identify
Alias this secure flow entity. The string can be up to 64 (blank)
characters. This entry is optional.
AdminState
IS
Administrative Select the administrative state for the secure flow.
Management
Secure Setting
Egress Interface
Select an egress interface for the secure flow.

ConnectGuard traffic encryption and decryption is (drop-down list of

only supported on Network Ports. The secure flow Network Ports)
(create only) may have an egress interface of physical Network
ports, LAG, ERP, Protection Group, SHG or VXLAN.

The cipher suite for traffic encryption/decryption.

GCM AES 256
Cipher Suite It is recommended that the same Cipher Suite setting
is configured on both sides of the traffic with key GCM AES 128
exchange.
0
Tags In Clear Select the number of tags to bypass the security tag. 1
2
Enable/Disable the replay protection. When replay
protection is enabled, the sequence of the ID number Disabled
of received packets are checked. If the packet
Replay Protection arrives out of sequence and the difference between
the packet numbers exceeds the replay protection
window size, the packet will be dropped by the receiv- Enabled
ing interface.
Specify the replay protection window size while the 0 - 4,292,967,295
Replay Protection Window
replay protection is enabled. (2^32 - 1)
Key Exchange Setting
Select a desired key exchange profile from the drop-
Key Exchange Profile down list. Key exchange profiles must be provisioned (none)
before creating secure flow.
Select the key exchange frame’s tag mode. When it’s
in Manual mode, the key exchange frame’s tags are
Key Exchange Tag Mode set by user and must match the tags of one access Manual
port flow associated with this secure flow. Currently,
only “Manual” mode is supported.

900 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 77: Create/Edit Secure Flow

Parameter Description / Application Rules Option Settings / Defaults
If key exchange failed, it keeps trying to restart key
exchange process until three consecutive failures.
The third key exchange will be delayed for the dur-
ation of key exchange interval after the second fail-
1 - 40
Key Exchange Interval (min) ure. If system reboot happens during this key
exchange interval, the countdown timer will start in 3
15min again.

If the key exchange interval expires, a new key

exchange process will start,
When Remote MAC Address Enabled option is Dis-
abled, key exchange uses ADVA multicast DA for
handshaking, and the DA of consequent key Disabled
exchange frames is the SA of received frames.
Remote MAC Address
Enabled When Remote MAC Address Enabled option is
Enabled, key exchange uses the specified Remote
MAC Address as the DA for all key exchange frames Enabled
and only accepts received key exchange frames with
the SA equal to the specified Remote MAC Address.
Enter a unicast MAC address while Remote MAC
Remote MAC Address [Link]
Address Enabled option is Enabled.
Key Exchange Tag Setting (Editable only when Key Exchange Tag Mode is Manual)

Note:Due to PHY limitation, the key exchange frame only supports up to 2 layers of tags.
Select the checkbox by Outer VLAN to enable Key
Outer VLAN (checkbox unselected)
Exchange frame’s Outer VLAN.
Enter the Outer VLAN Tag in the format of “VID - Pri-
Outer VLAN Tag 0-0
ority”. VID = 1- 4095, Priority = 0 - 7.
Select the checkbox by Inner VLAN to enable Key
Inner VLAN1 (checkbox unselected)
Exchange frame’s Inner VLAN.
Enter the Inner VLAN Tag in the format of “VID = Pri-
Inner VLAN1 Tag 0-0
ority”. VID = 1 - 4095, Priority = 0 - 7.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 901

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Configure Secure Flow Attributes

The Secure Flow Attributes configuration rules apply to both Layer 2 Flow and Layer 3
Flowpoint.

To configure Secure Flow attributes, the crypto user a right-click the desired Access
Flow or Network Layer 3 Flowpoint in ConnectGuard View and select Edit Configuration.

Table 78: Crypto User - Edit EVC Flow Configuration

Parameter Description / Application Rules Option Settings / Defaults
This is an attribute that is used to block the Flow or
Flowpoint associated with a Secure Flow. If this Disabled
attribute is Enabled, the VLAN tag conflict rule
Secure Block
checks are not enforced during the flowpoint creation
and traffic is blocked. For more state descriptions, Enabled
see Table 9 on p. 250.
Select the desired Secure Flow to associate with this None
Secure Flow Access Flow. Fore more state descriptions, see (drop-down list of
Table 9 on p. 250. provisioned secure flows)

902 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Configure Crypto User’s Authorizations for System

Operations

The following system operations must be approved or specified by the crypto user before
the user with appropriate privilege performs the operations.

l Software Install
l Software Version
l Restore Factory Defaults
l Restore Database
l Load Config File

Table 79: Configure Crypto User’s Authorizations for System Operations

Option Settings /
Parameter Description / Application Rules
Defaults
The “Software Install” operation must be approved
Disabled
by the crypto user by enabling this option before
Software Install
the user with appropriate privilege performs sys-
Enabled
tem upgrade operation.
The “Software Version” must also be specified by
Software Version the crypto user (e.g. 7.1.1-365) while “Software (blank)
Install” is enabled.
The “Restore Factory Defaults” operation must be
Disabled
approved by the crypto user by enabling this option
Restore Factory Defaults
before the superuser performs “Restore Factory
Enabled
Defaults” operation.
The “Restore Database” operation must be
Disabled
approved by the crypto user by enabling this option
Restore Database
before the user with appropriate privilege performs
Enabled
“Restore Database” operation.
The “Load Config File” operation must be approved
Disabled
by the crypto user by enabling this option before
Load Config File
the user with appropriate privilege performs “Load
Enabled
Config File” operation.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 903

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Layer-3 Services Configuration Options and Rules

The Layer-3 (L3) Services provisioning enables the GE11xPro to function as a DHCP
Relay Agent and Virtual Routing & Forwarding (VRF) equipment, so a single GE11xPro
device can relay between DHCP Servers and DHCP Clients to assign IP Addresses to
DHCP Clients and serve as multiple virtual routers to perform static and dynamic route
forwarding for IP [Link] this way, the network paths can be segmented without using
multiple devices and the upstream switching/routing load can be alleviated.

The GE11xPro family products support Layer-3 services (i.e. IP service forwarding)
functionalities, including:

l Provision Layer-3 Flow Point based on traffic interface

l Provision ACL Filter for Layer-3 Flow Point
l Provision Traffic IP Interface based on traffic interface
l Provision Static ARP Entry for IP Interface
l Provision Virtual Routing Forwarding (VRF)
l Provision Static Route based on VRF
l Provision DHCP Relay Agent

Prior to provisioning Layer-3 services, the software license for IP-Services-and-ACL-

Filtering must be enabled so the GE11xPro system may support the following number of
Layer-3 service entries:

l 8/4 VRFs per GE114Prox/GE112Prox

l 100/100 Static Routes per VRF for GE114Prox/GE112Prox
l 8/4 DHCP Relay Agents per GE114Prox/GE112Prox
l 64/32 Traffic IP Interfaces per GE114Prox/GE112Prox
l 64/32 Layer-3 Flow Points per GE114Prox/GE112Prox
l 127/63 ACL Rules per GE114Prox/GE112Prox
l 512/512 ARP Entries per GE114Prox/GE112Prox

By enabling Extended-Scale-IP-Services license, the GE11xPro system may support

the following number of layer-3 service entities:

l 16/8 VRFs per GE114Prox/GE112Prox

l 100/100 routes per VRF for GE114Prox/GE112Prox
l 8/4 DHCP Relay Agents per GE114Prox/GE112Prox
l 64/32 Traffic IP Interfaces per GE114Prox/GE112Prox
l 64/32 Layer-3 Flow points per GE114Prox/GE112Prox
l 127/63 ACL Rules per GE114Prox/GE112Prox
l 1024/1024 ARP Entries per GE114Prox/GE112Prox

The system supports up to 128/1024 ARP Entries for Traffic Interface

Routes per GE112Pro/GE114Pro.

904 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Note that the GE114Prox mentioned above on license scalability refers to

GE1114Pro/GE114Pro (C)/GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)/GE114Pro
(HE), and the GE112Prox refers to GE112Pro/GE112Pro (m)/GE112Pro (H).

The Layer-3 Services may be provisioned in the following order:

l Enable Software License for IP-Services-and-ACL-Filtering, also Extended-Scale-IP-

Services if required
l Create Layer-3 Flow Point
l Create ACL Rule for Layer-3 Flow Point (optional)
l Create Traffic IP Interface on Layer-3 Flow Point
l Add Static ARP Entry on Traffic IP Interface

For Static Routing, perform the following steps:

l Create VRF to include desired Traffic IP Interfaces for static routing

l Add Static Route to VRF
l Ping/Trace Route to verify the connection

For Dynamic Routing, perform the following steps:

l Create DHCP Relay Agent to include desired Traffic IP Interfaces for dynamic routing
learning

More information and specifications on Layer-3 Services can be found in Overview

chapter and FSP 150-GE11xPro System Description manual.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 905

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Create/Edit L3 Flow Point

Table 80: Create/Edit L3 Flow Point
Option Settings /
Parameter Description / Application Rules
Defaults
Identification
The entity identifier of the Layer-3 Flow Point.
L3FP ID This value is automatically indexed and cannot 1 - 32 for GE112Prox1
exceed the license permitted range. For
or
GE112Pro products, the ID range is 1 to 32; For
(Create Only) GE114Pro products, the ID range is 1 to 64. The 1 - 64 for GE114Prox2
ID is not editable after L3 Flow Point creation.
Enter a text and/or number string to uniquely
Alias identify this Flow Point. This string can be up to (blank)
255 characters.
State
The administrative state of the L3 Flow Point. For
Network Port 1 (default in In-Service state) and IS
the traffic ports (including LAG) which are in In-
Service state, the L3 Flow Point of associated
Administrative Management
port is also IS. For the traffic ports which are in
Unassigned state, the L3 Flow Point associated
with them will also be in Unassigned state by Unassigned
default.
Configuration
Enable/Disable the Multi COS for Policer and Disabled
Multi COS
Shaper settings on this Flow Point. Enabled
Specify the COS for all ingress frame at this Flow
COS 0-7
Point. Not editable when Multi COS is Enabled.
Enable/Disable allowing received IP Packets Disabled
Fragmented Packets with “More Fragments” flag to be forwarded by
this Flow Point. Enabled
Enabled
Policing Enable/Disable the policers of this Flow Point.
Disabled
VLAN Configuration
Select the check box to allow untagged frames to
Untagged Membership match the Flow Point membership; otherwise (check box unselected)
deselect the checkbox.
Select the check box to specify the membership
Outer Tag Membership (check box selected)
Outer Tag.
0 - 4095
Outer Tag VLAN ID Enter the desired Outer Tag VLAN ID.
1
Select the check box to specify the membership
Inner Tag Membership (check box selected)
Inner Tag.

1The GE112Prox refers to GE112Pro (m), GE112Pro and GE112Pro (H).

2The GE114Prox refers to GE114Pro, GE114Pro (C), GE114Pro (SH), GE114Pro (CSH) and GE114Pro (HE).

906 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 80: Create/Edit L3 Flow Point

Option Settings /
Parameter Description / Application Rules
Defaults
0 - 4095
Inner Tag VLAN ID Enter the desired Inner Tag VLAN ID.
1
Traffic Management Setting
Whether to use Hierarchical COS Settings. Only
available for Multi-COS enabled Flow Point. Hier-
archical COS Settings can be used by selecting
the check box. Hierarchical COS settings allows
Hierarchical COS Setting managing bandwidth profiles of schedule entities (check box unselected)
by bounding a group of traffic classes (Multi COS
group). The user can set values for the guar-
anteed and maximum flow bandwidths bounding
the whole multi COS group.
This allows the provisioning of guaranteed band-
width of a Flow Point. Guaranteed Flow Band-
width (GFB) must be less than or equal to the
Maximum Flow Bandwidth. The sum of a Flow's 0 - 1 Gbps
Guaranteed Bandwidth
A2N Shaper CIR values must be less than or N/A
equal to the Guaranteed Flow Bandwidth. Only
available when Multi COS is Enabled and Hier-
archical COS Settings is selected.
The peak limit of a flow. Maximum Flow

Bandwidth (MFB) must be greater than or equal to

PIR (Peak Information Rate) = CIR + EIR. The
sum of a Flow's A2N Shaper PIR values must be 0 - 1 Gbps
Maximum Bandwidth less than or equal to the oversubscribed Max-
imum Flow Bandwidth N/A

value. Note: The oversubscribed Maximum Flow

Bandwidth value is equal to 8 times the Maximum
Flow Bandwidth value.
Checkbox for selecting the desired Active A2N

Policers. This option is only available if Multi check boxes for Policer 0 -
Policer Active Checkbox
COS is enabled. To activate Policer entry, select 7
the desired Policer (0 to 7).
Defines the Policer Committed Information Rate 0 - 1 Gbps
(CIR) for this Policer, in bps. If Policer EIR is set
Policer CIR to 0, then a Policer CIR value of 64,000 bps or N/A
greater must be entered. Policer CIR and Policer
EIR cannot both be set to 0.
Defines the Policer Excess Information Rate
Policer EIR (EIR) for this port, in bps. If Policer CIR is set to 0 - 1 Gbps
0, then a Policer EIR value of 64,000 bps or
greater must be entered. Policer CIR and Policer N/A
EIR cannot both be set to 0.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 907

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 80: Create/Edit L3 Flow Point

Option Settings /
Parameter Description / Application Rules
Defaults
Defines the Policer Committed Burst Size (CBS)
for this port, in Kilobytes. For IP type traffic, see 0 - 1024 (KB)
Policer CBS
Table 65 for recommended CBS value, based on N/A
CIR/EIR entry range.
Defines the Policer Excesss Burst Size (EBS) for
this port, in Kilobytes. For IP type traffic, see 0 - 1024 (KB)
Policer EBS
Table 65 for recommended CBS value, based on N/A
CIR/EIR entry range.
Specifies the Policer Color Marking as “Color Color Aware
Policer Color Marking
Aware” or “Color Blind”. Color Blind
Specifies the Policer Coupling Flag. When coup-
ling is enabled, tokens that would normally be
added to the C-bucket are passed to the E-bucket
only once the CIR bucket has reached its CBS
level. Therefore under this condition the E-bucket
is being filled at the rate of CIR + EIR. Normally
the long term

average of frames declared ˜yellow” is bounded Enabled

by the EIR. Coupling is a function to allow the
long term average of frames declared ˜yellow” to
Policer Color Coupling be bounded by
Flag CIR + EIR. This allows a higher volume of yellow
frames to be delivered/received if the arrival of
green marked frames is low. Tokens from the E-
bucket do NOT get passed to the C-bucket once
the EBS level has been reached. Enabling coup-
ling in combination

with a provisioned EIR of 0 allows for a single rate

three color marking (srTCM) algorithm to be estab- Disabled
lished. In this situation the E-bucket is filled at the
CIR rate in the case the C-bucket is filled to its
CBS level.
Checkbox for selecting the desired Active
Shapers. This option is only available when Multi Check boxes for Shapers
Shaper Active Checkbox
COS is Enabled. To activate Shaper entry, select 0 - 7
the desired Shaper (0 to 7).
Defines the Policer Committed Information Rate 0 - 1 Gbps
(CIR) for this Policer, in bps. If Policer EIR is set
Shaper CIR to 0, then a Policer CIR value of 64,000 bps or N/A
greater must be entered. Policer CIR and Policer
EIR cannot both be set to 0.
Defines the Policer Excess Information Rate
(EIR) for this port, in bps. If Policer CIR is set to 0 - 1 Gbps
Shaper EIR 0, then a Policer EIR value of 64,000 bps or
greater must be entered. Policer CIR and Policer N/A
EIR cannot both be set to 0.

908 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 80: Create/Edit L3 Flow Point

Option Settings /
Parameter Description / Application Rules
Defaults
2 - 15360 (KB)
Shaper BS Enter the Buffer Size of this shaper, in KB.
128
Shaper WRED In-Profile
The minimum drop threshold for in-profile traffic. 0 - 100
MIN Threshold %
Shaper WRED In-Profile
The maximum drop threshold for in-profile traffic. 0 - 100
MAX Threshold %
Shaper WRED In-Profile
The maximum drop probability for in-profile traffic. 0 - 100
Maximum Drop Probability
Shaper WRED Out-of Pro- The minimum drop threshold for out-of profile 0 - 100
file MIN Threshold % traffic. 75
Shaper WRED Out-of Pro- The maximum drop threshold for out-of profile 0 - 100
file MAX Threshold % traffic. 75
Shaper WRED Out-of Pro- 0 - 100
The maximum drop probability for out-of profile
file Maximum Drop Prob-
traffic. 75
ability

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 909

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Create/Edit ACL Rule

Table 81: Create/Edit ACL Rule
Option Settings /
Parameter Description / Application Rules
Defaults
Identification
Index The index number of this ACL Rule. It’s auto- 1 - 63 for GE112Prox1

(Create Only) matically indexed by the system. 1 - 64 for GE114Prox2

Enter a text and/or number string to uniquely
Alias identify this ACL Rule. This string can be up to (blank)
255 characters.
State
The administrative state of the ACL Rule. The
administrative state of ACL Rule will inherit the IS
state of its associated traffic port, e.g. The
default admin state of Network Port 1 is IS and
Administrative the ACL Rule created on its L3 FP is also IS by
default; the factory default admin state for access Management
ports is Unassigned, so the default state of its L3
FP ACL Rule will also be Unassigned and the Unassigned
Unassigned state is not editable.
Rule Configuration
Deny
Action The ACL forwarding action.
Accept
Specifies the COS assigned for the frames NONE
COS Override matching this rule or indicates the user of other
COS assignment methods if sets to None. 0 -7
The ACL Rule priority. The ACL Rule with higher
Rule Priority 0 - 65535
priority value has higher execution priority.
MAC Address
Select/Deselect the check box to specify
Src Addr whether the Source MAC Address will be (check box unselected)
examined by the ACL Rule.
If Src Addr check box is selected, enter the
Src Address N/A
Source MAC Address of the ACL filter.
Src Mask Enter the Source MAC Address Mask. N/A
Select/Deselect the check box to specify
Dest Addr whether the Destination MAC Address will be (check box unselected)
examined by the ACL Rule.
If Dest Addr check box is selected, enter the
Dest Address N/A
Destination MAC Address of the ACL filter.
Dest Mask Enter the Destination MAC Address Mask. N/A
EtherType
Select/Deselect the check box to specify
Control whether Ethertype filed after VLAN Tags will be (check box unselected)
examined by the ACL Rule.

1The GE112Prox refers to GE112Pro (m), GE112Pro and GE112Pro (H).

2The GE114Prox refers to GE114Pro, GE114Pro (C), GE114Pro (SH), GE114Pro (CSH) and GE114Pro (HE).

910 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 81: Create/Edit ACL Rule

Option Settings /
Parameter Description / Application Rules
Defaults
If Control is enabled by selecting the check box,
enter the value of [Link] when the Ether-
EtherType Type Control is enabled and EtherType is equal 0 (hex)
to 0x800 can layer-4 protocol, Src Port, Dst Port
and TCP Flags be enabled.
Outer VLAN Tag
Select/Deselect the check box to specify
VLAN ID whether Outer VLAN ID will be examined by the (check box unselected)
ACL Rule.
VLAN ID - Low Limit Enter the Outer VLAN ID range low limit. 0 - 4095
VLAN ID - High Limit Enter the Outer VLAN ID range high limit. 0 - 4095
Select/Deselect the check box to specify
PCP whether Outer VLAN PCP will be examined by (check box unselected)
the ACL Rule.
PCP - Low Limit Enter the Outer VLAN PCP range low limit. 0-7
PCP - High Limit Enter the Outer VLAN PCP range high limit. 0-7
Select/Deselect the check box to specify
DEI (check box) whether DEI field of Outer VLAN will be (check box unselected)
examined by the ACL Rule.
DEI Enter the DEI value if DEI check box is selected. 0/1
Inner VLAN Tag
Select/Deselect the check box to specify
VLAN ID whether Inner VLAN ID will be examined by the (check box unselected)
ACL Rule.
VLAN ID - Low Limit Enter the Inner VLAN ID range low limit. 0 - 4095
VLAN ID - High Limit Enter the Inner VLAN ID range high limit. 0 - 4095
Select/Deselect the check box to specify
PCP whether Inner VLAN PCP will be examined by (check box unselected)
the ACL Rule.
PCP - Low Limit Enter the Inner VLAN PCP range low limit. 0-7
PCP - High Limit Enter the Inner VLAN PCP range high limit. 0-7
IP
Select/Deselect the check box to specify
Src Addr whether Source IP Address will be examined by (check box unselected)
the ACL Rule.
Select/Deselect the check box to specify
Src Addr - Dynamic whether Source IP Address will be configured (check box unselected)
manually or dynamically (automatically).
Src Addr - Dynamic - Low Enter the Source IPv4 address low value of the
N/A
Limit range to be examined by the ACL Rule.
Src Addr - Dynamic - High Enter the Source IPv4 address high value of the
N/A
Limit range to be examined by the ACL Rule.
Select/Deselect the check box to specify
Dest Addr whether Destination IP Address will be examined (check box unselected)
by the ACL Rule.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 911

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 81: Create/Edit ACL Rule

Option Settings /
Parameter Description / Application Rules
Defaults
Enter the Destination IPv4 address low value of
Dest Addr - Low Limit N/A
the range to be examined by the ACL Rule.
Enter the Destination IPv4 address high value of
Dest Addr - High Limit N/A
the range to be examined by the ACL Rule.
Select/Deselect the check box to specify
Priority whether IP Priority will be examined by the ACL (check box unselected)
Rule.
Enter the IP header priority value low limit of the
Priority - Low Limit 0 - 63
range to be examined by the ACL Rule.
Enter the IP header priority value high limit of the
Priority - High Limit 0 - 63
range to be examined by the ACL Rule.
Protocol
Select/Deselect the check box to specify
whether Transport layer protocol number will be
examined by the ACL Rule. The selected pro-
Control (check box unselected)
tocol cannot be enabled if EtherType Control
check box is not selected and the entered Ether-
Type value is not equal to 0x800.
Select the desired Protocol from the drop-down TCP (6)
list and the associated number will be auto- UDP (17)
matically input. If CUSTOM is selected, enter a ESP (50)
Protocol Number
desired protocol number. The format is “Protocol SCTP (132)
(Number)”. This option is only valid if Control is CUSTOM (variable)
enabled by selecting the check box. N/A
Select/Deselect the check box to specify
whether the Source Port Number will be
examined by the ACL Rule. The Src Port cannot
Src Port be enabled if EtherType Control check box is not (check box unselected)
selected and the entered EtherType value is not
equal to 0x800, and if protocol Control is not
enabled.
Enter the Source Port low range to be examined
Src Port - Low Limit 0 - 65535
by the ACL Rule.
Enter the Source Port high range to be examined
Src Port - High Limit 0 - 65535
by the ACL Rule.
Select/Deselect the check box to specify
whether the Destination Port Number will be
examined by the ACL Rule. The Dst Port cannot
Dst Port be enabled if EtherType Control check box is not (check box unselected)
selected and the entered EtherType value is not
equal to 0x800, and if protocol Control is not
enabled.
Enter the Destination Port low range to be
Dst Port - Low Limit 0 - 65535
examined by the ACL Rule.
Enter the Destination Port high range to be
Dst Port - High Limit 0 - 65535
examined by the ACL Rule.

912 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 81: Create/Edit ACL Rule

Option Settings /
Parameter Description / Application Rules
Defaults
Select/Deselect the check box to specify
TCP Flags Control whether TCP Flags will be examined by the ACL (check box unselected)
Rule.
Enter the TCP protocol flags (bits 5 - 9) value to
TCP Flags be examined by the filter. The maximum value is 0 - 0x1F
11111 (bin)/0x1F (hex).

Edit ACL Rule Priority

Table 82: Edit ACL Rule Priority
Option Settings /
Parameter Description / Application Rules
Defaults
Edit the priority for the ACL Rule. The bigger the
Rule Priority 0 - 65535
value is, the higher priority the ACL Rule has.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 913

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Create/Edit Traffic IP Interface

Table 83: Create/Edit Traffic IP Interface
Option Settings /
Parameter Description / Application Rules
Defaults
Identification
1 - 32 for GE112Prox1
Entity ID The entity identifier of the Traffic IP Interface. It’s
or
(Create Only) automatically indexed by default.
1 - 64 for GE114Prox2
Interface Name Enter an alphanumeric string to uniquely identify
the interface. This string can be 15 characters. A (blank)
(Create Only) string with only digits will be denied.
AdminState
The administrative state of the Traffic IP Interface.
The administrative state of Traffic IP Interface will IS
inherit the state of its associated traffic port, e.g.
The default admin state of Network Port 1 is IS
and the Traffic IP Interface created on its L3 FP is
Administrative
also IS by default; the factory default admin state Management
for access ports is Unassigned, so the default
state of its L3 FP Traffic IP Interface will also be
Unassigned and the Unassigned state is not edit- Unassigned
able.
IP Interface Configuration
Manually enter the IP Address of this Traffic IP
Interface. By default, the IP Address is not edit-
able, because the default IP Address Source Type
IP Address N/A
is DHCP. Note that the IP Address of any Client
Side Traffic IP Interface cannot be in the address
pool of the DHCP server.
Manually enter the Subnet Mask of this Traffic IP
Interface. By default, the Subnet Mask is not edit-
Subnet Mask N/A
able, because that default IP Address Source
Type is DHCP.
Enable/Disable proxy ARP on this interface. Disabled
Proxy ARP
Default is disabled. Enabled
Specify the method of the Traffic IP Interface con- DHCP
IP Address Source Type
figuration. Static
DHCP Configuration
The DHCP role of this IP interface. Currently only
Role DHCP Client
DHCP Client is support.
Enable or Disable transmitting DHCP Client ID Enabled
Client ID Control (DHCP Option 61) if configured in DHCP request
to the DHCP server. Disabled

1The GE112Prox refers to GE112Pro (m), GE112Pro and GE112Pro (H).

2The GE114Prox refers to GE114Pro, GE114Pro (C), GE114Pro (SH), GE114Pro (CSH) and GE114Pro (HE).

914 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 83: Create/Edit Traffic IP Interface

Option Settings /
Parameter Description / Application Rules
Defaults
Select a desired DHCP Client ID type when
DHCP Client ID Control is Enabled.
MAC Address
l If MAC Address is selected, the Associate
Port’s MAC Address will be used as DHCP
Client ID automatically;
Client ID Type l if System Name is selected, the System System Name
Name shown in System Detail Pane will be
used as DHCP Client ID;
l if User Defined is selected, user is allowed to
enter a customized name as the DHCP Client User Defined
ID.
This option shows or allows the entry of DHCP Cli-
ent ID. (Default as associated
l If DHCP Client ID Type is MAC Address or port’s MAC address or
System Name, this option is not editable, as a
Client ID value corresponding to the selected Client ID System Name,
Type will be used automatically;
dependent of last
l if DHCP Client ID Type is User Defined, user
is allowed to enter a customized string up to operation)
254 characters.
Enable or Disable transmitting DHCP Class ID
(DHCP Option 60) if configured in DHCP request
to the DHCP server. The Class ID is a non-user Enabled
definable string. The format is like: <vendor fixed
Class ID Control string><space><inventory

product name> e.g: “ADVA FSP150-GE114Pro- Disabled

CSH” for the GE114Pro (CSH), with the same
format used for other products.
Enable or Disable transmitting DHCP Host Name Enabled
Host Name Control (DHCP Option 12) if configured in DHCP request
to the DHCP server. Disabled
Select a desired DHCP Host Name Type when
DHCP Host Name Control is enabled.

If System Name is selected, the System Name System Name

shown in gray (same as the System Name in Sys-
tem Detail Pane) will be used as the
Host Name Type
DHCP Host Name;

if User Defined is selected, user is allowed to enter User Defined

a customized name as the DHCP Host

Name.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 915

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 83: Create/Edit Traffic IP Interface

Option Settings /
Parameter Description / Application Rules
Defaults
This option shows or allows the entry of DHCP
Host Name. FSP150-GE11xPro
(e.g.
If DHCP Host Name Type is System Name, this
option is not editable, as the System Name will be FSP150-GE114Pro-C)
Host Name
used automatically;

if DHCP Host Name Type is User Defined, user is

allowed to enter a customized string up to 254 char- user-defined string
acters.
DHCP Relay Parameters Configuration
Enable/Disable the inspection of DHCP Option 60 Disabled
Vendor Opt 60 Control presence in the DHCP messages received on Cli-
ent side Traffic IP Interface, Enabled
DHCP Option 60 value (Vendor Class ID) used for
association of the received message with Traffic
Vendor Opt 60 N/A
IP Interface. A string of up to 255 characters. Only
editable when Vendor Opt 60 Control is Enabled.
Select from the drop-down list to determine DHCP Relay Client
Interface Side whether this Traffic IP Interface is connected with
relay client side or with the relay server side. DHCP Relay Server
Enable/Disable the sub-option 1 of the DHCP Disabled
Opt82 Sub1 Control
Option 82. Enabled
Enter the value of DHCP Option 82 sub-option1
using a string of up to 15 alphanumeric characters.
Opt82 Sub1 N/A
Only editable when Opt82 Sub1 Control is
Enabled.
Enable/Disable the sub-option 2 of the DHCP Disabled
Opt82 Sub2 Control
Option 82. Enabled
Enter the value of DHCP Option 82 sub-option2
using a string of up to 15 alphanumeric characters.
Opt82 Sub2 N/A
Only editable when Opt82 Sub2 Control is
Enabled.

Add Static ARP Entry on Traffic IP Interface

Table 84: Add Static ARP Entry
Option Settings /
Parameter Description / Application Rules
Defaults
IP Address to be added to the ARP
IP Address [Link]
entry.
Enter the MAC Address corresponding
MAC Address [Link]
to the entered IP Address.

916 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

When the system level alarm “Traffic ARP Table Full” is raised against the
Interface Route, user should not create more Interface Route related static
ARP entries, otherwise layer-3 traffic will be affect.
The system supports up to 128/1024 ARP Entries for Traffic Interface
Routes per GE112Pro/GE114Pro.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 917

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Create/Edit VRF
Table 85: Create/Edit VRF
Option Settings /
Parameter Description / Application Rules
Defaults
Identification
1 - 4 for GE112Prox1
VRF Index The Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF) entity
index number. This number is automatically or
(Create Only) indexed by the system.
1 - 8 for GE114Prox2
Enter a text and/or number string to uniquely
Alias identify this VRF. This string can be 255 char- (blank)
acters.
State
The administrative state of the VRF. The NE will Management
Administrative
forbid the deletion of a VRF while its state is IS. IS
Configuration
When DHCP Route Control is Enabled, the
dynamic routes learned by a Traffic IP Interface Disabled
based on DHCP Relay Agent can also be used
DHCP Route Control
by the VRF if the Traffic IP Interface is also
included in the VRF. When Disabled, the Enabled
dynamic routes learned cannot be used by VRF.
Traffic IP Interfaces
Select the check boxes by the Traffic IP Interface
EIDs to add the interfaces to the VRF. Note that
Traffic IP Interfaces cannot be shared by different
TRAFFIC IP VRFs. The Traffic IP Interfaces that have been
(a list of available Traffic
INTERFACE List Check selected in the Traffic IP Interface List of another
IP Interface EIDs)
Boxes VRF will not show up here. During editing, remov-
ing a Traffic IP Interface is not allowed if there is
one or more static routes associated with this IP
Interface.

1The GE112Prox refers to GE112Pro (m), GE112Pro and GE112Pro (H).

2The GE114Prox refers to GE114Pro, GE114Pro (C), GE114Pro (SH), GE114Pro (CSH) and GE114Pro (HE).

918 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Create/Edit Static Route for VRF

Table 86: Create/Edit Static Route for VRF
Option Settings /
Parameter Description / Application Rules
Defaults
Dest IP Address
Enter the destination IPv4 Address of this route. [Link]
(Create Only)
Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask of the destination
address. The Subnet Mask must be
[Link]
[Link] if Gateway IP Address is not
(Create Only) specified.
Gateway IP Address Enter the gateway (next hop) IPv4 address of this
route. Gateway IP Address may leave blank
[Link]
given that the destination Subnet Mask is
(Create Only) [Link].
Interface Name Select an IP interface from the drop-down list for
forwarding IP datagram. Note that only the Traffic (drop-down list of
IP Interfaces that have been added to the VRF available Traffic IP
will show the Interface Name in the drop-down Interfaces in the VRF)
(Create Only) list.
The Metric of the route. The lower the metric is,
the higher priority the route has. In case some
destination may be reached by more than one
route (either static or dynamic), the route with bet- 0 - 327665
Metric
ter metric (lower metric value) will be installed in 5
the FPGA IP Forwarding table. In the case with
two routes having the same metric, static route
will take the precedence.
Enable/Disable allowing forwarding packets back
to the ingress interface.
Disabled
If Enabled, the NE will allow forwarding packets
Source Forwarding back to the ingress interface;

If Disabled, the NE will not allow forwarding pack-

ets back to the ingress interface. Enabled

Default is Disabled.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 919

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Create/Edit DHCP Relay Agent

Table 87: Create/Edit DCHP Relay Agent
Option Settings /
Parameter Description / Application Rules
Defaults
Identification
1 - 4 for GE112Prox1
DHCP Relay Agent Index DHCP Relay Agent Index number which is auto-
or
(Create Only) matically indexed.
1 - 8 for GE114Prox2
Enter a text and/or number string to uniquely identify
Alias this DHCP Relay Agent entity. This string can be up (blank)
to 255 characters.
State
The administrative state of the DHCP Relay Agent. Management
Administrative The NE will forbid the deletion of a DHCP Relay
Agent while its state is IS. IS
Traffic IP Interface
The available Traffic IP Interfaces will appear show-
ing their Interface Name for selection by the check
boxes.

Note that Traffic IP Interfaces cannot be shared by

different DHCP Relay Agents. The Traffic IP Inter- (a list of available Traffic IP
TRAFFIC IP INTERFACE
faces that have been selected in the Traffic IP Inter- Interface EIDs)
List Check Boxes
face List of another DHCP Relay Agent will not show
up again for selection.

Note that only a single Traffic IP Interface with

DHCP Relay Server Interface Side is allowed per
DHCP Relay Agent.
DHCP Server IP Configuration
IP Protocol Select the IP protocol version from the drop-down
IPv4
(Create Only) list. Currently only IPv4 is supported.
IP Address Enter the DHCP Server IPv4 address. This IP
[Link]
(Create Only) Address must be a Unicast IPv4 address

1The GE112Prox refers to GE112Pro (m), GE112Pro and GE112Pro (H).

2The GE114Prox refers to GE114Pro, GE114Pro (C), GE114Pro (SH), GE114Pro (CSH) and GE114Pro (HE).

920 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

BFD Configuration Options and Rules

Bidirectional Fault Detection (BFD) is supported on Network Ports (physical only, not
Protection Group members) in all GE11xPro products to detect the layer-3 link failure in
two directions.

BFD may be provisioned in the following order:

l Provision necessary layer-3 services (L3 Flow Point, ACL, Traffic IP Interface, VRF,
Static Routes, etc), making sure all layer-3 routes between two ends are reachable
and resolvable (See Layer-3 Services Configuration Options and Rules for more
information on options and rules, see Provision Layer-3 Services for more information
on the procedure and see FSP 150-GE11xPro Quick Start Guide for specific use case)
l Create/Edit BFD Session

Refer to the following table for BFD configuration settings. Default settings are identified
in bold. For details on BFD provisioning, see Provision Bidirectional Fault Detection
(BFD).

Create/Edit BFD Session

Table 88: Create/Edit BFD Session
Option Settings /
Parameter Description / Application Rules
Defaults
Identification
The entity identification of BFD Session. It is auto-
BFD ID matically indexed. Up to 32 BFD Sessions are sup- 1 - 32
ported per system.
Enter a string of up to 64 characters to identify this BFD
Alias (blank)
session. Default is blank. This entry is optional.
State
IS
Administrative Set the administrative state for this BFD session. Management
Disabled
Configuration
Select the BFD session type from the drop-down list.

For Single-hop session, source IP address and des-

Singlehop
tination IP address are in the same subnet, gateway
address is not required and the TTL for BFD Control
Session Type Packet is 255.

For Multi-hop, arbitrary paths are supported, i.e., source

IP address and destination IP address are in different Multihop
subnetworks, in which case, the gateway address is
required and should be a valid unicast IPv4 address.
Select the Ethernet Port to associate with the BFD Ses-
NETWORK PORT-1-1-1-
sion. Only Network Ports are supported. Network Port
1
Associated Port Protection Group or its members are not [Link]
BFD session negotiation happens on Network Port’s
NETWORK PORT-1-1-1-2
Traffic IP Interface.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 921

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 88: Create/Edit BFD Session

Option Settings /
Parameter Description / Application Rules
Defaults
Source IP
Enter the source IPv4 address of this BFD Session. [Link]
Address
Destination IP
Enter the destination IPv4 address of this BFD Session. [Link]
Address
Enter the gateway IPv4 address if the Session Type is
Gateway Address N/A
Multi-hop.
Select the desired operational status for the BFD ses-
sion. This option functions especially when user wants
to maintain a specific BFD Session. None

l When Admin Down is selected, the BDF Session

Session Control keeps in down state because the remote end
refuses to negotiate while the peer end keeps
sending control packets to negotiate. Admin Down
l When None is selected, the BFD Session could be
negotiated.
Enter the desired priority (DSCP) for the IP header of
IP Priority 0 - 63
BFD control packets.
Detection Time 1 - 255
Specify the desired Detection Time Multiplier.
Multiplier 3
10 ms
Desired Min Tx Select a desired minimum transmitting interval for the
100 ms
Interval local system to transmit BFD control packets.
1s
Select a required minimum receiving interval for the 10 ms
Required Min Rx
local system to receive BFD control packets from the 100 ms
Interval
remote system. 1s
Select the checkbox to enable the layer-2 Outer Tag for
Outer Vlan check-
the BFD Session packets to pass through a specified (checkbox unselected)
box
route.
Enter the desired Outer Vlan tag in the format of “VLAN
Outer Vlan (0 - 4095) - (0 - 7)
ID - Priority”.
Select the checkbox to enable the layer-2 Inner Tag for (checkbox unselected)
Inner Vlan check-
the BFD Session Packets to pass through a specified
box
route.
Enter the desired Inner Vlan tag in the format of “VLAN
Inner Vlan (0 - 4095) - (0 - 7)
ID - Priority”.
Traffic Interfaces

Note 1: By default, no traffic interfaces available for selection.

Note 2: Select the checkboxes by the desired Traffic IP Interfaces created on Associated Port to asso-
ciate them with the BFD Session.

Note 3: The Traffic IP Interfaces which have been associated with BFD Sessions will not appear.

922 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

VXLAN Configuration Option and Rules

This section describes Virtual extendible Local Area Network (VXLAN ) options and
settings. The VXLAN Feature is disabled with factory default. The user must enable it
before any VXLAN object can be created or configured.

Table 89: Configure VXLAN

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults

VXLAN Tunnel End Point

The index number to be assigned to the VXLAN Tunnel End
VTEP ID 1
Point(VTEP).
0-255 characters
Alias A string to help identify this VTEP.
blank
VXLAN IP Interface
VTEP IP IF ID The Index to be assigned to the OpenFlow Logical Switch. 1-2
Name A mandatory name 1-15
Administrative Administrative Sate of the VXLAN IP Interface IS
Management
Disabled
Unnumbered Control Whether to make the VTEP IP Interface unnumbered.
Enabled
Disabled
DHCP Control Whether to enable DHCP client at the VTEP IP Interface.
Enabled
A static IP address to be assigned to the VTEP IP Interface.
IPv4 Address [Link]
Required when DHCP is disabled.
The IP Mask of the subnet the VTEP IP Interface belongs to.
IPv4 Mask [Link]
Required when DHCP is disabled.
A Network Interface for the VTEP IP Interface to associate Select from drop
Associated Port
with. It can be a valid Network Port or Network LAG down list
VXLAN Segment
1-64
VXLAN Segment ID The index number of the VXLAN Segment to be created.

0-255 characters
Alias A string to help identify this VTEP IP Interface.
blank
0-1677215
VNI VXLAN Network Identifier (VNI).
1
Outer Tag Priority Con- Whether to enable Encapsulation Outer Tag Priority for the Disabled
trol Segment. Enabled
Internal ClassWhether to enable Encapsulation Outer Tag Disabled
Inner Tag Priority Control
Priority for the Segment. Enabled
Disabled
DSCP Control Whether to enable DSCP for the Segment.
Enabled
1-4096
Max DMAC2DIP Entry Max DMAC2DIP Entry
1000
DMAC2DIP Table Aging 0, 10-10000 (Seconds)
The aging time for the entries in the DMAC to DIP.
Time 300

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 923

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 89: Configure VXLAN

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
DMAC2DIP Table Full Whether to discard for forward the newly received entries Forward
Action when the DMAC to DIP table has been full. Discard
Disabled
CE VLAN Strip Control Whether to Strip CE VLAN.
Enabled
[Link] to
Multicast Group Multicast Group for the Segment [Link]
[Link]
VTEP IPv4 Route
Gateway The Gateway IP address of the VTEP Static Route [Link]
Metric The valid IPv4 address of OpenFlow Controller. [Link]
Select from drop-down
Interface The VTEP IP Interface name
list
The Entity Identifier of a BFD session to work with the Route. BFD-1-32
BFD Session
None

When there is Load-Sharing LAG existing on Network Ports, it is up to the user to provision
the VTEP IP interface and VXLAN Flow with the same LAG member port. Traffic can be
blocked otherwise.

A VXLAN Flow is a Flow with a VXLAN Segment as Network Interface.

924 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

IPFIX Configuration and Rules

This section describes IP Flow Information Export (IPFIX) options and settings. The
IPFIX Feature is disabled with factory default. The user must enable it before any IPFIX
object can be created or configured.

Table 90: Configure IPFIX

Option Settings /
Parameter Description / Applicable Rules
Defaults
IPFIX Exporter
IPFIX Exporter ID The index number to be assigned to the IPFIX Exporter. 1
0-64 characters
Alias A string to help identify this IPFIX Exporter.
blank
IPFIX Exporter Collector 1-2
IPv4
IP Version The Version of the IP address used to reach the Collector
IPv6
A valid IPv4 address. This required when IP version is set to
IPv4 Address [Link]
IPv4.
A valid IPv6 address. This required when IP version is set to [Link]
IPv6 Address
IPv6. [Link]
1-65535
Associated UDP Port The UDP Port at which the Collector listen for IPFIX exporting
4739
Configure IPFIX Template
IPFIX Template IF ID The Index to be assigned to the IPFIX Template. 1-2
0-64 characters
Alias A string to help identify this IPFIX Template.
blank
Template ID Administrative Sate of the IPFIX IP Interface
256-65535

Disabled
Match VLAN ID Whether to enable or disable matching traffic with VID
Enabled
Match Source IP Disabled
Whether to enable or disable matching traffic with SIP
Address Enabled
Disabled
Match Source IP Prefix Whether to enable or disable matching traffic with SIP Prefix
Enabled
Source IP Prefix The target SIP Prefix, when SIP Prefix matching is enabled. 1-32
Match Destination IP Disabled
Whether to enable or disable matching traffic with DIP
Address Enabled
Match Destination IP Disabled
Whether to enable or disable matching traffic with DIPPrefix
Prefix Enabled
Destination IP Prefix The target DIP Prefix, when DIP Prefix matching is enabled. 1-32
Disabled
Match Protocol Whether to enable or disable matching traffic with Protocol.
Enabled
Disabled
Match TOS Whether to enable or disable matching traffic with TOS.
Enabled
Disabled
Match TOS Range Whether to enable or disable matching traffic with a TOS Range
Enabled
Min TOS The lower limit of the target TOS range. 0-7
Max TOS The higher limit of the target TOS range. 0-7

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 925

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 90: Configure IPFIX

Option Settings /
Parameter Description / Applicable Rules
Defaults
Disabled
Match TCP Flag Whether to enable or disable matching traffic with TCP Flag.
Enabled
Disabled
Match Source Port Whether to enable or disable matching traffic with Source Port.
Enabled
Match Source Port Whether to enable or disable matching traffic with Source Port Disabled
Range Range. Enabled
Min Source Port The lower limit of the target Source Port range. 0-65535
Max Min Source Port The higher limit of the target Source Port range. 0-65535
Whether to enable or disable matching traffic with Destination Disabled
Match Destination Port
Port. Enabled
Match Destination Port Whether to enable or disable matching traffic with Destination Disabled
Range Port Range. Enabled
Min Destination Port The lower limit of the target Destination Port range. 0-65535
Max Min Destination
The higher limit of the target Destination Port range. 0-65535
Port
Disabled
Collect Flow Start Time Whether to collect system Time for Flow Starts information
Enabled
Disabled
Collect Flow End Time Whether to collect system Time for Flow Ends information
Enabled
Collect Delta Octet Disabled
Whether to collect Octet Delta Count information
Count Enabled
Collect Delta Packet Disabled
Whether to collect Packet Delta Count information
Count Enabled
Disabled
Collect Min TTL Whether to collect Minimum TTL information
Enabled
Disabled
Collect Max TTL Whether to collect Maximum TTL information
Enabled
Whether to collect the length information of the smallest packet Disabled
Collect Min IP Packet
observed for this Flow. The packet length includes the IP header
Length Enabled
(s) length and the IP payload length.
Whether to collect the length information of the maximum packet Disabled
Collect Max IP Packet
observed for this Flow. The packet length includes the IP header
Length Enabled
(s) length and the IP payload length.
IPFIX Metering Process
IPFIX Metering Pro-
The index number of the IPFIX Metering Process to be created. 1-2
cess ID
0-64 characters
Alias A string to help identify this Metering Process.
blank
Select from drop-
Template The IPFIX Template to be used in the Metering Process.
down list.
Select from drop-
Exporter The IPFIX Exporter to be used in the Metering Process.
down list.
The timeout of active entries in cache before they are exported 0-60 Minutes
Active Timeout
and removed. 30
The timeout of inactive entries in cache before they are exported 1-600 Seconds
Inactive Timeout
and removed. 15

926 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 90: Configure IPFIX

Option Settings /
Parameter Description / Applicable Rules
Defaults
The Algorithm hired for sampling. The only algorithm supported is
Algorithm random n-out-of-N where n=1 and N=1. Both 'n' and 'N' are not Random n Outof N
configurable.
In the random n-out-of-N sampling Algorithm, the size of
Size 1
sampling size is 'n'.
In the random n-out-of-N sampling Algorithm, the sampling 1-8192
Population
population is 'N'. 100
IPFIX Observation Domain
IPFIX Observation
The index number of the IPFIX Metering Process to be created. 1-2
Domain
ID The ID of an Observation Domain. 0-65535
Flow-based
Type Type of the Observation Domain to be created
Port-based
IPFIX Observation Point
IPFIX Observation
The index number of the IPFIX Metering Process to be created. 1-128
Point
Alias A string to represent the IPFIX Observation Point 1-64 characters
An identifier of an Observation Point that is unique accross the
Observation Domain. It is RECOMMENDED that this identifier
Observation Point ID is also unique per IPFIX Device. Typically, this Information 1-2147483647
Element is used for limiting the scope of other. The ID is a 64-bit
number.
The Traffic Interface for the Observation Point to associate with.
An Access Port or Network Port is used for a Port-based Select from drop-
Associated Interface
Observation Domain. A Service Flow is used for a Flow-based down list.
Observation Domain.
A2N
Flow Direction Only apply in a Flow-based Observation Domain.
N2A
The Entity Identifier of the IPFIX Metering Process to associate Select from drop-
Metering Process
with the Observation Point. down list.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 927

Factory Default Configuration Settings

OpenFlow Configuration Options and Rules

This section describes OpenFlow (OF) options and settings. The OpenFlow Feature is
disabled with factory default. The user must enable it before any OpenFlow object can be
created or configured.

Table 91: Configure OpenFlow

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults

OpenFlow Capable Switch (Create only)

Index The Index to be assigned to the OpenFlow Capable Switch. 1
OpenFlow Logical Switch (Create only)
Index The Index to be assigned to the OpenFlow Logical Switch. 1
Data Path Descrip- 0-256 ASCII
A brief description over the data path.
tion characters
How the switch shall behaves in case the connectivity to the Fail Secure Mode
Connect Lost Beha-
OpenFlow Controller is lost. Currently only Fail Secure
vior Fail Standalone Mode
Mode is supported.
OpenFlow Queue Setting
Index 1-127 for GE114Pro
The Index to be assigned to the OpenFlow Queue
(Create only) 1-63 for GE112Pro
The Minimum Traffic rate of the Queue. Measured in 1/1000
of the current rate of the OpenFlow Port. The minimum rate
Minimum Rate 0-1000
must be smaller or equal to the Maximum rate. See Con-
figure OpenFlow Queue for more information.
The Maximum Traffic rate of the Queue. Measured in 1/1000
of the current rate of the OpenFlow Port. The Maximum rate
Maximum Rate 0-1000
must be greater or equal to the Minimum rate. See Configure
OpenFlow Queue for more information.
The size of the buffer to be allocated to the OpenFlow
Buffer Size 32-15360 KB
Queue.
COS Internal Class of Service assigned to the Queue 0-7
Select from drop-down
OF Port Eid The OpenFlow Port for the Queue to associated with
list
OpenFlow Controller
Index
The Index to be assigned to the OpenFlow Controller 1-2
(Create Only)
Name A string name for the OpenFlow Controller. 1-64 ASCII Characters
Controller IPv4
address The valid IPv4 address of OpenFlow Controller. [Link]
(Create Only)
Controller Trans- The TCP port number on the OpenFlow Controller where 1-65535
port Port OpenFlow service is available. This setting must reflects the
(Create Only) configuration of the OpenFlow Controller. 6633

928 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 91: Configure OpenFlow

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Source IP Interface
Name The local IP Interface the OpenFlow Controller can be Select from drop-down
reached. list
(Create Only)
Transport Protocol The Protocol to be used for the communication between the TCP

(Create Only) OpenFlow switch and the OpenFlow controller. TLS

Echo Request Inter-Time the switch (GE11xPro) waits after the receiving a mes-
1-100
val sage from the Of controller to send an Echo Request mes-
(Create Only) sage. 5

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 929

Factory Default Configuration Settings

OpenFlow Instruction Supports

With GE11xPro, different instructions are supported in the VLAN Flow Table and Main
Flow Table. In both Tables there are some Instructions applying to normal Flow and some
applying to Table Miss Flow. Instructions applying to Table miss Flow are known as
Table miss Flow. The user must know what Instructions are supported by GE11xPro
devices when configuring OPenFlow with a SDN Controller.

Table 92: OpenFlow Instructions Summary

Flow Table Instruction Action Details
VLAN Table Apply Pop VLAN
Goto Table Main Flow Table
(Normal Instructions) Write Metadata N/A
VLAN Table Goto Table Main Flow Table
(Table Miss Instructions) Write Metadata N/A
Push VLAN
Apply Pop VLAN
Set Field VLAN, PCP
Output To Port or Controller
Push VLAN
Main Flow Table Pop VLAN
(Normal Instructions) Set Queue N/A
Write
Decrease TTL N/A
VLAN, PCP, DSCP,
Set Field Destination Mac, Source
Mac
Meter N/A
Main Flow Table
Write Output To Controller
(Table Miss Instructions)

930 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Management Tunnel Configuration Options and Rules

Refer to the following table for management tunnel configuration settings and associated
rules. One management tunnel per traffic interface is supported. Up to two management
tunnels are supported at one time. By default, each Access, Network or LAG Port is
provisioned without a management tunnel. Default settings are identified in bold in the
following table. Management Tunnels are created by expanding the Communications and
Management Tunnel entities and entering a right click on the NE-1 entity and selecting
Create Tunnel. An existing Management Tunnel entity may be edited by expanding the
Management Tunnels and NE-1 entities, and entering a right click on the desired
Management Tunnel and selecting Edit Configuration.

To delete an existing management tunnel, enter a right click on the desired management
tunnel and select Delete and then select OK. A Management Tunnel cannot be deleted if
the it has been selected as the agent-address value for Static Route, Static ARP Entry
or Source Address Config.

The following management tunnel provisioning options and rules are described for each
option setting available:

l When no LAG group is established, all Network ports and all Access ports are
available for creating management tunnels.
l When LAG groups are established, the Network or Access Ports used as members
are no longer available - the management tunnel is assigned to the LAG instead.

CAUTION:
When there is a MAC-based Management Tunnel, PTPoUDP and
TWAMP do not work properly on the same port. Also, Y.1731 Lose
Measurement (LM) on the same port cannot count the received ARP
packets for other application ( for instance, EoMPLS) correctly.

Table 93: Management Tunnel Configuration Settings

Description /
Parameter Option Settings / Defaults
Applicable Rules
Management Tunnel Configuration Settings
Management Tun-
nel Index Management Tunnel Index. Unique number associated with
1 - 255
(Create Tunnel this management tunnel entity.
only)
Specifies a unique name associated with the Management
Management Tun- Tunnel entity. This is a mandatory text string entry with a
nel Name maximum length of 15 characters. Note that it is not allowed up to 15 characters
(Create Tunnel to use system reserved names (i.e. ltp, cfm, efm, elmi, erp- (blank)
only) pdu, eth0, eth1,jdsu, lagpdu, lldppdu, lo, ptpsyncjack, ptpts,
sat, ssm, etc) to name management tunnels.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 931

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 93: Management Tunnel Configuration Settings

Description /
Parameter Option Settings / Defaults
Applicable Rules
The associated ports as well as the LAG assigned as the
management tunnel. Up to two management tunnels can be
created for the system, either port-based or lag-based.

l The associated ports for GE112Prox include the

following possible combinations:
o Network Port-1-1-1-1 plus two Access ports

o Network Port-1-1-1-1 plus three Access ports (if

Network Port 2 is switched)
Associated Port
o Network Port-1-1-1-1 plus one LAG (available ports are populated
(Create Tunnel o Two LAGs in drop-down list)
only)
l The associated ports for GE114Prox include the
following possible combinations:
o Network Port-1-1-1-1 plus two LAGs

o Network Port-1-1-1-1 plus four Access Ports

o Network Port-1-1-1-1 plus five Access ports (if
Network Port 2 is switched)
o Network Port-1-1-1-1, two Access ports and one LAG
o 3 LAGs
User setting for Ethernet or PPP Encapsulation. PPP can
Ethernet
Encapsulation only be used for directly connected ADVA Optical Net-
Type working NIDs. Not available if Management Traffic Bridging
PPP
is Enabled.
IPv4 Only
IP Mode Select the desired IP mode setting for DCN port. IPv6 Only
IPv4 and IPv6
Defines whether Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol is
enabled or disabled. If this interface is set to Enabled, the
Disabled
GE11xPro sends a broadcast query requesting IP address
DHCP information from a DHCP server. This option also enables or
disables the DHCP Client “Role.” For management tunnels,
a separate DHCP Role attribute is not supported since only
Enabled
DHCP Client is allowed. Not applicable if Encapsulation is
PPP or if Management Traffic Bridging is Enabled.
Enable or Disable transmitting DHCP Client ID (DHCP
Disabled
DHCP Client ID Option 61) if configured in DHCP request to the DHCP
Control server. Not applicable if Encapsulation is PPP or if Man-
Enabled
agement Traffic Bridging is Enabled.
Select a desired DHCP Client ID type when DHCP Client ID
Control is Enabled. If MAC Address is selected, the Asso- MAC Address
ciate Port’s MAC Address will be used as DHCP Client ID
DHCP Client ID
automatically; if System Name is selected, the System System Name
Type
Name shown in System Detail Pane will be used as DHCP
Client ID; if User Defined is selected, user is allowed to enter User Defined
a customized name as the DHCP Client ID.

932 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 93: Management Tunnel Configuration Settings

Description /
Parameter Option Settings / Defaults
Applicable Rules
This option shows or allows the entry of DHCP Client ID. If
DHCP Client ID Type is MAC Address or System Name, (Default as associate port’s
this option is not editable, as a value corresponding to the MAC address or System
DHCP Client ID
selected Client ID Type will be used automatically; if DHCP Name, dependent
Client ID Type is User Defined, user is allowed to enter a cus- of last operation)
tomized string up to 254 characters.
Enable or Disable transmitting DHCP Class ID (DHCP
Option 60) if configured in DHCP request to the DHCP
server. The Class ID is a non-user definable string. The Enabled

DHCP Class ID format is like: <vendor fixed string><space><inventory

Control product name>

e.g: “ADVA FSP150CC-GE112” for the GE112, with the Disabled

same format used for other products. Not applicable if Encap-
sulation is PPP or if Management Traffic Bridging is Enabled.
Enable or Disable transmitting DHCP Host Name (DHCP
Enabled
DHCP Host Name Option 12) if configured in DHCP request to the DHCP serv-
Control [Link] applicable if Encapsulation is PPP or if Management
Disabled
Traffic Bridging is Enabled.
Select a desired DHCP Host Name Type when DHCP Host
Name Control is enabled. If System Name is selected, the System Name
DHCP Host Name System Name shown in gray (same as the System Name in
Type System Detail Pane) will be used as the DHCP Host Name;
if User Defined is selected, user is allowed to enter a cus- User Defined
tomized name as the DHCP Host Name.
This option shows or allows the entry of DHCP Host Name.
If DHCP Host Name Type is System Name, this option is FSP150-GE11xPro
DHCP Host Name not editable, as the System Name will be used automatically;
if DHCP Host Name Type is User Defined, user is allowed to User-defined string
enter a customized string up to 254 characters.
DHCP Vendor Enable or disable sending Vendor information on a Man- Enabled
Information Control agement Tunnel. Disabled
The type of information to be transmitted as Vendor System Name
DHCP Vendor
information in Management Tunnel. The default is System
Information Type User Defined
Name.
A custom Vendor Information to be sent out. The default set- 0- 248 characters
DHCP Vendor
ting is the same as system name. System name is con-
Information <system name>
figured at Network Element level.
Enable or Disable receiving the DHCP Log Server (DHCP
Disabled
DHCP Log Server Option 7) list sent by the DHCP server. Not applicable if
Control Encapsulation is PPP or if Management Traffic Bridging is
Enabled
Enabled.
Enable or Disable receiving the DHCP NTP Server (DHCP
Disabled
DHCP NTP Server Option 42) list sent by the DHCP server. Not applicable if
Control Encapsulation is PPP or if Management Traffic Bridging is
Enabled
Enabled.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 933

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 93: Management Tunnel Configuration Settings

Description /
Parameter Option Settings / Defaults
Applicable Rules
IP Address for the management tunnel. Not applicable if Man-
IP Address 1 [Link]
agement Traffic Bridging is Enabled.
Defines the subnet mask for the management tunnel. Not
Subnet Mask [Link]
applicable if Management Traffic Bridging is Enabled.
Check box to permit the editing of the system default gate-
Edit System
way IP Address. Not applicable if Management Traffic (unselected)
Default Gateway
Bridging is Enabled.
Entry for a valid IPv4 IP Address. Only applicable if the Edit
Gateway IP
System Default Gateway checkbox is selected. Not applic- ([Link])
Address
able if Management Traffic Bridging is Enabled.
Allows setting/disabling of Routing Information Protocol
(RIP) V2 packets. If RIP is enabled on an interface and you
are changing the IP address, it may take minutes for RIP to Enabled
advertise the new IP address. If RIP is enabled on an inter-
face, it is recommended that you perform a system reboot
RIP V2
after changing the IP address. This will force RIP to advert-
ise the address immediately. Note that this operation should
be performed locally, or a static route must be created to the Disabled
remote in order to make the changes remotely. Not applic-
able if Management Traffic Bridging is Enabled.
[Link]
Enter an IPv6 unicast address for the management tunnel
IPv6 Unicast
interface. This option is only applicable when DHCPv6 is dis- [Link]
Address
abled and DHCPv6 Role is Client.
/0
When the NE is working in router mode (IPv6 Forwarding
Disabled
Stateless Address enabled), this option must be Disabled. When the NE is work-
Auto Configuration ing in host mode (IPv6 Forwarding disabled), this option can
Enabled
be Enabled.
Defines whether Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
(DHCP) is enabled or disabled. If this interface is set to Disabled
DHCPv6 Enabled and DHCP Role is set to DHCP Client, the
GE11xPro sends a broadcast query requesting IPv6 address Enabled
information from a DHCP server.
Defines whether Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Role
in IPv6 Network is as a server or a client. Servers assign IP DHCP Client
addresses, Clients receive addresses. This option is only
DHCPv6 Role applicable if DHCP is set to Enabled. If the DHCP Role is
set to DHCP Server, the user must Disable and then Enable
DHCPv6 for the initialization of the server function (IP DHCP Server
Address range) to take place.

1If RIP is enabled on an interface and you are changing the IP address, it may take minutes for RIP to
advertise the new IP address. If RIP is enabled on an interface, it is recommended that you perform a FSP
150 reboot after changing the IP address. This will force RIP to advertise the address immediately. Note that
this operation should be performed locally, or a static route must be created to the remote in order to make
the changes remotely.

934 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 93: Management Tunnel Configuration Settings

Description /
Parameter Option Settings / Defaults
Applicable Rules
Allows setting/disabling of Routing Information Protocol next
generation (RIPng) packets. When RIPng is enabled on an Disabled
IPv6 interface, the interface receive the IPv6 route entry on
RIPng the link and update local route table. The interface also sends
local learned IPv6 route entry to the link via multicast
Enabled
packets.
Whether to Advertise prefix to link in router mode.
Disabled
IPv6 RA Prefix This is only applicable when IPv6 Forwarding is enabled on
Enabled System level. This option and Stateless Address Auto Con-
figuration are mutually exclusive; they cannot be both Enabled
Enabled at the same time.
[Link]

IPv6 RA Prefix The IPv6 Prefix to be dispatched to link in Router mode. [Link]

/0
Edit System Selecting the checkbox allows editing the Gateway IPv6
(checkbox unselected)
Default Gateway Address.
Gateway IPv6 Enter a Gateway IPv6 Address if the “Edit System Default
(grayed out)
Address Gateway” checkbox is selected.
VLAN Based
Tunnel Mode Defines the management tunnel mode.
MAC Based
Enable or Disable C-Tag VLAN ID entry. This option is not
Enabled
available when Tunnel Mode is set to MAC Based, and can-
C-Tag VLAN
not be enabled with S-Tag VLAN at the same time when Tun-
Disabled
nel Mode is set to ITAG Based.
Define the C-Tag Management VLAN ID. It is used to
C-Tag VLAN ID identify management traffic on the port. This option is only 1 to 4095
editable when C-Tag VLAN is enabled.
Enable or Disable S-Tag VLAN ID entry. This option is not
Enabled
available when Tunnel Mode is set to MAC Based and can-
S-Tag VLAN
not be enabled with C-Tag VLAN at the same time when Tun-
Disabled
nel Mode is set to ITAG Based.
Define the S-Tag Management VLAN ID. It is used to identify
S-Tag VLAN ID management traffic on the port. This option is only available 1 to 4095
when S-Tag Vlan is enabled.
Committed Information Rate for the management tunnel. Min-
CIR imum setting is 0 bps, maximum setting is Network Port 256000
bandwidth. Default is 256000 bps.
Excess Information Rate for the management tunnel. Min-
EIR imum setting is 0 bps, maximum is Network Port bandwidth. 768000
Default is 768000 bps.
Denotes the amount of memory in KB devoted to buffering
Buffer Size management tunnel packets. Minimum is 32, maximum is 32 - 33554
33554. Default is 32.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 935

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 93: Management Tunnel Configuration Settings

Description /
Parameter Option Settings / Defaults
Applicable Rules
Configurable Class Of Service (COS). Specifies the Class of
Service associated with the IP Management Tunnel. This
COS value is also used in the p-bits of the VLAN based man- 0-7
agement tunnels (for both VLANs in the case where S-TAG
VLAN is enabled).

936 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

IPv6 over IPv4 Tunnel Configuration Options and Rules

Refer to the following table for IPv6 over IPv4 tunnel configuration settings and
associated rules. One IPv6 over IPv4 tunnel is supported per system. But default, no
IPv6 over IPv4 management tunnel is provisioned in the system. Default settings are
identified in bold in the following table. An IPv6 over IPv4 tunnel is created by expanding
the Communications and IPV6 over IPv4 Tunnels entities and entering a right click on the
NE-1 entity and selecting Create Tunnel. An existing IPv6 over IPv4 Tunnel may be
edited by expanding the IPv6 over IPv4 Tunnels and NE-1 entities, and entering a right
click on the IPv6 over IPv4 Tunnel and selecting Edit Configuration.

To delete an existing IPv6 over IPv4 tunnel, enter a right click on the IPv6 over IPv4
tunnel and select Delete and then select OK. An IPv6 over IPv4 tunnel cannot be deleted
if it has been selected as the Interface Name value for IPv6 Static Route, IPv6 Static
Neighbor Entry or IPv6 Static ProxyND Entry.

Table 94: IPv6 over IPv4 Tunnel Configuration Settings

Description /
Parameter Option Settings / Defaults
Applicable Rules
Identification
IPv6 over IPv4 IPv6 over IPv4 Tunnel Index. Unique num-
1
Tunnel Index ber associated with this tunnel entity.
Specifies a unique name associated with
the IPv6 over IPv4 Tunnel entity. This is a
mandatory text string entry with a max-
imum length of 15 alphanumeric char-
IPv6 over IPv4 up to 15 characters
acters. Note that it is not allowed to use
Tunnel Name (blank)
system reserved names (i.e. ltp, cfm, efm,
elmi, erppdu, eth0, eth1,jdsu, lagpdu, lldp-
pdu, lo, ptpsyncjack, ptpts, sat, ssm, etc)
to name an IPv6 over IPv4 tunnel.
Select the Eid of the IPv4 Interface that
Associated this IPv6 over IPv4 Tunnel is created on, (dropdown list of available IPv4 management
IPv4 Interface which could be DCN or Management tun- interfaces)
nel.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 937

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 94: IPv6 over IPv4 Tunnel Configuration Settings

Description /
Parameter Option Settings / Defaults
Applicable Rules
Tunnel
Select the mode of IPv6 over IPv4 tunnel:

l Configured Tunnel: A manually

configured tunnel is equivalent to a
permanent link between two IPv6 Configured
domains over an IPv4 backbone. User
specifies both IPv4 source address
and the destination address.
l IPv4 Compatible Tunnel: use IPv4-
compatible IPv6 addresses as the
format of source and destination IPv6
address runs on tunnel. IPv4-
compatible IPv6 addresses are IPv6
unicast addresses that have zeros in Auto 6o4
the high-order 96 bits of the address,
and an IPv4 address in the low-order
32 bits. IP address format:
::A.B.C.D/96
Mode
l Auto 6to4 Tunnel: Use IPv4 address
as one part of IPv6 prefixes Source
IPv6 address is generated by
2002:A.B.C.D:SLA:eui-64/48, b. The
destination IPv4 address is retrieved IPv4 Compatible
from destination IPv6 address
l ISATAT: ISATAP is an automatic
overlay tunneling mechanism that
uses the underlying IPv4 network as
an NBMA link layer for IPv6. ISATAP
is designed for transporting IPv6
packets within a site where a native
IPv6 infrastructure is not yet available.
IP address format: Prefix: ISATAP
[Link].B.C.D. The ISATAT
tunnel is not supported if IPv6
Forwarding is enabled at the system
level.
Tunnel Address
Destination Specify the destination IPv4 address for
[Link]
IPv4 Address Configured IPv6 over IPv4 tunnel.
IPv6 Unicast Enter the source IPv6 unicast address
[Link]/0
Address used to transmit IPv6 packets on tunnel.

938 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 94: IPv6 over IPv4 Tunnel Configuration Settings

Description /
Parameter Option Settings / Defaults
Applicable Rules
Specify a router that can provide standard
router advertisement network con-
figuration supported for ISATAP tunnel, so
Potential
that the other nodes one the end of Tunnel [Link]
Router
can get prefix from this route. Once a
router is entered, clicking on Add to add it
to the Potential Router List.
The list of potential routers. Selecting one
Potential
router in the list and clicking Remove to (default is a bank list)
Router List
delete a router.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 939

Factory Default Configuration Settings

CPD Filters Options and Rules

The following configuration options and rules apply to Access Ports and Flows. Control
Protocol Disposition (CPD) Filter settings are edited by entering a right click on the entity
and selecting Edit CPD Filters (see Table 95). Default settings are identified in bold.

Table 96 summarizes the list of relevant Layer 2 control protocols and Cisco proprietary
protocols that are the subject of this feature.

Table 95: Control Data Protocol Configuration Options and Rules

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Tunnel MAC
A user-defined L2PT MAC Tunnel used for all tunneled
Tunnel
protocols (BPDU, LLDP, CDP, VTP, LACP, LACP Marker, UDLD, DTP, [Link]
MAC
PVSTP+, PAgP).
Control Protocol Disposition (Edit CPD Filters)
Sets Control Protocol Disposition (CPD) per Ethernet First Mile - Operations,
Administration and Maintenance (EFM-OAM) protocol group or sub group for
Port and Flow.
Discard
l When set to Discard, the CPD frames are discarded and counted in
Etherjack PM parameters.
l When set to Pass Thru, the CPD frames are transported transparently
through the system.
l Selecting Use MAC Setting allows sub group protocol settings to be
provisioned by the corresponding MAC setting, e.g., if 01-80-C2-00-00-00
is set to Pass Thru and BPDU is set to Use MAC Setting, then BPDU is
set to Pass Thru. Pass Thru
l If L2PT Tunnel MAC is provisioned for use, the CPD disposition for the
protocols (BPDU, LLDP, CDP, VTP, LACP, LACP Marker, UDLD, DTP,
PVSTP+, PAgP) should be set to Pass Thru L2PT if user wants to tunnel
the control frames of the above protocols. Use MAC Setting
Pass Thru L2PT
Port CPD settings must be provisioned first, because options available for
Flows are determined upon Port CPD settings (Protocols that have been set to (only applicable to
Pass Thru at Port are provisionable at Flow). Default is Pass Thru. Access Ports)

940 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 96: Layer 2 Control Protocol Summary

Protocol Ethertype
Protocol Description MAC Address Notes
Group (Subtype)
By totally encapsulating the ori-
ginal frame in a two-level tagging
scheme, ISL is effectively a tun-
neling protocol and has the addi-
tional benefit of carrying non-
Ethernet frames. It adds a 26-
Inter Switch
ISL 01-00-0C-00-00-00 N/A byte header and 4-byte Frame
Link (ISL)
Check Sequence (FCS) to the
standard Ethernet frame - the lar-
ger Ethernet frames are expected
and handled by ports configured
to be trunks. ISL supports 1024
VLANs.
PAgP is a management protocol
that will check for parameter con-
sistency at either end of the link
Port
and assist the channel in adapt-
Aggregation 01-00-0C-CC-CC-
PAgP 0x0104 ing to link failure or addition.
Protocol CC
IEEE 802.3ad Link Aggregation
(PAgP)
Control Protocol (LACP) will
likely supersede PAgP in the long
term.
UDLD monitors physical cabling,
Unidirectional
Cisco 01-00-0C-CC-CC- shutting down miswired ports,
UDLD Link Detection 0x0111
Group CC protecting against uni-directional
(UDLD)
links.
Cisco
01-00-0C-CC-CC-
CDP Discovery 0x2000 Proprietary Discovery Protocol
CC
Protocol

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 941

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 96: Layer 2 Control Protocol Summary

Protocol Ethertype
Protocol Description MAC Address Notes
Group (Subtype)
The VTP protocol communicates
between switches using an Eth-
ernet destination multicast MAC
address (01-00-0c-cc-cc-cc) and
VLAN Trunking 01-00-0C-CC-CC- SNAP HDLC protocol type
VTP 0x2003
(VTP) CC Ox2003. It does not work over
non-trunk ports (VTP is a payload
of ISL or 802.1Q), so messages
 Cisco cannot be sent until DTP has
Group brought the trunk online.
(Cont.) DTP negotiates configuration
parameters between a switch
port and its neighbor. Trunks
extend VLANs between devices
by temporarily identifying and tag-
Dynamic 01-00-0C-CC-CC- ging (link-local) the original Eth-
DTP 0x2004
Trunking (DTP) CC ernet frames, thus enabling them
to be multiplexed over a single
link. This also ensures the sep-
arate VLAN broadcast and secur-
ity domains are maintained
between switches.
In order to support the IEEE
802.1q standard, Cisco's existing
STP implementation was exten-
ded to become PVST+ by adding
support for tunneling across an
IEEE 802.1q mono Spanning
Tree region. PVST+ is therefore
Cisco
Spanning Tree 01-00-0C-CC-CC- compatible with both IEEE
Group PVSTP+ 0x010b
PVSTP+ CD 802.1q's MST and Cisco PVST
(Cont.)
protocols without requiring extra
commands or configuration. In
addition, PVST+ adds veri-
fication mechanisms to ensure
that there is no configuration
inconsistency of port trunking
and VLAN IDs across switches.
UplinkFast provides fast STP
convergence after a direct link
failure in the network access
Uplink- 01-00-0C-CD-CD- layer. It operates without modi-
STP UplinkFast 0x200a
Fast CD fying STP, and its purpose is to
speed up convergence time in a
specific circumstance to less
than three seconds.

942 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 96: Layer 2 Control Protocol Summary

Protocol Ethertype
Protocol Description MAC Address Notes
Group (Subtype)
If there is a need to bridge non-
routable or legacy protocols
01-00-0C-CD-CD- between VLANs without inter-
VLAN Bridge VLAN Bridge 0x010c
CE fering with the IEEE Spanning
Tree instance(s) running on those
Cisco
VLANs
Group
Layer 2 protocol tunneling allows
(Cont.)
Layer 2 Layer 2 protocol data units
Protocol 01-00-0C-CD-CD- (PDUs) (CDP, STP, and VTP) to
L2PT N/A
Tunneling D0 be tunneled through a network
(L2PT) using a Cisco proprietary mul-
ticast address.
Port Pause 0x8808 (00-
Pause 01-80-C2-00-00-01 Port Pause Function
Function 01)
EFM- 0x8809
OAM EFM OAM 01-80-C2-00-00-02 EFM OAM Slow protocol
(802.3ah) (03)
Link Aggregation Control pro-
Link
0x8809 tocol. For Access Ports being put
LACP Aggregation
01-80-C2-00-00-02 in service with Network Ports in
(802.3ad) Control (01) LAG groups, this must be set to
Protocol
Discard.
LACP Marker protocol. For
0x8809 Access Ports being put in service
Bridge LACP Marker
Marker Protocol 01-80-C2-00-00-02 with Network Ports in LAG
Group (802.3ad) (02) groups, this must be set to Dis-
card.
Sync
SSM 01-80-C2-00-00-02 0x8809 (0A) Port QL Function
Messaging
Port Port Based
Authentication Network 01-80-C2-00-00-03 0x888E Port Authentication Protocol
(802.1x) Access Control
Rapid
BPDU Reconfiguration
(802.1w) of Spanning
Tree (RSTP)
01-80-C2-00-00-00 N/A N/A - DSAP 42 SSAP 42
BPDU IEEE Spanning
(802.1d) Tree 802.1d
BPDU
Multiple STP
(802.1s)

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 943

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 96: Layer 2 Control Protocol Summary

Protocol Ethertype
Protocol Description MAC Address Notes
Group (Subtype)
01-80-C2-00-00-04 Reserved for use by 802.1.
Bridge Bridge IEEE-802.1D states that a bridge
through N/A
Reserved Reserved will never forward a frame with
01-80-C2-00-00-0F one of these addresses.
Bridge [Link]
Group LLDP Link Layer
Multiple scoped DAs are not sup-
Discovery [Link] 0x88CC
(Cont.) (802.1ab) ported for L2PT.
Protocol
[Link]
Ethernet Link
E-LMI Management 01-80-C2-00-00-07 0x88EE
Interface
LAN Bridge LAN Bridge
LAN
Manage- 01-80-C2-00-00-10 N/A All LANs Bridge Management
Bridges (802.1d) ment
GARP
Multicast
GMRP 01-80-C2-00-00-20 N/A Multicast Registration Protocol
Registration
Protocol
GARP VLAN
GARP GVRP Registration 01-80-C2-00-00-21 N/A VLAN Registration Protocol
Group Protocol
01-80-C2-00-00-22

GARP GARP through N/A

01-80-C2-00-00-2F

944 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

LLDP Configuration Settings

Refer to the following tables for Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) configuration
rules. LLDP is configured at system level and the Ethernet port level. For details on LLDP
provisioning, see Provision Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP).

Table 97: System LLDP Configuration Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Edit LLDP
The interval at which LLDP frames are transmitted by the LLDP 5-3600
Transmission Interval
agent. 30
This a coefficient used to calculate the TTL value. 2 - 10
Hold Time Multiplier It is the smaller one of 65536 and (Transmission Interval x Hold
Time Multiplier). 4
This is the delay from when the LLDP Port Configuration Admin 1 - 10 (sec)
Re-initialization Delay Status of a particular port is disabled until the re-initialization of the
Transmit State Machine start. 2
The LLDP agent does not transmit more than one LLDP Remote 5 - 3600 (sec)
Notification Interval
Agent Tables Change notification in this interval. 30
Set the maximum number of LLDP frames can be transmitted 1 - 10
Maximum Tx Credit
consecutively. 5
Configure the interval at which the LLDP frames are
transmitted during the fast transmission period.
1 - 3600 (sec)
Message Fast Tx When a new neighbor is discovered on a port an LLDP agent
1
goes into fast transmission mode where a certain number LLDP
frames are transmitted at a shorter interval.
Configure the number of LLDP frames to be transmitted in fast
transmit mode.
1-8
Tx Fast Init When a new neighbor is discovered on a port an LLDP agent
4
goes into fast transmission mode where a certain number LLDP
frames are transmitted at a shorter interval.
Maximum Neighbors Configure the action to take if neighbors are discovered when
Discard NEW
Action the LLDP remote system database has been full.

Table 98: Physical Ethernet Port LLDP Configuration Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Enable or Disable SNMP notification when the following con- Disabled
SNMP Notification ditions happen: Remote Table Inserts, Remote Table
Deletes, Remote Table Drops, Remote Table Ageouts. Enabled

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 945

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 98: Physical Ethernet Port LLDP Configuration Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Disabled
TX-ONLY
Admin Status Whether to Transmit/Accept LLPDPDUs.
RX-ONLY
TX-AND-RX
Port Description
The basic optional TLVs to be transmitted in the LLDP frames
System Name
Basic Optional TLVs from this port. Select/Unselect the checkboxes to change the
System Description
settings.
System Capabilities
Select an interface as the LLDP management interface for
this port. Up to two management interfaces (DCN interface
and the management tunnel on this port) are allowed, and up
to six management addresses are allowed if IPv4 and IPv6
mode are both enabled for the two management interfaces. DCN-1-1-1-1

To select Management Interface to include its information in

the LLDP PDU and advertise. The remote user can recover
Management Inter- this address and use it to mange the Network element at the
face address.

The Management address TLV is optional. In practice, the

DCN IP address or Management Tunnel IP address is
usually used. To add a Management Tunnel, the Management Tunnel
Management Tunnel must be on the same Ethernet Port. On
each Ethernet Port LLDP Configuration, the user can add up
to three management addresses, but only two of them can be
transmitted within the LLDP PDU.
Enable or disable inserting the IP Address of the specified Disabled
Control Management interface into the LLPDU transmitted on the
current Ethernet Port. Enabled

946 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

E-LMI Configuration Settings

Refer to the following table for Ethernet Local Management Interface (E-LMI)
configuration settings. E-LMI configuration settings are available in Network Ports and
Access Ports both. Default settings are identified in bold. For details on ELMI
provisioning, see Ethernet Private Line Service Provisioning, Ethernet Virtual Private
Line Service Provisioning and Provision Network Ports without LAG or Protection Group.

Table 99: Network/Access Port E-LMI Configuration Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Disabled
ELMI Control Enable/Disable ELMI function on a port.
Enabled
Represents ELMI T392 Polling Verification Timer (PVT)
limit. Configurable with range 0 and from 5 to 30 (seconds). 0, 5 - 30 (seconds)
T392 Timeout
Default is 15. A value of 0 indicates that polling verification 15
is disabled.
Represents the ELMI N393 Status Counter Parameter
Threshold. This configurable parameter is a Threshold for 2 - 10
N393 Count
the Count of Consecutive Errors. It is used to determine if 4
ELMI is operational or not.
Enable/Disable Asynchronous Status Messages. If
Disabled
Enabled, the system transmits a Single EVC Asynchronous
Async Status
Status Message based on the change in the state of the
Enabled
EVC (flow) when the port is assigned and ELMI is enabled.
Minimum Asynchronous Message Interval - Used to specify
Min Async Status minimum time interval between asynchronous status mes- 0 - 3 (seconds)
Interval sages, in seconds. Note: This is generally set to 1/10th of 1
the UNI-C’s T391.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 947

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Loopback Settings
Refer to Table 100 for Network and Access Port loopback option settings. To set
loopback options, select Maintenance view, enter a right click on the desired entity in the
Selection Tree and select Loopback. The Administrative State must be set to
Maintenance prior to initiating a loopback. For Network interfaces when a Dual Active
Receive Protection Group is present, only a Network-1 or Network-2 loopback may be
applied at a time. Independent loopbacks may be applied simultaneously on Network-1
and Network-2 if a 1+1 Protection Group exists. Default settings are identified in bold.

The following loopback provisioning options and rules are described for each option
setting available:

Table 100: Loopback Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Defines the Access or Network facility administrative IS
[Link] administrative state controls the generation of alarms
and event reports. When an entity is in the In Service state, it is Management
fully operational. The Administrative State must be set to Main-
Administrative
tenance prior to initiating a loopback or an Etherjack Dia- Maintenance
State
gnostic. For more information on Administrative States, see
Entity State Descriptions. Disabled state is only applicable to Disabled
Access Ports. Maintenance state is not necessary for JDSU
Loopback. Unassigned
Allows you to set the Loopback State for a Network or Access
port. Allows constant or timed loopback of terminal or up to None
three individual VLAN flows. The interface must be in the
assigned state and the Administrative State must be set to
Testing prior to initiating a loopback. To activate a VLAN loop- EFM-OAM Remote
back, at least one VLAN ID must be selected in order to activ-
ate the VLAN loopback.
EFM-OAM Remote
Timed

The port EFM-OAM State must be set to Enabled prior to set-

ting EFM-OAM Remote or EFM-Remote Timed loopbacks or Facility Port
the selection will be denied. When activating a Remote EFM-
Loopback OAM loopback, the loopback includes management traffic,
Configuration therefore management traffic is dropped while the EFM-OAM Facility Port Timed
loopback is active. Since all EFM-OAM frames are still pro-
cessed, when the Remote EFM-OAM loopback is released,
management connectivity will also be restored. Facility VLAN

When using the web-based GUI “None” is used to remove a Terminal Port
loopback.
Terminal Port Timed

When CCM defect is used as a trigger for protection switching,

performing a loopback on port can cause undesired protection Terminal VLAN
switching.

948 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 100: Loopback Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Enable or Disable the GE11xPro to receive and react to JDSU
loopback control messages.

In a typical deployment scenario, a port or VLAN terminal loop-

back should be established at one end of the service on the port
connected to CPE device. This port can be an Access Port or Disabled
Network Port in GE11xPro product.

FSP 150-GE11xPro supports L2 Loop Up/Down Request mes-

sages. It processes the following JDSU L2 messages:
JDSU Loopback
Control l L2 Loop Up Request
l L2 Loop Down Request
l L2 Loop Up Request for L2 transparency
l L2 Loop Down Request for L2 transparency
Enabled
FSP 150-GE11xPro also supports JDSU L3 Loopback. It
processes the following JDSU L3 messages

l L3 Loop Up Request (Opcode = 0x0001)

l L3 Loop Down Request (Opcode = 0x0003)
Enable/Disable the source MAC address frame matching cri-
teria for all streams. Not applicable for EFM-OAM Remote,
(not selected)
EFM-OAM Remote Timed, Facility Port, Facility Port Timed
Source Address and Facility VLAN. Selecting the checkbox to enable Source
Match Address Match and entering the Source MAC Address for identi-
fying the frames to be looped. Not applicable when the check-
[Link]
box is not selected. The MAC Address Match configuration
cannot be modified on an active loopback.
Enable/Disable the destination MAC address frame matching
criteria for all streams. Not applicable for EFM-OAM Remote,
(not selected)
Destination EFM-OAM Remote Timed, Facility Port, Facility Port Timed
Address Match and Facility VLAN. Selecting the checkbox to enable Destin-
ation Address Match and entering the Destination MAC
Address for identifying the frames to be looped. Not applicable
[Link]
when the checkbox is not selected. the MAC Address Match
configuration cannot be modified on an active loopback.
First of three Virtual LAN Identifiers available for loopback. The
format is VLAN ID-Priority. Up to three Inner and Outer VLAN
loopbacks may be created per entity. Only applicable if Ter-
minal VLAN or Facility VLAN is selected. To activate the VLAN (0 to 4095)-
ID, the check box must be selected. At least one Inner and (0 to 7 or *)
Inner and Outer
Outer VLAN ID must be selected in order to activate the VLAN (4094-0 if Terminal
VLAN ID 1
loopback. Default VLAN ID is the same as the last VLAN ID or Facility VLAN is
used for the entity. Only one VLAN loopback may be performed selected)
per system. Once a VLAN loopback has been operated, a
second VLAN loopback may not be performed on another
entity.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 949

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 100: Loopback Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults

(See above.) (0 to 4095)-

(0 to 7 or *)
Inner and Outer Second of three Inner and Outer Virtual LAN Identifiers avail-
VLAN ID 2 able for loopback. (4094-1 if Terminal
or Facility VLAN is
selected)
(0 to 4095)-
(0 to 7 or *)
Inner and Outer (See above.)
VLAN ID 3 (4094-2 if Terminal
Last of three Virtual LAN Identifiers available for loopback.
or Facility VLAN is
selected)
Select a desired swap setting for loopback test when the loop-
back is not EFM OAM loopback.
None
l Swap SADA operation will swap the Source MAC Address
and Destination MAC addresses for looped-back frames.
l Swap DA Overrides SA operation will swap DA=SA,
SA=Local Address (LA) (loop-point address), whereby the
Destination Address is swapped with the Source address
and the Source Address is swapped with the Local Swap SADA
Address.
l Swap IP operation will swap the Source IP Address and
Destination IP Address for all looped frames that contain an
IP datagram (IPv4/IPV6), and will also swap the Source
MAC address and Destination MAC address. If the swap Swap DA Overrides
Swap SADA
creates a frame with a multicast Source MAC Address, the SA
source address will be replaced with the MAC address of
the port in loopback. However, the system currently does
not support to address an IP datagram which has a
multicast Source IP Address after the swap.
l Swap TCP/UDP operation will swap the Source Port and Swap IP
Destination Port for all looped frames, and will also swap
the Source/Destination MAC/IP addresses.

This option is available when in Maintenance View by selecting

Loopbacks. Only one Swap loopback operation may be per-
formed per system. Once a Swap loopback has been operated, Swap TCP/UDP
a second Swap loopback may not be performed on another
entity.
Specifies the amount of time the loopback is to be applied to a
10 to 300 (seconds)
Timer Terminal Port Timed or Facility Port Timed loopback. The loop-
10
back is released when the preset time has expired.

950 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 100: Loopback Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Enable/Disable the service frames blocking function when a
loopback is active. If Enabled, the blocking mechanism blocks
Enabled
frames in the non-loopback direction that match the Port or
Block Service VLAN loopback setting received in the non-loopback direction,
Frames and discards frames in the loopback direction that match the
Port or VLAN loopback setting but do not match the MAC
Disabled
Address criteria. If Disabled, not blocking is executed on
frames.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 951

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Environmental Alarms Settings - GE114Pro (HE)

Refer to the following table for Environmental Alarms option settings. To set
Environmental Alarms options, select Maintenance view, enter a right click on the
desired Environmental Alarm entity in the Selection Tree and select Edit.

The following provisioning options and rules are described for each option setting
available. Default settings are identified in bold.

Table 101: Environmental Alarms Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Miscellaneous
Battery Discharging
Battery Failure
Beacon Light Failure
Cooling Fan Failure
Engine Failure
Fuse Failure
Alarm Type Defines the Alarm Type associated with the Alarm Input.
High Temperature
Intrusion
Low Battery Voltage
Low Temperature
Open Door
Commercial Power
Failure
CR
MJ
Notification
Defines the Notification Code associated with the Alarm Input. MN
Code
NA
NR
The dry contact alarm inputs are programmable to specify Disabled
Alarm Input
whether the alarm shall be raised on contact close or open, or Alarm on Open
Mode
disabled. Alarm on Closed
Enables or disables Alarm Hold Off. Disabled
Alarm Hold Off
Enabled
Alarm Descrip-
Specifies a description for the associated Alarm Input. blank
tion

952 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Performance Monitoring Settings

Refer to the following tables for Performance Monitoring (PM) Threshold Crossing Alert
(TCA) monitored types and associated default settings:

l EOMPLS Monitored Types

l Ethernet Network Port Monitored Types
l Ethernet Access Port Monitored Types
l QoS Shaper Monitored Types
o N2A Shaper Monitored Types

o Port-based A2N and N2N Shaper Monitored Types

o Flow-based Shapers Monitored Types
l Flow Monitored Types
l Flow QOS Policer Monitored Types (A2N, N2A and N2N)
l Layer-three QOS Policer Monitored Types
l layer-three QOS Shaper Monitored Types
l ESA Probe Monitored Types
l GRE IP Interface Monitor Types
l GRE Tunnel Monitored Types
l Network and Access Port PTP Flow Point Monitored Types
l PTP MCI Monitored Types
l PTP Remote Slave Monitored Types
l SOOC Monitored Types
l PTP Clock Monitored Types
l PTP Port Monitored Types
l Pass-through Flow Monitored Types
l Layer-three Flow Point Monitored Types
l Traffic IP Interface Monitored Types
l Layer-three Traffic ACL Rule Monitored Types
l Layer-two A2N ACL Rule Monitored Types
l Layer-two N2A ACL Rule Monitored Types
l Mirror ACL Rule Monitor Types
l Secure Flow Monitored Types
l TX Secure Channel Monitored Types
l RX Secure Channel Monitored Types
l TX Secure Association Monitored Types
l RX Secure Association Monitored Types
l TWAMP Monitored Types
l VXLAN Segment Monitored Types

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 953

Factory Default Configuration Settings

EOMPLS Monitored Types

The following performance parameters are related to an EOMPLS.

Table 102: EOMPLS Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings

SNMP statsEntry Monitored Type Definition Direction Location 15 Min./ 5Min. 1 Day
f3EoMplsPwStatsTtlEqual0Drop TTLD Dropped because of Time To Live Equal is zero. Receive Near End 0 0

Ethernet Network Port Monitored Types

The following performance parameters are related to an Ethernet Network port. When 1+1 protection is provisioned, each Network port will be
monitored for its performance parameters and will be managed independently from the other.

Table 103: Ethernet Network Port Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
15 Min./
SNMP statsEntry Monitored Type Description Direction Location 1 Day
5Min.
cmEthernetNetPortStatsABRRx ABR-RX Average Bit Rate Received. The Receive Near End 0 0
average bit rate received over the
specific interval in the ingress dir-
ection. If there is link down during
the interval, the bin is not access-
ible. This counter is based on
RMON etherStatsOctets.
cmEthernetNetPortStatsABRTx ABR-TX Average Bit Rate Transmitted. The Receive Near End 0 0
average bit rate transmitted over a
specific interval in the egress dir-
ection, based on Bytes Sent. If
there is link down during the inter-
val, the bin is not accessible.

954 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 103: Ethernet Network Port Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
15 Min./
SNMP statsEntry Monitored Type Description Direction Location 1 Day
5Min.
cmEthernetNetPortAclDropNotMatch AclDropNotMatch AclRule Drop Not Match Receive Near End 0 0
cmEthernetNetPortAclFwd2Cpu AclFwd2Cpu AclRule Forward To CPU Receive Near End 0 0
cmEthernetNetPortDhcpDropNoAssocIf DhcpDropNoAssocIf Drop DHCP Packets Due To No Receive Near End 0 0
Associated Traffic IP Interface
cmEthernetNetPortStatsESBF ESBF EtherStats Broadcast Frames. The Receive Near End 0 0
Broadcast Frames Sent in the
egress direction If there is link
down during the interval, the bin is
not accessible.
cmEthernetNetPortStatsESBP ESBP EtherStats Broadcast Packets Receive Near End 0 0
Received. The total number of good
packets received that were directed
to the broadcast address. Note that
this does not include multicast
packets.
cmEthernetNetPortStatsESBS ESBS EtherStats Bytes Sent. The Bytes Transmit Near End 0 0
Sent in the egress direction If there
is link down during the interval, the
bin is not accessible.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 955

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 103: Ethernet Network Port Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
15 Min./
SNMP statsEntry Monitored Type Description Direction Location 1 Day
5Min.
cmEthernetNetPortStatsESC ESC EtherStats Collisions. The best Receive Near End 0 0
estimate of the total number of col-
lisions on this Ethernet segment.
The value returned will depend on
the location of the RMON probe.
Section [Link] (10BASE-5) and
section [Link] (10BASE-2) of
IEEE standard 802.3 states that a
station must detect a collision, in
the receive mode, if three or more
stations are transmitting sim-
ultaneously. A repeater port must
detect a collision when two or more
stations are transmitting sim-
ultaneously.
cmEthernetNetPortStatsESCAE ESCAE EtherStats CRC (Cyclic Redund- Receive Near End 37055 3557280
ancy Check) Aligned Errors. The
total number of packets received
that had a length (excluding framing
bits, but including FCS octets) of
between 64 and 1518 octets, inclus-
ive, but had either a bad Frame
Check Sequence (FCS) with an
integral number of octets (FCS
Error) or a bad FCS with a non-
integral number of octets (Align-
ment Error).

956 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 103: Ethernet Network Port Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
15 Min./
SNMP statsEntry Monitored Type Description Direction Location 1 Day
5Min.
cmEthernetNetPortStatsESDE ESDE EtherStats Drop Events. The total Receive Near End 37055 3557280
number of events in which packets
were dropped due to lack of
resources. Note that this number is
not necessarily the number of pack-
ets dropped; it is just the number of
times this condition has been detec-
ted.
cmEthernetNetPortStatsESF ESF EtherStats Fragments. The total Receive Near End 37055 3557280
number of packets received that
were less than 64 octets in length
(excluding framing bits but includ-
ing FCS octets) and had either a
bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS)
with an integral number of octets
(FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a
non-integral number of octets (Align-
ment Error). Note that it is entirely
normal for etherStatsFragments to
increment. This is because it
counts both runts (which are normal
occurrences due to collisions) and
noise hits.
cmEthernetNetPortStatsESFS ESFS EtherStats Frames Sent. The Receive Near End 0 0
Frames Sent in the egress direction
If there is link down during the inter-
val, the bin is not accessible.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 957

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 103: Ethernet Network Port Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
15 Min./
SNMP statsEntry Monitored Type Description Direction Location 1 Day
5Min.
cmEthernetNetPortStatsESJ ESJ EtherStats Jabbers. The total num- Receive Near End 0 0
ber of packets received that were
longer than 1518 octets (excluding
framing bits, but including FCS oct-
ets), and had either a bad Frame
Check Sequence (FCS) with an
integral number of octets (FCS
Error) or a bad FCS with a non-
integral number of octets (Align-
ment Error).

Note that this definition of jabber is

different than the definition in IEEE-
802.3 section [Link] (10BASE5)
and section [Link] (10BASE2).
These documents define jabber as
the condition where any packet
exceeds 20 ms. The allowed range
to detect jabber is between 20 ms
and 150 ms.
cmEthernetNetPortStatsESMF ESMF EtherStats Multicast Frames. The Receive Near End 0 0
Multicast Frames Sent in the
egress direction If there is link
down during the interval, the bin is
not accessible.

958 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 103: Ethernet Network Port Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
15 Min./
SNMP statsEntry Monitored Type Description Direction Location 1 Day
5Min.
cmEthernetNetPortStatsESMP ESMP EtherStats Multicast Packets Receive Near End 0 0
Received. EtherStats Multicast
Packets Received. The total num-
ber of good packets received that
were directed to a multicast
address. Note that this number
does not include packets directed
to the broadcast address.
cmEthernetNetPortStatsESO ESO EtherStats Octets Received. The Receive Near End 0 0
total number of octets of data
(including those in bad packets)
received on the network (excluding
framing bits but including FCS oct-
ets).
cmEthernetNetPortStatsESOF ESOF EtherStats Oversize Frames. The Transmit Near End 0 0
total number of frames received
that were oversized.
cmEthernetNetPortStatsESOP ESOP EtherStats Oversize Packets. The Receive Near End 37055 3557280
total number of packets received
that were longer than 1518 octets
(excluding framing bits, but includ-
ing FCS octets) and were oth-
erwise well formed.
cmEthernetNetPortStatsESP ESP EtherStats Packets Received. Receive Near End 0 0
EtherStats Packets Received. The
total number of packets (including
bad packets, broadcast packets,
and multicast packets) received.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 959

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 103: Ethernet Network Port Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
15 Min./
SNMP statsEntry Monitored Type Description Direction Location 1 Day
5Min.
cmEthernetNetPortStatsESP1024 ESP1024 EtherStats Packets - 1024 to 1518 Receive Near End 0 0
Octets Frames. The total number of
packets (including bad packets)
received that were between 1024
and 1518 octets in length inclusive
(excluding framing bits but includ-
ing FCS octets).
cmEthernetNetPortStatsESP128 ESP128 EtherStats Packets - 128 to 255 Receive Near End 0 0
Octets Frames. The total number of
packets (including bad packets)
received that were between 128
and 255 octets in length inclusive
(excluding framing bits but includ-
ing FCS octets).
cmEthernetNetPortStatsESP1519 ESP1519 EtherStats Packets - 1519 to 1536 Receive Near End 0 0
Octets Frames. The total number of
packets (including bad packets)
received that were between 1519
and 1536 octets in length inclusive
(excluding framing bits but includ-
ing FCS octets).
cmEthernetNetPortStatsESP256 ESP256 EtherStats Packets - 256 to 511 Receive Near End 0 0
Octet Packets. The total number of
packets (including bad packets)
received that were between 256
and 511 octets in length inclusive
(excluding framing bits but includ-
ing FCS octets).

960 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 103: Ethernet Network Port Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
15 Min./
SNMP statsEntry Monitored Type Description Direction Location 1 Day
5Min.
cmEthernetNetPortStatsESP512 ESP512 EtherStats Packets - 512 to 1023 Receive Near End 0 0
Octets Frames. The total number of
packets (including bad packets)
received that were between 512
and 1023 octets in length inclusive
(excluding framing bits but includ-
ing FCS octets).
cmEthernetNetPortStatsESP64 ESP64 EtherStats Packets - 0 to 64 Octets Receive Near End 0 0
Frames. The total number of pack-
ets (including bad packets)
received that were 64 octets in
length (excluding framing bits but
including FCS octets).
cmEthernetNetPortStatsESP65 ESP65 EtherStats Packets - 65 to 127 Oct- Receive Near End 0 0
ets Frames. The total number of
packets (including bad packets)
received that were between 65 and
127 octets in length inclusive
(excluding framing bits but includ-
ing FCS octets).
cmEthernetNetPortStatsESUF ESUF EtherStats Unicast Frames. The Transmit Near End 0 0
Unicast Frames Sent in the egress
direction If there is link down during
the interval, the bin is not access-
ible.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 961

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 103: Ethernet Network Port Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
15 Min./
SNMP statsEntry Monitored Type Description Direction Location 1 Day
5Min.
cmEthernetNetPortStatsESUP ESUP EtherStats Undersize Packets. Receive Near End 37055 3557280
The total number of packets
received that were less than 64 oct-
ets long (excluding framing bits, but
including FCS octets) and were oth-
erwise well formed.
cmEthernetNetPortStatsIBR-RX IBR-RX Instantaneous Bit Rate Received Receive Near End 0 0
cmEthernetNetPortStatsIBR-TX IBR-TX Instantaneous Bit Rate Trans- Transmit Near End 0 0
mitted
cmEthernetNetPortStatsIBRMAX-RX IBRMAX-RX Instantaneous Bit Rate Maximum Receive Near End 0 0
Received
cmEthernetNetPortStatsIBRMAX-TX IBRMAX-TX Instantaneous Bit Rate Maximum Transmit Near End 0 0
Transmitted
cmEthernetNetPortStatsIBRMIN-RX IBRMIN-RX Instantaneous Bit Rate Minimum Receive Near End 0 0
Received
cmEthernetNetPortStatsIBRMIN-TX IBRMIN-TX Instantaneous Bit Rate Minimum Transmit Near End 0 0
Transmitted
cmEthernetNetPortStatsL2CPFD L2CPFD Layer 2 Control Protocol Frames Receive Near End 0 0
Discarded. Number of Layer 2 Con-
trol Protocol Frames discarded on
the interface.
cmEthernetNetPortStatsL2CPFP L2CPFP Layer 2 Control Protocol Frames Receive Near End 0 0
Processed. Number of Layer 2 Con-
trol Protocol Frames processed on
the interface.

962 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 103: Ethernet Network Port Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
15 Min./
SNMP statsEntry Monitored Type Description Direction Location 1 Day
5Min.
cmEthernetNetPortStatsL2PTTxFramesDecap L2PTFD Number of transmitted Layer 2 Pro- Transmit Near End 0 0
tocol Tunneling Frames Decap-
sulated.
cmEthernetNetPortStatsL2PTRxFramesEncap L2PTFE Number of received Layer 2 Pro- Receive Near End 0 0
tocol Tunneling Frames Encap-
sulated.
cmEthernetNetPortStatsLBC LBC1 Laser Bias Current retrieved from Receive Near End 0 0
the SFP. Applicable only if the
media type is Fiber.
cmEthernetNetPortThresholdVarOprVariance OPR-VAR1 Variance in the Optical Power Transmit Near End 4 4
received (in dbM), beyond which
threshold crossing alert will be gen-
erated.
cmEthernetNetPortStatsOPR OPR1 Optical Power Receive (in dBm) for Receive Near End -80 -80
the physical layer. This is applic-
able only if the media type for the
Network Port is fiber.
cmEthernetNetPortThresholdVarOptVariance OPT-VAR1 Variance in the Optical Power trans- Transmit Near End 4 4
mitted (in dbM), beyond which
threshold crossing alert will be gen-
erated.
cmEthernetNetPortStatsOPT OPT1 Optical Power Transmit (in dBm) Receive Near End -80 -80
for the physical layer. This is applic-
able only if the media type for the
Network Port is fiber.
cmEthernetNetPortStatsOPR PSC Protection Switch Count Receive Near End 0 0

1Valid only when the port is configured to use the fiber interfaces.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 963

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 103: Ethernet Network Port Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
15 Min./
SNMP statsEntry Monitored Type Description Direction Location 1 Day
5Min.
cmEthernetNetPortStatsTemp TEMP1 Temperature for the physical layer None Near End 0 0
(expressed in Celsius). Applicable
only if the media type is Fiber.
cmEthernetNetPortStatsUAS UAS Unavailable Seconds - counted if Receive Near End 0 0
one or more of following exists in
that second: Link down, link deac-
tivated (triggered by LLF), SFP
faults, EFM-OAM discovery failure,
and EFM-OAM local loopback.
Also, any one of the following port
based MEP conditions: cross con-
nect defect (unexpected MD level
or MAID Mismatch), Error CCM
Defect (Unexpected MEP or unex-
pected period), RMEP CCM Defect
(Loss of Connectivity), and RDI
Defect (unidirectional failure makes
the port based service unavailable).

964 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Ethernet Access Port Monitored Types

The following performance parameters are related to an Ethernet Access port. The optical, physical layer parameters are only valid when the port is
configured to use the fiber interfaces.

When the Access port is configured in EPL mode, a single service (Flow) is also configured which has counters associated with it.

Table 104: Ethernet Access Port Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
15
SNMP statsEntry Monitored Type Description Direction Location Min./ 1 Day
5Min.
cmAccPortQosShaperStatsABRRL ABR-RX Average Bit Rate Received. The average bit rate Receive Near End 0 0
received over the specific interval in the ingress dir-
ection. This counter is based on RMON eth-
erStatsOctets.
cmEthernetAccPortStatsABRTx ABR-TX Average Bit Rate Transmitted. The average bit rate Transmit Near End 0 0
transmitted over a specific interval in the egress dir-
ection, based on Bytes Sent.
cmEthernetAccPortAclDropNotMatch AclDropNotMatch AclRule Drop Not Match Receive Near End 0 0
cmEthernetAccPortAclFwd2Cpu AclFwd2Cpu AclRule Forward To CPU Receive Near End 0 0
cmEthernetAccPortStatsAPFD APFD AFP Priority-tagged Frames Dropped. Priority-tagged Receive Near End 0 0
frames dropped due to AFP setting. AFP Priority-tagged
Frames Dropped. Priority-tagged frames dropped due to
AFP setting.
cmEthernetAccPortStatsAUFD AUFD AFP Untagged Frames Dropped. Untagged frames Receive Near End 0 0
dropped due to AFP setting.
cmEthernetAccPortDhcpDropNoAssocIf DhcpDropNoAssocIf Drop DHCP Packets Due To No Associated Traffic IP Receive Near End 0 0
Interface
cmEthernetAccPortStatsESBF ESBF EtherStats Broadcast Frames. If there is link down dur- Receive Near End 0 0
ing the interval, the bin is not accessible.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 965

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 104: Ethernet Access Port Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
15
SNMP statsEntry Monitored Type Description Direction Location Min./ 1 Day
5Min.
cmEthernetAccPortStatsESBP ESBP EtherStats Broadcast Packets Received (in the A2N dir- Receive Near End 0 0
ection). The total number of good packets received that
were directed to the broadcast address. Note that this
does not include multicast packets.
cmEthernetAccPortStatsESBS ESBS EtherStats Bytes Sent. Transmit Near End 0 0
cmEthernetAccPortStatsESC ESC EtherStats Collisions. The best estimate of the total Receive Near End 0 0
number of collisions on this Ethernet segment. The
value returned will depend on the location of the RMON
probe. Section [Link] (10BASE-5) and section [Link]
(10BASE-2) of IEEE standard 802.3 states that a station
must detect a collision, in the receive mode, if three or
more stations are transmitting simultaneously. A
repeater port must detect a collision when two or more
stations are transmitting simultaneously.
cmEthernetAccPortStatsESCAE ESCAE EtherStats CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) Aligned Receive Near End 37055 3557280
Errors. The total number of packets received that had a
length (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets)
of between 64 and 1518 octets, inclusive, but had either
a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral
number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-
integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
cmEthernetAccPortStatsESDE ESDE EtherStats Drop Events. The total number of events in Receive Near End 37055 3557280
which packets were dropped due to lack of resources.
Note that this number is not necessarily the number of
packets dropped; it is just the number of times this con-
dition has been detected.

966 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 104: Ethernet Access Port Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
15
SNMP statsEntry Monitored Type Description Direction Location Min./ 1 Day
5Min.
cmEthernetAccPortStatsESF ESF EtherStats Fragments. The total number of packets Receive Near End 37055 3557280
received that were less than 64 octets in length (exclud-
ing framing bits but including FCS octets) and had either
a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral
number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-
integral number of octets (Alignment Error). Note that it
is entirely normal for etherStatsFragments to increment.
This is because it counts both runts (which are normal
occurrences due to collisions) and noise hits.
cmEthernetAccPortStatsESFS ESFS EtherStats Frames Sent. The Frames Sent in the egress Transmit Near End 0 0
direction.
cmEthernetAccPortStatsESJ ESJ EtherStats Jabbers. The total number of packets Receive Near End 0 0
received that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding
framing bits, but including FCS octets), and had either a
bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral num-
ber of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integ-
ral number of octets (Alignment Error).

Note that this definition of jabber is different than the

definition in IEEE-802.3 section [Link] (10BASE5) and
section [Link] (10BASE2). These documents define
jabber as the condition where any packet exceeds 20
ms. The allowed range to detect jabber is between 20
ms and 150 ms.
cmEthernetAccPortStatsESMF ESMF EtherStats Multicast Frames. The Multicast Frames Receive Near End 0 0
Sent in the egress direction.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 967

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 104: Ethernet Access Port Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
15
SNMP statsEntry Monitored Type Description Direction Location Min./ 1 Day
5Min.
cmEthernetAccPortStatsESMP ESMP EtherStats Multicast Packets Received. EtherStats Receive Near End 0 0
Multicast Packets Received. The total number of good
packets received that were directed to a multicast
address. Note that this number does not include packets
directed to the broadcast address.
cmEthernetAccPortStatsESO ESO EtherStats Octets Received. The total number of octets Receive Near End 0 0
of data (including those in bad packets) received on the
network (excluding framing bits but including FCS oct-
ets).
cmEthernetAccPortStatsESOF ESOF EtherStats Oversize Frames. The total number of Transmit Near End 0 0
frames transmitted that were oversized.
cmEthernetAccPortStatsESOP ESOP EtherStats Oversize Packets. The total number of pack- Receive Near End 37055 3557280
ets received that were longer than 1518 octets (exclud-
ing framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were
otherwise well formed.
cmEthernetAccPortStatsESP ESP EtherStats Packets Received. The total number of pack- Receive Near End 0 0
ets (including bad packets, broadcast packets, and mul-
ticast packets) received.
cmEthernetAccPortStatsESP1024 ESP1024 EtherStats Packets - 1024 to 1518 Octets Frames. The Receive Near End 0 0
total number of packets (including bad packets) received
that were between 1024 and 1518 octets in length inclus-
ive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
cmEthernetAccPortStatsESP128 ESP128 EtherStats Packets - 128 to 255 Octets Frames. The Receive Near End 0 0
total number of packets (including bad packets) received
that were between 128 and 255 octets in length inclusive
(excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).

968 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 104: Ethernet Access Port Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
15
SNMP statsEntry Monitored Type Description Direction Location Min./ 1 Day
5Min.
cmEthernetAccPortStatsESP1519 ESP1519 EtherStats Packets - 1519 to 1536 Octets Frames. The Receive Near End 0 0
total number of packets (including bad packets) received
that were between 1519 and 1536 octets in length inclus-
ive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
cmEthernetAccPortStatsESP256 ESP256 EtherStats Packets - 256 to 511 Octet Packets. The Receive Near End 0 0
total number of packets (including bad packets) received
that were between 256 and 511 octets in length inclusive
(excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
cmEthernetAccPortStatsESP512 ESP512 EtherStats Packets - 512 to 1023 Octets Frames. The Receive Near End 0 0
total number of packets (including bad packets) received
that were between 512 and 1023 octets in length inclus-
ive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
cmEthernetAccPortStatsESP64 ESP64 EtherStats Packets - 0 to 64 Octets Frames. The total Receive Near End 0 0
number of packets (including bad packets) received that
were 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but
including FCS octets).
cmEthernetAccPortStatsESP65 ESP65 EtherStats Packets - 65 to 127 Octets Frames. The total Receive Near End 0 0
number of packets (including bad packets) received that
were between 65 and 127 octets in length inclusive
(excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
cmEthernetAccPortStatsESUF ESUF EtherStats Unicast Frames sent. If there is link down Transmit Near End 0 0
during the interval, the bin is not accessible.
cmEthernetAccPortStatsESUP ESUP EtherStats Undersize Packets received. The total num- Receive Near End 37055 3557280
ber of packets received that were less than 64 octets
long (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets)
and were otherwise well formed.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 969

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 104: Ethernet Access Port Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
15
SNMP statsEntry Monitored Type Description Direction Location Min./ 1 Day
5Min.
cmEthernetAccPortStatsIBR-RX IBR-RX Instantaneous Bit Rate Received Receive Near End 0 0
cmEthernetAccPortStatsIBR-TX IBR-TX Instantaneous Bit Rate Transmitted Transmit Near End 0 0
cmEthernetAccPortStatsIBRMAX-RX IBRMAX-RX Instantaneous Bit Rate Maximum Received Receive Near End 0 0
cmEthernetAccPortStatsIBRMAX- IBRMAX-TX Instantaneous Bit Rate Maximum Transmitted Transmit Near End 0 0
TX
cmEthernetAccPortStatsIBRMIN- IBRMIN-RX Instantaneous Bit Rate Minimum Received Receive Near End 0 0
RX
cmEthernetAccPortStatsIBRMIN- IBRMIN-TX Instantaneous Bit Rate Minimum Transmitted Transmit Near End 0 0
TX
cmEthernetAccPortStatsL2CPFD L2CPFD Layer 2 Control Protocol Frames Discarded. Number of Receive Near End 0 0
Layer 2 Control Protocol Frames discarded on the inter-
face.
cmEthernetAccPortStatsL2CPFP L2CPFP Layer 2 Control Protocol Frames Processed. Number of Receive Near End 0 0
Layer 2 Control Protocol Frames processed on the inter-
face.
cmEthernetAccPortStatsL2PTTxFramesDecap L2PTFD Number of transmitted Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Transmit Near End 0 0
Frames Decapsulated.
cmEthernetAccPortStatsL2PTRxFramesEncap L2PTFE Number of received Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Frames Receive Near End 0 0
Encapsulated.
cmEthernetAccPortStatsLBC LBC1 Laser Bias Current retrieved from the SFP. Applicable Receive Near End 0 0
only if the media type is Fiber.

1Valid only when the port is configured to use the fiber interfaces.

970 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 104: Ethernet Access Port Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
15
SNMP statsEntry Monitored Type Description Direction Location Min./ 1 Day
5Min.
cmEthernetAccPortThresholdVarOprVariance OPR-VAR1 Variance in the Optical Power received (in dbM), beyond Transmit Near End 4 4
which threshold crossing alert will be generated.
cmEthernetAccPortStatsOPR OPR1 Optical Power Receive (in dBm) for the physical layer. Receive Near End -80 -80
This is applicable only if the media type for the Access
Port is fiber.
cmEthernetAccPortThresholdVarOptVariance OPT-VAR1 Variance in the Optical Power transmitted (in dbM), bey- Transmit Near End 4 4
ond which threshold crossing alert will be generated.
cmEthernetAccPortStatsOPT OPT1 Optical Power Transmit (in dBm) for the physical layer. Receive Near End -80 -80
This is applicable only if the media type for the Access
Port is fiber.
cmEthernetAccPortStatsTemp TEMP1 Temperature for the physical layer (expressed in None Near End 0 0
Celsius). Applicable only if the media type is Fiber.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 971

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 104: Ethernet Access Port Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
15
SNMP statsEntry Monitored Type Description Direction Location Min./ 1 Day
5Min.
cmEthernetAccPortStatsPSC UAS1 Unavailable Seconds. Used by Network/Service Man- Receive Near End 0 0
agement Systems to compute port-based service un-
availability. Counted if one or more of following exists in
that second:

l Link down
l link deactivated (triggered by LLF)
l SFP faults
l EFM-OAM discovery failure
l EFM-OAM loopback.

Also, any one of the following port based MEP con-

ditions:

l Port-based cross-connect defect (unexpected MD

level or MAID Mismatch/Mismerge)
l Port-based MEP Error CCM Defect (Unexpected
MEP or unexpected period)
l Port-based MEP RMEP CCM Defect (Loss of
Connectivity)
l Port-based MEP RDI Defect (unidirectional failure
makes the port based service unavailable)

1Any second that is deemed UAS for the port will also be UAS for all the EVCs on that port.

972 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

QoS Shaper Monitored Types

The FSP 150-GE11xPro supports several types on QoS Shapers. This is section provides a summary of the Monitor types and TCA of all QoS
Shapers.

N2A Shaper Monitored Types

The following performance parameters are for each of the QoS Shapers which are supported for an Access Port or Access LAG (These queues are
shared by all Flows provisioned on Port or LAG).

l In FSP 150-GE11xPro products, Net-to-Access (N2A) Shaping is always Port-based.

Table 105: Ethernet Access Port QoS Shaper/LAG N2A Shaper Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
Monitored 15 Min./
SNMP statsEntry Definition Direction Location 1 Day
Type 5Min.
cmAccPortQosShaperStatsABRRL ABRRL Average Bit Rate - Rate Limited for QoS queue n1. Receive Near End 0 0
cmAccPortQosShaperStatsBREDD BREDD Bytes Random Early Discard Dropped Transmit Near End 0 0
cmAccPortQosShaperStatsBT BT Bytes Transmitted by QoS queue n1 Receive Near End 0 0
cmAccPortQosShaperStatsBTD BTD Bytes Tail Dropped from this QoS queue n1 (in the Receive Near End 0 0
N2A direction).
cmAccPortQosShaperStatsFD FD Frames Dequeued by QoS queue n1 Receive Near End 0 0
cmAccPortQosShaperStatsFREDD FREDD Frames Random Early Discard Dropped Transmit Near End 0 0
cmAccPortQosShaperStatsFTD FTD Frames Tail Dropped by QoS queue n1 Receive Near End 0 0

1There can be up to 8 QoS queues, where n is 0 through 7.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 973

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Port-based A2N and N2N Shaper Monitored Types

The following performance parameters are for each of the QoS Shapers which are supported on an Network Port:

l A2N Shaping can be Flow-based or Port-Based.

l The Port-based Shaper are shared by Service Flows (in A2N direction) and Pass-through Flows (in N2N direction) on each COS.

Table 106: Ethernet Network Port A2N Shaper and LAG A2N Shaper Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
Monitored 15 Min./
SNMP statsEntry Definition Direction Location 1 Day
Type 5Min.
f3NetPortQosShaperStatsABRRL ABRRL Average Bit Rate - Rate Limited for QoS queue n1 Receive Near End 0 0
f3NetPortShaperStatsBREDD BREDD Bytes Random Early Discard Dropped Transmit Near End 0 0
f3NetPortQosShaperStatsBT BT Bytes Transmitted by QoS queue n 1 Receive Near End 0 0
f3NetPortQosShaperStatsBTD BTD Bytes Tail Dropped from this QoS queue n 1(in the Receive Near End 0 0
N2A direction).
f3NetPortQosShaperStatsFD FD Frames Dequeued by QoS queue n 1 Receive Near End 0 0
f3NetPortShaperStatsFREDD FREDD Frames Random Early Discard Dropped Transmit Near End 0 0
f3NetPortQosShaperStatsFTD FTD Frames Tail Dropped by QoS queue n 1 Receive Near End 0 0

1There can be up to 8 QoS shaper on each Network port, where n is 0 through 7

974 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Flow-based Shapers Monitored Types

The following performance parameters are for Flow-based QoS Shaper. When Flow-based shaping is applied, each Flow has a set of Shapers for
it’s own. There are two types of Flow-based Shaper:

l Flow-based A2N Shaper for Service Flows.

l Flow-based N2N Shapers for Pass-through Flows.

All Flow-based Shapers, for Service Flow or Pass-through Flow, share the same Monitor types. In SNMP the Monitor types are tracked in the same
table.

Table 107: Ethernet Network Port Flow A2N and Pass-through Flow N2N Shaper Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
Monitored 15 Min./
SNMP statsEntry Definition Direction Location 1 Day
Type 5Min.
cmQosShaperStatsABRRL ABRRL Average Bit Rate - Rate Limited for QoS queue n1. Receive Near End 0 0
cmQosShaperStatsBREDD BREDD Bytes Random Early Discard Dropped Transmit Near End 0 0
cmQosShaperStatsBT BT Bytes Transmitted by QoS queue n Receive Near End 0 0
cmQosShaperStatsBTD BTD Bytes Tail Dropped from this QoS queue n (N2A) . Receive Near End 0 0
cmQosShaperStatsFD FD Frames Dequeued by QoS queue n Receive Near End 0 0
cmQosShaperStatsFREDD FREDD Frames Random Early Discard Dropped Transmit Near End 0 0
cmQosShaperStatsFTD FTD Frames Tail Dropped by QoS queue n Receive Near End 0 0

1There can be up to 8 QoS shaper on each Network port, where n is 0 through 7.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 975

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Flow Monitored Types

Refer to the following table for Flow related Threshold Crossing Alerts (TCAs) and associated default settings. Also see flow services stats
definitions in cmPerformanceMIB.

Table 108: Flow Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings

15 Min./
SNMP statsEntry Monitored Type Definition Direction Location 1 Day
5Min.
cmFlowStatsABRA2N ABRA2N Average Bit Rate (in the A2N direction). Receive Near End 0 0
This parameter is an aggregation of up to
81 A2N bytes received policer counts.
cmFlowStatsABRN2A ABRN2A Average Bit Rate (in the N2A direction). Transmit Near End 0 0
This parameter is an aggregation of up to
81 N2A bytes transmitted policer counts.
cmFlowStatsABRRLA2N ABRRLA2N Average Bit Rate - Rate Limited (in the Receive Near End 0 0
A2N direction). This parameter is an
aggregation of up to 81 A2N bytes received
QoS queue counts.
cmFlowStatsABRRLN2A ABRRLN2A Average Bit Rate - Rate Limited (in the Transmit Near End 0 0
N2A direction). This parameter is an
aggregation of up to81 N2A bytes trans-
mitted QoS queue counts.
cmFlowStatsBytesInA2N BA2N Total Bytes In (in the A2N direction). This Receive Near End 0 0
parameter is an aggregation of up to 8 A2N
BytesIn policer counts.
cmFlowStatsBytesInN2A BN2A Total Bytes In (in the N2A direction). This Transmit Near End 0 0
parameter is an aggregation of up to 8 N2A
BytesIn policer counts.

1Up to 8 based on how many policers/queues are being used by the Flow

976 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 108: Flow Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings

15 Min./
SNMP statsEntry Monitored Type Definition Direction Location 1 Day
5Min.
cmFlowStatsBytesOutA2N BOA2N Total Bytes Out (in the A2N direction). Receive Near End 0 0
This parameter is an aggregation of up to 8
A2N BytesOut policer counts.
cmFlowStatsBytesOutN2A BON2A Total Bytes Out (in the N2A direction). Transmit Near End 0 0
This parameter is an aggregation of up to 8
N2A BytesOut policer counts.
f3FlowLearningStatsFDHairPin FDHAIRPIN Frame Discarded Because of Hairpin Receive Near End 0 0
f3FlowLearningStatsFDStaticBlock FDSTATICBLOCK Frame Discarded Because of Static Entry Receive Near End 0 0
in Learn Table
cmFlowStatsFMGA2N FMGA2N Frames Marked Green and Passed (in the Receive Near End 0 0
A2N direction). This parameter is an
aggregation of up to 8 A2N Green frames
passed policer counts
cmFlowStatsFMGN2A FMGN2A Frames Marked Green and Passed (in the Transmit Near End 0 0
N2A direction). This parameter is an
aggregation of up to 8 N2A Green frames
passed policer counts.
cmFlowStatsFMRDA2N FMRDA2N Frames Marked Red and Discarded (in the Receive Near End 0 0
A2N direction). This parameter is an
aggregation of up to 8 A2N Red frames dis-
carded policer counts.
cmFlowStatsFMRDN2A FMRDN2A Frames Marked Red and Discarded (in the Transmit Near End 0 0
N2A direction). This parameter is an
aggregation of up to 8 N2A Red frames dis-
carded policer counts.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 977

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 108: Flow Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings

15 Min./
SNMP statsEntry Monitored Type Definition Direction Location 1 Day
5Min.
cmFlowStatsFMYA2N FMYA2N Frames Marked Yellow and Passed (in the Receive Near End 0 0
A2N direction). This parameter is an
aggregation of up to 8 A2N Yellow frames
passed policer counts.
cmFlowStatsFMYN2A FMYN2A Frames Marked Yellow and Passed (in the Transmit Near End 0 0
N2A direction). This parameter is an
aggregation of up to 8 N2A Yellow frames
passed policer counts.
cmFlowStatsFTDA2N FTDA2N Frames Tail Dropped (A2N) Receive Near End 0 0
cmFlowStatsIBRA2N IBRA2N Instantaneous Bit Rate (A2N) Receive Near End 0 0
cmFlowStatsIBRA2NMAX IBRA2NMAX Instantaneous Bit Rate Maximum (A2N) Receive Near End 0 0
cmFlowStatsIBRA2NMIN IBRA2NMIN Instantaneous Bit Rate Minimum (A2N) Receive Near End 0 0
cmFlowStatsIBRN2A IBRN2A Instantaneous Bit Rate (N2A) Transmit Near End 0 0
cmFlowStatsIBRN2AMAX IBRN2AMAX Instantaneous Bit Rate Maximum (N2A) Transmit Near End 0 0
cmFlowStatsIBRN2AMIN IBRN2AMIN Instantaneous Bit Rate Minimum (N2A) Transmit Near End 0 0
cmFlowStatsIBRRLA2N IBRRLA2N Instantaneous Bit Rate - Rate Limited Receive Near End 0 0
(A2N)
cmFlowStatsIBRRLA2NMAX IBRRLA2NMAX Instantaneous Bit Rate Maximum - Rate Receive Near End 0 0
Limited (A2N)
cmFlowStatsIBRRLA2NMIN IBRRLA2NMIN Instantaneous Bit Rate Minimum - Rate Receive Near End 0 0
Limited (A2N)
cmFlowStatsIBRRLN2A IBRRLN2A Instantaneous Bit Rate - Rate Limited Transmit Near End 0 0
(N2A)
cmFlowStatsIBRRLN2AMAX IBRRLN2AMAX Instantaneous Bit Rate Maximum - Rate Transmit Near End 0 0
Limited (N2A)

978 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 108: Flow Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings

15 Min./
SNMP statsEntry Monitored Type Definition Direction Location 1 Day
5Min.
cmFlowStatsIBRRLN2AMIN IBRRLN2AMIN Instantaneous Bit Rate Minimum - Rate Transmit Near End 0 0
Limited (N2A)
cmFlowStatsL2CPFD L2CPFD Layer 2 Control Protocol Frames Dis- Receive Near End 0 0
carded. Number of Layer 2 Control Pro-
tocol Frames discarded on the interface.
f3FlowLearningStatsMacTableDiscards LEARNTBLENTRYDISCARDS f3FlowLearningStatsMacTableDiscards Receive Near End 0 0
f3FlowLearningStatsMacTableFlushes NUMLEARNTBLFLUSHES Number of Times Learn Table Has Been Receive Near End 0 0
Flushed of Dynamic Entries
cmFlowStatsSES SES Severely Errored Seconds: 1 second Receive Near End 0 0
period with 30% or more errored or lost
frames. (Note that 30% is a configured
value [not fixed].)

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 979

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 108: Flow Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings

15 Min./
SNMP statsEntry Monitored Type Definition Direction Location 1 Day
5Min.
cmFlowStatsUAS UAS Unavailable Seconds: Used by Net- Receive Near End 10 10
work/Service Management Systems to
compute port-based and VLAN-based ser-
vice availability. A second is deemed
unavailable for an EVC if any one of the fol-
lowing service-level defects is detected in
that second:

l VID-based MEP Cross-connect

Defect (Unexpected MD level or MAID
mismatch/Mismerge)
l VID-based MEP Error CCM Defect
(Unexpected MEP or unexpected
period)
l VID-based MEP RMEP CCM Defect
(Loss of Connectivity)
l VID-based MEP RDI Defect
(unidirectional failure makes the port
based service unavailable)
l VID-based MEP MAC Status Defect
(for LAN Up MEPs)
l Threshold exceeded for frame loss
ratio

980 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Flow QOS Policer Monitored Types (A2N, N2A and N2N)

Refer to the following table for QOS Flow Policer Threshold Crossing Alerts (TCAs) and their associated default settings. Also see QOS Flow
Policer stats definitions in cmPerformanceMIB.

Table 109: QOS Flow Policer Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
Monitored 15 Min./
SNMP statsEntry Definition Direction Location 1 Day
Type 5Min.
cmQosFlowPolicerStatsABR ABR Average Bit Rate - for Policer n1 . Receive Near End 0 0
cmQosFlowPolicerStatsBytesIn BYTESIN Number of bytes received by the Policer. Receive Near End 0 0
cmQosFlowPolicerStatsBytesOut BYTESOUT Number of bytes transmitted by the Policer. Receive Near End 0 0
cmQosFlowPolicerStatsFMG FMG Frames Marked Green and Passed for Policer Receive Near End 0 0
n.
cmQosFlowPolicerStatsFMRD FMRD Frames Marked Red and Discarded for Policer Receive Near End 0 0
n.
cmQosFlowPolicerStatsFMY FMY Frames Marked Yellow and Passed for Policer Receive Near End 0 0
n.

1There are at most 8 Policers in each direction, where n is 0 through 7.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 981

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Layer-three QOS Policer Monitored Types

Refer to the following table for layer-three QOS Policer Threshold Crossing Alerts (TCAs) and their associated default settings. Also see layer-three
QOS Policer stats definitions in f3L3MIB.

Table 110: Layer-three QOS Policer Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
Monitored 15 Min./
SNMP statsEntry Definition Direction Location 1 Day
Type 5Min.
f3L3QosPolicerStatsABR ABR Average Bit Rate Receive Near End 0 0
f3L3QosPolicerStatsBytesIn BYTESIN Total Bytes In Receive Near End 0 0
f3L3QosPolicerStatsBytesOut BYTESOUT Total Bytes Out Receive Near End 0 0
f3L3QosPolicerStatsFMG FMG Frames Marked Green and Passed Receive Near End 0 0
f3L3QosPolicerStatsFMRD FMRD Frames Marked Red and Discarded Receive Near End 0 0
f3L3QosPolicerStatsFMY FMY Frames Marked Yellow and Passed Receive Near End 0 0

982 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

layer-three QOS Shaper Monitored Types

Refer to the following table for layer-three QOS Shaper Threshold Crossing Alerts (TCAs) and their associated default settings. Also see layer-
three QOS Shaper stats definitions in f3L3MIB.

Table 111: layer-three QOS Shaper Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
SNMP statsEntry Monitored Definition Direction Location 15 Min./ 1 Day
Type 5Min.
f3L3QosShaperStatsABRRL ABRRL Average Bit Rate - Rate Limited Receive Near End 0 0
f3L3QosShaperStatsBREDD BREDD Bytes Random Early Discard Dropped Transmit Near End 0 0
f3L3QosShaperStatsBT BT Bytes Dequeued (Transmitted) Receive Near End 0 0
f3L3QosShaperStatsBTD BTD Bytes Tail Dropped Receive Near End 0 0
f3L3QosShaperStatsFD FD Frames Dequeued Receive Near End 0 0
f3L3QosShaperStatsFREDD FREDD Frames Random Early Discard Dropped Transmit Near End 0 0
f3L3QosShaperStatsFTD FTD Frames Tail Dropped Receive Near End 0 0

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 983

Factory Default Configuration Settings

ESA Probe Monitored Types

Refer to the following table for Etherjack Service Assurance (ESA) Threshold Crossing Alerts (TCAs) and associated default settings. Also see
ESA stats definitions in cmServiceAssuranceMIB.

Table 112: ESA Probe Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
Default
SNMP statsEntry Monitored Type Definition
Threshold
f3EsaProbeStatsSoamPmExtAvgAbsRTJitter AVG-ABSRTJITTER Average Absolute Round Trip Jitter (µsec) 0
f3EsaProbeStatsSoamPmExtAvgP2RFDR AVG-P2R-FDR Average Probe to Reflector Frame Delay Range (µsec) 0
f3EsaProbeStatsSoamPmExtAvgR2PFDR AVG-R2P-FDR Average Reflector to Probe Frame Delay Range (µsec) 0
f3EsaProbeStatsSoamPmExtAvgRTFDR AVG-RT-FDR Average Round Trip Frame Delay Range (µsec) 0
esaProbeStatsAvgRoundTripDelay AVG-RTDELAY The average round-trip delay (in µsec) across all packets 0
received in the current interval. The reflector's pro-
cessing time is excluded from the value.
esaProbeStatsLostPkts LOST-FRAMES The total number of Lost Packets in the current interval. 0
Packets which are not received from the reflector end
beyond the configured timeout value are termed as lost.
NOTE: This is not applicable for Y.1731 probes.
f3EsaProbeStatsSoamPmExtMaxAbsRTJitter MAX-ABSRTJITTER Max Absolute Round Trip Jitter (µsec) 0
f3EsaProbeStatsSoamPmExtMaxP2RFDR MAX-P2R-FDR Max Probe to Reflector Frame Delay Range (µsec) 0
f3EsaProbeStatsSoamPmExtMaxR2PFDR MAX-R2P-FDR Max Reflector to Probe Frame Delay Range (µsec) 0
f3EsaProbeStatsSoamPmExtMaxRTFDR MAX-RT-FDR Max Round Trip Frame Delay Range (µsec) 0
esaProbeStatsMaxRoundTripDelay MAX-RTDELAY The maximum round-trip delay (in µsec) across all pack- 0
ets received in the current interval. The reflector's pro-
cessing time is excluded from the value.
f3EsaProbeStatsSoamPmExtMinAbsRTJitter MIN-ABSRTJITTER Min Absolute Round Trip Jitter (µsec) 0

984 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 112: ESA Probe Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
Default
SNMP statsEntry Monitored Type Definition
Threshold
esaProbeStatsMinRoundTripDelay MIN-RTDELAY The minimum round-trip delay (in µsec) across all pack- 0
ets received in the current interval. The reflector's pro-
cessing time is excluded from the value.
f3EsaProbeStatsSoamPmExtNumAbsRTJitter NUM-ABSRTJITTER Number of Absolute Round Trip Jitter 0
f3EsaProbeStatsSoamPmExtNumP2RFDR NUM-P2R-FDR Number Probe to Reflector Frame Delay Range 0
f3EsaProbeStatsSoamPmExtNumR2PFDR NUM-R2P-FDR Number Reflector to Probe Frame Delay Range 0
f3EsaProbeStatsSoamPmExtNumRTFDR NUM-RT-FDR Number Round Trip Frame Delay Range 0
esaProbeStatsOutOfSeqErrs OUTOFSEQ-ERRS1 Out of Sequence Errors. The total number of out of 0
sequence errors across all packets received in the cur-
rent interval. If (Received Sequence Number) is less
than or equal to (Last Received Sequence Number) it is
termed as out of sequence error. NOTE: This is not
applicable for Y.1731 probes.
f3EsaProbeStatsSoamPmExtP2rAvailableDeltaTs P2R-AVAIL-DELTA-TS Probe to Reflector Available Delta TS (µsec) 0
f3EsaProbeStatsSoamPmExtP2rAvailableTime P2R-AVAIL-TIME Probe to Reflector Available Time (µsec) 0
f3EsaProbeStatsSoamPmExtAvgP2RFlr P2R-AVG-FLR Probe to Reflector Average FLR (m%) 0
esaProbeStatsAvgOnewayP2RDelay P2R-AVG-OWDELAY Probe to Reflector Average Oneway Delay. The average 0
one-way source to destination delay (in µsec) across all
packets received in the current interval.
esaProbeStatsAvgAbsP2RJitter P2R-AVGABSJITTER Probe to Reflector Average Absolute Jitter (µsec). 0

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 985

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 112: ESA Probe Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
Default
SNMP statsEntry Monitored Type Definition
Threshold
esaProbeStatsY1731P2RFrames P2R-DATA-FRAMES1 This attribute is only applicable to Y.1731 probes. This is 0
the number of data frames counted by the Source MEP
(Probe) that are transmitted towards the Destination
MEP (Reflector). Based on the configuration the MEP
counts the data frames with:

l MEP's LM TX priority or all the priorities

l All the VLAN IDs belonging the MEP's MA VID list
esaProbeStatsP2RErredPkts P2R-ERR-FRAMES23 Probe to Reflector Errored Packets. The total number of 0
Packets in the current interval, for which there was a
problem in transmission. This error is counted when
there is a failure in packet transmission due to resource
limitations (buffers). This can happen if the Probe Con-
figuration was changed to send in a large number of pack-
ets in a time interval. NOTE: This is not applicable for
Y.1731 probes.

1 The P2R-Data Frames counter stops counting in case the Link is lost, and resumes when the Link is restored.

2 There are several Performance Monitoring data types which appear for all probes but only valid to layer-three probes, namely, P2R-Err-Frames, R2P-Err-Frames, Seq-
Gaps and [Link] related statistics must be ignored for layer-two (Y.1731) probes.
3 There are several Performance Monitoring data types which appear for all probes but only valid to layer-three probes, namely, P2R-Err-Frames, R2P-Err-Frames, Seq-
Gaps and [Link] related statistics must be ignored for layer-two (Y.1731) probes.

986 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 112: ESA Probe Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
Default
SNMP statsEntry Monitored Type Definition
Threshold
esaProbeStatsP2RPkts P2R-FRAMES1 Probe to Reflector Packets. The total number of Trans- 0
mitted Packets in the current interval. In the case of
Y.1731 probes, this reflects the number of DMRs (Delay
Measurement Replies) received and this is always be
the same as the esaProbeStatsR2PPkts.
esaProbeStatsP2RLostPkts P2R-LOST-FRAMES The number of Lost Packets from probe to reflector in 0
the current interval. For Y.1731 probes, these are the
actual data frames lost.
f3EsaProbeStatsSoamPmExtMaxP2RFlr P2R-MAX-FLR Probe to Reflector Max FLR (m%) 0
esaProbeStatsMaxOnewayP2RDelay P2R-MAX-OWDELAY Probe to Reflector Maximum Oneway Delay. The max- 0
imum one-way source to destination delay (in µsec)
across all packets received in the current interval.
esaProbeStatsMaxAbsP2RJitter P2R-MAXABSJITTER Probe to Reflector Maximum Absolute Jitter (µsec). 0
esaProbeStatsMaxNegP2RJitter P2R-MAXNEGJITTER Probe to Reflector Maximum Negative Jitters. The max- 0
imum negative one-way jitter from source to destination
in the current interval.
esaProbeStatsMaxPosP2RJitter P2R-MAXPOSJITTER Probe to Reflector Maximum Positive Jitters. The max- 0
imum positive one-way jitter from source to destination
in the current interval.
f3EsaProbeStatsSoamPmExtMinP2RFlr P2R-MIN-FLR Probe to Reflector Min FLR (m%) 0
esaProbeStatsMinOnewayP2RDelay P2R-MIN-OWDELAY Probe to Reflector Minimum Oneway Delay. The min- 0
imum one-way source to destination delay (in µsec)
across all packets received in the current interval.

1 The P2R-Frames counter stops counting in case the Link is lost, and resumes when the Link is restored.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 987

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 112: ESA Probe Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
Default
SNMP statsEntry Monitored Type Definition
Threshold
esaProbeStatsMinAbsP2RJitter P2R-MINABSJITTER Probe to Reflector Minimum Absolute Jitter (µsec). 0
esaProbeStatsMinNegP2RJitter P2R-MINNEGJITTER Probe to Reflector Minimum Negative Jitters. The min- 0
imum negative one-way jitter from source to destination
in the current interval.
esaProbeStatsMinPosP2RJitter P2R-MINPOSJITTER Probe to Reflector Minimum Positive Jitters. The min- 0
imum positive one-way jitter from source to destination
in the current interval.
esaProbeStatsY1731P2RNegLossOccurrences P2R-NEG-LOSSES This attribute is only applicable to Y.1731 probes. This is 0
the number of occurrences of negative frame loss from
Source MEP (Probe) to Destination MEP (Reflector). If
these counts are non-zero, then there can be some kind
of provisioning mismatch between the Probe MEP and
Reflector MEP. Here are some scenarios where this can
happen:

l Probe MEP is configured to count in-profile frames

only and the Reflector MEP is configured to count all
frames with a mismatch in value for the attribute
cfmMepLmCount InProfileFrames.
l Probe MEP is configured to count data frames for
specific VLAN priority and the Reflector MEP is
configured to count data frames for all the priorities
with a mismatch in values for the attributes
cfmMepLmTx CountAllPrios or cfmMepLm
RxCountAllPrios. NOTE: This can possibly happen
due to reasons not related to configuration, such as
frame reordering in the network.
esaProbeStatsNumAbsP2RJitter P2R-NUMABSJITTER Probe to Reflector Number of Absolute Jitter (µsec). 0

988 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 112: ESA Probe Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
Default
SNMP statsEntry Monitored Type Definition
Threshold
esaProbeStatsNumNegP2RJitter P2R-NUMNEGJITTER Probe to Reflector Number of Negative Jitters. The total 0
number of negative one-way jitters from source to des-
tination in the current interval.
esaProbeStatsNumPosP2RJitter P2R-NUMPOSJITTER Probe to Reflector Number of Positive Jitters. The total 0
number of positive one-way jitters from source to des-
tination in the current interval.
f3EsaProbeStatsSoamPmExtP2rSeverelyErroredDeltaTs P2R-SE-DELTA-TS Probe to Reflector Severely Errored Delta TS 0
esaProbeStatsSumOnewayP2RDelay P2R-SUM-OWDELAY Probe to Reflector Sum of Oneway Delays. The total 0
sum of one-way delay from source to destination in the
current interval.
esaProbeStatsSumOfSqOnewayP2RDelay P2R-SUM-SQ- Probe to Reflector Sum of Square of Oneway Delays. 0
OWDELAY The sum of square of one-way delay from source to des-
tination in the current interval.
esaProbeStatsSumAbsP2RJitter P2R-SUMABSJITTER Probe to Reflector Sum of Absolute Jitter (µsec). 0
esaProbeStatsSumNegP2RJitter P2R-SUMNEGJITTER Probe to Reflector Sum of Negative Jitters. The total 0
sum of negative one-way jitters from source to des-
tination in the current interval.
esaProbeStatsSumPosP2RJitter P2R-SUMPOSJITTER Probe to Reflector Sum of Positive Jitters. The total sum 0
of positive one-way jitters from source to destination in
the current interval.
esaProbeStatsSumOfSqAbsP2RJitter P2R- Probe to Reflector Sum of Square of Absolute Jitter 0
SUMSQABSJITTER (µsec).
esaProbeStatsSumOfSqNegP2RJitter P2R- Probe to Reflector Sum of Square of Negative Jitters. 0
SUMSQNEGJITTER The sum of square of negative one-way jitters from
source to destination in the current interval.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 989

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 112: ESA Probe Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
Default
SNMP statsEntry Monitored Type Definition
Threshold
esaProbeStatsSumOfSqPosP2RJitter P2R- Probe to Reflector Sum of Square of Positive Jitters. 0
SUMSQPOSJITTER The sum of square of positive one-way jitters from
source to destination in the current interval.
esaProbeStatsP2RSyncErrs P2R-SYNC-ERRS The number of (time) Synchronization Errors from probe 0
to reflector in the current interval.
f3EsaProbeStatsSoamPmExtP2rUnavailableDeltaTs P2R-UNAVAIL- Probe to Reflector Unavailable Delta TS (µsec) 0
DELTA-TS
f3EsaProbeStatsSoamPmExtP2rUnavailableTime P2R-UNAVAIL-TIME Probe to Reflector Unavailable Time (µsec) 0
f3EsaProbeStatsSoamPmExtR2pAvailableDeltaTs R2P-AVAIL-DELTA-TS Reflector to Probe Available Delta TS (µsec) 0
f3EsaProbeStatsSoamPmExtR2PAvailableTime R2P-AVAIL-TIME Reflector to Probe Available Time (µsec) 0
f3EsaProbeStatsSoamPmExtAvgR2PFlr R2P-AVG-FLR Reflector to Probe Average FLR (m%) 0
esaProbeStatsAvgOnewayR2PDelay R2P-AVG-OWDELAY Reflector to Probe Average Oneway Delay. The average 0
one-way destination to source delay (in µsec) across all
packets received in the current interval.
esaProbeStatsAvgAbsR2PJitter R2P-AVGABSJITTER Reflector to Probe Average Absolute Jitter (µsec). 0
esaProbeStatsY1731R2PFrames R2P-DATA-FRAMES This attribute is only applicable to Y.1731 probes. This is 0
the number of data frames counted by the Destination
MEP (Reflector) that are transmitted towards the Source
MEP (Probe). Based on the configuration the MEP
counts the data frames with:

l MEP's LM RX priority or all the priorities

l All the VLAN IDs belonging the MEP's MA VID list

990 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 112: ESA Probe Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
Default
SNMP statsEntry Monitored Type Definition
Threshold
esaProbeStatsR2PErredPkts R2P-ERR-FRAMES1 Reflector to Probe Errored Packets. The total number of 0
Received Packets in the current interval, which had
errors such as length of received packet is less than the
protocol header length, packet was received after it was
marked as lost (i.e., beyond timeout). NOTE: This is not
applicable for Y.1731 probes.
esaProbeStatsR2PPkts R2P-FRAMES Reflector to Probe Packets. The total number of 0
Received Packets in the current interval. In the case of
Y.1731 probes, this reflects the number of DMRs (Delay
Measurement Replies) received and this is always be
the same as the esaProbeStatsP2RPkts.
esaProbeStatsR2PLostPkts R2P-LOST-FRAMES Reflector to Probe Lost Packets. The number of Lost 0
Packets from reflector to probe in the current interval.
For Y.1731 probes, these are the actual data frames
lost.
f3EsaProbeStatsSoamPmExtMaxR2PFlr R2P-MAX-FLR Reflector to Probe Max FLR (m%) 0
esaProbeStatsMaxOnewayR2PDelay R2P-MAX-OWDELAY Reflector to Probe Maximum Oneway Delay. The max- 0
imum one-way destination to source delay (in µsec)
across all packets received in the current interval.
esaProbeStatsMaxAbsR2PJitter R2P-MAXABSJITTER Reflector to Probe Maximum Absolute Jitter (µsec). 0
esaProbeStatsMaxNegR2PJitter R2P-MAXNEGJITTER Reflector to Probe Maximum Negative Jitters. The max- 0
imum negative one-way jitter from destination to source
in the current interval.
esaProbeStatsMaxPosR2PJitter R2P-MAXPOSJITTER Reflector to Probe Maximum Positive Jitters. The max- 0
imum positive one-way jitter from destination to source
in the current interval.
f3EsaProbeStatsSoamPmExtMinR2PFlr R2P-MIN-FLR Reflector to Probe Min FLR (m%) 0

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 991

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 112: ESA Probe Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
Default
SNMP statsEntry Monitored Type Definition
Threshold
esaProbeStatsMinOnewayR2PDelay R2P-MIN-OWDELAY Reflector to Probe Minimum Oneway Delay. The min- 0
imum one-way destination to source delay (in µsec)
across all packets received in the current interval.
esaProbeStatsMinAbsR2PJitter R2P-MINABSJITTER Reflector to Probe Minimum Absolute Jitter (µsec). 0
esaProbeStatsMinNegR2PJitter R2P-MINNEGJITTER Reflector to Probe Minimum Negative Jitters. The min- 0
imum negative one-way jitter from destination to source
in the current interval.
esaProbeStatsMinPosR2PJitter R2P-MINPOSJITTER Reflector to Probe Minimum Positive Jitters. The min- 0
imum positive one-way jitter from destination to source
in the current interval.

992 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 112: ESA Probe Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
Default
SNMP statsEntry Monitored Type Definition
Threshold
esaProbeStatsY1731R2PNegLossOccurrences R2P-NEG-LOSSES This attribute is only applicable to Y.1731 probes. This is 0
the number of occurrences of negative frame loss from
to Destination MEP (Reflector) to Source MEP (Probe).
If these counts are non-zero, then there can be some
kind of provisioning mismatch between the Probe MEP
and Reflector MEP. Here are some scenarios where this
can happen:

l Probe MEP is configured to count in-profile frames

only and the Reflector MEP is configured to count all
frames with a mismatch in value for the attribute
cfmMepLmCount InProfileFrames.
l Probe MEP is configured to count data frames for
specific VLAN priority and the Reflector MEP is
configured to count data frames for all the priorities
with a mismatch in values for the attributes
cfmMepLmTx CountAllPrios or cfmMepLm
RxCountAllPrios. NOTE: This can possibly happen
due to reasons not related to configuration, such as
frame reordering in the network.
esaProbeStatsNumAbsR2PJitter R2P-NUMABSJITTER Reflector to Probe Number of Absolute Jitter (µsec). 0
esaProbeStatsNumNegR2PJitter R2P-NUMNEGJITTER Reflector to Probe Number of Negative Jitters. The total 0
number of negative one-way jitters from destination to
source in the current interval.
esaProbeStatsNumPosR2PJitter R2P-NUMPOSJITTER Reflector to Probe Number of Positive Jitters. The total 0
number of positive one-way jitters from destination to
source in the current interval.
f3EsaProbeStatsSoamPmExtR2PSeverelyErroredDeltaTs R2P-SE-DELTA-TS Reflector to Probe Severely Errored Delta TS 0

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 993

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 112: ESA Probe Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
Default
SNMP statsEntry Monitored Type Definition
Threshold
esaProbeStatsSumOnewayR2PDelay R2P-SUM-OWDELAY Reflector to Probe Sum of Oneway Delay. The total sum 0
of one-way delay from destination to source in the cur-
rent interval.
esaProbeStatsSumOfSqOnewayR2PDelay R2P-SUM-SQ- Reflector to Probe Sum of Square of Oneway Delay. 0
OWDELAY The sum of square of one-way delay from destination to
source in the current interval.
esaProbeStatsSumAbsR2PJitter R2P-SUMABSJITTER Reflector to Probe Sum of Absolute Jitter (µsec). 0
esaProbeStatsSumNegR2PJitter R2P-SUMNEGJITTER Reflector to Probe Sum of Negative Jitters. The total 0
sum of negative one-way jitters from destination to
source in the current interval.
esaProbeStatsSumPosR2PJitter R2P-SUMPOSJITTER Reflector to Probe Sum of Positive Jitters. The total sum 0
of positive one-way jitters from destination to source in
the current interval.
esaProbeStatsSumOfSqAbsR2PJitter R2P- Reflector to Probe Sum of Square of Absolute Jitter 0
SUMSQABSJITTER (µsec).
esaProbeStatsSumOfSqNegR2PJitter R2P- Reflector to Probe Sum of Square of Negative Jitters. 0
SUMSQNEGJITTER The sum of square of negative one-way jitters from des-
tination to source in the current interval.
esaProbeStatsSumOfSqPosR2PJitter R2P- Reflector to Probe Sum of Square of Positive Jitters. 0
SUMSQPOSJITTER The sum of square of positive one-way jitters from des-
tination to source in the current interval.
esaProbeStatsR2PSyncErrs R2P-SYNC-ERRS Reflector to Probe Sync Errors. The number of (time) 0
Synchronization Errors from reflector to probe in the cur-
rent interval.
f3EsaProbeStatsSoamPmExtR2pUnavailableDeltaTs R2P-UNAVAIL- Reflector to Probe Unavailable Delta TS (µsec) 0
DELTA-TS

994 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 112: ESA Probe Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
Default
SNMP statsEntry Monitored Type Definition
Threshold
f3EsaProbeStatsSoamPmExtR2PUnavailableTime R2P-UNAVAIL-TIME Reflector to Probe Unavailable Time (µsec) 0
esaProbeStatsSeqGaps SEQ-GAPS1 The total number of sequence gaps across all packets 0
received in the current interval. If (Received Sequence
Number) is greater than or equal to (Last Received
Sequence Number + 2)) it is termed as a sequence gap.
NOTE: This is not applicable for Y.1731 probes.
f3EsaProbeStatsSoamPmExtSumAbsRTJitter SUM-ABSRTJITTER Sum of Absolute Round Trip Jitter (µsec) 0
f3EsaProbeStatsSoamPmExtSumP2RFDR SUM-P2R-FDR Sum of Probe to Reflector Frame Delay Range (µsec) 0
f3EsaProbeStatsSoamPmExtSumR2PFDR SUM-R2P-FDR Sum of Reflector to Probe Frame Delay Range (µsec) 0
f3EsaProbeStatsSoamPmExtSumRTFDR SUM-RT-FDR Sum of Squares of Round Trip Delays 0
esaProbeStatsSumRoundTripDelay SUM-RTDELAY The total sum of round trip delay (in milliseconds) in the 0
current interval. The reflector's processing time is
excluded from the value.
esaProbeStatsSumOfSqRoundTripDelay SUM-SQ-RTDELAY The sum of square of round trip delays in the current inter- 0
val.
f3EsaProbeStatsSoamPmExtSumOfSqAbsRTJitter SUMOFSQ- Sum of Squares of Absolute Round Trip Jitter (µsec²) 0
ABSRTJITTER
f3EsaProbeStatsSoamPmExtSumOfSqP2RFDR SUMOFSQ-P2R-FDR Sum of Squares of Probe to Reflector Frame Delay 0
Range (µsec²)
f3EsaProbeStatsSoamPmExtSumOfSqR2PFDR SUMOFSQ-R2P-FDR Sum of Squares of Reflector to Probe Frame Delay 0
Range (µsec²)
f3EsaProbeStatsSoamPmExtSumOfSqRTFDR SUMOFSQ-RT-FDR Sum of Squares Round Trip Frame Delay Range (µsec²) 0

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 995

Factory Default Configuration Settings

GRE IP Interface Monitor Types

Refer to the following table for GRE IP Interface Threshold Crossing Alerts (TCAs) and their associated default settings. Also see layer-three GRE
IP Interface stats definitions in f3GreMIB.

Table 113: GRE IP Interface Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
SNMP statsEntry Monitored Type Definition Direction Location 15 Min./ 5Min. 1 Day
f3GreIpInterfaceStats FragFramesRx Rx Fragment Frames Receive Near End 0 0
FragmentsReceivedFrames
f3GreIpInterfaceStats FragBytesRx Rx Fragment Bytes Receive Near End 0 0
FragmentsReceivedBytes
f3GreIpInterfaceStats FragFramesTx Tx Fragment Frames Transmit Near End 0 0
FragmentsTransmitsFrames
f3GreIpInterfaceStats FragBytesTx Tx Fragment Bytes Transmit Near End 0 0
FragmentsTransmitsBytes
f3GreIpInterfaceStats FragFramesDrop Fragment Frames Drop Receive Near End 0 0
FragmentsDroppedFrames
f3GreIpInterfaceStats FragBytesDrop Fragment Bytes Drop Receive Near End 0 0
FragmentsDroppedBytes
f3GreIpInterfaceStats PktReassembledFrames Packet Reassembled Receive Near End 0 0
PacketsReassembledFrames Frames
f3GreIpInterfaceStats PktReassembledBytes Packet Reassembled Receive Near End 0 0
PacketsReassembledBytes Bytes
f3GreIpInterfaceStats PreFragFramesTx Pre Tx Fragment Transmit Near End 0 0
PreFragmentsTransmitsFrames Frames
f3GreIpInterfaceStats PreFragBytesTx Pre Tx Fragment Bytes Transmit Near End 0 0
PreFragmentsTransmitsBytes

996 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

GRE Tunnel Monitored Types

Refer to the following table for GRETunnel Threshold Crossing Alerts (TCAs) and their associated default settings. Also see layer-three GRE
Tunnel stats definitions in f3GreMIB.

Table 114: GRE Tunnel Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
Monitored
SNMP statsEntry Definition Direction Location 15 Min./ 5Min. 1 Day
Type
f3GreTunnelStats TTLD TTL Equal 0 Receive Near End 0 0
TtlEqual0Drop Drop
f3GreTunnelStatsDest DUD Dest Transmit Near End 0 0
UnreachableDrop Unreachable
Drop
f3GreTunnelStats DIMD Dest IP Receive Near End 0 0
DestIpMismatchDrop Mismatch
Drop
f3GreTunnelStats GVMD GRE Receive Near End 0 0
GreVerMismatchDrop Version
Mismatch
Drop

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 997

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Network and Access Port PTP Flow Point Monitored Types

Refer to the following table for Network/Access port PTP Flow Point Threshold Crossing Alerts (TCAs) and their associated default settings. Also
see Ethernet port PTP Flow Point stats definitions in f3PtpMIB.

Table 115: Ethernet Port PTP Flow Point Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
15 Min./
SNMP statsEntry Monitored Type Definition Direction Location 1 Day
5Min.
f3PtpAcc1PortFlowPointStatsAnnouncesRx ANNOUNCESRX Number of PTP Announce mes- Receive Near End 0 0
sages received on the PTP
Flow Point.
f3PtpAccPortFlowPointStatsAnnouncesTx ANNOUNCESTX Number of Announce Mes- Transmit Near End 0 0
sages transmitted on the PTP
Flow Point. This object is applic-
able for transparent clocks.
f3PtpAccPortFlowPointStatsDelayReqsRx DELAYREQSRX Number of Delay Request Mes- Receive Near End 0 0
sages received on the PTP
Flow Point.
f3PtpAccPortFlowPointStatsDelayReqsTx DELAYREQSTX Number of Delay Request Mes- Transmit Near End 0 0
sages transmitted on the PTP
Flow Point.
f3PtpAccPortFlowPointStatsDelayRspsRx DELAYRSPSRX Number of Delay Response Receive Near End 0 0
Messages received on the PTP
Flow Point.
f3PtpAccPortFlowPointStatsDelayRspsTx DELAYRSPSTX Number of Delay Response Transmit Near End 0 0
Messages transmitted on the
PTP Flow Point.

1The “Acc” in all the SNMP StatsEntries should be replaced by “Net” for Network Port PTP Flow Point Monitor Types.

998 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 115: Ethernet Port PTP Flow Point Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
15 Min./
SNMP statsEntry Monitored Type Definition Direction Location 1 Day
5Min.
f3PtpAccPortFlowPointStatsFollowupsRx FOLLOWUPSRX Number of Follow up Messages Receive Near End 0 0
received on the PTP Flow
Point.
f3PtpAccPortFlowPointStatsFollowupsTx FOLLOWUPSTX Number of Follow up Messages Transmit Near End 0 0
transmitted on the PTP Flow
Point.
f3PtpAccPortFlowPointStatsMgmtFramesRx MGMTFRAMESRX Number of PTP Management Receive Near End 0 0
Frames received on the PTP
Flow Point.
f3PtpAccPortFlowPointStatsMgmtFramesTx MGMTFRAMESTX Number of PTP Management Transmit Near End 0 0
Frames Messages transmitted
on the PTP Flow Point.
f3PtpAccPortFlowPointStatsPDelayReqsRx PDELAYREQSRX Number of Peer Delay Request Receive Near End 0 0
Messages received on the PTP
Flow Point.
f3PtpAccPortFlowPointStatsPDelayReqsTx PDELAYREQSTX Number of Peer Delay Request Transmit Near End 0 0
Messages transmitted on the
PTP Flow Point.
f3PtpAccPortFlowPointStatsPDelayRspsRx PDELAYRSPSRX Number of Peer Delay Receive Near End 0 0
Response Messages received
on the PTP Flow Point.
f3PtpAccPortFlowPointStatsPDelayRspsTx PDELAYRSPSTX Number of Peer Delay Transmit Near End 0 0
Response Messages trans-
mitted on the PTP Flow Point

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 999

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 115: Ethernet Port PTP Flow Point Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
15 Min./
SNMP statsEntry Monitored Type Definition Direction Location 1 Day
5Min.
f3PtpAccPortFlowPointStatsPDelayRspFollowupsRx PDELAYRSPFOLUPSRX Number of Peer Delay Receive Near End 0 0
Response Followup Messages
received on the PTP Flow
Point.
f3PtpAccPortFlowPointStatsPDelayRspFollowupsTx PDELAYRSPFOLUPSTX Number of Peer Delay Transmit Near End 0 0
Response Followup Messages
transmitted on the PTP Flow
Point.
f3PtpAccPortFlowPointStatsPtpUnknownsRx PTPUNKNOWNSRX Number of Unknown PTP Mes- Receive Near End 0 0
sages received on the PTP
Flow Point.
f3PtpAccPortFlowPointStatsPtpUnknownsTx PTPUNKNOWNSTX Number of Unknown PTP Mes- Transmit Near End 0 0
sages transmitted on the PTP
Flow Point.
f3PtpAccPortFlowPointStatsSignalingRx SIGNALINGRX Number of PTP Signaling Mes- Receive Near End 0 0
sages received on the PTP
Flow Point.
f3PtpAccPortFlowPointStatsSignalingTx SIGNALINGTX Number of PTP Signaling Mes- Transmit Near End 0 0
sages transmitted on the PTP
Flow Point.
f3PtpAccPortFlowPointStatsSyncsRx SYNCSRX PTP Sync Messages Received Receive Near End 0 0
f3PtpAccPortFlowPointStatsSyncsTx SYNCSTX PTP Sync Messages Trans- Transmit Near End 0 0
mitted
f3PtpAccPortFlowPointStatsAvgSyncResTime AVGSYNCRESTIME The average residence time for Receive Near End 0 0
PTP Sync messages.

1000 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 115: Ethernet Port PTP Flow Point Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
15 Min./
SNMP statsEntry Monitored Type Definition Direction Location 1 Day
5Min.
f3PtpAccPortFlowPointStatsMinSyncResTime MINSYNCRESTIME The minimum residence time Receive Near End 0 0
for PTP Sync messages.

f3PtpAccPortFlowPointStatsMaxSyncResTime MAXSYNCRESTIME The maximum residence time Receive Near End 0 0

for PTP Sync messages.

f3PtpAccPortFlowPointStatsAvgDelayReqResTime AVGDELAYREQRESTIME The average residence time for Receive Near End 0 0
PTP Delay Request messages.

f3PtpAccPortFlowPointStatsMinDelayReqResTime MINDELAYREQRESTIME The minimum residence time Receive Near End 0 0

for PTP Delay Request mes-
sages.
f3PtpAccPortFlowPointStatsMaxDelayReqResTime MAXDELAYREQRESTIME The maximum residence time Receive Near End 0 0
for PTP Delay Request mes-
sages.
f3PtpAccPortFlowPointStatsAvgPDelayReqResTime AVGPDELAYREQRESTIME The average residence time for Receive Near End 0 0
PTP Peer Delay Request mes-
sages.
f3PtpAccPortFlowPointStatsMinPDelayRspResTime MINPDELAYREQRESTIME The minimum residence time Receive Near End 0 0
for PTP Peer Delay Response
messages.
f3PtpAccPortFlowPointStatsMaxPDelayReqResTime MAXPDELAYREQRESTIME The maximum residence time Receive Near End 0 0
for PTP Peer Delay Request
messages.
f3PtpAccPortFlowPointStatsAvgPDelayRspResTime AVGPDELAYRSPRESTIME The average residence time for Receive Near End 0 0
PTP Peer Delay Response
messages.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 1001

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 115: Ethernet Port PTP Flow Point Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
15 Min./
SNMP statsEntry Monitored Type Definition Direction Location 1 Day
5Min.
f3PtpAccPortFlowPointStatsMinPDelayRspResTime MINPDELAYRSPRESTIME The minimum residence time Receive Near End 0 0
for PTP Peer Delay Response
messages.
f3PtpAccPortFlowPointStatsMaxPDelayRspResTime MAXPDELAYRSPRESTIME The maximum residence time Receive Near End 0 0
for PTP Peer Delay Response
messages.

1002 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

PTP MCI Monitored Types

Refer to the following table for Master Clock Interface (MCI) Threshold Crossing Alerts (TCAs) and their associated default settings. Also see MCI
stats definitions in f3PtpMIB.

Table 116: Master Clock Interface Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
SNMP statsEntry Monitored Type Definition Direction Location 15 Min./ 5Min. 1 Day
f3PtpMCIStatsPtpDiscards MCI_PTPDISCARDS PTP Message Receive Near End 0 0
Discards
f3PtpMCIStatsAnnounceDeniedEvents MCI_ANNOUNCEDENEVTS Announce Ser- Receive Near End 0 0
vice Denied
Events
f3PtpMCIStatsSyncDeniedEvents MCI_SYNCDENEVTS Sync Service Receive Near End 0 0
Denied Events
f3PtpMCIStatsDelayRspDeniedEvents MCI_DELAYRESPDENEVTS Delay Response Receive Near End 0 0
Service Denied
Events
f3PtpMCIStatsAnnounceCancelledEvents MCI_ANNCANCELEVTS Announce Ser- Receive Near End 0 0
vice Canceled
Events
f3PtpMCIStatsSyncCancelledEvents MCI_SYNCCANCELLEVTS Sync Service Receive Near End 0 0
Canceled Events
f3PtpMCIStatsDelayRspCancelledEvents MCI_ Delay Response Receive Near End 0 0
DELAYRESPCANCELEVTS Service Canceled
Events
f3PtpMCIStatsDynamicSlavesLearnt MCI_ Dynamic Slaves Receive Near End 0 0
DYNSLAVESLEARNCOUNTS Learned Count
f3PtpMCIStatsDynamicSlavesDropped MCI_DYNSLAVESDROPPED Dynamic Slaves Receive Near End 0 0
Service Dropped

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 1003

Factory Default Configuration Settings

PTP Remote Slave Monitored Types

Refer to the following table for Remote Slave (Dynamic or Static) Threshold Crossing Alerts (TCAs) and their associated default settings. Also see
Remote Slave stats definitions in f3PtpMIB.

Table 117: PTP Remote Slave Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
15 Min./
SNMP statsEntry Monitored Type Definition Direction Location 1 Day
5Min.
f3PtpRemoteSlaveStatsAnnounceMsgsGen RS_ANNOUNCEMSGSGEN Announce Mes- Transmit Near End 0 0
sages Generated
f3PtpRemoteSlaveStatsSyncMsgsGen RS_SYNCMSGSGEN Sync Messages Transmit Near End 0 0
Generated
f3PtpRemoteSlaveStatsDelayRspMsgsGen RS_DELAYRESPMSGSGEN DelayResp mes- Transmit Near End 0 0
sages generated
f3PtpRemoteSlaveStatsSignallingMsgsGen RS_SIGNALMSGSGEN Signaling Mes- Transmit Near End 0 0
sages generated
f3PtpRemoteSlaveStatsSignallingMsgsRx RS_SIGNALMSGSRX Signaling Mes- Receive Near End 0 0
sages Received
f3PtpRemoteSlaveStatsDelayReqMsgsRx RS_DELAYREQMSGSRX Delay Req Mes- Receive Near End 0 0
sages Received
f3PtpRemoteSlaveStatsDelayReqMsgsDropped RS_ Delay Req Mes- Receive Near End 0 0
DELAYREQMSGSDROPPED sages Dropped
f3PtpRemoteSlaveStatsInvalidTLVLenDiscards RS_INVTLVLENDISCARDS PTP messages Receive Near End 0 0
with invalid PTP
TLV length
f3PtpRemoteSlaveStatsInvalidTLVTypeDiscards RS_INVTLVTYPEDISCARDS PTP messages Receive Near End 0 0
with unknown
PTP TLV type

1004 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 117: PTP Remote Slave Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
15 Min./
SNMP statsEntry Monitored Type Definition Direction Location 1 Day
5Min.
f3PtpRemoteSlaveStatsTimesAnnounceLeaseExp RS_ Times Announce Receive Near End 0 0
TIMESANNOUNCELEASEEXP lease duration
expired
f3PtpRemoteSlaveStatsTimesSyncLeaseExp RS_TIMESSYNCLEASEEXP Times Sync Receive Near End 0 0
lease duration
expired
f3PtpRemoteSlaveStatsTimesDelayRspLeaseExp RS_TIMESDELAYRESPEXP Times Delay_ Receive Near End 0 0
Resp lease dur-
ation expired

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 1005

Factory Default Configuration Settings

SOOC Monitored Types

Refer to the following table for Slave Only Ordinary Clock (SOOC) Threshold Crossing Alerts (TCAs) and their associated default settings. Also
see SOOC stats definitions in f3PtpMIB.

Table 118: Slave Only Ordinary Clock Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
15 Min./
SNMP statsEntry Monitored Type Definition Direction Location 1 Day
5Min.
f3PtpSOOCStats MgmtMsgsDiscarded PTPMGMTMSGSD PTP Management Receive Near End
Message Discards
f3PtpSOOCStats InvalidMsgLenDiscards PTPINVMSGLEND PTP Invalid Mes- Receive Near End
sage Length Dis-
cards
f3PtpSOOCStats UnknownMasterDiscards PTPUNKMASTERD PTP Unknown Receive Near End
Master Discards
f3PtpSOOCStatsUnknownDomainDiscards PTPUNKDOMAIND PTP Unknown Receive Near End
Domain Discards
f3PtpSOOCStatsMulticastAnnounceDiscards PTPMULTIANNOUNCED PTP Multicast Receive Near End
Announce Mes-
sage Discards
f3PtpSOOCStats OutOfSeqAnnounceMsgs PTPOOSANNOUNCES PTP Out Of Receive Near End
Sequence
Announce Mes-
sages
f3PtpSOOCStats MulticastSyncDiscards PTPMULTISYNCD PTP Multicast Receive Near End
Sync Message Dis-
cards
f3PtpSOOC StatsTwoStepSyncDiscards PTPTWOSTEPSYNCD PTP Two Step Receive Near End
Sync Message Dis-
cards

1006 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 118: Slave Only Ordinary Clock Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
15 Min./
SNMP statsEntry Monitored Type Definition Direction Location 1 Day
5Min.
f3PtpSOOCStats FollowupDiscards PTPFOLLOWUPSD PTP Follow-up Receive Near End
Message Discards
f3PtpSOOCStats DelayReqDiscards PTPDELAYREQSD PTP Delay_Req Receive Near End
Message Discards
f3PtpSOOCStats PDelayReqDiscards PTPPDELAYREQSD PTP PDelay_Req Receive Near End
Message Discards
f3PtpSOOCStats PDelayRspDiscards PTPPDELAYRSPSD PTP PDelay_Resp Receive Near End
Message Discards
f3PtpSOOCStats PDelayFollowupDiscards PTPPDELAYFOLLOWUPSD PTP PDelay Fol- Receive Near End
low-up Message
Discards
f3PtpSOOCStats InvalidTLVLenDiscards PTPINVTLVLENSD PTP Invalid TLV Receive Near End
Length Discards
f3PtpSOOCStats InvalidTLVTypeDiscards PTPINVTLVTYPESD PTP Invalid TLV Receive Near End
Type Discards
f3PtpSOOCStats AvgSyncPathDelay AVGSYNCPD Average Sync Path Receive Near End
Delay (nsec)
f3PtpSOOCStatsMinSyncPathDelay MINSYNCPD Minimum Sync Receive Near End
Path Delay (nsec)
f3PtpSOOCStats MaxSyncPathDelay MAXSYNCPD Maximum Sync Receive Near End
Path Delay (nsec)
f3PtpSOOCStats AvgSyncPDV AVGSYNCPDV Average Sync PDV Receive Near End
(nsec)
f3PtpSOOCStats MinSyncPDV MINSYNCPDV Minimum Sync Receive Near End
PDV (nsec)

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 1007

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 118: Slave Only Ordinary Clock Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
15 Min./
SNMP statsEntry Monitored Type Definition Direction Location 1 Day
5Min.
f3PtpSOOCStats MaxSyncPDV MAXSYNCPDV Maximum Sync Receive Near End
PDV (nsec)
f3PtpSOOCStats AvgMeanPathDelay AVGMEANPATHDELAY Average Mean Path Receive Near End
Delay (nsec)
f3PtpSOOCStats MinMeanPathDelay MINMEANPATHDELAY Minimum Mean Receive Near End
Path Delay (nsec)
f3PtpSOOCStats MaxMeanPathDelay MAXMEANPATHDELAY Maximum Mean Receive Near End
Path Delay (nsec)
f3PtpSOOCStats AvgOffsetFromMaster AVGOFM Average Offset Receive Near End
from Master (nsec)
f3PtpSOOCStats MinOffsetFromMaster MINOFM Minimum Offset Receive Near End
from Master (nsec)
f3PtpSOOCStats MaxOffsetFromMaster MAXOFM Maximum Offset Receive Near End
from Master (nsec)

1008 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

PTP Clock Monitored Types

The following performance parameters and associated default settings are for each of the thresholds which are supported on a PTP Clock (T-BC).
The following PMs are accessed via the Precision Time Protocol application when PTP software licensing is enabled and a Telecom Slave is
created. Also see PTP Clock stats definitions in f3PtpMIB.

Table 119: PTP Clock Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
15 Min./
Monitored Type SNMP statsEntry Definition Direction Location 1 Day
5 Min.
AVGSYNCPD f3PtpPTPClockStats Average Sync Path Receive Near End 0 0
AvgSyncPathDelay Delay (nsec)
MINSYNCPD f3PtpPTPClockStats Minimum Sync Path Receive Near End 0 0
MinSyncPathDelay Delay (nsec)
MAXSYNCPD f3PtpPTPClockStats Maximum Sync Path Receive Near End 0 0
MaxSyncPathDelay Delay (nsec)
AVGMEANPATHDELAY f3PtpPTPClockStats Average Mean Path Receive Near End 0 0
AvgMeanPathDelay Delay (nsec)
MINMEANPATHDELAY f3PtpPTPClockStats Minimum Mean Path Receive Near End 0 0
MinMeanPathDelay Delay (nsec)
MAXMEANPATHDELAY f3PtpPTPClockStats Maximum Mean Receive Near End 0 0
MaxMeanPathDelay Path Delay (nsec)
AVGOFM f3PtpPTPClockStats Average Offset From Receive Near End 0 0
AvgOffsetFromMaster Master (nsec)
MINOFM f3PtpPTPClockStats Minimum Offset Receive Near End 0 0
MinOffsetFromMaster From Master (nsec)
MAXOFM f3PtpPTPClockStats Maximum Offset Receive Near End 0 0
MaxOffsetFromMaster From Master (nsec)

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 1009

Factory Default Configuration Settings

PTP Port Monitored Types

The following performance parameters and associated default settings are for each of the thresholds which are supported on a PTP Port. The
following PMs are accessed via the Precision Time Protocol application when PTP software licensing is enabled and a Telecom Slave is created.
Also see PTP Port stats definitions in f3PtpMIB.

Table 120: PTP Port Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
15 Min./
Monitored Type SNMP statsEntry Definition Direction Location 1 Day
5 Min.
AVGANNOUNCERATE f3PtpPTPPortStats PTP Port Average Receive Near End 0 0
AVGANNOUNCERATE Announce Rate
AVGSYNCRATE f3PtpPTPPortStats AVGSYNCRATE PTP Port Average Receive Near End 0 0
Sync Rate
AVGDELAYREQRATE f3PtpPTPPortStats PTP Port Average Receive Near End 0 0
AVGDELAYREQRATE Delay Req Rate
AVGDELAYRESPRATE f3PtpPTPPortStats PTP Port Average Receive Near End 0 0
AVGDELAYRESPRATE Delay Resp Rate
PTPUNKDOMAIND f3PtpPTPPortStats PTP Port Mis- Receive Near End 0 0
PTPUNKDOMAIND match Domain Dis-
cards
MSGWRONGTYPE f3PtpPTPPortStatsMSGWRONGTYPE PTP Port Mes- Receive Near End 0 0
DSCRD DSCRD sage Wrong Type
Discards
PTPINVMSGLEND f3PtpPTPPortStats PTPINVMSGLEND PTP Port Mes- Receive Near End 0 0
sages Wrong
Length Discards
UNKNOWNMASTER f3PtpPTPPortStats PTP Port Receive Near End 0 0
DISCARDS UNKNOWNMASTER DISCARDS Unknown Master
Discards

1010 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 120: PTP Port Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
15 Min./
Monitored Type SNMP statsEntry Definition Direction Location 1 Day
5 Min.
MESSAGEMISC f3PtpPTPPortStats MESSAGEMISC Packets Dis- Receive Near End 0 0
DISCARDS DISCARDS carded By Mis-
cellaneous
Reason

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 1011

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Pass-through Flow Monitored Types

Refer to the following table for Pass-through Flow Threshold Crossing Alerts (TCAs) and their associated default settings. Also see Pass-through
Flow stats definitions in cmPerformanceMIB.

Table 121: Pass-through Flow Monitored Types and Default TCA

SNMP statsEntry Monitored Type Definition Direction Location 15 Min./ 5Min. 1 Day
cmFlowStatsABRA2N ABRPT12 Average Bit Rate Receive Near End 0 0
(PT12)
cmFlowStatsABRN2A ABRPT21 Average Bit Rate Transmit Near End 0 0
(PT21)
cmFlowStatsABRRLA2N ABRRLPT12 Average Bit Rate - Receive Near End 0 0
Rate Limited (PT12)
cmFlowStatsABRRLN2A ABRRLPT21 Average Bit Rate - Transmit Near End 0 0
Rate Limited (PT21)
cmFlowStatsABRRLRA2N ABRRLRPT12 Average Bit Rate - Receive Near End 0 0
Rate Limited and Rep-
licated (PT12)
cmFlowStatsBytesInA2N BPT12 Total Bytes In (PT12) Receive Near End 0 0
cmFlowStatsBytesInN2A BPT21 Total Bytes In (PT21) Transmit Near End 0 0
cmFlowStatsBytesOutA2N BOPT12 Total Bytes Out Receive Near End 0 0
(PT12)
cmFlowStatsBytesOutN2A BOPT21 Total Bytes Out Transmit Near End 0 0
(PT21)
cmFlowStatsES ES Errored Seconds Receive Near End 0 0
cmFlowStatsFMGA2N FMGPT12 Frames Marked Green Receive Near End 0 0
(PT12)
cmFlowStatsFMGN2A FMGPT21 Frames Marked Green Transmit Near End 0 0
(PT21)

1012 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 121: Pass-through Flow Monitored Types and Default TCA

SNMP statsEntry Monitored Type Definition Direction Location 15 Min./ 5Min. 1 Day
cmFlowStatsFMRDA2N FMRDPT12 Frames Marked Red Receive Near End 0 0
and Discarded (PT12)
cmFlowStatsFMRDN2A FMRDPT21 Frames Marked Red Transmit Near End 0 0
and Discarded (PT21)
cmFlowStatsFMYA2N FMYPT12 Frames Marked Yel- Receive Near End 0 0
low (PT12)
cmFlowStatsFMYN2A FMYPT21 Frames Marked Yel- Transmit Near End 0 0
low (PT21)
cmFlowStatsFTDA2N FTDPT12 Frames Tail Dropped Receive Near End 0 0
(PT12)
cmFlowStatsL2CPFD L2CPFD Layer 2 Control Pro- Receive Near End 0 0
tocol Frames Dis-
carded
cmFlowStatsSES SES Severely Errored Receive Near End 0 0
Seconds
cmFlowStatsUAS UAS Unavailable Seconds Receive Near End 10 10

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 1013

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Layer-three Flow Point Monitored Types

Refer to the following table for layer-three Flow Point Threshold Crossing Alerts (TCAs) and their associated default settings. Also see layer-three
Flow Point stats definitions in F3L3MIB

Table 122: Layer-three Flow Point Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
SNMP statsEntry Monitored Type Definition Direction Location 15 Min./ 5Min. 1 Day
f3L3FlowPointStatsFMG FMG Frames Marked Receive Near End 0 0
Green
f3L3FlowPointStatsFMY FMY Frame Makeed Yel- Receive Near End 0 0
low
f3L3FlowPointStatsFMRD FTD Frames Tail Dropped Transmit Near End 0 0
f3L3FlowPointStatsFTD FMRD Frames Marked Red Receive Near End 0 0
f3L3FlowPointStatsFragmentedDropAcl FRD Fragments Dropped Receive Near End 0 0
f3L3FlowPointStatsAclRuleDrop FDACL Frames Dropped by Receive Near End 0 0
ACL Rule
f3L3FlowPointStatsTtlEqual1Drop TTLD Packets Dropped, Receive Near End 0 0
Invalid TTL
f3L3FlowPointStatsFrameTx FrameTx Frames Tx Transmit Near End 0 0
f3L3FlowPointStatsFrameRx FrameRx Frames Rx Receive Near End 0 0
f3L3FlowPointStatsNoRouteDrop NoRouteDrop Packets Dropped, no Receive Near End 0 0
Active Route

1014 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Traffic IP Interface Monitored Types

Refer to the following table for Traffic IP Interface Threshold Crossing Alerts (TCAs) and their associated default settings. Also see Traffic IP
Interface stats definitions in F3L3MIB.

Table 123: Traffic IP Interface Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
Monitored
SNMP statsEntry Definition Direction Location 15 Min./ 5Min. 1 Day
Type
f3L3TrafficIpInterfaceStatsDhcpTx DHCPTX DHCP Tx Transmit Near End 0 0
f3L3TrafficIpInterfaceStatsDhcpRx DHCPRX DHCP Rx Receive Near End 0 0
f3L3TrafficIpInterfaceStatsIcmpTx ICMPTX ICMP Tx Transmit Near End 0 0
f3L3TrafficIpInterfaceStatsIcmpRx ICMPRX ICMP Rx Receive Near End 0 0
f3L3TrafficIpInterfaceStatsArpReqTx ARQTX ARP Request Tx Transmit Near End 0 0
f3L3TrafficIpInterfaceStatsArpReqRx ARQRX ARP Request Rx Receive Near End 0 0
f3L3TrafficIpInterfaceStatsArpReplyTx ARPTX ARP Reply Tx Transmit Near End 0 0
f3L3TrafficIpInterfaceStatsArpReplyRx ARPRX ARP Relay Rx Receive Near End 0 0

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 1015

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Layer-three Traffic ACL Rule Monitored Types

Refer to the following table for layer-three ACL Rule. Threshold Crossing Alerts (TCAs) and their associated default settings. Also see layer-two
and layer-three Traffic ACL Rule stats definitions in F3L3MIB.

Table 124: layer-two and layer-three Traffic ACL Rule Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
SNMP statsEntry Monitored Type Definition Direction Location 15 Min./ 5Min. 1 Day
f3L3AclRuleStatsRuleMatch RuleMatch ACL Rule Match Receive Near End 0 0

1016 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Layer-two A2N ACL Rule Monitored Types

Refer to the following table for layer-two A2N ACL Rule-based on a layer-three Flow Point. Threshold Crossing Alerts (TCAs) and their associated
default settings.

Also see layer-two and layer-three Traffic ACL Rule stats definitions in F3L3MIB

Table 125: Layer-two A2N ACL Rule Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
1
SNMP statsEntry Monitored Type Definition Direction Location 15 Min./ 5Min.
Day
f3L2A2NAclRuleStatsRuleMatch RuleMatch ACL Rule Match Receive Near End 0 0

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 1017

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Layer-two N2A ACL Rule Monitored Types

Refer to the following table for layer-two N2A ACL Rule Threshold Crossing Alerts (TCAs) and their associated default settings.

Also see layer-two and layer-three Traffic ACL Rule stats definitions in F3L3MIB.

Table 126: Layer-two N2A ACL Rule Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
SNMP statsEntry Monitored Type Definition Direction Location 15 Min./ 5Min. 1 Day
f3L2N2AAclRuleStatsRuleMatch RuleMatch ACL Rule Match Receive Near End 0 0

1018 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Mirror ACL Rule Monitor Types

Refer to the following table for Mirror ACL Rule Threshold Crossing Alerts (TCAs) and their associated default settings.

Also see layer-two and layer-three Mirror ACL Rule stats definitions in f3PortMirrorMIB.

Table 127: Layer-two N2A ACL Rule Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
SNMP statsEntry Monitored Type Definition Direction Location 15 Min./ 5Min. 1 Day
f3PortMirrorAclRuleStatsRuleMatch RuleMatch ACL Rule Match Receive Near End 0 0

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 1019

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Secure Flow Monitored Types

Refer to the following table for Secure Flow Threshold Crossing Alerts (TCAs) and their associated default settings.

Also see Secure Flow stats definitions in f3ConnectGuardMIB

Table 128: Secure Flow Monitored Types  and Default TCA Settings
SNMP statsEntry Monitored Type Definition Direction Location 15 Min./ 5Min. 1 Day
f3ConnectGuardFlowStats TxUntaggedPkt OUTPKTSUNTAGGED Out Packets Transmit Near End 0 0
Untagged
f3ConnectGuardFlowStats TxTooLongPkts OUTPKTSTOOLONG Out Packets Too Transmit Near End 0 0
Long
f3ConnectGuardFlowStats RxUntaggedPkts INPKTSUNTAGGED In Packets Receive Near End 0 0
Untagged
f3ConnectGuardFlowStats RxNotagPkts INPKTSNOTAG In Packets No Tag Receive Near End 0 0
f3ConnectGuardFlowStats RxBadtagPkts INPKTSBADTAG In Packets Bad Receive Near End 0 0
Tag
f3ConnectGuardFlowStats INPKTSUNKNOWNSCI In Packets Receive Near End 0 0
RxUnknownSCIPkts Unknown SCI
f3ConnectGuardFlow StatsRxNoSCIPkts INPKTSNOSCI In Packets No SCI Receive Near End 0 0
f3ConnectGuardFlow StatsRxNoSCIPkts INPKTSOVERRUN In Packets Over Receive Near End 0 0
Run

1020 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

TX Secure Channel Monitored Types

Refer to the following table for Secure Channel (RX SC) Threshold Crossing Alerts (TCAs) and their associated default settings.

Also see RX SC stats definitions in f3ConnectGuardMIB.

Table 129: TX Secure Channel Monitored Types  and Default TCA Settings
Monitored Type SNMP statsEntry Definition Direction Location 15 Min./ 5Min. 1 Day
f3ConnectGuardTxSCStats OUTPKTSPROTECTED Out Packets Pro- Transmit Near End 0 0
TxProtectedPkts tected
f3ConnectGuardTxSCStats OUTPKTSENCRYPTED Out Packets Encryp- Transmit Near End 0 0
TxEncryptedPkts ted
f3ConnectGuardTxSCStats OUTOCTETSPROTECTED Out Octets Pro- Transmit Near End 0 0
TxOctetsProtected tected
f3ConnectGuardTxSCStats OUTOCTETSENCRYPTED Out Octets Encryp- Transmit Near End 0 0
TxOctetsEncrypted ted

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 1021

Factory Default Configuration Settings

RX Secure Channel Monitored Types

Refer to the following table for RX Secure Channel (RX SC) Threshold Crossing Alerts (TCAs) and their associated default settings.

Also see RX SC stats definitions in f3ConnectGuardMIB

Table 130: RX Secure Channel Monitored Types  and Default TCA Settings
SNMP statsEntry Monitored Type Definition Direction Location 15 Min./ 5Min. 1 Day
f3ConnectGuardRxSCStats INPKTSUNUSEDSA In Packets Receive Near End 0 0
RxUnusedSAPkts Unused SA
f3ConnectGuardRxSCStats INPKTSNOUSINGSA In Packets No Receive Near End 0 0
RxNoUsingSAPkts Using SA
f3ConnectGuardRxSCStats RxLatePkts INPKTSLATE In Packets Late Receive Near End 0 0
f3ConnectGuardRxSCStats RxNotVal- INPKTSNOTVALID In Packets Not Receive Near End 0 0
idPkts Valid
f3ConnectGuardRxSCStats RxIn- INPKTSINVALID In Packets Invalid Receive Near End 0 0
validPkts
f3ConnectGuardRxSCStats INPKTSDELAYED In Packets Receive Near End 0 0
RxDelayedPkts Delayed
f3ConnectGuardRxSCStats INPKTSUNCHECKED In Packets Receive Near End 0 0
RxUncheckedPkts Unchecked
f3ConnectGuardRxSCStats RxOKPkts INPKTSOK In Packets OK Receive Near End 0 0
f3ConnectGuardRxSCStats RxOc- INOCTETSVALIDATED In Octets Val- Receive Near End 0 0
tetsValidated idated
f3ConnectGuardRxSCStats RxOc- INOCTETSDECRYPTED In Octets Decryp- Receive Near End 0 0
tetsDecrypted ted

1022 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

TX Secure Association Monitored Types

Refer to the following table for TX Association Channel (TX SA) Threshold Crossing Alerts (TCAs) and their associated default settings.

Also see TX SA stats definitions in f3ConnectGuardMIB

Table 131: TX Secure Association Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
SNMP statsEntry Monitored Type Definition Direction Location 15 Min./ 5Min. 1 Day
f3ConnectGuardTxSAStats OutPktsProtected Out Packets Pro- Transmit Near End N/A N/A
ProtectedPkts. tected
f3ConnectGuardTxSAStats OutPktsEncrypted Out Packets Encryp- Transmit Near End N/A N/A
EncryptedPkts. ted

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 1023

Factory Default Configuration Settings

RX Secure Association Monitored Types

Refer to the following table for RX Association Channel (RX SA) Threshold Crossing Alerts (TCAs) and their associated default settings.

Also see RX SA stats definitions in f3ConnectGuardMIB.

Table 132: RX Secure Association Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
SNMP statsEntry Monitored Type Definition Direction Location 15 Min./ 5Min. 1 Day
f3ConnectGuardRxSAStats InPktsUnusedSA In Packets Unused Receive Near End N/A N/A
UnusedSAPkts SA
f3ConnectGuardRxSAStats InPktsNotUsingSA In Packets Not Using Receive Near End N/A N/A
NoUsingSAPkts SA
f3ConnectGuardRxSAStats InPktsNotValid In Packets Not Valid Receive Near End N/A N/A
NotValidPkts
f3ConnectGuardRxSAStats InPktsInvalid In Packets Invalid Receive Near End N/A N/A
InvalidPkts
f3ConnectGuardRxSAStats InPktsOK In Packets OK Receive Near End N/A N/A
OKPkts

1024 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

TWAMP Monitored Types

TWAMP PM thresholds are viewed using Web-based management tool by selecting the
TWAMP icon or selecting TWAMP from the Applications menu, expanding the selection
tree, selecting the Session Sender entity, right clicking on a configured Session Sender
entity in the facility view pane and then selecting View Thresholds. To edit PM
thresholds, enter a right click on the Session Sender entity and select Edit Thresholds.
See the following table for ESA monitored types and default TCA settings.

Table 133: TWAMP Session Sender Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
Performance Default
SNMP statsEntry Definition
Parameter Threshold
f3TwampStatsAvgOneWayR2SAbsPDV AVG-ONEWAY- Average One Way 0
R2S-ABSPDV Reflector to Session
Sender Absolute Packet
Delay Variation
f3TwampStatsAvgOneWayR2SNegPDV AVG-ONEWAY- Average One Way 0
R2S-NEGPDV Reflector to Session
Sender Negative Packet
Delay Variation
f3TwampStatsAvgOneWayR2SPosPDV AVG-ONEWAY- Average One Way 0
R2S-POSPDV Reflector to Session
Sender Positive Packet
Delay Variation
f3TwampStatsAvgOneWayR2SPD AVG-ONEWAY- Average One Way 0
R2SPD Reflector to Session
Sender Packet Delay
f3TwampStatsAvgOneWayS2RAbsPDV AVG-ONEWAY- Average One Way Ses- 0
S2R-ABSPDV sion Sender to Reflector
Absolute Packet Delay
Variation
f3TwampStatsAvgOneWayS2RNegPDV AVG-ONEWAY- Average One Way Ses- 0
S2R-NEGPDV sion Sender to Reflector
Negative Packet Delay
Variation
f3TwampStatsAvgOneWayS2RPosPDV AVG-ONEWAY- Average One Way Ses- 0
S2R-POSPDV sion Sender to Reflector
Positive Packet Delay
Variation
f3TwampStatsAvgOneWayS2RPD AVG-ONEWAY- Average One Way Ses- 0
S2RPD sion Sender to Reflector
Packet Delay
f3TwampStatsAvgTwoWayPD AVG-TWOWAY- Average Two Way 0
PD Packet Delay

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 1025

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 133: TWAMP Session Sender Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
Performance Default
SNMP statsEntry Definition
Parameter Threshold
f3TwampStatsMaxOneWayR2SAbsPDV MAX-ONEWAY- Maximum One Way 0
R2S-ABSPDV Reflector to Session
Sender Absolute Packet
Delay Variation
f3TwampStatsMaxOneWayR2SNegPDV MAX-ONEWAY- Maximum One Way 0
R2S-NEGPDV Reflector to Session
Sender Negative Packet
Delay Variation
f3TwampStatsMaxOneWayR2SPosPDV MAX-ONEWAY- Maximum One Way 0
R2S-POSPDV Reflector to Session
Sender Positive Packet
Delay Variation
f3TwampStatsMaxOneWayR2SPD MAX-ONEWAY- Maximum One Way 0
R2SPD Reflector to Session
Sender Packet Delay
f3TwampStatsMaxOneWayS2RAbsPDV MAX-ONEWAY- Maximum One Way Ses- 0
S2R-ABSPDV sion Sender to Reflector
Absolute Packet Delay
Variation
f3TwampStatsMaxOneWayS2RNegPDV MAX-ONEWAY- Maximum One Way Ses- 0
S2R-NEGPDV sion Sender to Reflector
Negative Packet Delay
Variation
f3TwampStatsMaxOneWayS2RPosPDV MAX-ONEWAY- Maximum One Way Ses- 0
S2R-POSPDV sion Sender to Reflector
Positive Packet Delay
Variation
f3TwampStatsMaxOneWayS2RPD MAX-ONEWAY- Maximum One Way Ses- 0
S2RPD sion Sender to Reflector
Packet Delay
f3TwampStatsMaxTwoWayPD MAX-TWOWAY- Maximum Two Way 0
PD Packet Delay
f3TwampStatsMinOneWayR2SAbsPDV MIN-ONEWAY- Minimum One Way 0
R2S-ABSPDV Reflector to Session
Sender Absolute Packet
Delay Variation
f3TwampStatsMinOneWayR2SNegPDV MIN-ONEWAY- Minimum One Way 0
R2S-NEGPDV Reflector to Session
Sender Negative Packet
Delay Variation
f3TwampStatsMinOneWayR2SPosPDV MIN-ONEWAY- Minimum One Way 0
R2S-POSPDV Reflector to Session
Sender Positive Packet
Delay Variation

1026 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 133: TWAMP Session Sender Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
Performance Default
SNMP statsEntry Definition
Parameter Threshold
f3TwampStatsMinOneWayR2SPD MIN-ONEWAY- Minimum One Way 0
R2SPD Reflector to Session
Sender Packet Delay
f3TwampStatsMinOneWayS2RAbsPDV MIN-ONEWAY- Minimum One Way Ses- 0
S2R-ABSPDV sion Sender to Reflector
Absolute Packet Delay
Variation
f3TwampStatsMinOneWayS2RNegPDV MIN-ONEWAY- Minimum One Way Ses- 0
S2R-NEGPDV sion Sender to Reflector
Negative Packet Delay
Variation
f3TwampStatsMinOneWayS2RPosPDV MIN-ONEWAY- Minimum One Way Ses- 0
S2R-POSPDV sion Sender to Reflector
Positive Packet Delay
Variation
f3TwampStatsMinOneWayS2RPD MIN-ONEWAY- Minimum One Way Ses- 0
S2RPD sion Sender to Reflector
Packet Delay
f3TwampStatsMinTwoWayPD MIN-TWOWAY- Minimum Two Way 0
PD Packet Delay
f3TwampStatsNumOneWayR2SAbsPDV NUM-ONEWAY- Number of One Way 0
R2S-ABSPDV Reflector to Session
Sender Absolute Packet
Delay Variation
f3TwampStatsNumOneWayR2SNegPDV NUM-ONEWAY- Number of One Way 0
R2S-NEGPDV Reflector to Session
Sender Negative Packet
Delay Variation
f3TwampStatsNumOneWayR2SPosPDV NUM-ONEWAY- Number of One Way 0
R2S-POSPDV Reflector to Session
Sender Positive Packet
Delay Variation
f3TwampStatsNumOneWayS2RAbsPDV NUM-ONEWAY- Number of One Way Ses- 0
S2R-ABSPDV sion Sender to Reflector
Absolute Packet Delay
Variation
f3TwampStatsNumOneWayS2RNegPDV NUM-ONEWAY- Number of One Way Ses- 0
S2R-NEGPDV sion Sender to Reflector
Negative Packet Delay
Variation
f3TwampStatsNumOneWayS2RPosPDV NUM-ONEWAY- Number of One Way Ses- 0
S2R-POSPDV sion Sender to Reflector
Positive Packet Delay
Variation

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 1027

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 133: TWAMP Session Sender Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
Performance Default
SNMP statsEntry Definition
Parameter Threshold
f3TwampStatsOutOfSeqErrs OUTOFSEQ- Out of Sequence Errors 0
ERRS
f3TwampStatsR2SLostPkts R2S-LOST-PKTS Reflector to Session 0
Sender Lost Packets
f3TwampStatsR2SPkts R2S-PKTS Reflector to Session 0
Sender Packets
f3TwampStatsR2SSyncErrs R2S-SYNC- Reflector to Session 0
ERRORS Sender Sync Errors
f3TwampStatsS2RLostPkts S2R-LOST-PKTS Session Sender to 0
Reflector Lost Packets
f3TwampStatsS2RPkts S2R-PKTS Session Sender to 0
Reflector Packets
f3TwampStatsS2RSyncErrs S2R-SYNC- Session Sender to 0
ERRORS Reflector Sync Errors
f3TwampStatsSeqGaps SEQ-GAPS Number of Gaps in 0
Sequence Numbers
f3TwampStatsSumOneWayR2SAbsPDV SUM-ONEWAY- Sum of One Way 0
R2S-ABSPDV Reflector to Session
Sender Absolute Packet
Delay Variation
f3TwampStatsSumOneWayR2SNegPDV SUM-ONEWAY- Sum of One Way 0
R2S-NEGPDV Reflector to Session
Sender Negative Packet
Delay Variation
f3TwampStatsSumOneWayR2SPosPDV SUM-ONEWAY- Sum of One Way 0
R2S-POSPDV Reflector to Session
Sender Positive Packet
Delay Variation
f3TwampStatsSumOneWayR2SPD SUM-ONEWAY- Sum of One Way 0
R2SPD Reflector to Session
Sender Packet Delay
f3TwampStatsSumOneWayS2RAbsPDV SUM-ONEWAY- Sum of One Way Ses- 0
S2R-ABSPDV sion Sender to Reflector
Absolute Packet Delay
Variation
f3TwampStatsSumOneWayS2RNegPDV SUM-ONEWAY- Sum of One Way Ses- 0
S2R-NEGPDV sion Sender to Reflector
Negative Packet Delay
Variation
f3TwampStatsSumOneWayS2RPosPDV SUM-ONEWAY- Sum of One Way Ses- 0
S2R-POSPDV sion Sender to Reflector
Positive Packet Delay
Variation

1028 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 133: TWAMP Session Sender Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
Performance Default
SNMP statsEntry Definition
Parameter Threshold
f3TwampStatsSumOneWayS2RPD SUM-ONEWAY- Sum of One Way Ses- 0
S2RPD sion Sender to Reflector
Packet Delay
f3TwampStatsSumOfSqOneWayR2SAbsPDV SUM-SQ- Sum of Squares One 0
ONEWAY-R2S- Way Reflector to Ses-
ABSPDV sion Sender Absolute
Packet Delay Variation
f3TwampStatsSumOfSqOneWayR2SNegPDV SUM-SQ- Sum of Squares of One 0
ONEWAY-R2S- Way Reflector to Ses-
NEGPDV sion Sender Negative
Packet Delay Variation
f3TwampStatsSumOfSqOneWayR2SPosPDV SUM-SQ- Sum of Squares of One 0
ONEWAY-R2S- Way Reflector to Ses-
POSPDV sion Sender Positive
Packet Delay Variation
f3TwampStatsSumOfSqOneWayR2SPD SUM-SQ- Sum of Squares of One 0
ONEWAY-R2SPD Way Reflector to Ses-
sion Sender Packet
Delay
f3TwampStatsSumOfSqOneWayS2RAbsPDV SUM-SQ- Sum of Squares of One 0
ONEWAY-S2R- Way Session Sender to
ABSPDV Reflector Absolute
Packet Delay Variation
f3TwampStatsSumOfSqOneWayS2RNegPDV SUM-SQ- Sum of Squares of One 0
ONEWAY-S2R- Way Session Sender to
NEGPDV Reflector Negative
Packet Delay Variation
f3TwampStatsSumOfSqOneWayS2RPosPDV SUM-SQ- Sum of Squares of One 0
ONEWAY-S2R- Way Session Sender to
POSPDV Reflector Positive
Packet Delay Variation
f3TwampStatsSumOfSqOneWayS2RPD SUM-SQ- Sum of Squares of One 0
ONEWAY-S2RPD Way Session Sender to
Reflector Packet Delay
f3TwampStatsSumOfSqTwoWayPD SUM-SQ- Sum of Squares of Two 0
TWOWAY-PD Way Packet Delay
f3TwampStatsSumTwoWayPD SUM-TWOWAY- Sum of Two Way Packet 0
PD Delay

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 1029

Factory Default Configuration Settings

VXLAN Segment Monitored Types

Refer to the following table for VXLAN Segment Threshold Crossing Alerts (TCAs) and their associated default settings. Also see layer-three
VXLAN Segment stats definitions in f3VXLANMIB.

Table 134: VXLAN Segment Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
SNMP statsEntry Monitored Type Definition Direction Location 15 Min./ 5Min. 1 Day
f3VXLANSegmentStats
TTLD TTL Equal 0 Drop Receive Near End 1 0
TtlEqual0Drop
f3VXLANSegmentStats
NRD No Route Drop Transmit Near End 2 0
NoRouteDrop
f3VXLANSegmentStats
TD Tagged Drop Receive Near End 3 0
TaggedDrop
f3VXLANSegmentStats
DIMD Destination IP Mismatch Drop Receive Near End 4 0
DestIpMismatchDrop
f3VXLANSegmentStats
FD Fragmented Drop Receive Near End 5 0
FragmentedDrop
f3VXLANSegmentStats
DMAC2DIPTFD DMAC2DIP Table Full Drop Receive Near End 6 0
Dmac2DipTableFullDrop

1030 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Port Mirroring Configurations and Rules

Refer to the following table for Port Mirroring settings and associated rules.

Table 135: Port Mirroring Configuration Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults

Egress Monitor Flowpoint

Identification
Egress Monitor FP
ID Egress Monitor Flowpoint Entity Identifier. 1 or 2
(Create only)
Phrases or words to helping identify the Egress Monitor
Name 0-256 characters
Flowpoint.
Configuration
Associated Interface The traffic Interface for the Egress Monitor FP to associate with. available ports to
It can be an EVPL Access port, EVPL Access LAG , or Network
(Create only) monitor.
Port, or Network LAG.
Tag Operation
Whether to Push STag to the monitored Frames before accept
STag Control
transmitting them to the Monitor Entity. deny
The VLAN tag format is VID-PRIO. Valid VLAN ID values are 1 - VLAN-Pro
STag VLAN 4095. Valid Priority values are 0 - 7. The default is portnum-0. For
instance, the default is 1-0. 1-0
Whether to Push CTag to the monitored Frames before accept
CTag Control
transmitting them to the Monitor Entity. deny
The VLAN tag format is VID-PRIO. Valid VLAN ID values are 1 - VLAN-Pro
CTag VLAN 4095. Valid Priority values are 0 - 7. The default is portnum-0. For
instance, the default is 1-0. 1-0
Shaping
The Committed Information Rate.
CIR 0-1,000,000,000
Bandwidth committed to the Egress Monitor Flowpoint
The Excess Information Rate.
EIR 0-1,000,000,000
Burst Bandwidth to the Egress Monitor Flowpoint
COS Class of Service. 0-7
10-15360
Buffer Size Buffer reserved for the Egress Monitor Flowpoint
128
Port Mirror Session
Identification
Mirror Session EID Mirror Session Entity Identifier. Unique number associated with
1 or 2
(Create only) this tunnel entity.
State

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 1031

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 135: Port Mirroring Configuration Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Specify how to handle the packets which does not match ACL accept
ACL Miss Action
rules or when there are no ACL rules in session. deny
The source port to me monitored in the mirror session. A source
port (Either EPL or EVPL) must a physical Access Port or
Source Port Network port, it cannot be available ports to
(Create only) monitor.
l A LAG, or
l Ethernet Backplane Port EID
The entity used to monitorring. The Frames are mirrored from the
source port to the Monitor Entity. It can be a Port or Egress available ports or Egress
Monitor Entity Monitor Flowpoint. Monitor Flowpoint to
(Create only)
An Access Port configured as a Monitor Port in a Mirror Session monitor.
cannot be used for other functions.
Source Port Dir- Ingress
ection The direction in which the Source Port is monitored.
(Create only) Egress
Whether to add a timestamp to mirrored frames before the disabled
Timestamp Control
frames are mirrored to the Monitor Entity. enabled
Whether to truncate the Frames before transmitting them to the disabled
Truncation Control
monitor port. FCS is recalculated based on the truncated length. enabled
Length of mirrored frame truncation when truncation is
ENABLED. Possible values are 64 bytes to 1500 bytes. All
mirrored frames transmitted on the Monitor Port will have a frame 64-1500
Truncation Length
length less-than-or-equal-to the Truncation Length. The frame 200
length is from first byte of the Destination MAC Address to last
bye of the newly calculated FCS.
Mirror ACL Rule
Identification
Index Egress Monitor Flowpoint. Entity Identifier automatically
1-127
(create only) indexes to the first available Index number.
Phrases or words to helping identify the Egress Monitor
Alias 0-256 characters
Flowpoint.
State
Administrative The Adminstrative Sate to be assinged to the Egress Monitor IS
State Flowpoint. Unassigned
Rule Configuration
How to handle the packets which meets the criteria defined in an
ACL rule. Accept

Action l When the action is Accept, traffic meets criteria in the ACL
rule is passed through.
l When the action is Deny, traffic meets criteria in the ACL Deny
rule is dropped.

1032 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 135: Port Mirroring Configuration Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
The precedence of the indiVIDual rule, when a frame meets two
more ACL rules. There action specifed in the one with highest
Rule Priority Priority is taken. 0-65535

A higher number means higher priority

MAC Address
checkbox
Src Addr Control Whether to enable filtering frames with source MAC address.
cleared
The source MAC address to be used as a criterion for filtering.
Src Addr This parameter is entered only when source MAC filtering is A valid MAC address.
enabled.
A six-octet string, delim-
The MASK to be used together with the MAC address for fil- ited with colons, com-
Src Addr Mask tering. This parameter is entered only when source MAC filtering prising leading fs and
is enabled zero or more 0s at the
end.
checkbox
Dest Addr Control Whether to enable filtering frames with source MAC address.
cleared
The destination MAC address to be used as a criterion for fil-
Dest Addr tering. This parameter is entered only when detination MAC fil- A valid MAC address.
tering is enabled.
a six-octet string, delim-
The MASK to be used together with the MAC address for fil- ited with colons, com-
Dest Addr Mask tering. This parameter is entered only when destination MAC prising leading fs and
address filtering is enabled. zero or more 0s at the
end.
EtherType
checkbox
Control Whether to enable filtering frames by its Ethertype
cleared
The Ethernet Type to be filtered. This parameter is entered only
EtherType 0-65535
when Ethernet type filtering is enabled.
Outer VLAN Tag
checkbox
VLAN ID Control Whether to enable filtering frames by its Outer VLAN VID
cleared
The low end of the VID segment for filtering. This parameter is
VLAN ID Low Limit 0-4095
entered only when Outer VLAN VID filtering is enabled.
The high end of the VID segment for filtering. This parameter is
VLAN ID High Limit 0-4095
entered only when Outer VLAN VID filtering is enabled.
checkbox
PCP Control Whether to enable filtering frames by its Outer VLAN PCP
cleared
The low end of the PCP segment for filtering. This parameter is
PCP Low Limit 0-7
entered only when Outer VLAN PCP filtering is enabled.
The high end of the PCP segment for filtering. This parameter is
PCP High Limit 0-7
entered only when Outer VLAN PCP filtering is enabled.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 1033

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 135: Port Mirroring Configuration Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults

Whether to enable filtering frames by its Outer VLAN Drop Eli- checkbox
DEI Control
gibility Indicator (DEI) attribute. cleared
DEI The Drop Eligible Indicator in the Outer VLAN. 0, 1
Inner VLAN Tag
checkbox
VLAN ID Control Whether to enable filtering frames by its Inner VLAN VID
cleared
The low end of the VID segment for filtering. This parameter is
VLAN ID Low Limit 0-4095
entered only when Inner VLAN VID filtering is enabled.
The high end of the VID segment for filtering. This parameter is
VLAN ID High Limit 0-4095
entered only when Inner VLAN VID filtering is enabled.
checkbox
PCP Control Whether to enable filtering frames by its Inner VLAN PCP
cleared
The low end of the PCP segment for filtering. This parameter is
PCP Low Limit 0-7
entered only when Inner VLAN PCP filtering is enabled.
The high end of the PCP segment for filtering. This parameter is
PCP High Limit 0-7
entered only when Inner VLAN PCP filtering is enabled.

1034 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

ESA Options and Rules

Etherjack Service Assurance (ESA) provisioning and reporting is invoked by selecting
the ESA icon on the Tool Bar or selecting ESA from the Applications menu and
expanding the system folder, NE-1 entity and GE11xPro entity in the Selection Tree.
Creating Reflectors and Probes are performed by entering a right click on the Reflectors
or Probes entities and selecting Create Reflector or Create Probe.

Editing or Deleting an existing Reflector or Probe is performed by expanding the Probes

or Reflectors entity (nested Probe and Reflector entities are displayed), entering a right
click on the desired Probe or Reflector entity, and selecting Edit/Delete Reflector/Probe.
(Any ESA Schedule associated with the Probe must be deleted prior to deleting a Probe.)

See Table 136 and Table 137 for ESA Reflector and Probe configuration settings,
respectively. See Table 138 for ESA Schedule configuration settings. Default settings
are identified in bold.

Table 136: ESA Reflector Configuration Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults

Identification
Reflector Index An Identifier value used to uniquely identify this ESA
1-255
(Create Reflector only) Reflector.
Reflector identifier (1 to 15 characters - no spaces, and
Reflector ID must contain only alpha-numeric characters). This is a 1 to 15 characters
(Create Reflector only) user specified unique identifier associated with a (blank)
Reflector and must be provided.
Reflector Identification
Source Port Reflector source port. Points to the Port to which the
(drop-down list of
ESA Reflector is attached, i.e., on which the service to
(Create Reflector only) available ports)
be monitored resides.
IP Information
Reflector IP address. This is a user specified IP
Reflector IP Address address, uniquely associated with an ESA Reflector
instance. The IP address must not overlap with any [Link]
(Create Reflector only) non-ESA related subnets provisioned within the
GE11xPro. (See Note.)
Mask
Reflector Subnet mask. [Link]
(Create Reflector only)
None
Priority Map Mode Priority Map Mode. TOS
DSCP
Specifies the Priority Value for ESA Reflector Priority N/A
Priority Map Mode. Only applicable if Priority Map Mode is set 0-7 (TOS)
to TOS or DSCP. 0-63 (DSCP)

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 1035

Factory Default Configuration Settings

If the IP address assigned to the Reflector collides with an IP address

used by the customer traffic, all packets destined for that IP address
are routed up to the Network Processor.

Table 137: ESA Probe Configuration Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults

Identification
Probe Index An Identifier value used to uniquely identify this ESA
1-255
(Create Probe only) Probe.
Probe identifier (1 to 15 characters - no spaces, and must
Probe Name contain only alpha-numeric characters). This is a user 1 to 15 characters
(Create Probe only) specified unique identifier associated with a Probe and (blank)
must be provided.
Enter an alias for this probe as a customized name. This 0-128 characters
Alias parameter is not mandatory in probe creation. User can
edit it after probe creation. (blank)
Probe Identification
Protocol. UDP Echo and ICMP Echo measure the round-
UDP Echo
trip delay. ICMP Timestamp measures the round-trip
delay and one-way delay as well as one-way jitter. ICMP Echo
Protocol Y.1731 links ESA to CFM MEPs for facilitating ETH-LM
Frame Loss Measurements and ETH-DM Delay Meas- ICMP Timestamp
(Create Probe only) urements, as well as ETH-SLM Frame Synthetic Loss
Measurement and Delay Measurement Message. Select- Y.1731 LM/DM
ing a Y.1731 protocol changes the create options. (See
Y.1731 only options below.) Y.1731 SLM/DMM
(drop-down list of
Source Port Probe source port. Points to the Port to which the ESA available ports)
Probe is attached, i.e., on which the service to be mon-
(Create Probe only) itored resides. ACCESS PORT-1-
1-1-3
Service End Points
Source (Probe) IP address. This is a user specified IP
address, uniquely associated with an ESA Probe
Probe IP Address instance. This is the IP address to be used in UDP Echo,
ICMP Echo or ICMP Timestamp request. The IP address [Link]
(Create Probe only)1 must not overlap with any non-ESA related subnet pro-
visioned within GE11xPro. Not available if protocol is
Y.1731.

1If the IP address assigned to the Probe collides with an IP address used by the customer traffic, all packets
destined for that IP address are routed up to the Network Processor.

1036 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 137: ESA Probe Configuration Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Probe Mask
Probe Subnet mask. Not available if protocol is Y.1731. [Link]
(Create Probe only)
Destination (Reflector) IP address. This is a user spe-
Reflector IP Address cified IP address, which is the ESA Reflector’s IP
IP address
address. This is the IP address to be used in UDP Echo,
(Create Probe only) (blank)
ICMP Echo or ICMP Timestamp request. Not available if
protocol is Y.1731.
Multicast MAC Enable or disable SLM and DMM multicast destination
Disabled
MAC. If disabled, user need to specify the destination
(Create Y.1731 MEP manually; if enabled, no destination MEPs need to
SLM/DMM only) Enabled
be specified.
Destination Type Select the SLM monitoring [Link] option is auto- Point to Point
(Create Y.1731 matically set to Point to Multipoint when Multicast MAC
SLM/DMM only) is set to Enabled. Point to Multipoint
Source MEP Drop-down list of MEPs available on the selected inter-
List of MEPs
(Create Y.1731 only) face.
Destination MEP Type MAC Address
Drop-down list of Destination Types.
(Create Y.1731 only) MEP Id
Destination MAC Destination MAC Address if Destination Type is MAC [Link]
Address Address. This option will disappear if the specified
(Create Y.1731 only) Destination MEP Type is MEP Id. (MEP ID)
Destination MEP List (Y.1731 SLM/DMM only, with Multicast MAC =Disabled, Destination Type =
Point to Multipoint)
Enter the ID of a destination MEP. Click on Add to add it 1-8191
MEP ID
to the Destination MEP List. (blank)
(MAC address)
Enter the MAC address of a destination MEP. Click on
MAC Address Add to add it to the Destination MEP List. All-zero [Link]
address, broadcast or multicast address are not allowed.

(a list of MEP IDs

Shows a list of destination MEPs added in form of MEP and/or MEP MAC
Members ID and/or MAC Address. Default is blank. Select an entry addresses)
and click on Delete to remove it.
blank
Traffic Parameters (Not available if protocol is Y.1731)
Specifies whether the service is VLAN Tagged or Untagged
Packet Type1
Untagged. VLAN Tagged

1Oneway options are only available if ICMP timestamp is set for protocol type. A Probe that is assigned to an
active schedule cannot be edited.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 1037

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 137: ESA Probe Configuration Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Virtual LAN identifier. Provides the ability to monitor a 0 to 4096
VLAN ID{Superscript} specific service. This option is only applicable when
Packet Type is set to VLAN Tagged. N/A
VLAN Priority{Super- Defines the VLAN Priority. This option is only applicable 0 to 7
script} when Packet Type is set to VLAN Tagged. N/A
Identifies the priority classification mechanism for ESA None
Priority Mode traffic. TOS stands for Type Of Service, and DSCP is TOS
Diffserv Codepoint. DSCP
0 to 63 (DSCP)
or
Priority{Superscript} Specifies the ESA service priority bits. 0 to 7 (TOS)

N/A
Set the packet size (in bytes) of the Service Assurance 64-1518 (Untagged)
Packets. The L3 packet size is up to 1500 Bytes, thus, if
Packet Type is Untagged, the maximum Service Assur- 104
Packet Size{Superscript}
ance Packet size is 1518 Bytes; if Packet Type is VLAN
Tagged (one tag pushed), the maximum Service Assur- 68 - 1522 (VLAN
ance Packet size is 1522 Bytes. Tagged)

Packets per Sample 1- 99999

Set the number of packets per sample.
{Superscript} 500
Packet Interval{Super- 1-99999
Interval between packets (in milliseconds).
script} 100
Dead Interval{Super- Setting time (in seconds) after all packets within a 1-99999
script} sample are sent. Not available if protocol is Y.1731. 10
Set the amount of time to wait for a response (in 1-99999
Response Timeout
seconds). Packets received after this timeout are con-
{Superscript} 5
sidered lost. Not available if protocol is Y.1731.
Service Parameters (Only available if protocol is Y.1731.)
Enable or disable Multi COS. If Multi COS is enabled, the
Multi COS Disabled
other Service Parameter settings are entered for each
(Y.1731 only) COS selected as Active by clicking on the Active check
Enabled
box next to each COS in the table.
COS COS for the Y.1731 Probe if Multi COS is disabled. Only
COS 0 - COS 7
(Y.1731 only) available if protocol is Y.1731.
Delay Measurement packet size for Y.1731 DM Proble;
Delay Measurement Message packet size for Y.1731
DM Frame Size LM/DM. DMMs are normally 64 bytes, but can be made 64-2000
(LM/DM probe only) larger by adding a Data TLV padded with all zeros. LMMs 128
are fixed length by standard. Only available if protocol is
Y.1731. SLMs are sent as defined.

1038 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 137: ESA Probe Configuration Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Synthetic Loss Measurement/Delay Measurement Mes- 10 Milliseconds
sage Interval. Only available if protocol is Y.1731. 2
100 Milliseconds
(SLM/DMM) Interval SOAMs can be running at the interval of 10 ms, 16
SOAMs at the interval of 100 ms, and 256 SOAMs at the 1 Second
(LM/DM probe only) interval of 1 second. These numbers can not be reached
10 Seconds
at one time since the total number supported is 128/256
for GE112Pro/GE114Pro series. 1 Minute
Synthetic Loss Measuremen. Only available if protocol is 10 Milliseconds
SLM Interval Y.1731. 2 SOAMs can be running at the interval of 10 ms, 100 Milliseconds
16 SOAMs at the interval of 100 ms, and 256 SOAMs at 1 Second
(Y.1731 only) the interval of 1 second. Ttotal number supported is 10 Seconds
128/256 for GE112Pro/GE114Pro series. 1 Minute
Synthetic Loss Measurement/Delay Measurement Mes- 10 Milliseconds
sage Interval. Only available if protocol is Y.1731. 2
100 Milliseconds
DMM Interval SOAMs can be running at the interval of 10 ms, 16
SOAMs at the interval of 100 ms, and 256 SOAMs at the 1 Second
(Y.1731 only) interval of 1 second. These numbers can not be reached
10 Seconds
at one time since the total number supported is 128/256
for GE112Pro/GE114Pro series. 1 Minute
Availability FLR
Threshold Availability Frame Loss Ratio (FLR) in milli-percent. This
50000 (m%)
parameter is MEF 35 compliant.
(Y.1731 only)
FLR Delta T (LM Inter-
vals) DeltaT in number of LM intervals. This parameter is MEF 1 - 1000000
35 compliant. 10
(Y.1731 only)
Consecutive Delta Ts
For Availability Number of consecutive Delta Ts to declare availability or 1 - 1000
unavailability. This parameter is MEF 35 compliant. 10
(Y.1731 only)
History Configuration
History Bins Number of History Bins (up to a maximum of 32 bins). 1 to 32

(Create Probe only) This is the amount of time between history bins. 8
History Distribution Bins Number of History Distribution Bins (up to a maximum of 1 to 32

(Create Probe only) 32 bins). 8

1 Minute
History Interval 5 Minutes
History Interval (in minutes). 10 Minutes
(Create Probe only) 15 Minutes
60 Minutes
History Distribution Interval (in minutes). This is the 1 Minute
History Distribution amount of time between history distribution bins. 5 Minutes
Interval
10 Minutes
(Create Probe only) 15 Minutes
60 Minutes

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 1039

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 137: ESA Probe Configuration Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults

Statistics and Distribution

Min.{Superscript}
-2147483647 to
Round Trip Delay, One Minimum delay threshold (in microseconds). The entry 2147483647
Way Tx Delay, must be less than the entry for Max. Round Trip Delay.
Valid entry is -2147483647 to 2147483647. Default is 0
One Way Rx Delay
One Way Tx Jitter, or dependent on the type of statistics and distribution.
-50
One Way Rx Jitter
Max.{Superscript}
-2147483647 to
Round Trip Delay, One Maximum delay threshold (in microseconds). The entry 2147483647
Way Tx Delay, One must be greater than the entry for Min. Round Trip Delay.
Valid entry is -2147483647 to 2147483647. Default is 100
Way Rx Delay,
One Way Tx Jitter, or dependent on the type of statistics and distribution.
50
One Way Rx Jitter
Bins{Superscript}

Round Trip Delay, One

Way Tx Delay, One Number of bins. 1-10
Way Rx Delay, One
Way Tx Jitter, or One
Way Rx Jitter

1040 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Scheduled ESA Activity Settings

The following section describes scheduled ESA activities option settings. A scheduled
ESA is invoked by selecting the ESA icon on the Tool Bar or selecting ESA from the
Applications menu, expanding the system folder in the Selection Tree, entering a right
click on Schedules and selecting Create Schedule. Default settings are identified in bold.
Up to 10 Scheduled ESA groups may be created.

Once a Scheduled ESA has been created, options available when entering a right click on
the ESA Entity ID in the Selection Tree are: Delete Schedule, Suspend Schedule,
Resume Schedule and Edit Schedule. To delete an activity, you must first Suspend the
activity. To edit an activity, you must ensure that the activity is in “Active” status.

Table 138: Scheduled ESA Configuration Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults

Identification
Schedule Index An Identifier value used to uniquely identify this
ESA [Link] is automatically indexed, 1 - 255
(Create Schedule only) but is user editable.
Activity identifier (1 to 15 ASCII characters). This
up to 15 characters
Activity ID is a user specified unique identifier associated
(blank)
with a Probe, and is not a mandatory entry.
Schedule Parameters
Define schedule type as a one time or periodic One Shot
Schedule Type
execution. Periodic
Activate either an immediate ESA or future Now
Start Time Buttons
(scheduled) ESA. Future
Specifies the interval between subsequent runs
Periodic Interval (secs) (in seconds). This option is only available if Sched- 1 - 4,294,967,295 (sec)
ule Type of Periodic is selected.
Define the duration as continuous or a fixed time Forever
Duration Buttons (in seconds). Only applicable if Schedule Type of
One Shot is selected. Fixed
Define the duration in seconds. Valid entries are 0
through 9,999,999,999 (seconds). However, when 1 - 9,999,999,999 (sec)
Duration (secs) the entered value is equal to or larger than
4,294,967,295, the system will automatically (blank)
Entry Window
save the duration to “Forever”.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 1041

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 138: Scheduled ESA Configuration Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
The date in format: yyyy-mm-dd and the time.
When cursor is placed in data entry window and
mouse click is entered, a calendar selection
yyyy-mm-dd
appears, allowing date selection. Entry selection
must be the current date or greater. This option is
only applicable if Future start time is selected.
Define the duration in hours, minutes and seconds
Start Time Entry Windows
in format: hh:mm:ss (24-hour clock time entry).
When cursor is placed in data entry window and
mouse click is entered, a start time drop down
hh:mm:ss
selectable menu appears, in 15 minute segments.
Entry selection must be greater than the current
time. This option is only applicable if Future start
time is selected.
Selects the Probes that belong to this ESA sched-
ule. To add a Probe, select a Probe from the
Schedule Probes list. Multiple Probes may be
selected. Probes may be deselected by clicking
on the Probe once again before hitting the OK but-
Any available probes will
ton. Only previously created Probes that are not
be displayed in the
Schedule Probes used for another Scheduled Activity are available
Schedule Probes list as a
for selection. Once a schedule has been created,
checkbox selection
user is still allowed to edit, given that the schedule
is in “Active” status, not in “Completed” or “Initial”
status. To restart a “Completed” or “Initial” sched-
ule, user must delete it and re-create with the
desired new parameters.

1042 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

CFM Configuration Options and Rules

The following section describes Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) option settings.
CFM configuration options are created in the following order:

l Configure System Default MD Parameters

l Configure Server MEP Parameters
l Configure CFM VLAN Table
l Configure Maintenance Domain
l Configure Maintenance Association Network
l Configure Maintenance Association Component
l Configure Maintenance End Point
l Initiate Loopback Message
l Initiate Link Trace Message

In addition to configuring CFM options, alarm attributes are editable when the CFM
application is selected (see CFM Maintenance End Point Alarms).

Configure System Default MD Parameters

System Default Maintenance Domain (MD) level parameters may be created by
selecting the CFM icon on the Tool Bar or selecting CFM from the Applications menu,
expanding the system folder in the Selection Tree, entering a right click on the System
entity and selecting Edit System Default MD Level. The Default MD may be edited by
entering a right click on the desired Default MD entity and selecting Edit.

Table 139: Configure Default MD Parameters Settings

System Level Default MD Description / Option Settings /
Parameter Parameter Applicable Rules Defaults

Configuration
System Default MD System or specified Maintenance
Level 0 to 7
Level Domain default MD level.
MIP Creation Control. If Default is None
selected, the parameters set in the
System MIP MIP Creation Con-
Default Maintenance Domain will be Default
Creation Control trol
used for MD Level, MIP Creation Con-
trol and Default Sender ID Control. Explicit

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 1043

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Configure Server MEP Parameters

Server MEP level parameters may be created by selecting the CFM icon on the Tool Bar
or selecting CFM from the Applications menu, expanding the system folder in the
Selection Tree, entering a right click on the Server MEPs entity and selecting Create
Server MEP. An existing Server MEP may be edited by entering a right click on the
desired Server MEP entity and selecting Edit Configuration. To delete a Server MEP,
right click on the Server MEP entity and select Delete.

The following MEP provisioning options and rules are described for each option setting
available for:

Table 140: Configure Server MEP Parameters Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults

Identification
Server MEP Index

(Create Sever MEP Index number assigned to a specific Server MEP entity. 1 to 255
Only)
Associated Port
Drop-down list of associated interfaces. LAG entities are only lis- (drop-down list of
(Create Sever MEP ted if one or more LAG groups have been provisioned. available ports)
Only)
Configuration
Enabled
AIS Generation Enable or disable generation of AIS by a Server MEP.
Disabled
AIS Client MD Level Set the client MD level of a Server MEP 0 -7
AIS Transmission Set the interval for AIS transmission. Only effective if AIS Gen- 1 Second
Interval eration is Enabled. 1 Minute
AIS Priority Set the AIS priority level. 0 -7

1044 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Configure CFM VLAN Table

The CFM VLAN List may be edited by selecting the CFM icon on the Tool Bar or
selecting CFM from the Applications menu, expanding the system folder in the Selection
Tree, entering a right click on Network Port 1, any Access Port or a LAG ID and selecting
Create VLAN Entry.

To edit an existing CFM VLAN Table entry, enter a right click on the Access Port entity
and select Edit VLAN Entry, then select the Edit radio button for the VLAN entity to edit,
then modify the VID entries by adding new ones and/or deleting existing ones.

To delete and VLAN entry, in the selection tree enter a right click on the Access Port
entity and selecting Delete VLAN Entry, then select the Delete radio button for the
VLAN entity to delete, then click on OK.

See the following table for Maintenance Domain configuration settings.

Table 141: CFM VLAN Table Configuration Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Primary VID Primary VLAN Identifier. 1 to 4095
CFM Virtual Identifier (VID) list. To add a VID member, enter a valid
VID ID in the VID Entry window and select Add. To delete a VID
VID List member, select the VID number in the VID List window and select 1 to 4095
Remove. The last VID member cannot be removed.

Configure Maintenance Domain

A Maintenance Domain (MD) may be created by selecting the CFM icon on the Tool Bar
or selecting CFM from the Applications menu, expanding the system folder in the
Selection Tree, entering a right click on the Maintenance Domain entity and selecting
Create MD. To edit an existing MD, expand the Maintenance Domain entity, enter a right
click on the desired MD and select Edit Configuration. The following parameters cannot
be edited: MD Index, Level. To edit these parameters, the MD must be deleted and then
re-entered with the new desired parameters.

To remove an MD, expand the Maintenance Domain entity, enter a right click on the
desired MD and select Delete. Then select OK.

In order to delete an MD, all subordinate entities (MAs and MEPs) must first
be deleted.

See the following table for Maintenance Domain configuration settings. Default settings
are identified in bold.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 1045

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 142: Maintenance Domain Configuration Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults

Identification
1 - 64 for GE112Pro
MD Index series
Maintenance Domain identifier.
(Create MD Only) 1 - 128 for GE114Pro
series
Configuration
String
MAC - Integer
Format Type Selectable Name Entry type.
DNS Name
No Name
Maintenance Domain name identified by string (if Format Type
String is selected) or by DNS Name (if Format Type DNS
Name is selected) or by MAC address (if Format Type MAC- Text string
Integer is selected). If Format Type String or DNS Name is
MAC address or DNS
MD Name selected, ASCII characters are allowed. If Format Type MAC-
name
Integer is selected, the entry must be Hexadecimal char-
[Link] that it is not allowed to use system reserved names (blank)
(i.e. ltp, cfm, efm, elmi, erppdu, eth0, eth1,jdsu, lagpdu, lldppdu,
lo, ptpsyncjack, ptpts, sat, ssm, etc) to name CFM entities.
Level
Maintenance Domain level. 0 to 7
(Create MD Only)
MIP Creation Control. If Default is selected, the parameters set None
MIP Creation Con-
in the Default Maintenance Domain is used for MD Level, MIP Default
trol
Creation Control and Default Sender ID Control. Explicit

Configure Maintenance Association Network

A Maintenance Association Network (MANET) can be created by selecting the CFM icon
on the Tool Bar or selecting CFM from the Applications menu, expanding the system and
Maintenance Domain folders in the Selection Tree, entering a right click on the desired
Maintenance Domain entity and selecting Create MANET.

To edit a MANET, expand the Maintenance Domain entity, expand the Maintenance
Domain ID, enter a right click on the desired MANET and select Edit Configuration. The
Entity ID cannot be edited. To edit this parameter, the MA must be deleted and then re-
entered.

To delete a MANET, expand the Maintenance Domain entity, expand the Maintenance
Domain ID, enter a right click on the desired MANET and select Delete. (All subordinate
MACOMPs must be deleted prior to deleting the MANET.) Then select OK.

In order to delete an MA, all subordinate entities (MACOMP, MEPs) must

first be deleted.

1046 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

See the following table for MANET configuration settings. Default settings are identified
in bold.

Table 143: Maintenance Association Network Configuration Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults

Identification
MANET Index

(Create MANET Maintenance Association Network identifier. 1 - 256

Only)
Integer
Primary VID
Format Type Selectable Name Entry type. String
VPN Id
ICC Format
A Maintenance Association name identified by ICC Format,
ICC Format,
integer, in Hexadecimal (if Format Type Integer is selected) or by
Text string
Primary VLAN Identifier (if Format Type Primary VID is selected)
or by character string (if Format Type String is selected) or by Hexidecimal or
VPN identifier (if Format Type VPN ID is selected). If Format Primary VLAN
MA Name
Type String is selected, ASCII characters are allowed. The MA Identifier
Name must be unique per associated MD. Note that it is not
allowed to use system reserved names (i.e. ltp, cfm, efm, elmi,
erppdu, eth0, eth1,jdsu, lagpdu, lldppdu, lo, ptpsyncjack, ptpts,
(blank)
sat, ssm, etc) to name CFM entities.
3.3 Milliseconds
10 Milliseconds
Continuity Check Message (CCM) interval. The same interval
100 Milliseconds
must be selected for all MEPs associated with the MA. For
CCM Interval 1 Second
GE11xPro, up to 16 local MEPs can be created in the CCM inter-
10 Seconds
val of 3.3 ms and 10 ms.
1 Minute
10 Minutes
Maintenance End Point (MEP) list. To add a MEP member, enter
the valid MEP ID number in the MEP ID Entry window and select 1 to 8191
MEP ID Entry Add. To delete a MEP member, select the MEP number in the
MEP ID List window and select Delete. The last VID member can- (blank)
not be removed.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 1047

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Configure Maintenance Association Component

A Maintenance Association - Component (MACOMP) can be created by selecting the
CFM icon on the Tool Bar or selecting CFM from the Applications menu, expanding the
system and Maintenance Domain folders in the Selection Tree, entering a right click on
the desired Maintenance Domain ID and MANET entities and selecting Create
MACOMP.

To edit a MACOMP, expand the Maintenance Domain entity, expand the Maintenance
Domain ID and MANET entities, enter a right click on the desired MACOMP entity and
select Edit Configuration. The following parameters cannot be edited: Entity ID,
Associated Port or Primary VID. To edit these parameters, the MA must be deleted and
then re-entered with the new desired parameters.

To delete a MACOMP, expand the Maintenance Domain entity, expand the Maintenance
Domain ID and MANET entities, enter a right click on the desired MANET and select
Delete. Then select OK.

In order to delete a MACOMP, all subordinate entities (MEPs) must

first be deleted. Alternatively, performing the “Delete All Port Related
CFM Entities” can delete all the MACOMPs and MEPs related with a
port at the same time.

The following MA provisioning options and rules are described for each option setting
available for:

l GE112: Network Ports (E1000-N-1and E1000-N-2), Access Ports (E1000-A-3 to

E1000-A-4, and E1000-A-2 if provisioned), or LAGs of Access Ports or Network Ports,
or provisioned flows with a single Push/Push VID Tag Control operation on either C-
Tag or S-Tag (for service Up MEP).
l GE114x: Network Ports (E1000-N-1and E1000-N-2), Access Ports (E1000-A-3 to
E1000-A-6, and E1000-A-2 if provisioned), or LAGs of Access Ports or Network Ports,
or provisioned flows with a single Push/Push VID Tag Control operation on either C-
Tag or S-Tag (for service Up MEP).

See the following table for MACOMP configuration settings. Default settings are
identified in bold.

1048 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 144: Maintenance Association Component Configuration Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults

Identification
MACOMP Index
Maintenance Association Component identifier. 1
(not editable)
Configuration
Drop-down list of associated interfaces and flows.

Component ID l LAG entities are only listed if one or more LAG groups
have been provisioned. (drop-down list of
(Create Only) available ports and
l Access Port Flow entities are only applicable when the
flows)
flows have a single Push or PushVID Tag Control
operation; A flow with no tag push or double tags push
cannot be identified as a MA Component ID.
Primary VLAN Identifier. For an Access Port Flow configured
as a MACOMP Component ID, the
Primary VID MACOMP Primary VID must be unique for the N2A mem- 0 to 4095
(Create only) bership of all Access Port Flows in the system and must be (1)
equal to the VLAN ID of the single Push/PushVID Tag for the
Access Port Flow.
MIP Creation Control. If Default is selected, the parameters None
MIP Creation Con- set in the Default Maintenance Domain will be used for MD
Level, MIP Creation Control and Default Sender ID Control. If Default
trol
MACOMP Component ID is an Access Port Flow, the MIP Explicit
Creation Control must be set to None; Otherwise, the system
will deny the MACOMP creation or editing. Defer

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 1049

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Configure Maintenance End Point

A Maintenance End Point (MEP) can be created by selecting the CFM icon on the Tool
Bar or selecting CFM from the Applications menu, expanding the system, NE-1 and
NTE11x entities in the Selection Tree, entering a right click on the desired Access Port,
Network Port or LAG entity, and selecting Create MEP.

To remove an existing Maintenance End Point, expand the desired Access Port, Network
Port or LAG entity, enter a right click on the desired MEP and select Delete. Then select
OK. To edit an existing Maintenance End Point, select Edit Configuration.

See the following table for Maintenance Association configuration settings. Default
settings are identified in bold.

Table 145: Maintenance End Point Configuration Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults

Identification
Maintenance End Point (MEP) identifier. MEP IDs are cre-
MEP Index ated when provisioning a MEP list during MA creation/edit.
Existing MEP IDs are listed in numerical order according to 1 to 8191
(Create Only) the selected MANET ID. The appropriate MANET ID must
be selected prior to selecting the MEP ID.
Maintenance Association - Network identifier associated
MANET ID with this MEP. The MANET must first be created prior to Available CFM
selecting this MANET ID. The MANET ID must be selected MANET IDs from
(Create Only) first, then the MEP Index, because it determines which option list
MEP Index is available.
State
Disabled
Administrative MEP state setting. When disabled, the MEP is inactive. IS
Management
Configuration (General)
Direction Selects the MEP direction. Only UP direction MEP is cur- Up
rently supported if the Associated Port is an Access Port
(Create Only) Flow. Down
Enable or disable Continuity Check Message (CCM) gen- Disabled
CCM Generation
eration. Enabled
VLAN Priority VLAN priority. 0 to 7
Check boxes to select triggers for Link Loss Forwarding.
AIS Defect
The check boxes are for Ethernet Alarm Indication Signal
Defect, Interface Status, Remote Defect Indication and
Interface Status
Remote MEP Continuity Check Message Interface Status.
LLF Trigger l If a Down MEP is configured on a port, it is the other end RDI
of this port's associated flow that will take LLF TX
Remote MEP CCM
action.
Failure
l If an UP MEP is configured on a port, it is this port that
will take LLF TX action. (non-selected)
VLAN Ethertype Ethertype for MEP VLAN Tag for the MEPs. 8100 (hex)

1050 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 145: Maintenance End Point Configuration Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Select the priority for fault alarm. The fault priority in des- MAC Remote XCON
cending order is: XCON, Error, Remote, MAC, All Defined Error
(for RDICCM), and the fault alarm level in ascending order All Defined
Fault Alarm Priority is: 1) All Defined, 2) MAC Remote XCON Error, 3) Remote Remote XCON Error
XCON Error, 4) XCON Error, 5) XCON, 6) No XCON. For
example, if All Defined is selected, all alarms for the five XCON Error
fault priorities will be reported; if No XCON is selected, no XCON
alarms of the five priorities will be reported. No XCON
Primary VLAN Identifier. Options available can be inherited
from the selected MACOMP’s Primary VID or select from 0 to 4095
the VLAN Entry - VID List added to the associated port. For
Primary VID service based Up MEP (associated port is an Access Port
Flow), this option must be inherited from or equal to the
MACOMP Primary VID; otherwise, the system will deny MACOMP Primary
the operation. VID
SAT Responder This option should be Enabled at the destination MEP if Disabled
Control SAT test mode is one way. Enabled
Configuration (AIS)
Determines if this MEP can generate ETH-AIS for alarm Disabled
AIS Generation
suppression. Enabled
Sets the repeat period for ETH-AIS message. Period is inef-
1 Second
AIS Transmission fective unless AIS Generation is Enabled. At the peer MEP,
Interval if no ETH-AIS message is received for 3.5 times the trans-
1 Minute
mission period, ETH-AIS is reset.
Check boxes for selecting triggers for generating ETH-AIS.
Triggers are ineffective if AIS Generation is Disabled. Trig-
AIS Trigger ger events are Alarm Indication Signal Defect, Remote (de-selected)
Continuity Check Message (CCM), Error CCM, Cross Con-
nect CCM.
AIS Priority Sets the priority of the ETH-AIS. 0-7
AIS Client MD Level Drop-down list of configured MD Levels. 1-7
Configuration (ESA)
Only the frames determined as Green (in-profile) by the Enabled
LM In-Profile Only
ingress policing are counted for loss measurement. Disabled
If Enabled, the frames of all priorities in transmitting dir-
ection at the corresponding port are counted for loss meas- Enabled
LM TX Count All Pri- urement; If Disabled, only the frames with the same priority
orities as the probe (same VID as MA Primary VID) in transmitting
direction at the corresponding port are counted for loss Disabled
measurement.
If Enabled, the frames of all priorities in both transmitting
and receiving directions at the corresponding port are coun- Enabled
Dual-ended Count ted for loss measurement; If Disabled, only the frames with
All Priorities the same priority as the probe (same VID as MA Primary
VID) in both directions at the corresponding port are counted Disabled
for loss measurement.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 1051

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 145: Maintenance End Point Configuration Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
If Enabled, the frames of all priorities in receiving direction
at the corresponding port are counted for loss meas- Enabled
LM RX Count All Pri- urement; If Disabled, only the frames with the same priority
orities as the probe (same VID as MA Primary VID) in receiving dir-
ection at the corresponding port are counted for loss meas- Disabled
urement.

1052 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Initiate Loopback Message

Loopback Message (LBM) may be initiated by selecting the CFM icon on the Tool Bar or
selecting CFM from the Applications menu, expanding the system, NE-1, NTE11x and
Access Port, Network Port or LAG entities in the Selection Tree, entering a right click on
the desired MEP entity, and selecting Loopback.

See the following table for Initiate Loop Back Message configuration settings. Default
settings are identified in bold.

When CCM defect is used as a trigger for protection switching,

performing a loopback on port can cause undesired protection
switching.

Table 146: Initiate Loopback Message Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
MAC Address
Destination Type Selects the LBM destination type.
Remote MEP Id
Available CFM
Allows entry of the destination MAC address or selec- Remote MEP Id List
Destination ID
tion of the desired Remote MEP ID.
(blank)
Number of LBMs to be
Allows entry of the number of LBMs to be transmitted. 1 to 50
transmitted
Number of padding bytes Allows entry of the number of padding bytes to be
0 to 1470
in the Data TLV added to the Data TLV.
All Zeros
All Ones
Data Pattern Selects the LBM Data Pattern to be sent. Alternate Zeros and
Ones
Vlan Priority Selects the LBM VLAN priority. 0 to 7
Enabled
VLAN Drop Eligible Selects whether LBM VLAN drop is enabled or not.
Disabled

The MEP must be set to the In Service State for the Loop Back
Message to be initiated.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 1053

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Initiate Link Trace Message

Link Trace Message (LTM) may be initiated by selecting the CFM icon on the Tool Bar or
selecting CFM from the Applications menu, expanding the system, NE-1, NTE11x and
Access Port, Network Port or LAG entities in the Selection Tree, entering a right click on
the desired MEP entity, and selecting Linktrace.

See the following table for Initiate Link Trace Message configuration settings. Default
settings are identified in bold.

Table 147: Initiate Link Trace Message Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
MAC Address
Destination Type Selects the LTM destination type.
Remote MEP Id
Allows entry of the destination MAC address (hex) (Dropdown list of available
Destination ID
or selection of the desired Remote MEP ID. remote MEPs)
1 to 255
TTL Sets the Time To Live (TTL) value for this LTM.
64
Selects whether LTM transmit flags are enabled or Enabled
Use FDB Only
not. Disabled
[Link]
LTM Egress ID Allows entry of the LTM egress ID in hexadecimal.
hh:hh:hh:hh:hh:hh:hh:hh

The MEP must be set to the In Service State for the Link Trace
Message to be initiated.

1054 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

PTP Configuration Options and Rules - GE114Pro

(SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)
The following section describes Precision Time Protocol (PTP) option settings. The
options described in this section are performed using the PTP application (located on the
Tool Bar or selectable via the Application menu) once the license of this feature has been
turned on. The PTP License may be enabled by selecting the Maintenance application,
expanding the Administration and Software Licensing entities, entering a right click on
Feature Management and selecting Edit Feature.

In addition to configuring PTP options, alarm attributes are editable when the PTP
application is selected (see PTP Alarms - GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)).

Transparent Clock Provisioning Order

PTP configuration options are created in the following order for Transparent Clock:

l Create a flow on the associated port (must be in-service)

l Create / Edit a Transparent Clock
l Edit Ethernet Port’s Delay Asymmetry

G.8265 Boundary Clock Provisioning Order

PTP configuration options are created in the following order for Boundary Clock:

l Enable Software Licensing for PTP-MC/BC

l Ensure that the Port associated with the PTP Flow Point (for OCS Port and Master
Virtual Port) are provisioned and In Service
l Edit Ethernet Port’s Delay Asymmetry
l Create / Edit a Telecom Slave
o Create / Edit a Slave Only Ordinary Clock (SOOC)

o Create / Edit a PTP Flow Point

o Create / Edit an Ordinary Clock Slave (OCS) Port
The TS, once provisioned and Locked (the OCS Port State changes to Slave
state), may be:
o selected as a sync reference to the System Sync Domain (SYNC-1-1-1-1)
o selected as a Timing Source of Boundary Clock (These entities should be disabled
until the OC-S has achieved lock [OCS Port State = Slave].)
o selected as an output reference for the 10MHz Clock (CLK-1-1-1-1), PPS (PPS-1-
1-1-1), or Time of Day (TOD-1-1-1-1) output ports. (These outputs should be
disabled until the OC-S has achieved lock. The output should be disabled if the
OC-S state is not LOCKED or HOLD-OVER.)
o selected as the Source TOD Clock of System Time of Day (ToD)
o selected as a Time Clock Reference
l Create / Edit a Boundary Clock
o Create / Edit a Master Clock Interface

o Create / Edit a PTP Flow Point

o Create / Edit a Master Virtual Port
l Create / Edit a Static Slave or Edit / Delete a Dynamic Slave

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 1055

Factory Default Configuration Settings

G.8265 Mini Grand Master Clock Provisioning Order

A Boundary Clock and Master Clock cannot co-exist. Only one or the other may be
provisioned and In Service at a time.

PTP configuration options are created in the following order for Master Clock:

l Enable Software Licensing for PTP-MC/BC

l Ensure that the Port associated with the PTP Flow Point is provisioned and In Service
l Edit the Time Clock (see Synchronization )
o Add a Time Clock Reference (see Synchronization )

l Create / Edit a Master Clock -- using Time Clock as Timing Source

o Create / Edit a Master Clock Interface

o Create / Edit a PTP Flow Point

o Create / Edit a Master Virtual Port
l Create / Edit a Static Slave or Edit / Delete a Dynamic Slave

G.8265 Remote Slave Provisioning Order

A single Telecom Slave may be created for the system. The Telecom Slave and
associated timing functions are created in the following order:

l Ensure that the Port associated with the PTP Flow Point is provisioned and In Service
l Edit Ethernet Port’s Delay Asymmetry
l Create / Edit a Telecom Slave
o Create / Edit a Slave Only Ordinary Clock (SOOC)

o Create / Edit a PTP Flow Point

o Create / Edit an Ordinary Clock Slave (OCS) Port

G.8275 Mini Grand Master Clock Provisioning Order

A single PTP Clock may be created for the system. PTP configuration options are
created in the following order for PTP Clock:

l Enable Software Licensing for PTP-MC/BC

l Ensure that the Port associated with the PTP Flow Point is provisioned and In Service
l Edit an Ethernet Port’s Delay Asymmetry setting
l Edit GPS (see Synchronization )
l Edit the Time Clock (see Synchronization )
o Add GPS as a Time Clock Reference

l Create / Edit a PTP Clock

o Create / Edit a PTP Flow Point

o Create / Edit a PTP Port

l Create a Remote Slave

G.8275 Boundary Clock Provisioning Order

A single PTP Clock may be created for the system. PTP configuration options are
created in the following order for PTP Clock:

1056 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

l Enable Software Licensing for PTP-MC/BC

l Ensure that the Port associated with the PTP Flow Point is provisioned and In Service
l Edit Ethernet Port’s Delay Asymmetry
l Edit Sync Domain (SYNC-1-1-1-1) (optional) (see Synchronization )
l Create / Edit a PTP Clock
o Create / Edit a PTP Flow Point

o Create / Edit a PTP Port

l Create a Remote Slave

Create / Edit a Transparent Clock

A Transparent Clock may be created by selecting the PTP icon on the Tool Bar or
selecting PTP from the Applications menu, expanding the system folder in the Selection
Tree, entering a right click on the NE-1 entity and selecting Create Transparent Clock.

To edit a Transparent Clock, enter a right click on the Transparent Clock entity (TC-1-1)
and select Edit.

To delete a Transparent Clock, enter a right click on the Transparent Clock entity (TC-1-
1) and select Delete, then place the TC in Management state and select OK.

Table 148: Create/Edit Transparent Clock Parameter Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Transparent Clock Identifier. Number is automatically
TC ID (Create only) 1 - 32
indexed, but is user editable.
A text and/or number string the user enters to uniquely
up to 64 characters
Alias identify this entity. This string can be up to 64 printable
(blank)
ASCII characters long.
Enables or disables the Transparent Clock. When an entity IS
Administrative
is in the In Service state, it is fully operational. See Entity
State Management
State Descriptions.
Clock Identity of the Transparent Clock. A Clock Identity is
Clock Identity
automatically created by the system but this value can be <varies>
(Create only)
edited.
Flow Identifier to associate with this Transparent Clock.
Note that user need ensure that the PTP packets do not
Service ID (Create (drop down list of
have more than two layers of tags after transmitting out of
only) provisioned Flow IDs)
the egress port, otherwise the PTP packets will not be pro-
cessed and the TC performance will be impacted.
Delay Mechanism Delay Mechanism type to associate with this Transparent
End to End
(Create only) Clock (only End to End is supported).
Access PTP Flow
Point ID (Create Defines the Access PTP Flow Point ID. 1 - 32
only)
Network PTP Flow
Point ID (Create Defines the Network PTP Flow Point ID. 1 - 32
only)

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 1057

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Edit Ethernet Port’s Delay Asymmetry

An Ethernet Port’s delay asymmetry may be edited by selecting the PTP icon on the Tool
Bar or selecting PTP from the Applications menu, expanding the system, NE-1 and NTE
entities in the Selection Tree, entering a right click on an Ethernet Port and selecting Edit.

Table 149: Edit Ethernet Port’s Delay Asymmetry Paramete

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Delay Asymmetry is the asymmetry in the delay of the path
connected to the ingress port and path connected to the
egress port. This value is the half the difference between the -1000000000 -
delay of path terminating at the ingress port and the path ori- 1000000000
Delay Asymmetry ginating at the egress port. If the delay asymmetry is not
zero, the value shall be positive if the delay of the path ter- 0
minating at the ingress port is greater than the delay of the
(nanoseconds)
path originating at the

egress port and negative otherwise. The range is -1s to 1s.

1058 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Create / Edit a Telecom Slave

A Telecom Slave may be created by selecting the PTP icon on the Tool Bar or selecting
PTP from the Applications menu, expanding the system folder in the Selection Tree,
entering a right click on the NE-1 entity and selecting Create Telecom Slave.

To edit a Telecom Slave, enter a right click on the Telecom Slave entity (TS-1-1) and
select Edit.

To delete a Telecom Slave, enter a right click on the Telecom Slave entity and select
Delete.

Table 150: Create/Edit Telecom Slave Parameter Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
A text and/or number string the user enters to uniquely
up to 64 characters
Alias identify this entity. This string can be up to 64 printable
(blank)
ASCII characters long.
Clock Identity of the Telecom Slave. Entry is 16 HEX char-
Clock Identity
acters. A Clock Identity is automatically created by the sys- <varies>
(Create only)
tem but this value can be edited.
Enables or disables the Telecom Slave. When an entity is in IS
Administrative
the In Service state, it is fully operational. See Entity State
State Management
Descriptions.
PTP Domain Num- This PTP domain number which the Master Clock
0- 255
ber participates in. It is used in the domainNumber field of the
PTP header in the PTP packet generated by the SOOC. 4
(Create only)
Selects one way or two way clock recovery mode.

l One way: delay request/response messages are not One Way

Clock Recovery used and in this mode only frequency can be recovered.
Mode (only sync message)
l Two way (default): delay request/response will be used
and in this mode frequency and/or phase/time can be Two Way
recovered
Selects the time holdover accuracy in nanoseconds for the
500
telecom slave. The Holdover state is entered when Telecom
Slave is currently locked to the Master Clock and when the
active SOOC’s OC-S PTP Virtual Port goes to LISTENING 1000
Time Holdover
or UNCALIBRATED. In this state the phase lock can be
Accuracy (ns)
sustained for certain amount of time specified as Holdover 1500
(Create only) time before the accuracy becomes insufficient for holdover
accuracy requirement. 5000
The provisioned value and the assembled oscillator stability
10000
co-determine the Holdover time.
Defines the Wait To Restore (WTR) time for this telecom
WTR Time (Min) 0 - 99 (Min)
slave in minutes.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 1059

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 150: Create/Edit Telecom Slave Parameter Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Enable or Disable allowing the Telecom Slave to be used as
Sync Reference. Default is Disabled.
Disabled
l If set to Enabled, the TS port is available as a possible
reference for the system Sync object.
Sync Reference
l If set to Disabled, the TS port is not available as a
possible reference for the system Sync object (SYNC-1-
1-1-1). The system Sync object may be used to drive Enabled
PTP if this option is disabled AND SYNC-1-1-1-1 is
selected in the Sync ID option.
Specifies whether the Ethernet Network Port is enabled or
disabled for Quality Level (QL) Mode. This option is only
applicable for Synchronous Ethernet capable ports, when
this option is set to Enabled.

When enabled, on receive side: Disabled

-port shall PEER the Synchronization Status Messages

(SSM) slow protocol PDUs and take appropriate action

When enabled, on transmit side:

QL Mode
-port shall periodically (once a second) transmit QL TLV
information PDUs

When disabled, on receive side:

-port shall terminate and discard any SSM slow protocol Enabled
PDUs

When disabled, on transmit side:

-port shall not transmit any SSM slow protocol PDUs

Selects an external driver for PTP. If Sync Reference is set
to Disabled AND SYNC-1-1-1-1 is selected, then SYNC-1- None
Sync ID 1-1-1 is used to drive PTP. If Sync Reference is set to
Enabled, then only None is applicable. Sync ID is not edit- SYNC-1-1-1-1
able when an SOOC is associated with the TS.

1060 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 150: Create/Edit Telecom Slave Parameter Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults

Specifies the assumed Quality Level (QL) on the Ethernet

Network Port. This object is only applicable for Syn-
chronous Ethernet capable ports. The Assumed QL is only QL-PRC
applicable if the Network Clock Type is “option1” - SDH and
the port’s QL Mode is disabled and the port is being used as
an input reference source. Under these conditions, the spe-
cified QL value is assumed to be the Quality Level of the
non-failed reference.
QL-SSU-A

Choices available depend on the Network Clock Type set-

Assumed QL
ting - “option1 - SDH” or “option2 - SONET.” If “option1 -
SDH” is selected, there has to be an Assumed QL in case
the selected sync reference does not support SSM. For QL-SSU-B
“option2 - SONET,” the Assumed QL is automatically set to
“QL-STU” and is not editable. If the Network Clock Type is
changed from “option2 - SONET” to “option1 - SDH,” the
“assumed_ql” defaults to “QL-EEC1.”

QL-EEC1
Valid entry for SDH Network Clock: QL-PRC, QL-SSU-A,
QL-SSU-B, QL-EEC1. Default is QL-EEC1.
Valid entry for SONET Network Clock: QL-STU. QL-STU
Specifies the expected Quality Level (QL) when the Ethernet
Network Port is enabled for QL Mode. This object is only
applicable for Synchronous Ethernet capable ports, when QL-NONE
QL Mode is Enabled. This option allows the user to set a min-
imum expected received Quality Level on the port. The valid
values depend upon the SYNC entity’s Network Clock
Type. A value of None represents that a minimum Quality QL-PRC
Level is not expected.

Choices available depend on the Network Clock Type set-

Expected QL QL-SSU-A
ting - “option1 - SDH” or “option2 - SONET.”

The default value is QL-NONE. If the Network Clock Type is

changed, Expected QL defaults to QL-SSU-B

“QL-NONE” regardless of previous setting.

QL-EEC1
Valid entry for SDH Network Clock: QL-PRC, QL-SSU-A,
QL-SSU-B, QL-EEC1, QL-NONE. Default is QL-NONE.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 1061

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Create / Edit a Slave Only Ordinary Clock (SOOC)

Once a Telecom Slave has been created, a Slave Only Ordinary Clock (SOOC) may be
created by entering a right click on the TS-1-n entity and selecting Create SOOC.

To edit an SOOC, enter a right click on the SOOC entity (SOOC-1-1-1-1-1) and select
Edit.

To delete an SOOC, enter a right click on the SOOC entity and select Delete. The SOOC
cannot be deleted if the TS is associated with a Sync Reference.

Table 151: Create/Edit SOOC Parameter Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
SOOC Identifier. Number is automatically indexed, but is
SOOC ID (Create user editable. Two SOOCs are supported per Telecom
1 -2
Only) [Link] two SOOCs can synchronize with either one
Grand Master or two different Grande Masters.
A text and/or number string the user enters to uniquely
up to 64 characters
Alias identify this entity. This string can be up to 64 printable
(blank)
ASCII characters long.
Enables or disables the Telecom Slave. When an entity is in IS
Administrative
the In Service state, it is fully operational. See Entity State
State Management
Descriptions.
Flow ID (Create (drop down list of
Flow Identifier to associate with this SOOC.
only) provisioned Flow IDs)
Slave IP Address
The IP Address of the SOOC. [Link]
(Create only)
Slave Subnet Mask
The Slave subnet mask. [Link]
(Create only)
Interface Name
Name for this SOOC interface (mandatory entry). (blank)
(Create only)
Unicast Message Enable/Disable Unicast Message Negotiation. When
Negotiation Enabled the following provisioned rates are used in the nego- Enabled
tiation between the master and slave (in the signaling mas-
(Create only)
sage). When Disabled, the following provisioned rates are Disabled
used for manually calculating the negotiation intervals.
Unicast Timeout Unicast timeout (in seconds). 1
Unicast Restart
Unicast restart timer (in seconds). 60
Timer
None
Priority Mode Priority mode for transmitted packets. TOS
DSCP
Priority Priority for transmitted packets. 0 -7
Master Delay
Mechanism Master Delay Mechanism. Only End to End is supported. End to End
(Create only)
Master Priority Master priority. 0 -7
Master Protocol
Master protocol. Only IPv4 is applicable. IPv4
(Create only)

1062 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 151: Create/Edit SOOC Parameter Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Master Clock IP
Address (Create Master Clock IP Address. [Link]
only)
1 Packet Per 16
Seconds
1 Packet Per 8
Seconds
1 Packet Per 4
Master Announce Seconds
Message Rate 1 Packet Per 2
Selects the mean time interval between successive
Seconds
(Create only) Announce messages.
1 Packet Per 1 Second
2 Packets Per 1
Second
4 Packets Per 1
Second
8 Packets Per 1
Second
Master Announce Indicates how long (in seconds) for the GrandMaster to send
2 - 255 (secs)
Receipt Timeout the announce packet.
1 Packet Per Second
2 Packets Per Second
4 Packets Per Second
Master Delay 8 Packets Per Second
Response Mes- 16 Packets Per
sage Rate Selects a minimum mean time interval in which the Master Second
Clock responds to successive Delay Request packets. 32 Packets Per
(Create only)
Second
64 Packets Per
Second
128 Packets Per
Second
Master Delay
Response Receipt Master Delay Response Receipt Timeout. 2 - 255 (secs)
Timeout

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 1063

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 151: Create/Edit SOOC Parameter Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
1 Packet Per Second
2 Packets Per Second
4 Packets Per Second
Master Sync Mes- 8 Packets Per Second
sage Rate 16 Packets Per
Selects a mean time interval between successive Sync Second
(Create only) messages. 32 Packets Per
Second
64 Packets Per
Second
128 Packets Per
Second
Master Sync
Master Sync Receipt Timeout. 2 - 255 (secs)
Receipt Timeout
Master Lease Dur-
60 - 1000 (secs)
ation Master Lease Duration.
300
(Create only)
Enable or disable SOOC lockout. If set to Enabled, an
Disabled
SOOC will be locked out and thus cannot receive PTP pack-
Lockout Control
ets for synchronization. By default, this option is set to Dis-
Enabled
abled.

1064 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Create / Edit a PTP Flow Point

Once an SOOC, Boundary Clock, Master Clock or PTP Clock has been created, a PTP
Flow Point (PTPFP) may be created by expanding the NTE114PRO SH/NET114PRO
CSH entity in the Selection Tree, entering a right click on the associated port entity and
selecting Create PTPFP.

To edit a PTP Flow Point, enter a right click on the PTP Flow Point entity (e.g., ACC PTP
FLOW PT-1-1-1-1-1) and select Edit.

To delete a PTPFP, enter a right click on the PTPFP entity and select Delete.

Table 152: Create/Edit PTP Flow Point Parameter Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
PTPFP ID (Create PTP Flow Point Identifier. Number is automatically indexed,
1 - 33
only) but is user editable.
A text and/or number string the user enters to uniquely
up to 64 characters
Alias identify this entity. This string can be up to 64 printable
(blank)
ASCII characters long.
Enables or disables the Transparent Clock. When an entity IS
Administrative
is in the In Service state, it is fully operational. See Entity
State Management
State Descriptions.
Defines if the Flowpoint is used as an OC Slave or OC
OC Slave
Master or for monitoring or for PTP Clock. For Telecom
Slave, select OC Slave; for Boundary Clock/Master Clock,
OC Master
PTP FlowPoint select OC Master; for PTP Network Probe, select Mon-
Type itoring (see Create / Edit a PTP Network Probe); for PTP
Clock, select Eth Multicast. For a Transparent Clock PTP Monitoring
Flow point, this parameter is not user editable and is auto-
Eth Multicast
matically set to Transparent Clock by system.
Flow ID (Create (drop down list of
Flow Identifier to associate with this Transparent Clock.
only) provisioned Flow IDs)
Defines the Class of Service (COS) for this PTP flow point.
COS 0-7
Not available if PTP FlowPoint Type is Transparent Clock.
Defines the Committed Information Rate (CIR) for this PTP
flow point. Note that the total bandwidth of the CIRs of all
CIR 384000 (bps)
PTP flow points should not exceed 2,880,000 bps. Not avail-
able if PTP FlowPoint Type is Transparent Clock.
Defines the buffer size for this PTP flow point in KB. Not 0 - 15360
Buffer Size
available if PTP FlowPoint Type is Transparent Clock. 16 (KB)
Defines whether the VLAN configuration is untagged or Selected
Untagged Check
tagged. Selecting this option sets Untagged VLAN con-
Box (Create only) Unselected
figuration.
Outer VLAN Check Defines whether the Outer VLAN tag entry is allowed. Only Selected
Box (Create only) selectable if the Untagged check box is unselected. Unselected
Outer VLAN Ether-
Defines the Ethertype for the Outer VLAN tag. 0
type (Create only)
Outer VLAN Tag Defines the VLAN tag and priority that will be associated 1 - 4095
(Create only) with this PTP Flow Point Outer VLAN Tag. 0-7

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 1065

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 152: Create/Edit PTP Flow Point Parameter Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Inner VLAN1 Selected
Defines whether the Inner VLAN1 tag entry is allowed. Only
Check Box (Create
selectable if the Untagged check box is unselected. Unselected
only)
Inner VLAN1 Ether-
Defines the Ethertype for the Inner VLAN1 tag. 0
type (Create only)
Inner VLAN1 Tag Defines the VLAN tag and priority that will be associated 1 - 4095
(Create only) with this PTP Flow Point Inner VLAN1 Tag. 0-7
Inner VLAN2 Selected
Defines whether the Inner VLAN2 tag entry is allowed. Only
Check Box (Create
selectable if the Untagged check box is unselected. Unselected
only)

Create / Edit an Ordinary Clock Slave (OCS) Port

Once a PTPFP has been created, an Ordinary Clock Slave (OCS) Port may be created
by expanding the SOOC entity in the Selection Tree, entering a right click on the SOOC
entity and selecting Create OCS Port.

To edit an OCS Port, enter a right click on the OCS Port entity (OCS PORT-1-1-1-1) and
select Edit.

To delete an OCS Port, enter a right click on the OCS Port entity and select Delete.

Table 153: Create/Edit OCS Port Parameter Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
A text and/or number string the user enters to uniquely
up to 64 characters
Alias identify this entity. This string can be up to 64 printable
(blank)
ASCII characters long.
PTP Flow Point Identifier to associate with this Ordinary (drop down list of
PTP Flow Point
Clock Slave Port. The Service Flow associated with Flow provisioned PTP Flow
(Create only)
Point and SOOC must be the same. Point IDs)

Create / Edit a Boundary Clock

A Boundary may be created by selecting the PTP icon on the Tool Bar or selecting PTP
from the Applications menu, expanding the system folder in the Selection Tree, entering a
right click on the NE-1 entity and selecting Create Boundary Clock. To edit a Boundary
Clock, enter a right click on the Boundary Clock entity (e.g., BOUNDARY CLOCK-1-1)
and select Edit.

A Boundary Clock and Master Clock cannot co-exist. Only one or the other may be
provisioned and In Service at a time.

To delete a Boundary Clock, enter a right click on the Boundary Clock entity and select
Delete.

1066 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 154: Table 1:  Create/Edit Boundary Clock Parameter Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Boundary Clock The index number of the Boundary Clock. Up to two Bound-
1
Index (Create only) ary Clocks may be created per system.
A text and/or number string the user enters to uniquely
up to 64 characters
Alias identify this entity. This string can be up to 64 printable
(blank)
ASCII characters long.
Use Selected Tele-
Selected
com Slave Clock Select the “Use Selected Telecom Slave Clock Identity
Identity Check Box Check Box” if its clock identity is to be used.
Unselected
(Create only)
Entry of a Clock Identity of the Telecom Slave is permitted if
Clock Identity
the “Use Selected Telecom Slave Clock Identity Check (varies)
(Create only)
Box” is not selected. Entry is 16 HEX characters.
Administrative Enables or disables the Boundary Clock. See Entity State IS
State Descriptions. Management
Whether to enable or disable Mediation on the Boundary enabled
PTP Mediation
Clock to be created. disabled
Timing Source None
Selects the provisioned Telecom Slave timing source.
(Create only) (drop-down list)
This PTP domain number is used in the domain Number
PTP Domain Num- field of the PTP header in the PTP packet. This PTP domain 0 -127
ber (Create only) number is used when PTP packet is generated by the 4
SOOC.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 1067

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Create / Edit a Master Clock

A Boundary may be created by selecting the PTP icon on the Tool Bar or selecting PTP
from the Applications menu, expanding the system folder in the Selection Tree, entering a
right click on the NE-1 entity and selecting Create Master Clock. To edit a Master Clock,
enter a right click on the Master Clock entity (e.g., MASTER CLOCK-1-1) and select
Edit.

A Boundary Clock and Master Clock cannot co-exist. Only one or the other may be
provisioned and In Service at a time.

To delete a Master Clock, enter a right click on the Master Clock entity and select Delete.

Table 155: Create/Edit Master Clock Parameter Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Master Clock Index The index number of the Boundary Clock. Up to two Master
1 -2
(Create only) Clocks may be created per system.
A text and/or number string the user enters to uniquely
up to 64 characters
Alias identify this entity. This string can be up to 64 printable
(blank)
ASCII characters long.
Clock Identity The Master Clock’s Clock Identity. Entry is 16 HEX char-
(varies)
(Create only) acters.
Administrative Enables or disables the Boundary Clock. See Entity State IS
State Descriptions. Management
PTP Domain Num- This PTP domain number is used in the domain Number
0 - 127
ber (Create only) field of the PTP header in the PTP packet.
0 - 255
Priority 1 Priority 1 (based on IEEE 1588v2).
128
0 - 255
Priority 2 Priority 2 (based on IEEE 1588v2).
128
Timing Clock Eid
The timing reference of the Master Clock. (drop-down list)
(Create only)

1068 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Create / Edit a Master Clock Interface

A Boundary may be created by selecting the PTP icon on the Tool Bar or selecting PTP
from the Applications menu, expanding the system folder and Boundary Clock entities in
the Selection Tree, entering a right click on the Boundary Clock entity and selecting
Create Master Clock Interface. To edit a Master Clock Interface, enter a right click on the
Master Clock Interface entity (e.g., MASTER CLOCK INTERFACE-1-1-1) and select
Edit.

To delete a Master Clock Interface, enter a right click on the Master Clock Interface
entity and select Delete.

Table 156: Create/Edit Master Clock Interface Parameter Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Master Clock Inter-
The index number of the Master Clock Interface. Up to Four
face Index (Create 1 -4
Master Clock Interfaces may be created per system.
only)
A text and/or number string the user enters to uniquely identify
up to 64 characters
Alias this entity. This string can be up to 64 printable ASCII char-
(blank)
acters long.
Enables or disables the Master Clock Interface. See Entity IS
Administrative State
State Descriptions. Management
IP Protocol (Create IP Protocol. Only available when the PTP Transport method is
IPv4
only) UDP Over IPv4
Valid IPv4 address. The IP address must be unique across all
IP Address (Create IP interfaces in the system.
[Link]
only) Only available when the PTP Transport method is UDP Over
IPv4
Master Clock Inter-
Valid IPv4 subnet [Link] available when the PTP Trans-
face Subnet Mask [Link]
port method is UDP Over IPv4
(Create only)
When an Master Clock Interface is created, an IP interface is
created with the Interface Name, IP Address and Subnet
Mask. The IP address and Interface Name must be unique
Interface Name across all IP interfaces in the system. The interface name is
(Create only) from 1 to 15 alphanumeric characters (no spaces). This entry is (blank)
mandatory.

Only available when the PTP Transport method is UDP Over

IPv4
Defines the Priority Mode. It identifies the lookup criteria for the
None
priority mapping table. This table is used to perform priority
Priority Mode based lookup (to determine low and normal latency) and/or to
change the priority value. TOS
(Create only)
Only available when the PTP Transport method is UDP Over
DSCP
IPv4

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 1069

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 156: Create/Edit Master Clock Interface Parameter Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Priority Map Index Selection. The following ranges of Indexes
are: 0...7 if Priority Mode is set to TOS; 0...63 if Priority Map 0

Priority (Create only) Mode is set to DSCP. 0-7 (TOS)

Only available when the PTP Transport method is UDP Over 0-63 (DSCP)
IPv4
The Clock Class Profile to be supported on the MCI to be G82651
Clock Class Profile
created. IEEE_1588_2008
The way in which the PTP packets are transported. The
ethernet option is only available for Profile IEEE-1588-2008. UDP Over IPv4
PTP Transport
The default is udp-over-ipv4 for G82651 profile and ethernet for ethernet
IEEE-1588-2008.
A PTP Domain for the MCI to join, when the Profile is set to
PTP Domain Number 0-255
IEEE-1588-2008.
Clock Type (Create Selects the Clock Type. Only One Step is applicable in this
One Step
only) release.
Delay Mechanism Selects the Delay Mechanism. Only End to End is applicable in
End to End
(Create only) this release.
Maximum Slaves Supported.

If only enabling the licensing PTP-MC/BC,4 remote slaves are

supported at most.
Max Slaves Sup-
(1 - 16)
ported (Create only) If the licensing PTP-Extended-Remote-Slaves is also Enabled,
with the max Sync Message Rate and Max Delay Response
Message Rate equal to or lower than 32 packets per second,
up to 16 remote slaves may be supported.
Maximum Static Slaves Supported. The max remote slaves
supported per system is 16 per GE114Pro (SH)/GE114Pro
(CSH).

If enabling the PTP-MC/BC license only,4 remote slaves are

Max Static Slaves supported at most.
Supported (Create (0 - 16)
only) If the PTP-Extended-Remote-Slaves license is also Enabled,
with the max Sync Message Rate and Max Delay Response
Message Rate equal to or lower than 32 packets per second,
up to 16 remote slaves may be supported.

Only available when the Profile is G82651

1 Packet Per 16 Seconds
Max Announce Mes- 1 Packet Per 8 Seconds
sage Rate (Create Maximum Announce Message Rate 1 Packet Per 4 Seconds
only) 1 Packet Per 2 Seconds
1 Packet Per 1 Second

1070 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 156: Create/Edit Master Clock Interface Parameter Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Maximum Sync Message Rate. 1 Packet Per Second
Even when the licensing PTP-MC/BC and PTP-Extended- 2 Packets Per Second
Remote-Slaves are both enabled, the maximum number of
slaves are still dependent of the PTP Packet Rate. 4 Packets Per Second

Max Sync Message When Message Rate is 128 PPS, up to 4 remote slaves are 8 Packets Per Second
Rate (Create only) supported. 16 Packets Per Second
When Message Rate is 64 PPS, up to 8 remote slaves are sup- 32 Packets Per Second
ported.
64 Packets Per Second
When Message Rate is 32 PPS or lower, up to 16 remote
slaves are supported. 128 Packets Per Second
Maximum Delay Response Message Rate. 1 Packet Per Second
Even when the licensing PTP-MC/BC and PTP-Extended-
2 Packets Per Second
Remote-Slaves are both enabled, the maximum number of
slaves are still dependent of the PTP Packet Rate. 4 Packets Per Second

Max Delay When Message Rate is 128 PPS, up to 4 remote slaves are
8 Packets Per Second
Response Message supported.
Rate (Create only) When Message Rate is 64 PPS, up to 8 remote slaves are sup- 16 Packets Per Second
ported.
32 Packets Per Second
When Message Rate is 32 PPS or lower, up to 16 remote
slaves are supported. 64 Packets Per Second

128 Packets Per Second

Max Lease Duration Maximum Lease Duration. 60 - 1000 (secs)

(Create only) Only available if the Transport Method is Ehternet 300
Remote Slave Aging Timeout for remote Slaves.
0- 300 (secs)
Timeout
Only available for Profile IEEE-1588-2008 when the Transport
60
(Create only) Method is Ehternet

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 1071

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Create / Edit a Master Virtual Port

Once a PTPFP has been created, a Master Virtual Port may be created by expanding the
Boundary Clock entity in the Selection Tree, entering a right click on the Boundary Clock
entity and selecting Master Virtual Port. To edit a Master Virtual Port, enter a right click
on the Master Virtual Port entity (e.g., MASTER VIRTUAL PORT-1-1-1-1) and select
Edit.

To delete a Master Virtual Port, enter a right click on the Master Virtual Port entity and
select Delete.

Table 157: Create/Edit Master Virtual Port Parameter Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
A text and/or number string the user enters to uniquely
up to 64 characters
Alias identify this entity. This string can be up to 64 printable
(blank)
ASCII characters long.
PTP Flow Point Identifier to associate with this Master Vir- (drop down list of
PTP Flow Point
tual Port. The Service Flow associated with Flow Point and provisioned PTP Flow
(Create only)
Master Virtual Port must be the same. Point IDs)

1072 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Create / Edit a Static Slave

Once a Master Virtual Port has been created, a Static Remote Slave may be created at
the Boundary Clock/Master Clock node by expanding the Boundary Clock and Master
Clock Interface entities in the Selection Tree, entering a right click on the Static Slave
entity and selecting Create Static Slave.

The number of Static Slaves that may be created is dependent on the Max Slaves
Supported and Max Static Slaves Supported entries made when creating the Master
Clock [Link] enabling the licensing PTP - MC/BC, up to 5 remote slaves are
supported.

If the licensing PTP-Extended-Remote-Slaves is enabled, the number of remote slaves

is extended from 5 to up to 16 at the maximum PTP message rate and Delay Response
Message Rate - 32 Packets Per Second or lower.

To edit a Static Slave, enter a right click on the Static Slave entity (e.g., STATIC SLAVE-
1-1-1-1) and select Edit.

To delete a Static Slave, enter a right click on the Static Slave entity and select Delete.

Table 158: Create/Edit Static Slave Parameter Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
1 -4
Static Remote The index number of the Static Remote Slave. By enabling
Slave Index PTP-Extended-Remote-Slaves license, up to 4 - 16 remote or
(Create only) slaves may be supported.
1 - 16
A text and/or number string the user enters to uniquely
up to 64 characters
Alias identify this entity. This string can be up to 64 printable
(blank)
ASCII characters long.
Administrative Enables or disables the Static Remote Slave. See Entity IS
State State Descriptions. Management
Static Remote
Valid IPv4 address. The IP address must be unique across
Slave IP Address [Link]
all IP interfaces in the system.
(Create only)
Unicast Message Enabled
Negotiation (Create Enables or disables Unicast Message Negotiation.
only) Disabled
1 Packet Per 16
Seconds
1 Packet Per 8
Announce Message Rate. (Applicable only if Unicast Seconds
Announce Mes- Message Negotiation is Disabled.) 1 Packet Per 4
sage Rate (Create
Announce Message Rate cannot be greater than the Seconds
only)
associated MCI Max Announce Message Rate. 1 Packet Per 2
Seconds
1 Packet Per 1
Second

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 1073

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 158: Create/Edit Static Slave Parameter Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
1 Packet Per Second
2 Packets Per Second
4 Packets Per Second
8 Packets Per Second
Sync Message Rate. (Applicable only if Unicast Message 16 Packets Per
Sync Message Negotiation is Disabled.) Second
Rate (Create only) Sync Message Rate cannot be greater than the associated 32 Packets Per
MCI Max Sync Message Rate. Second
64 Packets Per
Second
128 Packets Per
Second
1 Packet Per Second
2 Packets Per Second
4 Packets Per Second
Delay Response Message Rate. (Applicable only if Unicast 8 Packets Per Second
Message Negotiation is Disabled.) 16 Packets Per
Delay Response
Second
Message Rate
32 Packets Per
(Create only)
Delay Response Message Rate cannot be greater than the Second
associated MCI Max Response Message Rate. 64 Packets Per
Second
128 Packets Per
Second

1074 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Edit / Delete a Dynamic Slave

If the Remote Slave node has already been provisioned with Unicast Message
Negotiation Enabled (Dynamic Slave) and the Master Clock Interface entity has been
provisioned at the Boundary Clock/Master Clock node with the correct number of
Maximum Slaves Supported (Maximum Slaves Supported = the maximum number of
Dynamic Slaves + the maximum number of Static Slaves) to accept the Dynamic Slave
unit, then the Dynamic Slave entity is automatically created.

The number of Static Slaves that may be created is dependent on the Max Slaves
Supported and Max Static Slaves Supported entries made when creating the Master
Clock [Link] enabling the licensing PTP - MC/BC, up to 5 remote slaves are
supported.

If the licensing PTP-Extended-Remote-Slaves is enabled, the number of remote slaves

is extended from 5 to up to 16 at the maximum PTP message rate and Delay Response
Message Rate - 32 Packets Per Second or lower.

To edit a Dynamic Slave, enter a right click on the Dynamic Slave entity (e.g., DYNAMIC
SLAVE-1-1-1-1) and select Edit.

To delete a Dynamic Slave, enter a right click on the Dynamic Slave entity and select
Delete.

Table 159: Create/Edit Dynamic Slave Parameter Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
A text and/or number string the user enters to uniquely
up to 64 characters
Alias identify this entity. This string can be up to 64 printable
(blank)
ASCII characters long.
Administrative Enables or disables the Static Remote Slave. See Entity IS
State State Descriptions. Management

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 1075

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Create / Edit a PTP Clock

A PTP Clock may be created by selecting the PTP icon on the tool bar or by selecting
PTP from the Application menu, expanding the system folder in the Selection Tree,
entering a right click on the NE-1 entity and selecting Create PTP Clock. PTP-MC/BC
Software Licensing must be enabled prior to provisioning a PTP Clock.

To edit a PTP Clock, enter a right click on the PTP Clock entity (e.g., PTP CLOCK-1-1)
and select Edit.

To delete a PTP Clock, enter a right click on the PTP Clock entity and select Delete.

Table 160: Create/Edit PTP Clock Parameter Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
PTP Clock Index
The index number of the PTP Clock. 1
(Create only)
A text and/or number string the user enters to uniquely identify up to 64 characters
Alias this entity. This string can be up to 64 printable ASCII char-
acters long. (blank)
Clock Identity The Clock Identity of the PTP Clock. Entry is 16 HEX char-
(varies)
(Create only) acters and is editable on Creation.
IS
Administrative State Select the desired administrative state for the PTP Clock.
Management
PTP Clock Profile Defines the G.8275 PTP Clock Profile. (Fixed to G8275_1) G8275_1
Defines the G.8275 PTP Clock Type. For

l When PTP Clock Type is set to Master Only, the PTP Boundary Clock
Clock will work in T-GM mode, and all the associated
PTP Clock Type ports should be configured with NotSlave = True.
l When PTP Clock Type is set to Boundary Clock, the PTP
Clock will work in T-BC mode, and the associated PTP Master Only
Port mode may be dynamically changed between Master,
Slave or Passive.
PTP Domain Number This PTP domain number is used in the domain number field
24 - 43
(Create only) of the PTP header in the PTP packet.
Priority 1 Priority 1 (based on IEEE 1588v2). 128
0 - 255
Priority 2 Priority 2 (based on IEEE 1588v2).
128
0 - 255
Local Priority Defines the local priority.
128

1076 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 160: Create/Edit PTP Clock Parameter Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Enables or Disables allowing the PTP Clock to be used as
Sync Reference. Default is Disabled.
Disabled
l If set to Enabled, the PTP Clock is available as a possible
reference for the system Sync object (SYNC-1-1-1-1). (for
Sync Reference
future)
l If set to Disabled, the PTP Clock is not available as a
possible reference for the system Sync object. The
system Sync object may be used to drive PTP if this Enabled
option is disabled and SYNC-1-1-1-1 is selected in the
Sync ID option.
Specifies whether the Ethernet Network Port is enabled or dis-
abled for Quality Level (QL) mode. This option is only applic-
able for Synchronous Ethernet capable ports, when this
option is set to Enabled.

When enabled, on receive side: Disabled

port will PEER the Synchronization Status Messages (SSM)

slow protocol PDUs and take appropriate action

QL Mode When enabled, on transmit side:

port will periodically (once a second) transmit QL TLV inform-

ation PDUs.

When disabled, on receive side:

Enabled
port will terminate and discard any SSM slow protocol PDUs

When disabled, on transmit side:

port will not transmit any SSM slow protocol PDUs.

Selects an external driver for PTP Clock. If Sync Reference
None
is set to Disabled and SYNC-1-1-1-1 is selected, then SYNC-
Sync ID
1-1-1-1 is used to drive PTP. If Sync Reference is set to
SYNC-1-1-1-1
Enabled, then only None is applicable.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 1077

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 160: Create/Edit PTP Clock Parameter Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Specifies the expected Quality Level (QL) when the

Ethernet Network Port is enabled for QL Mode. This

QL-NONE
object is only applicable for Synchronous Ethernet

capable ports, when QL Mode is Enabled. This option

allows the user to set a minimum expected received

QL-PRC
Quality Level on the port. The valid values depend upon the
SYNC entity’s Network Clock Type. A value of None rep-
resents that a minimum Quality Level is not expected.

Expected QL QL-SSU-A
Choices available depend on the Network Clock Type

setting - “option1 - SDH” or “option2 - SONET.”

The default value is QL-NONE. If the Network Clock QL-SSU-B

Type is changed, Expected QL defaults to

“QL-NONE” regardless of previous setting.

QL-EEC1
Valid entry for SDH Network Clock: QL-PRC, QL-SSU-A,
QL-SSU-B, QL-EEC1, QL-NONE. Default is QL-NONE.
QL-PRS
QL-STU
Expected QL Valid entry for SONET Network Clock: QL-PRS, QL-ST2
QL-TNC
QL-STU, QL-ST2, QL-TNC, QL-ST3E, QL-EEC2,
QL-ST3E
(Continued) QL-SMC, QL-PROV, QL-NONE. Default is QL-NONE. QL-EEC2
QL-SMC
QL-PROV

1078 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Create / Edit a PTP Port

Once a PTP Clock and PTPFP have been created, a PTP Port may be created by
entering a right click on the PTP Clock entity and selecting Create PTP Port.

To edit a PTP Port, enter a right click on the PTP Port entity (PTP PORT-1-1-1) and
select Edit.

To delete a PTP Port, enter a right click on the PTP Port entity and select Delete.

Table 161: Create/Edit PTP Port Parameter Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
PTP Port Index The index number of the PTP Port. 1
A text and/or number string the user enters to uniquely identify up to 64 characters
Alias this entity. This string can be up to 64 printable ASCII char-
acters long. (blank)
Management
Administrative State Select the desired administrative state for the PTP Port.
IS
If the PTP Clock Type is Master Only, all the associated PTP
Ports should be set to Not Slave “True”. True
Not Slave If the PTP Clock Type is Boundary Clock, the associated
PTP Port mode may be dynamically changed between False
Master, Slave or Passive.
0 - 255
Local Priority Defines the local priority.
128
PTP Flowpoint (dropdown list of
Selects a desired PTP Flow Point from the dropdown list to
provisioned PTP Flow
(Create only) associate with this PTP Port.
Point IDs)
Non Forwardable
Dest MAC Addr Type Destination MAC Address Type.
Forwardable
Announce Receipt 2 - 128 (interval)
Announce Receipt Timeout.
Timeout 3
2 - 128 (interval)
Sync Receipt Timeout Sync Receipt Timeout.
3
2 - 128 (interval)
Delay Resp Timeout Delay Response Timeout.
3

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 1079

Factory Default Configuration Settings

SyncJack Configuration Options and Rules - GE114Pro

(SH)/GE114Pro (CSH)
The following section describes SyncJack option settings. The options described in this
section are performed using the SyncJack application (located on the Tool Bar or
selected via the Application menu). To achieve the maximum TIE resource for SyncJack
entities, the SyncJack-Extended-Scaled license may be enabled by selecting the
Maintenance application, expanding the Administration and Software Licensing entities,
entering a right click on the Feature Management and selecting Edit Feature.

In addition to configuring SyncJack options, TIE history stats are available in the
SyncJack application.

Clock Accuracy Parameters

Create / Edit a Clock Probe
A Clock Probe may be created by selecting the SyncJack icon on the Tool Bar or
selecting SyncJack from the Application menu, expanding System, NE-1 and Clock
Accuracy in the Selection Tree, entering a right click on the Clock Probes entity and
selecting Create Clock Probe. To edit an existing Clock Probe, enter a right click on the
Clock Probe entity (CLOCK PROBE-1-1) and select Edit.

To delete a Clock Probe, enter a right click on the Clock Probe entity (CLOCK PROBE-1-
1) and select Delete, then select OK.

Table 162: Create/Edit Clock Probe Parameter Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Application Rules Defaults
Clock Probe
Clock Probe Index. Number is automatically indexed, but is
Index (Create 1-2
user editable.
only)
A text and/or number string the user enters to uniquely up to 15 characters
Name identify this entity. This string can be up to 15 printable
ASCII characters long. (blank)
PPS-1-1-1-1
CLK-1-1-1-1
SYNC-1-1-1-1
BITS IN-1-1-1-1
TS-1-1
PPS-1-1-1-2
Defines the reference source for the Clock Probe. Refer-
Reference ACCESS PORT-1-1-1-3
ences available are presented in a drop-down list.
ACCESS PORT-1-1-1-4
ACCESS PORT-1-1-1-5
ACCESS PORT-1-1-1-6
NETWORK PORT-1-1-1-1
NETWORK PORT-1-1-1-2
GPS-1-1-1-1

1080 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 162: Create/Edit Clock Probe Parameter Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Application Rules Defaults
QL-NONE
Defines the expected Quality Level of the selected ref- QL-PRC
Reference Expec-
erence for the Clock Probe. Available QL levels are presen- QL-SSU-A
ted QL
ted in a drop-down list. QL-SSU-B
QL-EEC1
PPS-1-1-1-1
CLK-1-1-1-1
SYNC-1-1-1-1
BITS IN-1-1-1-1
TS-1-1
Defines the source of the clock to be measured by the
PPS-1-1-1-2
Source Clock Probe. Sources available are presented in a drop-
ACCESS PORT-1-1-1-3
down list.
ACCESS PORT-1-1-1-4
ACCESS PORT-1-1-1-5
ACCESS PORT-1-1-1-6
NETWORK PORT-1-1-1-1
NETWORK PORT-1-1-1-2
Frequency
Source Type Selection for measuring frequency or phase.
Phase
G823 E1 Ssu
G823 E1 Sec
G823 E1 Traffic
G823 Pdh
G824 T1 Sync
G824 T1 Traffic
G8261 E1 Case 1
G8261 T1 Case 1
G8261 E1 Case 2
Define the predefined MTIE Mask to use for measurement. G8261 EEC Opt1
MTIE Mask
Choices are presented in a drop-down list. G8263
G8263 temp
G8272 PRTC
G8261 1
G8262 EEC Opt1
G8262 EEC Opt1 temp
G8262 EEC Opt2
G8262 EEC Opt1 Tolerance
G8273 2
G8271 1
The margin percentage to be applied to the selected MTIE
Mask Margin (%) 0 - 100
Mask. Range is 0 to 100.
Raw Data Col- Enables or disables Raw Data to be sent to a remote Raw Enabled
lection Data Collection server. Disabled
Measurement Frequency
Selects the measurement Type.
Type Phase

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 1081

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Clock Analysis Parameters

Create / Edit a PTP Clock Probe
A PTP Clock Probe may be created by selecting the SyncJack icon on the Tool Bar or
selecting SyncJack from the Applications menu, expanding System, NE-1 and Clock
Analysis in the Selection Tree, entering a right click on the PTP Clock Probes entity and
selecting Create PTP Clock Probe. To edit an existing PTP Clock Probe, entering a right
click on the PTP Clock Probe entity (PTP CLOCK PROBE-1-1) and select Edit.

To delete a PTP Clock Probe, enter a right click on the PTP Clock Probe entity (PTP
CLOCK PROBE-1-1) and select Delete, then select OK.

Table 163: Create/Edit PTP Clock Probe Parameter Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
PTP Clock Probe
Index PTP Clock Probe Index. Number is automatically indexed,
1-4
but is user editable.
(Create only)
A text and/or number string to user enters to uniquely 1 - 15 characters
Name identify this entity. This string can be up to 15 printable
ASCII characters long. (blank)
Identifies the PTP Flowpoint used by the PTP Clock Probe.
(drop-down list of provisioned
PTP Flowpoint A drop-down list of the provisioned flowpoints available for
PTP Flow Points)
use is provided.
Defines whether the PTP Clock Probe uses IPv4 or IPv6. IPv4
IP Version For the current release, only IPv4 is supported. Selection is
from a drop-down list. (drop-down list)
Entry for the IP address of the Master Clock. Entry is a valid
IPv4 or IPv6 address according to the IP Version entry. For
Master IP
the current release, only IPv4 is supported. If the PTP Flow [Link]
Address
Point is set to OC Slave, then the Master IP Address must
be configured the same as the SOOC.
Entry for the IP Address of the Slave Clock. Entry is a valid
IPv4 or IPv6 address according to the IP Version entry. For
Slave IP Address the current release, only IPv4 is supported. If the PTP Flow [Link]
Point Type is set to OC Slave, then the Slave IP Address
must be configured the same as the SOOC.
Direction of PTP Clock Probe operation.

l If the Flow Point Type of the associated PTP Flow Point Slave to Master
is set to OC Slave, then Slave to Master or Master to
Direction Slave may be selected.
l If the Flow Point Type of the associated PTP Flow Point
is set to OC Master, then only Slave to Master selection Master to Slave
is allowed.

1082 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 163: Create/Edit PTP Clock Probe Parameter Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
CLK-1-1-1-1
SYNC-1-1-1-1
BITS IN-1-1-1-1
TS-1-1
PPS-1-1-1-1
PPS-1-1-1-2
Defines the reference source for the PTP Clock Probe.
Reference ACCESS PORT-1-1-1-3
References available are presented in a drop-down list.
ACCESS PORT-1-1-1-4
ACCESS PORT-1-1-1-5
ACCESS PORT-1-1-1-6
NETWORK PORT-1-1-1-1
NETWORK PORT-1-1-1-2
GPS-1-1-1-1
QL-NONE
Defines the expected Quality Level of the selected ref- QL-PRC
Reference Expec-
erence for the PTP Clock Probe. Available QL levels are QL-SSU-A
ted QL
presented in a drop-down list. QL-SSU-B
QL-EEC1
G823 E1 Ssu
G823 E1 Sec
G823 E1 Traffic
G823 Pdh
G824 T1 Sync
G824 T1 Traffic
G8261 E1 Case 1
G8261 T1 Case 1
G8261 E1 Case 2
Defines the predefined MTIE Mask to use for meas- G8261 EEC Opt1
MTIE Mask
urements. Choices are presented in a drop-down list. G8263
G8263 temp
G8272 PRTC
G8261 1
G8262 EEC Opt1
G8262 EEC Opt1 temp
G8262 EEC Opt2
G8262 EEC Opt1 Tolerance
G8273 2
G8271 1
The margin percentage to be applied to the selected MTIE
Mask Margin (%) 0 - 100
Mask. Range is from 0 to 100.
Raw Data Col- Enables or disables Raw Data to be sent to a remote Raw Disabled
lection Data Collection server. Enabled
Measurement Frequency
Selects the measurement type.
Type Phase

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 1083

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Edit Telecom Slave Analysis Parameters (for future)

A Telecom Slave Analysis may be edited by selecting the SyncJack icon on the Tool Bar
or selecting SyncJack from the Applications menu, expanding System, NE-1 and Clock
Analysis in the Selection Tree, entering a right click on the Telecom Slave entity (TS-1-1)
and Select Edit Telecom Slave Analysis.

To edit thresholds, enter a right click on the Telecom Slave entity (TS-1-1) AND select
Edit Thresholds.

Table 164: Edit Telecom Slave Analysis

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
G823-PDH-Traffic
Frequency Recov- Down-down list to select the desired frequency recovery
G823-PDH-Sync
ery Target target.
G8261.1-Output-Wander
Phase Recovery Enter the desired phase recovery target. Range is from 1 1 - 100000
Target to 100,000 nanoseconds. Default is 500. 500

1084 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

PTP Network Analysis Parameters

Create / Edit a PTP Network Probe
A PTP Network Probe may be created by selecting the SyncJack icon on the Tool Bar or
selecting SyncJack from the Applications menu, expanding System, NE-1 and PTP
Network Analysis in the Selection Tree, entering a right click on the PTP Network Probes
entity and selecting Create PTP Network Probe. To edit an existing PTP Network Probe,
enter a right click on the PTP Network Probe entity (PTP NETWORK PROBE-1-1) and
select Edit.

To delete a PTP Network Probe, enter a right click on the PTP Network Probe entity
(PTP NETWORK PROBE-1-1) and select Delete, then select OK.

Table 165: Create/Edit PTP Network Probe Parameter Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Application Rules Defaults
PTP Network
PTP Network Probe Index. Number is automatically
Probe Index 1 -2
indexed, but is user editable.
(Create only)
A text and/or number string the user enters to uniquely 1 - 15 characters
Name identify this entity. This string can be up to 15 print-
able ASCII characters long. (blank)
Identifies the PTP Flowpoint used by the PTP Net-
(drop-down list of provisioned
PTP Flowpoint work Probe. A drop-down list of the provisioned flow-
PTP Flowpoints)
points available for use is provided.
Defines whether the PTP Network Probe uses IPv4 or IPv4
IP Version IPv6. For the current release, only IPv4 is supported.
Selection is from a drop-down list. (drop-down list)
Entry for the IP address of the Master Clock. Entry is
a valid IPv4 or IPv6 address according to the IP Ver-
Master IP Address [Link]
sion entry. For the current release, only IPv4 is sup-
ported.
Entry for the IP address of the Slave Clock. Entry is a
valid IPv4 or IPv4 address accordingly to the IP Ver-
Slave IP Address [Link]
sion entry. For the current release, only IPv4 is sup-
ported.
CLK-1-1-1-1
SYNC-1-1-1-1
BITS IN-1-1-1-1
TS-1-1
PPS-1-1-1-1
Defines the reference source for the PTP Network PPS-1-1-1-2
Reference Probe. References available are presented in a drop- ACCESS PORT-1-1-1-3
down list. ACCESS PORT-1-1-1-4
ACCESS PORT-1-1-1-5
ACCESS PORT-1-1-1-6
NETWORK PORT-1-1-1-1
NETWORK PORT-1-1-1-2
GPS-1-1-1-1

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 1085

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 165: Create/Edit PTP Network Probe Parameter Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Application Rules Defaults
QL-NONE
Defines the expected Quality Level of the selected ref- QL-PRC
Reference Expec-
erence for the PTP Network Probe. Available QL QL-SSU-A
ted QL
levels are presented in a drop-down list. QL-SSU-B
QL-EEC1
Residual Packet Delay Variation (RPDV), forward, 1 - 4294967295
RPDV fw Low (ns)
low (in nanoseconds). 200
Residual Packet Delay Variation, forward, medium (in 1 - 4294967295
RPDV fw Medium nanoseconds). Must be higher than the RPDV fw Low
setting and lower than the RPDV fw High setting. 500
RPDV fw High Residual Packet Delay Variation, forward, high (in 1 - 4294967295
(ns) nanoseconds). 2000
RPDV rev Low
Residual Packet Delay Variation, reverse, low (in 1 - 4294967295
(ns)
nanoseconds). 200

RPDV rev Medium Residual Packet Delay Variation, reverse, medium (in
nanoseconds). Must be higher than the RPDV rev 1 - 4294967295
(ns)
Low setting and lower than the RPDV rev High set- 500
ting.
RPDV rev High Residual Packet Delay Variation, reverse, high (in
1 - 4294967295
(ns) nanoseconds).
2000
FPP Cluster 1 - 4294967295
Range - Assured Packet Delay Variation Assured (in nanoseconds)
(ns) 25000
FPP Cluster 1 - 4294967295
Range - Satisfied Packet Delay Variation Satisfied (in nanoseconds)
(ns) 150000

Scheduled SyncJack Activity Settings

The following section describes scheduled SyncJack activities option settings. A
scheduled SyncJack is invoked by selecting the SyncJack icon on the Tool Bar or
selecting SyncJack from the Applications menu, expanding the system folder in the
Selection Tree, entering a right click on SyncJack Schedules and selecting Create
Schedule. Default settings are identified in bold. Up to 10 SyncJack Schedules may be
created.

Table 166: SyncJack Schedule Configuration Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults

Identification
Schedule Index An Identifier value used to uniquely identify this
1-255
(Create Schedule only) SyncJack Schedule.

1086 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 166: SyncJack Schedule Configuration Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Activity identifier (1 to 15 ASCII characters). This
up to 15 characters
Activity ID is a user specified unique identifier associated
(blank)
with a Probe, and is not a mandatory entry.
Schedule Parameters
Define schedule type as a one time or periodic
Schedule Type execution. The current release only supports One One Shot
Shot scheduling.
Activate either an immediate SyncJack or future Now
Start Time Buttons
(scheduled) SyncJack. Future
Specifies the interval between subsequent runs
Periodic Interval (secs) (in seconds). This option is only available if Sched-
1 to 4,294,967,295
(future) ule Type of Periodic is selected. This option is not
available in the current release.
Define the duration as continuous or a fixed time Forever
Duration Buttons (in seconds). Only applicable if Schedule Type of
One Shot is selected. Fixed
Define the duration in seconds. Valid entries are 0
through 9,999,999,999 (seconds). However, when 1 - 9,999,999,999 (sec)
Duration (secs) the entered value is equal to or larger than
4,294,967,295, the system will automatically (blank)
Entry Window
save the duration to “Forever”.
The date in format: yyyy-mm-dd and the time.
When cursor is placed in data entry window and
mouse click is entered, a calendar selection
yyyy-mm-dd
appears, allowing date selection. Entry selection
must be the current date or greater. This option is
only applicable if Future start time is selected.
Define the duration in hours, minutes and seconds
Start Time Entry Windows
in format: hh:mm:ss (24-hour clock time entry).
When cursor is placed in data entry window and
mouse click is entered, a start time drop down
hh:mm:ss
selectable menu appears, in 15 minute segments.
Entry selection must be greater than the current
time. This option is only applicable if Future start
time is selected.
Selects the Probes that belong to this SyncJack
schedule. To add a Probe, select a Probe from the
Schedule Probes list. Multiple Probes may be
Any available probes will
selected. Probes may be deselected by clicking
be displayed in the
on the Probe once again before hitting the OK but-
Schedule SJ Test Items Schedule SJ test Items
ton. Only previously created Probes that are not
list as a checkbox
used for another Scheduled Activity are available
selection
for selection. Once a schedule has been created,
it cannot be edited. It must be deleted and re-cre-
ated with the desired new parameters.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 1087

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Result Analysis
Configure MTIE Comparison Parameters
Result Analysis may be configured by selecting the SyncJack icon on the Tool Bar or
selecting SyncJack from the Applications menu, expanding System, NE-1 and Result
Analysis in the Selection Tree, entering a right click on the MTIE Comparison entity and
selecting Configure.

Table 167: Configure MTIE Comparison Analysis

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
G823 E1 Ssu
G823 E1 Sec
G823 E1 Traffic
G823 Pdh
G824 T1 Sync
G824 T1 Traffic
G8261 E1 Case 1
G8261 T1 Case 1
G8261 E1 Case 2
Define the predefined MTIE Mask to use for measurements.
MTIE Mask G8261 EEC Opt1
Choices are presented in a drop-down list.
G8263
G8263 temp
G8272 PRTC
G8261 1
G8262 EEC Opt1
G8262 EEC Opt1 temp
G8262 EEC Opt2
G8262 EEC Opt1
Tolerance
Any available probes
Selects the Probes that have been previously scheduled. To
Test Result Entity will be displayed in the
add a Probe, select a Probe from the Test Result Entity list.
Checkbox Test Result list as a
Multiple Probes (up to 4) may be selected.
checkbox selection

1088 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Edit Raw Data Collection Parameters

Raw Data Collection may be edited by selecting the SyncJack icon on the Tool Bar or
selecting SyncJack from the Applications menu, expanding System and NE-1 in the
Selection Tree, entering a right click on the Raw Data Collection entity and selecting Edit
Raw Data Server.

Table 168: Edit Telecom Slave Analysis

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Drop-down list to select the desired File Transfer Method. FTP
File Transfer
The desired protocol must be enabled at the System level SCP
Method
(see System Configuration Options and Rules). SFTP
Server IP The IP Address of the Raw Data Server. [Link]
User ID The User ID of the Raw Data Server. (empty)
User Password The User Password of the Raw Data Server. (empty)

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 1089

Factory Default Configuration Settings

SAT Configuration Options and Rules

The following section describes Service Activation Testing (SAT) option settings. The
options described in this section are performed using the SAT application (located on the
Tool Bar or selectable via the Application menu).

Edit SAT Control

The NE provides a default SAT Control Entity and only one SAT Control entity is
supported per system. A SAT Control entity may edited only and may not be deleted. To
Edit a SAT Control entity, right click on the entity and select Edit.

Table 169: Create/Edit SAT Control Parameter Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Name the SAT Control entity with a string of up to 16 ASCII
Name (blank)
characters.
Select the test mode. In unidirectional mode (one way), the
SAT Control end need negotiate with the remote SAT
One Way
Responder end before starting transmitting test frame. In
this case, the SAT Responder Control should be enabled at
Test Mode
the Responder MEP. In round-trip mode (two way), the SAT
Control end does not need negotiation with the remote SAT
Two Way
Responder end; instead a loopback should be initiated on
proper port or VID at the Responder end.
Enable or disable overriding FLPDU VLAN Tag by spe-
cifying explicit user configurable Ethertype and VLAN for
FLPDU: if set to Enabled, user may configure Ethertype and
VLANs (up to 3 layers) and ADVA specific TLVs are used to Disabled
convey VLAN information during negotiation between con-
FLPDU Tag Over- trol end and responder end; if set to Disabled, SCM mes-
ride sage’s Ethertype and VID will be used for FLPDU
generation and monitoring.

Note that if a SAT Test Stream is associated with a service Enabled

based Up MEP, this option in associated SAT Control must
be Enabled to allow customized FLPDU Vlan Tag on SAT
Test Stream.
Select the desired test procedures by selecting or unselect CIR
the checkbox next to each test [Link] default, CIR, EIR, EIR
Test Procedure List
Policing and Performance tests are all selected. CBS and Policing
DBS are not supported in current release. Performance
CIR Test Step Dur- 1 - 60 (sec)
Configure the duration for CIR step test.
ation 20
Number of CIR Configure the number of steps that the CIR Test will per-
1 - 10
Test Step form.
1 - 86400 (sec)
Test Duration Configure the duration for EIR or Policing test.
20
Performance Test Configure the duration for Performance test. Suggested val- 1 - 1440 (min)
Duration ues are 15 min, 120 min and 1440 min. 15

1090 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Create/Edit SAT Test Stream

Up to four SAT Test Streams are supported per system in GE11xPro. The test streams
may belong to different flows, or same flow but different COS depending on the VID and
priority in the stream.

A SAT Test Stream is created by entering a right click on the SAT Control entity and
selecting Create SAT Test Stream. To edit an existing SAT test stream, expanding the
SAT Control entity, entering a right click on the desired test stream and selecting Edit. To
delete a SAT test stream, enter a right click on the desired test stream and selecting
delete.

Table 170: Create/Edit SAT Test Stream Parameter Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
SAT Test Stream The index number of the test stream to be created. The sys-
1- 8
Index tem will automatically assign it in order.
Name the test stream with a string up to 64 ASCII char-
Name (blank)
acters.
ACCESS PORT-1-1-
Select the associated port of the flow the test stream is to 1-3
test. Since the four test stream can only be used to test the
Port (dropdown list of
different flows or different COS under the same flow, the
port specified in different test stream should be consistent. available Ethernet
ports)
Select the local UP MEP EID associated with the flow to be
tested. The MEP may be port based Up MEP, VID based
Up/Down MEP or service based Up MEP.

The Local MEP is used to initiate control protocol to nego-

tiate with remote SAT Responder end and run Delay Meas-
urement (DM).
(dropdown list of
Local MEP Note that if a SAT Test Stream is associated with a service available MEP EIDs on
based Up MEP, the “FLPDU Tag Override” option in the selected Port)
associated SAT Control must be Enabled. The system only
supports customized VLAN tag (or untagged) on SAT Test
Stream for service based Up MEP. Note that the system
allows running SAT tests on MEPs that are associated with
probes without having to delete the probes, given that the
probes are not included in any schedule (see Provision an
ESA Schedule for how to edit an ESA schedule).
Destination MEP Select using MEP Id or MAC Address to identify the des- MEP Id
Type tination MEP. MAC Address
Enter the ID of the destination MEP used to terminate con-
trol protocol and run Delay Measurement, if Destination 0
Destination MEP
MEP Type is MAC Id. The Destination MEP may be port
ID (valid MEP ID number)
based Up MEP, VID based Up/Down MEP or service
based Up MEP.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 1091

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 170: Create/Edit SAT Test Stream Parameter Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Enter the MAC address of the destination MEP used to ter-
minate control protocol and run delay measurement. if
Destination MEP’s
Destination MEP Type is MAC Address. The Destination [Link]
MAC Address
MEP may be port based Up MEP, VID based Up/Down
MEP or service based Up MEP.
Select the desired test direction of this test stream. The test
direction has no effect on the settings on SAT Control end
and the SAT Responder end. In one-way mode, the different
test direction only affects the FLPDU transmission dir- Forward
ection. In two-way mode, this option should be set to For-
Direction ward, as FLPUD frames transmission are initiated at the
Control End.

A “One-Way” SAT Control supports simultaneous Forward

and Backward tests on a same flow, given that the two test Backward
streams have same DMM Frame Size and DMM Interval
settings.
Define the frame size (in bytes) for Delay Measurement 64 - MTU
DMM Frame Size
Message (DMM). 128 (Bytes)
10 Milliseconds
100 Milliseconds
Select the desired DMM transmission interval, wherein 10
DMM Interval 1 Second
ms and 100 ms are not supported on GE112.
10 Seconds
1 Minute
Service Accept- SAT SAC PROFILE-1
Select the desired Service Acceptance Criteria (SAC) Pro-
ance Criteria Pro- (dropdown list of the
file for the CIR test result to compare against.
file four SAT SAC EIDs)
Specify the destination MAC address type for FLPDU. If
Unicast
Unicast is selected, FLPDU Destination MAC Address is
MAC Address the same as Destination MEP’s MAC Address; if Multicast
Multicast
Type is selected, a multicast MAC address should be entered; if
Broadcast is selected, system will set it to
Broadcast
[Link].
Specify the MAC Address for the destination the FLPDU
stream reaches. This value can be any or left blank if the
Control end and the Responder end are both ADVA equip-
ment and there are no other devices between them. If there
are layer-2 network devices between the Control end and
Destination MAC the Responder end, this value is the same as the Destin- [Link]
Address ation MEP’s MAC Address; If there are layer-3 network (valid MAC address)
devices between the Control end and the Responder end,
this value should be the MAC address of the forwarding port
at the next [Link] FLPDU stream’s destination MAC
address type is Broadcast, it’s automatically set to
[Link] by the system.

1092 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 170: Create/Edit SAT Test Stream Parameter Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
PRBS31
Payload Type Select the desired payload type for the test stream.
CUSTOM
Enter the customized payload as hex format, and up to 16
characters (0 -9, a - f, A - F) are supported. The input string
are converted to 8 bytes when filling in frame. The system 55AA55AA55AA55AA
Custom Payload
will fill zero to complete 8 bytes if user has not configured (hex)
enough bytes. This option is only available when Payload
Type is set to CUSTOM.
Customize the frame size (in bytes) or select fixed frame
Frame Size List 512 (Bytes)
size pattern by clicking on EMIX or EMIX Default button.
Set the test stream to either Color Aware or Color Blind.

l If Color Mode is set to Color Aware:

o DEI can be enabled or disabled.

o Green PCP will be used as the priority of green Color Aware

frames’ outer VLAN tag;
o Yellow PCP will be used as the priority of yellow
frames’ outer VLAN tag, the priority of SAT control
protocol PDU and the priority of SAT DMM/DMR.
Color Mode o Outer VLAN Tag specifies the outer VLAN ID of
FLPDU (included in flow’s VLAN member list)
l If Color Mode is set to Color Blind:
o DEI can only be disabled.

o Green PCP and Yellow PCP are not applicable Color Blind
o Outer VLAN Tag specifies the outer VLAN ID of
FLPDU (same as the flow’s VLAN member) and its
priority will be used by SAT control PDU,
DMM/DMR and FLPDU.
Enable/Disable the Drop Eligibility Indicator.

l In Color Aware mode:

o if DEI is enable:

n Generate Test Function (GTF) will set DEI to Disabled

0 for green frames, 1 for yellow frames;
Collect Test Function (CTF) will distinguish
color by (DEI || priority).

Use DEI
o if DEI is disabled:
n GTF will set DEI to 0 for both green and
yellow frames; CTF distinguishes color only
by priority.
l In Color Blind mode:
Enabled
o DEI can only be disabled.

n GTF will set DEI to 0 for both green and

yellow frames. CTF distinguishes color only
by priority
CIR Set the green FLPDU sending rate. 0 (Kbps)

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 1093

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 170: Create/Edit SAT Test Stream Parameter Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
EIR Set the yellow FLPDU sending rate. 0 (Kbps)
The M factor is used in test result validation for allowing the
effect of traffic policer’s CBS and EBS setting and test
time. Usually it equals to EBS/Test [Link] should
configure its value based on test experience. This para-
MFactor 128000 (bps)
meter will be used especially for policing test: the sum of
the average information rate for green and yellow frames in
test result should not exceed the sum of provisioned
FLPDU CIR, EIR and Mfactor.
Enter the priority of the green frames’ outer VLAN tag. Only
Green PCP 0 -7
applicable in color aware mode.
Enter the priority of the yellow frames’ outer VLAN tag,
which will also be used as the priority of the SAT Control
Protocol PDU and the priority of SAT DMM/DMR. Only
applicable in color aware [Link] “Use DEI” is enabled, Yel-
Yellow PCP 0 -7
low PCP equals to Green PCP, otherwise Yellow PCP is
retrieved by looking up flow’s ingress priority mapping table
or port based mapping table based on COS value and then
looking up port’s PCP decoding table reversely.
Outer VLAN Check Defines whether the Outer VLAN tag entry is allowed. Only Selected
Box selectable if the Untagged check box is unselected. Unselected
Outer VLAN Ether- Defines the Ethertype for the Outer VLAN tag. 0x8100 or
8100 (hex)
type 0x88a8.
Defines the VLAN tag and priority that will be associated
with the FLPDU. In Color Aware mode, the VLAN ID should 1 - 4094
be included in flow’s VLAN member list; in Color Blind
Outer VLAN Tag
mode, the VID should be same as flow’s VLAN member
and the priority will be used by SAT control PDU, 0-7
DMM/DMR and FLPDU.
Inner VLAN1 Defines whether the Inner VLAN1 tag entry is allowed. Only Selected
Check Box selectable if the Untagged check box is unselected. Unselected
Inner VLAN1 Ether-
Defines the Ethertype for the Inner VLAN1 tag. 8100 (hex)
type
Defines the VLAN tag and priority that will be associated 1 - 4094
Inner VLAN1 Tag
with FLPDU Inner VLAN1 Tag. 0-7
Inner VLAN2 Defines whether the Inner VLAN2 tag entry is allowed. Only Selected
Check Box selectable if the Untagged check box is unselected. Unselected
Inner VLAN2 Ether-
Defines the Ethertype for the Inner VLAN2 tag. 8100 (hex)
type
Defines the VLAN tag and priority that will be associated 1 - 4094
Inner VLAN2 Tag
with FLPDU Inner VLAN2 Tag. 0-7

Edit SAC Profile

Up to four Service Acceptance Criteria profiles are supported per system. The SAC
Profile may be edited by entering a right click on the SAC Profile entity and selecting Edit.

1094 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 171: Create/Edit SAC Profile Parameter Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Name the SAC profile with a string of up to 64 ASCII char-
Name 1 -4
acters.
Specify the desired Frame Loss Ratio (FLR) for the test rest. 0 - 100
FLR If the FLR of the test cannot match the value as specified in
SAC profile criteria, the test fails. 5
Specify the desired Frame Transmission Delay (FTD) for the 0 - 10000000
FTD test result. If the max Frame Delay cannot match with the
value as specified in SAC profile criteria, the test fails. 300
Specify the desired Frame Delay Variance (FDV) for the test 0 -10000000
FDV result. If the max Frame Delay Variance cannot match the
value as specified in SAC profile criteria, the test fails. 300

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 1095

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Create/Edit SAT Test Stream Wizard

The wizard provided on GUI can guide user to create a SAT Test Stream by four steps.
However, it is not supported to create SAT Test Stream in Down direction (Down MEP)
by the wizard. A SAT Test Stream Wizard can be created by entering a right click on SAT
Control and selecting “Create SAT Test Stream Wizard”.

Table 172: Create/Edit SAT Test Stream Wizard Parameter Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Select the associated port of the flow the test stream is to ACCESS PORT-1-1-1-
test. Since the four test stream can only be used to test 3
Port the different flows or different COS under the same flow,
the port specified in different test stream should be con- (dropdown list of
sistent. available Ethernet ports)
The flow EIDs associated with the selected Port will
(dropdown list of port’s
Flow appear in the dropdown list. Manually select the desired
associated flows)
flow.
The local MEP associated (if provisioned) with the selec-
(dropdown list of port’s
Local MEP ted Port will appear automatically. Currently only Up MEP
associated Up MEPs)
is supported in wizard.
Select the desire Destination MEP Type to show. Note MEP Id
Destination MEP
that the Destination MEP Type for different SAT Streams
Type MAC Address
must be the same under the same SAT Control.
If Destination MEP Type is MEP Id, the destination MEP (dropdown list of
Destination MEP
(if provisioned) ID of the selected Local MEP will appear selected local MEP’s
ID
automatically. peers)
If Destination MEP Type is MAC Address, the Destin-
Destination MEP’s ation MEP ID dropdown list will become non-editable, and
[Link]
MAC Address the Destination MEP’s MAC Address will show all-zero
as default, thus, user need to enter manually.
The COS of the selected Flow will be automatically
COS checked. For port-based EPL flow, COS0 will always be COS0
checked.
This name is generated automatically by the combination (a string of up to 64
NAME
of flow alias and COS value, e.g. fl1-Cos0. characters)
The CIR value mapping to the corresponding flow and cos (CIR of corresponding
CIR
to be tested will be imported automatically. cos)
The EIR value mapping to the corresponding flow and cos (EIR of corresponding
EIR
to be tested will be imported automatically. cos)
The Color Mode setting mapping to the corresponding Color Aware
Color Mode
flow and cos to be tested will be imported automatically. Color Blind
Green PCP is gotten via looking up FP’s ingress priority
mapping table or port based mapping table based on COS
Green PCP 0
value and then looking up Port’s PCP decoding table
reversely.
If “Use DEI” is enabled, then Yellow PCP equals to Green
PCP, otherwise, Yellow PCP is gotten via looking up
Yellow PCP FP’s ingress priority mapping table or port based mapping 0
table based on COS value and then looking up Port’s
PCP decoding table reversely.

1096 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 172: Create/Edit SAT Test Stream Wizard Parameter Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
This value is retrieved from Port’s attribute “Rx DEI
Use DEI Enabled
Action”.
MFactor Default as 128,000 bps. 128,000 (bps)
Dropdown list of DMM Priority. This value is retrieved by
DMM Priority looking up flow’s ingress priority mapping table or port 0
based mapping table based on COS value.
DMM Interval Dropdown list of DMM Intervals. 1 Second
DMM Frame Size Default as 128 Bytes. 128 (B)
Select the test direction of this test stream in the drop- Forward
Direction
down list. Default is Forward. Backward
SAC Dropdown list of available SAC Profile EIDs. SAT_SAC_Profile_1
Unicast
Dest MAC Type Dropdown list of available Destination MAC Type. Multicast
Broadcast
User need manually enter a valid multicast MAC address
Dest MAC [Link]
if Dest MAC Type is Multicast.
Dropdown list of available Payload Types. Default is PPBS31
Payload Type
PPBS31. CUSTOM
Custom Payload Only editable when Payload Type is CUSTOM. 55AA55AA55AA55AA
The list of FLPDU frame sizes. User may click EMIX or
Frame Size List 512 (B)
Default button. Default is 512.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 1097

Factory Default Configuration Settings

TWAMP Configuration Options and Rules

TWAMP (Two Way Active Measurement Protocol) provides the following:

l A standard IP-based, inter-operable performance measurement protocol that can

determine performance between two end points in a routed network
l Measurement protocol that is handled as user traffic by the intermediate routers
yielding accurate end-to-end performance measurements

Current implementation:

TWAMP Controller and Responder with Controller having Control-Client Light

and Session-Sender and Responder with Server Light and Session-Reflector
(supports one-way loss)

Create /Edit TWAMP IP Interface

Table 173: Create/Edit TWAMP IP Interface Parameter Settings
Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
IP Interface Name. The IP Interface Name is how (15 alpha/numeric
Session Senders and Session Reflectors are linked characters)
Name (Create only)
to a port, so each name should be unique and easily
identified. (blank)
A drop down list of available ports to associate with
Associated Port (Create this IP interface. Each configured IP interface can
(drop-down list)
only) only be associated with one port, and the setting is
not editable.
(valid IPv4 address)
IPv4 Address A valid IPv4 Address
[Link]
(valid IPv4 mask)
IPv4 Mask A valid IPv4 Mask
[Link]
The MTU setting for this IP interface. The default is 256-1500
MTU 1500, but the user may edit this to a value between
256 and 1500. 1500

1098 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

TWAMP Control Client Operations

Table 174: Create / Edit TWAMP Control Client Parameter Settings
Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults

Create / Edit Control Client

Control Client ID An entity identifier for a specific Control Client. The GUI 1-10
automatically indexes to the next available number, but
(Create only) the user can change it to any unused number. 1
A text and/or number string the user enters to uniquely
up to 64 characters
Alias identify this Reflector. This string can be up to 64 print-
(blank)
able ASCII characters long.
Associated Port A drop down list of available ports to associate with this Drop down list of
IP interface. Each configured IP interface can only be selectable ports
(Create only) associated with one port, and the setting is not editable. (Network Port-1-1-1-1)
Add / Remove Session Sender
A drop down list of available Session Senders. More
than 1 Session Sender can be associated with the same
Drop down list of
IP Interface, and more than 1 IP Interface can be asso-
Session Sender ID selectable Session
ciated with the same port, so the same Control Client
Senders
may control sessions on multiple IP Interfaces and/or
Session Senders on the same port simultaneously.
Start / Stop Session
When the Start or Stop Sessions selection is made, it starts (or stops) sessions on all Session Senders asso-
ciated with this Control Client.
Delete Control Client
To delete a Control Client, select it from the Configuration tab and then click on OK. A Control Client can not be
deleted if it has Session Senders associated with it.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 1099

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Create / Edit Session Sender Operations

Table 175: Create / Edit Session Sender Parameter Settings
Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults

Identification
Session Sender ID Drop down list of available IDs. The list automatically
indexes to the next available number, but the user can 1 to 10
(Create Only) change it to any available number.
Alias A text and/or number string the user enters to uniquely
up to 64 characters
identify this Reflector. This string can be up to 64 print-
(blank)
able ASCII characters long.
Configuration
User selects a configured TWAMP IP Interface name Drop down list of
IP Interface from a drop down list. Each IP interface is associated selectable IP interface
with a port. names
User enters a UDP port to use for this Session Sender.
The default value of 0 is not a valid UDP port assign-
ment. It is recommended that user be cautious while 1 to 65535
UDP Port
choosing the well known UDP Port inclusively between 1 0
and 1023 in case of possible service conflicts and drop
the port range from 0xA000 to 0xDFFF.
Session Reflector IPv4 User enters the IPv4 address associated with the Ses- valid IPv4 address
Address sion Reflector to use with this Session Sender. [Link]
User enters the UDP port assigned to the Session 1 to 65535
Session Reflector UDP Port
Reflector. 0
Differentiated Services Code Point associated with this
DSCP Value 0 to 63
Session Sender
1 to 4294967295
Number of Packets The number of packets included in each transmission.
0
87 to 1526
Packet Size Size in bytes of each packet.
0
10 to 3600000 (msec)
Packet Interval Time in milliseconds between packet transmissions.
100
Response timeout in seconds for a response from the 2 to 10 (sec)
Response Timeout
Session Reflector. 5
Schedule Information
Start time type for a session. Immediate starts when a Immediate
Start Time Type Start Sessions command is executed on the associated
Control Client. Relative is a value in [Link] and Relative
requires a ‘Time’ entry. Fixed requires the user to des-
ignate both a ‘Date’ and ‘Time’ for the session to start. Fixed
Date Only valid if Start Time Type is Fixed. yyyy-mm-dd
Time Only valid if Start Time Type is Fixed or Relative. hh:mm:ss
VLAN Configuration

1100 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 175: Create / Edit Session Sender Parameter Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Inner/Outer VLAN Select Inner and/or Outer VLAN operation via check box. (check box)
If check box is selected for Inner and/or Outer VLAN,
EtherType 8100 (hex)
enter the desired EtherType.
If check box is selected for Inner and/or Outer VLAN, 0 to 4095, 0 to 7
Tag
enter the desired Tag and priority. 4095-0
History Configuration
History Bins Number of History Bins (up to a maximum of 32 bins). 1 to 32

(Create only) This is the amount of time between history bins. 8

History Distribution Bins Number of History Distribution Bins (up to a maximum of 1 to 32
(Create only) 32 bins). 8
1 Minute
History Interval 5 Minutes
History Interval (in minutes). 10 Minutes
(Create only) 15 Minutes
60 Minutes
History Distribution Interval (in minutes). This is the 1 Minute
History Distribution Interval amount of time between history distribution bins. 5 Minutes
10 Minutes
(Create only)
15 Minutes
60 Minutes
Statistics and Distribution
Min.
-2147483647 to
Two Way Delay, One Way Minimum delay threshold (in microseconds). The entry 2147483647
S2R Delay, must be less than the entry for Max. Two Way Delay.
Valid entry is -2147483647 to 2147483647. Default is 0
One Way R2S Delay,
One Way S2R PDV, or One dependent on the type of statistics and distribution.
-5000
Way R2S PDV
Max.
-2147483647 to
Two Way Delay, One Way Maximum delay threshold (in microseconds). The entry 2147483647
S2R Delay, must be greater than the entry for Min. Round Trip Delay.
Valid entry is -2147483647 to 2147483647. Default is 10000
One Way R2S Delay
One Way S2R PDV, or One dependent on the type of statistics and distribution.
5000
Way R2S PDV
Bins

Two Way Delay, One Way

S2R Delay, Number of bins. 1-10
One Way R2S Delay, One
Way S2R PDV, or One Way
R2S PDV
Edit Thresholds

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 1101

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Table 175: Create / Edit Session Sender Parameter Settings

Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults
Right click on a TWAMP Session Sender ID from the Configuration tab and select ‘Edit Thresholds’. Edit the
desired the Monitor Type(s) and click on OK.

Clear History or Distribution Registers

Right click on a TWAMP Session Sender ID from the Configuration tab and select ‘Clear PM (or Dist.)
Registers’. Select the desired entity from the ‘Clear’ drop down list and click on OK.

Delete Session Sender

To delete a Session Sender, select it from the Configuration tab and then click on OK. A Session Sender can not
be deleted if it is associated with a Control Client.

1102 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A

 Factory Default Configuration Settings

TWAMP Server Operations

Table 176: TWAMP Server Parameter Settings
Option Settings /
Parameter Description / Applicable Rules
Defaults
Create/Edit
Server ID Drop down list of available IDs. The list automatically indexes to 1-10
the next available number, but the user can change it to any
(Create only) available number. 1
A text and/or number string the user enters to uniquely identify
up to 64 characters
Alias this Reflector. This string can be up to 64 printable ASCII
(blank)
characters long.
Drop down list of
A drop down list of available ports to associate with this IP selectable ports
Associated Port
interface. Each configured IP interface can only be associated
(Create only) (Network
with one port, and the setting is not editable.
Port-1-1-1-1)
If a session on a Reflector associated with the server does not
Session Idle receive a test packet within this time, the session goes into an 1 to 65535 (secs)
Timeout idle state. This attribute is only applicable when the Status is 5
TWAMP Control Disabled.
If a session goes into an idle state (see Session Idle Timeout) the
session aging timeout begins. If the aging timeout expires before 1 to 65535 (secs)
Session Aging
a test packet is received by the Session Reflector, the session is
Timeout 900
stopped. This attribute is only applicable when the Status is
TWAMP Control Disabled.
Add/Remove Session Reflector
Drop down list of
Session Reflector
Drop down list of configured and available Session Reflector IDs selectable Session
ID
Reflectors
Delete Server
To delete a Server, select it from the Configuration tab and then click on OK. A Server can not be deleted if it is
associated with a Session Reflector.

FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A 1103

Factory Default Configuration Settings

Create/Edit/Delete TWAMP Session Reflector

Table 177: Create / Edit TWAMP Session Reflector
Description / Option Settings /
Parameter
Applicable Rules Defaults

Identification
Session Reflector ID
Drop down list of available IDs. 1 to 10
(Create Only)
Alias A text and/or number string the user enters to uniquely
up to 64 characters
identify this Reflector. This string can be up to 64 print-
(blank)
able ASCII characters long.
Configuration
User selects a configured TWAMP IP Interface name Drop down list of
IP Interface from a drop down list. Each IP interface is associated selectable IP
with a port. interface names
User enters a UDP port to use for this Session
Reflector. The default value of 0 is not a valid UDP port
assignment. The UDP Port at Session Reflector end
should match the UDP Port at Session Sender end. It 1 to 65535
UDP Port
is recommended that user be cautious while choosing 0
the well known UDP Port inclusively between 1 and
1023 in case of possible service conflicts and drop the
port range from 0xA000 to 0xDFFF.
Use Sender Sequence Enable/Disable using the Sender Session’s sequence Disabled
Number number. Enabled
Delete Reflector
To delete a Reflector, select it from the Configuration tab and then click on OK. A Reflector can not be
deleted if it is associated with a Server.

1104 FSP 150GE11xPro Provisioning and Operations - R9.2 - Issue:A